Gornell University Library 
Ithaca, Nem York 


BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME OF THE 


THE GIFT OF 


HENRY W. SAGE 


1891 


e date shows when this volume was taken. 


To renew this book copy the call No. and give to 
the librarian. 


HOME USE RULES 


All books subject to recall 
All borrowers must regis- 
ter in the library to borrow 
books for home use. 
All books must be re- 
turned at end of college 
year, for inspection and 


repairs. 


Limited books must be 
returned within the four 
week limit and not renewed. 


Students must return all 


books before leaving town. 


Officers should arrange for 
the return of books wanted 
during their absence from 
town. 


Volumes of periodicals 


* and of pamphlets are held 


in the library as much as 
possible. For special pur- 
poses they are given out for 
a limited time. 


Borrowers should not use 
theif library privileges for 
the*benefit of other persons. 

Books of special value 
and gift books, when the 
giver wishes it, are not 
allowed to circulate. 

Readers are asked to re- 
port all cases of books 
marked or mutilated. 


Do not deface books by 


marks and writing. 


Cornell University Library 


Q 115.N86 1898 


“wii 
3 1924 012 


| 


281 


089 


rwegian Arctic ex 


| 


olin, ovel 


Cornell University 


Library 


The original of this book is in 
the Cornell University Library. 


There are no known copyright restrictions in 
the United States on the use of the text. 


http:/Awww.archive.org/details/cu31924012281089 


REPORT 


OF THE 


SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC 
EXPEDITION IN THE “FRAM” 
| 1898-1902 


VOL. III. 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


; KRISTIANIA 
IN COMMISSION BY T. 0. BROGGER 


PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1911 


REPORT 


OF THE 


SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC 
EXPEDITION IN THE “FRAM” 
1898—1902 


VOL. III. 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-.SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


SSS 


KRISTIANIA 
IN COMMISSION BY T. 0. BROGGER 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1911 


XK 


5456 


HAA 2% 


No. 14. 


CONTENTS OF VOL. Ill. 


Pau. Buerkan: Ascidien. Mit 1 Tafel. (Gedruckt Méirz, 1908) 
Hyatmar Ditrtevsen: Annulata polychaeta. Taf. I—III. 
(Gedruckt Miéirz, 1909) . 

H. G. Simmons: A Revised List of this Flowering inate atid 
Ferns of North Western Greenland, with some short 
Notes about the Affinities of the Flora. (With one map in 
the text.) (Printed April, 1909) . 2... 

Hans Kiar: On the Bottom Deposits fase ‘the Second 
Norwegian Arctic Expedition in the “Fram”. (Printed 
I WOU kee dy a2 SSP) Ailes dhe dn he os se See 4 I oe 
G. O. Sars: Crustacea. (With 12 aati ~plaleay (Printed 
Jtines RIO! &. dy aes Ges ee ae a Ga Ak. 

H. G, Simmons: Stray (uteintons to the Pointy of Nor th 
Devon and some other Islands, Visited in 1900—1902. 
With one Map in the text and an alphabetical index to 
No. 2. Flora of Ellesmereland, No. 16, Plants of N. W. 
Greenland, and this paper. (Printed June, 1909)... . . 
James A. Grieg: Brachiopods and Molluscs, with a Suppie- 
ment to the Echinoderms. (With a Table.) (Printed 
October, 1909).. 2.248 edt nts zo Op ah eat? Ae kc yt 
Orro V. Darpisuire: Lichens Collected during the 2nd 
Norwegian Polar Expedition in 1898—-1902. With 2 
Plates. (Printed October, 1909) . 

Cart Buece: Petrographische Resultate der ten Prati 
Expedition. (Mitd Tafeln und Karten.) (Gedruckt October, 1910} 
Coyrap Fristept: Sponges from the Coast of Ellesmere- 
Land. (Printed October, 1909) p fee 
Freprik Incvarson: Die Treibhélzer sink dem Hilleswmene: 
Land. (Gedruckt June, 1910) . aR 

Ap. S. Jensen: Fishes. (Printed December, 1910) . 

A. AppeLLér: Pycnogoniden. (Gedruckt November, 1910) . . 
H. H. Gran: Phytoplankton. (Gedruckt Februar, 1911) 


1— 12 
1— 9 
1—110 
1: 2 
1s 47 
1— 36 
1— 45 
i & 
1— 38 
1S 
ey 
i+ 5 
oe 
1— 28 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM”, 1898—1902. No. 14. 


PAUL BJERKAN: 


ASCIDIEN 


(MIT 1 TAFEL) 


AT THE EXPENCE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN 


FUND FOR ‘THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1908 


D:: Material ist leider nicht sehr reich an Arten, hat aber in Ver- 
bindung mit einer Sammlung nordamerikanischer Ascidien im zoologischen 
Museum der Universitat zu Kristiania grosses Interesse, speziell fir die 
Ausbreitung vieler Arten. Viele Arten, die im Meere nérdlich von Eu- 
ropa ihre Heimat haben oder dort eingedrungen sind, findet man auch 
in Grénland und dem arktisch-amerikanischen Archipel oder an der Ost- 
-kiste von Nord-Amerika, sogar weit nach Siiden hinein. Wegen der 
speziellen Stromverhaltnisse des Eismeeres ist dies ja auch sehr natiir- 
lich. Die Eier und Larven der verschiedenen Ascidien lassen sich leicht 
mit dem Strome forttreiben, und wenn sie nur die fiir sie geeignete Was- 
sertemperatur vorfinden, machen sie ihre Entwicklung durch und wer- 
den sesshaft ebensogut weit von der Stelle, wo die Eltern befestigt waren, 
als in deren Nahe. Durch die Arbeiten von Travstept (1880) und Hart- 
MEYER: (1903) sind viele Arten, die friher vom nérdlichen Europa be- 
schrieben worden sind, auch fir Gronland und die benachbarten Meere 
nachgewiesen. Viele von diesen sind an den Kisten Nord-Asiens 
gefunden, und wenr man sie auch zwischen den Inseln des arktisch- 
amerikanischen Archipels findet, hat es keinen Zweck, ihre Zirkumpo- 
laritat in Abrede zu stellen. 

‘Die Ascidien der 2ten “Fram’-Expedition sind auf 76—79° N. B. 
und 75—90° W. L. (Greenwich), in den Sunden und Fyjorden, die von 
Smiths Sund gegen Westen und von Jones’ Sund gegen Norden in das 
Ellesmere Land eindringen, genommen. Speziell sind durch Dreggen an 
den Kusten von Simmons Halbinsel zwischen Gaasefjord und 
Helvedesporten viele Ascidien gefunden worden. Im Gaasefjord lag die 
“Fram” eingefroren in den zwei Wintern 1900—01 und 1901 --02. Uber 
die Meeresfauna dieses Fjords sagt Sverprup!): ,Bay (der Zoologe der 
Expedition) erzahlte, dass er niemals an irgend welcher Stelle in den 
arktischen Gegenden eine so reiche Fauna gefunden habe. Seine Funde 


1 Orro Sverprup, Nyt Land, vy, Il, p. 112. 


4 PAUL BJERKAN. [2ND ARC. EXP. FRAM 


waren in mehreren Beziehungen itberraschend. Schade nur, dass er 
nicht langere Zeit arbeiten konnte.“ Der letzte Passus zeigt, wie schwierig 
es ist, in den hocharktischen Gegenden mit der Dregge zu arbeiten. Die 
langste Zeit des Jahres deckt das Eis alles, und nur in den Monaten 
Juli und August, oder wenn man gliicklich ist, auch einige Tage im Sep- 
tember, kann man die See offen finden. Uber die Verhaltnisse der oben 
erwahnten Meeresstrasse Helvedesporten kann man in Simmons’ “Rapport’’!) 
lesen. Man sieht, wie der Strom hier sehr stark zwischen Jones’ Sund 
und der nérdlich hegenden Norskebugt’ zieht, Verhaltnisse, die speziell 
fir festsitzende Tiere sehr vorteilhaft sein miissen. Die Schwierigkeiten 
beim Dreggen waren aber sehr gross. Eis, Strom und Wind bewirkten, 
dass man nur an einzelnen vom Zufall bestimmten Stellen dreggen konnte. 
Dass das Material unter diesen Umstanden etwas liickenhaft werden 
musste, ist leicht zu verstehen. 

Das Material enthalt 6 Arten, die 5 Genera reprasentieren. Alle ge- 
héren zu den einfachen Ascidien und trotz sorgfaltiger Untersuchungen 
des tibrigen Materials, zum Beispiel der Balaniden, bin ich nicht im 
Stande gewesen, irgend eine ,Synascidien“-Kolonie zu finden. 

Wenn ich im folgenden die Arten naher bespreche, muss ich bemerken, 
dass von Synonymie des Platzes wegen nur das Notwendigste mitgenom- 
men ist. Ubrigens verweise ich auf Harrmeyers, »Ascidien der Arktis‘, 
wo die Synonymie aller arktischen Ascidien ausfihrlich behandelt ist. 
Wenn ich von dem obenerwahnten Verfasser abweiche, wird dies im 
Texte ausdricklich bemerkt. 

Hinsichtlich der naéheren Angaben der Fundstellen ist auf die Karten 
in Isacusen, ,,Astronomical und Geodetical Observations® (No. 5 dieses 
»Report“) hinzuweisen*). Um den Gebrauch der Karten zu erleichtern, 
schreibe ich wie in diesen Karten die Namen, die von der » Fram “-Expedi- 
tion gegeben sind, norwegisch, schicke aber eine Ubersetzung in deutscher 
und englischer Sprache voraus: 

Gaasefjord = Gansefjord = Geese F jord. 

Renbugten = Renntierbucht = Reindeer Bay. 

Helvedesporten = Hllenpforte = Hell Gate. 

Havnefjord = Hafenfjord = Harbour Fjord. 

Norskebugt = Norwegische Bueht = Norwegian Bay. 


' Orro Sverprvp, Nyt Land, v. II, p, 374. 
? Romer und Scuaupiyy, Fauna Arctica, v. II, 2, 


* Dieselben Karten, von Isacusen gezeichnet, sind auch in Orro Svervrup, Nyt 
Land, v. III zu finden. 


1898—1902, No. 14.] ASCIDIEN. 3) 


Fam: Halocynthiidae. 
Halocynthia (part.) Verriii, 1879. 


Halocynthia arctica (Hartm.) 


Syn: Cynthia echinata, Autores. 
1879, Halocynthia echinata, Verritt, p. 148. 
1903, s arctica, Harrmeyer, p. 190. 
Fundstelle: 


24 Juli, 1900, Havnefjord, 85 m. (am Winterhafen), 1 Expl. 

Diese Art ist von Harrmeyer (1899) von der H. echinata (L) als 
spezifisch arktisch ausgeschieden worden. Uber die nahere Synonymie 
siehe Hartmeyer (1903, p. 190). Eine dussere Higentiimlichkeit der Art 
sind nach dem erwahnten Verfasser die kreisférmig angeordneten Dornen 
mit einem langeren, peitschenférmigen Dorn in der Mitte. Ich habe doch 
ifters Exemplare vom nérdlichen Norwegen gefunden, die sowohl nach 
der Fundstelle als nach der inneren Organisation zu der vorliegenden 
Art gehérten, bei denen aber der zentrale Dorn und die regelmissige 
Anordnung der Dornen tiberhaupt fehlten. Das einzigste Expl. im Ma- 
teriale hatte typische Dornenanordnung, 7 Kiemensackfalten und Dor- 
salfalte mit zungenformigen Fortsatzen und ist demnach eine sichere H. 
arctica. 

Die Art ist friher im arktisch-amerikanischen Archipel, in der Banks- 
strasse, von Hartmeyer (1903) nachgewiesen worden, und da sie auch 
vom nérdlichen Europa und Asien (Sweperus 1887) bekannt ist, ist sie 
somit ganz zirkumpolar. 


Halocynthia aurantium (PALt.) 


Syn: Cynthia pyriformis (RaruKe), Autores. 
1879, Halocynthia ,, Verri.y, p. 147. 
1880, Cynthia papillosa, Traustept, p. 407. 
1908, Halocynthia aurantium, Harrmeyer, p. 195. 
Fundstelle: 

24 Juli, 1900, Havnefjord, 85 m. (am Winterhafen), 1 Expl. 

Diese arktische Art ist, wie durch zahlreiche Befunde sicher fest- 
gestellt worden, zirkumpolar. Die siidlichste Fundstelle ist an der Ost- 
kiiste von Nord-Amerika in der Massachusetts Bay (Verrixt, 1871), 
wo das kalte Wasser vom Norden eine weite Strecke siidwarts dringt. 


6 PAUL BJERKAN. [2nD ARC. EXP. FRAM 


An der europiischen Seite des Atlantischen Meeres geht sie nicht siid- 
licher als bis Vestfjorden in Norwegen. TRausTEDT (1880) hat sie aber 
auch von Island. 

Das Exemplar von Havnefjord ist von mittlerer Grosse, durch einen 
kurzen Stiel an einem Stein befestigt. Die Dornen sind bei weitem nicht 
so regelmissig, weder mit Bezug auf Anzahl noch auf Anordnung, wie 
man aus den Beschreibungen herausfinden kann. Nur hie und da wird 
man eine Platte finden mit zentralem Dorn, sonst streben die Dornen 
nach aussen ohne ausgesprochene Regelmassigkeit. Dasselbe habe ich 
bei Exemplaren von den verschiedensten Stellen gefunden. Speziell bei 
einigen Expl. von New-Foundland im zoologischen Museum der Universi- 
tat zu Kristiania habe ich die Dornen sehr riickgebildet gesehen. Die 
Tiere selbst sind gross und wohl ausgebildet, die Dornen aber sind klein 
und spéirlich vertreten, in einer Anzahl von 2 auf jeder Platte und 


dartiber. 
Fam: Styelidae. 
Styela Mac Leay, 1824. 
Styela rustica (L.) 
Syn: 1857, Cynthia rustica, Rink, p. 104. 
1871, s monoceros, VERRILL, p. 93. 
1879, Halocynthia rustica, Verrity, p. 147. 
19038, Styela - Harrmeyer, p. 217. 
Fundstellen: 
12 Juli, 1901, Bucht bei Landsend, ca. 35 m., 1 Expl. 


16 & 30 August, 1901, Gaasefjord, 13 m., 1 Expl. & 8 m., 2 Expl. 

Die Synonymie dieser Art ist etwas schwierig, da sie sehr oft mit 
anderen verwechselt worden ist. Der erste, der die in Frage kommenden 
Arten von Nordwest-Europa klar auseinander gebalten hat, ist J. Krer 
(1893). Hartmeyer (1903) hat seine Resultate bestatigt; da aber sein 
reiches Material aus den verschiedensten Teilen der nérdlichen Meere 
stammte, kamen viele verwandte Arten hinzu, und er fand es notwendig, 
die von Krar unter Styela gestellten Arten auf die alten Gattungen 
Styela, Dendrodoa und Styelopsis zu verteilen. Letzteres scheint mir 
auch sebr berechtigt zu sein, doch ist die Gattung Styelopsis méglicher- 
weise elwas schwach fundiert. Mit Riicksicht auf die vorliegende Art 
verweise ich auf die Zusaimmenstellung der verwechselten Arten bei 
Harrmeyer (1903, p. 222). Packarp’s Styela condylomata (1867, p. 277) 
von Labrador mit a square, truncate, corneous projektion between the two 


1898 1902, No. 14.| ASCIDIEN. (| 


orifices,“ spater von Verrut (1871) als S. monoceres (Moll.) bestimmt wor- 
den, ist dieselbe Art. Uberhaupt hat das Horn zwichen den Offnungen den 
Verfassern Schwierigkeiten verursacht. Von den vorliegenden Exemplaren 
war das eine aus Gaasefjord ohne Horn, hatte aber statt dessen eine 
Falte oder Verdickung des Mantels. 

Die Art scheint in den Meeresstrassen zwischen Grénland und dem 
arktisch-amerikanischen Archipel sehr haufig zu sein, im sibirischen Eis- 
meer ist sie auch gefunden worden (HELLER, 1878), wohl aber nicht nérd- 
lich von der Beringsstrasse, doch muss sie als zirkumpolar charakterisiert 
werden. 


Dendrodoa Mac Leay, 1824. 


Dendrodoa cylindrica n. sp. 
(Fig. 1—6). 

Korper: cylindrisch. 

Cellulosemantel: vorn gerunzelt, hinten glitter, aber schwach lings- 
gestreift. 

Tentakel: etwa 16, alternierend von 2 (3) Gréssen. 

Flimmerorgan: hufeisenformig. 

Kiemensack: alle Falten ausgebildet, aber verschieden stark, 1 
intermediares, inneres Liingsgefiiss, die grdssten Felder mit 
10—12 Kiemenspalten. 

Dorsalfalte: glattrandig, etwas gekraust. 

Darm: ziemlich lang, Magen kurz mit Blindsack, gestreift, links etwa 
10 Langsstreifen. 

Gonade: 4-dstig.. 


Fundstelle; 

12 Juli 1901, Bucht bei Landsend, ca 35 m., 2 Expl. 

Die beiden vorliegenden Exemplare. waren an Balanus crenatus 
befestigt. Das abgebildete Expl. (Fig. 1) hatte den Mantel in einen Stiel 
verlingert, der etwas seitlich vom Korper hinausging. Die Befestigung 
geht aber auch etwas auf die rechte Seite, ventral tiber. Das andere Expl. 
muss irgendwie im Leben eine Wunde bekommen haben. Auf der linken 

Seite war im Mantel ein grosses, rundes Loch mit eingewuchertem Rande, 
~ woran der Innenkérper festgewachsen war. 

Die Form des Korpers ist kurz cylindrisch, wird jedoch durch den 
Stiel etwas schief. Die Runzeln am vordersten Teil sind in der Haupt- 
sache peripherisch zu der Ingestionséffnung geordnet, und es ist sehr 
wahrscheinlich, dass die meisten durch Kontraktion des Tieres hervor- 


8 PAUL BJERKAN. [2ND ARC. EXP. FRAM - 


gerufen sind. Das andere Expl. ist auch hinten etwas runzlig. Die Lange 
der konservierten Tiere ist etwa 15 mm. Die Farbe ist in Alkohol 
weisslichgelb, wahrscheinlich sind sie im Leben etwas rétlich gewesen. 
Der Cellulosemantel ist zihe, aber wenig derb. 

Die Muskulatur des Innenkérpers ist nur schwach  entwickelt, 
doch befinden sich in der Nahe der Offnungen deutliche Laings- und Quer- 
ziige. In der Muskulatur sind kleine Kalkkérperchen zerstreut (Fig. 5). 
Sie reducieren sich mit Salzsiure unter Entwicklung von Kohlensaure (?) 
Ob sie Exkretionsprodukte reprasentieren, oder durch Parasiten hervor- 
gerufen sind, kann ich nicht entscheiden. Sie sind aber nur in der Mus- 
kulatur zu finden. Ich habe dergleichen bei der Familie der Styelidae 
friher nicht beobachtet. . 

Die Tentakel sind von verschiedener Grédsse. Die Anordnung 
scheint an einigen Stellen 2, an anderen 3 Gréssen anzudeuten. - 

Das Flimmerorgan hat eingebogene Fligel; die Offnung ist 
nach vorn. 

Der Kiemensack (Fig. 4) ist wohl entwickelt. Die Ordnung der 
Langsgefiisse ist rechts, vorn: . 

1, (etwa 10), 1, (7), 1, (8), 1, (4, 1. 

In den Falten reduciert sich ihre Anzahl nach hinten derart, dass 
zum Beispiel die 4te Falte, wie in Figure zu sehen ist, nur ein Langs- 
gefass hat. Die Quergefiasse zeigen 3 Ordnungen: I—II[—II—IN—I 
o. s. v. Die Anzahl der Kiemenspalten jedes Feldes ist sehr verschieden, 
7—12, hinten am geringsten. 

Der Darmkanal (Fig. 2) ist stark gebogen, aber nicht geknickt. 
Der Magen ist scharf abgesetzt, der Blindsack und die Falten deutlich 
zu sehen. Die 2 obersten Falten gehen langs vom Oesophagus bis zum 
Blindsack, die iibrigen gehen mehr schrige. Der After (Fig. 3) mit glat- 
tem, ausgebogenem Rande, dorsal eingeschnitten. 

Die Gonade ist bei beiden Expl. 4-astig. 

Systematisches: 

HartMeyer (1903) hat die Arten der arktischen Gattung Dendrodoa 
klar auseinander gelegt. Ich finde mit ihm, dass die Berechtigung der 
Gattung trotz Herpmans (1883) und J. Kuers (1893) Bedenken nicht 
in Abrede zu stellen ist. Erstgenannter unterschatzt tberhaupt den Wert 
der Geschlechtsorgane als systematisches Kennzeichen bei der Familie 
Styelidae. Dendrodoa bildet unter den arktischen Ascidien einen ausge- 
zeichnet gut begrenzten Formenkreis, und die stattliche Anzahl von 
8 Arten, die Harrmeyer aufmarschieren lasst, spricht fur sich selbst. 


1898—1902. No. 14.] ASCIDIEN. 9 


Mit einigem Zweifel stelle ich die neue Art auf nach den 2 mir vor- 
legenden Exemplaren. In mehreren Beziehungen sind sie aber von den 
bis jetzt beschriebenen Arten der Gattung so verschieden, dass ich bei 
dem jetzigen Stand des Wissens iiber Variation und Ausbreitung der 
Dendrodoa-Arten sie nicht unter irgend eine andere anbringen kann. 

Die alten Arten D. aggregata und D. adolphi sind durch mindestens 
2 intermediire Langsgefiisse und viel langeren Magen von der neuen zu 
halten. Die 2 Ritterschen Arten haben beide Magen ohne Falten, und 
D. uniplicata (Bonnevie, 1896) ist durch fortgeschrittene Rickbildung 
der Kiemensackfalten und eigenttimliche Gonade gekennzeichnet. Am 
meisten scheint die neue Art mit D. lineata (TRaustept, 1880) und 
kiikenthali (HartTMEYER, 1899) gemein zu haben. Von beiden unter- 
scheidet sie sich durch die kleine Anzahl der Tentakel, von der ersten 
auch durch Mangel an dusseren Langsleisten und durch konstante An- 
wesenheit der intermediiiren Lingsgefisse, von der zweiten durch die 
Form des Magens und Anzahl Aste der Gonade. Wenn dazu kommt, 
dass die beiden Arten bis jetzt nur als Lokalformen fir Spitzbergen und 
benachbarte Gegenden bekannt sind, so finde ich es zu bedenklich, die 
vorliegenden Tiere mit irgend welcher dieser Arten zu identificieren. 

Spatere Befunde werden mdglicherweise die Variationsgrenzen der 
in Frage kommenden Arten nach verschiedenen Richtungen hin erweitern. 
Zur Zeit ist es aber nicht leicht zu sagen, in welcher Beziehung die 
Diagnosen am konstantesten sind. 


Styelopsis TRaustepT, 1882. 
Styelopsis grossularia (BENEDEN). 
Syn: ? 1852, Cynthia gutta, Stimpson, p. 231. 
1880, Styela grossularia, Traustept, p. 416. 
Fundstelle: 

18 Juli 1901, Gaasefjord, ca. 60 m. (an der Miindung) 1. Expl. 

Die Art ist friher von Traustepr fiir Grénland nachgewiesen wor- 
den. Derselbe Verfasser hat spater (1882), wie mir scheint mit Recht, 
sie von Styela ausgeschieden und die neue Gattung Styelopsis gebildet. 
Jedenfalls ist sie eher zur Gattung Dendrodoa zu rechnen als zu Styela'. 


1 Nachdem dies schon im Druck ist, bin ich durch eine mir von Dr. HarrMeyer 
geschickte Arbeit darauf aufmerksam gemacht, dass dieser Autor und Dr. 
Micwartsen in ihren jiingsten Arbeiten die vorliegende Art zur Gattung Dendrodoa 
rechnen und folglich die Gattung Styelopsis unterdriicken. 


10 PAUL BJERKAN. (2ND ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Das Exemplar unter dem Materiale der ,Fram“ war an B. crenatus 
befestigt, ist sehr klein, nur 3mm. Diameter und wenig abgeflacht, etwa 
so hoch wie breit. 

Die Art ist mehr subarktisch, als arktisch, ist jedoch wahrscheinlich 
zirkumpolar, da sie von beiden Seiten gegen das offene Meer nordlich 
der Beringsstrasse vordringt. 

Wegen eines alten Exemplares der Cynthia gutta unter dem frither 
erwihnten Materiale im Universitatsmuseum zu Kristiania habe ich diese 
Art als fragliches Synonym aufgenommen. Ich hoffe durch genaue 
Untersuchung die Sache entscheiden zu kénnen. Jedenfalls ist das Exem- 
plar der Sammlung ein Styelopsis, und da es, wie es scheint, von Stimpson 
selbst nach Kristiania geschickt ist, muss es ein sicheres Kriterium ab- 
geben fiir die Stellung der zweifelhaften C. gutta. Hartmeyer (1908) 
hat die Stimpsonische Art als unsicheres Synonym fiir D. aggregata (juv.) 
aufgenommen, wahrscheinlich auf Grund von Verritts Behauptung 
(1871, p. 95), dass es eine junge C. carnea sei. 


Fam: Ascidiidae. 
Ascidia Linnté 1767. 


Ascidia prunum Mutt. 
(Fig. 7—8). 
Syn: Ascidia complanata, Autores. 
1852, i, callosa Stimpson, p. 228. 
1872, Ascidiopsis complanata, Verret, p. 289. 
1903, Ascidia prunwm, Hartmeyer, p. 285. 
Fundstellen: 
24 August, 1898, Rice Strait, 1 Expl. 
20 September, 1900, Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. (am Winterhafen), Lehm 
und Steinchen, 1 Expl. 


8 Juli, - 1901, Renbugten, Helvedesporten, 4 Expl. 

12 =~, 1901, Bucht bei Landsend, ca. 65 m, mehrere Expl. 
| 1901, Gaasefjord, 60 m. (an der Miindung), 

30, 1901, Gaasefjord, 8 m., Lehm und Steinchen mit 


Braunalgen, Mehrere Expl. 

Wie aus einer fritheren Arbeit (1905) hervorgeht, bin ich mit Hart- 
MEYER von der Identitét der A. prunum und complanata iberzeugt. 
Dass A. callosa Stipes. und Ascidiopsis complanata und complanatus 
von VeErRRILL, dieselbe Art ist, habe ich im zoologischen Museum zu Kri- 
stiania Gelegenheit gehabt, zu konstatieren. Dort befinden sich nimlich 


1898—1902. No. 14.] ASCIDIEN. 11 


Stimpsonische Exemplare der A. callosa, nebst Expl. der Ascidiopsis 
complanata, die dem Museum durch die U. S. Fish. Commission zuge- 
gangen sind, und diese stimmen ganz mit der vorliegenden Art iiberein. 
Der spezielle Bau des Kiemensackes, der VeRRILL zur Aufstellung der 
neuen Gattung bewogen hat, ist von ihm (1. c. fig. 8) abgebildet worden. 
Man kann diesen aber bei jedem erwachsenen Tier finden, wenn man 
den Kiemensack von aussen ansieht. 

Unter dem Materiale der ,Fram“ befanden sich viele Exemplare der 
Art; oft waren sie aggregiert. Die gréssten sind bis 9 cm. lang bei einer 
Breite von 6 cm. An B. crenatus waren oft sehr kleine Expl., nur bis 
® mm. lang, befestigt. Bemerkenswert ist bei den grésseren Tieren die 
enorme Entwicklung des Darmes. Oft war die ganze linke Seite des | 
Innenkérpers davon eingenommen. Zwischen dieser Extremit&ét und der — 
gewohnlichen Grésse des Darmes waren die schénsten Uberginge zu 
finden. 

Man findet bei den verschiedenen Verfassern die Anzahl der Kiemen- 
spalten jedes Feldes fiir eine und dieselbe Art verschieden angegeben. 
So hat Hartmeyer (1903, p. 286) fir A. prunum 5—7 (—12) Spalten 
als Norm herausgefunden. Es zeigt sich bei meinem Materiale, dass 
man von den verschiedenen Stellen des Kiemensackes sehr verschiedene 
Zahlen erhalten kann. Nach der Grésse des Tieres sind auf der rechten 
Seite, vorn (Fig. 7) 2—12, auf der linken Seite, hinten (Fig. 8) 5—24 
Kiemenspalten in jedem Felde zu finden. Dieselben Verhiltnisse habe 
ich auch bei anderen Arten bemerkt. Ist dies konstant, so ist es 
bemerkenswert. Man darf behaupten, dass es eine Anpassung ist, um 
gleich schnellen Ablauf des Kiemenwassers auf jeder Seite zu bewerk- 
stelligen. Speziell, wenn der Darmkanal und die Geschlechtsorgane sehr 
entwickelt sind, miissen sie die Peribranchialhéhle der linken Seite be- 
deutend verengern und das Durchfliessen des Wassers durch die Kiemen- 
spalten in hohem Grade hemmen. 


PAUL BJERKAN. ASCIDIEN, 


1905, 
1893, 
1899, 


1903, 
1878, 


1883, 
1893, 
1867, 


1857, 
1852, 


1887, 
1880, 


1882, 
1871, 


1872, 


1879, 


Liste der citierten Ascidien-Literatur. 


Buerkan, P., Ascidien von ,,M. Sars“ 1900—04 gesammelt (Bergens Museums 
Aarb. 1905, 5). 

Bonnevis, K., Ascidie simplices and Ascidiz composite. (Norske Nordh. Exp. 
1876—78, v. VU, 2). 

Harrmeyver, R., Monascidien der Bremer-Exp. nach Ostspitzbergen 1889. (Zool. 
Jahrb. Syst., v. XII). 

- Die Ascidien der Arktis (Fauna arctica, v. III, 2). 

Heuer, C. Die Crustaceen, Pycnogoniden und Tunicaten der ést.-ung. Nordpol- 
Exp. (Denkschr. Ak.-Wien, v. 35). 

Hervman, W. A., Report on the Tunicata of H. M.S. ,,Challenger“ 1873—76, I. 
(Rep. Voy. Challenger, v. V1). 


Kiar, J, Oversigt over Norges Ascidie simplices. (Forh, Vid-Selsk. Kristiania 
1893, 9). 

Pacxarp, A. S., On the recent Inverterbrate Fauna of Labrador. (M. Boston 
Soc., v. I). 


Rin, H., Gronlands sjopunge. (Nat. Tilleeg geogr. og stat. Beskr. Gronland, v. II). 


Srimeson, W., Some remarks of Ascidians found in Mass. Bay. (P. Boston 
Soce., v. IV). 

Swepervus, M. B., Tunicater fran Sibiriens Ishaf och Beringshaf. (Vega Exp. 
v. IV). : 


Traustept, M P. A., Oversigt over de fra Danmark og nordl. Bilande kjendte 
Ascidiew simplices. (Medd. Vid. Foren. 1879—80). 
- Vestindiske Ascidie simplices, I. (Medd. Vid. Foren. 1881—82). 
Verritt, A. E., Description of some imperfectly known and new Ascidians from 
New England. (Am. Journ. Sc. & Arts, ser. III, v. 2). 
_ Molluscan Fauna of New England. (Am. Journ. Se. & Arts, ser. 
Ill, v. 3). 
= Molluscoids. (Bul. U. S. Nat. Mus., 15). 


Fig. 1— 


Fig. 7— 


Dr D PN we wr Hr 


Tafelerklarung. 


Dendrodoa cylindrica n. sp. 

Das ganze Tier von links gesehen (+). 

Innenkérper 6 as 8 (3). 

After (4). 

Teil des Kiemensackes von innen gesehen (3°). 

Eigentiimliches Kalkkérperchen von der Muskulatur (335). 
Gonade (3). 

Ascidia prunum. 

Teil des Kiemensackes der rechten Seite, von innen gesehen (5). 
Teil des Kiemensackes der linken Seite, von innen gesehen (5°). 


Rep.of the 24 Norwe$. Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902.No. 14. Taf. I. 


Paul Bjerkan gez. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 15. 


HJALMAR DITLEVSEN: 


ANNULATA POLYCHAETA 


AT THE EXPENCE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABETIKRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


‘-: — 
-———- —- 000-—— 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1909 


Ba den von ,Fram* eingesammelten polychaeten Chaetopoden 
Kkniipft sich das Interesse in erster Reihe an die Formen, von welchen 
eine grosse Anzahl erbeutet worden ist, und an die Aufschliisse tiber 
deren Variieren und Biologie, die man hierdurch gewinnt. Ich will in 
dieser Beziehung die beiden einander nahestehende Species Harmothoé 
imbricata (L.) und Harmothoé rarispina Sars nennen, auf deren gegen- 
seitige Verwandtschaftsverhaltnisse neues Licht geworfen wird. Nicht 
weniger interessant sind einige eigentimliche Individuen von Dasychone 
infarcta. Ubrigens ist aber die Zahl der erbeuteten Arten keine geringe, 
in allem betragt sie 44. Und selbst wenn unter ihnen keine fir die 
Wissenschaft neue Formen sich finden, gibt es doch mehrere seltene 
und weniger haufig vorkommende Formen; von solchen will ich hier 
nur die grossen, schénen Individuen von Melenis Loveni MaLmcREN — 
in dem Gansefjord erbeutet — nennen und ein Exemplar von Anaitis 
Wahlbergi Matmeren, welches an Grésse die von MatmGren erwahnten 
spitzbergischen Individuen wbertrifft und das auch in Beziehung zur 
Form der Borsten etwas von diesen abweicht. 


Ss 


HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Polynoide. 


Nychia cirrosa Pau. 


1865. Maumeren: Overs. af Kgl. Vet. Akad. Forh. p. 58. 


Lokalitat: 


Aug. 4. 1898. Upernivik 20 Mt. 

Juli 91. 1899. Der Winterhafen, Havnefjord 16 Mt. 

Aug. 4, 1900. Der Tintenfisch-Grund 20—80 Mt. 

Aug. 8. 1900. Der Winterhafen c. 30 Mt. 

Septbr. 20. 1900. Der Winterhafen, Havnefjord 9—40 Mt. Lehm und 
Steinchen. 

Juli 12. 1901. Die Bucht bei Landsend. 


Ein Teil der vorliegenden Exemplare weicht etwas von der typi- 
schen Form ab, dadurch, dass die Skulptur der Oberflache der Elytren 
im ganzen mehr robust ist; sie scheinen in der Beziehung mit einigen 
nordgrénlandischen Formen, von Moore! erwahnt, tbereinzustimmen. 
Moore erwahnt dies Verhaltnis in folgender Weise: ,The elytra are 
rougher than those figured by Matmcren and M’InTosn, the numerous 
papilla being rough, horny, and spinous of the tip. The specimens 
from Cape York are covered with ,ochreous deposit* mentioned by 
M’Inrosu, which appears to be derived from the bottom soil*. Ebenso 
sind mehrere von ,Fram’s* Exemplare mit einem solchen _,,ochreous 
deposit“ bedeckt, welches sich in reichlicher Menge in den verzweigten Aus- 
wiichsen hauft, die die Oberflache des Elytrons bei dieser Art charak- 
terisieren. Eins der Individuen wurde in einem aus kleinen Steinen 
gebauten Rohrchen gefunden, wahrscheinlich einem Telepus circinnatus 
oder einer Scione lobata gehérig; es ist scheinbar langlicher und von 
schlankerer Form als die wtbrigen; wahrscheinlich hat ihn der enge 


Raum in dem Rohrchen gehindert, sich bei der Konservierung so sehr 
zusammenzuziehen, wie sonst geschehen wire. 


1 Proc. of the Acad. of Nat. Sc. of Philadelphia 1902, p. 259. 


1898—1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. a) 


Harmothoé nodosa (Sars). 


1865. Ennoé Orstedi: Ma.meren 1. c. p. 61. 
1865. Ennoé nodosa: Matoren |. c. p. 64. 
1879. Polynoé scabra: Twier, K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Hand]. Vol. XVI p.7. 


Lokalitat: 
Aug. 4. 1900. Landspitze der Seewalzen 30—50 Mt. Steinchen. 
Juni 26, 1901. Gegeniiber dem Zeltplatz. 
Juli 8. 1901. Renntier-Bucht. 
Juli 15. 1902. Dem Havhestefjeld gegeniiber. 

Diese Form scheint sehr zu variieren, und es ist versténdlich, dass 
sie die Bildung mehrerer Arten veranlasst hat. Unter den von ,,Fram“ 
mitgebrachten Exemplaren sind — ein kleines [ndividuum ausgenom- 
men, welches nur noch wenig entwickelt ist — augenscheinlich drei 
verschiedene Typen. Beziiglich der Grésse ubertreffen die Individuen 
von der Seewalzenspitze weit die ibrigen; das grdsste davon misst in 
der Lange 90 mm., in der Breite (mit den Borsten) 38 mm., und scheint 
am nachsten mit dem von WireEn ! erwahnten ersteren Typus tiberein- 
zustimmen, welcher mit Polynoé nodosa Sars identisch sein sollte. 
Das Exemplar von der Renntier-Bucht entspricht am nichsten dem 
Typus 4 von Whrren, wihrend das vor dem Zeltplatze entnommene 
Exemplar dem Typus 2 desselben Verfassers ahnlich ist, oder vielleicht 
vielmehr einer Zwischenform zwischen Typus 1 und 2. 


Harmothoé badia THEEL. | 
1878. Kgl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Vol. XVI. p. 18. 


Wahrend H. Sarsi gianzlich fehlt, findet man diese Art in zwei 
Exemplaren, beide von dem Giansefjord, eins im September 20, 1900, 
das andere ein Jahr nachher, Aug. 8, 1901, erbeutet. Das grésste Expl. 
misst in der Lange c. 55 mm., das kleinere c. 45 mm. 


Harmothoé rarispina (Sars). 


1860. Polynoé rarispina, Sars: Forh. Vidensk. Selsk. Christiania 1860, p. 60. 
1865. Lagisca rarispina, Matmeren |. ¢. p. 65. 


Lokalitat: 
Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungsthale 4—40 Mt. 
Septbr. 20. 1900. Géansefjord 6—40 Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 
Juli 9. 1901. Die Renbucht 
Juli 18, 1901. Die Miindung des Génsefjords 2—4 Mt. Lehm und 
Steinchen. 
Aug. 9, 1901. Ganz hinten in dem Gansefjord. 
Aug. 80. 1901. Géansefjord 8 Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 


1 Wintn: Vega-Exp. vetenskapl. iakttagels. II. 1883, p. 388. 


6 " HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Wie bekannt machte Matmoren sein Gattung Lagisca u.a. davon 
abhangig, dass der hintere Teil des Riickens nicht von den Elytren 
bedeckt wird: dorsum totum, segmentis circiter X ultimis exceptis, tegen- 
tia“, 1. ¢. p. 65. Spatere Verfasser scheinen doch nicht die Berechti- 
gung dieses Gattung anzuerkennen: Wren (1. c. p. 389) und Tuer 
(l.c. p. 8) fahren es unter dem Geschlechtsnamen Polynoé ein, andere, 
z. B. Levinsen! unter dem Geschlechtsnamen Harmothoé. LEVINSEN, 
dessen Systematik ich in dieser Beziehung folge, schreibt |. c. p. 29: 
»Um iiber die Verwirrung und Ungewissheit hinauszukommen, die 
augenblicklich in der Systematik dieser Formen herrscht, schlage ich 
vor, bei der Geschlechtsbegrenzung besonders Gewicht auf die Formen 
der Riickenborsten zu legen, die im Gegensatz zu den Bauchborsten eine 
sehr geringe oder fast keine Variation darbieten, weder bei dem einzelnen 
Individ noch bei Gruppen verwandter Arten. So sind die Riickenborsten 
wesentlich vom selben Bau bei allen Formen, die zu den Geschlechtern 
Harmothoé, Evarne, Antinoé, Lenilla, Lagisca, Ennoé, Parmenis 
und Eucrante gerechnet werden, kurz bei all den Geschlechtern, die 
weder durch die Form der Borsten noch das Verhaltnis der Riicken- 
platten scharf auseinander zu halten sind. Fir dies so durch eine 
Zusammenschmelzung der eben genannten 8 Geschlechtern gebildete 
Geschlecht schlage ich vor den Namen Harmothoé zu behalten, da der 
Name Polynoé fir Polynoé scolopendrina beizubehalten ist, welcher 
mit der Beschreibung Savienys zu slimmen scheint“.2 E 

Beziiglich der vorliegenden Art werde ich nun gleich bemerken, 
dass ich den Charakter mit den hinteren von den Elytren unbedeckten 
Ringen nicht konstant finde, indem unter den von ,Fram“ mitgebrachten 
Exemplaren tbrigens typische Individuen sich finden, wo der Ricken 
in seiner ganzen Lange bedeckt ist, ganz wie bei der folgenden Art. 
Auch in Bezug auf die auf den Elytren sitzenden Kérperchen wechselt 
die Art, eine Tatsache, welche auch von Wirkn erortert ist, der 
schreibt: lc. p. 389: ,hvilka: afvika fran den vanliga formen derut- 
innan, att fjallens taggar fran smal bas blifva betydligt tjockare mot 
midten, t. 0. m. aggformiga“. Unter den Exemplaren ,,Frams“ finde 
ich einen ganz allmahlichen Ubergang von solchen Kérperchen auf den 
Elytren, die fir die Art rarispina typisch sind, zu solchen, die bei der 
Art imbricata gewohnlich und fir dieselbe typisch sind. Ich habe 
deshalb in meiner Bestimmung der in der »framsammlung“ vorliegen- 


1 Levinsen: Systematisk, geografisk Oversigt over de nordiske Annulata, Gephy- 
rea, Chetognathi og Balanoglossi, Kobenhavn 1883. 
2 Von dem Verfasser dieser Abhandlung in’s Deutsche tibersetzt. 


1898—1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 7 


den Exemplare, nur die Formen zu 4H. rarispina hinzugerechnet, 
deren Kérperchen auf den Riickenplatten dem Ausdruck Matmcrens: 
»spinis, raris brunneis, elongato fusiformibus aut cylindricis“ entsprechen. 


Harmothoé imbricata (L.). 
1865. Maumeren |. c. p. 66. 


Lokalitat: 


Aug. 16. 1898, Reindeer Point, Foulke Fjord 4—20 Mt. 

Aug. 18. 1898. Camp Clay. Cap Sabine 4—10 Mt. 

Aug. 24. 1898. Rice Strait. 

Juli 21. 1899. Winterhafen, Havnefjord 16 Mt. 

Juli 29. 1899. Winterhafen, Havnefjord 12 Mt. 

Juli 22, 1900. Winterhafen, Havnefjord c. 60 Mt. 

Juli 28. 1900. Winterhafen, Havnefjord c. 40 Mt. 

Juli 25, 1900. Winterhafen, Havnefjord. 

Juli 30. 1900. Miindung des Grosstals. 

Juli 31. 1900. Gegend von Vestersund. 

Aug. 3. 1900. Fosheims Peak und das Tal an der Westseite des 
Fjords 4—40 Mt. 

Aug. 4. 1900. Tintenfisch-Grund 30—40 Mt. 

Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungstale 4—20 Mt. 

Septbr. 20. 1900. Boden des Gansefjords 6—40 Mt. 

Juli 12. 1901. Bucht bei Landsend. 

Aug. 30. 1901. Géansefjord c. 8 Mt. 

Juli 15. 1902. Havhestefjeld gegeniiber. 

Juli 17. 1902. Ostlich von dem grossen Gletscher, North Devon 
c. 6 Mt. 

Aug. 4, 1902. Géansefjord, nérdlich von der Halbinsel 20—40 Mt. 


Unter den vielen vorliegenden Exemplaren. dieser Art finden sich 
verschiedene Varietéten in Bezug auf Form, Grésse und nicht am 
wenigsten in Bezug auf das Verhiltnis der Rickenplatten. Die Bemer- 
kungen Moore’s |. c. p. 270 uber einige nordgrénlandische Individuen 
gelten in dieser Beziehung auch fir die von ,Fram“ eingesammelten : 
»The elytra vary from those without any trace either of horny papille 
or soft marginal papillee to very rough ones with numerous hard promi- 
nences easily visible under a magnification of five diameters — —“. 
Und — wie ich in der Erwahnung der vorhergehenden Art bemerkt 
habe — was die grésseren Korper auf den Elytren betrifft, findet man 
einen vollstindig allmahlichen Ubergang von den tranenformigen oder 
fast kugelférmigen, die fir diese Art charakteristisch sind, zu den 
langen, cylindrischen bei H. rarispina. Es gibt in Fram’s Material 
Individuen, die man — nach der Form dieser Kérperchen — ebensogut 
zu rarispina als zu imbricata rechnen kann (Fig. 4). Die Form 
der Korper des in Fig. 1 abgebildeten Elytron muss man wohl am 
besten als typisch fir H. imbricata betrachten, wahrend Figg. 2 u. 3 


8 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [sEc. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


dem rarispina entspricht; bei Fig. 2 haben die Kérperchen die Form, 
welche Matmcren mit dem Ausdruck fusiforme“ bezeichnet. Wie man 
sehen wird, liegen die in Fig. 4 abgebildeten Kérperchen so zu sagen 
gerade dazwischen und entsprechen wahrscheinlich denen, die Wtr&En, 
(I. c. p. 389) einige sibirische rarispina-Formen betreffend, erwahnt. 
Es wird sich also schwierig — wenn nicht etwa unméglich zeigen, die 
Form dieser Kérperchen als entscheidendes Artkennzeichen zu benutzen. 
Noch mehr tiberzeugt hiervon wird man durch die naéhere Betrachtung 
des Aussehens dieser Kérperchen: Untersucht man sie bei starkerer 
Vergrésserung, kommt man namlich zu dem Ergebnis, dass die grossen 
Korper durch Hypertrophie von den kleinen, mikroskopischen Korperchen 
gebildet scheinen. Fig. 5 stellt ein kleines Stiick von einem Elytron 
eines H. imbricata dar, 125 mal vergréssert. Man sieht hier die 
kleinen mikroskopischen Kérperchen, dornenahnlich, mit einer stumpfen 
Spitze, ein wenig schief dreieckig im optischen Durchschnitt, gegen die 
Flache des Elytrons schrég gestellt. Zwar sieht man von ihrer Struktur 
nicht viel, doch findet man eine deutliche, recht dicke, homogen aus- 
sehende Hautschicht — méglicher Weise eine Cuticula um einen inneren 
Hohlraum, der mit einer structurlosen und farblosen Masse gefillt 
scheint, Zellen werden nicht unterschieden; und eine absolute Entschei- 
dung des Baues dieser Korperchen wird kaum zu erlangen sein ausser 
durch histologische Untersuchung von Schnittpraéparaten, aber hierzu 
wire ein in dieser Hinsicht konserviertes Material nodtig. Betrachten | 
wir einen der grésseren Korper, so sehen wir, dass dieser mit der- 
selben strukturlosen klaren Hautschicht bedeckt ist, wie die kleinen, 
mikroskopischen Korper, aber das innere sehen wir mit einer braun- 
lichen Masse gefiillt, die gegen das aussere des Kéorpers mit eigen- 
timlichen, schuppenformigen Flecken hervortritt. Diesen Bau sieht man 
iiberall bei den grésseren Kérpern, unangesehen welche Form diese im 
iibrigen haben. Betrachtet man nun die kleinen Kérper, so sieht man, 
dass einzelne von diesen, innerhalb der homogen aussehenden Haut- 
schicht, an der Spitze dunkelbraun werden, die dunkle Farbe breitet 
sich nach und nach abwarts gegen die Basis, tiber den Inhalt des ganzen 
Kérpers aus, wahrend dieser gleichzeitig die obenerwahnte gefleckte Zeich- 
nung, die bei den grésseren Kérpern zu sehen ist, zu zeigen anfingt; 
jetzt fangt der kleine Kérper zu wachsen an; er wird dick an der Spitze, 
nach und nach tranen- oder spindelférmig, oder er entwickelt sich zu 
einem langen, cylindrischen Pflock, wie bei H. rarispina. Auf Fig. 5 
sind mehrere dieser Stadien zu sehen, und fallt einem erst mal das 
Geschilderte auf, so scheint es ganz ohne Zweifel, dass die grossen und 


1898-1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 9 


grisseren Knoten durch Hypertrophie von einzelnen kleinen, mikrosko- 
pischen Kérpern gebildet sind. Was diese Hypertrophie verursacht, ist 
natiirlich nicht leicht zu sagen, der Gedanke, das kénne etwas patolo- 
gisches, vielleicht parasitisches sein, hegt ja nahe; das ist darum 
interessant, da dann diese Knoten und Pflicke — wenn meine 
Auffassung die richtige ist — also wohl ohne systematische Bedeutung 
sein werden. Eine weitere Beobachtung, welche bei dieser Auffassung 
auch verstandlich wird, ist das ganz launenhafte Auftreten dieser erwahnten 
Kérper: Man trifft Individuen, denen sie ganzlich fehlen, man_ trifft 
Individuen mit einzelnen oder wenigen Kérpern zerstreut auf der Ober- 
fliche des Elytrons, und man trifft einen Teil dieser Oberfliche ganz 
dicht mit ihnen bes&et. Sie scheinen immer nahe am Rande des Ely- 
trons am dichtesten zu sitzen, und scheinen auf demjenigen Teil des 
Elytrons, der von dem vorangehenden gedeckt wird, gar nicht — oder 
wenigstens dusserst sparsam zu finden zu sein. Sind es Parasiten, 
die durch Invasion in die mikroskopischen Kérper dieselben zur Hyper- 
trophie bringen, so kann man sich ja sehr wohl denken, dass die verschie- 
dene Form der Geschwiire durch mehrfache Arten von einander nahe- 
stehender, parasitischer Formen verursacht ist. Aber deshalb brauchen 
die Wirttiere ja nicht von verschiedener Art zu sein. Soweit ich sehen 
kann, kénnen die Borsten auch nicht als konstante Artscharaktere 
zwischen H. imbricata und H. rarispina benutzt werden. Die Figg. 
1a und 1b stellen zwei Bauchborsten desselben Individuums dar, dessen 
Elytron von Fig. 1 genommen wird. Wie man sehen wird, hat das 
eine (Fig. 1a) einen Zahn unter der Spitze, das andere keinen. Die 
etwas verschiedene Form riihrt von dem verschiedenen Platze, den die 
zwei Borsten in dem Paropodium gehabt haben, her: Die in Fig. 1b 
abgebildete Borste, deren dussere, breite Teil verhaltnismassig kirzer 
und scharfer abgesetzt von dem Schafte ist, hat ganz ventral gesessen, 
wahrend Fig. 1a eine Borste darstellt, die dem Riickenbund am nachsten 
gesessen hat. Die Fig. 2a und 2b entsprechen dem Riickenblatt, wovon 
ein Teil in Fig. 2 abgebildet ist, also eine Rarispina-Form mit spindel- 
formigen Kérpern. Keine der zwei Borsten ist wesentlich von denen 
in Fig. 1a und 1b abgebildeten verschieden; beide haben einen Zahn 
unter der Spitze, in Fig. 2a ist er sehr abgeniitzt, doch immer noch 
deutlich. Fig. 3a und 3b gehdren demselben Individuum an, welchem 
das Elytron, von dem ein Teil in Fig. 3 abgebildet ist, gehért. Auch 
diese variieren nicht nennenswert. Fig. 3b hat keinen Zahn unter der 
Spitze, aber wie wir gesehen haben, trifft man auch Borsten ohne Zahn 
bei typischen H. imbricata-Formen. Endlich stellen Figg. 4a und 4b 


10 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Bauchborsten dar von einem Individuum, welches, wie aus Fig. 4 
zu sehen ist, in Bezug auf das Verhaltnis der Kérper, eine Zwischen- 
form zwischen den typischen H. rarispina und H. imbricata bildet; 
auch diese Borsten zeigen ganz dieselbe Form. — Ich werde noch hinzu- 
fiigen, dass Moore (I. c. p. 269) meint, in der Stellung des vorderen 
Augenpaares ein fir H. rarispina charakteristisches Artkennzeichen 
gefunden zu haben. Er schreibt: ,The anterior pair of eyes is borne 
on the anterior face of prominently outstanding lobes, which give to 
the head a very characteristic form not shown in any of the published 
figures. These ocular lobes are situated slightly posterior to the middle 
of the head, which is very much narrower anterior than posterior of 
them“. Doch auch diesen Charakter finde ich nicht konstant. Erstens 
scheinen die erwahnten ,ocular lobes“ bei den verschiedenen Individuen 
an Grésse ziemlich viel zu variieren, ebenso wie die Stellung der Augen 
(des vorderen Augenpaares) auch nicht immer ganz dieselbe ist im Ver- 
haltmis zu diesen ,lobes“: Sie kénnen ganz dorsal sitzen, aber auch 
etwas gegen die Seite des Kopfes hin, ferner kénnen sie der Spitze des 
erwahnten Vorsprunges naher oder ferner sitzen, was vielleicht von den 
verschiedenen Zusammenziehungsverhaltnissen der verschiedenen Indi- 
viduen herriihren mag. Doch zuletzt finde ich ganz ahnliche Vorspriinge 
bei H. imbricata. Es wird somit meiner Ansicht nach kaum weiteres 
zu tun sein, als zuktinftig die zwei Formen H. rarispina (Sars) und 
Hf. imbricata (L.) unter dem Namen H. imbricata (L.) zu vereinen, 
indem H. rarispina kaum noch als Varietat zu behaupten sein wird. 


Melznis Loveni Mern. 


1865. Matmeren, ]. ¢. p. 78. 
1883. Wirén, 1. c. p. 391. 


Lokalitat: 


Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungstale 4—40 Mt. 
Septbr. 20. 1900. Géansefjord 6—40 Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 


Die vorliegenden Individuen sind typische Formen und stimmen 
genau mit der Beschreibung Matmeren’s tiberein, jedoch mit derselben 
Einschrankung, die Wirtn fir die typischen Exemplare der Vega- 
expedition anfihrt, namlich dass die 3 letzten Ringe von den Ricken- 


platten unbedeckt sind. Das grdsste Exemplar hat eine Lange von 
73 mm., das kleinste von c. 60 mm. 


1898—1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 11 


Sigalionide. 


Pholoé minuta (Fasr.). 
1865. Matmeren, }. c. p. 89. 


Es hegt nur ein ganz kleines Individuum von etwa 5 mm. Lange 
vor; es ist im Aug. 26, 1898, erbeutet, ist aber mit keiner Lokalitat 
bezeichnet. Nach dem Zeitpunkt, wann es genommen ist, stammt es 
von einer Stelle in Smiths Sund, wahrscheinlich von Rice Strait oder 
da in der Nahe. 


Phyllodocide. 


Phyllodoce maculata (L.). 


1865. Mazmeren, |. c. p. 94—98. 
1883, Levinsen, 1. c. p. 48. 
Lokalitat: 
Aug. 1. 1900. Mindung des Grosstals 4—60 Mt. 
Juli 19. 1901. Gansefjord. 
Aug. 16. 1901. Gansefjord c. 15 Mt. 
Aug. 2. 1902. Ganz hinten im Gansefjord 2—4Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 
Aug. 4. 1902. Gdénsefjord, Nérdlich von der Halbinsel 20—30 Mt. 


Die vorliegenden Individuen sind durchgehend klein; das kleinste 
misst nur c. 60 mm. in der Lange. Eins davon zeigt recht sonderbare 
Verhiltnisse, namlich dasjenige von der Miindung des grossen Tales: es 
misst in der Linge 275 mm., und darf also sehr lang genannt werden ; 
und es zahlt c. 350 Segmente; der hintere Teil macht den Eindruck 
regeneriert zu sein, und die letzten Segmente hier sind schwierig genau 
zu zahlen; aber dieser Lange entspricht keine verhaltnissmassige Dicke, 
indem die Breite des Thieres nicht mehr als 4mm. misst. Sonst scheint 
nichts merkwirdiges an seinen Bau zu sein. Die Papillen des Rissels 
sind wie bei den itibrigen Individuen, in Bezug auf Form, Grésse und 
Arrangement; die Verhaltnisse des Parapodiums bieten auch nichts 
Merkwirdiges. 


Eteone cylindrica Orst. 


1843. Q@xrsrep: Grénl. Annulata dorsibrandriata, Kgl. Danske Vidensk. 
Selsk. p. 35. 
Lokalitat: 


Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. 
Juli 9. 1901. Renbucht. 


12 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Anaitis Wahlbergi Mary. 


1865. Marmeren |. ¢. A. kosteriensis p. 94. 
1867. Matmeren! p. 20. 


Lokalitat: 
Aug. 4 Ginsefjord. 

Fir die auf Spitzbergen gefundenen Individuen dieser Art giebt 
Matmcren eine Linge von 70 mm,, eine Breite von 6 mm an. Er 
schreibt dartiber, dass es ,rarissime ad oras maxime boreales Spetsbergice“ 
gefunden wird. Wrren nennt eins von der Vegaexpedition aus dem 
Sibirischen Eismeere mitgebrachtes Exemplar, wie auch THEEL ein von 
dem Karameere mitgebrachtes erwahnt. Die zwei letzteren Verfasser 
machen keine Angaben der Grésse. Das Exemplar von dem Gansefjord 
ist 90 mm. Jang und 9 mm. breit. Es ist also bedeutend grésser als 
die von Spitzbergen, scheint aber im wbrigen nicht wesentlich von denen 
MatmGren’s abzuweichen; doch sind die Borsten etwas verschieden: 
Wiahrend deren Schaft bei der Figur Matmeren’s utberall fast gleich- 
miassig dick ist, zeigt sich bei dem Individuum von dem Gansefjord an 
dem oberen Ende eine sehr bedeutende Erweiterung die nach oben in 
mehrere, unregelmissige Spitzen ausgezogen ist. Auch scheint das End- 
blatt der Borsten verhaltnismissig linger bei dem von ,Fram“ mit- 
gebrachten Individuum (Figg. 6a und 6b). Im zoologischen Museum 
in Kopenhagen befindet sich ein Individuum aus dem Kattegat. Die Art 
scheint somit weit verbreitet zu sein. Das Exemplar aus dem Kattegat 
misst nur c. 80 mm. in der Lange. 


Nepthyde. 
Nepthys ciliata (MULL.). 


1865. Mameren |. ¢. p. 104. 


Lokalitet: 
Aug. 2. 1901. Géansefjord. 


Glyceride. 


Glycera capitata Orsv. 


1843. Orstep |. c. p. 196. 
Lokalitat: 
Juli 22, 1900. Winterhafen c. 60 Mt. 


Aug. 3. 1900. Fosheim’s Peak und das Tal an der Westseite des Fjords 
4—40 Mt. 
Aug. 4. 1900. Seewalzenspitze 20—50 Mt. Steinchen. 


tA. S. Macuoren: Annulata polycheta Spetsbergie, Grénlandia, Islandie et 
Scandinavie hactenus congenita, Helsingforsize 1867. 


1898— 1902, No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 13 


Lumbrinereidex. 


Lumbrinereis fragilis Miu. 


1867. Matmeren |. c. p. 63. 


Lokalitit: 


Juli 21. 1899. Winterhafen c. 16 Mt. 

Juli 29. 1899. Winterhafen c. 12 Mt. 

Aug. 3. 1900. Fosheim’s Peak und der Tal an der Westseite des 
Fjords 4—40 Mt. 


Onuphide. 


Onuphis conchylega Sars. 


1867. Matmeren, 1. c. p. 66. 


Lokalitat: 


Juli 22. 1900. Winterhafen c. 60 Mt. 

Juli 25. 1900. Winterhafen. 

Juli 30. 1900. Miindung des grossen Tales. 

Aug. 4 1900. Seewalzenspitze 20—25 Mt. Steinchen. 
Aug. 7. 1900. Ostkap 20—50 Mt. 


Lycoride. 


Nereis zonata MautmGRren. 


1867. Maxmeren, |. c. p. 46. 


Lokalitat: 


Aug. 8. 1900. Winterhafen c. 20 Mt. 

Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungstale, 4—40 Mt. 

Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. 

Juli 12. 1901. Bucht bei Landsend. 

Juli 18. 1901. Miindung des Gansefjords. 

Juli 19. 1902. North Devon; dem Zeltplatz gegentiber, 6—15 Mt. 


Moglicherweise wird es sich zeigen, dass die zwei nahestehenden 
Formen, WN. pelagica L. und N. zonata Matmeren durch Zwischen- 
formen allmahlich in einander tibergehen: Hy. Tuten erwihnt (I. c. p. 42) 
ein Paar geschlechtlich umgebildete, epitoke Individuen, die mit Heteronereis 
assimilis und Heteronereis grandifolia Matmcren iibereinstimmen, und 
die nach Matmeren epitoke Formen von JN. pelagica L. sein sollten; da 
diese Art indessen an den Stellen, wovon Tuéet’s Individuen stam- 
men, ganz zu fehlen scheint, nimmt er an, dass die von ihm erbeuteten 
Exemplare epitoke Formen von N. zonata Mery. sind. Es sind unter 
den von ,Fram“ mitgebrachten Exemplaren des Geschlechtes Nereis 
keine epitoke Individuen, dagegen scheinen zwei von denen die, ich als 


14 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


N. zonata Mern. bestimmt habe, sich sehr der Form N. pelagica L. 
za nihern. Die hellen Bander der Ringe sind sehr undeutlich und die 
Parapodienlappchen sind recht stumpf und abgerundet. Die Verhaltnisse 
der Paragnathen zeigen keinen wesentlichen Unterschied von den iibrigen 
Individuen, sondern gerade in dieser Hinsich! stehen die zwei Arten 
einander sehr nahe. Da all die tbrigen Individuen indessen der Form 
NV. zonata Mern. gut genug entsprechen, und WN. pelagica L. in den 
Sammlungen ,Fram“s sonst ginzlich fehlt, habe ich auch diese zwei als 
N. zonata Mern. bestimmt. — Es scheint tibrigens eine Regel zu sein, 
dass die hellen Querbander der Ringe bei den jiingeren Individuen stirker 
hervortreten und bei den Alteren schwacher werden. Alle von ,Fram“ 
gesammelten Exemplare sind klein; dass grésste misst c. 75 mm. Die 
gréssten von THEeL erbeuteten Exemplare sind 125 mm. in der Lange. 


Hesionide. 


Castalia Fabricii Merv. 
1867. Matmeren, |. c. 32. C. arctica. 
1878. Tuten, 1. ¢. p. 37. 


Lokalitat: 


Aug. 26. 1898. Rice strait. 

Juli 21. 1899. Winterhafen c. 16 Mt. 

Juli 29. 1899. Winterhafen c. 12 Mt. 

Aug. 3. 1900. Fosheim’s Peak und das Tal an der Westseite des Fjords 
4—40 Mt. 

Juli 19. 1902. North Devon; vor dem Zeltplatz 6—14 Mt. 


Syllidz. 


Syllis Fabricii Mern. 


1867, Ma.meren, I. c. p. 44. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 8 1901. Renbucht. 


Syllis fasciata Mern. 


1867. Maxmeren, |. ¢. p. 43. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. 


Syilis monilicornis Merv. 


1867. Matmersn, 1. c. p. 41. 
Lokalitat: 
Juni 28, 1901. Mundung des Walross-Fjord. 


1898—1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 15 


Spherodoride. 
Ephesia gracilis Ratuxe. 


Ratuxe: Beitrage z. Fauna Norwegens (Nova Acta Natur. Curios. XX. 1.) 
Lokalitat: 
Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. 


Spionidex. 


Polydora ciliata Jounst. 
1867. Matmeren, 1. c¢. p. 95. 
Lokalitat: 
Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. 


Crrratulidz. 


Cirratalus cirratus Mutu. 
1867. Matmeren, I. c. p. 95. 


Lokalitat: 


Juli 9. 1901. Renbucht. 

Juli 12. 1901. Bucht bei-Landsend. 

Aug. 30. 1901. Gansefjord, c. 8 Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 
Juli 19. 1902. North Devon; von dem Zeltplatz, 6—14 Mt. 


Chetozone setosa Morn. 


1867. Matmcren, |. c. p. 96. 
1878. Tueet, J. c. p. 54. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 22, 1899. Winterhafen. Pelagisch. 


Ariciide. 
Aricia armiger (MUit1.). 
1867. Maxmeren, | c. p. 72. 


Lokalitat: 
Aug. 26. 1898. Rice strait. 


Opheliide. 
Ammotrypane aulogaster RaTHKE. 


1867. Matmeren, |. ec. p. 73. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. é 


16 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC, EXP. FRAM 


Chloreemide. 


Brada granulata Mery. 


1867. Macmerey, |. ¢. p. 85. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 22. 1900. Winterhafen. 


Flabelligera affinis Sars. 


1867. Marmeren, I. c. p. 83. 


Lokalitat: 
Septbr.20. 1900. Giéinsefjord, 4-40 Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 
Juli 9. 1901. Renbucht. 
Juli 12. 1901. Bucht bei Landsend. 
Aug. 2 1901. Giéinsefjord. Bis 40 Mt. 


Fast alle von ,Fram“ mitgebrachten Individuen sind recht gross; 
einige haben eine Lange von c. 80 mm. Diese Wiirmer leben oft massen- 
haft zusammen, und man kann bisweilen, wo dies der Fall ist, tatsach- 
lich das Schabeisen damit gefiillt bekommen. Ich habe etwas dergleichen 
an der zool. Station ,,Kristineberg* in Schweden im Sommer 1905 
gesehen. — Von den vorliegenden Individuen sind 20 demselben Ort ent- 
nommen. 


Trophonia plumosa Mutu. 


1867. Matmeren, I. c. p. 82. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 8 1901. Renbucht. 


Amphicthenide. 


Pectinaria hyperborea Mern. 


1865. Matmersn, l. ec. p. 360. 


Lokalitat: 
Aug. 1. 1900. Mindung des grossen Tales. 


Ampharetide. 


Samytha sexcirrata Sars. 


1865. Matmeren, |. c. p. 370. 7 


Lokalitiat: 
Aug. 2. 1901. Giinsefjord. 


1898—1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 17 


Terebellidz. 


Terebellides Stromi Sars. 


1865. Ma.meren, |. c. i 398. 


Lokalitat: ‘ 
Aug. 2, 1901. Ganz hinten in dem Gansefjord. Lehm und Steinchen. 


Axionice flexuosa (Gr.). 


1865. Ma.meren, I. c. p. 384 
Lokalitat: 
Aug. 24. 1898. Rice strait. 


Juli 21. 1899. Winterhafen c. 16 Mt. 
Juli 9. 1901. Renbucht. 


Bei dem gréssten Exemplar, dessen Tentakeln aus der Miindung 
hervorragen, misst die Réhre c. 53 mm., und die Grisse ist — da die 
unterste Spitze der Réhre abgebrochen, und es deshalb nicht zu unter- 
scheiden ist, wie viel von dieser fehlt — wohl etwa, wie Matmcren als 
Maximalgrésse angibt, 55 mm., vielleicht etwas mehr. Die tbrigen 
Exemplare sind etwas kleiner. 


Pista cristata (MULL). 


1865. Maumersrn, |. ¢. p. 382. 
Lokalitat: 
Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungstale, 4—40 Mt. 


Scione lobata Meru. 


1865. Mazmeren, |. c. p. 383. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 92. 1900. Winterhafen c. 60 Mt. 
Aug. 4, 1900. Seewalzenspitze, 30—50 Mt. Steinchen. 
Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungstale, 4—40 Mt. 
Juli 5. 1901. Der Sund. 
Juli 8. 1901. Renbucht. 
Juli 9. 1901. Renbucht. 
Juli 19. 1901. Géansefjord. 
Aug. 2. 1901. Ganz hinten in dem Gansefjord, 2—4 Mt. 


Dieser Wurm ist offenbar einer der am haufigsten vorkommenden 
Arten in den von ,Fram“ besuchten Gegenden. Es liegen eine Menge 
von Exemplaren vor, und mehrere Glaser sind mit dessen Rohrchen 
gefullt. Diese bestehen, die kleineren Individuen betreffend, aus For- 
aminiferen und Steinchen, die grésseren betreffend, aus etwas gro- 


berem Material, mit Schlamm vermischt. Wahrscheinlich richtet sich 
2 


18 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. |SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


jedoch der Bau des Rohrehens wesentlich nach der Beschaffenheit des 
Bodens. Ein Individuum hat, im Gegensatz zu den dbrigen, sein 
Rohrehen aus ziemlich feinem Sand gebaut, und dasselbe fast in seiner 


ganzen Linge an einer Laminaria geheftet. 


Thelepus circinnatus (FasR.). 


1865. Maumcren, 1. c. p. 387. 


Lokalitat: 
Juni 29. 1901. Vor dem Zeltplatz. 
Juli 8. 1901. Die Renbucht. 
Juli 9. 1901. Die Renbucht. 
Juli 12. 1901. Bucht bei Landsend. 
Juli 19, 1902. Vor dem Zeltplatz North Devon, 6—14 Mt. 


Diese Art ist ebenso wie die vorhergehende in einer Menge von 
Exemplaren erbeutet, und die Réhrchen sind im hohen Grade denen der 
Scione ahnlich, vielleicht aus etwas gréberem Material gebaut. 


Amphitrite cirrata Mit. 


1865. Matmeren, |. c. p. 375. 


Lokalitat: 
Juli 2. 1899. Winterhafen c. 12 Mt. 


Nicolea zostericola (Orst.). 


1865. Matmeren, |. ¢. p. 381. 


Lokalitat: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Camp Clay, Cap Sabine, 4—10 Mt. 


Juli 19, 1902. Vor dem Zeltplatz, North Devon, 6—40 Mt. 
Leena abranchiata Mern. 


1865. Matnenen, |}. c. p. 385. 


Lokalita&t: 
Juli 7. 1899. Winterhafen c. 12 Mt. 


Sahbellidex. 


Sabella Fabricii Br. 


1865. Marmeren, |. c. p. 899. Sabella Spitsbergensis. 


Lokalitat- 
Septbr. 19. 1900. Vor dem Verbannungstale, 4—40 Mt. 


1898 — 1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA, 19 


Euchone papillosa Sars. 


1865, Macmeren, |, c. p. 407. 
Lokalitit: 
Juli 21. 1899. Winterhafen c. 12 Mt. 


Ein Fragment einer Huchone, auf c. 30 Mt., im Winterhafen 8. 8. 1900 
genommen, hat nicht naéher bestimmt werden kénnen. 


Chone lufandibuliformis Kr. 


1865. Maumeren, |. c. p. 404. 


Lokalitat: 


Juli 28, 1901. Die Mindung des Walrossfjords. 
Juli 18. 1901. Die Mindung des Giinsefjords. 
Juli 19. 1901. Der Gansefjord. 


’ 


Dasychone infarcta (Kr). 


1865. Maumeren, |. c. p. 403. 


Lokalitat: 
: Septbr. 20. 1900. Der Gansefjord, 4-40 Mt. Lehm und Steinchen. 


Die ersten Worte, die sowohl Sars als auch Maumeren in ihrer 
Geschlechtsdiagnose tiber die Dasychone brauchen, namlich: ,,Corpus 
crassum“ — Kroyer hat sogar ,crassissima“ — passen nicht auf die vou 
»Fram“ mitgebrachten Individuen dieses Geschlechtes. Wenn nicht be- 
sonders schlank ist er doch auf der anderen Seite so langgestrecht, dass 
das genannte Adjektiv gar nicht bezeichnend ist. Ein aus dem Rohr- 
chen herausgenommenes Exp]. misst somit c. 115 mm. in der Lange, 
wahrend die Breite nur c. 8mm. ist. Die Linge des Thieres enthilt 
also die Breite 14—15 mal, waéhrend Matmcren fiir die von ibm an- 
gefihrten Exemplare desselben Geschlechls, D. infarcta und D. argus 
das Verhaltnis zwischen Lange und Breite wie 1 zu 4,5 angibt. Da 
die vorliegenden Individuen tbrigens in allen Beziehungen typische 
Dasychone sind, trage ich keine Bedenken, sie zu diesem Geschlecht 
hinzufuhren. 

Das Rohrchen (Fig. 7), aus sehr feinem, dunkel chokoladegefarbtem 
Schlamm gebildet, ist ein Stick langer als das Tierchen. Derjenige Teil, 
der nicht mit diesem ausgefillt ist, ist bei Spiritusexemplaren zusammcn- 
gefallen und umgebogen; dieser ist indessen, wie auch der iibrige Teil, 
nicht schlaff, sondern — wie man gewohnlich bei den Sabelliden sieht 
— von einer recht festen Konsistenz, fast lederartig oder hart mem- 


20 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


branés, was durch den, aus der Haut des Tieres ausgeschiedenen 
die Lehmpartikeln verbindenden Stoff, verursacht ist. Es scheint mir, 
indessen ohne Zweifel, dass das Réhrchen in dieser Beziehung bei den 
lebenden Tieren anders gewesen sein muss; es ware absurd anzu- 
nehmen, dass das Tier seinem Aufenthaltsort eine solche unbrauch- 
bare, zusammengeklappte, unregelmassig umgebogene Partie anbauen 
wirde, in welche es kaum mit seiner ganzen Kraft seinen weichen 
Kérper wirde hineinpressen kénnen; das ganze Réohrchen muss 
weich gewesen sein — jedenfalls bedeutend weicher als jetzt, nach der 
Konservierung — und das Tier sich auf und ab oder hin und her in 
der ganzen Lange des Rohrchens haben bewegen kénnen, und die 
Hartung muss somit nach dem Tode des Tieres eingetreten, und wahr- 
scheinlich durch den Alkohol verursacht sein. Ein anderes Verhaltnis 
zeigt auch daraufhin: Bei Tieren, die in dem Réhrchen gestorben sind, 
und die sich in dasselbe hineingezogen haben, klebt dies so an dem 
Kérper des Tieres, dass es ganz unmidglich ist, es von demselben zu 
lésen. Wenn man das Rohrchen mit ein Paar Nadeln stiickweise weg- 
prapariert, kommt das Tier zum Vorschein, mit einer hellgelben, glatten, 
recht harten, firnisartigen Schicht itiberzogen, die nicht auf mechanischem 
Wege wegzubringen ist; die Parapodien legen darunter, dem Korper 
des Tieres dicht angepresst, die Ringteilung ist nur undeutlich zu unter- 
scheiden, und nur die schwarzen Pigmentfleckchen zwischen den Para- 
podien treten einigermassen scharf hervor an der Seite des Tieres. So 
war das Verhiltnis bei dem Fig. 7a abgebildeten Individuum. Auf 
zwei Stellen zeigt es sich deutlich, dass es sich so verhalt, namlich an 
dem Hinterteil des Tieres, welcher offenbar nicht an dem Réhrchen 
geklebt hat, und an einer grésseren Partie auf der einen Seite des 
Tieres, wo eine Hihlung zwischen dem Kérper des Tieres und dem 
Réhrchen sich vorfand. Alle 5 Individuen dieser Art sind leider in 
dieser Weise in ihren Réhrehen festgeleimt, und ich habe nur eins in 
der vorherbeschriebenen Weise herausgenommen. Dass dies Verhaltnis 
die genaue Untersuchung des Tieres hindert, ist selbstverstindlich, und es 
ware zu wiinschen, dass die Zoologen, die in der Zukumft Gelegenheit 
haben werden Sabelliden einzufangen — denn dies gilt wohl den meisten 
hierhergehérenden Formen — dafiir sorgen wiirden, wenigstens einige 
Individuen aus den Rédhrchen zu nehmen, wahrend die Tiere noch am 
Leben sind. Dass sie in solchem Falle sich nicht mit einer solchen 
firnisartigen Schicht umgeben, sieht man bei Sabelliden, die frei in dem 
Alkohol liegen, und die sich also jedenfalls vor dem Tode selbst aus 
dem Réhrchen herausgearbeitet haben. 


1898—1902. No. 15.| ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 91 


Wie wir sehen werden, zeigen ,Fram“s Exemplaren sich in keiner 
nennenswerten Beziehung von der typischen Dasychone infarcta Kr, 
verschieden, die aussere Form ausgenommen, und auf dieser allein kann 
ich mit einiger Wahrscheinlichkeit keine neue Art griinden. 

Das aus dem Rohrchen herausgenommene Individuum (Fig. 7a) ist 
c. 115 mm. lang und c. 8 mm. breit; es ist leicht dorsi-ventral zusammen- 
gedriickt mit elliptischem Durchschnitt; das Hinterteil des Tieres ist 
dorsal aufgebogen, sodass es mit dem ubrigen Koérper des Tieres fast 
einen rechten Winkel bildet. Die Kiemen, die c. 28 mm. in der Linge 
messen, sind unten durch eine Haut verbunden, und ihre zusammen- 
gewachsene Basis ist von jeder Seite spiralfoérmig eingerollt; man zahit 
auf jeder Seite c. 40. Die einzelnen Kiemenstimme haben dunkle rot- 
liche Querbainder unter den paarweise gestellten, dorsalen Anhangen; 
diese sind linglich elliptisch mit schmaler Basis und stumpf abgerundeter 
Spitze (Fig. 7). Die fadenférmigen Kiemenstrahlen reichen ungefahr 
bis zur Spitze des Kiemenstammes (Fig. 7b). Der Halskragen hat 
einen ventralen und auf jeder Seite einen lateralen Einschnitt. Auf der 
Riickenseite geht er abwirts mit einem abgerundeten Lappchen auf 
jeder Seite, welches so mit dem Kérper des Tieres zusammengewachsen 
ist, dass die rechte und linke Seite des Kragens durch eine breite, 
offene Partie getrennt werden. Die beiden Tentakeln, die auf jeder Seite 
zwischen den Spiralen der Kiemenkrone versteckt liegen, sind stark 
zugespitzt, messerférmig mit scharfer Schneide. Das Tier besteht aus 
einer sehr grossen Anzahl von Ringen; der vorderste Teil zahlt 8 haar- 
borstentragende Riickenparapodien, 7 hackenborstentragende Bauchpara- 
podien, indem der erste Ring nur Riickenborsten trigt. Die Ricken- 
borsten, die alle gleichartig sind, haben einseitige, gestreifte Verbramung 
und weit ausgezogene feine Spitze (Figg. 7e und 7f). Die Bauch- 
borsten, die vogelformig sind (Figg. 7 g und 7h), sind im Vorder- und 
Hinterteil des Tieres ein wenig verschieden geformt. Zwischen den 
Racken- und Bauchparapodien findet man fast in der ganzen Lange des 
Tieres deutliche, schwarze Pigmentflecke. Bei starkerer Lupe-Ver- 
grésserung zeigt sich jeder aus einer kleinen Gruppe schwarzer Pinkt- 
chen hestehend (Fig. 7 d). 

Ausser den von dem Gansefjord erwahnten Individuen, findet sich 
das Vorderteil von einem, leider nur mit den fiinf ersten Parapodien; 
es ist in der Renbucht genommen. An diesem kleinen Bruchstiick sieht 
man indessen, dass das Tier wenigstens mit dem Vorderteile aus dem 
Rohrchen herausgekrochen ist, denn die Parapodien stehen hier frei 
heraus, und es ist nichts von der glanzenden, gelben, firnisartigen 


22 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Schicht zu entdecken wie sonst bei den tbrigen von dem Gansefjord 
stammenden Individuen. An diesem Bruchstiick von der Renbucht sind 
die zwei ventralen Lippchen des Halskragens nach unten gebogen, was 
nicht der Fall ist bet dem aus dem Réhrchen herausgenommenen Indi- 
vid von dem Gansefjord, ein Faktum, welches zeigt, dass dies Verhaltnis 
als Geschlechts- oder Artscharakter keinen Wert hat. Wahrscheinlich 
kénnen die Tiere die Lappchen ganz nach Belieben umbiegen oder sie 
ausbreiten; und wahrscheinlich ist es vielleicht, dass das Tier, wenn es 
sich in das Rohrchen hineinzieht, sie ausbreitet. Diese Vorgang der 
Ventrallippchen des Kragens ist von Wrren (I. c. p. 422) erwahnt. 


Serpulide. 


Spirorbis verruca Fasr. 


1883, Levinsen, |. c. p. 208, Tab. H, Fig. 8h—j; Tab. HI, Fig. 2—3. 
Lokalitat: 


Juli 24, 1899, Einige Individuen an der Siidspitze des Pern-Island mit Hand- 
Schabeisen genommen. 


Spirorbis spirillum L. 


1883. Levinsen, |. c. p. 211, Tab. H, Fig. 8k; Tab. IH, Fig 14—16. 
Lokalitiat: 
Aug. 5. 1898. Upernivik, 20-26 Mt. 
Aug. 16. 1898. Foulkefjord, Reindeerpoint, 4-20 Mt. 
Aug. 30. 190l. Der Géansefjord. 
Juli 15. 1902. Vor dem Meerrossfelsen, North Devon. Boden steinig mit 
Laminarien. 


1898—1902. No. 15.] ANNULATA POLYCHAETA. 93 


Erklarung der Abbildungen. 


Fig. 1. Harmothoé imbricata (L.). Elytron. Zeiss a, Oc. 2. 
— a. und b. Bauchborsten desselben Tieres. Zeiss C. Oc. 3. 
Fig. 2. Harmothoé rarispina Sars. Teil eines Elytrons. Zeiss a, Oc. 2. 
= a. und b. Bauchborsten desselben Tieres. Zeiss A. Oc. 3. 
Fig. 3. Harmothoé rarispina Sars, Teil eines Elytrons. Zeiss a, Ce. 2. 
— a.und b. Bauchborsten desselben Tieres. Zeiss A. Oc. 3. 
Fig. 4. Zwischenform zwischen H. imbricata (L.) und H. rarispina Sars. Teil des 
Elytrons. Zeiss A. Oc. 2. 
a. und b. Bauchborsten desselben Tieres. Zeiss C. Oc. 3. 
Fig. 5. Harmothoé imbricata L. Teil eines Elytrons. Zeiss C. Oc. 2. 
Fig. 6. a. und b, Anaitis Wahlbergi Mern. Haarborsten 
_ a. Zeiss C. Oc. 2. 
—  b. Zeiss E. Oc 2 
Fig 7. Dasychone infarcta (Kr). Tier im Réhrchen eingezogen. 
Tier aus dem Rohrchen herausprapariert. 
Die Spitze einer Kieme. Zeiss a, Oc 2. 
Mittlere Teil einer Kieme, Loupenvergr. 
Einige Ringe des hintersten Teils des Tieres, die Pigmentfleckchen zeigend. 
Haarborste des achten Parapodiums. Zeiss C. Oc. 2 
Haarborste eines der hintersten Parapodien. Zeiss C. Oc. 2. 
Hackenborste des zweiten Parapodiums. Zeiss E. Oc. 2. 
Hackenborste eines der hintersten Parapodien. Zeiss E. Oc. 2. 


| | 
FOR me ao re 


Gedruckt 19, Marz 1909. 


Rep. of the 2"! Norweé.Arct.Exp.in the Fram 1898-1902.No.15. 


Taf. I. 


7 la Tb 
ia 
ier 
-_ 
{ 
& , j 
Sa / 
Vy y ef 
2 ; ? 
’ ‘ > ¥ iO) 
yo Pon Y ) 
£6 
3 
2a 
4. 
Kart-og Litoyraferingsh. Kroe. 


Hjalmar Ditlevsen del. 


Rep.of the gyal Norweg.Arct.Exp. in the Fram 1898 


“1902.No.45. 


Taf. II. 


3 


3b 


ial Ay 
ey al 
| | 
at Y 
‘ ) re, 
et 
p 
$ oe 
{ ros 
\ 1 a + 
rd b, 
2 val 
ay 
ad 
ST al 
4a 


6b 


rn, 
Di 
i, 
ee 
i 
t 
7 


Hjalmar Ditlevsen del. 


Kar}-og Litograferingeh.Kra 


Rep. ot the gyi Norweg.Aret-Exp.in the Fram 1898-1902 .No.15. 


Taf. Il. 


She 


Ze 


7a 


1g 


v 


Kart-og Litograferingsh.Kr.e 


Hjalmar Ditlevsen del. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 16. 


H. G. SIMMONS: 


A REVISED LIST 


OF THE 


FLOWERING PLANTS AND FERNS 


OF 


NORTH WESTERN GREENLAND 


WITH SOME SHORT NOTES ABOUT THE AFFINITIES OF THE FLORA 


(WITH ONE MAP IN THE TEXT) 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABETIKRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


COC: 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1909 


Introduction. 


Rou all the arctic lands, Greenland is by far the largest, 
extending from Cape Farewell, in lat. 59°46’, to Cape Morris Jesup, 
lat. 83° 39’, and Cape Bridgeman, in lat. 83°35’, and from Cape 
Alexander, in long. W. fr. Gr. 75° 30’, to the east coast of Shannon 
Island, in long. W. 17°30’. Its area may very roughly be reckoned 
as 600,000 square miles. From a botanical point of view, however, only 
a comparatively small part of its wide expanse is of any interest, the 
whole interior being covered up by the inland ice, the widest ice sheet 
of the Northern Hemisphere, which sends out numerous arms of different 
size to the coast, thus separating the habitable land into many parts, 
that may, however, be naturally grouped as follows: 

Danish West Greenland, from Cape Farewell up to the southern 
side of Melville Bay about lat. 74°. In the south, it is not sharply 
defined from the coastland of the east coast, but to the north it is 
separated from the land beyond Melville Bay by the many and mighty 
glaciers that, except for some coast mountains and nunataks, alone 
surround the interior of the bay, forming a very natural and well- 
defined demarcation-line between the southern and northern coast districts 
with their, in many respects, different floras and types of vegetation. 

North Western Greenland, beginning at the north side of Melville 
Bay in about lat. 76° and stretching up to the northernmost point, 
where it merges into the east coast, may be looked upon as being 
formed of two differents parts, the southern or Smith Sound region up 
to about lat. 79°, and the northern, from about 80° northwards. The 
boundary between them is formed by the enormous Humboldt Glacier, 
forming the coast-line for nearly one degree of latitude — a barrier 
which is not easily surmounted by any plant migration. 

Eastern Greenland is not so easily separated into natural divisions. 


A tolerably well defined line, however, may be drawn about lat. 73°30’, 
1 


4 H. G. SIMMONS. |SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


at Cape Hold with Hope, south of which the great fjord district begins, 
stretching to the south side of Scoresby Sound (about lat. 70°) and 
showing a climate and other natural conditions that make it little apt 
to be drawn into comparison with North-Western Greenland. I shall 
not here enter further upon the question about the possibilities of distin- 
guishing phyto-geographical subdivions of this coast-land, but will only 
mention that when in the following pages, I speak of North-Eastern | 
Greenland, I draw the southern boundary at Cape Dalton in 69° 25’, 
where the comparatively well-examined area of Scoresby Sound ends 
and a coast-strech with many great glaciers begins. 

Of these different parts of Greenland, the first mentioned is by far 
the best surveyed in botanical as well as in other respects. The Danish 
colonization, now of nearly two hundred years’ standing, has made it 
more easily accessible, many of the officials of the colonies have 
materially contributed to our knowledge about it, and the Danish Govern- 
ment has encouraged and supported the scientific exploration of its 
colonial districts in many ways, so as to make that district the best 
known of all the arctic lands. The other parts of the country have 
been explored only by casual expeditions, many of them even lacking 
members qualified for careful and reliable scientific work; long stretches 
of the coast have never been visited, at least not during the favorable 
season and therefore they still form a veritable terra incognita so far 
as their natural conditions are concerned. 

This also is the case with North-Western Greenland, notwithstand- 
ing the many expeditions that have visited at least some parts of it. 
I am now going to give a sketch of the nature of this region, so far 
as it may be compiled from the works of the different explorers; but 
first I will give a historical summary of the expeditions which have 
contributed to our present knowledge about Greenland north of Mel- 
ville Bay. 

The first European who sighted the land north of that wide bay 
was WituiaM Barrin', who in 1616 navigated up through the great 
inland sea now bearing his name. After passing Melville Bay by the 
“middle passage” as the whalers have since termed it, he entered the 
“North water” which led him up to Smith Sound. His northernmost 


I now leave quite out of consideration the very problematic voyages of the first 
scandinavian colonists of Greenland who are thought to have gone beyond 
Melville Bay. Some passages in the chronicles of the Greenland colonies point 
indeed to their having visited the “North water” but they certainly did not 
pass Smith Sound, and their discoveries were at all events lost. 


1898—1902. No. 16] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 5) 


point was at lat. 77° 45’, from whence he sighted the entrance to Ingle- 
field Gulf (Whale Sound) with Hakluyt Island, Smith Sound, the Carey 
Islands and some points on the Greenland coast, which were named 
by him, as well as Ellesmereland on the west side. 

For fully two hundred years after Barrin’s voyage none, except 
perhaps some dutch whalers, entered the upper part of Baffin’s Bay 
and it was even erased from the maps; but in 1818 the English Govern- 
ment sent out an expedition under the command of Joun Ross, who 
verified the discoveries of Barrin and sailed up Smith Sound as far as 
to within sight of Cape Alexander. Ross also effected the first landing 
here, on Bushnan Island and, later, at Cape York and other points. 

In 1849—50 the transport ship North Star, under the command of 
Saunpers, wintered in North Star Bay in Wolstenholme Sound, where, 
however, no exploration of any extent was undertaken. 

The next visitor was E. A. INGLEeriIELD, who, in the summer of 
1852, made a cruise up to Smith Sound in search of Sir Joun FRanK.in. 
He landed at several places; among others he carefully examined 
Wolstenholme Sound, entered Granville Bay and, following the shore, 
came to a small inlet, evidently Burdin Bay, where an Eskimo village 
was visited. Further, he ascertained the position of the islands at the 
mouth of what we now call Inglefield Gulf and, passing Cape Alexander, 
obtained a view through Smith Sound into what is now termed Kane 
Basin, naming several points on both coasts. In lat. 78° 28’ he turned 
back because of unfavorable ice-conditions. 

Already in the following year, an american expedition came up 
through Smith Sound, commanded by ExisHa Kent Kane. He was 
able to round Cairn Point at the northern entrance of the Sound and, 
proceeding along the coast, he took up his winter quarters in Rensselaer 
Bay. From thence he examined not only the shore up to the Hum- 
boldt Glacier, but also sent forward sledging expeditions. His mate 
Morton and the Greenlander Hans Henprix were thus the first who 
visited what Kane called Washington Land, that is to say, the Green- 
land coast from the Humboldt Glacier northwards to the southern part 
of the Kennedy Channel. Kane’s expedition, which lasted two years, 
brougt home some rather valuable information about these regions, be- 
sides mapping a long stretch of coast-line. 

The next explorer was again an american, J. J. Hayes, who in 
1860—61 wintered in Port koulke and examined the adjoining region 


besides making journeys to the western side. 


6 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Then came in 1871 Cuartes Francis Haut in the “Polaris”, who, 
finding the ice conditions unusually good, sailed up to the northern ex- 
tremity of the Robson Channel, where the Greenland coast begins to 
trend more eastward. A long stretch of coast was made known by 
this expedition, which was soon followed by the english government 
expedition under the command of G. S. Nares, who, in 1875, went along 
the route of the Polaris up to the northern part of Robson Channel. 
Indeed, most of the explorations carried out by this expedition fell on 
the west side of the channels; but it has also contributed to our know- 
ledge of the Greenland coast along them as well as to the north, where 
Beaumont reached lat. 82° 25’. 

After the lapse of a few years, the northern parts of Greenland 
were again visited by an exploring party of an expedition, which had 
its principal field of work in Grinnelland. Lieutenant Locxwoop, of the 
GrEELY-expedition, then made a sledge journey along the Greenland 
coast, from which he was able to state that it extended to lat. 83° 35’, 
a little south of which Locxwoop turned in May 1882. 

Some other expeditions have contributed to the knowledge of these 
parts of Greenland, or have at least visited them on the way to other 
fields of work. I may mention among them the english Franklin Search 
expedition under Penny in 1850; the swedish expedition in the Sofia in 
1883; the ill-fated expedition of Bsérure in 1893 which, after visiting 
the Carey Islands and the Greenland coast, proceeded up to Southern 
Ellesmereland never to be seen again; the Fram expedition in which | 
myself took part, which visited Foulke Fjord in 1898 and 1899; and the 
Danish literary expedition under the late Mr. Mytius Ericusen, who has 
since succumbed to the hardships of another expedition. 

A wide field of work in the northern parts of Greenlands is that — 
which has been covered by R. E. Peary in his different voyages be- 
tween 1891 and 1906. He has also had an opportunity of stating that 
Greenland does not extend as far as, or beyond, the Pole, as has for- 
merly been believed, but that it ends at lat. 83° 39’. It is only to be 
regretted that so indefatigable an explorer should not have shown more 
interest in the different fields of scientific investigation, that could have 
yielded so rich a harvest and that would have given a far greater value 
to his voyages. Some important work is, however, done both by mem- 
bers of his own expeditions and of the auxiliary parties which have been 
sent up year after year. 

Before I pass on to the special botanic information due to the 
different expeditions, I will try to give a summary account of the phys- 


1898—1902, No. 16.| FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 7 


ical geography of the region in question. A first look at the map of 
N. W. Greenland shows that most parts of it are typical fjord-lands. 
There are exceptions to this in the shore of Melville Bay, and along the 
Kane Basin and Kennedy Channel, all of which are less indented. Most 
parts of the coast are high and bold, either forming a tableland falling 
abruptly down to the shore, or broken up by deep valleys. Many favo- 
rable localities for the development of a thriving vegetation are thus 
formed; and in many places the richness of bird-life also helps to make 
the soil favorable for plant-life. The rich green of the manured soil in 
and below the rookeries of auks and other sea-birds, makes them dis- 
cernible from afar. Doubtless, therefore, the arms of the larger fjords 
also, — especially Inglefield Gulf — where the climate is less severe than 
along the outer coast, where the cliffs form breedingplaces for in- 
numerable birds, and where valleys of considerable extent trend 
inland are by far the richest in number of species as well as in density 
of vegetation, whereas the open coast is comparatively poor. Along the 
shore of Melville Bay, where every valley is filled by a glacier, there is 
of course space for very little vegetation. Further northwards come the 
richest districts, Wolstenholme Sound, Inglefield Gulf and Foulke Fjord 
with their adjacent ice-free land. Now, indeed, this ice-free coast land 
is continued by a fairly broad stretch along the Kane Basin to the 
Humboldt Glacier; and to the north there occurs a still broader expanse 
of ice-free land, but very few plants are known from these parts. How- 
ever, | am inclined to think that, for instance, the slopes and table-lands 
along the Kennedy Channel might be apt to contain a rather well-deve- 
loped vegetation. It must, however, be borne in mind, that these regi- 
ons are far less accurately investigated than the southern coast parts. 
Only one of the expeditions which have been there has had a member 
specially acting as botanist; and, apart from the wintering of the Polaris 
at Thank God Harbour, only casual visits have been made to the north- 
ern parts of the North-Western Greenland coast, mostly during the un- 
favorable season. ~ 

Another point always to be borne in mind is the diversity of the 
geological nature of the different parts of the coast-line. About this 
there is, however, very little known, as most expeditions have had no 
members able either to recognize the rocks belonging to different geolog- 
ical systems, or to determine fossils; and, in most cases, no collections 
seem to have been made. Yet some indications are to be found, 
especially in De Rance and Fempen, Appendix 15, Geology, in Nares, 
Narrative. Naruorst, N. W. Gronl., also mentions that at Ivsugigsok the 


8 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP.FRAM 


rocks were formed of gneiss and micaslate with veins of quarts which, 
according to him, forms generally in arctic lands a poor soil for the 
development of vegetation. Indeed, my own experience from Ellesmere- 
land is quite different; the regions with an underground of primary rock 
there being by far the richest in density of vegetation and number of 
species. Now this seems principally due to the stability of the rock, 
which, as being less easily attacked by the frost, gives a less changing 
surface; the débris of other strata may form a richer soil if it is only 
preserved long enough to be come clad with vegetation. A soil formed 
of débris, for instance of Silurian limestone, but resting on Archaean 
rock, is probably the most favorable; and the richness of the Foulke 
Fjord flora mentioned in the following, may perhaps be partly due to 
such a combination in the geological nature of the place. 

From Cape York the Archaean rocks may be followed northwards 
at least to Littleton Island, forming the basement of the mountains along 
the outer coast and also the upper parts of some of them. According 
to De Rance and Fempen, lower Silurian (Cambrian?) strata of grit and 
conglomerate appear between Wolstenholme and Whale Sounds, and in 
Foulke Fjord there rest upon a basement of gneiss, thick layers of Ter- 
tiary, probably Miocene, sandstone and conglomerate overlaid by basalt. 
As far as could be judged from a distance, the architecture of Cape 
Alexander is the same as in Foulke Fjord, and probably the same geo- 
logical structure continues further north as far as to the great gap in the 
coast filled by the Humboldt Glacier. North of the great glacier appear 
Silurian strata, mostly limestone, through Washington Land to Peter- 
mann Fjord, and from Hall Land northwards the coast, according to the 
last-mentioned authors, is built up of older, azoic rocks (Algonkian ?). 

The loose deposits, resting on the rock basement, are principally of 
three kinds: — either débris fallen from the cliffs, or washed down dur- 
ing the melting of the snow, or formed under the surface of the sea 
and afterwards raised to their present position. This upheaval of the 
land has evidently taken place at a rather late period, as may be seen 
from the well-preserved organic remains found at various heights above 
the present shore-line. Indeed the observations concerning these pheno- 
mena, are mostly made on the other side of the Channels, but the same 
feature is also prevalent in North-Western Greenland. Raised beaches 
and deposits containing marine shells and other remains proving their 
origin on the sea bottom, play a very important part in the formation 
of the loose soil of these regions, 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 7) 


So far as can be gathered from the literature at present available, 
there are hardly any deposits of an extent worth noting, that are due 
to glacial action in former times. Indeed, there are very few indications 
from which an opinion may be formed, especially concerning the north- 
ern parts of our area; but I think I may be allowed to conclude from 
them, that the same holds true for this region as Scuer says in his 
Prel. Rep. Geol., p. 9, about Ellesmereland: “there are no materials lying 
on those parts of the country that are not now glaciated that could, with 
any probability, be considered to result from the action of glaciers.” 

Indeed, the map showing the extent of glaciation in America, which 
accompanies chapter XLI in Grrxre, The Great Ice Age, Ed. 3, gives the 
north-western part of the land a complete covering of ice. I am at a 
loss to understand why the author of that chapter, Professor T. C. CHam- 
BERLIN, has presumed that the inland ice has reached so far, the more 
so as he has not drawn the entire Arctic Archipelago ice-covered, as it 
is in older maps. It would, of course, be of no small interest to know 
if such an ice sheet ever existed, as then every species of the present 
flora must have immigrated in post-glacial time. I am most inclined 
to think, indeed, that hardly any higher plants have lived there during 
the maximum of glaciation, but still I look upon the existence of ice- 
free land as probable, even if perhaps much larger glaciers have pro- 
truded into the fjords. The geological map of Dawson gives no enlight- 
enment about the existence of glacial deposits, and no geological explor- 
ation has been made north of Smith Sound since the time of the Nares 
expedition. 

About the present extension of the ice-sheet also, there are different 
statements. The new danish map shows in several points the ice-border 
further west than, for instance, it is shown in the english Admiralty 
Chart and the maps from which that is compiled. In all probability, how- 
ever, the ice-free land in most parts of N. W. Greenland is rather broad, 
and consequently affords room for the development of vegetation inland 
also. As to the approximate extent of the ice-free, habitable land, it is, 
of course, impossible to form an opinion at present. 

Another factor of great importance is to be found in the climate 
of the region and especially in the amount of yearly precipitation. Con- 
cerning this, however, there is but little to be found in the existing 
literature. The results obtained in the adjacent Ellesmereland by the 
expeditions of Nares, GreeLy and ourselves may, however, together 
with what is to be found in the publications about the voyages of Kane, 
Haves and Hatt, enable us to form the conclusion that the amount of 


10 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


precipitation is very small indeed, probably not much above 100 mm. 
in most parts, perhaps somewhat greater in the southern part, where 
the open “north water’ is always to be found some miles from the 
coast, perhaps also locally here and there along the Kennedy and Rob- 
son Channels. The same circumstances consequently prevail here as 
throughout the Arctic Islands. I shall not enter here upon the influence 


of temperature and snow covering. 


Historical Review of the Botanical Explorations. 


After this short sketch of the physical geography of the region in 
question, I have to discuss, in some detail, the material for the know- 
ledge of the flora of North-Western Greenland, contained in the jour- 
nals and other publications from the above-mentioned expeditions. I very 
much regret not to have had the collections of the different american 
expeditions for inspection. That those who have determined the plants 
have made mistakes on many points cannot be doubted, and in several 
cases, most probably, the collections from different localities, or even 
from far avay districts in Greenland, have been confounded, either by 
the collectors themselves or afterwards, thus causing a confusion which 
makes it hardly possible to use the statements at all; for instance, about 
the botanical harvest of Kane and Hayes. The collections of the eng- 
lish expeditions I have had an opportunity of revising at the Natural 
History Museum of London and at the Herbarium of the Royal Gar- 
dens, Kew, but still here there is much evidence lacking also, as the 
localities are, in many cases, not mentioned in the labels; it is also 
impossible to see under what different species the specimen may have 
originally been placed. In some cases, not a single specimen bears out 
the statements for instance of Hart or Ontver. 

The first record of plants from our area, is to be found in the jour- 
nal of Joun Ross’s voyage in 1818. The list of plants in his work is 
unfortunately of very little value, as not only are no special localities 
mentioned, but even the plants, collected in Danish and N. W. Green- 
land as well as in Possession Bay in Baffins Land, are not kept sepa- 
rate. A few notes, however, are found in the running text of Ross’s 
journal, and of these I have tried to make use, as far as possible, in 
the following treatment of each species, 

The next explorer who collected plants in N. W. Greenland was 
Dr. Perer C. SurHertanp who, as a member of the Franklin Search 


189S—1902. No.16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 11 


expedition under the commando of Penny, visited, on August 10, 1850, 
Bushnan Island where Ross had also landed. SuTHertanp, who was 
a trained botanist, has given a list of the plants collected during the 
expedition, with localities mentioned for every species, most of which are, 
however, only collected to the west. 

SUTHERLAND again visited N. W. Greenland in 1852 as surgeon of 
the search-expedition under INGLEFieLp, where he probably took a large 
part in bringing together the collection of plants named in the “Notes of 
Flowering Plants and Algae” which forms one of the Appendices to Incue- 
FIELD's Summer Search. Some plants were, however, collected by the com- 
mander and other members of the expedition. Collections were made 
at Wolstenholme Sound and Whale Sound. Detailed information about 
the points in the first-mentioned inlet, where plants were collected, is 
wanting; but from some details and a small list of plants contained in 
the journal, it may be concluded where this collection was made (I. c., 
p. 99—62): “After running twenty-one miles from Cape Parry along the 
shore, huts were observed in a bight that proved to be a small deep water 
bay”. The place so designed can only be Burdin Bay, and, as no other 
landing in Inglefield Gulf is mentioned, I think the Whale Sound plants 
were all collected at Burdin Bay. 

Dr. E. K. Kane, who spent two years (1853—55) in N. W. Green- 
land, has made a good many notes about the flora and vegetation of 
the different points visited during the expedition, and a fairly extensive 
collection was brought home too, which had been gathered by himself 
and others, for instance the Danish interpreter Petersen. Kane had 
also made collections and notes when, in 1850, he visited the neighbour- 
hood of Cape York in the first Grinett-expedition under De Haven. 
His collections were given to Mr. Ertas Duranp who used them for his 
memoir “Plantae Kaneanae Groenlandicae”. It is, however, to be re- 
gretted that Kane was not more of a trained botanist, for he had an 
opportunity of examining parts of the coast never visited by any other 
explorer; and he had doubtless as well, a keen eye for detecting even 
the more insignificant species, and a greater interest in botany than most 
of the travellers in these regions. Now, many of his notes are deci- 
dedled based upon wrong identifications. Another unfortunate circum- 
stance is, that his collections, made partly in Danish Greenland, partly 
to the north, have doubtless in some cases been confounded during the 
difficult and hazardous retreat of the expedition after the abandonment 
of the ‘Advance’. Much had to be left behind; and even if, through 
Kane’s indefatigable exertions, as much was carried along in the boats 


12 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


as could be taken besides the indispensable outfit, I think the fact that 
many specimens came into the hands of the editor without references 
to the special locality, must be accounted for by the circumstances of 
the retreat. 

That Duranp, who was entrusted with the treatment of these valu- 
able collections, was by no means able to do it in a satisfactory man- 
ner is clearly shown, both by the many evidently wrong identifications 
in his paper — which have since caused many wrong statements to be 
made about the distribution and range of different plants, and false 
conclusions to be based upon them by later authors — and also by the 
curious theoretical speculations which he has inserted in the introduc- 
tion to his list. I have tried to make as much use as possible of his 
indications about the occurrence of the different plants, as also of the 
remarks to be found in Kane’s own journal; but in many cases I have 
been obliged to take refuge in more conjecture based upon my know- 
ledge about the plants that may be really meant, or the occurrence of 
which is probable. Where that has not been possible, for instance where 
the record may equally well be referred to one species as to another, 
I have preferred to leave it quite out of consideration. Kane's collec- 
tions and notes also form the first contribution of the botany of the 
region north of the Humboldt Glacier. 

The collections brought home by Hayes from his expedition in 
1860—61, were also treated by Duranp. His list of the plants, collec- 
ted for the greater part in Port Foulke, but some also in other points 
of the N. W. Greenland coast or in Ellesmereland, has already been 
criticized by other authors, especially MatmGren (Grinnell. FI.) and Nar- 
Horst (N. W. Grénl.). Besides the evidently wrong statements based 
upon mistakes in identification of species, there are also other more or 
less doubtfull points about the Enum. pl. Smith S., especially, that the 
dates and localities given there, disagree in several points with the jour: 
nal of Hayes. According to Duranp, all the plants were collected in 
1861, none during the autumn of 1860, and at the following places in 
the following order: 


July (15th specially mentioned) and August : Port Foulke 


— 12th — Ath: Netlik 
— 27th and 29th: Gale Point (Ellesmereland) 
— 28th : Cape Isabella  — 


Sept. 4th : Tessiussak. 


1898— 1902. No.16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W.GREENLAND. 18 


According to Haves’s own Journal and his address to the American 
Philosophical Society of Philadelphia, Dec. 6, 1861, the expedition visited 
the following places enumerated in chronological order: 


Proven . . . . . Danish Greenland Aug. 6—12, 1860 
Upernivik. . 2... — — » 12-16 , 
Tasiusak (Tessiussak) — — ,» 21-92 , 
Cape York . . . . N.W. — 5 20 3 
Cape Alexander . .) — ~- » 30 a 
Littleton Island 2. — _ Sept. 3 . 
Port Foulke. 2. 2. 2.0 — — 4 


” 


After wintering there, the following points were visited the next 


year (besides those only reached in sledging expeditions during the 
winter time): 


Port Foulke. . . . . . . N. W. Grenland until July 14 1861 
Littleton Island . . . . . — — . 5—7 , 
— — Sy lew its dibs 2 = — » 14? , 
Cairn Point. . . 2... ace — - ? ‘i 
Cape Isabella . . . . . . Ellesmereland rs - 
Gale Point. . . . ..., — ? Fe 
Hakluyt Island . . . . . N.W. Greenland 2 . 
Burdin Bay (Netlik) ©. . .  — —  ? (several days, not July 12) 
Itiplik (Ittiblu?) 2. 2. 2. 2. 2 00 = — ? 
Upernivik . . . . . . . Danish — Aug. 14—? 1861 
Augpalartok (Aukpadlartok) . = — ‘ ? ‘4 
Godhavn. ...... — — Sept. 1 e 


At the beginning of September, the expedition was already far to 
the south, and consequently no plants could then be collected in N. W. 
Greenland. There must, therefore, be something wrong about the indi- 
cation “‘Tessiussak, Sept. 4th” but it is probably not the date only. 
Duranp says: Dr. Hayes’s collections have been confined to the limits 
of the 78th and 82nd parallels (Enum. pl. Smith S., p. 93), but no col- 
lections are made north of lat. 79° and Hayes (Op. Pol. Sea, p. 55) 
speaks explicitly of his “Proven and Upernivik collections”, which al- 
ready contained all the plants he saw at ‘“‘Tessiussak”, when he went 
botanizing there (Aug. 1860, see above). Those collections from the more 
southerly parts of Greenland have, in all probability, formed part of the 
material which Duranp has treated as having been collected only north 
of Melville Bay, and thus an explanation may be found for the fact, 


14 H. G. SIMMONS. |SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


hat he has recorded some species not previously known from these 
‘egions. Such are to be found especially among the plants from “Tes- 
siussak” which I have also quite excluded from my lists of occurrence; 
wo species of Durann’s list thus disappear entirely, viz. Campanula 
rotundifolia and Lycopodium annotinum. From Netlik (which was not 
visited July 12th), there are some doubtful statements also, especially 
Alchemilla vulgaris, which I[ have, however, entered with hesitation. 
Some of the Netlik and Port Foulke plants have indeed never been 
ound again there by other collectors, but, as they are found in adja- 
‘ent regions, they may still grow there. Such are “Armeria vulgaris” 
Statice maritima), Betula nana, and Tofieldia palustris. 

Cases in which I have not excluded a species doubtless wrongly 
letermined, but have only altered the name as I have thought right, 
nay be seen in the following, from the special synonymics under each 
species. 

Still there would be a certain interest in knowing where the plants 
rom “Tessiussak, Sept. 4”, are really collected. Now the newer maps 
f the region, the English Admiralty Chart of 1896, as well, as the new 
xreenland map published by Commissionen for Ledelsen av de geolo- 
ogiske og geographiske Undersogelser 1 Gronland, 1906, know no such 
lace in the region north of Melville Bay; but in the map accompa- 
rying Hayes, Arct. boat journ., there is a place so named at the north 
ide of Wolstenholme Sound or in Granville Bay (the map is very 
naccurate). This place might have been visited during the journey north- 
vard in 1860, even if no visit there is mentioned by Hayes, but cer- — 
ainly not in 1861. At all events, such plants as the above-mentioned 
lo not appear there. It is more probable indeed, that the species in 
juestion and some more, may have been collected at the Danish out- 
vost (Udliggersted) of Tasiusak in lat. 73° 21', when Hayes visited it 
n 1860. 

Opposed to this supposition, on the other hand, is the fact mentio- 
ved by Durann, |. c., p. 93, that some plants, among them Lycopodium 
tnnotinum, only recorded from the dubious “‘Tessiussak”, were brought 
1ome in a living state. ‘These cannot have been taken so early as the 
irst year. Most probably they were collected at some of the last points 
hat were visited — Upernivik, with its environs, and Godhavn. Ma.m- 
‘REN, |. c., p. 174, thinks the latter place the most likely to be the one, 
rom which Hayes tried to bring home a living collection of arctic 
ants, and I can only agree with him. The name “Netlik” also is ab- 
ent from the new maps; but in the same place where it occurs in the 


1898-1902. No.16.] FLOW.PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W- GREENLAND. 15 


map of Hayes (Arct. boat journ.), there lies an Eskimo village named 
Natsilik, which is doubtless the same place. Hayes may have mis- 
understood the name, or it may have been altered since, which is often 
the case with Eskimo names. 

Another discrepancy, which ought to be mentioned, exists between 
Duranp’s list and that of Hayes himself (Op. Pol. Sea, p. 398—99), 
where some corrections are made; these are, however, of different value, 
being only partly based upon more reliable determination. 

During the next american expedition, that of Hatt, 1871, evidently 
very little was done towards the botanical exploration of the new land 
visited. BrsseLs, however, the leader of the expedition after the death 
of Hatt, has given a list of twenty-one or twenty-two species found in 
Hatt land, probably in the vicinity of Polaris Bay (Amer. Nordpol 
Exp., p. 304). One species is here added to the preliminary list of Bessets 
(Exp. Pol. Amer., p. 297) and the identifications of the species are said 
to have been verified by Asa Gray. Notwithstanding, I think that some 
of the records must be based on a mistake; such, for instance, as Erio- 
phorum vaginatum and most probably also Carew dioica. This list 
is, however, still of considerable interest as being the first contribution 
to the flora of the northern parts, with the exception of the few plants 
mentioned by Kans from Morton’s spring journey along Kennedy Channel. 

The Nares expedition in 1875—76 visited Cape York and Foulke 
Fjord in the southern part of our area, and, to the north, the region at 
the mouth of Bessels Bay as well as at Polaris Bay; and besides that, 
one single note is given about the vegetation at Braumont’s farthest. 
As the expedition had scientific investigations for its purpose more di- 
rectly than the previous ones, and as it also possessed a member spe- 
cially acting as its botanist, its botanical harvest was far greater than 
that of its predecessors. Mr. H. C. Hart, the botanist of the expedition, and 
several other members—Captain, now Colonel H. W. Fempen, Doctors 
Moss and Coprincer, besides others, brought together a rather extensive 
collection which is still of great value for the study of the flora. It is, 
however, to be regretted as I have already set forth in my Fl. Ellesm., 
that, in many cases, the specimens are labelled with insufficient care. 
In some cases also, it seems quite certain that specimens from the places 
in Danish Greenland visited by the expedition have got mixed with the 
N. W. Greenland and Ellesmereland collections, thus causing some wrong 
statements. In other cases, not a single specimen in the London her- 
barium confirms a statement that ought surely to be thus supported 


16 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


if doubts are not to arise in the mind of one who has had opportunities 
of forming a tolerably well-based opinion about the flora of those regions. 
The first list of the plants collected during the expedition, is given in 
Nares, Narrative, where Oxrver has enumerated the flowering plants 
from Ellesmereland, and J. D. Hooker has given some notes about the 
relations and peculiarities of the flora, to which I shall have to come 
back later on. Afterwards Hart himself gave a detailed record of the 
flora, with accounts about the distribution of each separate species 
(Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.). He also gives some notes about the vegetation of 
the places visited, beginning with some Danish Greenland ports and 
further on Cape York and Foulke Fjord which latter is represented as 
“this most interesting of all our havens”. I can fully agree with him 
in this view, as also in his conjecture that more remains to be found 
there, notwithstanding the Foulke Fjord list has now, after my two short 
excursions at the place, become by far the largest of any N. W. Green- 
land district of the same extent. 

Further to the north Hart visited Hannah Island and Bessels Bay. 
Among the plants from the latter locality he especially mentions Poa 
alpina, whichis, however, doubtless due to a wrong identification of a form of 
P. cenisia, as no specimen of the former exists in the London collec- 
tions. Polaris Bay was visited by Hart in May, when only few plants 
were discernible, and by Coppinger in July and August. This station 
is said to be rather poor in plant-life (for instance only two Sasxifragae 
and no Cyperaceae), and Harr is inclined to attribute this to the cir- 
cumstance that the climate is severer there than on the west side of the 
Channel. That may be so, but 1 am more inclined to think that it is 
caused by the geological nature ‘of the soil, the hard limestone forming 
a very poor ground. The entire list of Polaris Bay contains only 
twenty-two species, or in fact only nineteen. when those are exluded 
which are either wrongly determined, or cannot be upheld as separate 
(Papaver alpinum, Draba rupestris, Dryas octopetala). I am hardly 
inclined to think that this list is complete if it is to hold good for a 
wider range; but I have indeed seen small districts much further south 
in the limestone region of Ellesmereland having an equally poor vege- 
tation. 

The GreeLy expedilion did not contribute much to our knowledge of 
the Greenland flora, as its principal field of work fell to the west; still 
we are indebted to Lockwoop and Brarnarp for some plants from the 
northern-most points in the world where collections have been made 
(what the collections from the latest Danish East Greenland expedition 


1898 —1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W.GREENLAND. 17 


contain I do not yet know, but plants from an even still higher latitude 
may exist among them). Only a few plants could, however, be discerned 
at Lockwood Island in May. — 

How much may be done, even in a short excursion, by a trained 
botanist, especially one who is well aquainted beforehand with arctic 
plants, is shown by the visit of Natsorst to Ivsugigsok near Cape York, 
where he went with the “Sofia” in 1883, while-his commander, Norpen- 
SKIOLD, was on his inland ice trip from the Aulaitsivik Fjord in Danish 
Greenland. Notwithstanding that it is an open coast locality, he was 
able, after an excursion of only a few hours’ duration, to make up a 
list of fifty-eight species. In comparison it may be mentioned, that the 
whole list for the wide district of Inglefield Gulf, contains only seventy- 
three species; and that none of the different collectors has there obtained 
a greater number than 46. It may, however, be taken for granted, that 
the flora at Inglefield Gulf, must be richer than in any other part of 
N. W. Greenland, and will yield, in the most favorable spots, even more 
than the Foulke Fjord list (see p. 20). 

Two lists of plants, collected during expeditions sent as relief parties 
to Peary during his work in N. W. Greenland, have been published. 
The first of these is based upon specimens collected in 1891 by Dr. 
Burk at Cape York and in M’Cormick Bay, Inglefield Gulf, and in 1892 
by Mr. Meewan who has treated these collections in a paper in the 
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sc. of Philadelphia, 1893 (Contr. Greenl.). MerHan 
enumerates a good many localities where he has botanized, but from 
several of them not a single plant is mentioned in his accounts of dis- 
tribution which, moreover, are very imperfect. Another weak point of 
Meguan’s paper is, that he has been entirely unable to identify his 
plants as is shown by Horm, who has given a long list of corrections 
(Contr. Fl. Greenl.). Mr. Hotm has, however, only had opportunities of 
controlling the determination of some of the plants, represented in the 
National Herbarium of Washington; and several more of Mernan’s 
statements seem to be in a great need of corroboration or correction. 

Another list of plants collected in the Peary auxiliary expedition 
of 1894 by Dr. WerHerILL is made up at Harvard University. The 
names of those who are answerable for the determinations, seem to imply 
that they are reliable, in general at least; and, as the collections seem 
to have been made with care and without any intermixture of plants 
from different localities, this list is of great value and interest, the more 
so as it contains rather a large number of additions to the flora of our 


area. The flora of Cape York especially is enriched with several in- 
2 


18 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


teresting species, whose occurrence here seems to point to an im- 
migration over Melville Bay from Danish Greenland, as they are found 
neither to the north, nor in Ellesmereland. WerHerttL also seems to be 
the only botanist, who has made collections in the Carey Islands (Bjor- 
ling Island). 

In 1899—1901, the american geologist R. Stem made some collect- 
ions of plants on the west side of Smith Sound as well as at Cape 
York, Inglefield Gulf and Foulke Fjord. The specimens have been deter- 
mined by Mr. Hot of Brookland D. C., who has kindly sent me a list 
for publication. Part of it I have already used in my FI. Ellesm., the 
rest is used here. In some instances, I have employed other names 
than those in Mr. Hotm’s list, and, in one single case (Salix arctica 
for S. glauca and S. groenlandica), I have felt obliged to differ from 
his opinion. I am sorry not to have consulted further with him on this 
point, but I hope that he will excuse me, as I have not had time to do 
so at present. 

In 1908, the late Mr. L. Myttus Ericusen made a small collection 
at Granville Bay, and, in 1905, the Rev. Knup Bate brought home a 
somewhat larger collection from Wolstenholme Sound. Both collections 
are determined by Dr. C. H. Ostenre.p of Copenhagen (Fl. pl. Cape 
York). 

Lastly, I must mention my own material from Foulke Fjord, con- 
taining 130 numbers of flowering plants and ferns, and representing 76 
species. The whole collection was made during our two short visits to 
Foulke Fjord, in the course of three excursions which together were 
of hardly 30 hours’ duration. The lower land between Reindeer Point 
and Etah was, on both occasions, my field of excursion, that is to say, 
I had only an opportunity of walking over a strip of ground about half 
a mile in breath and four miles in length. It is much to be regretted, 
that I could not reach the interior part of the fjord nor the higher slopes 
and plateaus inland; as I cannot but think that they would have yielded 
important additions to my list — especially in the matter of bog- and 
water-plants, which are almost entirely lacking in my collection. I could 
also have wished very much for a trip over to Port Foulke, where I 
should perhaps have been able to verify some of the doubtful statements 
from Hayes’s time. The leader of the expedition, however, was too anx- 
ious to shorten our stay in Foulke Fjord, to allow time for a closer 
exploration which might have given valuable results. It was impossible 
even to obtain a landing at Cape Alexander, which was very desirable, 
and could easily have been effected, as we steamed past it so close as 


1898-1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 19 


to have the rich, green slopes in full view; but it was deemed more 
profitable to spend the time in walrus-hunting. 

The table below, which I have compiled in order to show the grad- 
ual widening of our knowledge about the flora of the region, I have 
thought to be of some interest; the more so, as it also gives some hints 
concerning the results to be expected from future exploration and about 
the different degrees of accuracy in the observations of different travellers. 
It must, however, be kept in mind, that some places are visited only 
during times when very little can be found; such, for instance, are Gran- 
ville and Lafayette Bays, and Lockwood Island; but, on the other hand 
also many places have certainly been very imperfectly explored. Judging 
from the brilliant verdure of the slopes of Cape Alexander, I cannot 
doubt that I should have been more than repaid, for a few hours’ visit 
there, by a list of at least 30—40 species, and a corresponding collection. 

The table does not give the numbers of species for each locality in 
such a way as they are to be taken directly from the different lists, but 
I have tried to make use of as many statements as possible, and have 
entered all records that are tolerably reliable, and not too vague as to 
the locality. If the somewhat indistinct statements of the older authors 
had been used in a larger degree, of course the numbers, for instance, 
for Ross, Kane, etc. would have been larger at the expense of the later 
collectors, who have given exact records about their specimens. Such 
indications as ,,Smith Sound stations“, ,Inglefield Gulf‘, etc., are of 
course left out of consideration here, even if sometimes I have mentioned 
them in the following statements about the occurrence of each separate 
species. 

If the 14 species, admitted in the special treatment as doubtful, are 
added to the number in the table, we get a total of 122 species. When 
Nartuorst (N. W. Grénl.) treated the flora in 1884, he gave a list of 88 
species to which, in his Nachtr., 4 more are added. Notwithstanding 
the fact that I have excluded 19 (besides some for which I use other 
names), the flora now reckons 16 species more or, in other words, 35 
species have been added since then. Some of these, however, had al- 
ready been found before Natuorst wrote his compilation, but they were 
either wrongly determined, or were excluded by him as too doubtful to 
insert in the list. Thus the new species are, in fact, only 29, found by 
Meenan, WETHERILL, STEIN, and myself. 

As I shall have to use the numbers of species for the whole area 
and its different parts in the following discussion about the affinity of 
the flora, I am sorry that I have not been able to make sure, at least 


20 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC, ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Table I. 
e|_ls| [a8 
2 ZiBl les altiziel ee 
Saeiledpeagilll [es 
olEls Berets Hic Brelsie s 
©|8)s 8/71, S/S) a) FE] /2 a |Si 5 = 
TES] SSlclE| SiS i2l ei clBlele s 
0 2/8/0)2) Flo) elo /S|5/ 8) 6).2) cox 
S/5/m 512/83) 8/8 slSie Elselsis g 
0 Ah |S ee (a a Je eran pe ied 
Bushnan Island 3, 9 | 10 
Cape York Sere) Rk ae ee 12 97) 11 39 
Ivsugigsok . . eewhs Urcee Ah yee 58 58 
Wolstenholme Soni ee eee j 84 
Saunders Island se: a he Wee og i 
Umanak ye seriay oo bce 5 13 23) 
Granville Bay . . . . 1... eee 6 6 
Carey Islands . ........-. | 5 5 
Inglefield Gulf. . . . ao he aebsiay o | 23 
Northumberland elon ie Aphis an ok 3 5] 1388 389 
Burdin Bay (Netiulumi, Netlik). . . {1} 15 10 4 29 
Bowdoin Bay ......... 10 10 
Cape Acland. . ........ 4 94 
Fan Glacier . . ........ 99 92 
Verhoef Nunatak . . . 1... . 7 7 
M’Cormick Bay. . . ‘ 11 11 
Cape Alexander & Sathesland Teland 9) 9 4 
Foulke Fjord ‘ 4 G6 1/18) 34 1| |76/23 81 
Fog Inlet & Bedevilled ‘Headly he ad nas {6 16 
Rensselaer Bay . ........ 93 93 
Mary Minturn River 8 8 
Lafayette Bay . ; 4 8 8 
Bessels Bay & Hanna, Ilana. woe 8 12 12 
Polaris.Bay'. 4 6 & & 2 uw wow w 21/18 v3) 
Lockwood Island... ...... 4 4 
Total number of species . . 3) 9/21/37/33/21/49| 4/58/19169/76/45! 6/23 
Additions to the N. W. Greenland flova 3} 7/12)26] 7 2) 9/18) 2]17) 9) 1)—|—]]t08 


of the value of all the existing indications; especially as there is another 
weak point always to be calculated with, viz., the imperfect exploration 
of most parts. In the hope of inducing some competent botanist to make 
a revision of the american collections, which may supply some future 
worker on the N. W. Greenland flora with material less studded with “?”, 
I will point out where those collections seem to be kept. 

The specimens of Kans, Hayzs, Bessers, Burk and MEEHAN are 
probably all included in the collections of the Academy of Natural Sci- 
ences of Philadelphia; at least it is especially mentioned, that some of 
them belong to that herbarium. The collections of WeETHERILL were 
determined at Harvard University, which probably possesses them. As 
to where the “private collection” of GREELY is kept, I am entirely ignor- 


1898—1902, No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W.GREENLAND. 21 


ant. A thorough revision—especially of the Kane and Hayes plants— 
would be of the greatest value; not only for an exact knowledge of the 
N. W. Greenland flora, but also for the settling of several questions 
concerning the flora of Danish Greenland, for which a considerable 
number of plants is recorded by Duranp alone, most probably because 
he has arrived at wrong determinations. 

A striking feature in the above table, is the very different number 
of species for the stations explored. The small area of Foulke Fjord has 
yielded 81 plants—a number greater than that from any other single 
locality ; and even the list arrived at in my short stay there, is larger 
than that of the entire area of the widely-branching district of Inglefield 
Gulf, which, running far inland into a country of similar geological 
nature, doubtless affords still better conditions than those of Foulke 
Fjord. During my short stay at the iatter place, I found again all the 
species previously recorded for it with the exception only of 5 (among 
which 2 at least are somewhat doubtful), and I added a considerable 
number, including 9 species new to the whole of N. W. Greenland. 
I think that several more species might still be found, were a trained 
botanist to get an opportunity of surveying more than the small patch 
of ground which I was able to reach to investigate. 

Next to Foulke Fjord stands Ivsugigsok with a list of 58 species. 
A few indeed have been excluded from the list of Natnorst (Dryas 
octopetala, Luzula spicata, Glyceria angustata, Taraxacum officinale) 
but they have been replaced by others through the revision of his mate- 
rial so as to give the original numbers unaltered. It is due principally 
to the keen eye of Narxorst, trained in the excellent school of former 
swedish arctic expeditions, but partly also to WeTHERILL, that the Cape 
York region now shows a list of 75 species. Its relatively close neigh- 
bourhood to Danish Greenland may, to a certain degree, have facilitated 
an immigration and perhaps affords an explanation of this abundance; 
but I think most of those plants will be found further north also, and 
will not be confined to the open coast localities of Cape York. 

That the figures for Wolstenholme Sound, 34, far from represent 
the true number of its flora can hardly be doubted, especially as many 
common species are absent from it. Here much is left for future explo- 
ration. In Inglefield Gulf, one locality only—Northumberland Island— 
has reached as yet a number of 39 species. Of these Srein’s list con- 
tains 38. None of the branch fjords, each equalling Foulke Fjord in 
size and probably surpassing it in conditions of plant-life, has as yet 
yielded as much as 30 species; and the total number of recorded plants 


99 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


is not more than 73. As some of these are rare species, not found in 
other N. W. Greenland places, it appears that a great many common spe- 
cies must have been entirely overlooked here. 

From the Carey Islands 5 plants only are noted (Potentilla Vahliana, 
Saxifraga oppositifolia, Cerastiwm alpinum, Salix arctica, Catabrosa 
algida). In all probability, some more may be found there; but judging 
from my own experience in some small islets in Jones Sound, about which 
I shall elsewhere give an account, I am inclined to think that the number 
of species which have found their way to these small isolated islands, 
surrounded for the greater part of the year by open water, may be very 
small. Among species which I think are most likely to be found there, 
I may mention Cochlaria officinalis and Glyceria distans, growing 
generally around the gulls’ nests in the rookeries. It is, however, to be 
regretted that WeTHERILL, who alone has contributed to the botanical 
knowledge about these islands, has not published any notes about their 
vegetation. 

The numbers of species for the localities of Kane are small enough 
indeed, even Rensselaer Harbor only reaching 23. This may be due 
partly to the loss of some parts of the collections, partly perhaps to the 
hard climate of the nearly always ice-bound shore of Kane Basin. The 
existence of such species as Lesquerella arctica, Hesperis Pallasii, 
Ranunculus Sabinei, Pedicularis arctica, some of which are only 
found here, rather induces one to think that the broad stretch of ice-free 
land here may have allowed the development of a flora, which will at 
some future time yield many more species. 

Concerning the whole region north of the Humboldt Glacier, there 
is hardly anything more to be said, than that it is far too imperfectly 
explored as yet for any inferences to be drawn about the real bulk of 
its flora. Only 27 species are at present known with certainty from these 
parts; whereas the number for Grinnell Land, which lies in the same 
latitude and is only separated from N. W. Greenland by the narrow 
Kennedy and Robson Channels, has supplied a list of at least 72 vas- 
cular plants. 

As an appendix to this historical review of the botanical exploration 
of N. W. Greenland, and in order to facilitate the identification of the 
different localities mentioned, I have compiled the following list of loca- 
hities with their approximate place so far as it appears from the maps 
to which I have access in the reports and journals of the different expe- 
ditions, as well as from the English sea-chart of Smith Sound, the new 
Danish map mentioned above, or from lists of determinations of places. 


1898 —1902. No.16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 23 


The rough sketch-map accompanying the list, will further facilitate the 


use of it. 


List of N. W. Greenland localities, with their approximate 
geographical position: 


Cape York region: 
Bushnan Island . 
Cape York . 
Ivsugigsok . 

Cape Dudley Digges 
Cape Atholl 


Wolstenholme Sound: 
Wolstenholme Island 
Dalrymple Rock . 

Saunders Island (Agpa) 

Umanak . ...... 

Granville Bay (Iterdlagsuak) 
Carey Islands: 

Bjorling Island 


Inglefield Gulf: 
Burdin Bay 
Natsilik (Netlik) 
Netiulumi 
Whale Sound tk 
Northumberland Island (Kujata) 
Hakluyt Island (Agpasuak) . 
Cape Acland . F 
Fan Glacier 
Bowdoin Bay . 
Redcliffe House . 
M’Cormick Bay 
Robertson Bay 
Verhoef Nunatak. 
Cape Robertson . 
Glacier Valley . 


Foulke Fjord region: 
Sutherland Island 
Cape Alexander . 


Lat. N. 


75° 59! 
75° 55‘ 
10> 7 
fo” 4 
76° 23° 


76° 24! 
76° 28° 
76° 35! 
76° 30° 
76° 45! 


76° 49° 


oe 
ie 
77° 10! 
77° 15' 
77° 22! 
77° 24 

? 

2 
77° 36° 
77° 35‘ 
77° 38 
77° 48' 
77° 50° 
77° 50 


78° 9° 
78° 10° 


Long. W. 


65° 
651/2° 
66° 
69° 
691/2° 


70° 

70° 
701/.° 
69° 
69—70° 


72° 


71° 


M14? 
72° 


69° 
70° 
691/5° 
701/2° 
70° 
4? 


73° 
73° 


H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Lat. N. Long. W. 
Foulke Fjord ... . . « » 78° 18 72° 
Port Foulke . 
Point Jensen 
Reindeer Point . 
Etah baste Bs Be ok 
Littleton Island (Pikira) . . 78° 23° 721/5° 
Shore of Kane Basin: 
Fog Inlet 
Bedevilled Reach. 2 3 
Renselaer Bay (Harbour). . 78° 37’ 71° 
Butler Island . . . . . . 78° 87’ 71° 
Bancroft Bay. . . . . . 78° 47' 69° 
Mary Minturn River . . . 78° 25—47' 68—69° 
Washington Land: 
Lafayette Bay . . . . . 80° 30 68° 
Bessels Bay . . . . . . 80° 45'—81°10' 63° 
Cape Bryan . . . . . . 81° 9 64° 
Hannah Island . .. . . 81° 10° 64° 
Cape Morton . . . . . . 81° 41° 63° 
Hall Land: 
Polaris Bay <4 « « + « BL” 35? 62° 
Peary Land: 
Wood Point . . . . . . 82° 95° 


Lockwood Island. . . . . 88° 94! 40° 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 95 


Cape B "Ce 
Vi A 


82" 


804 


“GREENLAND 


26 H. G. SIMMONS. (SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Short Notes about the affinities of the Flora. 


As far as I have been able to ascertain, the flora of N. W. Green- 
land includes a number of 108 flowering plants and ferns, or 7 less than 
that of Ellesmereland. There besides are 14 more recorded, which, how- 
ever, almost certainly are not really members of the flora of our area. 


Table II. 

a) 7 Bes 73 
2 |Z] 4 | 3/2/58 
2/8 | 3 s | $8 | 5 
S ge le ele le 
3} 5 |) 5 s/o |] 36 

g . : q : 
Sait 2 |e | a 
Blz2z|2 BH | 2a | 2 
Compositae 7 6 6 Cruciferae. 13 12 12 
Campaniulaceae 1 1 2 Papaveraceae 1 1 1 
Scrophulariaceae . 4 6 3 Ranunculaceae . 6 6 6 
Borraginaceae 1 Caryophyllaceae 10 10 12 

Polemoniaceae . 1 Portulacaceae 1 
Gentianaceae . . 1 Polygonaceae 2 2 3 
Plumbaginaceae 1 1 1 Betulaceae 1 1 
Primulaceae 1 Salicaceae ... 1 Q 2 
Diapensiaceae . 1 1 1 Liliaceae . < 1 1 
Ericaceae . 2 4 3 Juncaceae. . . .| 8 3 5 
Pyrolaceae 1 1 1 Cyperaceae . . .| 15 9 17 
Onagraceae . 1 1 1 || Gramineae . . .| 20 17 at 
Empetraceae . 1 1 1 Lycopodiaceae . . 1 1 1 
Rosaceae . 5 6 7 Eiquisetaceae. . . 2 1 2 
Saxifragaceae . 12 9 11 Polypodiaceae . . 4 3 4 
Crassulaceae. 1 Species | 115 | 108 | 128 
Families | 24 | 927 28 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 27 


The 108 species belong to the families included in the above 
table, of which each is represented by the number of species mentioned 
in the column for N. W. Greenland. The corresponding figures for N. E. 
Greenland and Ellesmereland are added to facilitate comparisons. 

Already from the above table it appears that there is a consider- 
able conformity between the floras of the three districts here compared. 
The genera with the greatest number of species, are also nearly the 
same in N. W. Greenland as in Ellesmereland; viz. Sawxifraga (11) 9, 
Carex (11) and Ranunculus (6) 6, Pedicularis (4), Draba (5) and Poten- 
litla (4) 5, Glyceria (4) 4. The figures in () represent the number of 
species in Ellesmereland, where also Poa has 5 species (only 3 in 
N. W. Greenland). Carew indeed appears to be far less represented in 
the flora of N. W. Greenland, than in that of Ellesmereland or of 
N. E. Greenland, where it reckons 13 species; but that most probably 
is accounted for by the less accurate exploration of the first-mentioned 
region, rather than, as Harr thinks, by a more arctic climate (Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp., p. 9). 

Before, however, I go into further detail, I think it will be best to 
facilitate the survey of the floras of N. W. Greenland and the neigh- 
bouring lands by the following tabulated statements of the distribution 
of the species (Table IIf). All the species found with certainty, either 
in N. W. Greenland, N. E. Greenland, or Ellesmereland, are inserted 
here; and further, their appearance in Danish West Greenland, in the ; 
Arctic American Archipelago, or in the arctic parts of the American 
Continent indicated. In the first column, that of Danish West Green- 
land, a“—” before the figur of the approximative degree of limit, signifies 
that the species is spread so far south; alter the figure, it signifies the 
northern limit of the plant so far as known; the sign ‘““—” by itself, signifies 
that it is spread along the whole coast. In the N. E. Greenland 
column, the signs are used in the same manner. The distribution, how- 
ever, south of Scoresby Sound is left entirely out of consideration as 
being of no interest here. An “S” signifies that the species is not found 
north of Scoresby Sound. As previously mentioned, I have only taken 
up in the list, such E. Greenland species as are found from Cape Hold 
with Hope (Broer Ruys) northward if they are not already entered as 
N. W. Greenland or Ellesmereland plants. 

In the column for N. W. Greenland, “‘S” signifies occurrence south 
of the Humboldt Glacier, “N” northward from there. A “1” is used 
for species found only in a single place. In the Ellesmereland column, 
“S” ig used as the sign for occurrence in the southern, “N” in the 


98 H. G. SIMMONS. (SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


northern part of the land, “H” for the Hayes Sound region, “+” for a 
single locality. 

In the columns for the Arctic American Archipelago, and for the 
arclic part of the Continent, I have not been able to give such detailed 
indications about the distribution as desirable; but have been reduced 
to designating occurrence in some parts of the area in question only by 
a “1”. In a few cases, I have had access to records which have made 
it possible to give a hint about the probable way of immigration by 
indicating different districts from where alone the species is known: 
Baffinsland with “B”, the southern islands with “S’, the western with 
“W”’, and the eastern part with “E”. 

The last column contains references to the place of each species in 


table VI. 


Table III. 
on 3 a | = 
i=} | nm] g as 
2\/Gul5u} & | 38/22.) Z 
G3\/ae/88/ Ss | 32/288) 2 
ZBolaeal| ea a ee |) S8e) & 
ial o & BS o & | odes 
20 oa lag | 6 ie ee 2 
ie oe “So g oO ovo 
8 ae) 69 = = <i azo 5 
= a Zz fa g % S 
elite, ip mise <>) 
Taraxacum arcticum . —70 E 
—- hyparcticum . . S+ — + | + A 
— phymatocarpum . |—70 | —70 S) S+ G-A-D 
= pumilum... . SN + A—D 
_ arctogenum. . . | —68 Ss G 
Arnica alpina ...... |—64 _ Ss SN + + | U—A 
Antennaria alpina ... . - 72—-| S+} H+) + + U 
Erigeron uniflorus. . . . . | —64 — N + + U 
—  compositus ... . |—70 - S) N + + A 
Campanula uniflora... . _ _ S SH + + U 
_ rolundifolia . . 70-| .- B + Ss 
Pedicularis capitata . . . . S+ =, + + A 
= hirsuta... . |—64 - SN _ + + | U-A 
- lanata. . . . . |—67 S+ | SN + + | A—D 
- flammea.... — - S+ + D 
_ arctica. . . . . S+ H W WwW A 


1898—1902. No. 16] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 29 


= c S = a 5 = 
a) ae r= = i & 2 eet 2 
aa ae eh pt Bajepueal 2 
23 as vo = £ go |*e8| & 
ah o& Be 2 tie lon 
gO), £35 | 28 g else 
=) ang pe ~ ow n 7) oo9o me 
o| BS |G | & le 825) 2 
2 | Za Zz a | eos 5 
= < 3 2 
ie 
Bartsia alpina... ... — 68— S+ Ss 
Mertensia maritima . . . . |—68 S+ + S 
Polemonium humile ... . —74 + E 
Gentiana tenella . ... . — E 
Statice maritima .... . - - S S- | + + U 
Androsace septentrionalis . . N+ WwW A 
Diapensia lapponica. . . . - S S+ | N+/ B E D 
Myrtillus uliginosa. . . . . - 5 iS) SH | + + U 
Vaccinium Vitis idaea . . . | —64 S+ + S) 
Cassiope tetragona. . . . . |—64 _ 5 _ + + U 
Rhododendron lapponicum. . _ _ S+ + + | A—D 
Pyrola rotundifolia ... . _ 2B S) H+j| + + U 
Chamaenerium latifolium . . _ - S = + + | U-A 
Empetrum nigrum... . . - _ S H + + U 
Dryas integrifolia .... . - 73'/o—| SN - + + A 
— octopetala. ..... _ E 
Potentilla pulchella. . . . . | —69 a S - + + | U-A 
= rubricaulis. . . . ? |—74 s _ + + A 
— nivea. . . . . . | —64 - s s ap U 
—  Vahliana . .. . |—69 Ss SN. | + + A 
— emarginata . . . | —67 - SN _ + + | U-A 
— maculata .... 70-| — ? 2 S) 
Chrysosplenium alternifolium . S+ > 4+ a A 
Saxifraga oppositifolia . . . = - SN |} — + + U 
_ flagellaris. . . . —T2 SN | —- + + | A-D 
_ aizoides. . ... — 7'Yo—| S+| St+ + + U 
_ Hireulus . 1. . -72 S + + | A-E 
— tricuspidata . . . | —64 70— S) _ + + A 
— hieraciifolia . . . 73\— + + E 
_— nivalis... . . _ - S) — + 7 U 
_ stellaris. . . . . — -- Ss - + au U 
_— groenlandica. . . - - SN _ + a U 
= *exaratoides . . . ? S+ A-—D 
- cernua .... + - — s _ + ae U 
_ rivularis . 2. ef = - s - + + U 
Rhodiola rosea . . 1... . = - + a. Ss 
Hesperis Pallasii . 1... . SN | — + ly A 
Braya purpurascens... . 70 = SN | SN] + + |U-A 
Arabis Hookeri . . ... . |—64 S+ + A 
— arenicla ..... 70—| 70 HN 25 A 
Draba crassifolia . . . . . | 70--64| 73%/2— Ss 
— alpina... .... | -69 = SN] - + + U 
— fladnizensis. . . . . |-64 | — s — + + U 
— subcapitata. .... ? ? ? SH} + | + A 
— mnivdlis. ... 2... = - ) = + U 
se art, a a a we — = SN - + + U 
— imana ...... 70— S+ ? WwW s 


30 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 
ae oe ee 
26 | 22/28) & (82 e5e] Ss 
ae 2/38), 2 go jage & 
ee | Oc |ee] &S | aa load 
£O/| 83 |#3s] & Sle o8| & 
Aan; ££ |S) 8 | oS Bes 
g) 8S | ES] S | a iks0) 2 
= Ai aan e fe | 2 
i} 
Lesquerella arctica . —69 — SN | — ee + A 
Cardamine pratensis . 70—| 72— HN B + U 
= bellidifolia - — s - + at U 
Eutrema Edwardsii 70 72 S+) SN + + | U-—A 
Cochlearia officinalis . - — SN | —- + + U 
Papaver radicatum = = SN | —- + + U 
Ranunculus glacialis . = E 
= affinis . 67 | S+] S+) + + |U-A 
= sulphureus —70 _ S _ + + U 
_ nivalis . —68 - SN - + he U 
= Sabinei. S$ SN + + A 
: ec pygmaeus . = — Ss H =P U 
= hyperboreus . _ — S+ | SH + + U 
Arenaria ciliata —69 = S+) S+ ie U 
Honkenya peploides = _ Ss B a U 
Alsine Rossii . SN + + A 
— verna . : —64 _ Ss - + + U 
Sagina intermedia —63 = A+ + U 
— nivalis —64 731 /o— D-S 
Cerastium alpinum = = SN | — + + U 
Stellaria humifusa = = Ss SH | + + U 
—  longipes _ - Ss — + + U 
Melandrium affine —65 — SN | — a U 
= triflorum —65 _ Ss ? G 
_— apetalum —69 a SN _ + + | U-A 
Silene acaulis = = Ss = + + U 
Montia lamprosperma - S+ ? S 
Polygonum viviparum ae a SN = + + U 
Oxyria digyna - _ SN - + + U 
Koenigia islandica a = 2 s 
Betula nana —63 731,—-| S Ss 
Salix arctica . rat = SN = + + |U-A 
—  herbacea = - ) + + U 
Tofieldia palustris . a 7BYo—| S + + | A-D 
Juncus castaneus 64—70| — B e s 
— biglumis . = = SN = + + U 
—  triglumis 70-| — + + S) 
Inuzula arcuata . ais = SN = + + U 
— nivalis —64 _ S _ + + |U-A 
Carex membranopacta SH + of A 
-- capillaris . — 731/.— s B a U 
--  ustulata . 70—73| 74 aa eco eee ee: 
— misandra —67 = Ss = + _ U 
— rigida . — | 7p-| Ss B|— | U 
— salina . 7-| ~— Ss 
—  pedata . = S SH U 
— rupestris . —67 — = U 


1898 — 1902. No. 16. 


FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND, 31 


= 6 = > 
S Ee eo 8 o |n g L 
gael S32 Sel & feplieee| = 
22] @8 | @2) 2 jes lees) o€ 
€6| $8 |ES| § | 4B leas) - 
a ~» bret el 3 & n os zo a a 
Z| s© | 82) 2 ea igeso, & 
ee a ce ee: 
oO 
Carex aquatilis . _ = =e 4 A 
— lagopina .« = = S 
— glareosa . _ - S+ |} H+ B U 
— ursina. ..? —69 - SH Ee U 
— incurva . a _ S+ = as f. U 
— nardina . = = SN = B + |U-A 
—  scirpoidea = 72— S+ B 2 | A=) 
Kobresia bipartita . —64 7831/5 — Ss U 
Elyna Bellardi . - = Ss ne + U 
Eriphorum Scheuchzeri . _ — SN = + + U 
= polystachium - — Ss = + + U 
Agropyrum violaceum 70— N+ D 
Festuca ovina — = SN _ + + U 
— rubra “M-| — ? + Ss 
Glyceria Vahliana . 71—70) S ? SH + U 
=e tenella . 69—| 73? S+ D 
-—  angustata . —67 8 Ss SN + ? U 
= distans . - B-— Ss — + U 
= maritima . _ - Ss SH U 
Dupontia Fisheri —69 — N+ | S+ + + |U-A 
Poa glauca . —- — SS) - + + U 
— abbreviata —70 - Ss - + + |U-A 
— evagans . S+ D 
— alpina. - _ 2 ? B + S) 
— cenisia _ — SN _ + + U 
— pratensis . ‘ - 72— ? SH | + WwW U 
Pleuropogon Sabinei . 70—72 S+/ 8 + + |A—D 
Catabrosa algida - = S oe + + U 
Trisetum spicatum . — _ i) SN a + U 
Aira caespitosa . — |—73}/2 S+ | SN | + + U 
— flecuosa. ..... 69— S+ | H+ D—-S 
Calamagrostis arundinacea m-| — ) 
Arctagrostis latifolia . —170 - Ss - + + U 
Alopecurus alpinus . —62 _ SN _ + + U 
Hierochloa alpina . - - S) SH + + U 
Lycopodium Selago _ = Ss - + + U 
Equisetum arvense . - - Ss — + + U 
_ variegatum - - N+ | + + U 
Aspidium fragrans —67 Ss S+]} H+] + + |U-A 
Cystopteris fragilis . = = Ss - + + U 
Woodsia ilvensis = _ H + + U 
—  glabella —67 _ S+ | SH + + U 


The records of distribution condensed 


in the above table, may, of 


course be used in several ways for proving the affinity between the 
floras of the regions here in question, N. W. Greenland and Ellesmere- 


32 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC, ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


land; and also for drawing conclusions about the causes of the simili- 
tudes and differences between them, when compared with one another 
or with the floras of adjacent lands. Before I enter into any further 
discussion, I think it best to insert one more table, which may also be 
of use in the following pages. It gives some particulars concerning the 
distribution of species within N. W. Greenland. 

Each of the districts principally investigated, has here got its column, 
marked as follows: 


Y = Cape York (including Bushnan Island, Ivsugigsok, and Cape Dudley 
Digges). 

W = Wolstenholme Sound (including Wolstenholme, Dalrymple and Saun- 
ders Islands, and Granville Bay). 

C = Carey Islands. 

= Inglefield Gulf (Burdin Bay, Whale Sound, Northumberland and 

Hakluyt Island, and coast to Cape Robertson). 

F = Foulke Fjord. 

R = Renselear Bay. 

B = Bessels Bay and other localities in Washington Land. 

P = Polaris Bay (Hall Land). 


N = the northernmost parts. 


In this table I have also inserted the doubtful species which are, 
however, not taken into consideration in the following. 


Table IV. 


Y. | W. Cc. I. F, R. B. | P.| N. 


Taraxacum hyparcticum . + 
— phymatocarpum | + 
- arctogenum . + + 
Arnica alpina. , ... + + + 
Antennaria alpina . 4 
Erigeron compositus . . + + 
Campanula uniflora . 2.) + + 
Pedicularis capitata + 
_ hirsuta. . . + + 
— lanata. . «J + 
- flammea . . + 
- arctica. . . + 
_ lapponica. . e 
Bartsia alpina 
Mertensia maritima 
Statice maritima . 
Diapensia lapponica . 


++tt 


1898—1902. No. 16] FLOW.PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 


33 


ae 


W. 


Myrtillus uliginosa . 
Vaccinium Vitis idaea. 
Cassiope tetragona . . 
Loiseleuria procumbens . 
Rhododendron  lapponi- 
Pyrola rotundifolia. 
Chamaenerium latifolium 
Empetrum nigrum . 
Dryas integrifolia 
Alchemilla vulgaris . 
Potentilla pulchella . 
—_ rubricaulis . 
_ anserina . 
_ nivea . . « 
= Vahliana. 
= emarginata . 
= tridentata 
Saxifraga oppositifolia . 
— flagellaris . 
- aizoides . 
_ tricuspidata 
_ nivalis — 
- stellaris . 
- groenlandica . 
= cernua 
_ rivularis 
Hesperis Pallasti 
Braya purpurascens 
Arabis Hookeri 
Draba alpina . 
—  fladnizensis . 
—  subcapitata . 
— nivalis. 
—  hirta 
-- imeana. 
Lesquerella arctica . 
Cardamine bellidifolia 
Eutrema Edwardsit 
Cochlearia officinalis . 
Papaver radicatum. 
Ranunculus affinis . 
- sulphureus . 
_ nivalis 
— Sabine 
- pygmaeus 
i hyperboreus , 
Arenaria ciliata . 
Honkenya peploides. .. 
Alsine groenlandica 
— verna 
Cerastium alpinum . 


++ t+ wttt 


He She ge wtte ttt + ++ ++ 


++ 


++ 


t+ 


++ 


++tdt+ ++ ett Ft FHEteeettteee F+tt “ot 


~~ 


++ 


+++ 


teewtt 


$Heetttee +t 


ttt 


++ 


t+t+ett+ 


++ 


Fett+ +4 


+- 


++ 


++ 


34 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


| Y. W. C I F. R B P.| N 
Stellaria humifusa . + + + + 
—  longipes. . . .| + + + + + 
Melandrium affine . + + + + + 
- triflorum . + + ti 
- apetalum. . + Sa a + 
Silene acaulis. . . . «| + + + + 
Montia lamprosperma. + 
Polygonum viviparum. + + + + + 
Oxyria digyna + + + + + + 
Betula nana... . 1] + + 
Salix arctica + + + + + + + f+] + 
— glauca : ? 
— herbacea. . ...) + + + 
Tofieldia palustris + + 
Juncus biglumis . se aE + + + 
Luzula arcuata . . . 1) + + + + + + 
— nivalis. + + of 
— spicata ? 
Carex misandra. . . .| + + + ? 
— riwida....., + + 
— glareosa + 
—  incurva + 
—- nardina.... + + + a 
— scirpoidea. ... + 
— dioica. ...., ? 
Elyna Bellardi : + + 
Eriophorum Scheuchzeri .| + + + + f 
- polystachium | + + + + 
Festuca ovina . ‘ + + + + + + 
Glyceria Vahliana . 2 
= tenella of 
= angustata. . . + + 
- distams . . . . + + ais 
_ maritima...) + + 
Dupontia Fisheri . . ., 4+ 
Poa glauca. ..... + + ae 
— abbreviata .... + + 
— alpina . es ? 
— cenisia. . . . . wf] + + + + + 4a | 
— pratensis . aes ? 
Pleuropogon Sabinet . .| + ; 2 
Catabrosa algida . . .| + + + + + 
Trisetum spicatum . + + + 
Aira caespitosa 4 + 
— flexuosa. .... + 
Agrostis canina . . . . ? 
Arctagrostis latifolia . + + + 
Alopecurus alpinus. . .| + + + af + 4. | Sb 
Hierochloa alpina . . .| + + + 
Lycopodium Selago. . .| + + 


1898— 1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 35 


Y. | W. Cc. I. F. R. B, |p, N. 


Equisetum arvense . . .| + + + 
Aspidium fragrans. + 

Cystopteris fragilis . . . + + + 
Woodsia glabella. . . . + 


Table III contains 152 species which are members of one or more 
of the floras of the three districts here specially in question; viz., N. E. 
and N. W. Greenland and Ellesmereland. As for their appearance in 
those and the neighbouring districts, they may be grouped as I have 
done in Table V, where existence within a district is marked with a 
“4”, absence of it with a “—”, 
mind that some of the districts are very unsatisfactorily explored; and 
that even in the relatively well examined tracts, additions will yet be 
made that will very considerably alter the numbers, total as well as 
relative. I think, therefore, that it will be better to discuss the 
dubious species separately, and afterwards try to get as natural groups 
as possible. However, I shall try to point out also, what results may, 
in my opinion, be arrived at by using the rough statistics here put 


It is, however, always to be kept in 


together. 
Table V. 
=] g a § o Q 
| Bs 3 |e6g/ee|a | 3 
e a/iz/22| 2 (zalzals | 6 
Group eS Feldalea| § l22/aol2 |s 
Sjgslesias| gle Bl2slaal as 
2 (ES/ES/ES] SB Sal Sa] E83] 
Pia |4 |4 Bila |4 ‘le a 
i} te) +] eee] ee 
| 2 | +) +1 +] +i)]+i}-—-i) 2 
I a | +) +/+] +4] —-] + 4 
. 4, +/+} —] +] —] + 4 
5. + + _ + + + 7 
6. +/+] +]o4) -—-] - 3 | 90 
a ee ee ge eee ee en 
a ee ea meee es ee 
IL. | 8.0) See | ae ae) ee eS 4 
4 | +) —]| +] -}| -J] 7 2 | 12 
1. - - - + + + 4 
; | %2)/—-}| —-{| +] +) +4] + 5 
Tl. 3. ee ee ee ee g 
| 4, - - - + _ + 1 
5. —} + f{+4i]+4/) ++ 3 | 15 


36 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 
5 Ble 
te |e_l£_|¢/Selea/e | 
a = a ik c= 
S/S EGEiSE 2/23 25/3 [6 
Group 2 elauite) - =e eee % 
5 \aeistia | § |geleziag! - 
2 /ES|sS/s5| & | e< e4|/F3| 2 
sis ie lz alt |<4 2 eS 
| 
1} +/ +} —}; —| +] 4+] 5 
Oe | ae ee ceo ed eee sae pa 
im 3. +) —-] -—] + + 1] 7 
1. = _ a pres _ - 2 
V. { 2. - — — + + 1/ 8 
1] +] +] +] —-{| +] +4] 7 
a ee ee ee eee, 
BP oe) ae |S ae el Gt 
4, + - + _ = + 4 
VL Be lee | Re PS see eaetie eee a 
@ | ae | ae Peed ee ee 
ef ett Albee ices h seer ogee Ml eel 
8. _ + _ + + 1 | 2 
In Table V., Group I. contains such species as have a rather 


ubiquitous distribution in the Arctic Regions, or at least in the parts 
here in question. Most of the plants, especially those of Gr. I, 1, are so 
widely distributed, that they can hardly be used in comparing the di- 
stricts, or for forming any conclusion about the origin of the flora. Some 
may, however, be of interest, as will be shown in the following pages. 

The following 50 species from Group I, are hardly of any interest 


for this discussion: 


Antennaria alpina* 
Campanula uniflora 
Statice maritima* 
Myrtillus uliginosa* 
Cassiope tetragona 
Pyrola rotundifolia* 
Empetrum nigrum 
Saxifraga oppositifolia 
aizoides 
nivalis 
stellaris 
groenlandica 
cernua 
rivularis 
Draba alpina 
fladnizensis 
hirta 


Cardamine bellidifolia 
Cochlearia officinalis 
Papaver radicatum 
Ranunculus sulphureus 
nivalis 
hyperboreus 


Alsine verna 
Cerastium alpinum 
Stellaria humifusa 
longipes 
Silene acaulis 
Polygonum viviparum 
Oxyria digyna 
Juncus biglumis 
Luzula arcuata 
Carex misandra 
incurva 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 37 


Eriophorum Scheuchzeri Aira caespitosa 

— polystachium Arctagrostis latifolia 
Festuca ovina Alopecurus alpinus 
Glyceria distans* ~~ Hierochloa alpina 
Poa glauca Lycopodium Selago 
— cenisia Equisetum arvense 
Catabrosa algida Cystopteris fragilis 
Trisetum spicatum Woodsia glabella. 


All these are circumpolar species, even though some of them, those 
marked with a “*” are absent from Spitsbergen. 

The Group I, 2, Carex glareosa and Glyceria angustata, not known 
with certainty from the arctic coast of America, may yet be found there 
and belong to the circumpolar, more ‘or less ubiquitous plants; as is 
also the case with Group I, 3: Draba nivalis, Ranunculus pygmaeus, 
Melandrium affine, Elyna Bellardi*, which are not yet collected in 
the Arctic Archipelago but which will certainly be found there. Group 
I, 4 contains 4 species, of which 3, Sagina intermedia, Carex ursina 
and Glyceria Vahliana, as far as may be concluded from our present 
knowledge of their distribution, will certainly yet be found in N. W. 
Greenland and the Archipelago. Of the species as yet lacking in the 
list of N. W. Greenland (Group I, 5), Erigeron uniflorus, Cardamine 
pratensis, Carex capillaris*, Poa pratensis, Equisetum variegatum, 
and Woodsia ilvensis*, will certainly be found there; the last species, 
Carex ustulata, is, as far as our present knowledge goes, very spora- 
dically distributed on the American side and especially in Greenland, but 
is also circumpolar. 

Lastly we get from Group I, 6, two species, Arenaria ciliata and 
Glyceria maritima, not yet reported from any arctic part of America 
besides Ellesmereland, which must also go here as having been pro- 
bably overlooked in the Archipelago and Arctic Coast as well as in 
Asia. Thus we get from Group I, 68 species which are circumpolar 
and mostly rather ubiquitous. In the following these will be designed 
as Group U. 

We have still, however, 22 species of Group I left. Among these 
the following 4 species from Gr. I, 1, decidedly have their home in 
America: Erigeron compositus, Dryas integrifolia, Saxifraga tri- 
cuspidata, Lesquerella arctica. To these may be added Arabis areni- 
cola from Gr. I, 4. Alone of them, Dryas, goes over to the north- 
eastern extremity of Asia. These species and some more mentioned 
below, may form Group A. 


38 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


There is, however, also a number of species so distributed as to 
make it rather difficult to form a definitive opinion as to whether they 
are to be referred to the american or to the ubiquitous plants. 

Such are from Group I, 1: : 

1. Arnica alpina, as it seems most widely spread on the Ame- 
rican side and absent from Southern Greenland. In Ellesmereland it is 
not found in the Hayes Sound region. 

2. Pedicularis hirsuta, circumpolar but absent from Southern 
Greenland. 

3. Chamaenerium latifolium, lacking in Western Siberia, Scan- 
dinavia and Spitsbergen, but appearing in Iceland. If this plant is to 
be counted as american in Greenland, it should have reached Iceland 
from the west. Here, however, as in some other cases also, two diffe- 
rent ways of immigration may be possible. 

4. Potentilla pulchella, only south to the Disco region, and absent 
from Western Siberia and the European Continent. 

5. P. emarginata, similarly distributed as the last. 

6. Braya purpurascens, circumpolar, but only found about 70° 
in Danish West Greenland. 

7. Eutrema Edwardsii, circumpolar, bul very sporadic in Green- 
land. 

8. Ranunculus affinis, circumpolar, but only in a single place in 
Danish West Greenland. 

9. Melandrium apetalum, circumpolar, but only spread southward 
to the Disco region. 

10. Salix arctica, absent from Spitsbergen and the European 
Continent, and represented in Greenland mostly by the var. Brownii, which 
is principally american, and the var. groenlandica. 

11. Luzula nivalis, absent from Southern Greenland. 

12. Carex nardina, absent from Arctic Asia and Novaja Semlja, 
but appearing again in Northern Finland, Scandinavia and Spitsbergen. 

13. Dupontia Fisheri, civcumpolar, but only sparingly represented 
in Greenland, where it is lacking in the south. 

14. Poa abbreviata, most probably an american plant and absent 
from Asia, but appearing again in Spitsbergen, Franz Joseph Land, and 
Novaja Semlja. In Danish Greenland its southern limit is at the Disco 
region, and in East Greenland at Scoresby Sound. 

15. Aspidium fragrans, entirely absent from Europe, and with a 
northerly distribution in W. Greenland, absent from E. Greenland except 
for Scoresby Sound. 


1898—1902. No. 16] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND, 39 


All these plants are tolerably common and widely-spread in the 
northern parts of America; in Greenland, they are in generai princi- 
pally distributed in the northernmost parts, that is to say, where the di- 
stance to the american area of the species is shortest. All of them, 
moreover, have a more or less discontinuous distribution, the inter- 
vening gap beginning either east of Greenland, or east of Spitshergen— 
Novaja Semlja. If we are to reckon these plants among the american 
immigrants, we must presume that those which inhabit, for instance, 
Spitsbergen also, have reached there in the same way as the species of 
Group II, 1 have come to N. E. Greenland, most probably along a for- 
mer land-bridge. I will not now, however, give them any definite place, 
but will reckon them alternatively to Group U, or Group A. 

Now we have only 2 species from Gr. I, 1, left to discuss. Taraa- 
acum phymatocarpum is only known from the northern parts of both 
Greenland coasts and from a single locality in Ellesmereland. It may 
be a Greenland plant and have reached Ellesmereland from there; but, 
as its Ellesmereland locality is in a region where the american feature 
is rather pronounced, it will more probably be found to have a wider 
distribution in Arctic America. It can be counted either in Group A, 
or in a Group G, containing Greenland plants, or also in the Group D, 
species of dubious distribution. Diapensia lapponica has so curiously 
interrupted a distribution, that one can hardly place it anywhere but in 
Group D, even if it has probably reached N. W. Greenland, and per- 
haps Ellesmereland, from Danish Greenland where it is common. 

The 5 species forming Group II, 1, are doubtless all immigrants 
from the east, as they are all found in Spitsbergen, mostly showing 
also a wider distribution in Europe and Asia. In Greenland, they are 
restricted to the northern parts of the east coast. Among them, Tar- 
acacum arcticum, Gentiana tenella, and Ranunculus glacialis are 
entirely missing in America, whereas Polemonium humile and Dryas 
octopetala are found there, even though there is so wide an expanse 
_ between their Ameircan and Greenland areas, as to make it impossible 
to think of any connection between them. Those 5 species may form a 
separate group E, to which also Sawifraga hieraciifolia (Gr. II, 2) may 
be counted, as it shows a similar distribution, even if it is found in the 
Arctic Archipelago also. 

The 4 species of Group II, 3, show rather a curious distribution. 
Melandrium triflorum is one of the few endemic species of Greenland, 
and must of course go to Group G, where I have alternatively placed 
Taraxacum phymatocarpum. It is, however, reported also for Grin- 


40 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


nell Land. Bartsia alpina is found in America only in Labrador, but 
it is rather a common plant in Southern Greenland. It must doubtless 
have come to N. W. Greenland from the south, and is to be placed in 
Group S. Betula nana is distributed in West Greenland from 63° 
northwards, and, in the east coast, from the Angmagsalik district north- 
wards to 731/,°. To the south it is replaced by B. glandulosa, but it 
appears again in N. E. America, not, however, in the arctic parts. It 
must also go to Group S, species spread in Danish Greenland, where 
they are probably immigrants from Labrador and wandering northwards 
from there. How it has reached Eastern Greenland is another question; 
it may have come from Iceland, or its area may once have been conti- 
nuous in the south. Glyceria tenella has so discontinuous a distri- 
bution that it can only be placed in Group D. 

Taraxacum arctogenum, in Group II, 4, is an endemic Greenland 
species (Gr. G). Montia lamprosperma belongs to Group S, it is spread 
to the south in Danish Greenland but seems to be lacking in Arctic 
America. It may have reached Greenland from the east, as it is com- 
mon in Iceland and the Faeroes: or from Labrador, where it seems to. 
grow, if the indications of Brirron & Browy, Ill, Fl., I, p. 4, about 
“Montia fontana’” are to be trusted and thus interpreted. 

Group III, 1, contains 4 species of which one, Carex membrano- 
pacta, is entirely american; two, Chrysosplenium alternifoliwm and 
Alsine Rossii, are lacking in Greenland but reach from Asia as far 
west as Spitsbergen or (the former) still further in the south. The fourth, 
Draba subcapitata, is somewhat doubtful, but its distribution in Elles- 
mereland and further to the south-west, shows that it is an american 
species within the western parts of our special area at least. It is not 
yet known with certainty from Greenland, but has a circumpolar distri- 
bution reaching, on the Atlantic side, to Jan Mayen. These 4 species 
are to be placed in Group A. Here belong also the species of Group 
II, 2, which have reached N. W. Greenland. Taraxacum hyparcticum 
and Ranunculus Sabinei are entirely american, Pedicularis capitata 
and P. arctica are spread from Eastern Siberia throughout Arctic Ame- 
rica. Hesperis Pallasii reaches as far west as Novaja Semlja. They 
have doubtless come to Greenland over Smith Sound, as is also the 
case wilh Potentilla Vahliana from Group II, 3. Pedicularis lanata 
also seems to be an american immigrant in Western Greenland, where 
it is common in the northern colonial districts. It is, however, a cir- 
cumpolar plant, and appears also in a small area in S. E. Greenland. 


1898—1902. No. 16] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W.GREENLAND. 41 


How it has got there is a somewhat more difficult question to solve. 
I refer it alternatively to Group A, or Group D. 

Androsace septentrionalis, forming Group III, 4, as absent from 
Greenland goes to Group A. Group III, 5, contains 3 species, of which 
one seems to be decidedly american, viz. Potentilla rubricaulis; the 
two others are more dubious, and so give rise to a question as to 
whether they should be placed in Group A, or in Group D. Sawifraga 
flagellaris is spread round the Arctic Regions lo Spitsbergen, but its uni- 
versal appearance throughout Arctic America and the islands, its manner 
of distribution in Ellesmereland and in N. W. Greenland, make it most 
probable that it is an american immigrant in Greenland. Pleuropogon 
Sabinei is spread from Siberia to Novaja Semlja and Franz Joseph 
Land; but its absence from Spitsbergen, and its range over the Arctic 
Islands to Ellesmereland, make it probable that it has reached even 
N. E. Greenland that way. 

The 5 species in Group IV, 1, Campanula rotundifolia, Rhodiola 
rosea, Juncus castaneus, J. triglumis, Poa alpina, must be reckoned 
to Group S. In N. E. Greenland alone they are spread into the area here 
in question, and none of them seems to reach its northernmost part. Even” 
those of them which have an uninterrupted distribution in the south, 
may, perhaps, have immigrated from both sides, as they are spread both 
in Europe, inelnding Iceland, and in America. The same is the case 
with Festuca rubra, which forms Group IV, 2. Carex aquatilis, Group 
IV, 3, is absent from N. E. Greenland, and its distribution in the north- 
ern part of Danish Greenland, points to an american origin. I there- 
fore place it in Group A, notwithstanding that it is not found as yet in 
N. W. Greenland. 

In Group V, 1, we have the two new Ellesmereland species, the 
distribution of which is as yet unknown; it is possible that Sawifraga 
*exaratoides may count as american, Poa evagans must, however, be 
left out of consideration at present. Taraxacum pumilum (Gr. V, 2) 
most probably may be reckoned as american. 

Group VI, 1, contains 7 species, all absent from Ellesmereland but 
found in the five neighbouring districts entered in the table. Among 
them, Potentilia nivea, Honkenya peploides, and Carex rigida, are 
rather ubiquitous species that may yet be found in Ellesmereland. 
I refer them to Group U, together with Salix herbacea, absent from 
Spitsbergen (but found in Beeren Island and Jan Mayen) and perhaps 
from the Bering Sea region. Tofieldia palustris and Carex scirpoidea 
are absent from Western Siberia; Rhododendron lapponicum also from 


49 H. G. SIMMONS, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Spitsbergen; but their appearance in Europe makes it doubtful how they 
should be reckoned in Greenland, especially as they are not found in 
Ellesmereland, nor in the far north of Greenland. The safest way will 
be to reckon them alternatively to Group A, and Group D. 

Five of the species in Group VI, 2: Potentilla maculata, Koenigia 
islandica, Carex salina, C. lagopina, and Calamagrostis arundina- 
cea, entering our special area only in N. E. Greenland, may doubtless 
be put in Group S, as may also Draba crassifolia, which just reaches 
Cape Hold with Hope; perhaps also Sagina nivalis, which, however, 
is a plant easily overlocked or confounded whith others, and may, there- 
fore, probably be of wider range than is as yet known. Pedicularis 
flammea (Gr. VI, 3) I think best to leave in Group D. It might also 
be put in Group A, as being most spread in America; but it is not 
known from any part of the Archipelago, and has certainly come to 
N. W. Greenland from the south of Melville Bay. On the other hand, 
it is known from Iceland and the northernmost parts of Europe, and I 
think it may still be discovered in Siberia also. 

The species of Group VI, 4, have doubtless reached N. W. Green- 
land by way of Danish Greenland. One of them Arabis Hookeri, is 
found on the arctic shore of America and consequently goes into Group A; 
the three others, Mertensia maritima, Vaccinium Vitis idaea, and Draba 
tmcana, are more or less circumpolar and ubiquitous species, which may 
go to Group S. The 3 species in Group VI, 5, Carex pedata, C. rupe- 
stris, and Kobresia bipartita, by their appearance in the most ameri- 
can part of Ellesmereland, make it impossible to doubt that they exist 
also in other parts of Arctic America, where they may have been 
overlooked. If we presume their existence there, they may be put in 
Group U. 

Aira flexuosa (Gr. VI, 6) is decidedly a southern plant; its single 
locality in N. W. Greenland is doubtless an outpost from its Danish 
Greenland area, but how it has reached Ellesmereland is doubtful. I 
think it best to place it in Group D. Still more difficult is it to form 
an opinion as to the way by which Agropyrum violaceum (Gr. VI, 7) 
has reached Grinnell Land, as it is not known from any locality in Arctic 
America, either in the continent or in the islands; and there is an enter- 
vening, space of more than 10° down to its northern limit in Greenland. 
I place it in Group D. 

Lastly we have Sawifraga Hirculus (Gr. VI, 8), which in Elles- 
mereland is doubtless an american plant, but has, perhaps, reached 
N. E. Greenland in the same way as have the species of Group E. 


1898—1902. No.16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 43 


As, however, this discussion is not easy to retain, I have, alter 
stating my reasons for the division of the floras, put together the fol- 
lowing table VI. Here the numbers of the plants of each group are 
enumerated for each district separately, and for all three together; and, 
besides them, accounts of the percentage in each group, reckoned in 
relation to the number in the district, and to the total 152 species of the 
three districts. As so many species have not been definitively placed, 
two different series of figures must necessarily be put up alongside. 
The last four columns are made up to show how nearly the figures 
derived from the rough statistics of table V agree with those from the 
more closely sifted material, at least, as to the relations to each other 
of the percentages in the different districts. 


Table VI. 
* ol = . eis = an) . = = 
& |S |£ Wa |e |S |e |e ;B IE 
f eel ae | Salen Se | lawl e 
ad : a n 
6 Bei gg lis an| oh Ho 1S Buen ae! 
4 ap | ose | - fo} mol so |e no! wo 
my w]e || 3 wll Sa | os Ge od | sepg 
Qn\|Oglokllaouni/osgl/og] S65 |an)/°8] 68 
B.)3 5) 52) 8-8 lla SS | a8) 81 2 
SSISS HSI SS/SSloal awl] soles) oe 
a a, a Zz A, oO jaa) val ou a 


North-Eastern 
Greenland 


Ubiquitous Group U...|| 75 | 58) 49] 90] 70/ 59] I 90 | 70| 59 


Eastern — &£E 6 5 4 7 5 4 

Greenlandic — G 2 1 1 1 1 1 i 10 7 

American - A 98} 92) 19 6 5 4] Il 3 2 Q 

Dubious =: UD ees 3 2 Q 9 7 6 || IV 6 5 4 

Southern —~ SS...) 14] 12 9] 15] 12} 10) VI 19) 15) 12 

Absent(oftotal152 species) || (24)) — 16 | (24); - 16 (24); — 16 
128 | 100 | 100 || 128 | 100 | 100 128 | 100 | 100 

North-Western 
Greenland 

Ubiquitous Group U... || 62 | 57] 41] 77] 71] 50 I 79 | 73| 52 

Greenlandic — G... 2 2 1 3 3 2} Il 6 6 4 

American — A.../| 84) 31; 22] 12) 11 8] Il 10 9 7 

Dubious = (Dawes 4 4 3 || 10 9 7\| IV a — _ 

Southern en eee 6 6 4 6 6 4\| VI 13 | 12 8 

Absent(oftotal152species) || (44)} — | 29 |} (44)| — | 29 (44); — | 29 
108 | 100 | 100 || 108 | 100 | 100 108 | 100 ; 100 


44 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT, EXP, FRAM 


’ — — . — — P| . — — 
ss leelBeis |B2/sel 22 is | Be] se 
uw eo} Wo, 2) Wo) SB ie Oo} M5 
oO we Ol Bll o te QB | 2 oO tO} AQ 
eo Sega ee eel oe ee, * 8) oe 
BilHE/SEl FS se lea| ou | Ss ee] 28 
zie |j@ jz |e |£ Id lA |2 [2 
Ellesmereland 
Ubiquitous Group U... 71) 62| 47] 86) 75 | 57 I 90} 78] 59 
Greenlandic — G..-j| — _ - 1 1 1 = wy | 
American — a...| 40] 385!) 26] 19| 16] 12}/11,V} 18} 16] 19 
Dubious = UDGars 4 3 3 8 7 5 || 1V 1 1 1 
Southern 2 Sts: — — _ 1 1 1] VI 6 5 4 
Absent (oftotal152species) || (87); — | 24 || (87)|_ — |_ 24 (37)| — | 24 
115 | 100 | 100 || 115 | 100 | 100 115 | 100 | 100 
The three districts 
together 
Ubiquitous Group U...]) 7 | — | 49) 90) — | 59 I 90 | — | 59 
Eastern -— —E 6) - 4 6] — 4 = sel eas 
Greenlandic — G 2) — 1 38/ — Q| II 19.) 8 
American ee) - || 44 — 29 19 — 12 ||I1I, V| 18 = 12 
Dubious — D 6) - 4) 16; —/} J1]) IV Trlr es 5 
Southern - § 19; — 18/} 18) — 12 || VI 9) — | 16 
152 | — | 100 |} 152} — | 100 152 | — | 100 


When we give the group of more or less ubiquitous species the 
largest possible range, so as to contain 90 species out of the 152, we 
find 73 of them in all the three districts here specially in question; 4 are 
absent from Ellesmereland, 13 from N. W. Greenland. The last number 
will, however, be considerably reduced by further research. If, on the 
other hand, we take the group of american species in its widest com- 
prehension, embracing 44 species, we get them thus grouped: in all three 
regions 23; in Ellesmereland and N. W. Greenland 7; in Ellesmereland 
and N. E. Greenland 2; in Ellesmereland alone 8; moreover 4 species 
not yet found in Ellesmereland but in N. W. Greenland (1) and as well 
in N. E. Greenland (8). 

These figures show clearly a gradual decrease of the number of 
american species to the east such as, a priori, we had to look out for; 
and the same is the case with the number of plants of decidedly ame- 
rican origin. Of these, Androsace septentrionalis, Chrysosplenium al- 
ternifolium, Alsine Rossii, and Carex membranopacta have only reached 
eastward to Ellesmereland. To these may be added Sawifraga Hir- 
culus, which may have reached N. E. Greenland from the east; Draba 
subcapitata, not yet known with certainty in Greenland; and Carex 


1898 — 1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 45 


aquatillis var. stans, which will probably be found in N. W. Greenland 
as its distribution in Danish Greenland points to an immigration from 
the north. . : 

N. W. Greenland is reached by the following american species, all 
spread in Ellesmereland: Taraxacum hyparcticum, Pedicularis capi- 
tata, P. arctica, Potentilla Vahliana, Hesperis Pallasii, Ranunculus 
Sabinei and further by Arabis Hookeri which is not found in Ellesmere- 
land. Erigeron compositus, Potentilla rubricaulis, Saxifraga tricus- 
pidata, Lesquerella arctica reach to North-eastern Greenland, as also 
Arabis arenosa which is found in Ellesmereland but not yet in N. W. 
Greenland. Dryas integrifolia shows, so far as present researches have 
gone, rather a curious distribution in East Greenland, one small area 
north of latitude 65° and another larger one from about 70° to 73}/2°, 
but it is not reported from the most northern known part of the coast. 
As it is found so far north on the west coast as Lockwood Island, 
there seems to be every possibility of its occurrence in the far north of 
the east coast also, so as to account for its appearance in the south. 
It may, perhaps, still be found to have a continuous area along the 
east coast. 

The most difficult question, however, is that connected with another 
group of plants in N. E. Greenland, the eastern species: Taraxacum 
arcticum, Polemonium humile, Gentiana tenella, Dryas octopetala, 
Saxifraga hieraciifolia, and Ranunculus glacialis, to which Saxifraga 
Hirculus must most probably be added (as far as this territory is con- 
cerned). They are all Spitsbergen plants, even though some of them 
are very rare in that country. Moreover they are found in Northern 
Europe, and some at least, are widely distributed in Northern Asia also. 
Four are also Iceland plants. It cannot of course be doubted that this 
group of species has reached Greenland from the east; but the great 
question is — how has such a migration heen effected? For those in- 
vestigators, who are inclined to credit the winds and marine currents 
with the capacity of transporting living seeds over almost unlimited di- 
stances, and of putting them safely in a convenient spot for germinating, 
the question is easily enough put aside, as we have the great polar current 
which flows in against the east coast of Greenland. In my opinion, 
however, there are some further problems to be solved. 

Even if we take for granted, that the seeds of these plants possess 
the required resistance to the influence of salt water, and that they can 
stand an ice-journey of several years, and afterwards find their way to 
convenient growingplaces in a new land, why are they entirely restric- 


46 H. G. SIMMONS. _[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


ted to the northern coast part? Why have they not spread southwards 
along the coast when the same mode of conveyance might carry them 
thither? And, moreover, why have they not gone over to the west 
coast when the american species have reached the eastern shore? If we 
assume, that there has been, in post-glacial time, a land-communication 
along which they have wandered, we get at least a somewhat better so- 
lution of the problem, even though every point may not be settled. 
As the way along the Arctic American Archipelago was never glaciated 
to any considerable extent, it lay open even in early post-glacial (or late 
glacial) time, and thus the american species got under way northwards 
very long ago. Some may even have lived in the islands during the 
maximum of glaciation. The eastern species had a long way over 
which to spread, and few only reached so far as Greenland before the 
road of migration was made impracticable by the sinking of the land. 
Changes of climate may also have played their part in restricting these 
pioneers to their present small area, as well as in breaking up that of 
some of the western species in isolated parts. Such a view also agrees 
very well with some peculiarities in the distribution of marine algae, 
especially the Laminariaceae, which I have pointed out elsewhere 
(Stumons, Relations of Floras, p. 166—167). 

Now the appearance of these eastern species is, indeed, the princi- 
pal difference between the floras of N. E. and N. W. Greenland, but it 
must not be overvalued; the number of species common to both, is still 
more prominent. Even if we set aside the doubtful and ubiquitous spe- — 
cies, we have left at least as many american as eastern species in the 
flora of N. E. Greenland; and if we reckon all that have more or less 
probably arrived from the american side, we get from four to five times 
as many western as eastern plants. Among the three areas here com- 
pared, that in N. E. Greenland shows the largest number of species. — 
It must, however, be kept in mind, that it begins about three degrees 
of latitude south of the two others, and the limit of the known part of 
the N. E. coast coincides with the southern part of the western districts. 
This may account for the presence here of so many (14—15) southern 
species. 

North-Western Greenland shows the smallest number of species. 
I think, however, that this is in great part due to its very imperfect 
exploration; 15 species, found both in Ellesmereland and in N. E. Green- 
land, are absent from the N. W. Greenland list, but probably not in fact 
from its flora. That this about holds the middle position between those 
of the districts on each side, appears from the different tables above; 


1898 —1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 47 


but it comes a little nearer to that of Ellesmereland than to that of 
N. E. Greenland. On the other hand, it is also connected with that of 
Danish West Greenland, and if a border-line between a Greenland and 
an american flora is to be drawn, we must let it follow Smith Sound 
and its northern continuation and not make such a deflection as to 
include Ellesmereland, as Hooker (App. Nares) has done. The almost 
entire absence, in the Ellesmereland flora, of species that might have 
come from Greenland, entirely prohibits its consideration as greenlandic. 
The only species which may be of eastern origin are Taraxacum 
phymatocarpum, Aira flexuosa, and further Melandrium triflorum, 
if that plant is not erroneously reported from Grinnell Land, as I think 
it is, and perhaps also Agropyrum violaceum. All these, however, are 
of a far too sporadic appearance to give any greenlandic character to 
the flora; whereas, on the other hand, the similarity to the flora of the 
other American Islands is strongly marked. 

I think it best with this to finish the sketch of the connections of 
the North-Western Greenland flora at present. I am fully aware that 
it is very incomplete; and I would accentuate the fact that it is by no 
means to be considered as a definite treatment, but only as a preliminary 
notice to an examination into the relations and history of the whole arctic 
american flora, which I hope some time to have an opportunity of 
finishing. I have also abstained from quoting here the different works 
in which the history of the Greenland flora is discussed. Perhaps in 
the mean time also the revision of the american collections may be 
made, which, as I have above pointed out, is highly desirable. For 
my own part, I must undertake a thorough revision of all the material 
from Arctic America in the London collections, so as to be able to 
make up lists of distribution for each species, and flora lists for each 
island or group islands in the Archipelago as well as for different parts 
of the arctic shore, before I feel myself justified in approaching nearer 
to the phyto-geographical questions, the solution of which I look upon 
as the principal object of my contributions to the knowledge of the 
arctic american and Greenland flora and vegetation. 


Lund, Sweden, November 1908. 


48 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


The Species of Vascular Plants in the Flora of 
North-Western Greenland. 


In the following treatment of the different species I have followed 
the same plan as in my Fl. Ellesm.; and, as by far the larger part of 
the plants is common to both districts, I have not thought it necessary 
to repeat such items as may easily be found there. Therefore I have 
not here given a complete synonymic for species included in the Ellesmere: 
land flora, but have only referred to the synonymic given in my previous 
work. For species not treated there, I have given a synonymic on the 
same plan as in FI. Ellesm. It is, however, impossible in many cases 
to give an exact synonymic, for I have not seen all the specimens upon 
which the identifications in the different papers concerning North-Western 
Greenland are based, and therefore J have thought it best to insert, as 
a “special synonymic” in [square brackets] the names used in these 
treatises which I have, with more or less certainty, in some cases by 
guess only, referred to the species in question. 

The list of literature at the end of the book, is only intended to be 
an appendix to that of the Fl. Ellesm. where most of the works that 
have reference to the vascular plants of Arctic America and Greenland 
are enumerated. The abbreviations of the titles used in the text are 
also to be found there, as I have not deemed it necessary to repeat the 
whole bibliography and as the two floras will always have to be used 
together. 

The statements about occurrence and distribution are made up in 
the same manner as in my Fi. Ellesm., and when no account of the 
latter is inserted here, it is to be found in that treatise. In the records 
of occurrence I have used a “S” to signify the southern part (76°—79°) 
and a “N” for the upper part of N. W. Greenland (from 80° northwards). 


1898 — 1902. No. 16.| FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 49 


Compositae. 
Taraxacum hyparcticum, Dautst. 


T. hyparcticum, Smmons, Fl. Ellesm.; 7. phymatocarpum, Hanvet- 
Mazetti, Mon. Tarax., ex p. 


Already during the expedition, I was in no doubt about the fact that 
all the statements in literature about the Taraxacum-forms of N. W. 
Greenland and the adjacent countries, must be based entirely upon wrong 
determinations ; the plants may be called 7. officinale, T. palustre, T. 
Dens Leonis, or any other name. The little I have seen of the collec- 
tions made by others from the area here in question, has further con- 
firmed my opinion, and I can only regret the impossibility of examining 
the collections from most of the american expeditions. When Dr. DaHt- 
stepT began his researches in arctic Taraxaca, now published in his 
treatises Stud. arkt. Tarax., and Tarax. ceratoph., he also found that 
the above names were generally used for plants representing new and 
hitherto undescribed species. But it has been impossible for him also 
to control the american authors; and it must still be left an open 
question what they meant, except in a few cases where specimens have 
been accessible, or where at least a guess is possible. 

The species here in question has been examined by DAHLSTEDT in 
my collection; but about its occurrence in other parts of the area than 
that where I found it, only conjectures are possible. 

Occurrence. This species is as yet only known with certainty ina 
few individuals from a single locality in N. W. Greenland, Etah in Foulke 
Fjord (4268, 4269). DanisTept found them mixed in my Taraxacum 
collection from that point which, for the most part, represented 7. arcto- 
genum Dautst. It is, however, rather probable that the 7. palustre 
which Harr (Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.) speaks of as a form of T. Dens Leonis, 
occurring in Foulke Fjord, is the same.  T. palustre is also mentioned 
by Duranp (Enum. Pl. Smith S.) as collected at Netlik by Hayes and 
by Kane at Bedevilled Reach (Enum. Pl.); but without seeing the spe- 
cimens it is impossible to form any opinion about the plant that is meant. 


Taraxacum phymatocarpum, J. VAHL. 


T. phymatocarpum, Stumons, Fl. Ellesm.; Hanpet-Mazetti, Mon. 
Tarax., ex p. [Z. officinale, Naruorst, N. W. Gronl., ex p.; 7. off: 


var. lividum, Fernatp in WeTHERILL, List 1894]. 
4 


50 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


This species, principally greenlandic, has curiously enough, never 
been mentioned from N. W. Greenland before I used the name in my 
Prel. Rep., although in a wrong sense, as I had not then subjected my 
Taraxaca to a closer study. In fact, the real T. phymatocarpum is 
not present in my collection from Foulke Fjord, but DantstepT has 
found it hiding under other names in collections from our area. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHorstT); Whale Sound, Netiulumi 
(WeruHeRILL). Hox, in his list of the Stern collection, has used for a plant 
from Northumberland Island the same name (TZ. off. var. lividum) as 
FERNALD in WETHERILL, List 1894; perhaps this statement also may be 
referable to the species here in question. 


Taraxacum arctogenum, DauLst. 


T. arctogenum, Dautstept, Tarax. ceratoph., 1906; T. officinale, 
Natuorst, N. W. Grénl., ex p.; J. phymatocarpum, Simmons, Prel. 
Rep. et Bot. Arb., ex p. 

Fig. Dauustept, |. ¢., T. 16. 

When I published my first reports of the botany of the expedition, 
I confounded this species with the common Ellesmereland plant, i. e. T. 
hyparcticum; but later on I found that it came near to 7. ceratophorum, 
which was already stated as a Greenland plant, although not mentioned 
from the north-western parts. Dr. Dautstept, however, has founded a 
new species on my material. 

Occurrence. S, [vsugigsok (NatHorst); Foulke Fjord, abundant in 
the gravelly and clayish slopes beneath Etah (198, 1473). Perhaps also 
the 7. phymatocarpum from Etah in Hoim’s list of the Sretn collec- 
tion may be referred here. Mr. Horm hat determined those plants be- 
fore Danisrept’s treatises were published. 


Distribution. Danish West Greenland (known from a single lo- 
cality at 68° 35’). 


Arnica alpina, (L.) Ouin. 


A. alpina, Smnons, Fl. Ellesm. [A. alpina, Meewan, Contr. Greenl.; 
WetseERILL, List 1894]. 

This species was first brought home from “near Smith’s Sound, 
78°” by Kang, but as it was not found by subsequent expeditions, 
Nartuorst enters it in his list (N. W. Grénl.) as doubtful. Later expedi- 
tions have, however, found it in several places. 


1898— 1902, No. 16.| FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 514 


In Foulke Fjord, probably the same locality where Kane had 
collected it, it grew in the sward of the slopes beneath the rookeries of 
the little auk. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (Stem); Inglefield Gulf: Verhoeff 
Nunatak (Meznan), Fan Glacier (WeETHERILL); Foulke Fjord, inside Etah 
(225, 1502). 


Antennaria alpina, (L.) GAERTN. 


A. alpina, Stmmons, Fl. Ellesm. (A. alpina, Natuorst, N. W. 
Gronl.]. 

The specimens from the only locality in N. W. Greenland that I 
have seen in the Stockholm herbarium, belong to a form whose leaves 
are rather densely woolly-haired on the upper surface also. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorsT). 


Erigeron compositus, Pursu. 


E. compositus, Stumons, FI. Ellesm. [#. compositus, Harr, Bot. 
Br. Pol. Exp.; Mrewan, Contr. Greenl.]. 

Curiously enough, this handsome plant has been totally overlooked 
by most of the previous visitors to Foulke Fjord, where, however, it is 
rather abundant in the gravelly slopes, forming large tufts with numerous 
heads of flowers. Many were still in flower when I first visited the 
place, Aug. 16, 1898. : 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf (MezHan); Foulke Fjord (FEILpEn), 
at Etah (215, 1475). 


Campanulaceae. 


Campanula uniflora, L. 


C. uniflora, Stumons, Fl. Ellesm. [C. uniflora, Natuorst, N. W. 
Gronl.]. 

This plant has entirely escaped the american collectors unless the 
C. rotundifolia var. linifolia of Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S., should be 
referred to this species. But that plant is recorded from the dubious 
locality ““Tessiussak” and therefore must be left out of consideration. 
It might, with better reason perhaps, be presumed that the “gentian” of 
which Kang, I Grinnell Exp., p. 142, speaks as being seen somewhere 
between Cape York and Cape Dudley Digges, is the present species. 


52 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Duranp, Enum. Pl., mentions no Gentiana', and it seems very impro- 
bable that any species of that genus should have reached so far, as no 
Gentiana is found elsewhere north of 69° in Western Greenland. 

Occurrence. S.Ivsugigsok (NaTHoRsT); Foulke Fjord, above Etah 
(1505). 


Scrophulariaceae. 
Pedicularis capitata, ApamMs. 


P. capitata, Stmmons, Fl. Ellesm. [P. capitata, Harr, Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp.]. 

This species, first discovered by Hart to be a native of Greenland, 
is still found only in the same locality, where it grew rather sparingly 
among the grass along small rivulets. 

Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord, Port Foulke (Hart), Point Jensen 
(CopPINGER), plateau above Etah (219). 


Pedicularis hirsuta, L. 


P. hirsuta, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; OstTenreip, Plantes N. E. Grénl. 
[P. hirsuta, Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. Pl. Smith 8.; Harr, Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp., ex p. ?; Natuorst, N. W. Gronl.; Meenan, Contr. Greenl.; 
WETHERILL, List 1894; P. Kanei, Hayes, Op. Pol. Seal. 

This species is doubtless equally common in our area as it is in 
Ellesmereland and in Northern Danish Greenland. I have explained in 
Fl. Ellesm. how difficult it is to ascertain what some authors have 
understood by their names for the species of Pedicularis, and therefore 
I only refer to what is said there. In the following, the localities are 
named that can without any doubt be referred to the present plant. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WetHERILL); Ivsugigsok (NaTHORST); 
Wolstenholme Sound (INGLEFIELD); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Is- | 
land (Stem); M’Cormick Bay (MegHan); Foulke Fjord: Port Foulke 
(Hayes) and many other places (226); Fog Inlet (Kane); Rensselaer Bay 
(Kang). N. Bessels Bay (Hart). This locality is not certain, as Hart 
has also used the name for P. lanatd. 


Pedicularis Janata, Cuam. & ScHLECHTEND. 


P. lanata, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [P. Kanei, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; P. 
Langsdorffit var. lanata, Wetuerit, List 1894]. 
1 Indeed in PI. Kan. he makes the supposition that Sawifraga oppositifolia might 


be the “gentian” of Kane. Natuorsr (Nachtr.) has already made the same con- 
jecture about Campanula uniflora. 


1898—1902. No. 16] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND, 533 


As I have previously (1. c¢., p. 29) mentioned, the P. Kanei of 
DuranpD! belongs to the present species, while his P. lanata is really 
P. hirsuta. Of the later collectors, only Werxeritt records a P. 
Langsdorffit var. lanata, which may probably be rightly determined. 
As [ did not find it in Foulke Fjord, nor did Naruorst at Ivsugigsok, 
it is probably a rare plant in this part of Greenland. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WetTHeRILL); “Smith Sound Stati- 
ons” (KANE). 


Pedicularis fammea, L. 


P. flammea, Linnarus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Lance, Consp. FI. Greenl.; 
Kruusg, List E. Greenl.; Wetuerttt, List 1894; Hooxer, Fl. Bor. Amer.; 
Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl.; Lepesour, Fl. Ross.; Hartman, Skand. 
Fl.; Grontunp, Isl. FI. 

Fig. Linnaeus, Fl. Lapp., T. 4, f. 2; Fl. Dan., T. 1878. 

I have seen no specimens of this plant from any locality within the 
area, but as it is mentioned by Frernatp, whose identifications are 
generally reliable and who has evidently been able to discern the other 
species, I do not hesitate to enter it for the area. 

Occurrence. S. “Quite abundant in low ground at Cape York” 
(WETHERILL). 

Distribution. East Greenland, West Greenland, Arctic America, 
Labrador, Rocky Mountains, Alaska, Arctic Russia, Northern Scandi- 
navia, Iceland. 


Pedicularis arctica, R. Br. 


P. arctica, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [P. arctica, Duranp, Pl. Kan.]. 

I have not myself seen specimens of this plant from our area, but, 
as previously stated (I. c., p. 32), there cannot be the slightest doubt that 
the P. arctica of Duranp, PI. Kan., is the real one. 

Occurrence. S. Rensselaer Harbour (Kang). 


. 


Pedicularis lapponica, L. 


As I have previously (Fl. Ellesm., p. 34) shown, Harr (Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp., p. 35) must somehow have confounded either his specimens 
of Pedicularis from different stations, or the characters of the species; 


‘ In Enum, pl. Smith Sound, the author does not mention his new species as 
having been found by Haves, but in Op. Pol. Sea, the name P. Kanez is substi- 
tuted for P. hirsuta probably by mistake. 


54 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


for he mentions this plant from places where it certainly does not grow. 
This view is confirmed by the absence of specimens from the Nargs 
expedition in the London collections. The statement about its occurrence 
in Foulke Fjord must be left out of consideration. 


Bartsia alpina, L. 


B. alpina, Linnagus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Lancs, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; 
Krvuse, List E. Greenl.; Wetueritt, List 1894; Hooxer, FI. Bor. Amer.; 
Britton & Browy, Ill. Fl.; Lepesour, Fl. Ross.; Hartman, Skand. FI; 
Groniunp, Isl. FI. 

Fig. Sv. Bot., T. 573; Fl. Dan., T. 43. 

There exists an old statement that this plant is found in North- 
Western Greenland, but it is one of the doubtful ones from ‘“Tessiussak, 
Sept. 4” in Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S., and, as previously explained, 
cannot be taken into consideration. Natsorst, N. W. Grénl., therefore 
rightly excludes it, but it has since been found by Werneritt and 
consequently belongs notwithstanding to the flora of this region. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WETHERILL). 

Distribution. East and West Greenland, Labrador, Arctic Russia, 
Scandinavia, the Alps and Pyrenees, Great Britain, Faeroes, Iceland. 


Borraginaceae. 
Mertensia maritima, (L.) 5. F. Gray. 


Pulmonaria maritima, Linnatus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Steenhammera 
maritima, Reicnensacu, Fl. Germ. exc.; Mertensia maritima, Gray, 
Nat. Arr. Br. Pl.; Weraeritt, List 1894; Lepesour, FI. Ross.; Sten- 
hammaria maritima, Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Ksettman, in Vega- 
exp.; Hartman, Skand. Fl.; Grénzunp, Isl. Fl.; Lithospermum mari- 
timum, Hooxer, FI. Bor. Amer.; Pneumaria maritima, Brirton & 
Brown, Il. FI. ; 

Fig. Fl. Dan., T. 25. 

I have not seen this species which is not found elsewhere further 
northward than about 72°, but I enter it on the authority of WETHERILL. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL). 

Distribution. West Greenland, Arctic America, Labrador, down to 
Newfoundland and Massachusetts, from Oregon to Alaska, islands of the 
Bering Sea, Land of the Chukches, down to Kamshatka and the Amur 
Territory, Arctic Russia, Scandinavia, Denmark, Great Britain, Faeroes, 
Iceland. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 55 


Plumbaginaceae. 


Statice maritima, Muu. var. stbirica, (Turez.) Sim. 


St. maritima var. sibirica, Stumons, FI. Ellesm. [Armeria vulga- 
ris, WETHERILL, List 1894; A. vulg. var. labradorica, Duranp, Enum. 
pl. Smith S.]. 


This plant was excluded from the flora of North-Western Green- 
land by Naruorst, N. W. Gronl., because he thought it rather improb- 
able that it should grow so far north, and as there was only the 
doubtful statement of Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S., to prove that it had 
been found there. But since that time it has been collected by Weru- 
ERILL in several places, and moreover I have myself found it in Elles- 
mereland. Consequently there seems no cause for the exclusion of the 
locality of Duranp, “Netlik”, which lies very near one of the localities 
of WETHERILL. 

I have not seen the latter’s specimens, but I think it must be taken 
for granted that the plant of North-Western Greenland is the same as 
that in Ellesmereland, North-Eastern Greenland and the Northern Danish 
colonial districts. Consequently I have set the name used by WerHER- — 
ILL as a synonym, as well as that of Duranp, which in Hayes’s own 
list, Op. Pol. Sea, p. 399, is altered to A. labradorica. But, as I have 
discussed it in Fl. Ellesm., the real A. labradorica is not found in 
Greenland. 

— Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL); Whale Sound; Burdin 
Bay (Srery), Netiulumi (Weruerity), Netlik (Hayes); Cape Acland and 


Fan Glacier in Inglefield Gulf (WeTHERILL). 


Diapensiaceae. 
Diapensia lapponica, L. 


D. lapponica, Simons, Fl. Ellesm.; Werueriy, List 1894. 

Here, as in some other cases in the first part of my Fl. Ellesm., 
the localities recorded by Werxermt have been overlooked and his 
paper not quoted in the synonymic as it should have been. The north- 
ern limit of this species will thus be altered from 74° 18’ to about 76°. 
It is for this also that I have given a reference to his work in the 
synonymic which as to the rest is to be found in FI. Ellesm. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WETHERILL). 


56 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Ericaceae. 
Myrtillus uliginosa, (L.) Dres. var. microphylla, (Lance) Simm. 


M. ulig. var. microphylla, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. | Vaccinium uligi- 
nosum, Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Harr, Bot. Br. Pol. 
Exp.; V. ulig. var. microphyllum, Naruorst, N. W. Gronl.; V. ulig. 
v. mucronatum, WerTHERILL, List 1894). 

This plant seems to be rather common within the area, as it is 
‘present in most collections. Fernatp (in WETHERILL, |. c.) uses the 
name “var. mucronatum, Herper” for it. I have not been able to find 
out where that variety is established or how it is characterized; but 
probably the name cannot apply to our plant. Moreover V. mucrona- 
tum of Linnagus, Sp. Plant., is shown to be a plant belonging to the 
Aquifoliaceae, Nemopanthes fascicularis, Rarin. 

Here, as in Ellesmereland, the size of the leaves is very variable, 
and as WETHERILL mentions, specimens may be found that have quite 
as large leaves as those of the type. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst); between Cape York and 
Cape Dudley Digges (Kane); Inglefield Gulf: Netlik (Hayes), Cape Ac- 
land and Fan Glacier (WeTHERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart), especially in 
the grassy slopes above Etah (245). 


Vaccinium Vitis idaea, L. 


V. Vitis idaea, Linnagus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Lancs, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; 
SuTHERLAND, Voyage; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.; Hooxer, FI. Bor. Amer.; 
Britton & Browy, Ill. Fl.; Kerman, in Vegaexp.; Frmopen, Fl. Pl. Nov. 
Zeml.; Lepepour, FI]. Ross.; Grontunp, Isl. FI. 

Fig. Fl. Dan., T. 40; Sv. Bot., T. 116. 

I have entered this species in the list on the authority of Suruzr- 
LAND, who has it in his list, notwithstanding that I have seen no speci- 
men in the London collections. It is, however, not improbable that it 
occurs at the northern coast of Melville Bay, as it is found up to the 
northernmost parts of Danish Greenland. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SurHERLAND). 

Distribution. West Greenland, Arctic America, Labrador, down 
to the Northern United States, British Columbia, Alaska, islands of the 
Bering Sea, Northern and Middle Asia, Europe, Novaja Semlja, Great 
Britain, Iceland. 


4898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 57 


Cassiope tetragona, (L.) D. Don. 


C. tetragona, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[C. tetragona, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.; Wetu- 
ERILL, List 1894; OsTENFELD, FI. pl. Cape York; Andromeda tetragona, 
Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith Sj]. 

This plant seems to take as prominent a place in the vegetation on 
the Greenland side as it does on the western side of Smith Sound. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SurTHERLAND); Cape York (Hart, 
WetueRILL); between there and Cape Dudley Digges (Kane); Ivsugigsok 
(Natuorst); Umanak and Agpa in Wolstenholme Sound (Battg); Gran- 
ville Bay (My.ius Ericusen); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island 
(Stein), Cape Acland, Bowdoin Bay and Robertson Bay (WETHERILL); 
Port Foulke (Hayes); Foulke Fjord (Hart), abundant at Reindeer Point 
and Etah (Stern, 252); Fog Inlet, Bedevilled Reach and Rensselaer Bay 
(Kane). 

Loiseleuria procumbens, (L.) Desv. 

This plant has been recorded by Kang, I Grinnell Exp., p. 143, 
from a place between Cape York and Cape Dudley Digges and later was 
entered in Natuorst, Nachtr. Now as the plant is found north of 74° 
in Danish Greenland it would seem very probable that it also grew here, 
but it is not mentioned in Duranp, Pl. Kan., and Kane himself men- 
lions it in such a way, as to make it very doubtful whether he, who 
was not much of a botanist, had not perhaps quite another plant in 
front of him. The lines in question run thus:— “.... the wild honey- 
suckle (Azalea procumbens) of our Pennsylvania woods—I could stick 
the entire plant in my button-hole”. Now the name “honeysuckle” is 
used not only for the species of Lonicera of which several grow in the 
woods of Pennsylvania, but also for Azalea, but hardly 1 think for A. 
(Loiseleuria) procumbens, a plant moreover which is not found further 
south in the Eastern States than on the summits of the White Moun- 
tains of New Hampshire and of course not as a common plant in woods. 
Were I to venture a guess at the plant Kane has seen, I should 
be most inclined to think of Rhododendron lapponicum, which has 
since that time been found in the same neighbourhood; but at all events 
the statement of Kane must be left entirely out of consideration. 


Rhododendron lapponicum, (L.) WAHLENB. 


Azalea lapponica, Linnagus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Rh. lapponicum, 
WantenserG, Fl. Lapp.; Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Kruuse, List E. 


58 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Greenl.; Werneritt, List 1894; Hooker, Fl. Bor. Amer.; Britton & 
Brown, Ill. Fl; Ksetuman, Fan. Vestesk. land; Lepesour, FI. Ross. 
Fig. Linnagus, Fl. Lapp., T. 6, f. 1; Sv. Bot., T. 481; FJ. Dan., T. 966. 
Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeETHERILL). 
Distribution. East and West Greenland, Arctic American Archi- 
pelago, Arctic America, Labrador, mountains of the northern United 
States, Rocky Mountains, Alaska, Northern Russia, Northern Scandinavia. 


Pyrolaceae. 


Pyrola rotundifolia, L. var. grandiffora, (Rav.) DC. 


P. rotund. var. grandiflora, Stumons, FI]. Ellesm. [P. rotundifolia 
var. grandiflora, OstTenFrELp, Fl. pl. Cape York; P. rot. var. pumila, 
Werueri.1, List 1894; P. chlorantha, Duranp, Pl. Kan.]. 

This plant was first mentioned by Duranp, Pl. Kan., as P. chlo- 
rantha, but he afterwards corrected the name in Enum. Pl. Smith 5. 
Natuorst, however, has it as doubtful. No specimens were available 
and it is only recorded for “Smith Sound Stations” by Duranp; more- 
over, the specimens of Hayes, who also has it in his list under the 
same name, are from the problematical ‘“Tessiussak”. This induced 
Natuorsr to put a “?” for it in his table (N. W. Gronl.). But since 
the appearance of the last mentioned paper, the plant has been found 
in several places. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL); between that point and 
Cape Dudley Digges (Kang, I Grinnell Exp., p. 143); Umanak and 
Saunders Island (Agpa) in Wolstenholme Sound (Baie); Bowdoin Bay 
in Inglefield Gulf (WetuertLL); Foulke Fjord, near Etah (216). 


Onagraceae. 
Chamaenerium Jatifolium, (L.) Sweet. 


Ch. latifolium, Simons, FI. Ellesm. [Epilobiwm latifolium, Hart, 
Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Wernerity, List 1894). 

To judge from the few points within our area from which this spe- 
cies is known as yet, one would think it to be rather rare there; but 
probably it will in general flower scarcely, as is also the case in Elles- 
mereland, and, in its sterile state, it may easily be overlooked by col- 
ectors who are not trained botanists. In Foulke Fjord I saw only one 
single flower. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 59) 


Occurrence. S, Wolstenholme Sound: Saunders Island (Agpa) and 
Umanak (Bate); Cape Acland and Fan Glacier in Inglefield Gulf (Werx- 
ERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart), in gravelly places near Etah (242). 


Empetraceae. 
Empetrum nigrum, L. 


E. nigrum, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [E. nigrum, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; 
Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Weruerity, List 1894]. 

As I have previously (I. c., p. 42) gone into details abouth the North- 
West Greenland Empetrum-form, it is not necessary to reiterate that 
discussion. My specimens from Foulke Fjord decidedly belong to the 
variety purpureum, (Rariy.) DC., as doubtless also do those of Hayes, 
which Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S., has called HZ. rubrum. The plant 
of Hayes’s collection is reported by Duranp, |. c., p. 95, from the prob- 
lematical ‘“Tessiussak”. The fact that the red-fruited form is nowhere 
found in Danish Greenland, seems to tell against the supposition of 
Matueren, Grinnell Fl., which as I have discussed (p. 14), is for the rest 
supported by several circumstances. The Empetrum specimens may, 
in fact, belong to another collection. In Foulke Fjord the plant grew 
under similar conditions as in Ellesmereland. Ripe fruit was found 
August 11, 1899. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WerTHERILL); “Smith Sound” (Kane); 
Foulke Fjord (Harr), near Etah (1500). 


Rosaceae. 
Dryas integrifolia, VAuL. 


D. integrifolia, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [D. integrifolia, Duranp, Pl. 
Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Natnorst, N. W. Gronl.; Osrenrep, FI. 
pl. Cape York; D. octopetala (et var. integrifolia), Duranp, |. ¢.; Hart, 
Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Mezuan, Contr. Greenl.; Weruerity, List 1894; 
Bessets, Exp. Pol. Amer. et Amer. Nordpol Exp.; NatHorsr, N. W: 

- Gronl.]. 

As I have previously stated (I. c., p. 43—45) all reports about Dryas 
forms from the area here in question, are as far as they have been 
controlled by examination of specimens to be referred to this species. 
No D. octopetala is found there as far as I know, and I feel quite 
justified in transferring to this place the statements about D. octopetala 
made by Duranp in his treatments of the collections of Kane and of 
Haves. 


60 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Some specimens indeed belong to the var. intermedia, Natu. [have 
it in my Foulke Fjord collection, OsTenFeLp reports it as having been 
brought home by My.ius Ericusen, and it has also been seen and 
collected before Natuorst (N. W. Grénl.) distinguished it from the typ- 
ical form of the species. To this the reports about D. octopetala also 
may in general be referred. It is, however, only a local form produced 
by certain conditions. Besides I have also found the var. canescens, 
Smm., in Foulke Fjord (1888). 

D. integrifolia equally as in Ellesmereland seems also to be a 
very common and widely distributed plant in the adjacent parts of 
Greenland where it reaches even to the most northern part of the 
country. Still I think it is best to give a list of the places where it is 
noted from. 

Occurrence. S.Cape York (Hart, WeTHERILL); Ivsugigsok (Nat- 
Horst); Umanak and Agpa (Saunders Island) in Wolstenholme Sound 
(Batxe); Granville Bay (Iterdlagssuak) (MyLius Ericusen); Inglefield Gulf: 
Northumberland Island (Ste); Netlik (Hayes), Fan Glacier and Cape 
Acland (Weruerit), Verhoef Nunatak (MEEHAN), Robertsons Bay (Wetu- 
ERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart, Stein, 199, 1497, 1521, 1883); Bedevilled 
Reach, Rensselaer Bay and Mary Minturn River (Kane). N. Bessels Bay 
and Hannah Island (Hart); Polaris Bay (Hart); Lockwood Island 
(Lockwoop). 


Alchemilla vulgaris, L. 


Not having seen any specimens I can, of course, form no opinion 
about the plant, that Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S., records under this 
name from Netlik. No Alchemilla is found north of Melville Bay by 
any other collector, which makes it also doubtful if the plant in question 
really was found there and not in Danish Greenland. Consequently the 
safest way is to leave it out of consideration until more reliable inform- 
ation about it can be produced. 


Potentilla pulchella, R. Br. 


P. pulchella, Smumons, Fl. Ellesm. 

As is already in some measure shown in my FI. Ellesm., there is 
much difficulty about using the statements of the older authors about 
the arctic Potentillae. As for P. pulchella, this name is to be found 
in the lists of different authors, but it is rather difficult to form any 
opinion about the plants that they have had in view. As none of them 
has been able to discern P. rubricaulis, Lenm., it is always possible or 


* 48981902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 61 


even probable, that the latter plant may hide under some of the state- 
ments about P. pulchella and P. nivea. At all events P. pulchella 
seems to be rather a rare plant in N. W. Greenland. Besides my own 
specimens which represent a form from rather dry localities and which 
somewhat resemble the corresponding form of P. rubricaulis, I have 
only seen specimens collected by Narxorst (also nearly approaching 
P.rubricaulis) and by Hart. The P. pulchella of Duranp, Enum. pl., 
according to the description must be P. rubricaulis, and the same per- 
haps is the case with the Port Foulke plant of Haves. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst); Port Foulke (Hayes,?); 
Foulke Fjord, on a sandy beach near Reindeer Point (1529). 


Potentilla rubricaulis, Len. 


P. rubricaulis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Wotr, Mon. Gatt. Potent. 
[P. rubricaulis, OstENFeLp, F'. pl. Cape York; P. nivea var., Natuorst, 
N. W. Gronl.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., ex p.?; P. pulchella, Durann, 
Pl. Kan. ?]. 

This species is probably more common in our area than is the 
preceding one, but as already mentioned, it has always been overlooked 
and confounded with others. At Etah it was not rare in the grassy 
and gravelly slopes. I am very much inclined to think that the P. pul- 
chella of Duran is really the present species. His description clearly 
shows that he has not had the real P. pulchella in front of him for 
he says: “Flower rather large, of a deep yellow colour; petals obcord- 
ate, longer than the calyx”. ' 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Umanak and Agpa in 
Wolstenholme Sound (Batxe); Etah in Foulke Fjord (221, 1461, 1882); 
Rensselaer Bay and Mary Minturn River ? (KANE). 


Potentilla anserina, L. 


As previously mentioned (Simmons, Fl. Ellesm., p. 54), there are no 
specimens to confirm Hart's statement (Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., p. 29) about 
the occurrence of this species at Foulke Fjord, and as it has not been 
found so far north by other collectors, it must be excluded from the 
flora of our area. 


Potentilla nivea, L. 


P. nivea, Linnagus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Leymann, Revis. Potent.; Ryp- 
BERG, Mon. Amer. Potent.; Wor, Mon. Gatt. Potent.; Lanes, Consp. FI. 


62 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Groenl.; Kruuse, List E. Greenl. and List Angmags.; Hart, Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp., ex p.?; Naruorst, N. W. Gronl., ex p.?; Wetueritt, List 
1894, ex p.; Hooker, Fl. Bor. Amer.; Brirron & Browy, Ill. Fl.; Lepe- 
sour, Fl. Ross.; Fempen, FI. Pl. Nov. Zeml.; Anpersson & HeEsseEt- 
MAN, Spetsb. Karly. 

Fig. Fl. Dan., T. 1035. 

As this species is rather common, or at least widely spread in the 
northern parts of Danish Greenland, it would seem probable that it 
should also grow in the region to the north-west. Indeed it is recorded 
by almost every traveller who has visited our area, yet notwithstanding, 
I have no doubt about my right to cancel most of their statements. 
As I have discussed in my Fl. Ellesm. and above, most of them are 
quite useless on account of the confusion of different species. Hart 
(Il. c.), for instance, notes it as “common everywhere”, but all his speci- 
mens in the London collections belong to other species, Duranp has 
certainly used the name in a wrong sense both in Pl. Kan. and in Enum. 
pl. Smith S., and as far as I can see, there is only the record of Wetu- 
ERILL from Whale Sound which is most probably right, which may be 
used. For my part I have only found it within a small area in Foulke 
Fjord. P. nivea also after the removal of the falsely included species, 
such as P. Vahliana, P. rubricaulis, and others, is yet a rather vari- 
able plant. Even at the Foulke Fjord locality three forms of it can be 
distinguished. The rarest of them is the form with rather broad, rounded 
leaflets, having short teeth (205, 4270), as the plant generally appears 
in Europe. Somewhat less sparingly found was the form that is the 
most common in the arctic regions, especially in Greenland, which has 
longer and narrower leaflets that are more deeply incised (1460). This 
form corresponds to the variety 6 pinnatifida of LeHmann, whose ¢ 
pentaphylla again includes the most luxuriant forms with 5-digitate 
leaves occurring in greater abundance. However, none of my specimens 
can be referred to the latter. But in another respect they are somewhat 
different. Some of them show the typical dense white woolly clothing 
of the lower surface of the leaflets, but others are almost entirely quite 
green (or reddish). They do not, however, quite agree with the « swb- 
viridis of LenMann, nor are they referable to var. pallidior, Swartz, 
Sum. Veg. Scand. The plant in this state indeed shows a rather close 
resemblance to the P. Hookeriana, Leum., such as it is figured in Rev. 
Potent., T. 55, but that species of which specimens are entirely lacking 
in all collections to which I have had access, is said to have the leaves 
white-tomentose on bolh sides. Such specimens are distributed under 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND, 63 


No. 4271, but I have deemed it best not to give them any separate 
name. 

Occurrence. S. Whale Sound: Netiulumi (Werueritt); Foulke 
Fjord: grassy slopes and ledges near Etah (205, 1460, 4270, 4271). All 
older statements must be excluded even though it may be probable that 
the plant has a wider range within the area here in question. 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, southern islands of the 
Arctic American Archipelago, Arctic America, Labrador, Canada, New- 
foundland, Rocky Mountains down to Utah and Colorado, British Co- 
lumbia, Eastern Siberia, down to the Himalayas and the Caucasus, Arc- 
tic Russia, Northern and Alpine Scandinavia, the Alps, Novaja Semlja, 
Spitsbergen. 


Potentilla Vahliana, Lenn. 


P. Vahliana, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Wotr, Mon. Gatt. Potent. 
[P. Vahliana, Natuorst, N. W. Groénl.; Werueritt, List 1894; Osren- 
FELD, Fl. pl. Cape York; P. nivea, Durann, Pl. Kan.]. 

Owing to the confusion with other species, especially P. nivea, in 
the statements of most authors, it is difficult to form any distinct opin- 
ion about the range of this plant, as I have already shown (I. c¢., p. 55). 
I will, however, try to give a list of the places where it is found as far 
as can be judged from the statements in literature or from specimens 
seen in the collections. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL); Ivsugigsok (NaTHoRST); 
Umanak and Agpa in Wolstenholme Sound (Baie); Carey Islands: 
Bjérling Island (WeTHERILL); Netlik (Hayes); Foulke Fjord: gravel and 
clay plains near Etah (210, 1498); Rensselaer Bay (Kane). Probably also 
further northward, as it is found in Grinnell Land. 


Potentilla emarginata, Pursu. 


P. emarginata, Smmons, FI. Ellesm.; Osrenretp, Plantes N. E. 
Gronl. [P. emarginata, Mecuan, Contr. Greenl.; WerTseriy, List 1894; 
OstenFELD, Fl. pl. Cape York; P. fragiformis, Naruorst, N. W. Gronl.; 
P. frigida, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Wetueritz, 1 c.; Duranp, Pl. 
Kan.; P. nivea 8 concolor, Durann, I. c.]. 

Probably this species is common throughout the area, as most 
collectors have brought it home. Most authors seem also to have been 
able to distinguish it from others; but still it seems fairly probable that 
the P. nivea 8 concolor of Duranp, Pl. Kan., p. 190, belongs to it, as 
doubtless does his P. nana. 


64 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Occurrence. 8S. Cape York (Stem); Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wol- 
stenholme Sound: Umanak and Agpa (Bate); Wolstenholme Island 
(Meenan); Granville Bay (Iterdlagsuak) (Myurus Ericusen); Inglefield 
Gulf: nunatak in Verhoeff Glacier (MeeHAN); Fan Glacier and Bowdoin 
Bay (WerueriLt); Northumberland Island (Stern); Foulke Fjord (Hart), 
slopes and ledges at Reindeer Point and Etah (Srein, 4216, 4217); Fog 
Inlet (Kane); Rensselaer Harbour? (Kane). N. Polaris Bay (Coppincer). 


Potentilla tridentata, Sot. 


This species is recorded by Duranp, Pl. Kan., p. 191, from Rens. 
selaer Harbour, but as it is hardly found north of the Disco region, there 
has doubtless been some confusion of specimens and consequently it is 
not to be reckoned as a member of the flora of this region any more 
than is P. maculata, Pourr., which Natuorst has through some mis- 
take entered in his table (N. W. Gronl., p. 31) for Rensselaer Harbour. 
Duranp, however, does not record any such plant for that locality 
either in Pl. Kan., or in Enum. pl. Indeed he speaks of a “P. nivea 
B concolor”, which Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl., p. 6, has thought to be 
P. maculata, but I cannot see any sufficient reason for his conjecture. 
Duranb, indeed, speaks of “two flowerless specimens”, but besides this 
he also describes the flower and gives three localities for it which shows 
that he has had more specimens before him than the sterile ones. Most 
probably the plant from Rensselaer Bay has been P. emarginata. 


Saxifragaceae. 
Saxifraga oppositifolia, L. 


S. oppositifolia, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenrecp, Plantes N. E. 
Gronl. [S. oppositifolia, Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith 5.; 
Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Greety, Rep.; Natuorst, N. W. Gronl.; 
Meenan, Contr. Greenl.; Werueritt, List 1894; Ostenretp, Fi. pl. 
Cape York]. 

This plant, presumably the most common of all arctic species, seems 
to be equally abundant in N. W. Greenland as in Ellesmereland in 
nearly every kind of vegetation. Still I will give a list of the places 
from whence it is noted. 

Occurrence. S.Cape York (Hart, WeTHERILL); Ivsugigsok (Nat- 
Horst); Granville Bay (Iterdlagsuak) (Mytius Ericusen); Umanak and 
Agpa (Saunders Island) in Wolstenholme Sound (Batts); Carey Islands: 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. — 65 


Bjérling Island (WerHERILL); Inglefield Gulf: Redcliffe House (Megan), 
Robertson Bay, Cape Acland and Fan Glacier (WetuHERILL), North- 
umberland Island (Stein); Foulke Fjord: everywhere (Hart, Hayes, STEIN, 
201). N. Lafayette Bay (Kane); Bessels Bay and Polaris Bay (Hart); 
Lockwood Island (Loockwoop). 


Saxifraga flagellaris, Wii. 


S. flagellaris, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. |S. flagellaris, Duranp, PI. 
Kan.; Hayes, Op. Pol. Sea; Harr, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Mgenan, Contr. 
Greenl.; Ostenretp, Fl. pl. Cape York). 

This species is one of the decidedly northern immigrants in Green- 
land, where it seem to be most abundant in the northernmost parts. 
Jn the western coast, it does not even reach as far down as Melville 
Bay (if the certainly mistaken statement of Kane for Disco is excluded). 

Occurrence. S. Wolstenholme Sound: Umanak and Agpa (BaLLe); 
Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stet), M’Cormick Bay (MEEHAN); 
Cape Alexander (Hayes, Op. Pol. Sea, p. 80); Foulke Fjord: Point Jen- 
sen (CoppincER), Reindeer Point (197), Etah (Stet), at the bottom of the 
Fjord at an altitude of 1200—1500 ft. (Harr); Fog Inlet and Rensselaer 
Harbour (Kane). N. Lafayette Bay (Kane). 


Saxifraga aizoides, L. 


S. aizoides, Stmmoys, FI. Ellesm. [S. aizoides, Meenan, Contr. 
Greenl.]. 

Occurrence. S. Wolstenholme Island in Wolstenholme Sound, 
and M’Cormick Bay in Inglefield Gulf (Meguay). 


Saxifraga tricuspidata, Rotts. 


S. tricuspidata, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [S. tricuspidata, Dick, Not. 
fl. pl, in Incterretp, Summer Search; Durann, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. 
Smith S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Groénl.; MEEHAN, 
Contr. Greenl.; WeTHERILL, List 1894; Osrenrexp, Fl. pl. Cape York]. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL); Ivsugigsok (NaTHoRsT) ; 
Wolstenholme Sound: Agpa (Saunders Island) and Umanak (BALLE); 
Inglefield Gulf: Burdin Bay (IncLerretp), “Common everywhere, on the 
Verhoeff Nunatak” (MeeHan), Bowdoin Bay and Northumberland Island 
(WerHeErRILL, Sten); Foulke Fjord: Port Foulke (Hayes), Etah, Reindeer 
Point, and other localities (Hart, Stern, 227); Fog Inlet and Rensselaer 
Harbour (Kane). 


5 


66 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT, EXP, FRAM 


Saxifraga nivalis, L. 


S. nivalis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Osrenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[S. nivalis, SurHerLAND, Voyage; Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith 
S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Nataorst, N. W. Gronl.; Osrenrexp, Fil. 
pl. Cape York]. 

Only the main form seems to have been found in N. W. Greenland. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SuTHERLAND); Ivsugigsok (Nat- 
Horst); Umanak and Agpa in Wolstenholme Sound (Batts); Inglefield Gulf: 
Northumberland Island (Stem); Foulke Fjord: Port Foulke (Hayes), and 
different places near Reindeer Point and Etah (Hart, Stem, 207, 1489); 
Fog Inlet, Bedevilled Reach, and Rensselaer Harbour (Kang). 


Saxifraga stellaris, L. 


S. stellaris, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [S. stellaris, Naruorst, N. W. 
Gronl.; S. foliolosa, Durann, Pl. Kan.]. 

As I have previously mentioned, this plant usually appears in the 
state representing the var. comosa, Retz.; only some of the specimens 
from the southernmost locality —Ivsugigsok—have the terminal flower 
developed. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NarHorst); Northumberland Island 
(Stein); Foulke Fjord: moist mossy places near Reindeer Point (244, 
1493); Fog Inlet (Kane). 


Saxifraga groenlandica, L. 


S. groenlandica, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; S. caespitosa, OSTENFELD, 
Plantes N. E. Grénl. [S. caespitosa, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; Hart, Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp.; Werueritt, List 1894: OsTenrexp, Fl. pl. Cape York]. 

All the specimens from our area seem to belong to the variety 
uniflora, (R. Br.) Simm., such as I have described it (I. ¢., p. 71—72). 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (Hart, Werueritt); Wolstenholme 
Sound: Umanak and Agpa (Bate); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island 
(Stein); Foulke Fjord at Etah (Stem) and other places (Harv, 251, 1506); 
Rensselaer Harbour (Kane). N. Bessels Bay and Polaris Bay (Har). 
Probably everywhere. 


Saxifraga cernua, L. 


S. cernua, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Ostenreitp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[S. cernua, Dickie, Not. fl. pl. in Ineerretp, Summer Search; Durano, 
Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Harr, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; NatHorsr, 


1898-1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 67 


N. W. Gronl.; Meeuan, Contr. Greenl.; Werneritt, List 1894; Osten- 
FELD, Fl. pl. Cape York}. ; 

Very common, but abundant only in manured places such as rook- 
eries and old places of habitation. Some individuals may be branched, 
but more than a single flower is rarely developed. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (Srery); Ivsugigsok (Natuorst); Wol- 
stenholme Sound (InGLerte.p): Umanak and Agpa (Battie), Inglefield 
Gulf: Northumberland Island (Srew, Werxerm), Cape Acland (WertH- 
ERILL), Verhoeff Nunatak (Mrenan); Foulke F jord: Reindeer Point, Etah, 
etc. (202, Srem, Hart), Port Foulke (Hayes); up to 80° (Kang) and 
doubtless also to the north. 


Saxifraga rivularis, L. 


S. rivularis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[S. rivularis, Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S.; Harv, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; 
Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.]. 

Besides the common, taller, and often branched form, I also found 
the same small form that I have mentioned from Ellesmereland (I. c., 
p. 76), and according to Mr. Hotm the var. purpurascens, Lance, is 
collected by Stern. 

Occurrence. S.Cape York (Hart, Stern); Ivsugigsok (NaTHORST); 
Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stet), Netlik (Hayes); Foulke 
Fjord (Hart), in several places near Reindeer Point (238, 248, 1488). 


Cruciferae. 
Hesperis Pallasii, (Pursu.) Torr. & Gray. 


H. Pallasii, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [H. Pallasii, Duranp, Enum. pl. 
Smith S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Meruan, Contr. Greenl.]. 

This plant also belongs to the little group of decidedly american 
immigrants in N. W. Greenland. It seems to be somewhat more spread 
there than was known when Natuorst made his revision of the flora 
of that area (N. W. Gronl.). At Etah it grew fairly abundantly in the 
gravel ledges, and the plants were for the most part luxuriant, having 
several stems. They had ripe pods in abundance when collected about 
the midle of August. , 

Occurrence. S. Cape York or M’Cormick Bay in Inglefield Gulf? 
(Burk according to Meewan); Netlik (Hayes); Foulke Fjord, at Etah 
(Hart, 240, 1474); at Mary Minturn River (Kang). N. Lafayette Bay 
in Washington Land (Morton according to Kang). 


68 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Braya purpurascens, (B. Br.) Bunce. 


B. purpurascens, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [B. alpina, Hart, Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp.; B. glabella, Meruan, Contr. Greenl.]. 

As already shown by Gexert (Not. Arct. Pl.) the Braya of N. W. 
Greenland is not B. alpina, Sterns. & Hopps, as little as is the Grinnell 
Land plant, which Hart (Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.) also has ranged under the 
same name. I have myself seen the specimens upon which Harr based 
his determination, in the London collections. For my part I did not find 
it, nor has any other collector seen it in Foulke Fjord. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf, M’Cormick Bay (Megnan). N. 
Polaris Bay (Coppincer). 


Arabis Hookeri, Lance. 


A. Hookeri, Lane, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880; Simmons, Prel. Rep. 
et Bot. Arb.; Turritis mollis, Hooker, Fl. Bor. Amer. 1840; non Ara- 
bis mollis, STEVEN. 

Fig. Fl. Dan. T. 2296. 

Curiously enough, this plant, although occurring in abundance on 
the rich clay plain at the old Eskimo settlement Etah, has not been 
found, or at least is not mentioned, by any previous collector in these 
regions. Neither do specimens from our area exist in the collections; 
but still there might be a possibility that Harr brought home frag- 
ments of it, which Lance may have seen, for the latter author states 
(l. c., p. 48) that Harr has found A. alpina, L., at Foulke Fjord. Harr 
himself, however, mentions A. alpina only from the well-known local- 
ities at Disco, and Turritis mollis only from Proven (Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., 
p. 24). At all events A. Hookeri is an addition to the flora of N. W. 
Greenland. 

The species, however, does not appear here in its typical form, with 
only one or a few (2—3) erect stems from the rosule. As the Foulke 
Fjord plant differs also in some other respects, [ think it best to describe 
it as a new variety: 


var. multicaulis, n. var. 


Perennis, multiceps, ramis floriferis numerosis (saepe 10 vel plur- 
ibus) decumbentibus, brevibus (10 cm.). Folia numerosa, dense rosulato- 
congesta, pro maxima parte per fructificationem persistentia. Racemi 
densi, pedicelli patuli, 0.5 cm. longi. Siliquae quam in forma typica 
majores, 2—4 cm. longae, leviter curvatae. Semina flavo-brunnescentia. 


1898 —1902. No 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 69 


As appears from this diagnosis, the variety differs from the type in 
the mode of growth, the taproot carrying a number of branches, with 
dense rosules of leaves, and several flowering branches again springing 
from each rosule, the number of inflorescences thus often amounting to 
a dozen or more. The branches are much shorter than the erect stems 
of the type, and lie postrate on the ground, radiating out on all sides. 
The seeds are yellow or somewhat brownish, not dark brown as Lance 
describes those of the type. They are for the most part placed in two rows. 
A few half-withered white flowers were still to be seen in some plants 
when I collected the specimens, August 11, 1899; most of the plants had 
the greater part of the pods already quite ripe. In 1898, when I visited 
the same places a few days later, I saw only rosules of leaves, no flow- 
ering or fruiting specimens were then found. 

Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord: at Etah (1466) and in the rookeries. 

Distribution (of the main species): Northern Danish West 
Greenland, Arctic America (shore of the Polar Sea). 


Draba alpina, L. 


D. alpina, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
(D. alpina, Dickie, Not fl. pl. in IncLerreLp, Summer Search; Duranp, 
Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Naruorsr, 
N. W. Gronl.; Meenan, Contr. Greenl.; Wetuerity, List 1894; Osren- 
FELD, Fl. pl. Cape York; D. glacialis, SutHERLAND, Voyage; Dicxin, |. c.; 
Duranp, Pl. Kan.}. 

I collected only a few individuals at Foulke Fjord, where the spe- 
cies seems to be less common than in Ellesmereland. One of them repre- 
sents the var. glacialis, (Apams) Ksetim., which is recorded by previous 
authors for several localities, of which I do not, however, think it nes- 
sessary to give any specification, as there may be a question as to 
what the different authors have understood by the name. Specimens, 
belonging probably to var. gracilescens, Stum., I have seen in NaTuorst’s 
collections from Ivsugigsok. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wolstenholme Sound 
(IncLerreLp), Umanak and Agpa (Batus); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin Bay 
(IncLerreLp), Fan Glacier, Cape Acland (WeTHertt), M’Cormick Bay 
(MegHan), Glacier Valley near Cape Robertson (WETHERILL), Northumb- 
erland Island (Stzin); Foulke Fjord: Port Foulke (Hayes), Etah (1504) ; 
Bedevilled Reach (Kane); Rensselaer Harbour (Kang). N. Lafayette Bay 
(Kang); Polaris Bay (Hart). 


70 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Draha fladnizensis, Wutr. 


D. fladnizensis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. 
Gronl. [D. fladnizensis, WetueRiLt, List 1894; D. Wahlenbergii, Nav- 
uorst, N. W. Gronl.; D. rupestris, Duranp et Hart, ex p.?]. 

Not one single earlier author has mentioned this species, although 
it is very probable that some of the localities recorded for D. rupestris 
may really belong to it. This, however cannot to be decided and conse- 
quently I can give only a few in the southern part of our area. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NarHorst); Inglefield Gulf: North- 
umberland Island (Sretn), Fan Glacier, Cape Acland, and Glacier Valley 
at Cape Robertson (WeETHERILL); Foulke Fjord, in several places (Srety, 
206, 218, 1484, 4181). 


Draba subcapitata, Simm. 


As I did not myself find this species at Foulke Fjord, and as | 
have seen no indisputable specimens of it from the area, I can not assert 
that it is to be found there; but I think that some badly preserved 
specimens which I have seen belong to it, and, further, some statements 
in literature seem to indicate that it has been found by other collectors. 
I should be inclined to refer to it the D. Wahlenbergii var. brachycarpa 
of Naruorst, found at Ivsugigsok, but the specimen I have seen in the 
Stockholm collection is not enough to justify any decided opinion. The 
description of the varieties corymbosa and micropetala, which Duranp 
(Pl. Kan., p. 187) gives under D. alpina, of plants collected by Kane 
at Bedevilled Reach and Rensselaer Harbour also seem to indicate that 
hardly any other species can be meant. Most authors, however, have 
treated their Drabae in such a manner, that it is impossible, without 
having the material at my disposal for inspection, to form any opinion’ 
about the plants that hide under the different names. There is especi- 
ally the name D. corymbosa, which is used to cover the most diverse 
things which the authors have not been able to classify. Several state 
ments I have necessarily been obliged to leave entirely out of consi- 
deration. 


Draba nivalis, Livses.. 


D. nivalis, Stumons, Fl. Ellesm. [D. nivalis, Naruorst, N. W. 
Grénl.]. 

This species seems to be rather rare within the area as it is only 
recorded by one of the later authors; it may of course, however. 


1398—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 71 


have been previously overlooked or confounded with other species. For 
my own part, I found very little of it. 

Occurrence. S, Cape York (Stein); [vsugigsok (NatHorst); North- 
umberland Island in Inglefield Gulf (Stem); Foulke Fjord (4199). 


Draba hirta, L. 


D. hirta, Stwmons, Fl. Ellesm. [D. hirta, Drcxis, Not. fl. pl. in 
INGLEFIELD, Summer Search; Meeuan, Contr. Greenl.; D. rupestris, Dur- 
anp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; D. arc- 
tica, Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.]. 

This species also is so confounded with others by the authors, that 
it is very difficult to give any detailed statements about its occurrence 
within the area. It may, however, be taken to be fairly common. My 
specimens and those of Natuorst belong to the variety arctica, (J. 
VauHL) Wats. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin 
Bay (Incuerretp), Nunatak in Verhoeff Glacier (MeeHay), Netlik (Hayes); 
Foulke Fjord, Etah (MeeHan, 220, 1496); Rensselaer Harbour (Kane). 
N. Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Draba incana, L. 


D. incana, Linnazus, Sp. Plant. 1753; Gevert, Not. Arct. Pl; 
Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Kruuse, List Angmags. ; Wertuerit, List 
1894: Hooker, Fl. Bor. Amer.; Brirron, & Brown, Ill. Fl.; Lepesour, 
Fl. Ross.; D. confusa, Enruart, Beitr. Naturk.; Hooker, |. ¢. 

Fig. Fl. Dan. T. 130. 

Although this plant is not spread north of 70° in Danish Greenland, 
there is still not sufficient cause for any doubt of the statement of WerTH- 
ERILL, and therefore I enter it on his authority. ! 

Occurrence. S. Netiulumi in Inglefield Gulf (WerHeritt). 

Distribution: East Greenland up to 61°, West Greenland up to 
70°, Labrador, Canada, Western Arctic and Temperate America, Rocky 
Mountains, Unalaschka, Kamshatka, East Siberia, Altai, Himalayas, Cau- 
casus, Ural, Northern Russia, Scandinavia, mountains of Central Europe, 
Great Britain, Faeroes, Iceland. 


1 When I wrote my FI. Ellesm., 1 was not aware that Werneritt had recorded 
D. ineana from N. W. Greenland. Taken together with this statement, the re- 
cord of D. borealis from Grinnell Land becomes a little more probable as the 
latter name signifies one of the forms of D. incana. It may, however, be that 
both records ought to be in fact transferred to D. hirta. 


72 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC, ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Lesquerella arctica, (Wormsks.) Wats. 


L. arctica, Simmons, FI]. Ellesm. [Z. arctica, WETHERILL, List 1894; 
Vesicaria arctica, Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Harz, 
Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Megnan, Contr. Greenl.]. 

This plant is not common within the area, probably most spread to 
the north. I have not seen it there, and it has not previously been 
found in Foulke Fjord. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf (Meenan), Netlik (Hayes), Burdin 
Bay (Srem), Fan Glacier (Werueriit); Mary Minturn River (Kang).! 
N. Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Cardamine bellidifolia, L. 


C. bellidifolia, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenrexp, Plantes N. E. Grénl. 
[C. bellidifolia, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.]. 

Not observed by any other collectors but Harr, Narnorst, and 
myself; but probably overlooked by others because of its small growth. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Foulke Fjord: Reindeer 
Point (1483, 1530), at the front of the glacier (Hart). 


EHatrema Hdwardsii, R. Br. 


E. Edwardsii, Stumons, FI]. Ellesm. 

A very rare plant in Greenland, where it is previously found only 
in two localities, Umanak in Danish Greenland, and Mackenzie Bay on 
the east coast. I found only a few individuals in the dry bed of a little 
rivulet on the ledge above Etah. 

Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord, Etah (1508). 


Cochlearia officinalis, L. var. groenlandica, (L.) GELERT. 


C. officinalis var. groenlandica, Stmmons, Fl. Ellesm. [C. officina- 
lis, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; C. groenlandica, WetTueriu, List 1894; 
C. fenestrata, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; Narsorst, N. W. Gronl.; C. oblongi- 
folia, Dicxrz, Not. fl. pl., in IncLerretp, Summer Search]. 


1 When Duranp, PI. Kan., p. 186, gives the locality where Kane's specimens are 
found as “junction of Humboldt and Washington Lands, 8ist N. latitude”, and says 
that they were collected in August, he must be mistaken in several respects: 
Lat. 81° would be about Cape Bryan at the mouth of Bessels Bay, where no 
collections were made; and these regions were never visited in August but only 

- in the spring by Morton. Kane himself (Arct. Expl. I, p. 99 and note 24) speaks 
of the plant in question as found at the mouth of Mary Minturn River. 


1898-1902. No. 16.] FLOW.PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND, 73 


The scurvy grass was rather common in Foulke Fjord and somewhat 
variable in size and manner of growth, according to the different kinds 
of localities where it was found, as was also the case in Ellesmereland: 
but all specimens were referable to the above-mentioned variety. As the 
case has been the same with all specimens that I have seen from North- 
ern Greenland and the northern islands of the American Archipelago, 
I do not hesitate to refer to it all records of Cochlearia from our area, 
even when the author has used another specific or variety name. 

Occurrence. Cape York (WereEriLL); Ivsugigsok (NaTHorsT); 
between Cape Atholl and Cape Dudley Digges (Kang); Wolstenholme Sound 
(IncLerteLp); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Hayes, Arct. boat 
journ., p. 93, Stem); Burdin Bay (INGLeFreLp); Sutherland Island at Cape 
Alexander (Kane); Foulke Fjord: Reindeer Point and Etah (Hart, Stern, 
917, 249); Pikira (Littleton Island), Rensselaer Harbour, Mary Minturn 
River (Kane). N. Polaris Bay (Coppice). 


Papaveraceae. 
Papaver radicatum, Rorts. 


P. radicatum, Stumons, Fl. Ellesm.; Ostenrevp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[P. radicatum, OstenrELp, FI. pl. Cape York; P. nudicaule, SuUTHER- 
LAND, Voyage; Dickie, Not. fl. pl. in INGLEFIELD, Summer Search; Dur- 
ano, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Nar- 
norst, N. W. Gronl.; Brssets, Exp. Pol. Amer. et Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; 
Meruan, Contr. Greenl.; WeTHerILt, List 1894; GREELY, Rep.; P. alpi- 
num, Harv }. c.]. 

At Foulke Fjord the poppy was extremely abundant, especially around 
the old settlements and in the rookeries. In such places it would form 
large tufts having twenty, thirty, or more flowering or fruiting stems. 
In other situations the plants would be smaller, but I did not there see 
any that might by right be referred to the var. Hartianum, Sma. Prob- 
ably, however, this is the variety of which Mrgnan speaks as being 
found on Wolstenholme Island and at M’Cormick Bay. Perhaps also 
the white-flowered form from the tableland at Ivsugigsok, which Navr- 
HoRsT mentions, may belong to this variety. The colour of the petals 
varied in the usual manner, the sulphureous being the most common, 
but saffron and almost pure whithe flowers were also to be found. Forms 
with more or less lacerated petals were also met with. 


74 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


The poppy seems to be a very common plant throughout the area, 
and is found up to the farthest point where any plants have been 
collected. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (Ross, SurHeRLAND); Cape York 
(Hart, Stein, WETHERILL); Ivsugigsok (NatTHorsT); Wolstenholme Sound 
{INGLEFIELD), Agpa (Saunders Island) and Umanak (Battie), Wolsten- 
holme Island (MeeHan), Granville Bay (Mytius Ericusen); Inglefield Gulf: 
Northumberland Island (Stein), Burdin Bay (INGLEFiEeLp), Cape Acland, 
Fan Glacier, Bowdoin Bay, Glacier Valley at Cape Robertson (WetuHeEr- 
iLL), M’Cormick Bay (MeeHan); Cape Alexander (Hayes); Foulke Fjord 
(Hart, 200, 1885); Rensselaer Harbour and Mary Minturn River (Kang). 
N. Lafayette Bay (Kane); Bessels Bay and Hannah Island (Hart); Hall 
Land (Bessets); Polaris Bay (Hart); Lockwood Island (Lockwoop). 


Ranunculaceae. 
Ranunculus affinis, R. Br. 


f. affinis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. 

This species was never found in North-Western Greenland before 
my second visit to Foulke Fjord; but as it was known from the north- 
eastern coast and also from one single locality! on the west side (Ar- 
salik at N. Isortok Fjord, collected by Kornerup), there was good reason 
for keeping a lockout for it. The specimens, of which I got only a few, 
are somewhat smaller than those from Ellesmereland, but agree with them. 
They were, for the most part, in fruit when collected, August 11, 1899. 

Occurrence. S, Foulke Fjord, grassy slopes above Etah (1501), 
also in the Sretn collection. 


Ranunculus sulphureus, Souanp. 


fi. sulphureus, Smmuons, Fl. Ellesm. [R. sulphureus. Natuorst, 
N. W. Gronl., R. nivalis, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., ex p.; Duran, PI. 
Kan., ex p.; BR. frigidus, Dickie, Not. fl. pl., in IncLerretp, Summer 
Search]. 

In all probability, this species is a common plant throughout our 
area, where it is found by most collectors since the time of SUTHERLAND 
and InGLeriELD. Sometimes, however, it may have been overlooked or 


1 T have previously pointed out (FI. Ellesm., p. 107) that Harr has made a mis- 
take when he stated this species for Disco. 


- 


1898— 1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 75 


confounded with &. nivalis, for instance by Hayes who has only the 
latter in his list. In Foulke Fjord it grew fairly abundantly both in 
grassy slopes and in moister places. 

Occurrence. 5S. Ivsugigsok (NarHorst); Wolstenholme Sound 
(INGLEFIELD); Smith Sound localities (Kane); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at 
Reindeer Point and Etah (204, 1503). 


Ranunculus nivalts, L. 


R. nivalis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [R. nivalis, Dickie, Not. fl. pl., 
in InGLeFreLD, Summer Search; Duranp, Pl. Kan., ex p.; Hart, Pot. Br. 
Pol. Exp., ex p.; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.; Werueriit, List 1894; R. 
niv. var. Freiligrathi, BrssEts, Exp. Pol. Amer.]. 

This species is stated for many more places than the preceding. 
Notwithstanding that I did not myself find it at Foulke Fjord, and that 
I am rather inclined to think that several of the records should by 
rights be transferred to R. sulphureus or should even include both, [ 
think it best to enumerate the localities as they are given in the differ- 
ent lists, as it is impossible to make sure of the identifications of the 
specimens of the american collectors. 

BesseEts, in Exp. Pol. Amer., gives a list of the vascular plants found 
during the expedition of Haux in the district afterwards called Hall Land. 
In this list, stands as the first “Ranunculus nivalis (L.) var. Freili- 
grathi (Bessets)”. No description, however, of the variety is given, and 
when in his later work (Amer. Nordpol-Exp.) BesseLs gives a new list 
of the plants (p. 304), which had meanwhile been examined by Asa GRAY, 
he there speaks only of “R. nivalis var.” The name Freiligratht, as 
far as I know, has never been validly published and consequently must 
be left out of consideration. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (Hart); Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wol- 
stenholme Sound (IncuerreLp); Northumberland Island (WETHERILL, STEIN); 
Smith Sound stations! (Kane); Foulke Fjord (Hart), (at Etah (Mee- 
HAN)?)2. N. Lafayette Bay (Kane); Bessels Bay and Hannah Island 
(Hart); Hall Land (BesseEts). 


1 When Kane speaks of “Ranunculus” without further specification, he may 
mean either R. nivalis or R. sulphureus. Such vague statements he has for 
Mary Minturn River, Rensselaer Bay, between Capes Atholl and Dudley Digges. 

2 Most probably Meruan has here confounded R. nivalis and R. sulphureus, the 
latter being common and abundant at Etah. 


76 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP.FRAM 


Ranunculus Sabinei, R. Br. 


R. Sabinei, Smmons, Fl. Ellesm. [R. Sabine affinis, Duranp, PI. 
Kan.; Kane, Arct. Expl.]. 

As I have previously discussed (I. c. p. 111) the description of the 
plant in Kane’s collection, which Duranp has, with some doubt, refer- 
red to this species, is quite enough to make it certain that his identi- 
fication was right. It seems, however, to be a rare plant in North-West- 
ern Greenland, as it is not found again in the southern parts which 
have been more closely investigated in later years. It may, however, 
have been confounded with R. nivalis or R. pygmaeus. The locality 
mentioned by Duranp seems also to correspond with those of the species 
in Ellesmereland, but not the statement of Kane himself for one of his 
localities, where it is said to be found among Sphagnum. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland and Hakluyt 
Islands (Kane); Bedevilled Reach (Kane). 


Ranunculus pygmaeus, WAHLENB. 


R. pygmaeus, Stumons, FI. Ellesm. [&. pygmaeus, Natuorst, N. 
W. Gronl.]. 

This species, which seems to have been totally overlooked by the 
earlier collectors, was first found by Natuorst. In Foulke Fjord it grew 
abundantly and luxuniantly in a mossy depression among the rocks tog- 
ether with Catabrosa algida, Saxifraga rivularis, and others. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (Stern); Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Ingle- 
field Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stem); Foulke Fjord (1469). 


fanunculus hyperhoreus, Rorts. 


R. hyperboreus, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. 
Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Srey). 


Caryophyllaceae. 
Arenaria ciliata, L. 


A. ciliata, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [A. ciliata, Wetueritt, List 1894}. 
Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: at Fan Glacier (WETHERILL). 


1898—1902. No. 16.) FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 77 


. Honkenya peploides, (L.) Enru. 


Arenaria peploides, Linnarus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Weruerity, List 
1894; Hooker, FI. Bor. Amer.; Macoun, Pl. Pribilof; Honkenya pe- 
ploides, Exnruart, Beitr. Naturk. 2; Kruuse, List Angmags.; Lrpe- 
pour, Fl. Ross.; Ammadenia peploides, Ruprecat, Fl. Samojed. cisural. ; 
Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl.; Halianthus peploides, Fries, Fl. Hall. ; 
LANGE, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Kruuse, List E. Greenl.; Ksetuman, in Vega- 
exp.; AnpERSSon & HesseLMAN, Spetsb. karlv.; Kruuse, Jan May.; 
Hartman, Skand. Fl.; Grontunp, Isl. FI. 

. Fig. J. G. Gmeuin, Fl. Sibir. IV, Tab. 64; Fl. Dan., Tab. 624. 

My specimens, which were collected on a sandy beach, where the 
plant formed a fairly dense vegetation, approach the var. diffusa, 
(Hornem.) Kruuse, in certain respects but differ from it in others. 
Hornemann, Dansk Oec. Plantel. I, Ed. 3, p. 501, describes his Arenaria 
peploides diffusa as having the stems creeping and more spreading, 
than in the main form; with thinner narrower leaves and longer inter- 
nodes. My specimens, indeed, have thin, rather narrow leaves, but the 
plants are somewhat tufted and the stems are short. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WetHerILL); Foulke Fjord, outside 
Reindeer Point (1525). 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, Baffin Land, Arctic 
America, Northern Atlantic and Pacific shores of America, Islands of 
the Bering Sea, Kamshatka, Eastern and Arctic shores of Siberia, North- 
ern and Western Europe, Novaja Semlja, Spitsbergen, Jan Mayen, Fae- 
roes, Iceland. 


Alsine groenlandica, (Retz.) FEL. 


Meenan (Contr. Greenl., p. 209) records a species from M’Cormick 
Bay in Inglefield Gulf, which he calls “Arenaria groenlandica, SPRENG.” 
Tu. Houm (Contr. Fl. Greenl.), indeed, who has corrected a great many 
errors in Meswan’s paper, and especially in his identifications of the 
species, has not mentioned anything about the plant here in question ; 
but this may be accounted for by the fact that he has not seen the 
whole collection of MeeHan, and so has been unable to control him in 
every case. At all events, I do not feel justified in entering Alsine 
groenlandica in the list of the North-Western Greenland flora without 
better authority, as the species so far as known, is not at all high-arc- 
tic. Its principal area of distribution is in the Eastern States of America, 
from the higher parts of the Alleghanies in North Carolina and Virginia, 


78 H. G. SIMMONS. |SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


northwards to Labrador. Further, it is found in a number of places in 
Greenland, on the east coast only at Ikerasarsuk in the far south, and 
on the west coast principally in the southern districts as far as to about 
644/,° N. (Baals Revier, leg. Vani). Further north it is recorded from 
three stations, Sukkertoppen (about 651/,°, leg. Kang), Egedesminde (about 
681/.°, leg. Sorensen) and Upernivik (about 73°, leg. Kane). 

The statements of Duranp about Kanr’s plant are, as previously 
pointed out by several authors, and as I myself have had an opport- 
unity of showing, not to be trusted overmuch; and so we get, even 
reckoning from Egedesminde, an extension of about 9° northward of the 
area of the species. In the Arctic Archipelago A. groenlandica is not 
found; Harvr’s statement of it for Northern Ellesmereland is a mistake, 
as I have ascertained at Kew (Simmons, Fl. Ellesm., p. 117), and the 
same is almost certainly the case with Greety’s plant under the same 
name (Rep. II, p. 18). 

It is rather difficult to form any opinion, as to what MegHan’s plant 
really is, perhaps Alsine verna, (L.) WaHLens., as this common species 
is lacking in his list. 


Alsine verna, (L.) WAHLENB. 


A. verna, Simmons, F], Ellesm.; [.4. verna. OsTenretp, FI. pl. Cape 
York; A. rubella, Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S.; Natuorst, N. W. 
Groénl.; Arenaria verna, Werneritt, List 1894; 4. rubella, Hart, Bot. 
Br. Pol. Exp.]. 

This is doubtless a common species, even though not collected in 
all the places visited by the different expeditions or by all collectors. 
Generally my specimens represent the variety rubella (WAHLENB.), as is 
the case also in Ellesmereland. The Arenaria arctica in the list of 
Hayes (Op. Pol. Sea), doubtless belongs here, as Duranp has instead of 
it the name A. rubella var. hirta, Vauu. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wolstenholme Sound: 
Umanak and Saunders Island (Batter); Inglefield Gulf: Netlik (Hayes), 
Fan Glacier (WeruerILL): Foulke Fjord (Harr), at Reindeer Point (243, 
1495). 


Cerastium alpinum, L. 


C. alpinum, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Osrenreto, Plantes N. E. Grénl. 
[C. alpinum, SuTHertanp, Voyage; Dickie, Not. fl. pl., in INGLEFIELD, 
Summer Search; Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S. (incl. var.); 
Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Bessets, Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Natuorst, N. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND, 79 


W. Gronl.; Meeuan, Contr. Greenl.; Werneritt, List 1894: GREELY, 
Rep.; Ostenretp, Fl. pl. Cape York; C. vulgatwm, Besses, Exp. Pol. 
Amer.] 

This common arctic plant has been brought home from, or at least 
observed at, almost every place visited. My specimens, collected in the 
rich soil of the old Eskimo village of Etah, represent a big, rather 
hairy form, probably the same as the var. Fischerianum in Duranp, 
Enum. pl. Smith S. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SurHeRLaND); Cape York (Hart, 
WETHERILL, STEIN); between that point and Cape Dudley Digges (Kang); 
Ivsugigsok (NatHorst), between Cape Dudley Digges and Cape Atholl 
(Kane); Wolstenholme Sound (MeeHan), at Umanak and Saunders Is- 
land (Bate); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin Bay (IncLerretp), Netiulumi (WetTH- 
ERILL), Glacier Valley, Cape Acland, Fan Glacier (WeTHERILL); Carey 
Islands (WeTHERILL); Port Foulke (Hayes); Foulke Fjord (Harr), at 
Etah (Sten, 250, 1462); Rensselaer Bay (Kane); Mary Minturn River 
(Kang). N. Lafayette Bay (Kane); Bessels Bay, Hannah Island, Cape 
Morton (Hart); Hall Land (Bessets); Polaris Bay (Hart); Lockwood 
Island (Lockwoop). — 


Stellaria humifusa, Rotts. 


S. humifusa, Smumons, FI. Ellesm. [S. humifusa, Duranp, Enum. 
pl. Smith S.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Naruorst, N. W. Grénl.; Wetu- 
ERILL, List 1894). 

Notwithstanding the fact that Hart records this species from Foulke 
Fjord, I did not find it there. I should think it very probable, how- 
ever, that it grows in the innermost part of the fjord, in front of the 
Brother John’s Glacier, which I could not reach during our short stay. Ac- 
cording to Tu. Hot (Contr. FI. Greenl.) the S. longipes var. Edwardsii of 
Meenan (Contr. Greenl.), should be the present species. I dare not, 
however, refer the locality Verhoeff Nunatak here, as it would be quite 
contrary to the nature of S. humifusa to grow in such a_ locality. 
Mseuan has probably confounded the two species, and the specimen 
seen by Hotm, has been collected in a place not recorded in MegHan’s 
list — perhaps in Danish Greenland. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst); Wolstenholme Sound: 
Dalrymple Island (WeTHERIL); -Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island 
(Sremn), Netlik (Hayes); Foulke Fjord (Hart). 


80 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Stellaria longipes, GOLDIE. 


S. longipes, Simmons, F]. Ellesm.; Ostenreip, Plantes N. E. Grénl. 
[S. longipes, Dickie, Not. fl. pl., in INcLerieLp, Summer Search; Duranp, 
Pl. Kan. (incl. varr.); Natnorst, N. W. Gronl.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; 
Werueriit, List 1894; Osrenrexp, FI. pl. Cape York; S. stricta, Dur- 
anp, Enum. pl. Smith S.]. 

In Foulke Fjord, where the plant was very common, I found the 
var. humilis, Fenzi, the same in which it generally appears in Elles- 
mereland, as well as another, less condensed, and glaucous form, which 
comes nearest to var. peduncularis, (Bunce) Fenzu (St. peduncularis, 
Bunce, in Lepezour, Fl. Alt.). The first-mentioned form grew in open 
soil, gravelly places, etc., the latter among grass along brooks in the 
slope above Etah (1499). 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (Natuorst); Wolstenholme Sound 
(INGLEFIELD); Granville Bay (Mytius Ericusen); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin 
Bay (Incterietp), Northumberland Island (WETHERILL, Stern), Netiulumi, 
Fan Glacier, (WeTHERILL), Verhoeff Nunatak (MEEHAN, compare above 
under S. humifusa), Netlik (Hayes); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Reindeer 
Point and Etah (Srem, 211, 1499); Bedevilled Reach and Rensselaer 
Bay (Kane). 


Melandrium affine, J. Van. 


M. affine, Smmons, F. Ellesm.; M. involucratum 6 affine, OstTeN- 
FELD, Plantes N. EK. Gronl. [M. affine, Ostenretp, Fl. pl. Cape York; 
Lychnis affinis, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Wahlbergella affinis, Nat- 
Horst, N. W. Gronl.]. 

In Foulke Fjord I found only one single individual of this species, 
the following, which was not found in Ellesmereland, being here the 
most abundant. Kane did not bring home either of them, only M. 
apetalum; but some of his notes about ‘“Lychnis”, for instance, at the 
mouth of Mary Minturn River in Bancroft Bay, and from the shore of 
Kennedy Channel, belong most probably here. The “Lychnis pauci- 
flora” of Hayes! of which I can form no distinct opinion as the speci- 


1 Indeed Duranv, Enum. pl. Smith S., records a “Lychnis pauciflora, Fiscu.” from 
Netlik, but as he has also besides L. apetala, he does not use the name inthe same 
sense as Fiscuer himself (L. pauciflora, Fiscu. in litt. is a synonym of L. ape- 
tala, according to Decanpotts, Prodr. I, p. 386). According to Romrpacs, Syn. 
Lychn., the author of L. pauciflora is LepEsour, even though the specimens in 
the herbarium of Fiscuer are referred to under Melandrium apetalum. Lepe- 
zour himself, in his Fl. Ross. has his L. pauciflora as a synonym of the latter 


1898 — 1902. No. 16.| FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 81 


mens are not accessible, belongs more probably to M. triflorum, but 
later collectors also have found M. affine. It seems, however, to be 
much rarer here than to the west. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wolstenholme Sound: 
Umanak and Saunders Island (Bate); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland 
Island (Stern); Foulke Fjord (Hart, 4272). N. Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Melandrium trifforum, (R. Br.) Vaut. 


Lychnis triflora, Ros. Brown, List of pl., 1819 (nomen solum); 
WETHERILL, List 1894; L. affinis var. triflora, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; 
Wahlbergella triflora, Fries, Sum. Veg. Scand.; Srumons, Prel. Rep. et 
Bot. Arb.; Natuorst, N. W. Groénl.; Melandrium triflorwm, Vauu, in 
Lresmann, FI. Dan.; Ronrpacu, Syn. Lychn.; Lance, Consp. FI. Groenl.; 
Hartz, Fan. o. Karkr.; Kruuse, List E. Green. 

Fig. Fl. Dan., T. 2356. 

This species seems to be at least as common as the former, and 
occurs in greater abundance at the points where il is found, at all events 
by Narsorst and myself. In the rich soil of the old village of Etah, 
as well as in the slopes where the little auks had their nests, luxuriant 
specimens were found in abundance. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTuorst); Inglefield Gulf: Netiu- 
umi (Werueri1), Northumberland Island (Stein), Bowdoin Bay (WeTH- 
ERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Etah (Stern, 214, 1470). Not yet rec- 
orded from the region north of the Humboldt Glacier, where it must, 
however, most probably grow, to judge from the distribution. 

Distribution: Northern East and West Greenland. This is one 
of the very few endemic species of Greenland. It is indeed recorded 
also for Northern Ellesmereland, but almost certainly by mistake as J 
have previously pointed out (Fl. Ellesm., p. 126). 


Melandrium apetalum, (L.) Fenzu. 


M. apetalum, Siumoys, FI. Ellesm. [Lychnis apetala, Dickiz, Not. 
fl. pl., in INGLEFIELD, Summer Search: Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S.; 


species. Duranp, who has both in his list of Hayes’ plants, must have made 
some mistake, and has probably used the name “pauciflora” either for M. affine 
‘or M. triflorum. In his PI. Kan. also, Duranp, has both L. apetala and L. 
pauciflora, the latter recorded for “Bedevilled Reach and other stations of 


Smith Sound”. 6 


82 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Bessers, Exp. Pol. Amer. et Amer. Nordpol- 
Exp.; WeTHERILL, List 1894}. 

Occurrence. S. Wolstenholme Sound (IncLEFIELpD); Inglefield Gulf:1 
Burdin Bay (Incerretp), Netlik (Hayes), Fan Glacier and Cape Acland 
(WeTHERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Reindeer Point (1494, 1524, 1583).2 


N. Hall Land (Bessets). 


Silene acaulis, L. 


S. acaulis, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [S. acaulis, Duranp, Pl. Kan., 
et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.; WeTHERILL, List 1894]. 

Notwithstanding that this species is not at all rare at Foulke Fjord, 
it has been entirely overlooked there by the previous collectors. I found 
it in several places—in grassy slopes as well as in gravel plains. Nar- 
norst, N. W. Gronl., records it only for Ivsugigsok; but although it is 
not noted by Duranp from any of Kane’s North-West Greenland local- 
ities, it is mentioned by Kane himself (Arct. Explor. I, p. 266), and it 
is also entered in the list of Hayes’s collections. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WetHERILL); Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); 
Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stem), Glacier Valley, Cape 
Acland, Fan Glacier (WeTHERILL), Netlik (Hayes); Foulke Fjord, Rein- 
deer Point (223, 1520); Rensselaer Bay (Kane). 


Portulacaceae. 


Montia lamprosperma, CHAM. 


M. lamprosperma, Cuamisso, Pl. Romanzoff., 1831; M. fontana, 
Linnaeus, Sp. Plant., Ed. I, ex p.; Wernermty, List 1894; Brirron & 
Browy, Ill. Fl.; Lepesour, Fl. Ross., ex p.; Biryrr, M. N., Norg. Fl, 
ex p.; M. fontana *lamprosperma, Linppere, Finl. Montiaf.; M. rivu- 
laris, Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Grontunp, Isl. Fl.; Ostenretp, Phan. 
Faer.; M. riv. *lamprosperma, Neuman & AHLFVENGREN, Sv. Fl.; M. riv. 
f. lamprosperma, Buytr, A., Norg. Fl. 

Fig. Cuamisso, |. ¢., T. 7, fig. 2. 


1 Mzrnan, who mentions it from Inglefield Gulf (Contr. Greenl., p. 209), seems to 
have been unable to separate the species in question as pointed out by Tu. 
_ Houm, Contr. Fl. Green). 
> The statement of Duranp, Pl. Kan., “at almost every station of both voyages“, 
must of course be left out of consideration. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 83 


Here, as in a good many other cases, the descriptions of species 
given by CHamisso and ScHLEcHTENDAL have been overlooked or un- 
justly put aside; and it is only recently that they have again been taken 
into consideration. This is done for Montia by H. Linpperg, 1. c., who 
has pointed out that the M. fontana of Linnarus is not uniform: even 
though the differences between its constituents are not greater than to 
allow of their being placed as subspecies under it. The two species of 
Gueuin, Fl. Bad. M. minor and M. rivularis are, however, too nearly 
connected to be held apart. Both are of southerly distribution, and 
LinpBeRG places them together as subsp. minor under M. fontana, with 
a variety rivularis comprising the form from running water. From — 
M. fontana *minor, with its strongly tuberculate seeds, the other subsp. 
lamprosperma, (CHam.) Linps. fil., is well distinguished by its smooth, 
glossy seeds. A similar division is already made by Fenzx in Lepesovr, 
FI. Ross. II, p. 152, even if the two plants are here designed as a chon- 
drosperma and 8 lamprosperma. Fernzu also says there that both 
show the same variations in mode of growth and in the shape of the 
leaves; but besides this he speaks of forms intermediate between the 
varieties. Already Cuamisso speaks of his new species as especially 
arctic and alpine; its distribution is, however, not easy to give without 
an inspection of a considerable quantity of material, as most of the flo- 
ras use collective names. The Western Greenland plant, however, ‘is 
always M. lamprosperma, which alone seems to enter the arctic region, 
and therefore may as well keep the rank its author has given it. I must 
take it for granted, that Werueritt’s plant is identical with that of the 
southern coast. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: Cape Acland (WerHERILL). 

Distribution: Danish West Greenland, Arctic America (?, compare 
Britton & Brown, l.c.), Alaska, Unalaschka, California (?), Andes of 
South America, Eastern Siberia (?), Northern Europe, Faeroes, Iceland. 
M. minor is distributed in Europe from the southernmost part of Scan- 
dinavia southwards, and it probably has a corresponding distribution in 
Asia and perhaps in America. 


Polygonaceae. 
Polygonum viviparam, L. 


P. viviparwm, Smwons, FI. Ellesm.; OstTenreip, Plantes N. E. 
Grénl. [P. viviparum, Dickie, Not. fl. pl., in INGLEFIELD, Summer Search; 


84 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Bessets, Exp. Pol. Amer. et 
Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Gronl.; Weruerit, List 1894; 
OstTeNFELD, FI. pl. Cape York]. 

Certainly common all over the area, even though it is noted only 
by Bessets from the northern part. Kane and Hayes, according to 
Duranp, have found it “in every station” and, for my own part, I found 
it abundantly in Foulke Fjord, in all grassy ledges, slopes and plateaus, 
etc. I will, however, enumerate the special localities reported in lite- 
rature. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wolstenholme Sound 
(INGLEFIELD), Agpa (Saunders Island) and Umanak (Bate); Inglefield 
Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stery), Cape Acland (WETHERILL); Foulke 
Fjord at Reindeer Point and Etah (Srey, 1463, 1519). N. Hall Land 
(BEssELs). 


Oxyria digyna, (L.) Hitt. 


O. digyna, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Grénl. 
[O. digyna, Duranp, PI. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Bessexs, Exp. 
Pol. Amer. et Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Groénl.; WerHerit, 
List 1894; O. reniformis, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.]. 

Occurrence. 8S. Between Cape York (Hart) and Cape Dudley 
Digges (Kane); Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); [nglefield Gulf: Netiulumi (Weru- 
ERILL), Burdin Bay (INGLEFIELD), Northumberland Island (Hayes, ! WeTH- 
ERILL, Kane, Stern), Netlik (Hayes), Glacier Valley, Cape Acland, Fan 
Glacier (WeETHERILL); Foulke Fjord (Haves, Hart), at Etah (Sremn, 224, 
1523); Rensselaer Bay and Mary Minturn River (Kang). N. Lafayette Bay 
(Kanz); Bessels Bay Hannah Island, Cape Morton (Hart); Hall Land 
(Bessets), Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Betulaceae. 
Betula nana, L. 


B. nana, Linnagus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; 
Kruuse, List E. Greenl. et List Angmags.; Hayss, Op. Pol. Sea; Dur- 
and, Enum. pl. Smith S.; Naruorsr, Nachtr.; Werueritt, List 1894; 
Hooker, Fl. Bor. Amer., ex p-; Brirton & Brown, Ill. Fl.; Houm, Nov. 
Zeml. Veg.; ANDERsson & HEssELMAN, Spetsb. karlv.; Lepegour, Fl. Ross., 
ex p.; Harrman, Skand. FI.; Gronunp, Isl. FI. 


1 Arct. boat journ., p. 93. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W.GREENLAND. 85 


Fig. Sv. Bot. T. 379; Fl. Dan., T. 91. 

Nartuorst (N. W. Gronl.), at first excluded this species from the list, 
notwithstanding the statements about it in the works of Hayes and Dur- 
AnD; but afterwards he inserted it, as he found ‘birches” mentioned, 
also by Kane (I Grinnell Exp., p. 143). Now indeed both these evid- 
ences are of somewhat doubtful value, but later on it has been recorded 
from our district by WeTHERILL also, and is consequently to be recko- 
ned as a citizen of the area. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL); between that point and 
Cape Dudley Digges (Kane); Port Foulke (Hayes). 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, Labrador, Hudson Bay 
region, ! Novaja Semlja, Spitsbergen, Russia, Scandinavia, Prussia, moun- 
tains of Middle Europe, Scotland, Iceland. 


Salicaceae. 


Salix arctica, PA... 


S. arctica, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Ostenreip, Plantes N. E. Grénl. 

Under this name I feel myself fully justified in uniting all the 
Salices, reported from Greenland north of Melville Bay, with the sole 
exception of S. herbacea. INGLEFIELD, SUTHERLAND, Kane, Hayes, Dur- 
AND, Bessets, Hart, and Natuorst have used the name “arctica” with 
either Brown or Pattas as author. “S. Brownii’” is mentioned by 
Werueri.., “S. glauca” by Kane and Werueriut, “S. lanata” by 
Kang, “S. uva ursi” by Kane. Even without having seen the speci- 
mens thus determined, I cannot doubt that they all belong to the multi- 
form S. arctica. For particulars about the different forms and their 
synonymic, I must refer to my FI. Ellesm., p. 180—182, and to the lite- 
rature quoted there, especially LunpstR6m, Weid. Nov. Seml.; here, it 
may be enough to point out that S. wva ursi, PuRsH, is a species of 
far a more southerly distribution, found nowhere in Greenland. The same 
is the case with S. lanata, L. (with the exception of some indetermin- 
able, sterile specimens in the Copenhagen herbarium, conf. Lance, Consp. 


1 Several authors, indeed, for instance Hooker (I. c.) and J. D. Hooker, Outl. of 
Distrib, have given it a far wider range in America; but, in the northwest at 
least, B. glandulosa, Micux., has certainly been taken for it by the earlier 
botanists, who have reported B. nana, which has also been the case in several 
parts of Asia. Therefore even the statements about its distribution in LeprBour, 
l.c., are not to be indiscriminately used, even though it is not improbable, that 
the present species is spread also in Asia. 


86 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Fl. Groenl., p. 111). Even Duranp, Pl. Kan., discards the latter name 
as well as S. glauca. S. Brownii, Lunpsrr. (and Bess ?), is only a var- 
iety of S. arctica—in fact the most common in these regions (S. arc- 
tica, R. Brown). The more hairy lanata- and glauca-like forms belong 
presumably to the var. groenlandica, Anperss., which is reported by 
OstEeNnFELD, Flow. pl. Cape York. This seems to be far more rare here 
than to the south. 

It may indeed seem rather rash to criticize the identifications of the 
different collectors and authors without examining their specimens, but 
still I think it is best to arrange all the statements under S. arctica, 
the more so, as none of the authors, who possess a more thorough 
knowledge of the arctic, and especially of the Greenland flora—viz. 
Lance, Naruorst, and OstenreLp—have been able to discern any other 
species in the North-West Greenland material which they have examined. 
There are, however, two statements in Mr. Hozm’s list of the Stem 
plants, which have given me some trouble. He has identified one speci- 
men from Etah with S. groenlandica, (Anperss.) Lunpsrr., and another 
from Northumberland Island with S. glauca. Now Mr. Hoim has had 
good opportunities of studying the Salices in question, both in Green- 
land and in Novaja Semlja, but I think that he has formed a different 
opinion about them from that at which I have arrived, for he probably 
uses the name “S. arctica’ only for the original plant of Pattas such 
as he knows it from Novaja Semlja. He has, therefore, not used it at 
all for any specimen in the Sremn collection. As he has not identified 
any as the most common form, var. Brownii, I must—even if I cannot 
do so without hesitation—conclude that his S. groenlandica is what 
I identify with var. Brownii and his S. glauca belongs to the most 
glauca-like variety, viz. var. groenlandica. For my part, I have seen 
no groenlandica at Etah, although I can assert that I have looked pretty 
thoroughly over the neighbourhood of the old village during my two 
excursions there. At Foulke Fjord S. arctica was equally common 
a plant in different localities, as it was in Ellesmereland, and the state- 
ments in literature seem to indicate that the same holds true all over 
North-West Greenland. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SurHeRLann) ; Cape York (Hart, 
Weruerni); between there and Cape Dudley Digges (Kang); Ivsu- 
gigsok (NatHorst);1 Wolstenholme Sound (IneLeFieLp), Agpa (Saun- 


1 Probably, at least partly, var. groenlandica. 


1898-1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W.GREENLAND. 87 


ders Island) and Umanak (Bate);! Carey Islands: Bjérling Island (Wern- 
ERILL); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin Bay ({neierietp); Netlik (Haves); Netiu- 
lumi (WeTHERILL), Northumberland Island (Srey), Fan Glacier,2 Cape 
Acland, Glacier Valley, Bowdoin Bay (Werueritt); Foulke Fjord (Hayes, 
Hart, Srein, 209, 1507); Rensselaer Bay, Butler Island (Kang). N. Along 
the coast of the Kennedy Channel (Morton according to Kang); Bes- 
sels Bay, Cape Morton, Hannah Island (Hart); Hall Land (Bessets), 
Polaris Bay (Hart); Wood Point (Beaumont according to Hart). 


Salix glauca, L. 


This species was first reported by Kane, but Duranp has excluded 
it from the list in Pl. Kan. It has been recorded later by WeTHERILL, 
whose statements I have, however, thought best to refer to S. arctica, 
as may be seen above; and lastly there is the statement from North- 
umberland Island in Mr. Houm’s list of the Stein plants. Of course it 
cannot be denied, that S. glauca, a common plant throughout Danish 
Greenland, might very well have found its way to the north-western 
parts of the country; but still, I think it safer not to give it a place in 
the list as an indisputable citizen of the region as long as I have not 
myself seen specimens, especially as I have, as already stated, good 
reason to think that Mr. Hotm’s opinion about the different members of 
the form-series of S. arctica is not the same as mine. 


Salix herbacea, L. 


S. herbacea, Linnazus, Sp. Plant., 1753; Lance, Consp. FI. Groenl.; 
Kruusg, List E. Greenl. et List Angmags.; Natuorst, *N. W. Gronl.; 
Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; Hooxer, F]. Bor. Amer.; Brit- 
ton & Brown, Ill. Fl.; Lepesour, FI. Ross.; Hartman, Skand. Fl.; Osren- 
FELD, Phan. Faer.; Grontunp, Isl. Fl.; Kruuse, Jan May. 

Fig. Linnagus, Fl. Lapp., T. 7, f. 3, 4; Sv. Bot., T. 367; Fl. Dan., 
T. 117. 

Kane was the first to report this species from North-Western Green- 
land (I Grinnell Exp. I, p. 143), but as he seems not to have collected 
it from the single locality whence he mentions it, it did not come into 
Duranp’s list in Pl. Kan.; or he may have mistaken small individuals 
of S. arctica for it, as may easily be done (cf. Simmons, Fl. Ellesm., 


1 F. typica and var. Brownii. 
2 Var. groenlandica. 


88 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


p. 131). The species does, however, grow there, as is shown by the 
specimens brought home by Naruorst and others, and therefore I deem 
it best to enumerate the localities from whence it is reported, even though 
I must take exception against eventual mistakes. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst); between Cape York and 
Cape Dudley Digges (Kane); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island 
(Stem); Foulke Fjord: Port Foulke (Hayes). 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, Arctic American Archi- 
pelago, Arctic America, Labrador, Canada, down to the mountains of 
Maine and New Hampshire, (Western America?), (Arctic Siberia?),! 
Altai and other mountains, Arctic Russia, Northern Scandinavia, the 
Alps and other European mountains, mountains of Great Britain, 
Faeroes, Iceland, Jan Mayen. 


Liliaceae. 
Tofieldia palustris, Huns. 


T. palustris, Hupson, Fl. Angl., Ed. If, 1778; Kruuss, List E. 
Greenl.; Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S.; Werneriwy, List 1894; Hooker, 
Fl. Bor. Amer.; Brirron & Brown, Ill. Fl.; Lepepour, FI. Ross.; An- 
persson & HesseLman, Spetsb. karlv.; 7. borealis, Wauvensere, FI. 
Lapp.; Lance, Consp. FI. Groenl.; Kruusz, List Angmags.; Hartman, 
Skand. Fl.; Groyzunp, Isl. Fl.; Anthericum calyculatum, Linnaeus, Sp. 
Plant., ex p., et A. calyc. 8, Fl. Suec., Ed. II. 

Fig. Linnarus, Fl. Lapp., T. 10, fig. 8; Sv. Bot. T. 482, fig. 1;. 
Fl. Dan., T. 36. 

Durann, |. c., p. 95, reports this plant for Port Foulke, but it is 
omitted in Hayes’s own list (Op. Pol. Sea) of his collection; NatHorst 
consequently had a good reason for excluding it from his list in N. W. 
Grénl., where he says, however, that it might presumably be thought 
that it grew there. As it is found later in Inglefield Gulf, it belongs 
at all events to the flora of our area, and there is hardly any reason 
for excluding the locality of Duranp, if the statements—always doubt- 
ful—from the first american expeditions are to be used at all. More- 
over, T. palustris is not only a common plant in Danish West Green- 
land, but is also spread far northwards on the eastern coast. 


1 Some of the older records are doubtful and ought probably to be transferred 
to S. polaris, Wan.ens. 


1898— 1902. No. 16] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 89 


Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: Cape Acland (WerTuHeritt); Port 
Foulke (Hayes according to Duranp). 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, Arctic American Archi- 
pelago, Arctic America, Labrador, Canada, Rocky Mountains, Alaska, 
Ural, Arctic Russia, Spitsbergen, Northern Scandinavia, Bavaria, Scot- 
land, Iceland. 


Juncaceae. 
Juncus biglumis, L. 


J. biglumis, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [J. bigluimis, Bessets, Exp. Pol. 
Amer. et Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.]. 

Curiously enough, this plant has escaped most collectors, although 
it can hardly be rare. Only Bessets, besides NaTHorsr and myself, 
has it in his list. In Foulke Fjord I saw it in several places; in swamps, 
along brooks, etc. as in Ellesmereland. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin 
Bay (Sten); Foulke Fjord, at Etah and elsewhere (1480, 1517). N. Hall 
Land (BEssELs). 


Luzula arcuata, (Wan.ens.) Sw. var. confusa, (LinpEB.) KJELL. 


L. arcuata var. confusa, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes 
N. E. Gronl. 

In the case of the Luzulae it is more than usually difficult to make 
any arrangement of the statements of the different authors, who have 
more or less confounded two or more species. As shown by my previ- 
ous revision (I. c., p. 1833—136), first there is the L. hyperborea of Ros. 
Brown, including two different and well-defined species; further the 
question about the range of L. arcuata, and so on. Moreover, several 
authors have believed that they had L. campestris, (L.) DC., also in 
their material. For my own part, I cannot doubt, that most of the records 
are referable to L. arcuata var. confusa, which is certainly the most 
common form here as in Ellesmereland; L. nivalis is undoubtedly a 
very much rarer plant. My reasons for this opinion are, partly the com- 
parison of my own observations at Foulke Fjord with my knowledge 
of the appearance of the two species on the other side of Smith Sound, 
partly the inferences that can be drawn from the descriptions and no- 
tices given in some of the papers, concerning the N. W. Greenland flora. 
I therefore feel justified in referring all records that do not decidedly 


90 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


point to ZL. nivalis, to the above-mentioned species. It will, however, 
be requisite to treat every author separately, beginning with the first 
report. 

SUTHERLAND, Voyage, enumerates L. hyperborea. As I have not 
seen any specimen, I think it best to refer it to the species here in 
question, as Natuorst, N. W. Grénl., has already done. 

Dickie, Not. fl. pl., in InGLEFreELD, Summer Search, enumerates L. 
campestris var. congesta. Now first of all, that species is absent from 
the whole of Greenland, and most probably from the entire arctic region, 
as is also the variety. There does indeed exist a corresponding variety 
of L. multiflora, (Euru.) Les., but that also, as well as the main species, 
is lacking in our area. As the name is generally used for the present 
species, I refer his localities to it. 

Duranp, Pl. Kan., has both LZ. hyperborea and L. arcuata in his 
list; his descriptions clearly show that he has had the present variety 
as well as L. nivalis (hyperborea) before him. In Hayes’s collection, 
he has perhaps had only the former represented. The plant which is 
here called L. campestris var. congesta, must however, be left out of the 
list as it is noted for ‘“Tessiussak, Sept. 4”, and was perhaps collected 
in Danish Greenland. 

Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., has “Z. campestris (var. congesta)”’, “L. 
multiflora” and “L. arcuata (L. hyperborea)’. I have seen his speci- 
mens in the London collections and can therefore assert, that the former 
name signifies the species here in question as I have already stated 
(l. c., p. 133). The locality Polaris Bay is consequently to be referred to 
I. arcuata var. confusa, and the border-line of L. multiflora must 
accordingly be drawn a long way south of 81° 40’, where Lance has 
been induced to draw it, by relying on the statement of Harr. Even 
GeLert (in Ostenretp, FI. Arct., p. 31) gives it the same range. If his 
“I!” after the indication “West Greenl. 60°—81° 40’” is to signify that he 
has seen Hart’s specimens, I cannot agree with him in his identifica- 
tion. The ZL. arcuata of Hart includes also DL. nivalis, as I have found 
in examining his specimens, that is to say it is identical with Brown's 
L. hyperborea. 

Natuorst, |. c., has L. arcuata var. confusa from [vsugigsok under 
the right name, but among his specimens of Luzula some of L. nivalis 
are also to be found. Naruorst, l. c., p. 28, speaks of these as similar 
to L. arctica, but has referred them to the other species on the au- 
thority of Ksettman. In the Stockholm herbarium the name was altered 


1898— 1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 91 


by N.H. Nitsson-Ente to L. arctica, Bu., and I am entirely in accord 
with him in transferring the plants to the following species. 

In Wertueritt, List 1894, several localities are enumerated for L. 
arcuata, which must doubtless go to the present species. 

Mr. Tu. Hotm, in his list of the Stern collection, enumerates two 
localities for L. multiflora var. congesta, which I feel justified in trans- 
ferring to the species here in question. 

At Foulke Fjord, ZL. arcuata var. confusa is, according to my own 
observations, a common plant in different localities. In my collection 
I have also the f. subspicata, Lance. 

It may perhaps seem as if I had taken to great liberties with the 
statements of the different authors, in referring so many of the plants 
to this species, and especially by not including L. multiflora in the list; 
but I think that I am justified by the following facts: I have seen no 
other species from the area except L.arcuata var. confusa and L. ni- 
_ walis, and Naruorst has made the same arrangement (for L. spicata see 
below!); several of the authors whom I have criticized have, in many 
instances, shown that their identifications are not to be implicitly relied 
upon; and lastly L. multiflora is nowhere high-arctic, since the wrong 
statements of Harr are excluded. Indeed, Lance gives it a range all 
over Danish Greenland, but as he mentions no special localities, it can- 
not be seen where its limit really is; and there are some facts which 
make a limit within the borderline of Danish Greenland rather probable. 
L. multiflora does not go north of Scoresby Sound (70°) on the east 
coast, and the variety congesta, which alone is reported from N. W. 
Greenland has, according to Lance, a decidedly southern distribution 
in Danish Greenland, where it is not found north of Ritenbenk about 
70° in the Disco region. Perhaps the main form also hat its limit 
thereabouts. 

There is still a Luzgula-form left about which a notice must be given. 
Naruorst, l.¢., has given a description of a plant which he calls L. spe- 
cata var. Kjellmani. He mentions that at first he took it for a small 
form of L.arcuata var. confusa, but afterwards KyeLLMan induced him 
to transfer it to L. spicata. In examining his specimens in the Stock- 
holm herbarium, I soon found that the stunted state of the plant was 
owing to infection by a parasitic fungus which had infested every flower. 
At my request, Mr. T. WesTerGren of Stockholm, the well-known my- 
cologist, kindly undertook to determine the parasite, and he has since 
informed me that it was Ustilago hyperborea, Buyrt, a fungus known 
previously only from Norway. Mr. WESTERGREN found it afterwards 


92 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


also in the flowers of another dwarf-form of Luzula arcuata collected 
in Torne Lappmark by Hicerstrém. Var. Kjellmani thus is shown 
to be merely a pathological deformation and the name must be with- 
drawn. Moreover, the plant in question belongs not to L. spicata but 
to L arcuata. The former species must, consequently, be excluded from 
the flora of the area. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SuTHERLAND); Ivsugigsok (Nar- 
Horst); Wolstenholme Sound (Ineterietp); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin Bay: 
(IncLeFtELD), Northumberland Island (Stet); Glacier Valley at Robertson 
Bay, Fan Glacier (WeTHERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Etah (Stem) and 
other places (237, 1481, 4254); Fog Inlet (Kang). N. Polaris Bay (Hart) 


Luzula nivalis, (Larst.) BEURL. 


L. nivalis, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 

As in Ellesmereland, this species seems to be a rather rare and 
sporadic one in North-Western Greenland from whence it is only men- 
tioned by Duranp, Pl. Kan. It may, however, have been found in Foulke 
Fjord by Hart, even though I have seen no specimens to prove it, and 
Naruorst, as previously mentioned, has also brought it home. 

Occurrence. S,. Ivsugigsok (NaTHoRST); Foulke Fjord (1514, 1895); 
Bedevilled Reach (Kang). 


Luzula spicata, (L.) DC. 


As mentioned above, the plant of Natuorst referred to this spe- 
cies, really belongs to L. arcuata, but still [ cannot unreservedly deny 
the possibility that L. spicata may grow in our area. In the Kew her- 
barium I saw a specimen, collected at Whale Sound, Aug. 25, 1852, 
which I have noted as collected by Taytor! and belonging to L. spi- 
cata. It was called L. campestris congesta, but I have noted that the 
long, pointed sepals and the hairiness at the mouth of the leaf-sheaths, 
place it under spicata. Not having the specimen at hand for another 
examination, | am now very doubtful about it. It might be the same 
deformed L. arcuata as the plant of Natuorst, the real nature of which 
I first found out in 1906, two years after my visit to London; or it may 
also be supposed, that Taytor, whose collections were made in different 
places—among them Danish Greenland and Baffin Land where L. spi- 


1 I know nothing, however, about Taytor having visited these regions, as no plants 
from there are included in his Fl. pl. Baffin B. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 93 


cata grows—has perhaps confounded some of them. At all events, | 
dare not, without other evidence than this single specimen, give the 


species a place in the list of the North-Western Greenland flora. 
° 


Cyperaceae. 


Carex misandra, R. Br. 


C. misandra, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [C. misandra, Natuorst, N. 
W. Gronl.; Werueritt, List 1894; C. atrata, Meeuan, Contr. Greenl., 
ex Hom, Contr. FI. Greenl.]. 

Curiously enough, this species has probably not been found within 
our area before NatHorst’s visit to Ivsugigsok; it has been overlooked 
even in Foulke Fjord by Hayes and Harr. It is, however, very com-— 
mon and abundant there, and in a great measure forms the sward of 
many sloopes and rockledges, or appears in large, dense tufts on the 
plains of gravel or clay. 

It is not reported from the regions north of the Humboldt Glacier 
by those collectors who have brought home plants from there, but as, 
according to Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., p. 38, it is very abundant on the 
western side of the Channels, even as far north as at Lady Franklin 
Bay and in the interior of Grinnell Land, and likewise in N. E. Green- 
land (Kruuse, List E. Greenl., p. 194), it can hardly be absent from the 
upper part of N. W. Greenland. There also exists a statement which 
points to its appearance there. Mrexan, Contr. Greenl., p. 214, speaks 
of specimens of “Carex atrata, Boorr” in the herbarium of the Aca- 
demy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, collected by Dr. Brssets at 
lat. 81—82°. Now Meeuan, as usual, has arrived at a wrong determi- 
nation of his own specimens, which belong, according to Hoim, Contr. 
FI. Greenl., p. 544, to C. misandra, and thus it seems probable that 
Bessets’ plant is the same. But there is yet another difficulty. BEssEzs, 
in his list (Exp. Pol. Amer., p. 297, and Amer. Nordpol-Exp., p. 304) 
has no other Carex but C. dioica. Now a confusion of two species so 
widely different seems quite out of the question, yet how is the state- 
ment of Meruan then to be understood? Osrenretp, Fl. Arct., p. 90, 
gives the West Greenland range of C. misandra as lat. 67°—82°, but 
quotes only Weruerit for the distribution in N. W. Greenland. I think 
the occurrence there must, for the present, be left as doubtful. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHoRST); Inglefield Gulf: M’Cor- 
mick Bay (MzeHan), Cape Acland (Wernerit); Foulke Fjord at Rein- 
deer Point and Etah (Stein, 229, 1516, 1535). (N. Hall Land (BessEts)?). 


94 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Carex rigida, Gooo. 


C. rigida, Goopenoucu, Obs. Br. Carex, 1794; OsTenrezp, FI. 
Arct.; Lanax, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Kruuse, List E. Greenl. et List Ang- 
mags.; Natuorst, N. W.: Grénl.; Hooxer, Fl. Bor. Amer:; Ksetiman, in 
Vegaexp.; Horm, Nov. Zeml. Veg.; Fritpen, Fl. Kolguev; AnpErsson 
& HesseLman, Spetsb. karlv.; Harrman, Skand. Fl.; C. sawatilis, Waun- 
LenBeRG, Fl. Lapp.; Lepesour, Fl. Ross.; non Linnazus, Sp. Plant. 

Fig. Fl. Dan., T. 159, 2479, 2480; AnpEersson, Cyp. Scand., T. 5, 
fig. 46; OsTENFELD, |. c., fig. 52. 

As C. rigida shows a very considerable resemblance to C. aqua- 
tilis var. stans, which is a very common plant in Ellesmereland, and 
not at all rare in the northern part of Danish Greenland, I was for a 
time disposed to look upon all the statements about C. rigida from N. 
W. Greenland as by right referable to C. aquatilis var. stans. I have, 
however, found that NatHorst’s specimens from Ivsugigsok cannot be 
transferred to it, and consequently the other indications may also belong 
to the species here in question, and must be discussed in detail. 

Duranp, Pl. Kan., p. 199, says about C. rigida, “frequent at al- 
most every station”. I think, however, that no heed is to be paid to 
his statement, as he has reported no other Carex from N. W. Green- 
land, and as Kane cannot have found this species so commonly distri- 
buted and have overlooked other common species such for instance as 
C. misandra. Furthermore, Duranp has not generally shown himself 
very reliable in his identifications. 

When the statement of the plant as common in our area is put 
aside, we come to the same author’s report of it from Netlik in Enum. 
Pl. Smith S., p. 95. What is meant here I am of course not able to 
ascertain, not having the specimens at my disposal. 

Further, there is Hart's report of it from Foulke Fjord (Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp., p. 39). As far as my notes from my studies in the Lon- 
don collections afford evidence, there are no specimens from that locality 
either in the Natural History Museum or at Kew. All Hart's speci- 
mens from Ellesmereland belong to C. aquatilis var. stans. This indeed 
might be an inducement to refer the Foulke Fjord plant (if it is collected 
there at all and only noted) to the same, but that again is unknown in 
N. W. Grenland. 

Besides Natuorst’s Ivsugigsok plant, which I have examined in the 
Stockholm Museum, we have Werueri1’s reports in List 1894 left, which 
I think we must accept as based on right determination. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W, GREENLAND. 95 


As Hart, |. c., reports the species only from Foulke Fjord, I cannot 
understand why Natnorst, N. W. Gronl., p. 83, and Laner, Consp. FI. 
Groenl. IJ, p. 291, record it also for Polaris Bay, and Osrenrexp, |. ¢., 
p. 78, gives its West Greenland range as 60—81°. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (Natuorst); Inglefieid Gulf: (Netlik 
(Hayzs)?); Cape Acland, Fan Glacier (WetTHERILL). 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, Arctic American Archi- 
pelago (S. E. part at least), Arctic America, Labrador, Canada, Rocky 
Mountains, Andes of Chile, Land of the Chukches, Arctic Siberia, New 
Siberian Islands, Central Asia, Himalaya, Ural, Arctic Russia, Novaja 
Semlja, Kolguev, Spitsbergen, Northern and Central Europe, Great Bri- 
tain, Faeroes, Iceland. 


Carex glareosa, WAHLENB. 


C. glareosa, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. 

This is one of the species that I have mentioned in my Prel. Rep. 
as new additions to the flora of N. W. Greenland. It grew rather abund- 
antly within a small area among the rocks of Reindeer Point, and had 
ripe fruit when collected, Aug. 16, 1898. 

Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord, Reindeer Point (253). 


Carex incurva, Licutr. 


C. incurva, Simmons, |]. Ellesm. 

This sedge also is new for N. W. Greenland. I found the low form 
with arched culms in a gravelly beach, together with Honkenya pe- 
ploides; and, in another somewhat swampy locality, I found also a form 
approaching var. erecta, Lana, (1512). 

Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord, Reindeer Point (228, 1512). 


Carex nardina, FRI1&s. 


C. nardina, Smmons, FI. Ellesm. [C. nardina, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. 
Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. Grénl.; Werner, List 1894]. 

In Foulke Fjord this species was rather common in rock-ledges and 
dry, gravelly plains, as I am inclined to think it is all over the area. 
Its abundant appearance in Ellesmereland, even in the northernmost 


‘ Hart, lc, p.9, says about this locality “Cyperaceae appear to be entirely 
absent”. 


96 H. G. SIMMONS. (SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


parts, makes this most probable. There are, however, only a few state- 
ments about it in the papers of the earher authors. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Glacier 
Valley (WETHERILL); Foulke Fjord (Harv, 239, 1490). N. Hannah Is- 
land (Hart). 


Carex scirpoidea, Micux. 


C. scirpoidea, Mrcnavux, FI. Bor. Amer., 1803; Ostenre.p, FI. Arct.; 
Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl.; Kruusz, List E. Greenl. et List Angmags.; 
WetuHerRiLL, List 1894; Hooker, FI. Bor. Amer.; Brirron & Brown, Ill. 
Fl.; Ksetuman, Fan. Vestesk. land et As. Beringss. Fan.; Hartman, 
Skand. Fl.; C. Wormskjoldiana, Hornemany, FI. Dan., 9, 1818, et Dansk 
Oec. Plantel. I, Ed. 3. 

Fig. Fl. Dan., T. 1528; Ostsnrerp, |. c., fig. 58. 

I insert this species in the list entirely on the authority of Wetx- 
ERILL, as I have not seen any specimens from North-Western Green- 
land. As the species is spread generally all over Danish Greenland and 
also in East Greenland, it seems a priori probable that it should grow 
also within our area. , 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WxrTHERILL). 

Distribution: East and West Greenland, Baffin Land, Arctic 
America, Canada, Mountains of New England, Rocky Mountains down 
to Utah and California, Alaska, Chukches Land, Northern Norway | 
(Saltdalen). 


Carex dioica, L. 


This species is reported only by Bsssets from Hall Land. Now if 
there was only his own identification of it, I should not in the least 
hesitate to exclude it from the flora, as it is highly improbable that it 
would grow so far north as 81—82° N. and be lacking to the south; 
but we have not got only Besses’ own word for it (Exp. Pol. Amer., 
p. 297), it is also maintained in his second list (Amer. Nordpol-Exp., 
p. 804) where the determinations are said to have been verified by Asa 
Gray. Natuorst, who in N. W. Gronl. had excluded it as highly doubt- 
ful, has given it, in Nachtr., a place in the list on the authority of Asa 
Gray. Indeed Gray’s evidence would seem to be satisfactory, but as 
there is yet another doubtlessly wrong identification in the list (Erio- 
phorum vaginatum), I think one may be allowed still to doubt the 
existence there of Carex dioica. The material may perhaps have been 


1898—1902. No.16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..wW. GREENLAND. 97 


very imperfect, or Gray may not have had any opportunity of verifying 
all the identifications. Moreover there is the statement of MreHan quoted 
above under C. misandra, that specimens of GC. atrala were brought 
home by Bessexs. As the collector himself has only one species of 
Carex in his list, it is hardly possible to reconcile two such different 
statements, and hardly possible that even MesHan could have made such 
a mistake. 

The safest way, I think, will be to leave the plant in question out 
of the list, until better evidence is forthcoming. Under such circum- 
stances it may seem unprofitable to speculate further upon the real na- 
ture of the plant in question; but if it really does belong to the form- 
series of C. dioica, it is evidently not the main form, but either C. gy- 
nocrates, Wormsks., which is found in Danish Greenland up to lat. 69° 16’, 
or C. dioica var. parallela, Larst. (which should be regarded as a 
separate species), which is found in Scoresby Sound on the east coast. 
OstenFELD, Fl. Arct., p. 61, has referred it to the former. 


Elyna Bellardi, (Aut.) Kocu. 


EL. Bellardi, Simons, Fl. Ellesm. ([Kobresia scirpina, Mrenan, 
Contr. Greenl.]. 

The great, habitual similarity of this plant to Carex nardina, in 
whose company it grows on dry rock-ledges, in gravelly plains, etc., 
probably accounts for its absence from all lists of N. W. Greenland 
plants except that of Mernan. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: M’Cormick Bay (MEEHAN); Foulke 
Fjord: Reindeer Point (231, 1489). 


Eriophorum Scheuchzeri, Horre. 


E. Scheuchzeri, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [£. Scheuchzeri, Natuorst, 
N. W. Gronl.; Werner, List 1894; E. capitatum, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; 
Harr, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; E. vaginatum, Bessets, Exp. Pol. Amer. et 
Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Hart, 1. ¢.]. 

As appears from the special synonymic here given, the plant in 
question figures not only under the two names of E. Scheuchzeri and 
E. capitatum, which are in fact synonymous, but also under the false 
name of E. vaginatum. I have previously explained (I. c., p. 149—150) the 
probable cause for this mistake. Indeed Harr (I. c., p. 39) has both in 
his list, but J have sought in vain for specimens of E. vaginatum in the 

7 


98 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


London collections. None were there from N. W. Greenland under that 
name, all Hart’s specimens being referred to E. Scheuchzeri. As more- 
over E. vaginatum is found nowhere in the better known parts of Green- 
land (when doubtful or decidedly wrong statements are left out of con- 
sideration—cf. Laneg, Consp. Fl. Groenl., p. 129, and Simmons, Dan. 
Greenl. pl., p. 478), I feel justified in not hesitating to refer all such state- 
ments to EH. Scheuchzeri, even when that species is recorded alongside 
of EF. vaginatum. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (Hart); Ivsugigsok (Natuorst); 
Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stem), Cape Acland and Fan 
Glacier (WeETHERILL); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Reindeer Point and Etah 
(241, 1511); Rensselaer Harbour (Kane). N. Hall Land (Brssets). 


Eriophorum polystachium, L. 


E. polystachium, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [E. polystachium, Durann, 
Pl. Kan.; Werueriti, List 1894; EH. angustifolium, Naruorst, N. W. 
Grénl.; Summons, Prel. Rep.]. 

Notwithstanding that this species is probably quite as common as 
the last in all wet localities, it seems to have escaped most collectors, 
as appears from the small list of localities. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NarHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Cape 
Acland and Fan Glacier (WeTHERILL); Foulke Fjord, at Reindeer Point 
and Etah (208, 1492, 1518); Rensselaer Harbour (Kane). 


Gramineae. 


Festuca ovina, L. 


F. ovina, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[F. ovina, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; Ostenretp, FI. pl. Cape York; F. ov. var. 
violacea, Naruorst, N. W. Gronl.; F. ov. var. brevifolia, Hart, Bot. 
Br. Pol. Exp.; Weruerity, List 1894). 

Most of the specimens | saw at Foulke Fjord, where this grass was 
very common and abundant, especially in drier localities, belonged to 
the var. brevifolia, (R. Br.) Hart, which, in my opinion, cannot be 
maintained as a species but is continually connected with the common 
form from southern localities. This, however, may also be found in 
the arctic regions, and I have specimens of it even from Foulke Fjord 
(1486). Certainly, however, var. brevifolia is most common wherever 


1898-1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 99 


F. ovina enters the arctic regions, as it is also in N. W. Greenland. 
The specimens from Ivsugiksok, which Natuorst, N. W. Gronl., p. 27, 
names as var. violacea, cannot be referred to the real F. violacea, 
Gaup., but belong to var. brevifolia. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (Natuorst); Wolstenholme Sound: 
Agpa (Saunders Island) and Umanak (Bate); Inglefield Gulf: North- 
umberland Island (Stern); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Etah (Stem) and 
Reindeer Point (230, 1485, 1486); Rensselaer Harbour and Mary Minturn 
River (Kane). N. Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Glyceria Vahliana, (Lies.) Tu. FRIgs. 


I cannot of course decide what plant it may be which Durann, 
Enum. Pl. Smith S., p. 95, has designed as “Poa Vahliana, Bot. Dan.? 
(too young)”, but it may perhaps be the real G. Vahliana, which occurs 
sporadically in different arctic lands. The locality is noted as “Port 
Foulke etc., July 15”. 


Glyceria tenella, LANGE. 


G. tenella, Lancer, in Ksettman & Lunpstrém, Fan. Nov. Senl., 
1882; Geert, in Ostenretp, Fl. Arct.; G. Langeana, Berwin, Karly. 
sv. exp. Grénl.; Lance, Consp. Fl. Groenl. II; Rosenviner, 2 Till. et 
Nye Bidr. 

Fig. Ksettman & Lunpstrom, l.c., T. 6; Ostenretp, |. c., fig. 95. 

The specific rank of this plant, which seems restricted to Greenland 
and Novaja Semlja, is perhaps somewhat doubtful, as is also that of the 
following. I think it best, however, for the present to follow Geert, 
l.c., in keeping them both distinct from G. distans. I had not yet sub- 
jected my Glyceriae to a closer examination when I published my Pre- 
liminary Report. G. tenella was found sparingly on clay plains together 
with other grasses. 

Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord at Etah (1478). 

Distribution: West Greenland (sporadic), East Greenland (speci- 
mens of a Glyceria collected in Kjerulf Fjord, Aug. 11 and 13, 1899, 
by A. G. Natuorst and P. Dusen, which Kruuss refers to the following 
species, seem rather to belong to the present), Waigats and Novaja 
Semlja. 


Glyceria angustata, (R. Br.) Tu. Fries. 


G. angustata, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. 


100 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


This seems to be a rare species in N. W. Greenland, as it is only 
collected by Batre (Ostenretp, Fl. pl. Cape York) and myself (for the 
G. angustata of Naruorst from Ivsugigsok see Simmons, |. c., p. 157, 
and under the next species). It grew on the gravelly beach near Rein- 
deer Point, rather sparingly. 

Occurrence. S,. Wolstenholme Sound: Agpa (Saunders Island) 
and Umanak (Batxe); Foulke Fjord near Reindeer Point (1527). 


Glyceria distans, (L.) WaAHLENB. 


G. distans, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [G. distans, Ostenrexp, Fl. pl. 
Cape York; G. angustata, Naruorst, N. W. Gronl.}. 

Probably this species is quite as common as in Ellesmereland, but 
most collectors have left the grasses unnoticed and consequently only a 
few statements about them exist in the literature about N. W. Green- 
land. At Foulke Fjord it grew abundantly in the rich soil of the old 
Eskimo village of Etah. The form I found there was var. arctica, (Hoox.) 
GELERT, which is already reported from another point in that neighbour- 
hood by Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S._ I have ascertained in the arctic 
herbarium of the Stockholm museum that the G. angustata of Nar- 
HorsT, |. c., is the other variety vaginata, (LANGE) GELERT. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Wolstenholme Sound: 
Agpa and Umanak (Batue); Foulke Fjord: Port Foulke (Hayes) and 
Etah (236). 


Glyceria maritima, (Hups.) Wants. 
var. reptans, (HartTM.) Sr. 


G. marit. var. reptans, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [G. vilfoidea, Nat- 
Horst, N. W. Gronl.]. 

As I have previously mentioned (I. c. p. 160) my Foulke Fjord 
specimens of this plant are somewhat different from those of Ellesmere- 
land. They are considerably stouter, have longer leaves, and not such 
long-creeping and densely radicant stolons. This may be accounted for 
by the habitat, which was rather different from the usual, somewhat 
loamy, beach localities of the plant. Here it grew in fissures and de- 
pressions of the rocks, near the beach on Reindeer Point, that is to say 
in more sheltered places than on the open shore. That may also, I think, 
account for the fact that the plant had here produced a few inflores- 
cences, while it was always found sterile in Ellesmereland. These pan- 
icles, which on account probably of the dry situation, were already 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND. 101 


withered when the specimens were collected, Aug. 11, 1899, were small 
and contracted, with few spikelets on short branches. The number of 
flowers in each spikelet does not exceed two, sometimes only one flower 
is developed. Here consequently we find the typical features of “G. 
vilfoidea”, but the vegetative parts call to mind rather the description 
of the var. arenaria, Fries (Mantissa, 2, p. 9). The specimens of Nat-. 
HorsT, which I saw in the Stockholm herbarium, represent the common 
arctic form of var. reptans. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Foulke Fjord, Reindeer 
Point (1479). 


Dupontia Fisheri, R. Br. 


D. Fisheri, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; D. psilosantha, Ruprecut, Fl. 
Samojed. cisural. [D. psilosantha, Bessers, Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Nat- 
Horst, Nachir.]. 

This grass has been identified by Asa Gray in Dr. BesseEts’ col- 
lection, and thus another locality added to its sporadic distribution in 
the arctic regions, [ am, however, inclined to think, that it may often 
be sterile and therefore may easily be overlooked. 

Occurrence. N. Hall Land (Bessexs). 

Distribution. To the statements included in my Fl. Ellesm., 
p. 161, must be added North-Eastern Greenland. 


Poa glauca, VaunL. 


P. glauca, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [P. glauca, Natuorst, N. W. 
Grénl.; P. caesia, Dickie, Not. fl. pl., in Increrietp, Summer Search]. 

I do not hesitate to pronounce this grass to be one of the most 
common plants of N. W. Greenland, notwithstanding that it is absent 
from the list of most collectors. This must, however, be because they 
have confounded it with others, or have totally overlooked it. Neither 
Hart nor Haves, for instance, have noted it for Foulke Fjord, where 
it is extremely common and appears both in the typical form and in the 
varieties elatior, (ANpERsS.) Lance, and tenuior, Simm. Of the latter I 
found a few individuals only, in fissures of the rock at Reindeer Point 
(1467); the former I found in abundance in large luxuriant tufts on the 
manured soil of Etah (235); the main form I found in various local- 


ities such as slopes, rookeries, etc. 


102 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Occurrence. 3S. Ivsugigsok (NatuHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin 
Bay (INGLEFIELD, STEIN); Foulke Fjord at Etah, Reindeer Point, etc. 
(Stern, 232, 235, 1467, 1468, 1522). 


Poa abbreviata, R. Br. 


P. abbreviata, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm.; OSTENFELD, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[P. abbreviata, WetTuERILL, List 1894]. 

Seems to be a rare species on this side of Smith Sound, notwith- 
standing its general appearance on the american side. I only saw a 
few individuals of it in Foulke Fjord in a dry slope. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: Netiulumi (WETHERILL); Foulke 
Fjord, near Etah (1487). 


Poa alpina, L. 


Although the species is recorded again and again from different 
localities in N. W. Greenland (by Dickie, Duranp, and Hart), as also 
from Ellesmereland, I feel justified in excluding it here as I have done 
in my Fl. Ellesm., because there is not a single specimen in the Lon- 
don collections to support those records. As for the american collec- 
tions, I have of course not seen them, but Durann’s identifications are 
always subject to doubt and cannot be used when improbable. It is 
not easy to say what plant those authors may have had in view: it 
may have been both P. glauca and P. cenisia. It seems, however, 
most probable that they have identified with P. alpina the same form 
of P. cenisia which puzzled me at Harbour Fjord in Ellesmereland and 
which is very similar to P. alpina because of the short internodes of 
the rhizome, that give it an almost tufted mode of growth. From speci- 
mens in the Stockholm herbarium it appears that Natuorst has col- 
lected such a form at Ivsugigsok, but he has not allowed himself to be 
led astray by its unusual habit. He speaks also, N. W. Gronl., p. 27, 
of P. flecuosa, Wautens., forming dense mats below the rookeries. 

I think I may refer all the localities mentioned for P. alpina to 
P. cenisia without any fear of making a wrong statement, as the latter 
common plant is certainly not lacking in any of them. 


P. cenisia, Aut. 


P. cenisia, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[P. cenisia, SutHertanp, Voyage; Werueriiy, List 1894; P. arc- 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 103 


tica, Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith S.; Besseis, Exp. Pol. Amer. et Amer. 
Nordpol-Exp.; P. flecuosa, Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Natuorst, N. W. 
Gronl.; P. pratensis, Meeuan, Contr. Greenl., ex Hom, Contr. Fl. Greenl.; 
P. alpina, Duranp, Pl. Kan.; Dicxte, Not. fl. pl., in INcLerreLp, Sum- 
mer Search; Harr, |. ¢.]}. 

As may be seen in the above special synonymic, this species is 
entered in the different lists under quite a series of more or less appro- 
priate names. I have already spoken about the P. alpina of several 
authors. 

Doubtless P. cenisia is quite as common in different kinds of lo- 
calities within our present area as in Ellesmereland, at least such was 
the case at Foulke Fjord. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SurHERLAND); Cape York (Hart); 
Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst); Wolstenholme Sound (IneterteLp); Inglefield 
Gulf: Northumberland Island (Stem), M’Cormick Bay (Meewan), Cape 
Acland (Wetueritt); Foulke Fjord (Hart), at Port Foulke (Hayes), Etah 
(Stein, 1477) and Reindeer Point (233, 1528); Rensselaer Bay (Kane). 
N. Bessels Bay, Hannah Island, Cape Morton (Hart); Hall Land (Bzs- 
sELs); Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Poa pratensis, L, 


Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp., p. 40, records this species also from Foulke 
Fjord. Now indeed, as it grows in Ellesmereland even in the Hayes 
Sound district, it is not at all impossible that it may be found also in 
the neighbouring parts of Greenland; but, on the other hand, I have 
not, so far as my notes show, seen any specimens from those regions 
in the London collections, and this, together with its great likeness to 
P. cenisia, makes it more probable that Harr had the latter in view. 
The more so, as no other collector has found it in that comparatively 
well-explored place. I therefore think it better not to give it any place 
as a member of the N. W. Greenland flora until more reliable evidence 
is procured. 


Pleuropogon Sabinei, R. Br. 


P. Sabinei, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. 

Ivsugigsok, where NatTHorst found it in 1883 (N. W. Grénl.), still 
stands as the only locality in N. W. Greenland of this beautiful and 
interesting grass. It is not, however, improbable that it was seen in 
Foulke Fjord during our second visit there. Mr. Bay, the zoologist of 


104 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


the expedition, told me that when he visited some lakelets in a valley 
beyond the range above Etah, which I could not reach during our short 
stay, he had seen a grass there with long floating leaves. Now of course 
that may have been the water-form of Alopecurus alpinus, but it is at 
least equally probable that it was Pleuropogon. It is very much to be 
regretted, that he did not bring a specimen with him; but, on the other 
hand, this note may perhaps induce some botanist who may visit the 
fjord in the future, to examine that part of its surroundings where, in 
all probality, other additions to the flora might also be made, as water- 
plants are very scantily represented in the present list. 
Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHOoRST). 


Catabrosa algida, (Souanp.) FR. 


C. algida, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenretp, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
(CO. algida, Natuorst, N. W. Groénl.; Phippsia algida, Hart, Bot. Br. 
Pol. Exp.; Wertuerity, List 1894; Ph, monandra, Dickie, Not. fl. pl., 
in INGLEFIELD, Summer Search]. 

Occurrence. S.Cape York (Hart, Stein); Ivsugigsok (NaTHoRs‘); 
Carey Islands: Bjérling Island (WeETHERILL); Wolstenholme Sound (INc- 
LEFIELD); Inglefield Gulf: Burdin Bay (InGLeFreLp), Northumberland 
Island (Stein); Foulke Fjord, Reindeer Point (1472). 


Trisetum spicatum, (L.) Ricut. 


T. spicatum, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [T7. subspicatum, Duranp, PI. 
Kan.; T. sesquiflorum, Meenan, Contr. Greenl., ex Hoxm, Contr. FI. 
Greenl.]. 

It is probable that this species is not common, as it is missing 
also from the lists of those collectors who have worked systematically 
and thoroughly, such for instance as Natuorst, WETHERILL. It is, how- 
ever, not rare at Foulke Fjord, where I found it both on the sandy 
beach outside Reindeer Point, and also in the rook-crannies of that point 
and in the gravel slope at Etah. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: M’Cormick Bay (MeeHan); Foulke 
Fjord: at Reindeer Point and Etah (212, 1476, 1526); Bedevilled Reach 
(Kane). 


Aira caespitosa, L. var. arctica, (TRIN.) Sim. 


A. caespitosa var. arctica, Simmons, FI]. Ellesm. [Deschampsia 
brevifolia, WrTuHERILL, List 18941. 


1898—1902. No. 16.) FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 105 


It must be taken for granted, I think, that the plant from Ingle- 
field Gulf in WeTHERILL’s list is really the same as that found in the 
northern, western and southern parts of Ellesmereland as well as in 
other parts of the Arctic American Archipelago. It is indeed curious, 
that it should be absent from just that part of Ellesmereland which lies 
nearest to the Smith Sound region of N. W. Greenland. However, even 
if it does not grow in the Hayes Sound district it may perhaps exist in 
the little-known region down to Clarence Head; and at all events, there 
are other species lacking, or rare, in the Hayes Sound region, which are 
common to the south coast of Ellesmereland and the southern part of 
N. W. Greenland. Moreover, the plant here in question is also found 
in North-Eastern Greenland. I therefore think it best to give it a place 
in the list on the authority of WeTHERILL, although I wish very much 
that I could first have made an examination of it, the more so as it is 
not only in itself critical but there is also the following still somewhat 
doubtful species, to which it might be referred. 

Occurrence. S. Inglefield Gulf: Cape Acland (WerseriLt). 


Aira flexuosa, L. 


‘A. flecuosa, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. 

The Aira, which Natuorst collected at Ivsugigsok in 1883 and in 
N. W. Gronl., p. 27, refers to the same plant that Ros. Brown had 
described in Chlor Melv. as Deschampsia brevifolia, has given me a 
good deal of trouble, as has also my own plant from Fram Harbour in 
Eastern Ellesmereland. They are very like each other, the principal 
difference being that my plant has all the leaves flat, NatHorst’s has 
them generally convolute. Both differ from the common A. flexuosa 
in possessing a short awn, which is not, or at least very little, excerted 
beyond the glume. But in other respects they agree with that species 
far more than with A. caespitosa, and they call to mind especially the 
form which Berun, Karly. sv. exp. Grénl., p. 77, has called A. fleauosa 
var. montana {. pallida, which has the same short, straight, included 
awn. For the present, until a better material can be procured by some 
future collector, I must, even if I cannot do so without some hesitation, 
let it stand where I placed it in my Ellesmereland flora. 

Natuorst, however, in the same paper, speaks also about another 
Aira, which he found on Hare Island in Danish Greenland and referred 
to the same variety, although he speaks of differences between them. 
As I have previously mentioned (Dan. Greenl. PI., p. 478), this is in fact 


106 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


quite another plant, which should be called A. caespitosa var. brevifolia, 
(Marscu. v. Bres.) Hartm., of which it represents a small and stunted 
form. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst). 


Agrostis canina, L. 


The A. canina 6 melaleuca, Bone., of Duranp, Pl. Kan., which is 
said to have been collected at Smith Sound as well as at Sukkertoppen, 
is decidedly a very doubtful plant. No other collector has found the 
variety in Greenland, and the species is restricted to the southernmost 
part of Danish Greenland between lat. 60° and 61°. I feel, therefore, 
fully justified in excluding it from the list. 


Arctagrostis latifolia, (R. Br.) GrRisEs. 


A. latifolia, Simmons, Fl. Ellesm. [A. latifolia, WeETHERILL, List 
1894; Colpodium latifolium, Natuorst, N. W. Gronl.]. 

Often sterile and thus easily overlooked, as I too did during my 
first visit to Foulke Fjord. When I went there again in 1899 and 
turned my attention to finding it, I saw it in many places along brooks, 
in moist depressions, ete. I therefore think that it is far more common 
throughout the area than appears from the few records of it. 

Occurrence. S. Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Cape Ac- 
land (WeTHERILL); Foulke Fjord at Reindeer Point and Etah (1464, 1513). 


Alopecurus alpinus, SM. 


A. alpinus, Simmons, FI. Ellesm.; Ostenreip, Plantes N. E. Gronl. 
[A. alpinus, Suruertanp, Voyage; Dicxre, Not. fl. pl., in InGLertecp, 
Summer Search; Duranp, Pl. Kan. et Enum. pl. Smith S.; BesseExs, 
Exp. Pol. Amer. et Amer. Nordpol-Exp.; Hart, Bot. Br. Pol. Exp.; Nar- 
Horst, N. W. Gronl.; Wertuerity, List 1894]. 

Common everywhere in the most different situations, immediately 
catching the eye and so easily identified, that it has got a place in the 
list of every collector, always under its right name. I may, however, 
give a list of the places from whence it is mentioned in literature. 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SutHERLAND); Cape York (Hart, 
WETHERILL, StrIN); Ivsugigsok (NaTHorst); Wolstenholme Sound: Dal- 
rymple Rock (WetHERiLL); Inglefield Gulf: Whale Sound, Burdin Bay 
(IncLerreLp), Netiulumi (WerHerrtt), Hakluyt Island (Kane), Norhum- 


1898 -1902. No. 16} FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W.GREENLAND, 107 


berland Island (Kang, Srein); Cape Alexander (Kane); Foulke Fjord, 
everywhere (Hayes, Hart, Stein, 234); Bedevilled Reach (Kang). N. 
Along the Kennedy Channel (Kane); Bessels Bay, Cape Morton, Hannah 


Island (Hart); Hall Land (Bessexs); Polaris Bay (Hart). 


Hierochloa alpina, (Litsesu.) Roem & Scuutt. 


H. alpina, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [H. alpina, SUTHERLAND, Voyage; 
Natuorst, N. W. Groénl.; Mernan, Contr. Greenl.; WETHERILL, List 1894]. 

From the doubtful “Tessiussak, Sept. 4”, Duranp, Enum. pl. Smith 
S., reports H. borealis, which in Hayes’s own list in Op. Pol. Sea, is cor- 
rected to H. alpina. Besides this worthless record there are several 
others, which seem to imply that the plant in question is not rare in 
the southern part of N. W. Greenland, 

Occurrence. S. Bushnan Island (SurHERLAND); Cape York (Stern); 
Ivsugigsok (NatHorst); Inglefield Gulf: Northumberland Island (Srzry), 
M’Cormick Bay (MgEHAN), Bowdoin Bay (WeETHERILL); Foulke Fjord at 
Etah (Stein, 203). 


Lycopodiaceae. 
Lycopodium Selago, L. 
L. Selago, Summons, Fl. Ellesm. [L. Selago, Weruern, List 1894}. 


Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeTHERILL); Inglefield Gulf: North- 
umberland Island (Stery). 


Equisetaceae. 
Equisetum arvense, L. 


E. arvense, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [E. arvense, Weruerit, List 
1894]. 

My specimens, which were found in a small, moist depression of 
the rock, growing among moss, are of the same small form as those I 
found in Ellesmereland, and may best be referred to var. riparium, 
(Fr.) Mipz. They are all sterile. 

Occurrence. S. Cape York (WeruHermLL); Inglefield Gulf: North- 
umberland Island (Stern); Foulke Fjord at Reindeer Point (1515). 


108 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Polypodiaceae. 
Aspidium fragrans, (L.) Sw. 


A. fragrans, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [A. fragrans, WetueRILL, List 


1894]. 
Occurrence S. Inglefield Gulf: Bowdoin Bay (WetHERILL).! 


Cystopteris fragilis, (L.) Bernu. 


C. fragilis, Simmons, FI. Ellesm. [C. fragilis, Duranp, Pl. Kan.: 
WeTHERILL, List 1894]. 

Besides the localities, mentioned below, where the species is found, 
there is one more in Duranp’s list of Kane’s plants (Pl. Kan., p. 201) 
which may perhaps belong to it, even though it seems at least equally 
probable that the following one is meant. Duranp says under Cysto- 
pteris: “Another state (very young) of propably the same fern was col- 
lected at Rensselaer Harbour. It is scarcely more than 4 inches long, 
narrower and less divided, without fruit dots.” 

In Foulke Fjord it grew here and there in crevisses of the rocks. 

Occurrence. S, Wolstenholme Sound (Kane); Inglefield Gulf: 
Bowdoin Bay (WETHERILL); Foulke Fjord: Reindeer Point (222, 1465). 


Woodsia glabella, R. Br. 


W. glabella, Smmons, FI. Ellesm.; W. ilvensis var. glabella, OstTEN- 
FELD, Plantes N. E. Gronl. . 

Only found in Foulke Fjord, where it grew sparingly in the fissures 
of rock above Reindeer Point. Perhaps, however, the above mentioned 
statement of Duranp may have reference to this species. 


Occurrence. S. Foulke Fjord (1491). 


1 Gevert in Osrenretp. FI. Arct., p.5, gives the northern limit in Greenland of this 
fern as 78° 30', which must be a mistake as he only quotes Werueritt and his 
locality lies about one degree to the south. 


1898—1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N..W. GREENLAND. 109 


List of literature not quoted in “The Vascular Plants in the 
Flora of Ellesmereland’’, and forming an Appendix 
to the bibliography given there. 


Bessexs, E., L’expedition polaire américaine, sous les ordres du Capitaine Hat. 
Bull. de la Soc. de Géographie. Ser. 6, T. 9. Paris 1875. (Hap. Pol. Amer.) 
— Die amerikanische Nordpol-Expedition. Leipzig 1879. (Amer. Nordpol-Exp.) 
Dautstept, H., Arktiska och alpina arter inom formgruppen Taraxacum cerato- 
phorum (Led.) DC. Arkiv f. Bot. 5. Stockholm 1906. (Tarac. ceratoph.) 
Dawson, G. M., Notes to accompany a geological map of the Northern portion 
of the Dominion of Canada, east of the Rocky Mountains. Geol. a. Nat. 
Hist. Survey of Canada, Part R. Ann. Rep. 1886. Montreal 1887. (Geol. Map) 
Nickie, G., Notes on Flowering Plants and Algae, collected during the Voyage 


of the “Isabel”. In Ineterietp, Summer Search. (Not. fl. pl.) 
Fries, E., Flora Hallandica. Lund 1817—18. (Fl. Hail.) 
Gein, C. C., Flora badensis, alsatica et confinium regionum. Karlsruhe 
1805— 1826. (FL. Bad.) 
- Geuin, J. G., Flora Sibirica. Petersburg 1747-1769. (Fl. Sibir.) 
Geixir, J., The Great Ice Age and its relation to the antiquity of Man. Ed.3 
London 1894. (Great Ice Age) 
Goovenoucu, S., Observations on the British Species of Carex. Transact. Lin. 
Soc. Il. London 1794. (Obs. Br. Carex) 
Hanpet-Mazerti, H. v., Monographie der Gattung Taraxacum. Leipzig & Wien 
1907. (Mon. Gatt. Taras.) 


Haves, J. J., At Arctic boat-journey in the autumn of 1854. London 1860. 
(Arct. boat-journ.) 
— Communication to the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. Pro- 
ceed. Amer. Philos, Soc., 8. Philadelphia 1861 (?), pp. 883—393. 


(Communication) 

Hunson, W., Flora Anglica. Ed. H. London 1778. (Fl. Angl.) 
Incierietp, E. A., A Summer Search for Sir John Franklin; with a peep into 

the Polar Basin. London 1853. (Summer Search) 
Kane, E. K., The U. S. Grinnell Expedition in Search of Sir John Franklin. 

New York 1854. (I Grinnell Exp.) 


— Arctic Explorations: The Second Grinnell Expedition in Search of Sir 
John Franklin, 1853, 54, 55. Philadelphia & London 1856. (Arct. Explor.) 

Krvuse, C., List of Phanerogams and Vascular Cryptogams found in the Ang- 

magsalik District on the East coast of Greenland between 65° 30‘ and 


66° 20’ lat. N. Medd. om Grénl. 30. Kobenhavn 1906. (List Angmags.) 
Linvserc, H., Om de i Finland férekommande Montiaformerna. Medd. Soc. 

Fauna et Flora fenn., 27. Helsingfors 1901. (Finl. Montiaf.) 
Marcuam, A. H., A whaling cruise to Baffin’s Bay and the Gulf of Boothia. 

London 1874. (Whal. Cruise) 


Micuavux, A., Flora Boreali-Americana. Paris 1820. (Fl. Bor. Amer.) 


110 H. G. SIMMONS. |SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Natuorst, A. G., Nachtrage zu den ‘“Notizen iiber die Phanerogamen-flora Grén- 

lands im Norden von Melville Bay (76°—82°)”. Englers Jahrb., Bd. 7. 

Leipzig 1886. (Nachtr.) 
Ostenretp, C. H., Plantes récoltées a la cote Nord-Est du Grénland. Due d’Or- 

Lens, Croisiére Oceanographique accomplie 4 bord de la Belgica dans la 

mer du Groénland 1905. Bruxelles 1907. (Plantes N. E. Grénl.} 
Reicuensacu, H. G.L., Flora germanica excursoria. Leipzig 1830—833. (Fl. germ. exc.) 
Ruprecat, F. J., Flores Samojedorum cisuralensium. Beitr. zu Pflanzenkunde 

d. Russ. Reiches, herausg. v. d. Kais. Acad. d. Wissensch., II. Peters- 

burg 1845. (Fl. Samojed. cisural.) 
Smmons, H. G., Remarks about the relations of the floras of the Northern 

Atlantic, the Polar Sea, and the Northern Pacific. Beih. z. Botan. Cen- 


tralbl. Bd. 19, Abt. 2. Leipzig 1905. (Relations of floras) 
— The Vascular Plants in the Flora of Ellesmereland. Rep. Sec. Norw. 
Arct. Exp., No. 2. Kristiania 1906. (Fl. Ellesm.) 
Surnertanp, P. C., Journal of a Voyage in’ Baffin’s Bay and Barrow Straits, 
in the years 1850—51. London 1852. (Voyage) 
Torrey, J., A Flora of the Northern and Middle sections of the United States, I. 
New York 1824. (Fl. Unit. States) 


Wotr, T., Monographie der Gattung Potentilla. Bibl. Botan. Stuttgart 1908, 
(Mon. Gatt Potent.) 


Printed 24. april 1909. 


1898-1902. No. 16.] FLOW. PLANTS AND FERNS OF N.-W. GREENLAND. 


111 


Errata. 


P. 10, line 17 stands ‘“‘avay” 


= oo 
- 16, , 2 — 
- 18 , 2 — 
. 22, ” 

- 24, ” 

«89, 4 AF 
- 3, , 22 = 
BAR, Phy 
«4%, « 10 = 
- 72, note _ 


- 76, line 3 — 


“Journal” 
“exluded” 
“breath” 


“Ameirean” 
“aquatillis” 
“arenosa” 
“Expl.” 


for “away”, 
» ‘journal’, 
» “excluded”, 


» “breadth”, 


30 “the number for” to be excluded, 
10 stands “Renselaer” 


for “Rensselaer”, 
» “American”, 
» “aquatilis”, 
» “arenicola”, 

“Explor.”, 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 17. 


HANS KIAR: 


ON THE BOTTOM DEPOSITS 


FROM 


THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION IN THE “FRAM” 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 
(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


IES, 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W.BROGGER 
1909 


Introduction. 

I, order to give an account of the occurrence of Foraminifera in 
the waters explored by the 2nd Fram Expedition, I have investigated 
some bottom samples and zoological material collected during this Ex- 
pedition at a number of places, more especially in the northern part of 
Jones Sound, along Kong Oscars Land, and partly also near North 
Devon. 

The bottom samples are from the following stations: 


1) The Winter harbour, Havne Fjord. Depth 45 fathoms. July 
24th, 1900. 

2) The west side of the mouth of Stor Valley. Depth 10 fathoms. 
July 26th, 1900. 

3) Sjopolse Ness. Depth 15—25 fathoms. August 4th, 1900. 

4) North of North Devon. West of Kent. Lat. 76° 41.5’ N., 
Long. 92° W. Depth 55 fathoms. August 20th, 1900. 

5) Forvisnings Valley. Depth 2—20 fathoms. September 19th, 1900. 

6) The upper part of Gaase Fjord. Depth 15 fathoms. September 
20th, 1900. 

7) The upper part of Gaase Fjord. Depth 3—20 fathoms. Sept- 
ember 20th, 1900. 

8) The upper part of Gaase Fjord. Depth 1—2 fathoms. August 
2nd, 1901. 

9) Gaase Fjord. Depth 7 fathoms. August 16th, 1901. 

10) Gaase Fjord. August 30th, 1901. 


Only six of the bottom samples contained mud, namely Nos. 2, 4, 
5, 6, 7 and 8; and of these Nos. 5 and 6 were very small. Only four 
of the bottom samples were large enough to be treated by Dr. Mapsen’s 
method!. The mud contained sand, pebbles and various animals. 


1 V. Mapsen. Istidens Foraminiferer i Danmark og Holsten. Copenhagen, 1899. 


4 HANS KIER. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


The remaining samples from the bottom contained stones and vari- 
ous specimens of animals, especially Bryozoa and Crustacea. 

Dr. V. Mapsen has assisted me in the examination of some of 
the Foraminifera, for which ready assistance I would here express my 
thanks. 

The depths from which the bottom samples have been taken are 
generally small, seldom exceeding 25 fathoms, only 2 being taken from 
somewhat greater depths, namely 45 and 55 fathoms. 

The fact that the bottom samples, even in shallow water from 1 or 
2 fathoms down to 25 fathoms and more, consisted of fine mud, seems 
to indicate that the waters were land-locked, and with slack currents. 


The Bottom Deposits. 


July 24th, 1900. The Winter harbour, Havne Fjord. Depth 45 fa- 
thoms. Small stones with adherent specimens of Foraminifera: 


Truncatulina lobatula (cc)1 
— akneriana (cc) 
— orbignyana (r). 


July 26th, 1900. The west side of the mouth of Stor Valley. Depth 
10 fathoms. Grey mud with Ophiura sp. and Mollusca: Arca glaci- 
alis (r), Saxicava arctica (r), Modiolaria corrugata (r), Astarte sp. (r). 
Numerous specimens of Forminifera: 


Haplophragmium canariense (r) 
— glomeratum (r) 
_ nanum (r) 

Verneuilina pygmaea (r) 

Valvulina fusca (x) 

Spiroplecta biformis (r) 

Textularia williamsoni (r) 

Nodulina arctica (r) 

— gracilis (r)® 
Uvigerina pygmaea (r) 
Cassidulina crassa (r) 
Bolivina punctata (r) 


1 cc indicates a great number of specimens, ¢ numerous, ra few or a single one. 
2 See Synopsis of the Norwegian Marine Thalamophora. Report on Norwegian 
Fishery and Marine Investigations, Vol. 1, No.7. Kristiania, 1900. 


1898 — 1902. No. 17.] ON THE BOTTOM DEPOSITS. 5 


Virgulina schreibersiana. (c) 
Nodosaria, young sp. (r) 
Cornuspira foliacea (c) 
Quinqueloculina subrotunda (r) 
Truncatulina akneriana (c) 
Nonionina scapha (c) 

— stelligera (c) 
Polystomella striatopunctata (r) 
Pulvinulina karsteni (r) 
Polymorphina compressa (r). 


August 4th, 1900. Sjopolse Ness. Depth 15—25 fathoms. Small 
stones. Foraminifera: 


Truncatulina lobatula (c) 

= akneriana (c) 
Discorbina globularis (c) 
Haplophragmium canariense (c) 


August 20th, 1900. Lat. 76° 41.5’ N., Long. 93° W. North of North 
Devon. West of North Kent. Depth 55 fathoms. Grey mud with few 
Foraminifera : 


Spiroplecta biformis (cc) 

Haplophragmium glomeratum (vr) 
—_ nanum (r) 

Astrorhiza arenaria (r) 

Rhabdammina sp. (r) 

Reophax difflugiiformis (r) 

Quinqueloculina seminulum (r) 


September 19th, 1900. Forvisnings Valley. Depth 2—20 fathoms. 
Clay and pebbles. Foraminifera: 


Haplophragmium canariense (c) 
Discorbina araucana (c) 
Polystomella arctica (c)* 
— striatopunctata var. incerta (c) 
Nonionina stelligera (c). 


1 See Om Kvarteertidens marine avleiringer ved Tromso. Tromso Museums aars 
hefter, 25, 1908. Tromso. p. 44. English summary. 


6 HANS KLER, [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


September 20th, 1900. The upper part of Gaase Fjord. Depth 15 
fathoms. Soft, brown clay, with numerous animals and plants, as also 
pebbles. 

Mollusca: Nucula tenuis, Modiolaria, Astarte, Sawicava, Leda, 
Margarita. 

Ophiura sp., Spirorbis sp. Isopoda. Ostracoda. Diatomacea. Green 
algee with adherent Bryozoa and Foraminifera: 


Hyperammina nodulosa (c) 
Haplophragmium canariense (c) 

— cassis (r) 

— glomeratum (c) 

— nanum (r) 
Saccammina socialis (r) 
Verneuilina pygmaea (c) 
Spiroplecta biformis (cc) 
Textularia Williamsonii (cc) 
Nodulina arctica (r) 

— gracilis (r) 
Ammodiscus gordialis (r) 
Virgulina schreibersiana (r) 
Polymorphina lactea (r) 

— acuta (r) 
Cassidulina crassa (c) 

— laevigata (r) 
Nodosaria calomorpha (r) 
Lagena striata (r) 

Pullenia bulloides (c) 
Quinqueloculina seminulum (c) 
— subrotunda (r) 
a arenacea (r) 
Patellina corrugata (c) 
Truncatulina lobatula (c) 
— akneriana (c) 
Pulvinulina punctulata (cc) 

= karstenti (r) 
Polystomella arctica (c) 

= striatopunctata var. incerta (c). 


4898—1902. No. 17.] ON THE BOTTOM DEPOSITS. 7 


September 20th. 1900. Depth 3—20 fathoms. Clay, pebbles and 
shells of Mollusca. Foraminifera: 


Tholosina vescicularis (c) 

Nodulina scorpiura (r) 

Truncatulina akneriana (r) 

Discorbina araucana (r) 

Polystomella striatopunctata var. incerta (cc). 


August 2nd, 1901. The upper part of Gaase Fjord. Depth 1—2 fa- 
thoms. Soft, brown clay, with pebbles, sand and Mollusca: 

Portlandia arctica (r), Nucula tenuis (r), some small Mollusca. 

Annellida. Copepoda. Fishes’ eggs. Ostracoda. A great number of 
worms, especially Nematoda, and also numerous fibres of plants. Fora- 


minifera: 


Haplophragmium canariense (r) 
Spiroplecta biformis (r) 
Nodulina gracilis (r) 

Virgulina schreibersiana (c) 
Cassidulina laevigata (r) 

— crassa (c) 
Polymorphina lactea (c) 
Quinqueloculina seminulum (r) 
Pulvinulina punctulata (r) 
Nonionina depressula (r) 
Polystomella striatopunctata var. incerta (cc) 


August 16th, 1901. Gaase Fjord. Depth 7 fathoms. Foraminifera: 


Truncatulina lobatula (c) 
— . akneriana (c) 
Discorbina araucana (c) 


August 30th, 1901. Gaase Fjord. Ascidia and brown alge with 
adherent specimens of Foraminifera: 


Polystomella striatopunctata var. incerta (cc) 
Truncatulina akneriana (r) 

Patellina corrugata (r) 

Quinqueloculina subrotunda (r). 


8 HANS KIZR. ON THE BOTTOM DEPOSITS.  [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Remarks on some of the Species of Foraminifera. 


On looking at the list of the Foraminifera from the stations, it will 
be seen that very few of the species appear in any quantity. Among 
the characteristic species of more general occurrence may be mentioned 
the large and beautiful forms, Hyperammina nodulosa and Haplo- 
phragmium canariense, of which vigorous and well developed speci- 
mens appear in Gaase Fjord. Spiroplecta biformis, Nodulina arctica 
and Teatularia Williamsonii are also species that are found in the 
sane localities in comparatively large numbers. Among the adherent 
forms occurring are the cosmopolitan Truncatulina sp. and the Poly- 
stomella striatopunctata var. incerta. 

The arctic nature of the fauna is shown by the occurrence of large 
and sometimes well-developed specimens of Polystomella arctica, and 
further by the small, but characteristic forms, Cassidulina crassa and 
Pulvinulina karsteni. Spiroplecta biformis and Nodulina arctica are 
also of arctic origin. 

The rare occurrence of the Lagena forms is to be noted. I found, 
in fact, only a single specimen of Lagena (L. striata) in these bottom 
samples, this being in mud from the upper part of Gaase Fjord, from a 
depth of 15 fathoms. The Lagena species are usually well represented 
in the arctic and boreal bottom deposits. 


Printed 18. May 1909. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 18. 


G. 0. SARS: 


CRUSTACEA 


(WITH 12 AUTOGR. PLATES) 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABETIKRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1909 — 


Introduction. 


This collections of Crustacea brought home from the 2nd Fram 
Expedition are rather extensive, having been made in many different 
places and at different times. As a rule, only the larger and more 
conspicuous forms were collected, and all these have turned out to 
belong to well-known arctic and circumpolar species; but by a careful 
examination of the bottom-residue of the large collecting bottles, I have 
been enabled also to acquire some information concerning the smaller 
forms of Isopoda, Amphipoda and Cumacea, as also the Ostracodu 
and Copepoda. Of the last-named order there are some apparently 
new species, which will be described and figured in the present Report, 
together with a few previously recorded, but still less perfectly known 
species. I give below a list of the several places (with dates) in which 
Crustacea were collected. 


1898. 


April 30. Godthaab (fresh water). 
July 10. 

» 29. Egedes Minde. 

» 23i. Disco. 

Aug. 4&5. Upernivik, 4—13 fath. 
Aug. 16. Faulke Fjord (fresh water). 
» 18. Rice Strait. 2—5 fath. 

» 19. Cape Sabine, Camp Clay. 

» — Bay at Rice Strait. 

» 22. Fresh water. 

» 24 Rice Strait. 

» 26. — 

» 29. Cape Rutherford (fresh water). 
Oct. 11. Haven in Rice Strait. 


G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


1899, 


June 17, Winter haven (brackish). 
» 380. Rice Strait. 
July 21. Winter haven. 
» 24 Southern end of Penn Island, 6—10 fath. 
July 29 & 30. Winter haven, 6 fath. 
Sept. 3. The haven. 
; 5. The Bay (pelagic). 


1900. 


March 7. Bay south of Sjopolse Ness, 15—20 fath. 
June 22. The skerry, 5 fath. 
» 23. Pelagic haul, 55 fath. 
July 12. Bay at Last End. 
» 22. Winter haven, 6—30 fath. 
| 2B do., 6—20 fath. 
» 4. do., 45 fath. 
» . 26. Western side of the mouth of Stordalen, 6-10 f., clay. 
» 28. Outside Gdedalen, 20 fath. 


1. Outside the mouth of Stordalen, 10 fath. 
3. do, 290 fath. 
i 7. Ostcap, 10—25 fath. 
7. Sjopelse Ness, 15—25 fath. 
8. Winter haven, 15 fath. 
Sept. 19. Outside the Forvisnings Valley, 2—20 fath. 
» 20. Upper part of Gaase. Fjord, 3—20 fath, clay and 


gravels, 


1901. 


June 28. Mouth of Hvalros Fjord. 
» 29. Off the camping-ground. 
July 5. The sound. 
% 8. Ren Bay, Ellesmere Land. 


» 18. Mouth of Gaase Fjord, 60 m. 


Aug. 2. Upper part of Gaase Fjord. 
» 16. About 7 fath. 


» 980. 8 m,, clay and gravel, with alge. 


1898-1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 5 


1902. 


July 5. Outside Havhest Fjord. 

» Ad. do., 3—7 fath. 

» 17. East of the great glacier, North Devon, ca. 3 fath. 
» 19. North Devon, off the camping-ground, 3—7 fath. 
Aug. 4. Gaase Fjord, north of the peninsula, 10—15 fath. 


As all these localities lie within the same restricted area, I do not 
consider it necessary, as a rule, to enumerate all the places where each 
species was actually found. 

In addition to the above-mentioned collections, a series of plankton- 
samples were taken by the aid of a fine-meshed tow-net during the 
voyage up Baffin’s Bay. In some of these samples a number of pelagic 
Crustacea were found, and these will be mentioned together with the 
other species enumerated below. 


6 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Systematic List of Species. 


Order Decapoda. 


Suborder Carida. 


Fam. Crangonide. 
1. Sclerocrangon boreas (Pupps). 


Numerous specimens of this well-known arctic form, the greater 
number of them immature, are in the collection, having been taken in 
many different localites within the area investigated. 


9. Sabinea septemcarinata (SaB.). 


Of this form only 2 specimens were secured, both taken on Sept. 
20, 1900, in the upper part of Gaase Fjord, at a depth of 3—25 fathoms. 


Fam. Hippolytide. 
3. Spirontocaris grénlandica (Fasr.). 


Several specimens of this large and distinct arctic species were 
taken in 10 different places. 


4. Spirontocaris polaris (Sas.). 


This form was found in great abundance in most of the localilies 
investigated. Though undoubtedly, like the preceding species, of arctic 
origin, it extends along the whole Norwegian coast, as far south as the 
Christiania Fjord. On the other hand, it has not yet been found off 
the British Isles. 


5. Spirontocaris Gaimardi (Epw.). 


Some specimens of this well-known form were taken in 7 different 


places. Like the preceding species, it is distributed along the whole 
Norwegian coast, as far south as Egersund. 


4998—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 7 


6. Spirontocaris spinus (Sows.). 


Of this form only 3 specimens were secured, 2 of them having 
been taken on July 22, 1900, in the Winter haven, 6—20 fath., and the 
third on June 28, 1901, at the mouth of Hvalros Fjord. 


7. Spirontocaris turgida (Kroyer). 


Numerous specimens of this form were taken on July 12, 1900, in the 
bay at Last End. It was also found occasionally in 8 other places. Off 
the Norwegian coast this form is wholly restricted to the arctic region. 


Order Schizopoda. 


Suborder Mysidacea. 


Fam. Myside. 
8. Mysis oculata (Fasr.) 


This arctic form was taken in 9 different places, both at the bottom 


and near the surface. In the latter case the specimens were chiefly 
immature. . 


Order Cummacea. 
Fam. Leuconide. 


9. Eudorella truncatula (Sp. Batt). 


A solitary female specimen of this form, not yet recorded from 
the arctic region, was found in the bottom-residue of one of the bottles 
containing collections taken on July 12, 1909, from the bay at Last End. 


Fam, Diastylide. 


10. Diastylis scorpioides (Lepecuin). 


Two specimens of this genuine arctic form were taken, one on 
Aug. 26, 1898, in Rice Strait, the other on July 26, 1900, off the mouth 
of Stordalen. 


8 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP. FRAM 


Fam. Campylaspide. 


11. Campylaspis carinata, Hansen. 


A solitary female specimen of this peculiar form, described by Dr. 
Hansen from Disco Island, was found on Sept. 19, 1900, outside the 
Forvisnings Valley. 


Order Isopoda. 


Suborder Chelifera. 


Fam. Tanaide. 
12. Heterotanais limicola (HARGER). 


Some specimens of this form, also recorded by Dr. Hansen from 
the coast of Greenland, were picked up from the bottom-residue of 3 
of the bottles. 


13. Leptognathia longiremis (LILLJEB.). 


A single specimen, apparently belonging to this species, occurred 
in a bottle with collections taken on July 18, 1901, from the mouth 
of Gaase Fjord. 


14. Cryptocope arctica, Hansen. 


Three specimens of this distinct species, first described by Dr. 
Hansen from Novaja Sembla, were found in the same bottle as the 
preceding species. 


Suborder Valvifera. 


Fam. Arcturide. 


15. Arcturus baffini, Sas. 


This characteristic arctic form was taken in no less than 12 dif- 
ferent places. Among the specimens there are some in which the 
dorsal spines are much reduced in size, thus apparently forming a 
transilion to the form recorded by the present author under the name 
of A. tuberosus. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 9 


Fam. Idotheide. 


16. Mesidotea Sabini (Kroyer). 


A solitary specimen of this form was taken on Aug. 4, 1902, in Gaase 
Fjord, north of the peninsula, from a depth of 10—15 fathoms. Accord- 
ing to Miss H. Rictarpson, the 2 arctic species Idothea Sabini and 
L entomon cannot be referred either to the genus Chiridoiea or to 
Glyptonotus, for which reason the new genus Mesidotea has been 
established by that distinguished naturalist. 


Suborder Asellota. 


Fam. Janiride. 


17. Janira tricornis (KRoyER). 


Some few, more or less mutilated specimens of this arctic species 
were picked up from the bottom-residue of 3 or 4 bottles. 


Fam. Munnide. 


18. Munna Fabricii, Kroyer. 


Several specimens of this form were found in the bottom-residue of 
5 of the bottles. 


19. Munna Kreyeri, Goopsir. 
Found together with the preceding species. 


Fam. Munnopside. 


20. Munnopsis typica, M. Sars. 


A single specimen of this characteristic form was taken on Aug. 2, 
1901, in the upper part of Gaase Fjord. 


91. Eurycope mutica, G. O. Sars. 


A few specimens of a small Eurycope, apparently referable to this 
species, were picked up from the bottom- residue of a bottle containing 
collections taken on July 30, 1900. 


10 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP. FRAM 


Suborder Hipicarida. 


Fam. Dajide. 
22. Dajus mysidis, Kroyer. 
Found, as usual, attached to the interior of the marsupial pouch 


of Mysis oculata (Fasr.). 


Order Amphipoda. 


Fam. Hyperiide. 
23. Hyperia galba (Mont.). 


Several specimens of this form, young and adult, were collected 
on Aug. 18, 1898, off Cape Sabine. 


24. Huthemisto libellula (Manpt.). 


Only immature specimens of this common arctic form are in the 
collection, these having been taken, as usual, near the surface of the sea. 


Fam. Lysianasside. 
25. Socarnes bidentatus (Sp. Bate). 
Solitary specimens of this magnificent form were taken in 4 dif- 


ferent places. 


26. Anonyx nugax (Pumps). 


Taken in 6 different places. 


27. Hoplonyx cicada (Fasr.). 
One specimen only of this common form was taken on June 29, 
1901, outside the camping-ground. 


28. Tryphosa compressa, G. O. Sars. 
A solitary. specimen of this form was taken on July 8, 1901, in 
Ren Bay, Ellesmere Land. 


29. Onesimus Edwardsi (Kroyer). 


This form was found occasionally in 4 different places. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 11 


30. Pseudalibrotus littoralis (Kroyer). 


Several specimens of this common arctic form are in the collection, 
these having been taken both at the bottom and near the surface of 
the sea. 


Fam. Pontoporetide. 
31. Pontoporeia femorata, Kroyer. 


Some specimens of this form were taken on two different occasions 
in the bay in Rice Strait. 


Fam. Ampeliscida. 
32. Byblis Gaimardi (Kroyer). 


Taken occasionally in 4 different places. 


33. Haploops tubicola (Livses.). 


Several specimens of this form are in the collection, these having 
been taken in 5 different places. In one of these localities, the haven 
in Rice Strait, it occurred in great abundance. 


Fam. Stegocephalide. 
34. Stegocephalus inflatus (KRoyYER). 


This form occurred in no less than 11 different places, and in one 
of them, the bay at Land’s End, it was found in considerable abundance. 


Fam. Stenothoide. 
35. Metopa Bruzelii (Goés). 
Found in great abundance on Hydroida from Rice Strait, and also 


found in the bottom-residue of another bottle. 


36. Metopa borealis, G. O. Sars. 


A solitary specimen of this form was found in the bottom-residue 
of a bottle with collections taken on July 18, 1901, at the mouth of 
Gaase Fjord, depth about 60 m. 


37. Metopa Boecki, G.O. Sars. 


Several specimens of this form, not yet known from the arctic 
region, were found in the same bottle as the preceding species. 


12 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP. FRAM 


38. Metopa carinata, HANsEN. 


Of this peculiar form, first described by Dr. Hansen from the west 
coast of Greenland, some few specimens were collected on July 27, 
1898, at Egedes Minde. Another specimen was found in a bottle of 
specimens taken on July 9, 1902, in Ren Bay, Ellesmere Land. 


Fam. Amphilochide. 
39. Amphilochus manudens, Sp. Bate. 


A solitary, somewhat defective specimen of this form occurred in 
a bottle of specimens taken on July 30, 1900. 


Fam. Oediceride. 
40. Paroedicerus lynceus (M. Sars). 

Two specimens of this form are in the collection, one taken on 
July 30, 1900, the other on July 17, 1902, east of the great glacier, 
North Devon. 

41. Acanthostepheia Ma/mgreni (Goés). 


This large and conspicuous arctic form was found in 5 different 
places, in some of them rather abundantly. 


Fam. Paramphithoide. 
42. Paramphithoe bicuspis (Kroyer). 


Three specimens of this form were found on Hydroida taken 
on Aug. 24, 1898, in Rice Strait. 


Fam. Epimeride. 
43. Acanthozone cuspidata (LEPECHIN). 


An immature specimen of this characteristic form was taken 


on July 30, 1960. 


Fam. [phimediidez. 
44, Odius carinatus (Sp. Bate). 


Solitary specimens of this small, but easily recognisable form were 
picked up from the bottom-residue of 2 of the bottles. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 13 


Fam. Husiride. 
45. Husirus cuspidatus, Kroyer. 


A solitary specimen of this arctic form was taken on July 12, 1900, 
in the bay at Last End. 


46. Rhachotropis aculeata (Lrpecuin). 


Some specimens of this characteristic arctic form are in the col- 
lection, these having been taken in 3 different places. 


Fam. Callioptide. 


47. Calliopius Rathkei (Zavpacu). 
Several specimens collected on July 31, 1899, off Disco Island. 


48. Pontogeneia inermis, Kroyer. 


Found occasionally in 2 different places. 


49. Amphithopsis glacialis, Hansen. 


Some more or less mutilated specimens of this genuine arctic form 
are in the collection, these having been taken in 5 different places, in 
some cases near the surface of the sea. 


Fam. Atylidee. 


50. Atylus carinatus (Fapr.). 


This characteristic arctic form was taken in no less than 16 diffe- 
rent places, in some of them rather abundantly. 


Fam. Gammaride. 
51. Gammarus locusta Lin. 


Collected in 7 different places, in one of them very abundantly. 


52. Amathilla homari (Far.). 


Several specimens of this form were secured, having been found 
in 5 different places. 


14 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


53. Amathilla pingvis (Kroyer). 


This genuine arctic form was also taken in several places. 


54. Gammaracanthus loricatus (Sas.). 


Magnificent specimens of this characteristic form were taken from 
5 different places. 


Fam. Photide. 


55. Protomedeia fasciata, Kroyer. 


Only a single specimen of this form was found in a bottle of 
specimens taken on Aug. 2, 1901, in the upper part of Gaase Fjord. 


Fam. Podoceride. 
56. Jschyrocerus angvipes (KRoyYER). 

Four specimens of this common arctic form were taken on July 17, 
1902, east of the large glacier, North Devon, from a depth of about 
3 fathoms. 

57. Ischyrocerus minutus (LILLJEs.). 


Very common on Hydroida taken on Aug. 24, 1898, in Rice Strait 
from a depth of 4—20 fathoms; also found occasionally in 2 other places. 


Fam. Corophiide. 
58. Neohela monstrosa, Borcx. 


A solitary, somewhat mutilated specimen of this peculiar form was 


taken on Aug. 2, 1901. 


Fam. Caprellide. 
59. gina spinosissima (Stmps). 


Taken occasionally in 5 different places. 


60. Caprella septentrionalis, Kroyer. 


Several specimens of this common arctic species were taken on 
Aug. 4, 1898, at Upernivik. 


4898—1902. No. 18.| CRUSTACEA, 15 


Order Branchiopoda. 
Suborder Phyllopoda. 


Fam. Apodide. 
61. Lepidurus arcticus (Pautas). 


This arctic form was collected on Aug. 16, 1898, from fresh-water 
swamps on Faulke Fjord. 


62. Lepidurus apus (Lin). 


Two specimens of this species, which has not yet been recorded 
from the arctic region, were taken on Aug. 29, 1898, from a fresh- 
water swamp at Cape Rutherford. 


Fam. Branchipodide. 
63. Branchinecta paludosa (Mi.ver). 


Found in several places, both in fresh and brackish water. 


Suborder Cladocera. 


Fam. Daphnide. 
64. Daphnia pulex (De GEER). 


Numerous dark-coloured specimens of this form, most of them with 
ephippia, occurred in a sample taken on Aug. 22, 1898, from a fresh- 
water pond (the exact locality not indicated). 


Fam. Polyphemide. 
65. ELvadne Nordmani, LovEn. 


Abundant in a plankton-sample taken on June 29, 1898, in lat. 
57°31 N., long. 1° 29’ E. 


16 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Order Copepoda. 


Suborder Calanoida. 


Fam. Calanide. 


66. Calanus finmarchicus (GUNNER.). 


This common species occurred abundantly in plankton-samples from 
many different places. 


67. Calanus hyperboreus, Kroyer. 


Found occasionally together with the preceding species. 


Fam. Eucheetide. 


68. Euchzeta norvegica, Borck. 


Some immature specimens of this form occurred in one of the 
plankton-samples taken on July 10, 1898. 


Fam. Stephide. 


69. Stephos arcticus, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. 1) 

Specific Characters. — Female. Body somewhat more slender 
than in the other known species, with the anterior division oblong oval 
in form, greatest width not attaining half the length. Last pedigerous 
segment not wholly confluent with the preceding one, a slight notch on 
each side indicating the limit between the two; lateral lobes rounded 
off and slightly unequal, the right one somewhat more prominent than 
the left. Urosome slender and narrow, attaining almost half the length 
of the anterior division, genital segment slightly asymmetrical, bulging 
somewhat on left side. Caudal rami about the length of the last seg- 
ment, apical sete rather slender, the innermost but one much the 
longest, and attaining about half the length of the body. Anterior an- 
tennz shorter than the anterior division of the body, and, as in the 
other species, composed of 24 articulations. Posterior antennee, oral 
parts and natatory legs of the structure characteristic of the genus. 
Last pair of legs extremely small, with the distal joint conical in form 
and scarcely denticulated. 

Male somewhat smaller than female and of more slender form, 
with the urosome narrower and 5-articulate, 2nd segment the largest 


1898-1902. No. 18. CRUSTACEA. 17 


and produced below to a conical recurved projection. Anterior antennze 
of exactly the same structure as in female. Last pair of legs, however, 
very different and greatly developed, being built on the type character- 
istic of the genus; right leg more slender than left, and consisting of 
4 joints, the penultimate one long and slender, sublinear in form, and 
produced at the end outside to a conical projection, terminal joint 
divided into 3 unequal lappets, the middle one the largest and some- 
what spoon-shaped; left leg angularly bent in front of the middle, and 
distinctly 5-articulate, penultimate joint large and tumid, oval in form, 
and provided at the base inside with a slender spiniform appendage, 
outside which another much smaller projection occurs, lower face pro- 
vided, in front of the middle, with a rounded projecting tubercle, ter- 
minal joint somewhat club-shaped, and provided at the end outside with 
about 6 lanceolate, leaf-like appendages, tip rounded off and fringed 
with a comb-like series of delicate, somewhat compressed spinules. 

Length of adult female 1.20 mm., of male 1.05 mm. 

Remarks. — In its external appearance this form somewhat 
resembles S. Scotti, G.O. Sars, but is of larger size and more slender 
shape. It also differs conspicuously both from this and the other known 
species in the structure of the last pair of legs in both sexes. 

Occurrence. — One female and 2 male specimens of this form 
were found in a bottle containing specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in 
the bay at Land’s End. 


Fam. Centropagide. 


70. Centropages hamatus (LILLEB.). 
Found rather abundantly in a plankton-sample taken on June 29, 
1898, in lat. 57° 31’ N., long. 1° 29’ E. 


Fam. Temoride. 
71. Temora Jongicornis (Mit1.). 


Found in the same sample in which the preceding species occurred. 


Fam. Pontellide. 
72. Anomalocera Patersoni (TEMpLt.). 


Several specimens of this characteristic Atlantic form occurred in 
the same sample as the 2 preceding species. 


18 


G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Fam. Acartiide. 


73. Acartia Clausi, GIESBRECHT. 


Together with the 3 preceding species. 


Suborder Harpacticoida. 
Fam. Misophriidex. 
74. Misophria pallida, Boxcx. 


Several specimens of this peculiar form were picked up from the 
bottom-residue of 4 different bottles. 


It has also been recorded by Dr. 
Tu. Scott from Franz Josef Land. 


Fam. Hctinosomide. 


75, Ectinosoma neglectum, G. O. Sars. 


Not unfrequent in the bottom-residue of several bottles. 


76. Ectinosoma melaniceps, Bokcx. 


Together with the preceding species, rather common. 


77. Bradya typica, Boeck. 


Some few specimens of this form were found in 2 of the bottles 


78. Microsetella norvegica (Borck). 


This form occurred in great abundance in a plankton-sample taken 
on July 10, 1898. 2 specimens were also found in a bottle with 
collections taken on June 26, 1899, in the Winter haven. 


Fam. Harpacticide. 
79. Harpacticus chelifer (Miutrr). 


A solitary specimen of this species was taken on July 27, 1898, 
in the haven of Egedes Minde. 


80. Harpacticus uniremis, Kroyer. 


Found rather frequently in 5 different bottles. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 19 


81. Zaus spinatus, Goopstr. 


This form also occurred in 5 different bottles. The specimens 
agreed, perfectly, both in size and in their structural details with the 
form occurring off the Norwegian coast. 


82. Zaus Aurelii, Poppe. 
(Pl. Il, figs. 1—6). 


Zaus Aurelii, Poppe, Ueber die von Herrn Dr. Arruur and AureL Krause 
im nordlichen stillen Ocean und Behringsmeer gesammelten Copepoden. 


Arch. f. Naturgesch. 50. Jahrg. 1. Vol. p. 286, Pl. XX, figs. 7—9, Pl. XXI, 
figs. 5— 15. 

Specific Characters. — Female. Body somewhat less ex- 
panded than in the type species, the anterior division being oblong 
oval in form, with the cephalic segment evenly rounded in front. 
Rostral projection semicircular, deflexed. Urosome, as in the type 
species, much narrower than the anterior division, lateral expansions 
of the segments not much produced. Anterior anlenne comparatively 
shorter than in Z. spinatus, otherwise of a very similar structure. 
Posterior antennz and oral parts as in that species. ist pair of legs 
with the rami comparatively less robust, and the apical claws less 
thickly clothed with cilia. Natatory legs likewise somewhat more 
slender in shape. Last pair of legs with the distal joint oblong in 
form, more than twice as long as it is broad, and somewhat tapered 
at the end, inner expansion of proximal joint triangularly produced. 
Ovisac oblong oval in form, with only a limited number of. ova. 

Length of adult female 0.72 mm. 

Remarks. — This form is closely related to Z. spinatus Goopsir, 
but is of considerably larger size, and has the anterior division of the 
body somewhat less expanded. The several appendages are on the 
whole very similar to those in the type species, though on a closer 
comparison, some slight differences may be found to occur. The last 
pair of legs especially differ conspicuously in the narrower shape of 
the distal joint and the more produced inner expansion of the proxi- 
mal joint. 

Occurrence. — Some specimens of this form were found together 
with the preceding species in 3 of the bottles. 

Distribution. — The Pacific in lat. 55°56’ N, long. 154° 7’ W, 
on Laminaria and Macrocystis floating at the surface (Poppe); Novaja 
Semlja (Scort). 


20 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


83. Zaus abbreviatus, G. O. Sars. 


This form, as yet only known from the Norwegian coast, was 
found occasionally together with the preceding species. 


84. Zaus Goodsiri, Brapy. 


Two specimens only of this large and distinct species were found. 


Fam. Porcellidiide. 


85. Porcellidium fimbriatum, Cuaus. 


A solitary specimen of this easily recognisable form was found in 
a bottle of specimens taken on July 9, 1901. 


Fam. Idyide. 


86. Psamathe Arthuri (Poppe). 
(Pl. Ul, figs. 7—11). 


Stutellidium Arthuri, Porpz, |. c. p. 291, Pl. XXI, figs. 1-4, Pl. XXU, 
figs. 1-12. 


Specific Characters. — Female. Anterior division of body 
broad and depressed, with the lateral parts of the segments lamellarly 
expanded and angular behind. Cephalic segment about the length of 
the 4 succeeding segments combined, rostral projection broad and 
lamellar, obtusely truncated at the end. Penultimate segment of meta- 
some scarcely narrower than the preceding ones, and having the hind 
edge almost straight. Last pedigerous segment, as in the type species, 
very small and firmly connected with the 1st caudal segment. Uro- 
some comparatively shorter than in the type species, being scarcely 
more than 1/3; as long as the anterior division, genital segment some- 
what dilated and much larger than the others. Caudal sete slender 
and elongated, the innermost but one almost as long as the whole body. 
Anterior antenne resembling in structure those in P. longicauda, the 
terminal part tapering abruptly, with the last 2 joints narrow linear 
in form. Posterior antenne and oral parts exhibiting the structure 
characteristic of the genus. 1st pair of legs almost exactly as in the 
type species. Natatory legs likewise very similar. Last pair of legs, 
however, differing more conspicuously, the distal joint being compara- 
tively shorter and less densely setous on the edge, tip obliquely 
truncated. 

Length of adult female 1.32 mm. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. at 


Remarks. — This form is very nearly related to P. longicauda 
Puiuipe1 (= Scutellidium thisboides Claus), but is of rather larger size 
and differs slightly in the general shape of the body, as also in the 
structure of the last pair of legs. The form recorded by Tu. Scott 
from Franz Josef Land as Scutelldium thisboides Cus. is in all pro- 
babilily the present species and not that of Craus. 

Occurrence. — A single fully adult female specimen and some 
immature ones of this form were found in a bottle of specimens taken 
on July 12, 1908, in the bay at Land’s End. 

Distribution. — Northern part of the Pacific together with Zaus 
Aurelii (Poppe); Franz Josef Land (Scott). 


87. Machairopus minutus, G. O. Sars. 


Some specimens of this form, described by the present author from 
the Norwegian coast, were found in 3 of the bottles. 


88. Jdyxa furcata (Bairp). 


Found rather abundantly in several of the bottles. 


89. Idy#a ensifera (FIscHER). 


Several specimens of this form were also found in the bottles. 


90. Idy#a gracilis, Scott. 


Only a few specimens of this form were found in one of the bottles 
containing specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


91. Idyea finmarchica, G. O. Sars. 


Of this species, described by the present author from the Finmark 
coast, a solitary female specimen was found in the same bottle as 
the preceding species. 


92. Idyea inflata, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. III). 

Specific Characters. — Female. Body comparatively short 
and stout, sub-pyriform in outline, with the anterior division greatly in- 
flated in its anterior part. Cephalic segment large and broad, obtusely 
rounded in front, with the rostral projection very slight. Epimeral parts 


1 By this slight change (the interposition of an c) I think that the Philippian 
genus may be retained. The name Idya had been previously given by 
Buainvitte to a genus of Acalephe. : 


22 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


of the 8 succeeding segments rounded and sub-contiguous; penultimate 
segment deeply emarginated behind. Last pedigerous segment very 
small. Urosome much narrower than the anterior division and scarcely 
attaining half its length, genital segment, as usual, much the largest; 
last segment very short. Caudal rami likewise short, broader than they 
are long. and transversely truncated at the end; apical sete unusually 
short and less unequal than in the other species, the inner medial seta 
but little longer than the outer, and scarcely exceeding the urosome in 
length, being remarkably dilated for the greater part of its length; inner- 
most seta longer than the outermost, both very thin. Anterior antenne 
comparatively short, with the 2nd joint much the largest, the 2 suc- 
ceeding joints gradually smaller, terminal part about twice the length of 
the preceding joint. Posterior antenne rather small, but otherwise of 
normal structure. Mandibular palp with the inner ramus shorter and 
stouter than the outer. Anterior maxillipeds with the terminal claw 
very strong and abruptly bent at the tip, appendicular lobe extremely 
small with only a single minute bristle at the tip. Posterior maxillipeds 
comparatively more powerful than in the other species. ist pair of 
legs exhibiting the structure characteristic of the genus, outer ramus 
exceeding half the length of the inner, and having the penicillate spines 
comparatively thin, inner ramus with the 1st joint rather dilated, 2nd 
joint not much narrowed and scarcely longer than the 1st, last joint 
very small, with 2 unequal claws at the tip, the inner one much the 
larger and distinctly penicillate. Natatory legs very fully developed, 
with the rami, especially those of the anterior pairs, rather broad and 
subequal in length; those of 4th pair, however, rather more slender. Last 
pair of legs not much produced, distal joint lamellar, oblong oval in 
form, and provided at the end with 4 comparatively short sete, inner 
expansion of proximal joint short, triangular, and tipped with 2 unequal 
sete. Ovisac oblong in form, and extending considerably beyond the 
tip of the caudal rami. . 

Male, as usual, much smaller and more slender than female, and 
having the anterior antenne slightly transformed, subprehensile. Last 
pair of legs very small, with the inner expansion of the proximal joint 
quite obsolete. Genital lobes each with a strong spine and two small 
hair-like bristles. 

Length of adult female about 1 mm. 

Remarks. — This is a very distinct and easily recognisable species, 
being especially distinguished by the greatly inflated anterior division of 
the body and the unusually short caudal sete. 


1898— 1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 93 


Occurrence. — Several specimens of this form were found in 
the bottom-residue of 4 different bottles. In one of them, containing 
specimens taken on July 30, 1900, it occurred rather plentifully. 


93. Idyanthe! dilatata, G. O. Sars. 


One or two specimens of this peculiar form occurred in a bottle 
of specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


Fam. Thalestridez. 
94. Thalestris gibba (Kroyer). 


This form occurred occasionally in a bottle of specimens taken 
on July 17, 1902, east of the great glacier, North Devon, from a depth 
of about 3 fathoms. 


95. Phyllothalestris frigida (Scott). 
(Pl. 1V). 


Thalestris frigida, Tu. Scotr, Marine and fresh water Crustacea from 
Franz Josef Land. Linn. Soc. Journ. Zoology. Vol. XXVIII, p. 108, Pl. 7, 
figs. 1728, Pl. 8, figs. 1, 2. 


Specific Characters. — Female. Body comparatively strongly 
built, with the integuments highly chitinized. Cephalic segment large 
and deep, somewhat narrowed in its anterior part, and produced in 
front to a strong falciform deflexed rostrum terminating in a very acute 
point. Epimeral parts of the 3 succeeding segments less deep than in 
the type species, but terminating behind in a sharp angle. Last pedige- 
rous segment short, but rather broad, with the lateral parts somewhat 
produced. Urosome not much narrower than the anterior division and 
somewhat exceeding half its length, genital segment broader than it is 
long, and somewhat depressed, exhibiting on each side, like the 2 
succeeding segments, an obliquely transverse row of small denticles. 
Last segment well developed, though a little shorter than the preceding 
one. Caudal rami short, being scarcely longer than they are broad, 
and somewhat obliquely truncated at the tip, middle apical sete rather 
slender, the inner one being, as usual, the longer. Anterior antenne 


1 The name Idyopsis having been previously given by Prof. A. Acassiz to a 
genus of Acalephz, I propose the above change of the generic name. 


24 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


scarcely exceeding half the length of the cephalic segment and rather 
densely setiferous, 1st joint much the largest, 2nd joint nearly as long | 
as the 2 succeeding joints combined, terminal part rather narrow and 
about half the length of the proximal one. Posterior antenne and 
oral parts of the structure characteristic of the genus. Posterior maxilli- 
peds, as in the type species much less robust than in the genus Tha- 
lestris, the hand being narrow fusiform in shape, with the palmar 
edge nearly straight. 1st pair of legs with both rami rather slender 
and distinctly prehensile, the outer one a little longer than the inner, 
and having the 2nd joint long and slender, last joint small and armed 
with 2 strong subequal claws accompanied by a slender seta, outer 
edge of the joint moreover carrying 2 comparatively small spines; inner 
ramus with the outer 2 joints very short, the last one armed with a 
long slightly curved claw, outside which is a much thinner setiform 
spine. Natatory legs of normal structure. Last pair of legs very largely 
developed, though scarcely to such an extent as in the type species, 
extending about to the end of the 2nd caudal segment, both joints pro- 
nouncedly foliaceous, the distal one oblong oval in form and provided 
with 4 thickish, coarsely ciliated seta, 3 of which are attached to the 
outer edge, the 4th to the inner edge near the end, the tip itself carry- 
ing 2 unequal very thin, hair-like bristles; inner expansion of proximal 
joint extending as far as the distal joint and broadly rounded at the 
end, marginal sete 5 in number, the innermost not far remote from 
the others. 

Male considerably smaller than female and exhibiting the usual 
sexual differences. 1st pair of legs with the spine attached to the inner 
corner of the 2nd basal joint falciform, incurved. Inner ramus of 2nd 
pair of legs transformed in a similar manner to that in the type 
species. Last pair of legs much smaller than in female, with the inner 
expansion of proximal joint quite short, and provided with only 3 sete. 

Length of adult female 1.30 mm. 

Remarks. — This form has been described and figured, though 
somewhat imperfectly, by Tx. Scorr in the above-quoted paper as a 
species of the genus Thalestris. According to the general form of the 
body, the shape of the rostrum, the structure of the posterior maxilli- 
peds and the great development of the last pair of legs, it is undoubt- 
edly referable to the genus Phyllothalestris, as defined by the present 
author in his account of the Norwegian Harpacticoida. It is distinguished 
from the type species, P. mysis CLaus, by a number of well-marked 
characters pointed out in the above diagnosis. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 95 


Occurrence. — One female and 2 male specimens of this pretty 
form were found in a bottle of specimens taken on July 10, 1901, at the 
mouth of Gaase Fjord from a depth of about 60 m. 

Distribution. — Franz Josef Land (Scort). 


96. Rhynchothalestris helgolandica (Cavs). 


Found occasionally in 2 of the bottles. 


97. Microthalestris forficula (Cuavs). 


This form occurred not unfrequently in 7 different bottles. 


98. Dactylopusia vulgaris, G. O. Sars. 


Not uncommon in several places. 


99. Dactylopusia glacialis, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. V). 

Specific Characters. — Female. Body moderately slender 
and slightly tapering behind, with the anterior division oval in form and 
not much dilated anteriorly. Cephalic segment exceeding in length the 
4 succeeding segments combined; rostral projection slightly prominent 
and obtuse at the tip. Urosome about 2/; as long as the anterior 
division, and having the segments rather sharply defined. Caudal rami 
very short, being twice as broad as they are long, and transversely 
truncated at the end; middle apical sete rather slender. Anterior an- 
tenn comparatively short, though distinctly 9-articulate, terminal part 
about the length of the 3 preceding joints combined. Posterior antenne 
and oral parts of normal structure. ist pair of legs rather strongly 
built, with both rami distinctly prehensile, the outer one nearly as long 
as the 1st joint of the inner, last joint short, spatulate in form, with 
all 4 claws well-developed and gradually increasing in length distally, 
inner ramus with the 2 outer joints, as usual, very short and abruptly 
incurved, the last one armed with 2 very strong claws of unequal 
length, seta of ist joint attached about in the middle. Natatory legs 
of the usual structure. Last pair of legs comparatively large and pro- 
nouncedly foliaceous, distal joint very broad, rounded in shape, and 
scarcely exserted at the tip; inner expansion of proximal joint almost 
extending as far as the distal joint, 2 of the sete on each joint very 
slender and elongated. 

Male, as usual, smaller than female, and having the anterior an- 
tenne distinctly hinged. Inner ramus of 2nd pair of legs with the 


26 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


distal joint considerably narrowed in its outer part, spine of outer edge 
unusually short and attached beyond the middle, tip provided with a 
small spine and a long flexuous seta. Last pair of legs with the distal 
joint rather small, inner expansion of proximal joint well developed, 
but provided with only 3 short sete. 

Length of adult female about 1 mm. 

Remarks. — This form is nearly allied to D. vulgaris, but is of 
considerably larger size, in which respect it about equals D. thisboides 
Ciaus. From both these species it is distinguished by the very broad 
rounded form of the distal joint of the last pair of legs in the female, 
as also by the more strongly built 1st pair of legs. From D. thisboides 
it moreover differs by the distinctly 9-articulate anterior antenne. The 
structure of the inner ramus of the 2nd pair of legs in the male differs 
also conspicuously from that in the 2 species mentioned. 

Occurrence. — This form was found rather abundantly in a 
bottle of specimens taken on July 30, 1900 (the exact locality not indi- 
cated). It also occurred occasionally in some of the other bottles. 


100. Dactylopusia brevicornis, Cts. 


Some specimens of this distinct species occurred in a bottle of 
specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


101. Zdomene coronata (Scott). 
(Pl. VI). 


Dactylopus coronatus, Tu. Scort, Additions to the Fauna of the Firth of 
Forth. 12th. Ann. Rep. of Fish. Board for Scotland, Part ILI, p. 255, 
Pl. IX, figs. 12—90. 


Specific Characters. — Female. Body short and stout, pro- 
nouncedly depressed, with the anterior division broad and expanded, 
oval in outline. Cephalic segment large and evenly rounded in front, 
rostral projection somewhat deflexed, lamellar, obtusely rounded at the 
tip. Epimeral plates of the 3 succeeding segments sub-imbricate and 
acutely produced at the hind corner. Last pedigerous segment much 
narrower than the preceding ones, and without distinct epimeral plates. 
Urosome short, scarcely more than 1/3 as long as the anterior division, 
and much narrower, genital segment, as usual, the largest and, like 
the 2 succeeding segments, finely spinulose at the hind edge laterally. 
Caudal rami scarcely longer than they are broad, and spinulose at 
the inner corner, innermost apical seta not spiniform and shorter than 
the outermost, the 2 middle sete slender and elongated. Anterior 
antenne short and stout, 7-articulate, and densely clothed with sete, 


1898-1902. No. 18.| CRUSTACEA. 97 


some of which are rather coarse and spinulose at the edges, terminal 
part 3-articulate and scarcely longer than the 2 preceding joints com- 
bined. Posterior antenne of a similar structure to that in the type species. 
Mandibular palp, however, less fully developed, with the rami shorter, 
none of the sete of the outer ramus spiniform. Posterior maxillipeds 
rather strong, with an oblique series of small spinules crossing the base 
of the hand. 1st pair of legs built on the same type as in L. forficata 
Puiuirrl, though having the 1st joint of the inner ramus less dilated 
and the outer 2 joints more produced, exceeding, when combined, half 
the length of the 1st. Natatory legs scarcely different in structure from 
those in the type species. Last pair of legs, however, rather unlike, 
distal joint confluent at the base with the proximal one and broadly 
rounded at the end, marginal sete 5 in number, the 2 outermost re- 
markably strong and curved, spiniform, and edged outside with coarse 
cilia, the other 3 sete long and slender; inner expansion of proximal 
joint extending as far as the distal joint and obtusely truncated at the 
end, carrying 5 rather unequal sete, the outermost but one very long 
and slender, the innermost but one quite short. Ovisac comparatively 
large, extending far beyond the tip of the caudal rami, and oval in form. 

Length of adult female 0.66 mm. 

Remarks. — This is certainly not a Dactylopusia, as believed by 
Tu. Scorr, but seems to me more properly to be referable to the genus 
Idomene of Putuiprt, though differing from the type species, L. forficata 
rather conspicuously in some points, especially as regards the structure 
of the mandibular palp, the last pair of legs and the caudal sete. 

Occurrence. — A solitary female specimen of this form was 
found in a bottle of specimens taken on July 18, 1901, at the mouth 
of Gaase Fjord from a depth of about 60 m. 

Distribution. — Scottish coast (Scor7). 


102. Amenophia peltata, Borcx. 


Some few specimens of this easily recognizable form occurred in 3 
of the bottles examined. 


103. Westwoodia assimilis, G. O. Sars. 


A solitary specimen of a moderately large Westwoodia, which 
according to the distinctly bi-articulate outer ramus of the ist pair of 
legs, must be referred to the above species described by the present 
author from the Norwegian coast, was found in a bottle of specimens 
taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


28 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP, FRAM 


Fam. Diosaccide. 
104. Amphiascus nasutus, Boeck. 


This form occurred rather abundantly in several of the bottles. 


105. Amphiascus latifolius, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. VIL). 

Specific Characters. — Female. Body moderately slender 
and slightly tapering behind, with the anterior division oblong oval in 
form. Cephalic segment, excluding the rostrum, about the length of 
the 3 succeeding segments combined; rostrum well developed, lanceolate. 
Urosome somewhat shorter than the anterior division, last segment 
comparatively short, scarcely half as long as the preceding one. Caudal 
rami broader than they are long, and transversely truncated at the tip, 
inner medial seta conspicuously dilated for some part of its length, 
and about as long as the urosome. Anterior antennz of moderate 
length and consisting of 9 well-defined articulations, the first four gra- 
dually diminishing in size, terminal part about half the length of the 
proximal one. Posterior antenne and oral parts of the usual structure. 
1st pair of legs with both rami pronouncedly prehensile and rather 
slender, the outer one fully as long as the 1st joint of the inner, last 
joint very short, spatulate in form, and armed with 3 strong claws gra- 
dually increasing in length distally and accompanied outside by a thin 
bristle, inside by a slender geniculate seta; inner ramus with the 1st 
joint linear in form and having inside, at a short distance from the end, 
a comparatively short seta, outer 2 joints very short and subequal in 
size, the last one armed with 2 slender claws of unequal length. Nata- 
tory legs well developed, with the full number of sete. Last pair of 
legs comparatively large and pronouncedly foliaceous, distal joint of 
unusual size, rounded quadrangular in form, and provided with 6 rather 
slender sete, one of them, issuing from the tip, very thin, hair-like; 
inner expansion of proximal joint triangular and extending about to the 
middle of the distal joint, marginal sete 5 in number, the 2 outermost 
closely juxtaposed. Ovisacs of moderate size and oblong oval in form. 

Male with the anterior antenne hinged in the usual manner. 
Inner ramus of 2nd pair of legs conspicuously transformed, but rather 
unlike that in the other known species, middle joint faintly defined from 
the last, and without any spiniform appendage outside, last joint pro- 
vided at the tip with a short spine and a slender seta, having more- 
over inside an ordinary seta, and outside near the end a short, peculiarly 


~ 4908—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 99 


formed spine originating with a broad lamellar base. Last pair of legs, 
as usual, much smaller than in female, distal joint oval in form and 
somewhat narrowed towards the end; inner expansion of proximal joint 
rounded off at the end, and provided with only 2 unequal sete. 

Length of adult female 0.92 mm. 

Remarks. — This species belongs to the section of the genus in 
which both rami of the 1st pair of legs are distinctly prehensile and 
built upon a type somewhat similar to that in the genus Dactylopusia. 
It is, however, quite distinct from any of the known species. In only 
one of these, A. nasutus, Borcx, are the anterior antenne composed, 
as in the present species, of 9 articulations; but from this species 
it differs conspicuously both in the greater length of the outer ramus 
of the ist pair of legs, and in the shape of the distal joint of the last 
pair of legs in the female. . 

Occurrence. — This well-marked species was found not unfre- 
quently in 3 of the bottles examined. 


106. Amphiascus minutus (Cavs). 


Some few specimens of a small Amphiascus, apparently belonging 
to this species, were found together with the preceding one. 


107. Amphiascus congener, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. VIII, figs. 1—4). 


Specific Characters. — Female. Body rather slender, almost 
cylindrical in form, or only very slightly attenuated behind. Rostrum of 
moderate size and somewhat obtusely pointed at the tip. Urosome 
nearly attaining the length of the anterior division, last segment a little 
shorter than the preceding one. Caudal rami of a similar form to that 
in A. latifolius, inner medial seta somewhat obliquely dilated at the 
base and scarcely longer than the urosome. Anterior antenne of mode- 
rate length and, as usual, composed of 8 articulations, 4th joint longer 
than 38rd, terminal part not attaining half the length of the proximal 
one. ist pair of legs with the rami less pronouncedly prehensile than 
in A. latifolius and very unequal, the outer one being scarcely more 
than half as long as the inner, last joint nearly as long as the middle 
one and armed with 3 claw-like spines, and inside these with 2 genicu- 
lated setee; inner ramus with the 1st joint long and slender, carrying 

inside near the end a short seta, the 2 outer joints somewhat unequal 
in size, the last one being about twice as long as the preceding one and 


30 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP, FRAM 


armed at the tip with a slender claw and a still longer seta accom- 
panied by a small bristle. Natatory legs normal. Last pair of legs of 
moderate size, distal joint obovate in form, with 6 not very long mar- 
ginal sete; inner expansion of proximal joint triangular, and scarcely 
extending to the middle of the distal joint, marginal sete 5 in number. 

Length of adult female 0.87 mm. 

Remarks. — In its general form this species somewhat resembles 
A. similis (CLaus). It is, however, of smaller size and moreover differs 
conspicuously in the structure of the first and last pairs of legs. 

Occurrence. — Some few specimens of this form occurred in a 
bottle of specimens taken on July 30, 1900 (the exact locality not indicated). 


108. Amphiascus polaris, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(PI. VII, figs. 5—10). 

Specific Characters. — Female. Body less slender than 
in the preceding species and of nearly uniform width throughout. 
Rostrum considerably prominent and exserted to a very acute point. 
Urosome not attaining the length of the anterior division, last segment 
searcely shorter than the preceding one, and deeply incised behind. 
Caudal rami short and rather distant, inner medial seta slightly dilated 
at the base and nearly twice as long as the urosome. Anterior an- 
tenn rather slender, 8-articulate, with the 4th joint much longer than 
3rd, terminal part about equalling in length those joints combined. 
1st pair of legs with the rami very unequal, the outer one scarcely 
exceeding half the length of the inner, and having all 3 joints of about 
equal size, the last one, as in A: congener, armed with 3 spines and 
2 geniculated sete; inner ramus with the 1st joint very slender and 
slightly curved, seta attached inside its end unusually long, outer 2 
joints very unequal, the last one being almost 3 times as long as the 
other and linear in form, carrying on the tip a slender, evenly curved 
claw and a still longer seta accompanied by a small bristle. Natatory 
legs with the rami more slender than in the preceding species, other- 
wise of normal structure. Last pair of legs somewhat resembling those 
in A. congener, distal joint, however, less dilated, and oblong in form; 
inner expansion of proximal joint extending to about the middle of the 
distal joint, and having the 2 innermost setae comparatively short and 
spiniform. Ovisacs oblong oval in form, and containing only a limited 
number of ova. 

Male with the inner ramus of 2nd pair of legs transformed in the 
usual manner, the 2 outer joints, being wholly coalesced, outer edge 


1898—1902. No. 18. CRUSTACEA. 31 


carrying at some distance from the tip a strong deflexed spiniform 
appendage accompanied by another much thinner appendage. Last pair 
of legs very small, distal joint quite short, with only 5 sete, 2 of them 
attached to the inner edge; inner expansion of proximal joint tipped 
with 2 unequal sete. 

Length of adult female 0.77 mm. 

Remarks. — The present form is easily distinguishable from 
the preceding species and also different from any other species known 
to me. In the shape of the rostrum and the ist pair of legs it some- 
what resembles A. imus (Brapy); but the body is far less slender, and 
the structure of the last pair of legs is also very different. 

Occurrence. — Several specimens of this form occurred in a 
bottle of specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


109. Amphiascus brevis, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. VIII, figs. 11-15). 


Specific Characters. — Female. Body unusually short and 
stout, with the anterior division slightly dilated in the middle and some- 
what narrowed both in front and behind. Rostrum of moderate size 
and obtusely pointed at the tip. Urosome considerably shorter than 
the anterior division, with the last segment about the length of the pre- 
ceding one. Caudal rami broader than they are long, inner medial 
seta conspicuously dilated at the base and not quite twice as long as 
the urosome. Anterior antenne rather slender, 8-articulate, with the 
Ath joint longer than the 3rd, terminal part about half the length of the 
proximal one. 1st pair of legs with the outer ramus exceeding half 
the length of the inner, and having the last joint about as long as the 
middle one, its armature as in the 2 preceding species; inner ramus 
with the 1st joint long and slender, seta of inner edge comparatively 
short, outer 2 joints less unequal than in A. polaris, the last one being 
only slightly longer than the other, and armed at the tip with a mode- 
rately slender, almost straight claw and a long seta accompanied by a 
small bristle. Natatory legs normal. Last pair of legs comparatively 
smaller than in the preceding species, distal joint narrow oval in form 
and somewhat exserted at the end, marginal sete 7 in number, 2 of 
them being attached to the inner edge; inner expansion of proximal 
joint extending to about the middle of the distal joint and carrying 
5 sete. Ovisacs about as in A. polaris. 

Length of adult female 0.52 mm. 


32 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Remarks. — This form is chiefly distinguished by its unusually 
short and stout body, as also by the increased number of sete on the 
distal joint of the last pair of legs. It belongs to the smaller species 
of the present genus. 

Occurrence. — Some specimens of this form were found in 
bottles from 3 different places. 


110. Amphiascus hispidus (Norman). 


Found occasionally in 2 of the bottles examined. 


111. Amphiascus affinis, G. O. Sars. 
This form occurred, though only sparingly, in no less than 4 diffe- 
rent places. 
112. Amphiascus intermedius (Scott). 


A solitary specimen of this form, easily recognizable by the un- 
usually short and thick caudal sete, was found in a bottle of speci- 
mens taken on July 9, 1901, in Ren Bay, Ellesmere Land. 


118. Amphiascus typhlops, G. O. Sars. 


Of this peculiar form, also only a single specimen was found. It 
occurred in the same bottle as the preceding species. 


114. Stenhelia gibba, Borck. 


Found occasionally in 2 of the bottles. 


115. Stenhelia palustris (Brapy). 


A solitary female specimen of this form occurred in a bottle of 
specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


Fam. Canthocamptide. 


116. Cantocamptus Nordenskjéldi, Lu.ses. 
(PI. IX). 


Canthocamptus Nordenskjéldi, Litusesorc, Three species nove generis 
Canthocampti: Appendix to K. Svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handl. Vol. 28, 


No. 9, p. 8, Pl. I, fig. 7, Pl. II, figs. 1—7. 
Specific Characters. — Female. Body rather slender, sub- 
cylindrical in form, with the anterior division only slightly wider than 
the posterior. Cephalic segment about the length of the 3 succeeding 


1898-1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 33 


ones combined and evenly rounded in front, rostral projection very 
slight, almost obsolete. Urosome nearly as long as the anterior 
division, segments finely spinulose at the hind edge ventrally and late- 
rally, last segment almost as long as the preceding one, but somewhat 
narrower, anal opercle perfectly smooth. Caudal rami comparatively 
short and obliquely oval in form, with the outer edge very convex, 
almost angular in the middle, the inner nearly straight, tip obtusely 
rounded, dorsal face with a slight carina running along the proximal 
part as far as the small dorsal seta, and followed by a row of 4 rather 
strong denticles extending to the inner corner; outermost apical seta 
attached at some distance from the other three, apparently to the 
outer edge, seta of this edge attached considerably in front of the 
middle; outer medial seta somewhat bent outwards at the base, and 
about half as long as the inner, which about equals in length the uro- 
some and last pedigerous segment combined. Anterior antenne rather 
slender, though not attaining the length of the cephalic segment, 8-arti- 
culate, and only sparingly setiferous, terminal part about the length of 
the proximal one. Posterior antenne and oral parts exhibiting the 
structure characteristic of the genus. ist pair of legs moderately slender, 
outer ramus a little longer than the Ist joint of the inner, its last joint 
exceeding in length the middle one, and carrying on the tip 2 slender 
spines and 2 geniculate sete; inner ramus with the 1st joint a little 
longer than the outer 2 combined, and having inside, at a short distance 
from the end, a comparatively short seta, last joint more than twice as 
long as the preceding one, sub-linear in form, and carrying on the tip 
a slender claw and a long seta. Natatory legs with the rami less 
slender than in the type species, but otherwise of a very similar struc- 
ture. Last pair of legs with the distal joint comparatively small, oval 
in form, and armed with 5 marginal sete, one of which, issuing from 
the tip, is very thin, hair-like, the others rather coarse and spinulose at 
the edges; inner expansion of proximal joint rather large, lamellar, ex- 
tending almost as far as the distal joint, and broadly rounded at the end, 
which carries 6 coarse spinulose sete of somewhat unequal length. 
Male with the anterior antennz hinged in the usual manner. Inner 
ramus of 2nd pair of legs with the 2 outer joints wholly coalesced; that 
of 3rd pair very conspicuously transformed, 3-articulate, 1st joint short, 
projecting outside in an acute corner and carrying inside a small bristle; 
2nd joint likewise short, but produced inside to a long deflexed process 
terminating in a thin setiform point; last joint oblong fusiform in shape, 
and carrying on the tip 2 slender sete of unequal length. oe pair of 


34 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


legs smaller than in female, with the inner expansion of proximal joint 
much shorter and provided with only 3 spiniform sete. 

Length of adult female 1.08 mm. 

Remarks. — The above-described form is unquestionably iden- 
tical with the species recorded by Prof. Litusepore under the above 
name from Siberia. It is about the same size as the type species, 
C. staphylinus (Jurine), which it also resembles in the general form of 
the body, though at once distinguished from it by the very different shape 
of the caudal rami and by the perfectly smooth anal opercle. Like all 
true Canthocampti, it is a genuine fresh-water form. 

Occurrence. — Some specimens of this form occurred in a 
sample taken on June 26, 1899, from some fresh-water pools (the exact 
locality not indicated). 

Distribution. — Northern part of Siberia, at Sopotschaja Korga 
near the mouth of the Jenisei, and on the peninsula Jalmal (LitiseBore). 


117. Ametira longipes, Borck. 


Found rather abundantly in 6 different bottles. 


118. Ameira tau (GIESBRECHT). 


Some few specimen of this small species occurred together with the 
preceding form in one of the bottles. 


119. Parameira elongata, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(PI. X). 


Specific Characters. — Female. Body very slender and 
elongated, sub-cylindric in form, with the anterior division scarcely 
broader than the posterior. Cephalic segment about the length of the 
3 succeeding segments combined; rostral projection almost obsolete. 
Urosome fully as long as the anterior division, and having the segments 
apparently perfectly smooth; last segment larger than the preceding one, 
and deeply incised behind. Caudal rami rather far apart and somewhat 
produced, being almost twice as long as they are broad; middle apical 
setee rather slender and elongated. Anterior antenne of moderate length 
and densely clothed with slender sete, 8-articulate, terminal part exceed- 
ing half the length of the proximal one, and having the penultimate 
joint imperfectly divided in the middle. Posterior antenne and oral 
parts exhibiting the structure characteristic of the genus. 1st pair of 
legs with the rami very unequal, the outer one extending to about the 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 35 


end of the 1st joint of the inner, its last joint somewhat longer and 
narrower than the other 2, and armed with 3 spines and 2 geniculate 
sete; inner ramus rather slender, with each of the joints carrying inside, 
near the end, a slender curved seta, 1st joint considerably longer than 
the other 2 combined, last joint armed at the tip with a slender claw 
and a curved seta. Natatory legs rather fully developed and resembling 
in structure those in the other species of the genus. Last pair of legs 
with the distal joint very narrow, sub-linear in form and finely ciliated 
on both edges, marginal sete 5 in number and all issuing from the 
outermost part of the joint, one of them very thin, hair-like, innermost 
one the longest; inner expansion of proximal joint broadly triangular 
in form and scarcely extending to the middle of the distal joint, mar- 
ginal sete 5 in number, 2 of them attached to the inner edge. 

Length of adult female 1.05 mm. 

Remarks. — According to the structure of the posterior antenne, 
the oral parts, and the anterior pairs of legs, this form should evidently be 
referred to the genus Parameira, as defined by the present author in 
his account of the Norwegian Harpacticoida. It differs conspicuously 
from the other known species of this genus, however, in the very 
slender form of the body, the greater length of the inner ramus of the 
ist pair of legs, and finally in the shape of the last pair of legs, which 
more resembles that in the~ genus Ameiropsis, G.O.Sars. Also in 
size this form considerably exceeds any known species of the present 
genus. 

Occurrence. — Two female specimens of this form were found 
in a bottle of specimens taken on July 7, 1900, off Sjépélse Ness from a 
depth of 15—25 fathoms. 


120. Mesochra pygmea, Borck. 


This dwarf form occurred occasionally in 2 of the bottles exa- 
mined. 


Fam. Laophontide. 
121. Laophonte depressa, Scott. 


Some few specimens of this species, exactly agreeing with the form 
described by the present author from the Norwegian coast, were found 
in 2 of the bottles. Dr. Tx. Scorr records this species also from Franz 
Josef Land. 


36 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


122. Laophonte applanata, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(Pl. XI). 


Specific Characters, — Female. Body very broad and flat- 
tened, with all the segments, except the last, lamellarly expanded late- 
rally. Cephalic segment large and broad, exhibiting on each side, at © 
about the middle, a distincl notch, edge of the segment finely ciliated; 
rostral projection horizontally produced, and of a rather peculiar appea- 
rance, being spatulate in form and terminating in 2 broadly rounded 
lobes densely clothed with fine hairs. Epimeral parts of the 3 suc- 
ceeding segments rounded off and fringed with a dense row of spinules. 
Last pedigerous segment somewhat less broad than the 3 preceding 
segments. Urosome much shorter than the anterior division, lateral 
expansions of the anterior segments linguiform and slightly recurved, 
being, like those of the anterior division, densely fringed with spinules; 
last segment sub-quadrangular in shape, with the anal opercle smooth. 
Caudal rami somewhat far apart and scarcely twice as long as they are 
broad, both edges minutely spinulose, tip transversely truncated, with 
the inner medial seta rather slender and elongated, outer comparatively 
short. Anterior antenne of moderate length and composed of 7 articu- 
lations, 2nd joint without any projection behind and much shorter than 
the 3rd, 4th joint still shorter, terminal part about the length of the 3rd 
joint. Posterior antenne rather strongly built, with the spines of the 
distal joint very coarse, claw-like, outer ramus uniarticulate, with 4 rather 
thick sete. Oral parts exhibiting the structure characteristic of the 
genus. Posterior maxillipeds large and powerful. st pair of legs like- 
wise greatly developed, with the inner ramus very strong, biarticulate, 
last joint tipped with a powerful claw; outer ramus, as usual, very 
narrow, triarticulate, and extending somewhat beyond the middle of the 
proximal joint of the inner. Natatory legs with the rami ‘slender and 
built upon the type characteristic of the genus. Last pair of legs resem- 
bling in structure those in L. depressa, the distal joint being conside- 
rably produced, and tapering to a conical point carrying a very slender 
hair-like bristle, marginal sete 5 in number, one of them issuing 
from the inner edge near the tip; inner expansion ‘of proximal joint 
very small and narrow, with only 3 sete. Ovisac of moderate size, 
rounded oval in form. 

Male, as usual, smaller than female, and having the anterior an- 
tenn strongly hinged, sub-cheliform. Inner ramus of 3rd pair of legs 
transformed in the usual manner, being distinctly triarticulate, with the 


1898—1902. No. 18] CRUSTACEA. 37 


middle joint produced at the end to a slender sigmoid spine. Last pair 
of legs with the distal joint oblong quadrangular in form, and provided 
with 5 spiniform sete, 3 of them issuing from the end; inner expansion 
of proximal joint still smaller than in female, and tipped with 2 
slender sete. 

Length of adult female 0.80 mm. 

Remarks. — The present form is easily distinguishable from any 
of the other known species of this genus by its broad and flattened 
body and the peculiar form of the rostral projection. In its structural 
details, however, it exhibits a close relationship to L. depressa Scott. 

Occurrence. — Some specimens of this form were found in 4 of 
the bottles examined. 


128. Laophonte horrida, Norman. 


This characteristic form occurred occasionally in 5 of the bottles. 


124. Laophonte macera, G. O. Sars. 
Found in no less than 9 of the bottles. 


125. Laophonte perplexa, Scott. : 


Some few specimens of this form occurred in one of the bottles 
containing specimens taken on July 30, 1900. 


126. Laophonte hyperborea, G. O. Sars, n. sp. 
(PI. XID). 


Specific Characters. — Female. Body rather slender and 
tapering gradually behind, with the segments sharply marked off from 
each other and somewhat raised dorsally. Integuments coarse and 
exhibiting a pitted sculpture. Cephalic segment large and tumid, seen 
dorsally almost quadrangular in form; rostral projection broadly trian- 
gular, with the tip minutely bilobular. Epimeral parts of the 3 suc- 
ceeding segments not expanded laterally. Last pedigerous segment 
slightly produced on each side. Urosome about the length of the an- 
terior division, and having the lateral parts of the anterior segments 
slightly produced at the hind corners. Last segment fully as long as 
the preceding one, but rather narrower, anal opercle smooth. Caudal 
rami considerably produced, exceeding in length the anal segment, and 
tapering gradually distally, tip narrowly truncated, with the inner medial 
seta about as long as the urosome. Anterior antenne comparatively 


38 G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


short, 7-articulate, 2nd joint the largest and without any projection 
behind; terminal part about the length of the 2 preceding joints com- 
bined. Posterior antenne and oral parts of the usual structure. 1st 
pair of legs less robust than in LZ. applanata, outer ramus very small, 
not even attaining half the length of the proximal joint of the inner, 
and composed of only 2 joints, the distal one much the longer; inner 
ramus rather slender, with the apical claw long and only slightly curved. 
Natatory legs of a structure similar to that in L. perplewa Scorr. Last 
pair of legs likewise rather similar, though differing somewhat in the 
shape of the distal joint, which is not, as in the latter species, trun- 
cated at the end, but is obliquely produced. 

Male with the anterior antenne very strongly hinged, the last joint 
of the proximal part being almost globularly dilated. 2nd pair of legs 
scarcely larger than in female, but with one of the sete of the inner 
ramus, as in ZL. brevirostris Ciaus, peculiarly transformed. Inner 
ramus of 3rd pair of legs transformed in quite a normal manner, being 
d-articulate, with the middle joint produced outside to a comparatively 
short spiniform projection, outer ramus, on the other hand, scarcely 
different from that in female. 4th pair of legs with the outer ramus 
somewhat stronger than in female, and having all the spines of the 
outer edge coarsely denticulate. Last pair of legs very small, with the 
inner expansion of proximal joint quite obsolete. 

Length of adult female 0.95 mm. 

Remarks. — This form is closely allied to L. perplexa, Scort, 
but is of considerably larger size, and moreover differs conspicuously 
in the more produced caudal rami, the comparatively shorter anterior 
antenna, and the shape of the distal joint of the last pair of legs. 
Finally, the male exhibits in its sexual characters several well-marked 
differences, as pointed out in the above diagnosis. 

Occurrence. — Several specimens of this form occurred in 2 of 
the bottles examined. 


Fam. Cletodids. 
127. Cletodes similis, Scorv. 


A solitary female specimen of this form was found in a bottle 
containing specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


Fam. Tachidiidz. 
128. Danielssenia typica, Borcx. 


This form occurred occasionally in 3 of the bottles examined. 


1898— 1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 39 


Suborder Cyclopoida. 
Gnathostoma. 
Fam. Oithonide. 


129. Oithona similis, Cuavs. 


From plankton taken on June 29, 1898, in lat. 57° 31’ N., long. 1° 29’ E. 


Fam. Cyclopide. 
130. Cyclops agilis, Kocu. 


Rather abundant in a sample taken on Aug. 22, 1898, from a fresh- 
water pond (the exact locality not indicated). 


131. EZuryte longicauda, Purr. 


Found in 4 of the bottles examined. 


132. Cyclopina gracilis, Cuaus. 


A solitary female specimen of this form occurred in a bottle of 
specimens taken on July 5, 1901, in the Sound at Hell Gate. - 


133. Cyclopina littoralis, Brapy. 


2 females of this form were found in a bottle containing specimens 


taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


Siphonostoma. 


Fam. Asterocheride. 


134. Dermatomyzon nigripes (BRaDy). 


Found occasionally in 3 of the bottles examined. 


Fam. Artotrogide. 
135. Bradypontius magniceps (Bravy). 


An adult female and 2 immature specimens of this form occurred 
in a bottle of specimens taken on Sept. 19, 1900, outside Forvisnings 
Valley, from a depth of 9—920 fathoms. 


40 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP. FRAM 


Suborder Caligoida. 
Fam. Caligidz. 
136. Lepeophtheirus sp. 


Three specimens of a Caligoid in the metanauplius stage, appa- 
rently belonging to a species of the above genus, were found in a 
bottle of specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


Order Ostracoda. 
Suborder Myodocopa. 

Fam. Cypridinide. 
137. Philomedes brenda (BatrD). 


Female specimens of this form occurred not unfrequently in 3 of 
the bottles examined. 


Suborder Cladocopa. 


Fam. Polycopide. 
138. Polycope orbicularis, G. O. Sars. 


A solitary specimen of this peculiar form was found in a bottle 
of specimens taken on July 12, 1900, in the bay at Land’s End. 


Suborder Podocopa. 
Fam. Cytheride. 


139. Cythereis concinna, Brapy. 


Found not unfrequently in 4 of the bottles examined. 


140. Cythereis emarginata, G. O. Sars. 
Together with the preceding species, but less frequent. 


141. Cythereis angulata, G. O. Sars. 


Only 2 specimens found. 


1898-1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. AL 


142. Cytherura atra, G. O. Sars. 


A male specimen, apparently of this species, occurred in a bottle 
of specimens taken on July 18, 1901, at the mouth of Gaase Fjord 
from a depth of about 60 m. 


143. Xestoleberis depressa, G. O. Sars. 


Found not unfrequently in 3 of the bottles examined. 


144. Sclerochilus contortus (Norman). 


Several specimens of this form were found in 4 different bottles. 


145. Cytheropteron subcircinatum, G. O. Sars. 


Only 2 specimens found. 


146. Paradoxostoma variabile (Baird). 


Rather abundant in some of the bottles. 


147. Paradoxostoma obliqvum, G. O. Sars. 


Two specimens of this distinct species, which, in the shape of the 
shell, somewhat resembles a barnacle-larva in the pupa stage, were 
found in a bottle of specimens taken on July 13, 1900, in the bay at 
Land’s End. 


Order Cirripedia. 
Suborder Thoracica. 


Fam. Balanide. 
148. Balanus balanoides, Lin. 


On small stones on the beach, from 2 different places. 


149. Balanus porcatus, Costa. 


Large clusters of this characteristic form were taken up in the 
dredge from moderate depths in many different places. 


150. Verruca Strémi (MULL.). 


On old shells taken on July 26, 1900, off the western shore, at the 
mouth of the Stordal. 


42 G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP. FRAM 


Subclass 
Pycnogonidea. 
Fam. Pallenids. 


151. Pseudopallene circularis (Goopsir), 


A single specimen of this form was taken on July 12, 1900, in the 
bay at Land’s End. 


Fam. Nymphonide. 
152. Nymphon grossipes, Kroyer. 


Two adult and a young specimen of this form were taken on Aug. 
16, 1901, from about 7 fathoms. 


153. Chetonymphon hirtipes (BEtt). 


Two specimens of this common arctic form are in the collection, 
the one from Gaase Fjord, the other from Ren Bay, Ellesmere Land. 


Fam. Aurycydide. 
154. Hurycyde hispida (Kroyer). 
One specimen taken on Aug. 7, 1900, at Ostkap. 


1898— 1902, No. 18.| CRUSTACEA. 43 


Explanation of the Plates. 


PLL 
Stephos arcticus, G. O. Sars. 


Fig. 1. Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 80 diameters. 

» 2 A male specimen, viewed from left side; same amplification. 
» 38 Posterior antenna. 

» 4& Masticatory part of mandible. 

» 9 Mandibular palp. 

» 6. Anterior maxilliped. 

» 7. Posterior maxilliped. 

» 8. Leg of 1st pair. 

» 9 Leg of Qnd pair. 


» 10. Leg of 8rd pair. 

» 11. Leg of last pair in female. 

» 12. Last pair of legs in male, viewed from the posterior face. 

» 13. Terminal joint of left leg of same, more highly magnified and 
viewed from the outer side. 


Pi. I, 


Zaus Aurelii, Porre. 


1. Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view, magnified 104 diameters. 
2. Rostral plate, with right anterior antenna. 
3. Posterior maxilliped. 
» 4 Leg of ist pair. 
5. Leg of 3rd pair. 
6. Leg of last pair. 


Psamathe Arthuri (Poppe). 


Fig. 7. Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 68 diameters. 
» 8. Anterior antenna. 

» 9 Mandible with palp. 

» 10. Leg of ist pair. 

» 11. Leg of last pair. . 


44 


G. O. SARS. [SEC. ARC, EXP. FRAM 


12. 


CHONAPKNEwwr 


_ 
2 DSS Or me Se bo 


Pl. I. 
Idyea inflata, G. O. Sars. 


Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view, magnified 104 diameters. 
Anterior antenna. 

Posterior antenna. 

Mandible with palp. 

Maxilla. 

Anterior maxilliped. 

Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of 2nd pair. 

Leg of 4th pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

Left caudal ramus with adjoining part of urosome, exhibiting 
the peculiar structure of the caudal sete. 

Anterior antenna of male. 

Leg of last pair in same. 

Genital lobe of same. 


PL. IV. 
Phyllothalestris frigida (Scott). 


Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 86 diameters. 
Same viewed from left side. 

Anterior antenna. 

Posterior antenna. 

Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of 1st pair in male. 

Inner ramus of 2nd pair of legs in same. 

Leg of last pair in female. 

Same leg in male. 


Pl. V. 
Dactylopusia glacialis, G. O. Sars. 


Adult female. dorsal view, magnified 104 diameters. 
Rostral projection. 
Anterior antenna. 
Posterior antenna. 
Mandible with palp. 
Maxilla. 

Anterior maxilliped. 
Posterior maxilliped. 
Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

Left caudal ramus. 

Leg of 2nd pair in male. 
Leg of last pair in male. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] 


CRUSTACEA. 45 


Fig. 1. 
got Bi 
ys 
yn 4 
yO 
» 6 
ane 
a 8 
a: De 
» 10. 
eo I, 

Fig. 1. 
» 2 
» 3. 
” 4. 
” 5. 
” 6. 
” 7. 
5 8: 
» 9 
» 10. 
ye Thi 
, 12. 

Fig. 1. 
» 2 
» 3. 
» 4 

Fig. 5. 
” 6. 
ds 
9 8: 
si. 9 
» 10. 

Fig. 11. 
a AD 
» 13. 
a 14 

15. 


Pl. VI. 


Idomene coronata (Scott). 


Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view. magnified 104 diameters. 
Rostral plate with left anterior antenna. 
Posterior antenna. 

Mandible with palp. 

Maxilla. 

Anterior maxilliped. 

Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of ist pair. 

Leg of 2nd pair. 

Leg of 4th pair. 

Leg of last pair. 


Pl. VII. 


Amphiascus latifolius, G. O. Sars. 


Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view, magnified 124 diameters. 
Rostrum with left anterior antenna. 

Posterior antenna. 

Mandible with palp. 

Maxilla. 

Anterior maxilliped. 

Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of ist pair. 

Leg of 3rd pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

Left caudal ramus, with adjoining part of urosome. 
Inner ramus of 2nd pair of legs in male. 


Pl. VI. 


Amphiascus congener, G. O. Sars. 


Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 124 diameters. 
Rostrum with right anterior antenna. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of last pair. 


Amphiascus polaris, G. O. Sars. 


Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view, magnified 124 diameters. 
Rostrum with left anterior antenna. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

Inner ramus of 2nd pair of legs in male. 

Leg of last pair of same. 


Amphiascus brevis, G. 0. Sars. 


Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view, magnified 124 diameters. 
Rostrum. 

Anterior antenna. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of last pair. 


46 


G. 0. SARS. [SEC. ARC. EXP, FRAM 


Fig. 


Pl. IX. 


Canthocamptus Nordenskjéldi, Li.ses. 


PHONON wP re 


CONT wrNp 


Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 104 diameters. 


Anterior antenna. 
Posterior antenna. 
Mandible with palp. 
Maxilla. 

Anterior maxilliped. 
Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of 2nd pair. 

Leg of 3rd pair. 

Leg of 4th pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

Left caudal ramus. 

Inner ramus of 3rd pair of legs in mule. 
Leg of last pair of same. 


Pl. X. 


Parameira elongata, G. O. Sars. 


Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 104 diameters. 


Anterior antenna. 
Posterior antenna. 
Mandible with palp. 
Maxilla. 

Anterior maxilliped. 
Posterior maxilliped. 
Leg of 1st pair. 
Leg of 2nd pair. 
Leg of 8rd pair. 
Leg of 4th pair. 
Leg of last pair. 


Left caudal ramus with adjoining part of the anal segment. 


Pl. XI. 
Laophonte applanata, G. O. Sars. 


Adult ovigerous female, dorsal view, magnified 124 diameters. 


Rostral projection with right anterior antenna. 
Posterior antenna. 

Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of 2nd pair. 

Inner ramus of a leg of 8rd pair. 

Inner ramus of a leg of 4th pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

Left caudal ramus. 

Inner ramus of a leg of 3rd pair in male. 
Leg of last pair in same. 


1898—1902. No. 18.] CRUSTACEA. 47 


Pl. XII. 
Laophonte hyperborea, G. O. Sars. 


Adult female, dorsal view, magnified 124 diameters. 
Same viewed from left side. 

Rostral projection with left anterior antenna. 
Posterior antenna. 

Posterior maxilliped. 

Leg of 1st pair. 

Leg of 2nd pair. 

Leg of last pair. 

8 Inner ramus of a leg of 2nd pair in male. 

» 10. Male, inner ramus of a leg of 3rd pair. 

» 11. Same, leg of 4th pair. 

» 12. Same, leg of last pair. 


3 
WOMAN WLS > 


Printed 1st June, 1909. 


ellie 


Rep. of the2°° Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N°18. 


brad 


4! eee Ve 


: : AiG 
Stephos arcticus, G.0.Sars. Norsk Lithgr0 ficin 


G.0.Sars,autogr 


PLIL. 
Rep.of the2°2 Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N216. 


| a ued — = 


a 


G.0.Sars,autogr: 1-6 Zaus Aurelit, Poppe Norsk Lithgr: Officin 
7-11 Psamathe Arthuri, (Poppe) 


cao 


PLE 


Se Sr ee 
—— SS 
: Yk 2 
, : AWY: 
Z 
a ONY \\ Be 
\ toi 
. Co Be NX Sok 
LL 
MO? —J \ 
es OE 
2 Sa Ze ee 
“7 i Le o ss 
Sr” GPE 


Rep.of the2 °° Norweg.Arct. Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N 


i ee 
Z 
SL fib fe 


PKA Ae 
Ye 3s 
A\\ \ 
: Ws 
ge iJ 


Idyeea inflata, G.0.Sars. 


\ 


Norsk Lithgr Officin 


G.0.Sars,autogr 


PLIV. 
Rep.of the2 2% Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N°18. 


a A a in 
ba ‘< 7 : | \/ ay x } 
i AT? AS ‘ f as \y tg 7, 


Norsk Lithgr Officin 


: 8.0Sars.aulogr Phyllothalestris frigida(Scott) 


PLY. 
xped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N°18. 


A a 


RS 


S 3 ‘i ae 
: SOX, Ss MANO Y a ee 
Sey TS = tT * ge 
‘ote aCe een < = A ‘ 
—= = K a a ‘ 
Ba = oh Nee ; 
= = : S = x 4 
#. a c Sif) 
= SS —S L 
> =— ee 4 


T vA é es . i . ffi f 
80Sars.autogr — Dactylopusia glacialis,6.0.Sars. Hones ENE 


PLYE 


Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N?18. 


nd 


Norsk Lithgr: Officin 


Idomene coronata (Scott) 


Rep.of the 2 


6.0.Sars,autogr 


of the2% i 
Repo e2 Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 or 


— 


Norsk Lithgr Officin 


T 


6.0.Sars,autogr : : : 
Amphiascus latifelius, G.O.Sars. 


PLVI 


ibs Norweg. Aret.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N°18. 


[aN 

® 

= - See We “yobs 2 255 
: ia aes es me ee 

uu Se — Z —— ===t she 

be: x a — — AQ GA REN fe4, ; 

a =a RA SSSER 

o ve ; is -_ 


congener, G.0.Sars .Norsk Tithge Officin 


-4, Amphiascus 


5-10 


: 6.0.Sars,autogr: | 


G.OSars. 
_6.05ars 


polaris , 
brevis 


PL.IX. 


~1902 N 


18; 


uu 
om 


Norweg.Arct. Exped.in the Fram 1898 


Rep.ot thez “ 


6.0. ‘ : eeepoie yp BaAae Norsk Lithan Officin 
OSars,autogr Canthocamptus Nordenskjdldi Lilljeb. ee | 


PX. 


Norsk Lithgr Officin 


I 


Rep.of the2 °? Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N°18. 


ye 
~ G0. j 
Sars,autogr Parameira. elongata, G.0.Sars. 


Pix 


G.0.Sars,autogr ei a 
utogr Laophonte applanata,G.0.Sars. Norsk Lithgr Officin 


PLT 


Laophonte hyperborea COSars. 9 thr Officin’ 


G.0.Sars,autogr 


Rep.of the2 “* Norweg.Arct.Exped.in the Fram 1898-1902 N218. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 19. 


H. G. SIMMONS: 


STRAY CONTRIBUTIONS 


TO THE 


BOTANY OF NORTH DEVON 


AND SOME OTHER ISLANDS, VISITED IN 1900—1902 


WITH ONE MAP IN THE TEXT 


AND AN 


ALPHABETICAL INDEX 


TO No.2, FLORA OF ELLESMERELAND, No. 16, PLANTS OF N. W. GREENLAND, 
AND THIS PAPER 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABETIKRISTIANIA 
(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W.BROGGER 
1909 


As the Expedition’s principal field of work lay in Ellesmereland, 
and as only in a few instances had I any opportunity of visiting other 
parts of the Arctic American Archipelago, the contributions to the botani- 
cal exploration of that region which I have been able to make have, for 
the most part, reference to the Ellesmereland flora and vegetation. The 
former is treated in my FI. Ellesm., about the latter I hope soon to get 
an opportunity of publishing a paper. From our three quarters, in the 
south coast, however, some expeditions were made which brought home 
some small materials of plants and observations from the south-west and 
west also. For my own part, I visited in 1900 and 1902 a few points on 
the coast of N. Devon; in 1901 and 1902 different points in the island 
of N. Kent; and in 1902 the two small islets Castle Island and Devils 
Isle off the coast of N. Devon. As these short visits were made in the 
favorable season, I think I can give a tolerably adequate idea of the 
botanical features of these places. Still worse is the case with the con- 
tributions to the botany of some other places where I have not myself 
been and which were only visited in the spring sledging expeditions by 
other members of the expedition. Mr. Scuer especially has thus contri- 
buted to the botanical exploration; his collections and notes were made 
on Graham Island, in Heiberg Land, and in N. Devon. 

The places where collections are made are shown in the sketch-map 
on the next page where they are marked by their names or by numbers 
corresponding with those in the text. 


2 H. G. SIMMONS. (SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 
110° 105° (00 95 30° 
Hl 
; a8 
80) 
‘ 4, 
ES 
a 
= Bl 
Qa u 
79 = Ces Islan 
z 2 
o 
z ag 
: 780) 
if rT) 
w 
oe Ce eo 3 Q 
eos Lowy 2 
B i Ca 
78 g ae q 
za ly 4 
ae 2 ¢B 
fue = i) ¢ = ia 'G/ oP 79 
= ~; 
ie 7 
oO 
7 
77] Wig Ww 
78 
>g 
uu 
| 
\ a 
76) WW 
77] 
; a B78, Wess Bond ® Vera UY 
v ) oat Can 
5 CORNWALLIS E 
LAND 
I. NORTH DEVON 
95 


90 a5 


1898-1902. No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 5 


I. North Devon. 


Certain parts of the large island of North Devon were visited during 
the Franxuin Search expeditions and some plants brought home by 
members of them. These collections, however, are made quite casually 
by officers not specially entrusted with botanical work, and in most cases 
only a few specimens have been brought home from each place. The 
only station for which perhaps a somewhat more comprehensive list 
might be compiled from the specimens in the London collections, is 
Beechey Island—the first winter-quarter of the ill-fated Frankuin Expe- 
dition and afterwards the rendez-vous for the different parties engaged 
in the search for the missing expedition. Further, some collections were 
made at other points of the same neighbourhood, and along the shore 
of the Wellington Channel Dr. M’Cormick and others observed or col- 
lected a few plants. The north coast, however, was in great part not 
even mapped out in 1900, and, when we first visited it, not a single note 
about its flora existed. 

The contributions to the botany of N. Devon were brought home 
from the following points: — 


1. Boat Cape lat. 75° 58’ long. 90° 25° 
2. Point in Viks Fjord 75° 52° 90° 45/ 
3. Bottom of Viks Fjord 75° 57 91° 40° 
4, Lownessin WestFjord 76° 8° 90° 10’ 
5. Cape Vera 76° 13° 89° 25‘ 
6. Near large glacier 76° 17’ 89° 40° 
7. Mount Belcher 76° 29° 90° 54‘ 
1. Boat Cape. 


This locality was visited by a party on July 26, 1901, and Mr. ScHEI 
noted here Dryas integrifolia in flower and plenty of Salix arctica. 
He also brought home a little collection which contained: Papaver 


6 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


radicatum (3841), Alsine verna (3837), Festuca ovina (3839), Poa ab- 
breviata (3840), Catabrosa algida (3838), and two mosses (3842): Camp- 
tothecitum nitens and Brachythecium salebrosum (cf. Bryan!, Bryo- 
phyta, p. 245). 


2. Point in Viks Fjord. 
The place was visited by the same party on July 27, 1901, and 
Mr. Scuei here noted Saxifraga nivalis, S. Hirculus, Polygonum vivi- 


parum, Dryas integrifolia, Cassiope tetragona, and some grasses. 
Vegetation scarce. 


3. Bottom of Viks Fjord. 


Visited by the same party, July 29, 1901. Mr. Scuer noted about 
the vegetation here that it was very scanty. Around some lakelets in 
the low land there was a vegetation of grasses (Carices or Eriophora ?) 
and on the dry ledges a few flowering dicotyledoneous plants, the species 
of which were, however, not noted. Mr. Scuer found the cause of this 
poverty in the geological nature of the soil which is formed only of the 
débris of the same heavy, brownish limestone which in Ellesmereland 
also formed the poorest of all soils. At the last mentioned locality this 
limestone was interlaid with argillaceous slate and marlslate and there- 
fore had made possible the development of a somewhat richer vegetation. 


4. Low ness in the outer part of West Fjord. 


After leaving our winter-quarters in Harbour Fjord we anchored at 
this place, August 11, 1900. Our stay was, however, too short to allow 
me time for more than a very brief trip over the nearest part of the 
low ness, which was formed solely of limestone of the same poor quality 
as that which generally builds up both those parts of N. Devon and the 
outher parts of the Ellesmereland coast opposite. As usual, this soil of 
the limestone ledges and débris of the same material proved utterly. poor, 
and I could not manage to visit the cliffs at the point where the rooke- 
ries of gulls and guillemots doubtless formed a somewhat richer field. 

The area I traversed certainly, even had there been better time for 
its inspection, would have yielded little more than is shown by the 


1 N. Bryan, Bryophyta in itinere polari norvagorum secundo collecta. Rep. sec. 
norw. arct. exp., I, No. 11, Kristiania 1906, (quoted: “Bryxn, Bryophyta”). 


1898—1902. No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N. DEVON, 7 


scanty list which follows below. The densest vegetation was found along 
some small brooks and around some shallow ponds near the shore where, 
however, mosses decidedly formed the most prominent constituent of the 
verdure. The flowering plants obtained were:— Sawifraga cernua (2629), 
S. groenlandica (2632), S. nivalis, S. oppositifolia, Potentilla pulchella, 
Dryas integrifolia, Draba alpina (2630), D. subcapitata (2627), Coch- 
learia officinalis var. groenlandica (2628), Papaver radicatum (2626), 
Cerastium alpinum, Stellaria longipes, Alsine verna (2623), A. Rossii 
(2631), Salix arctica, Glyceria Vahliana (2657), G. distans var. vagi- 
nata (2625), Catabrosa algida (2624), Juncus biglumis. Mr. Scuer 
found besides Saaxifraga stellaris var. comosa and S. rivularis. No 
Carices or Eriophora wore found in the ponds. 

The list of mosses (BryHN, Bryophyta, p. 204—205) contains 33 spe- 
cies. The most prominent among them were Tortula ruralis and the large 
Hypna, such as H. uncinatum, H. turgescens, H. Bambergeri. The 
lichens and algae are not yet determined, but I may mention that blue- 
green algae were found in great masses in the ponds and also form- 
ing layers on moist stones and clay. Along the margin of one of the 
ponds lay, on a long stretch, a layer of organic remains, principally 
blue-green algae and diatoms, in a halfdried condition and from 10 to 
15 cm. thick. In one of the rivulets I also found, growing on stones 
and lying loose, an Enteromorpha which I have previously found in 
several places in Ellesmereland. It belongs, as far as I have as yet 
had any opportunity of ascertaining, to an undescribed species. 


5. Cape Vera. 


This place was first visited by Mr. Scuet, July 22, 1901 and after- 
wards by myself, July 14—15, 1902. Cape Vera forms the end of a 
long, pointed naze between the West Fjord and the narrow western part 
of Jones Sound. Even as we steamed past it in August, 1900, I had 
observed a rather dense verdure in some parts of the low foreland in 
front of the high wall of limestone cliffs which forms the interior of the 
ness. This mountain, the Fulmar Petrel Cliff, reaches a height of per- 
haps 1500 feet and descends in a rather abrupt wall towards the 
low land, intersected by numerous narrow ravines and flanked by high 
pyramids and obelisks of limestone. On the top of the cliffs there is a 
fairly wide névé, feeding a good-sized glacier which flows down some- 
what further west on the north side. The cliffs are built up of the 
same hard limestone as those to the east, and would consequently be 


8 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


rather poor in plant life were it not that their ledges are apt to be used 
as a rookery where millions of fulmar petrels breed. Thus the slopes 
below become abundantly manured, and both the slopes of limestone 
débris and the inner parts of the foreland are covered with a dense ver- 
dure formed, for the greater parl, of mosses but also of flowering plants. 
On the southern side the foreland consists mostly of limestone débris, 
on the northern, to a considerable extent of clay also. Here the vege- 
tation is, as usually in the clay-plains, rather open, and consists chiefly 
of flowering plants. In the foreland there are also some shallow ponds, 
encircled by the usual rim of mosses with a few higher plants strewn in. 


On the surface of the snowdrifts lying in the ravines, and in the 
upper part of the slopes, “red snow” appeared in greater abundance than 
I have seen anywhere else; and in the rivulets, on inundated ground 
and in the ponds many algae, especieally blue-green ones, were growing 
Dr. Bryun has given an account of the mosses (Bryophyta, pp. 245, 
249—9251), and it may therefore be enough to point out that he has found 
not less than 50 species in my collection from this locality. 


The flowering plants noted or collected at Cape Vera are:— Dryas 
integrifolia, Saxifraga oppositifolia (3843), S. flagellaris, S. nivalis 
3830), S. cernua, S. groenlandica (3846), Draba alpina (8836, 3841), 
D. alpina var. glacialis (3826), D. subcapitata (3829), Cochlearia offi- 
cinalis var. groenlandica (3841), Papaver radicatum with f. Hartia- 
num (3828), Ranunculus sulphureus, Cerastium alpinum (3824), Stel- 
laria longipes (8850), Alsina verna (3837), Oxyria digyna, Salix arc- 
tica, Juncus biglumis, Festuca ovina var. supina (3839), Poa abbre- 
viata (3840), P. cenisia (and f. prolifera), Glyceria distans (4016). 
Catabrosa algida (3838), Alopecurus alpinus (3825). I may, of course, 
have overlooked some species or other, but I was especially struck by 
the absence of such common plants as f. inst. Pedicularis hirsuta, and 
I also sought in vain for Eriophora and Carices. 


6. East of the large glacier west of Cape Hawes. 


During our stay here, July 17, 1902, I was chiefly occupied in dred- 
ging, but I could easily see that this place would not yield in any case 
more than a few of the most common species such as Sawifraga op- 
positifolia, Papaver radicatum, Draba alpina, Cerastium alpinum, 
etc., which were growing in an open clay-field below the cliffs. 


1898 -1902. No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N. DEVON. 9 


7. Mount Belcher. 


I use this name for the mountain opposite Devil’s Isle, were a cairn 
was found with a record from the English Franxiw Search expedition 
under BELCHER, as a sign how far east his parties had proceeded. We 
visited the place, July 25, 1902, in our boat expedition, and I went over 
the low land below the mountain and along a small river some way 
inland. It was very poor ground, clay and gravel plains with scanty 
vegetation. The following plants were noted:— Dryas integrifolia, 
Saxifraga oppositifolia, S. flagellaris, S. cernua, S. groenlandica, 
Draba alpina, D. subcapitata, Papaver radicatum, Cerastium alp- 
inum, Stellaria longipes, Alsine verna, A. Rossii, Salix arctica, 
Juncus biglumis, Glyceria distans, Catabrosa algida, Alopecurus 
alpinus. 


With this I have to finish my notes about the flora of Nort Devon. 
Even were some one or other of the species found in the south-western 
parts by the earlier visitors to be added, the whole list would not amount 
to more than about 30 plants. This, of course, cannot represent the real 
bulk of the flora, but must only be regarded as the result of some short 
trips, made chiefly in places which are not apt to give rise to a thriving 
vegetation. Further west towards Arthur Fjord there are, as Captain 
Baumann told me when returning from a trip in August 1900, wide 
stretches of bogs and grass-grown plains; and, in all probability, the east- 
ern parts of the island will, some time, turn out to be still richer, as 
they are built up of primary rocks, and will doubtless present a greater 
likeness to South-Eastern Ellesmereland with its richer flora. It would 
be of great interest to get some knowledge of this region, as it forms 
the natural way of migration from Baffin’s Land northward over primary 
rock uninterrupted by less favorable soil. From this point of view, it is 
also very much to be regretted that the leader of the expedition did not 
allow any time for an exploration of Coburg Island, which in other re- 
spects also would have been of considerable interest. It is to be hoped 
that these fairly accessible regions will be examined in a not too distant 
future. 


10 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


II. Castle Island and Devil’s Isle. 
1. Castle Island. 


For the little island lying off Cape Vera in about lat. 76°10’ and 
long. 89° 20’ I use this name which, after conferring with Captain 
Sverprup, I had already used in my Prel. Rep.1 instead of the name 
“St. Helena” which we had jestingly given it, without any thought of 
retaining it later. The name used above is rather appropriate on account 
of the ruin-like forms which the withered limestone cliffs of the islet 
have assumed. 

The island was first visited by a party in 1901, and Mr. Scuer 
made some collections and notes there, July 21. In 1902 I myself had 
an opportunity of visiting it; and as we were obliged to stay there from 
July 9 to 14, I had leisure for a very thorough examination of its flora. 

Castle Island is entirely built up of Silurian limestone of the same 
hard, siliciferous kind as that which forms the adjacent part of N. Devon 
and also the outer coast of S. W. Ellesmereland. The highest part of 
the island rises about 200 feet, sloping to the east, and surrounded by 
low cliffs, some of very curious shapes, sbowing that the lower parts of 
the island have emerged rather recently from the sea. Terraces of 
limestone débris, also formed below the sea-level, surround some parts 
of the rocks; in some places there is a talus of débris fallen down from 
the highest part; and lastly there are some small patches of clay. Now 
this is indeed a very poor soil, and would allow the existence of only 
a very few plants had not numerous birds chosen the little islet for 
their breeding place. On several of the higher rocks were nests of the 
large gulls, Larus glaucus and L. argentatus, the black guillemot nested 
everywhere in the cracks of the rocks, there was a colony of terns in 
the low gravel plain, and lastly numerous eiderducks bred everywhere 
around the base of the cliffs. The reason why so many birds seek 
refuge here is, as may easily be discovered, that the strong current of 


1 An explanation of the abridged titles is to be found in my Ellesmereland Flora. 


1898—1902. No.19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANYOFN.DEVON. 11 


western Jones Sound always keeps the ice in motion around the island, 
and thus produces open water early in the summer, so as to keep away 
the fox from the island during de breeding-season. This bird life has, 
of course, considerably enriched the meagre soil of the island; still the 
central ridge and its talus are almost void of vegetation, except for some 
lichens and small patches of moss, or some scanty tufts of grass, etc. 
around the gulls’ nests. The terraces of limestone gravel also are very 
poor. Indeed, most of the pebbles are covered with lichens, among 
which Xantoria elegans as usual catches the eye; but only at wide 
intervals is to be found a little tuft of moss or a small individual of 
a flowering plant. 

The mosses, which form the most prominent part of the vegetation, 
apart from the not yet determined lichens, are mostly found near the 
base of the cliff where some water trickles down, and in some moist 
depressions or patches of clay. The flowering plants, which are very 
few both in number of species and of individuals, grow mostly among 
moss. The following flowering plants were found: — Sawifraga cernua 
(the most common species), S. oppositifolia (surprisingly scarce), 
S. groenlandica, Draba hirta (4017), D. subcapitata (4017), Cochlearia 
officinalis var. groenlandica, Papaver radicatum, Cerastium alpinum, 
Glyceria distans var. vaginata (4017), Catabrosa algida (4017, chiefly 
around the gulls’ nests), Alopecurus alpinus. 

The moss collection I brought home contained 31 species (BrYHN, 
Bryophyta, p. 254—255) of which 9 are not present in the collection 
from Cape Vera, but of these, two were found again on Devil’s Isle. 


9. Devil’s Isle. 


This little rock, lying off the coast of North Devon north of the 
entrance to Norfolk Inlet in lat. 76° 29’, long. 90° 40’, was only visited 
during our last boat journey; but as we lay ice-bound there from July 
19 to 30, 1902, with the exception of two days, when we were able 
to take a trip over to the vicinity of Mount Belcher (see above, p. 9), 
I had more than sufficient time for a very accurate examination of its 
vegetation. The whole island is small enough to be walked round in 
half an hour. It has the shape of an obliquely cut cone, about 200 feet 
high. The highest point lies at the eastern end and is accessible only 
from the west where there is a gentle slope; all the other sides are 
almost vertical, but there is a narrow strip of ground running round 
helow the steep wall. The material of the rock here also is limestone, 


12 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


but of a somewhat less hard kind than in Castle Island, with less sili- 
cate and more clay. 

However it would form still a very poor soil were it not inhabited 
by rather many birds. There are more gulls than in Castle Island, 
quite a colony of terns and also some eider-ducks. Some of the gulls’ 
nests are very old, forming small hillocks, built up of a mixture of 
pebbles, bones of different animals, feathers, moss, dung of the birds ete. 
Some of them are clothed with a dense vegetation of Cochlearia, 
Catabrosa, Glyceria distans, and somewhere also Sawxifraga groen- 
landica. In the lower parts of the island the rock is covered with a 
layer of pebbles, or here and there with clay. The débris, and partly 
also the rocks, are more or less covered with lichens in places where 
water trickles down from some small snowdrifts with green and blue- 
green algae also, as for instance Phormidium sp. At the western end 
there was a large snowdrift stretching inland from the ice foot, and as 
a little rivulet that carried organic material from the breeding-places 
flowed over it, there was developed a vegetation of different algae on 
the snow, which appeared partly red, partly green. I have not yet had 
time to examine the algae collected here. 

The number of species contained in the collection of mosses which 
I brought together from the rocks, from among the pebbles, and espe- 
cially from the moist depressions and irrigated places as well as from 
the gulls’ rookery, reaches 35 (Bryan, Bryophyta, p. 251—253). Of 
these, 3 are found neither in Castle Island nor at Cape Vera; 2 in the 
former locality but not in the latter. The list of flowering plants 
embraces the following species: — Sawxifraga oppositifolia (somewhat 
more abundant than in Castle Island), S. cernua, S. groenlandica with 
f. flavescens (4010), Draba subcapitata, Cochlearia officinalis var. 
groenlandica (the most abundant species), Papaver radicatum (chiefly 
near the top), Glyceria distans var. vaginata (4011), G. angustata 
(4012), Catabrosa algida (4009), Alopecurus alpinus. 


I think that the vegetation of the two small islands, Devil’s Isle 
and Castle Island, may prove to be of a certain interest. They show 
a great recemblance one to the other, both being built up of the same 
material, which also forms the adjacent coast of North Devon, and which 
is little fitted for the development of vegetation; both of them, for the 
greater part, have risen above the surface of the sea at a rather late 
period; both are inhabited by numerous birds, as they are separated 


1898-1902. No.19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OFN.DEVON. 13 


from the mainland by a strait in which the strong current keeps the water 
open most of the year, or at least before the beginning of the breeding- 
season. The distance from the mainland of North Devon to Castle 
Island is somewhat less than two miles, to Devil’s Island less than one 
mile. Such short distances can, of course, be easily surmounted by 
plant-migration, if, for the transporting of plant species, we should 
attribute any greater importance to those means of conveyance which 
are generally reckoned with for the stocking of islands, viz., wind, birds 
and currents (including floating ice). 

We shall now see what inferences may be drawn from a comparison 
of the plant life of these islands with that of some neighbouring points 
of the larger islands. Firstly it is to be observed that the number of 
flowering plants is nearly the same in both islands, viz., 11 on Castle 
Island and 10 on Devil’s Isle. Two are found in the former alone 
(Draba hirta, Cerastium alpinum), one in the latter alone (Glyceria 
angustata), nine are common. If now the vegetation of the nearest 
points in North Devon is drawn into comparison, we will see that all 
these species are found there except Glyceria angustata, which may 
easily have been overlooked. The flora of Mount Belcher, as far as 
known, reckons 17 species, that of Cape Vera 24, and that of the dry 
limestone ness to the south-west 21. The nearest points in Ellesmere- 
land — Gull Cove and Falcon Cliff — which have the same geological 
nature, affording similar conditions of life as being breeding-places for 
gulls and other birds, show at least 30 and 40 to 50 species respectively . 
The list of higher plants found in North Kent reaches 33. 

Thus it appears that the two islands which are isolated by open 
water, show a considerably poorer flora than that of the mainland 
localities under similar conditions, notwithstanding the short distance 

that separates them from the nearest land (the distance over to Gull 
Cove also is small enough, about 11 miles). The relation of the flora 
of either of these islands to that of Falcon Cliff will be about 1:4 or 
5, to that of Gull Cove 1:3, to that of Cape Vera 2:5 or, more 
probably, about 1:3, as without doubt several species have been over- 
_looked during the short visit to Cape Vera; whereas the flora of the islands 
must be looked upon as thoroughly known, at least as far as flowering 
plants are concerned. If we take the mosses for comparison we will 
get similar figures. Of course it may have happened that I did not get 
some species or other in my collections, notwithstanding that I carefully 
tried to make my moss collections as complete as possible; but I think 
we may look upon the numbers 31 for Castle Island and 385 for Devil’s 


14 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Isle a very nearly representing the true flora. Now we find for Cape 
Vera 50 species, which to probably not a few might be added by a 
closer survey than that which I could make during my short visit. For 
Gull Cove the number is 34 and for Falcon Cliff 62, both perhaps some- 
what too small. From North Kent I have brought home 50 species of 
mosses. 

Now the question is to be approached: how have the plants of the 
two small islands reached thither over the open strait? It is especially 
to be noted that there are none of them that have fruits or seeds adapted 
for spreading by means of wind, if we except the grasses. Even Dryas 
integrifolia, which is so commonly distributed along both coasts of 
Jones Sound (also at Cape Vera) and which has so well-developed a 
flying apparatus, is absent from both islands. This does not speak in 
favour of attributing too great influence to the wind in transporting seeds. 
The grasses, indeed, especially Alopecurus alpinus, might have come 
over by aid of the wind, but they may also have used another mode 
of conveyance. Most of the plants have small, light seeds (Sawifraga 
oppositifolia and S. groenlandica, Papaver, the Drabae, Cochlearia, 
Cerastium) and may, perhaps, be transported by the wind, but for 
Saxifraga cernua this mode of conveyance becomes less acceptable, 
as generally it does not fruit but is vegetatively propagated. The 
bulbillae of this plant cannot be transported through the air. It appears 
at the first glance that the flowering plants of the islands are nearly 
all such as commonly grow around the gulls’ nests in the rookeries of 
the mainland. 

The spores of mosses are, of course, easily transported by wind 
over even far greater distances than those here in question, and thus 
we might easily find an explanation of the migration of those plants to 
the islands, if all mosses were commonly found in fruit in the adjacent 
lands. But now the case in fact is, that most mosses in arctic lands 
are always, or nearly always, found sterile. Bryn, Bryophyta, p. 1, 
also mentions that relatively few mosses fruit in Ellesmereland and 
elsewhere in our field, the acrocarpic musci foliosi principally; whereas 
capsules are found only exceptionally in the pleurocarpic species. Out 
of the 45 species found in one or both of the two islands, 23 are such 
as are specially mentioned by Brynn as found fruiting in my collec- 
tions from Ellesmereland or other adjacent regions, and concerning 4 
more, he-gives no special notice as to fruiting or sterile state, but as 
they belong to the acrocarpic species, in part to such as are generally 
found fruiting, we may perhaps reckon 27. Among those explicitly 


1898-1902. No. 19.) STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 15 


mentioned as sterile in all my collections are 7 acrocarp ones, which 
perhaps fruit somewhere in the neighbourhood. At all events, the per- 
centage of species that are found fruiting in the collections as a whole, 
is unsually large among the mosses from the islands, which decidedly 
speaks in favour of the supposition that only spores can be carried so 
far by wind, not fragments of moss plants. 

There are, however, also 11 species of pleurocarpic mosses found 
in the islands, which are entirely sterile throughout my collections and 
which are generally found so in the Arctic Regions. If we would find 
the means of migration which these have used for reaching the small 
islands, I think we must look to the birds. Even if we leave out the 
snow-bunting, which probably breeds on Castle Island, and certainly 
pays visits to both, as well as the ptarmigans which may casually fly 
over the strait, we have the gulls left which fly backwards and forwards 
between their rookeries and the mainland, especially to some lakes near 
Mount Belcher, the only locality where we found trout. Now I do not 
think that the birds often carry seeds or other parts of plants with them 
casually, even though it cannot be denied that they might do so, but | 
cannot but think, that they have at some time, when the islands were 
smaller than they are now and consisted of more isolated, bare rocks, 
carried nestbuilding material thither from the mainland. And _ that 
material, most probably, consisted of mosses, especially of the larger 
kinds, that is to say the pleurocarpic ones, for instance the Hypna. 
But among the moss, might easily be carried seeds and fragments of 
such plants as are generally found growing among moss, viz. the species 
really growing here. Thus I think the islands got their first flora, some 
of the mosses and the flowering plants. Afterwards, when these first 
immigrants had spreed in the island, the gulls had no further occasion 
for procuring the material for their nests (which, moreover, are used 
year after year) from afar, and now immigration by means of 
the wind only could take place. But the wind carries only very small 
bodies such as spores, and therefore the flora, which is still in the act 
of receiving new species of fruiting mosses, has become comparatively 
richer in such species than in other plants; and the percentage of mosses 
in the flora as a whole, is larger here than in that of the adjacent points 
in the mainland which in other respects offer the same conditions of life. 

Of course the immigration of these plants which have used the wind 
as a means of conveyance, fruiting mosses, freshwater algae, and lichens, 
also dates from far back, the last-mentioned having probably been the 
very first colonists. One mode of conveyance I have entirely left out 


16 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


of this discussion, viz., marine currents and floating ice. The cause for 
excluding this as a factor in the stocking of the islands here in question, 
les partly in the existence of a high ice-foot round most parts of their 
shores. Castle Island was entirely encircled by an icefoot which appeared 
never to disappear, and, even had some part of the ice-foot along the 
shore of Devil’s Isle been washed away at the time of our visit, I 
think that no single species has reached thither with the help of the 
water. The influence of marine currents in the dispersal of plants has 
certainly been often much over-valued, and I can only agree with Ernst! 
who writes: ,[t has long been known that only a comparatively small 
proportion of plants are capable of extending the area of their distri- 
bution by this means. A comparison of island floras has shown that it 
is exclusively strand plants. .... which have seeds and fruits posses- 
sing the necessary adaptations for this method of dispersal by ocean- 
currents, that is which are capable of floating for weeks or months on 
sea-water, without losing the power of germination“ (1. ¢., p. 5). 

But here we have not a single strand plant, and, as a rule, the 
arctic lands are rather poor in halophytic plants which might stand a 
journey in salt water, The floating ice, of course, may sometimes carry ~ 
seeds and fragments of plants — I have occasionally seen blocks of ice 
from the tidal crack, laden with masses of vegetable matter — but this 
does not prove that plants can in fact immigrate by that means of 
conveyance; for a short drift within a fjord or over a strait, it may 
perhaps sometimes be of use, if the ice-block takes the shore again 
before the plant fragments are blown into the water or wetted through; 
but as a transport over wide distances it is certainly not serviceable, as 
the vegetable matter will be imbedded in the ice and will be unable to 
come farther inland before being immersed in salt water. 

It may also be mentioned that both islands were formerly visited 
by man. I am not, indeed, inclined to attribute any influence for the 
transporting of plants to these visits, but where people have been, one 
has always the possibility of human influence to reckon with. The 
indication of human visitors to these islands consisted especially in a 
sort of shelters, built for the eider-ducks to place their nests in. Now 
such shelters are built in countries where the eider-duck is protected 
for the collecting of down; but it is not known that the Eskimo have 
done any such thing anywhere else, and this region has certainly never 
had any other human inhabitants. Perhaps the shelters may be attri- 


1) Ernst, A., The New Flora of the Voleanic Island of Krakatau. Cambridge 1908. 


1898-1902. No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OFN.DEVON, 17 


buted to whalers who may have heen here during the time of the whale- 
fishery in Baffin Bay. It seems strange, however, that they should 
have undertaken any such work. 

The book of Ernst, quoted above, contains moreover several other 
points of interest in connection with the problem of immigration here 
in question. It gives accounts of the three botanical investigations under- 
taken in the island of Krakatau after the great catastrophe which annihi- 
lated the old vegetation of the island, August 26—27, 1883. The flora 
of the island consisted, at the first visit, three years after the eruption, 
principally of plants carried by wind: 6 species of blue-green algae, 
2 mosses, and 11 ferns‘. Treus found, besides, seedlings of 9 species 
of phanerogams and seeds of some more plants on the shore. During 
the following years, members of every division of the plant kingdom 
have immigrated, and Ernst, |. ¢., p. 38—45, gives a list of 137 species. 
Of these, 45 are cryptogamous plants which almost certainly have immi- 
erated by aid of the wind. Among the 92 phanerogams, 67 (73 °/o) 
are halophytes which Ernst thinks have been carried to the shore by 
sea currents; 9 species (10 °/o) he reckons as certainly imported by birds; 
15 species (16 °/.) as having been carried by the winds. He also gives 
alternately the latter figures as 18 and 28, when more doubtful species 
are included. 

Now, indeed, it may seem that I have chosen for comparison, a 
district of to dissimilar a nature; but I think it may be of some interest 
to put together these two instances of plant migration. Krakatau lies 
twenty-two miles from the nearest point of the mainland, and twelve 
from the nearest island which, however, suffered so greatly from the 
catastrophe that, for a long time, it was not able to supply much. Still, 
we have here got 137 immigrated species in less than twenty-five years. 
But this has taken place in a tropical region containing thousands of 
species in the flora of the mainlands. If now we exclude all those 
species which are halophytes and which have most probably been con- 
veyed by the aid of sea-water, we shall have only 15 (28) species of 
phanerogams carried by the winds, and 9 (18) transported by birds. 
Only these and the cryptogams are of interest here as, for various 
reasons, transport by sea currents is excluded in the Jones Sound islands. 
We thus see that, even in the tropics, migration by aid of the wind is 
restricted to spores of cryptogams and to a very small number of seeds 


1) Treus, M., Notice sur la nouvelle flore de Krakatau. Ann. du Jard. botan. de 
Buitenzorg, Vol. VII, 1888. 
2 


18 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


of higher plants. Neither does immigration by means of birds play any 
prominent part, and I think it is only to the circumstance that Castle 
and Devil’s Islands serve as rookeries, that they owe their comparatively 
large stock of plants which have been brought over as nest-building 
material. 

Had they been encircled by a less strong current, so that the sea 
might have been icebound for the greater part of the year the flora 
would probably have been somewhat different. There would have been no 
rookeries, the birds would not have contributed much to the immigration 
of plants, but, on the other hand, there would have been another means 
of migration — the wind-transport over the snow-covered ice in winter. 
I have more than once seen that plant fragments are whirled away for 
long distances over the hard-blown snow, and I do not doubt. that this 
means of transport plays a prominent part in the migration of arctic 
plants, many of which are ,,winter-standers*. 1 also think that the 
island of North Kent in part has to thank the fast-bound ice at its 
northern parts, for the relatively rich flora it possesses. The ice here 
forms a bridge which may facilitate immigration both from Ellesmere- 
land, N. Devon, and other islands to the west. However, the geological 
nature of the northern parts of the island also is different and more 
favorable than that in Castle and Devil’s Islands. 


Ill. North Kent. 


Separated from Ellesmereland by the Hell Gate, and from North 
Devon by Cardigan Strait, the island of North Kent extends between lat. 
76° 27’ and 51°, and long. 89° 45’ and 90° 35’. The northern part of 
it has been known since the time of Betcuer’s expedition. It was 
visited by Mr. Scuer in 1900, but he brought home neither notes nor 
collections. In 1901 I visited the northern part (July 13), and in 1902 
some points on the south coast. 

The southern part of the island is built up of Silurian limestone of 
the better, less siliciferous kind; further north, comes the same series of 
limestones and sandstones as in Goose Fjord. Loose deposits are present 
to a large extent, forming a far better soil than that in the last-mentioned 
small islands. The coast of N. Kent is, for the greater part, formed of 
high, more or less abrupt cliffs rising to a height of perhaps 1000 feet. 
In some places, there is a narrow, low beach below and a few valleys 
trending inland, but rising rather precipitously towards the undulating, 


18981902. No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT.TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 19 


higher land of the interior which, in the more elevated southern portion, 
is covered with a large snow field and sends out a glacier down to Cardigan 
Strait and some small hanging-glaciers into some of the ravines. 

During my first visit to North Kent, when I had not yet seen Castle 
Island, I thought it very poor land, and I have specially noted that it 
was far poorer than the neighbouring part of Ellesmereland which shows 
the same geological character. The fact that it is more difficult for 
plants to reach the convenient growing-places here than on the mainland, 
seems to accounl for the relative scarcity of species of higher plants. 
The vegetation was, however, dense enough in favorable spots. 

The place (1.) which I visited, July 13, 1901, lies about halfway 
between De Lacy Head and the easternmost point of the island. From 
the narrow strip of foreland, a small valley or broad ravine trended 
steeply upwards to the interior plateau. The loose strata, for the greater 
part, consisted of gravel with numerous stones of all sizes, with, in some 
places, also a considerable admixture of clayish material, and locally 
pure clay, especially along the broad shallow brooks which flowed down 
from the interior. In the high land of the interior also, there was the 
same gradual transition from shingle fields to clay plains strewn with 
stones, or wet clay plains with open an vegetation. In some places, the 
rock was uncovered or only overlaid with heaps of stones of different 
sizes, somewhat resembling the talus below the steeper cliffs. 

Among the plants of the lower land, Saxifraga oppositifolia was 
absolutely predominant, and it was abundant even in the interior, appe- 
aring with flowers of very different size, shape, and colour in different 
individuals. Another species, very common in all moist localities, was 
Saxifraga flagellaris, and the genus was further represented by 4 more 
species, S. nivalis, S. stellaris var. comosa, S. groenlandica, and S. 
cernua. Other plants found here were: — Dryas integrifolia, Poten- 
tilla pulchella, P. emarginata, Draba alpina with its var. gracilescens, 
D. subcapitata, Cochlearia officinalis var. groenlandica, Papaver radt- 
catum, Ranunculus nivalis, R. Sabinei, Cerastium alpinum, Stellaria 
longipes, Alsine verna, Oxyria digyna, Salix arctica, Luzula arcuata 
var. confusa, L. nivalis, Festuca ovina, Poa abbreviata, Glyceria 
distans, Catabrosa algida, Aira caespitosa var. arctica, Alopecurus 
alpinus. Cerastium alpinum showed the same transition, from large, 
hairy forms to the extreme f. pulvinatwm, as found in some loca- 
lities in Ellesmereland. Most of the 28 species enumerated above are 
included in a little collection in alcohol, which was all I could bring 
home of flowering plants (2832). 


20 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP.FRAM 


In general, the flowering plants appeared in single tufts or indi- 
viduals in the open, bare ground; only <Alopecurus formed a denser 
vegetation in some small, boggy depressions, and Catabrosa along the 
brooklets which were also bordered with mosses interspersed with some 
flowering plants such as Ranunculus nivalis, Draba alpina var. gra- 
cilescens, Luzula nivalis. In some parts of the interior plateau the 
mosses were unusually predominant. Bryan, Bryophyta, p. 211—218, 
has found not less than 50 species in my collection which was made 
during one single short excursion. Some of them occurred in great ab- 
undance, as for instance Hypna, Brya, and others along the brooks and 
in boggy places, Tortula ruralis in moist places among stones, and 
especially Rhacomitrium canescens, which formed widespread mats over 
the stone heaps of some of the slopes. Lichens also occurred in great 
abundance, both those that form crusts on the stones, and the large 
earth-lichens of bushlike genera, such as Cladonia, Cornicularia, Ce- 
traria and others, besides Peltigera, Gyrophora-species, etc. As the 
lichens are not yet treated of, I cannot enter further either upon them 
or upon the fresh water algae. 

In 1902, on returning from Devils Isle, we visited the south-west 
point of North Kent (2.), where I noted the following species of flowering 
plants, forming a sparse vegetation in a clayish strip of foreland: — 
Saxifraga oppositifolia, S. cernua, Draba alpina, Papaver radica- 
tum, Stellaria longipes, Catabrosa algida. Later in the same day 
(July 30}, we camped in the large bight on the south coast of North 
Kent (8.), where the foreland is formed of clay with a great many sub- 
fossil shells, such as Saxicava rugosa, Mya truncata, and others, and 
LTithothamnia in abundance. The flora, however, was very poor, consi- 
sting of a few tufts of Sazifraga oppositifolia, Papaver radicatum, 
and Oxyria digyna. But here we were in a limestone district. 

Further towards the Hell Gate, however, there was a richer vege- 
tation, as the high headland which forms the south-eastern extremity of 
North Kent (4.) is inhabited by numerous birds, such for instance as gulls 
and falcons. At this place, Falcon Point, I noted July 31, 1902, Pedi- 
cularis hirsuta, Dryas integrifolia, Saxifraga oppositifolia, S. niva- 
lis, S. groenlandica, S. cernua, Cardamine bellidifolia, Draba alpina, 
D. subcapitata, Cerastium alpinum, Stellaria longipes, Alsine verna, 
Polygonum viviparum, Salix arctica, Poa abbreviata, P. glauca f. 
prolifera (4015), Glyceria distans (4013), G. angustata (4014). 

As, however, our stay at this point lasted only for a very short 
time, while waiting for the ice to clear a passage over to Ellesmereland, 


1898-1902, No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 21 


the plants were noted without any thought of getting a complete list 
which would doubtless have been at least twice as great as the above. 
The entire list of the North Kent flora now contains 33 species of phan- 
erogams and 50 mosses, but doubtless, considerably more could be found 
of these groups by a closer inspection, to say nothing of the not yet 
determined lichens and algae. 


IV. Graham and Buckingham Islands. 


Mr. Scuer brought home two small collections from his spring jour- 
ney in 1900 when he visited these islands. It is, of course, impossible 
to form from these collections, which were made during an unfavorable 
season, any opinion about the flora of the islands; but they have, 
according to Mr. Scuet, a well developed vegetation. As the geolog- 
ical map of Mr. Scuer (in SvERDRUP, Neues Land) shows, the islands 
are built up of Mesozoic rocks, which may have afforded a soil favor- 
able enough for the development of a dense vegetation, even if the 
species are probably few. 


1. Graham Island. 


This small island, lying in about lat. 77° 10’—20’, long. 91°, north 
of Cardigan Strait, was first discovered during BrELcHER’s expedition. 
From a valley, where reindeer were found, Mr. Scuer brought home a 
little sample of the vegetation containing: — Dryas integrifolia (1910), 
Potentilla emarginata (1909), Stellaria longipes (1911), Salix arctica 
(1912), Luzula arcuata var. confusa (1916), L. nivalis (1908), and one 
moss, Rhacomitrium lanuginosum. 


9. Buckingham Island. 


From this small island, lying immediately west of Graham Island, 
Mr. Scuer brought home only two plants: — Potentilla emarginata and — 
Luzula nivalis. 


99 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


V. Heiberg Land. 


Regarding this large island, which extends between lat. 78° 10‘, and 
81° 20’, and from long. 86° to 95°, only very little is as yet known so 
far as the botanical features are concerned. Several sledging expedi- 
tions, however, have made their way along its coasts, and have taken 
trips into some of the numerous fjords that intersect its high, rocky 
coast. As Mr. Scuer visited this region three times, we know that the 
south coast is built up of mesozoic strata, as is also the eastern shore 
except in the most northern part, where carboniferous rocks appear. 
I am indebted to Mr. Scuer for most of the botanical material which 
was, however, collected in an unfavorable season and so gives only a 
vague suggestion of the flora of this island which is of great interest, 
as it probably forms an important way of migration to the adjacent 
west coast of Ellesmereland, and from thence further east and over to 
Greenland. , 

The places in Heiberg Land from which I have got collections and 


notes are: — 
1. Hyperite Point about lat. 78° 10’ long. 89° 
2. Whit Sunday Bay — ~- 78°58’ — 87° 
3. Skraling Point — - 80° 15° — 87°80’ 
4, Black Wall — - 81° 10° — 92° 
5. Rens Fjord — - 80° 58 — 98° 380° 


The first place lies on the south coast, the last on the west, the 
three others on the east. 


1. Hyperite Point. 


This place was first visited by Mr. Scuert in 1900, and he then 
brought home a little collection in which I found Potentilla Vahliana 
(1918), P. rubricaulis (1922), Saxifraga oppositifolia (1922), S. tricus- 
pidata (1917), Silene acaulis (1919), Cerastium alpinum (1920), Lu- 
zula arcuata var. confusa (1922), Carex misandra (1922), besides a 
few lichens. 

In 1901, he again had an opportunity of visiting the same place, 
and as it was so late as June 7 and he had more time, he was able 
to make a collection which gives a better idea about the vegetation there. 


1898-1902. No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N. DEVON, 23 


It contains the following flowering plants (2756): Pedicularis hirsuta, 
P. capitata, Cassiope tetragona, Dryas integrifolia, Potentilla emar- 
ginata, Saxifraga flagellaris, S. Hirculus, S. tricuspidata, S. groen- 
landica, Draba alpina, D. subcapitata, Papaver radicatum, Alsine 
verna, Stellaria longipes, Cerastinm alpinum (with forms approaching 
f. pulvinatum), Silene acuulis, Polygonum viviparum, Luzula arcu- 
ata var. confusa, L. nivalis, Carex aquatilis var. stans, Festuca ovina, 
Poa cenisia, Trisetum spicatum, Arctagrostis latifolia. 

Of mosses, the collection contained 12 species (Brynn, Bryophyta, 
p. 205, No. 2757—2761). Dr. Bryan has, however, not observed that 
Hyperite Point lies in Heiberg Land, but thought it was a place in King 
Oscar Land, 1. e. the west coast of Ellesmereland!. 

The number of species known from Hyperite Point thus reaches 40, 
28 phanerogams and 12 mosses, but this most certainly does not give 
the true number of plants, even if it must be admitted that Mr. Screr 


1 | think it may be of service to point out the errors in the list of species included 
under each number in the moss-collection which Dr. Bryun gives (Bryophyta, 
p. 187—235). The mistakes perhaps are in some part due to myself, as, in the 
extract from my catalogue of collections which I sent him, I may not have made 
a sufficiently clear specification of the localities whence the collections have come. 

The following corrections are to be made: — 


No, 394 comes from Bedford Pim Island 
516—521 come from Beitstad Fjord in Hayes Sound 
525 comes from Fram Harbour 
526 comes from the mouth of Flagler Fjord 


528—564 come from Fort Juliane — Mt. Kolapoulsen 

668—671 come from Beitstad Fjord 

718—725, the locality is Braskerud Plain, the name Isachsen Fjord | only 
used in my journal 

963—965 from Twin Glacier Valley are missing 

971-982 from Lastraea Valley 


1162 should be no moss-collection 

1836 from Fram Harbour is missing 

1905 comes from Rens Fjord in Heiberg Land 

2043 should be a lichen 

%108—2109 are from Nordstrand (leg. Fosueim, 13. 6. 1900). 

9993 from Harbour Fjord 

9994 from Harbour Fjord is missing 

2417 comes from Spade Point in Harbour Fjord 

2476 should be no moss-collection 

2480—2503 and 2532—2534 come from the western entrance to Harbour Fjord 
9585 from the western entrance to Harbour Fjord is missing 
2551 comes from Spade Point 

2757—2761 come from Hyperite Point in Heiberg Land 

3665 from Yellow Hill in Goose Fjord is missing 

3842 from Boat Cape in N. Devon (leg. Scuet, 26. 7. 1901) 


4123 from Lands Lock in Grinnell Land (leg. Scuer, 8. 5, 1902). 


M4. H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


must have looked out well to have been able to find so many species 
early in the year before the snow had gone away. Besides, he thought 
he had seen some more, especially Hmpetrum nigrum which, however, 
was not present in the collection. 


2. Whit Sunday Bay. 


Mr. Scuer camped here, May 26, 1901, and made a collection of 
flowering plants containing: — Potentilla pulchella, Saxifraga cernua, 
Chamaenerium latifolium, Hesperis Pallasii, Melandrium affine, 


Stellaria longipes, Alsine verha, Salix arctica, Festuca ovina (all in 
2759). 


3. Skraling (Eskimo) Point. 


The collection of Mr. Scuer from this point was made May 17, 1901, 
and contains: — Potentilla pulchella, Melandrium affine, Stellaria 


longipes, Alsine verna, Luzula arcuata var. confusa, Poa cenisia 
(all in 2753). 


4. Vicinity of Black Wall. 


Visited by Mr. Scuer, May 11, 1902. His collection consists only 
of Luzula nivalis (4121) and some lichens. 


5. Rens Fjord. 


Mr. FosHem who together with Captain Sverprup turned back from 
here, May 5, 1900, made a little collection which was found to embrace 
three flowering plants, Saaxifraga oppositifolia, Papaver radicatum, 
and Festuca ovina, besides some lichens and, according te Bryxn, Bryo- 
phyta, p. 187, the following mosses: — Dicranum congestum, Ditrichum 
flexicaule, Rhacomitrium lanuginosum, Timmia austriaca, Polytri- 
chum alpinum, P. piliferum (all in 1905). 


With this, [ have to finish my small contribution to the knowledge 
of the botanical features of Heiberg Land. At present, its flora is known 
to consist of 34 flowering plants and 15 mosses, besides some unexamined 
lichens. A certain interest attaches to one of the phanerogams, viz., He- 
speris Pallasii, which is not found in the south coast of Ellesmereland. 
Its occurrence at Whit Sunday Bay! seems to imply that it has reached 
middle and northern Ellesmereland by way of Heiberg Land. The east 


1 By mistake I have, in my FI. Ellesm., p. 78, mentioned it for Hyperite Point 
instead. 


1998-1902, No. 19.] STRAY CONTRIBUT.TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON, 25 


coast of this large island, if visited in summer, would doubtless yield a 
rich botanical harvest. Mr. Scuer spoke of wide, grass-grown plains, 
probably rich in grasses and Cyperaceae, which he had observed at 
different points, and the occurrence of such species as Melandrium 
affine, Chamaenerium latifolium, Potentilla pulchella, P. rubricaulis, 
Pedicularis capitata, Cassiope tetragona, and others, decidedly points 
to the existence of a well-developed vegetation. As these regions are 
also of interest from other scientific points of view, it is to be hoped, 
that an expedition with some other program than that of mere map- 
making will, in the not too distant future, take its field of work there. 


VI. Schei Island and Big Island. 


As the map shows, there are two rather considerable islands lying 
in the channel east of Heiberg Land. Both were visited by Mr. Scuet 
in the spring journey of 1901, Schei Island, May 6, and Big Island, May 25. 


1. Schei Island. 


Concerning this island, lying in lat. 80° 15’—30‘, long. 88°—89°, and 
separated from Heiberg Land only by a narrow strait, Mr. Scuer reported 
only that grass-grown plains extended inland between naked slopes and 
terraces. It probably bears a close resemblance to the adjacent Skral- 
ing Point. 


2. Big Island. 


This island, lying in the Heureka Sound at the mouth of-Bay Fjord 
in lat. 78° 45’—79° 5’, long. 85° 40’—87°, was found by Mr. Scuer to 
have a rather scarce vegetation on the terraces along the beach. Species 
noted were:— Dryas integrifolia, Potentilla emarginata (2754), Saxi- 
fraga oppositifolia, S. tricuspidata, S. groenlandica, Papaver radi- 
catum, Oerastium alpinum (2754), Alsine verna (2754), Draba sp., 
Salix arctica, Festuca ovina (2754). 


VII. Ringnes Lands. 


The two large islands which form the westernmost part of the field 
of work of the expedition, were visited by Captain Isacusen in 1900 and 
1901. Both, according to his description, consist principally of wide 


26 H. G. SIMMONS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


gravel plains, so low and flat, that he could sometimes drive from the 
sea-ice inland, without noticing it until the sledge scraped in the sand. 
As far as he could see, there was very little vegetation, and no game 
was observed. Still I think that if the land were explored during sum- 
mer time, a number of plants might be found. Captain Isacusen only 
brought home a single collection (2743), made May 17, 1901, in the north- 
western extremity of Ellef Ringnes Land, somewhere about lat. 79° 20’, 
and long. 106°. It contained the following flowering plants: — Poten- 
tilla emarginata, Saxifraga oppositifolia, Papaver radicatum, Draba 
alpina, Cerastiwm alpinum, Poa glauca. As all of these are ubiquit- 
ous plants, there is no special interest attached to this small list. It is 
to be regretted, that a dense cowering of snow almost over the whole 
land prevented Captain Isacusen from seeing more of the vegetation, 
and from bringing back a larger collection. 


With this paper IJ finish my contributions to the knowledge of the 
flora of the Arctic American Archipelago, as far as the higher plants 
are concerned. I am fully aware that these notes are of far less value 
than is the treatment of the Ellesmereland flora; and I much regret that 
[ got no opportunity of visiting the lands to the west myself, as Hei- 
berg Land at least would well have deserved a closer botanical survey. 
But such long journeys can hardly be made in summer, when the road— 
the sea-ice—-may break up at any moment. I must therefore, neces- 
sarily leave further exploration to future expeditions. For my own part, 
I have still much material left for further work, and I hope that I shall 
soon be able to finish a paper about the vegetation of Ellesmereland, 
so as to get time to pass on to the examination of the collections of 
algae. 

The Index in the following pages I have put together as I am fully 
aware that treatises, such as my Ellesmereland and N. W. Greenland 
floras are not easily used without. Certain circumstances made it im- 
possible for me, at the time when the former was published, to compile 
an Index to it. As, however, the three Papers about the floras of higher 
plants in the regions visited by the expedition will always have to be 
used together, I think that an Index common to all three, may answer 
the need equally well. 


Lund, Sweden, February 1909. 


1898-1902. No. 19.] | STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 27 


Index. 


N.B. The following abbreviations and designations are used below: 


I. signifies No. 2 of the Report: 
land, 
II. signifies No. 16: 
Greenland, 
III. signifies No. 19: 


The Vascular Plants in the Flora of Ellesmere- 
A Revised List of the Flowering Plants and Ferns of N. W. 


Stray Contributions to the Botany of N. Devon, ete. 


All species of higher plants mentioned in those treatise are entered, and the 
names upheld for species belonging to the floras of Ellesmereland or N. W. Green- 
land signified by fat types, synonyms by common type, and other species mentioned 


in the text by ¢talics. 
be found, are marked with fat figures. 


Acrostichum alpinum, Bolt. I: 183. 
hyperboreum, Liljeb]. 1: 183. 
Agropyrum dasystachium, (Hook.) Vasey 
var. violaceum, Greely I: 153. 
violaceum, (Hornem.) Lange I: 12, 
153. Ul: 31, 42, 47. 
repens, (L.) Pal. de Beauv. I: 153. 
Agrostis algida, Soland. I: 170. 
canina, L. Il: 34, 106. 
var. melaleuca, Bong. II: 106. 
Aira alpina, Liljebl. I: 179. 
arctica, Trin. 1: 179. 
brevifolia, (R. Br.) Lange I: 173. 
brevifolia, Pursh I: 1738. 
caespitosa, L. I: 174. II: 81, 34,37, 105. 
f. alpina, Kruuse [: 178. 
var. arctica, (Trin.) Simm. I: 13,173 
—175, 197. IT: 104—105. Il: 19. 
var. borealis, Trautv. I: 178, 174. 
var. brevifolia, (R. Br.) Gelert I: 173. 
var. brevifolia, Nath. I: 175. 
var. brevifolia, Hartm. I: 173, 174. 
Il: 106. 
*brevifolia, M. v. Bieb. I: 178, 174. 
flexuosa, L. I: 18, 175—176. II: 31, 
34, 42, 47, 105-106. 
var. montana, (L.) Trin. f. pallida, 
Berl. 1: 175, I: 105. 
indica, L. I: 172. 
setacea, Huds. I: 175. 
spicata, L. I: 171, 172. 
subspicata, L. I: 171, 172. 


The pages, where the special treatment of each species is to 


Alchemilla faeroensis, (Lange) BuserI: 121. 
vulgaris, L. Il: 14, 38, 60. 
Alopecurus alpinus, Smith I: 177-178. 
Il: 31, 84, 37, 104,106—107. III: 
8, 9, 12, 14, 19, 20. 
ovatus, Hornem. I: 177. 
Alsine groenlandica, (Retz.) Fenzl II: 33, 
77-78. 
hirta, Hartm. I: 117. 
humifusa, Britton & Brown I: 124. 
longipes, Britton & Brown I: 124. 
Rossi, (R. Br.) Fenzl I: 10, 13, 14, 
61, 116—117, 122, 196. 1: 30, 40, 
44, Ill: 7, 9. 
rubella, Wahlenb. I: 117. I: 78. 
verna (L.) Wahlenb. I: 117—118. II: 
30, 33, 36, 78. Ill: 6, 7, 8, 9, 19, 
20, 28, 24, 25. 
var. hirta, (Wormskj.) Lange I: 117, 
: 118. 
var. propinqua, (Wormskj.) eo 
I: 117. 


var. rubella, (Wahlenb.) Lange I: 
117, 118. Il: 78. 


Alsinella hirta, Hartm. I: 117. 
Alyssum arcticum, Wormskj. 1: 99. 
Ammadenia peploides, Rupr. I: 77. 
Andromeda tetragona, L. I: 39. Il: 57. 


Androsace Chamaejasme, Host I: 36. 
septentrionalis, L. 1: 13, 14, 36— 
37. Il: 29, 41, 44. 


28 H. G. SIMMONS. 


[SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Antennaria alpina, (L.) Gaertn. I: 23— 
24. II: 28, 32, 36, 51. 
Anthericum calyculatum, L. II: 88. 
Arabis alpina, L. II: 68. 
arenicola, (Richards.) Gelert I: 13, 
80. II: 29, 37, 45. 


var. pubescens, (Wats.) Gelert 
I: 80. 

Hookeri, Lange, II: 29, 33, 42, 45, 
68—69. 


var. multicaulis, Simm. II: 68—69. 
humifusa, Wats. I: 80. 
lyrata, L. I: 80. 
mollis, Steven II: #8, 
Arctagrostis latifolia, (R. Br.) Griseb. 


I: 176—177. II: 31, 34, 37, 106. 
III: 23. 

var. arundinacea, (Trin.) Griseb. 
I: 177. 


Arenaria arctica, Hayes II: 78. 
ciliata, L. I: 12, 14, 115—116. II: 30, 
33, 37, 76. 
(Wahlenb.) Hartm. 
I: 115. 


f. humifusa, 


groenlandica, Fenzl I: 116. 
groenlandica, auct. I: 116, 117. II: 77. 
hirta, Wormskj. I: 117. 
peploides, L. I: 77. 

diffusa, Hornem. II: 77. 
propinqua, Richards. I: 117. 
quadrivalvis, R. Br. I: 117. 
Rossii, R. Br. I: 116. 
rubella, Hook. I: 117. II: 78. 

var. hirta, Vahl II: 78. 
verna, L. I: 117. I: 78. 

var. hirta, Greely I: 117. 

Armeria arctica, Wallr. I: 36. 
labradorica, Wallr. I: 35. II: 55. 
sibirica, Turez. I: 34. 
vulgaris, Willd. 1: 14. 

var. labradorica, Durand II: 55. 
var. sibirica, auct. I: 34. 
vulgaris, auct. II: 58. 
Arnica alpina, (L.) Olin I: 22—23. II: 
98, 32, 38, 50—51. 
angustifolia, Vahl I: 22, 23. 
montana, L. var. alpina, L. I: 22. 
var. angustifolia, Hook. I: 22. 
montana, auct. I: 22. 
Aspidium fragrans, (L.) Sw. I: 13, 14, 
182. II: 31, 35, 38, 108. 

Atropis angustata, Ledeb. I: 156. 
distans, Ledeb. I: 158. 
maritima, Griseb. I: 160. 

Avena airoides, Koel. I: 171, 172. 


Avena subspicata, Clairv. I: 171. 
Azalea lapponica, L. IL: 57, 
procumbens, L. II: 57. 


Bartsia alpina, L. II: 29, 32, 40, 54, 

Betula glandulosa, Michx. II: 40, 85. 

nana, L. II: 14, 30, 34, 40, 84—85. 
Braya alpina, Sternb. & Hoppe I: 78, 79. 

II: 68. 

var. glabella, Greely I: 78. 
alpina, auct. I: 78. II: 68. 

glabella, Richards. I: 78, 79. II: 68. 
purpurascens, (R. Br.) Bunge I: 13, 

14, 78—79. II: 29, 33, 38, 68. 


Calamagrostis arundinacea, (L.) Roth 
II: 31, 42. 
Campanula Gieseckiana, Vest I: 25. 
rotundifolia, L. I: 25. IL: 14, 28, 41. 
var. linifolia, Durand II: 51. 
uniflora, L. I: 12, 25—26. II: 28, 
32, 36, 51-52. 
Cardamine bellidifolia, L. I: 96—97. 
Il: 30, 33, 36, 72. III: 20. 
pratensis, L. I: 96. II: 30, 37. 
var. angustifolia, Hook. I: 96. 
Carex alpina, Hart I: 148. 
aquatilis, Wahlenb. II: 31, 41. 
f. sphagnophila, Fr. I: 144. 
var. epigejos, Kjellm. I: 144. 
var, Stans, (Drej.) Boott I: 96, 138, 
144145. II: 45, 94. III: 23. 
atrata, L. I: 140, 141. 
atrata, auct. II: 93, 97. 
atrofusca, Schkuhr I: 189, 140. 
Bellardi, All. I: 147, 148. 
bipartita, All. I: 148. 
capillaris, L. I: 139, 148. II: 30, 37. 
compacta, R. Br. I: 136. 
compacta, Krock. I: 136, 137. 
digitata, L. I: 142, 143. 
dioica, L. II: 15, 34, 98, 96—97. 
var. paralella, Laest. Il: 97. 
frigida, All. I: 141. 
frigida, Ledeb. [: 140, 141. 
fuliginosa, Schkuhr I: 140, 141. 
fuliginosa, Sternb. & Hoppe I: 141, 142. 
var. misandra, Lang I: 141. 
fuliginosa, auct. I: 141. 
glareosa, Wahlenb. I: 12, 145. II: 31, 
34, 87, 95. 
ursina, Britton & Brown I: 145. 
globularis, L. I: 142, 148. 
gynocrates, (Wormskj.) Drej. I: 147. 
II: 97. 


18981902. No. 19.] 


STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 29 


Carex Hepburnii, Boott 1: 147. 
holostoma, Drej. I: 144. 
hyperborea, Drej. I: 144. 
incurva, Lightf. [: 146—147. II: 31, 
34, 36, 95. 
var. erecta, Lang I: 146. 11: 95. 
var. inflata, Simm. I: 146, 147. 
lagopina, Wahlenb. II: 31, 42. 
membranacea, Hook. I: 186, 137. 
membranacea, Hoppe, I: 136, 137. 
membranopacta, Bail. I: 10, 13, 14, 
136—139, 197. IT: 30, 40, 44, 
misandra, R. Br. 1: 139, 140, 141— 
142, II: 30, 34, 36, 93, 94, 97. 
III: 22. 
nardina, Fr. I: 12, 147—148, 149. 
II: 31, 34, 38, 95—96, 97. 
nardina, Hart I: 146. 
ornithopoda, Willd. I: 142, 148. 
pedata, All. I: 148. 
pedata, L. I: 142. 
’ pedata, Wahlenb. I: 12, 142—143. 
II: 30, 42. 
pulla, Good. I: 186, 137, 138. 
pulla, auct. I: 136. 
rigida, Good. II: 30, 34, 41, 94-95. 
rigida, auct. I: 144. II: 94. 
rotundata, Ostenf. I: 136. 
rotundata, Wahlenb. I: 1386, 187, 138. 
rupestris, All. I: 143—144, 145. 
II: 30, 42. 
salina, Wahlenb. II: 30, 42. 
saxatilis, L. Il: 94. 
var. compacta, Dewey I: 13€. 
saxatilis, auct. I: 136. II: 94. 
scirpoidea, Michx. II: 31, 34, 41, 96. 
stans, Drej. I: 144. 
ursina, Dewey I: 12, 14, 145—146. 
II: 31, 37. 
ustulata, Wahlenb. I: 12, 14, 139— 
141. II: 30, 37. 
Wormskjoldiana, Hornem. II: 96. 
vulgaris, Fr. var. hyperborea, Greely 
I: 144. 
Cassiope tetragona, (L.) D. Don I: 39. 
II: 29, 33, 36,57. III: 6, 23, 95. 
Catabrosa algida, (Soland.) Fr. [: 170— 
171. Il: 22, 31, 34, 37, 76, 104. 
Ill: 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 19, 20. 
concinna, Th. Fr. I: 171. 
vilfoidea, Anderss. I: 159, 160. 
Cerastium alpinum, L. I: 61, 120—123. 
II: 22, 30, 33, 36, 78—79. II: 7, 
8, 9, 11, 18, 14, 19, 20, 22, 28, 
25, 26. 


Cerastium alpinum, L. f. pulvinatum, 
Simm. I: 121, 122, 123, JIL: 19, 98. 
var. caespitosum, Malmegr. I: 120, 121, 
122, 123, 
var. Fischerianum, Ser. I: 120. 
var. Fischerianum, Durand I: 190, 
Il: 79. 
var. glabratum, Retz. I: 129. 
var. lanatum, Lindbl. I: 121. 
var. legitimum, Lindbl. I: 121. 
arcticum, Lange, I: 120. 
Edmondstonii, (Wats.) Murb. & Ostenf. 
I: 120, 121, 122, 193. 
var. caespitosum, (Malmgr.) Anderss. 
& Hesselm. I: 120, 121, 129. 
latifolium, Hart I: 129. 
vulgatum, Bessels II: 79. 
Chamaenerium halimifolium, Salish. I: 41. 
latifolium, (L.) Sweet I: 41—42. 
IL: 29, 38, 88, 58—59, IIL: 24, 25. 
Cheiranthus Pallasii, Pursh I: 77. 
pygmaeus, Adams I: 77. 
Chrysosplenium alfernifolium, L. I: 13, 
14, 59. II: 29, 40, 44. 
var. tetrandrum, Lund [: 59—60. 
II: 29. 
tetrandrum, (Lund) Th. Fr. I: 59. 
Cineraria Lewisii, Richards. 1: 24. 
Cochlearia fenestrata, R. Br. 1: 98. [1: 72. 
groenlandica, L. I: 98. If: 72. 
oblongifolia, DC. II: 72. 
officinalis, L. I: 98. I: 22, 30, 33, 
36, 72. 
var. arctica, (Schlecht.) Gel. I: 98. 
var. groenlandica, (L.) Gel. I: 98 
—99. Il: 72—73. Ill: 7, 8, 11, 
12, 14, 19. 
var. oblongifolia, (DC.) Gel. I: 98. 
Colpodium humile, Lange I: 161. 
latifolium, R. Br. I: 176. If: 106. 
pauciflorum, Hook. I: 177. 
Cucubalus acaulis, L. I: 127. 
Cystopteris fragilis, (L.) Bernh. I: 182 
—183. II: 31, 35, 37, 108. 


Deschampsia brevifolia, R. Br. I: 173. 


II: 104, 105. 
var. major, Hook. I: 173. 
caespitosa, Pal. de Beauv. I: 173. 
flexuosa, (L.) Trin. I: 175. 


Diapensia lapponica, L. I: 37. II: 29, 


32, 39, 55. 


Draba alpina, L. I: 80—85, 86, 87, 88, 


89, 90, 91. II: 29, 33, 36, 69, 70. 
Ill: 7, 8, 9, 19, 20, 28, 26. 


30 H. G. SIMMONS. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Draba alpina var. corymbosa, Durand 
Il: 70. 
var. glacialis, (Adams) Kjellm. 1: 82, 
84, II: 69. III: 8. 
var. gracilescens, Simm. I: 83, 
84, 85, 94, 196. IL: 69. III: 19, 20. 
var. micropetala, Durand II: 70. 
var. oblongata, (R. Br.) Gel. I: 
81—82, 84. 
altaica, Bunge I: 85, 87, 89. 
altaica, auct. I: 87, 88. 
androsacea, Wahlenb. I: 83, 85. 
arctica, J. Vahl I: 93, 94. IL: 71. 
borealis, DC. 1: 95. II: 71. 
confusa, Ehrh. II: 71. 
corymbosa, auct. II: 70. 
crassifolia, Grah. I: 29, 49. 
fladnizensis, Wulf. I: 83, 85—86, 
87, 59, 91, 93, 110. IL: 29, 33, 36, 
70. 
var. altaica, Gelert I: 87. 
gelida, Turez. 1: 84. 
glacialis, Adams I: 81, 82. II: 69. 
hirta, L. I: 86, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93— 
95. II: 29, 33, 36, 71. Ill: 11, 13. 
f. canescens, Simm. I: 94. 
var. altaica, (Ledeb.) Simm. I: 89, 
92, 94. 
var. arctica, (J. Vahl) Wats. I: 92, 
93—94. [I: 71. 
incana, L. J: 95. II: 29, 38, 42, 71. 
lactea, Adams I: 85. 
lapponica, Wahlenb. I: 85. 
leptopetala, Th. Fr. I: 82. 
Martinsiana, Gay I: 87, 88, 89. 
Martinsiana, Th. Fr. I: 87, 88, 89, 90. 
Martinsiana, Dusén I: 92. 
micropetala, Hook. I: 87, 88, 89, 90. 
muricella, Wahlenb. I: 92. 
nivalis, Liljebl. I: 86, 90, 92—93. 
II: 29, 33, 37, 70—71. 
oblongata, R. Br. J: 81, 82. 
ochroleuca, Bunge I: 84. 
pauciflora, R. Br. I: 87. 
primuloides, Turez. I: 84. 
rupestris, R. Br. 1: 93, 94. II: 71. 
var. altaica, Ledeb. I: 87, 88, 93. 
var. parviflora, Oliver I: 91. 
rupestris, auct. I: 85, 86. II: 16, 70. 
subcapitata, Simm. I: 11, 13, 87— 
92, 195. II: 29, 33, 40, 44, 70. 
Ill: 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 19, 20, 23. 
Wahlenbergii, Hartm. I: 85. II: 70. 
f. brachyearpa, Nath. I: 84. IL: 70. 


Dryas integrifolia, Vahl I: 13, 14, 43 
—46. II: 29, 33, 37, 45, 59— 
60. III: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, 19, 20, 
21, 23, 95. 
var. Canescens, Simm. I: 46. Il: 60. 
octopetala, L. I: 44, 45, 46. II: 21, 29, 
39, 45, 59, 60. 
f. intermedia, Nath. I: 45. IL: 60. 
var. argentea, Blytt I: 46. 
var. hirsuta, Hartz I: 46. 
var. integrifolia, Cham. & Schlecht. 
I: 43. II: 59, 
*integrifolia, Kruuse J: 43. 
octopetala, auct. I: 43. II: 16, 59. 
tenella, Pursh I: 48. 
Dryopteris fragrans, Schott I: 182. 
Dupontia Fisheri, R. Br. I: 13, 14, 161. 
t II: 31, 34, 38, 101. 
psilosantha, Rupr. I: 161. Il: 101. 


Elyna Bellardi, (All.) Koch I: 148— 
149. II: 31, 34, 37, 97. 
caricina, Mert. & Koch I: 148. 
spicata, Schrad. I: 148. 
Empetrum nigrum, L.J: 42—43. II: 29, 
33, 36, 59. III: 24. 
var. Andinum, (Philib.) DC. I: 42. 
var. purpureum, (Rafin.) DC. I: 
43. II: 59. 
var. rubrum, (Willd.) DC. I: 42. 
purpureum, Rafin. I: 43. 
rubrum, Durand I: 42. II: 59. 
Epilobium latifolium, L. I: 41. II: 58. 
Equisetum arvense, L. I: 180—181. 
II: 31, 35, 37, 107. 
f. arctica, Kruuse I: 180. 
var. alpestre, Wahlenb. I: 180. 
var. arcticum, Rupr. I: 180. 
var. boreale, (Bong.) Milde I: 180. 
var. riparium, (Fr.) Milde I: 180. 
II: 107. 
hiemale, L. A, tenellum, Liljebl. I: 181. 
riparium, Fr. I: 180. 
scirpoides, Michx. 1: 181. 
tenellum, Fr. I: 181. 
variegatum, Schleich. I: 181—182. 
Il: 31, 37. 
Erigeron Compositus, Pursh I: 13, 14, 
24—25. II: 98, 32, 37, 45, 51. 
var. trifidus, Greely [: 24, 
ertocephalus, J. Vahl I: 94. 
trifidus, Hook. I: 94. 
uniflorus, L. I: 24. If: 28, 37. 
Eriophorum angustifolium, Roth I: 150, 
151, 152. II: 98. 


4898—1902. No. 19.] 


STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OFN.DEVON. 31 


- Eriophorum capitatum, Host I: 149. 1:97. 
var. Scheuchzeri, Hart I: 149. 
gracile, Koch I: 151, 152. 
latifolium, Hoppe I: 151, 152. 
polystachium, L. I: 36, 150—153. 
Il: 31, 34, 37, 98. 
f. triste, (Th. Fr.) Ostenf. I: 153. 
var. elatior, Hart I: 150. 
Scheuchzeri, Hoppe I: 149—150. 
II: 31, 34, 37, 97-98. 
triquetrum, Hoppe I: 152. 
vaginatum, L. I: 149. II: 15, 96, 98. 
vaginatum, auct. I: 149. IT: 97. 
Eutrema arenicola, Richards. I: 80. 
Edwardsii, R. Br. I: 18, 14, 97. 
II: 30, 33, 88, 72. 


Festuca borealis, Mert. & Koch I: 154, 
brevifolia, R. Br. I: 154. 
ovina, L. I: 6, 154—155, 156. IT: 31, 
34, 37, 98—99. III: 6, 19, 28, 
24, 25. 
var. alpina, (Suter) I: 154. 
var. brevifolia, (R. Br.) Hart I: 154, 
155, 156. IT: 98, 99. 
var. Supina, (Schur) Hackel I: 155. 
Ill: 8. 
var. violacea, auct. I: 154. II: 98. 
*borealis, Lange I: 154. 
*brevifolia, Hackel I: 154. 
*euovina, Hack. var. supina, Hack. 
subvar. grandiflora, Hack. I: 155. 
rubra, L. I: 154, 156. II: 31, 41. 
supina, Schur I: 155. 
violacea, Gaud. I: 154. II: 99. 


Gastrolychnis angustiflora, Rupr. I: 125. 
Vahlii, Rupr. I: 126. 
: Gentiana fenella, Rottb. II: 29, 89, 45. 
Glyceria angustata, (R. Br.) Th. Fr. 
I: 18, 156—158. IL: 21, 31, 34, 
37, 99—100. III: 12, 18, 20. 
‘angustata, auct. I: 158, 161. II: 100. 
arctica, Hook. [: 158. 
distans, (L.) Wahlenb. I: 157, 158— 
159. IL: 22, 31, 34, 37, 99, 100. 
Ill: 8, 9, 11, 19, 20. 
var. arctica, (Hook.) Gel. I: 157, 
158. IL: 100. 
var. reptans, Hartm. I: 159. 
var.. vaginata, (Lange) Gel. I: 158. 
II: 100. UI: 7, 11, 12. 
fluitans, R. Br. I: 170, 178. 
Kjellmani, Lange I: 156. 
Langeana, Berlin II: 99. 


Glyceria maritima, (Huds.) Wahlb. I: 
159. II: 31, 34, 37. 
f. palustris, Anderss. I: 159. 
f. vilfoidea, Gel. I: 159. 
var. arenaria, Fr. I: 156, 159, 160. 
II: 101. 
var. arenaria, Berlin I: 156. 
var. reptans, (Hartm ). Simm. I: 124, 
159—160. II: 100—101. 
reptans, Krok I: 159. 
tenella, Lange I: 157. II: 31,34, 40,99. 
vaginata, Lange I: 158. 
var. contracta, Lange I: 156. 
Vahliana, (Liebm.) Th. Fr. I: 13, 156. 
Il: 31, 34, 37, 99. III: 7. 
Vahliana, Th. Holm I: 156. 
vilfoidea, Th. Fr. I: 159. II: 100, 101. 
Gnaphalium alpinum, L. I: 23. 


Halianthus peploides, Fr. I: 77. 
Hesperis Hookeri, Ledeb. I: 77. 
Pallasii, (Pursh) Torr. & Gray 1: 13, 
14, 77—78. II: 2%, 29, 33, 40, 
45, 67. III: 94. 
pygmaea, Del. I: 77. 
pygmaea, Hook. I: 77. 
Hierochloa alpina, (Liljebl.) Roem. & 
Schult. I: 179. II: 31, 34, 37, 107. 
borealis, Durand II: 107. 
Holcus alpinus, Swartz I: 179. 
Honkenya peploides, (L.) Ehrh. II: 30, 
33, 41, 77, 95. 
var. diffusa, (Hornem.) Kruuse II: 77. 
Juncoides hyperboreum, Britton & Brown 
I; 133. 


nivale, Britton & Brown I: 135. 


Juncus arcuatus, Wahlenb. I; 133. 
biglumis, L. I: 132—133. II: 30, 34, 
36, 39. III: 7, 8, 9. 
castaneus, Sm. II: 30, 41. 
triglumis, L. IT: 30, 41. 


Kobresia bipartita, (All.) D. Torre: I: 18, 
14, 148. II: 31, 42. 
caricina, Willd. I: 148. 
’nardina, Hornem. I: 147. 
scirpina, Willd. I: 148. lI: 97. 
Koenigia islandica, L. II: 30, 42. 


Lastraea fragrans, Presl I: 182. 
Leontodon palustre, Hook. I: 20. 
Lesquerella arctica, (Wormskj.) Wats. 
1: 18, 14, 95. IL: 22, 30, 33, 37, 
45, 72. 


32 H. G. SIMMONS. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Lithospermum maritimum, Lehm. II: 54. 
Loiseleuria procumbens, (L.) Desy. II: 33, 
57. 
Luzula arctica, Blytt I: 134, 135. II: 90, 91. 
arcuata, (Wahlenb.) Swartz I: 133, 134, 
135. II: 30, 34, 36, 89, 90, 91, 92. 
var. confusa, (Lindeb.) Kjellm. 1: 133 
—135. Il: 89--92. III: 19, 21, 
22, 23, D4. 
f. subspicata, (Lange) I: 134. 11:91. 
var. hyperborea, Anderss. & Hesselm. 
I: 133. 
var. latifolia, Kjellm. 1: 1384, 135. 
campestris, (L.) DC. II: 89. 
var. congesta, auct. I: 133. II: 90, 92. 
var. nivalis, Laest. I: 135. 
confusa, Lindeb. I: 188, 134. 
var. latifolia, (Kjellm.) Buchen. I: 135. 
hyperborea, R. Br. I: 188, 134, 135. 
II: 89, 90. 
multiflora, (Ehrh.) Lej. I: 90, 91. 
var. congesta, Lange II: 91. 
nivalis, (Laest.) Beurl. I: 134, 135— 
136. Il: 30, 34, 38, 89, 90, 91, 
92. III: 19, 20, 21, 23, 24. 
spicata, (L.) DC. I: 184. II: 21, 34, 91, 
92—93. 
var. Kjellmani, Nath. II: 91, 92. 
Lychnis affinis, J. Vahl I: 195. II: 80. 
var. triflora, Hart II: 81. 
apetala, L. I: 127. Il: 80, 81. 
var. involucrata, Cham. & Schecht. 
I: 125, 126. 
pauciflora, Ledeb. II: 80. 
pauciflora, Durand II: 80, 81. 
triflora, F]. Dan. I: 125. II: 81. 
Lycopodium annotinum, L. II: 14. 
Selago, L. I: 179—180. II: 31, 34, 
37, 107. 
var. adpressa, Desv. I: 179. 


Melandrium affine, J. Vahl I: 125—126. 
II: 30, 34, 37, 80—81. III: 24, 95. 
apetalum, (L.) Fenzl I: 125, 126, 127. 
II: 30, 34, 38, 80, 81—82. 
f. glabrum, (Regel) I: 197. 
var. arcticum, (Th. Fr.) I: 127. 
involucratum, (Cham. & Schlecht.) Rohrb. 
var. affine, Rohrb. 1: 125. II: 80. 
triflorum, R.Br.) Vahl I: 125, 126. 
II: 30, 34, 39, 47, 81. 
Mertensia maritima, (L.) S. F. Gray 
II: 29, 82, 42, 54, 
Molinia distans, (L.) Hartm. var. reptans, 
Hartm. I: 159. 


Montia fontana, L. II: 40, 82, 83. 
var. chondrosperma, Fenzl II: 83. 
var. Jamprosperma, Fenzl II: 83. 
*lamprosperma, Lindb. fil. I: 82, 83. 
*minor, Lindb. fil. II: 83. 
var. rivularis, Lindb. fil. I: 83. 
lamprosperma, Cham. II: 30, 34, 
40, 82—83. 
minor, Gmel. Il: 83. 
rivularis, Gmel. I: 82, 83. 
f. lamprosperma, Blytt II: 82. 
*lamprosperma, Neum. II: 82. 
Myrtillus wliginosa, (L.) Drej. Il: 29, 
. 83, 36. 
f. Kruhsiana, (Fisch.) I: 38. 
var. microphylla, (Lange) Simm. 
I: 37—38. II: 56. 
Nemopanthes fascicularis, Rafin. Il: 56. 


Oxyria digyna, (L.) Hill. I: 40, 129. 
II: 30, 34, 36, 84. IIL: 8, 19, 20. 
reniformis, Hook. I: 129. II: 84. 


Papaver alpinum, L. I: 99. 
var. nudicaule, Ledeb. I: 99. 
alpinum, auct. I: 99, 100. II: 16, 73. 
nudicaule, auct. I: 99, 100. Il: 73. 
radicatum, Rottb. 1: 99—101. II: 30, 
33, 36, 73—74. III: 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 
12, 14, 19, 20, 28, 24, 95, 26. 
f.schizopetala, Simm. I: 100, 101. 
var. Hartianum, Simm. I: 100, 101. 
Il: 73. Ill: 8. 
Parrya arenicola, Hook. I: 80. 
Pedicularis acaulis, Wulf. I: 27. 
arctica, R.Br. I: 13, 14, 29, 30, 31—- 
34, 195. Il: 22, 28, 32, 40, 45, 53. 
capitata, Adams I: 13, 14, 26—27. 
Il: 28, 32, 40, 45, 52. TIL: 23, 95. 
elata, Willd. I: 30. 
flammea, L. II: 28, 32, 42, 53. 
flammea, Hart I: 27, 28. 
hirsuta, L. 1: 27—29, 31, 32, 33, 195. 
Il: 28, 82, 38, 52,53. LI: 8, 20, 23. 
hirsuta, auct. I: 29. 
Kanei, Durand I: 29, II: 52, 53. 
Kanei, Tayl. I: 27. 
lanata, Cham. & Schlecht. I: 12, 14, 28, 
29—31, 32, 33, 195. II: 28, 32, 40, 
52—53. 
Langsdorfii, Stev. I: 28, 29, 30, 31, 32 
var. lanata, Greely I: 29. II: 53. 
lapponica, L. 1: 34. 1: 32, 53. 
Nelsoni, R. Br. I: 26. 
Oederi, Vahl I: 28. 


1898-1902, No. 19.] 


STRAY CONBRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N. DEVON, 33 


PedicularisSceptrum carolinwmn, L.1:26,27, 
striata, Pall. I: 30. 
sudetica, L. I: 28, 
sudetica, Hart [: 27, 28. 
sylvatica, L. I: 33. 
Phippsia algida, R. Br. I: 170. I: 104. 
monandra, Hook. I: 170. I: 104 
Platypetalum purpurascens, R.Br. I: 78. 
Pleuropogon Sabinei, R. Br. I: 
169—170, 178. IL: 31, 34, 41, 
103-104. 

f, aquatica, Simm. I: 170, 197. 

f. terrestris, Simm. I; 170, 197. 
Pneumaria maritima, (L.) Hill ll: 54. 
Poa abbreviata, R.Br. I: 13, 14, 164 

—165. II: 31, 34, 38, 102. III: 6, 
8, 19, 20. 
alpina, L. I: 162, 166—167, 168. II: 16, 
31, 34, 41, 102. 
alpina, auct. Il: 103. 
angustata, R. Br. I: 156. 
arctica, R. Br. I: 167. IL: 103. 
attenuata, Trin. I: 162. 
caesia, Smith I: 161. Ii: 101. 
cenisia, All. I: 164, 167—168, 169. 
lI: 16, 31, 34, 37, 102-103. 
Ill: 8, 28, 24. 
colpodea, Th. Fr. I: 168. 
distans, L. 1: 158. 
evagans, Simm. I: 10, 13, 165—166, 
196, 197. II: 31, 41. 
filipes, Lange I: 167. 
flexuosa, Host I: 167. II: 102, 103. 
glauca, M. Vahl I: 157, 161—164, 167, 
168, 197. II: 31,34, 37, 101—102. 
Ill: 26. 


var. arenaria, Hartz I: 162, 164, 165. | 


var. atroviolacea, Lange I: 162, 163. 
f. prolifera, Simm. I: 163, 164. 
Ill: 20. 
var. €latior, (Anderss.) Lange I: 162, 
164. If: 101. 
var. pallida, Lange I: 162. 
var. tenuior, Simm. I: 162, 164, 197. 
II: 101. 
laxa, Haenke I: 167, 168. 
nemoralis, Hart I: 161. 
pratensis, L. 1: 167, 168, 169, 196. 
Il: 31, 34, 37, 103. 
var. alpigena, Blytt I: 169. 
pratensis, Meehan II: 103. 
stenantha, Trin. I: 163. 
stricta, Lindeb. I: 163, 168. 
trichopoda, Lange I: 167. 
Vahliana, Liebm. [: 156. IL: 99. 


13, 14, | 


Polemonium humile, Willd. IL: 29, 89, 45. 
Polygonum viviparum, L. I: 40, 128 — 
129. Il: 30, 34 36, 83.84. 
III: 6, 20, 93, 
f. alpinum, Wahlenb. I: 198, 
Polypodium fragile, L. I: 182. 
fragrans, L. I: 182. 
Polystichum fragrans, Ledeb. 1: 189. 
Potentilla altaica, Bunge I: 50, 52. 
anserina, L. 1: 54. I: 33, 61, 
dasyphylla, Bunge 1: 48. 
emarginata, Pursh 1: 56-58, 59. 
II: 29, 33, 88, 63-64. IIT: 19, 
21, 23, 25, 26. 
emarginata, Desf. I: 56. 
fragiformis, (Willd.) Schlecht, I: 56, 
57, 58. 
var. parviflora, Trautv. I: 56, 58. 
fragiformis, auct. I: 56, IL: 63. 
frigida, Vill. 1: 56. ° 
frigida, auet. 1: 56. IL: 63. 
grandifiora, L. var. parviflora, Trauty. 
T: 56. 
hirsuta, Fl. Dan. 4: 55, 
Hookeriana, Lehm. ll: 62. 
Jamesoniana, Grev. I: 55. 
maculata, Pourr. 1:56, 59. II: 29, 42, 64. 
maculata, auct. I: 56. 
multifida, L. I: 53. 
nana, ( Willd.) Schlecht. 1: 56,57, 58. 11:63. 
nivea, L. I: 47, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 
58. IL: 29, 33, 41, 61-63 
var. altaica, Rydb. I: 50, 52. 
var. concolor, Durand II: 68, 64. 
var. hirsuta, auct. I: 55. 
var. pallidior, Swartz II: 62. 
var. pentaphylla, Lehm. I: 50, 52,53. 
II: 62. 
var. pinnatifida, Lehm. I: 52,53, II: 62. 
var. pulchella, Durand I: 47. 
var. subquinata, Lange I: 50, 52, 53. 
var. subquinata, Greely I: 50, 54. 
var. subviridis, Lehm. II: 62. 
nivea, auct. I: 47, 50, 55. I: 61, 63. 
pulchella, R. Br. I: 12, 47-49, 51, 
52, 54, 55, II: 29, 33, 38, 60-61. 
II: 7, 19, 24, 25. 
f. elatior, Dusén 1: 50. 
var. elatior, Lange I: 49. 
pulchella, auct. I: 50,55. II: 61. 
quinquefolia, Rydb. 1: 50, 53. 
rubricaulis, Lehm. I: 13, 14, 48, 50 
—54, 196. II: 29, 33, 41, 45, 60, 
61, 62. III: 22, 25. 
var. arctica, Simm. I: 51, 53. 


3 


34 H. G. SIMMONS. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Potentilla sericea, L. I: 48. 
var. dasyphylla, (Bunge) Ledeb. I: 48. 
var. dasyphylla, Trautv. I: 47, 48. 
Sommerfeltii, Lehm. I: 47, 48, 49. 
subjuga, Rydb. I: 53. 
subquinata, (Lange) Rydb. I: 52, 53. 
tridentata, Soland. II: 33, 64. 
Vahliana, Lehm. I: 13, 14, 47, 53, 54, 
55—56, 195. II: 22, 29, 33, 40, 
45, 62, 63. III: 22. 
Puccinellia distans, (L.) Parl. 1: 158. 
Pulmonaria maritima, L. IL: 54. 
Pyrola chlorantha, auct. [: 40. II: 58. 
grandiflora, Rad. I: 40. 
groenlandica, Hornem. I: 40. 
rotundifolia, L. I: 41. IL: 29, 33, 36. 
var. grandiflora, (Rad.) DC. I: 40 
—41. Il: 58. 
var. pumila, Hornem. I: 40. II: 58. 
var. arenaria, Koch I: 40. 


Ranunculus affinis, R. Br. I: 13, 14,101 
—108, 196. II: 30, 33, 38, 74. 
*Wilanderi, Nath. I: 104. 
altaicus, Laxm. I: 108, 109. 
amoenus, Ledeb, I; 101, 103, 104. 
arcticus, Richards. I: 101, 103, aie 


auricomus, L. 1: 1038, 107. 
var. sibiricus, Glehn I: 103. 
auricomus, auct. I: 101, 108, 111. 
dahuricus, Turez. I: 103, 104. 
frigidus, Dickie II: 74. 
frigidus, Willd. I: 109. 
glacialis, L. 1: 112. II: 30, 39, 45. 
hyperboreus, Rottb. I: 115. II: 30, 
33, 36, 76. 
nivalis, L. 1: 103, 107, 108, 109, 110, 
111, 112, 113. IL: 30, 38, 36, 75, 
76. II: 19, 20. 
var. Freiligrathi, Bessels II: 75. 
var. sulphureus, Ledeb. I: 108. 
nivalis, auct. I: 108, 111, 114. IL: 74. 
ovalis, Rafin. I: 104. 
pedatifidus, Smith I: 101, 102, 108, 
104, 106, 107. 
pedatifidus, Hook. I: 101, 103. 
pedatifidus, auct. I: 101. 
pygmaeus, Wabhlenb. I: 111, 112, 113, 
114. IL: 30, 33, 37, 76. 
var. Sabinei, Davis I: 111, 112. 
rhomboidalis, Goldie I: 104. 
rhomboideus, Goldie I: 105. 
Sabinei, R. Br. [: 13, 14, 107, 110, 
Ill—114, 195. II: 22, 30, 38, 40, 
45, 76. IIL: 19. 


Ranunculus Sabinei affinis, Durand I: 111. 
IL: 76. 
sulphureus, Soland. I: 108—109, 110, 
113. II: 30, 33, 36, 74—75. III: 8. 
Rheum digynum, Wahlenb. I: 129. 
Rhodiola rosea, L. II: 29, 41. 
Rhododendron lapponicum, (L.) Wah- 
lenb. II: 29, 33, 41, 57—58. 
Rumex digynus, L. 1: 129. 


Sagina caespitosa, (Vahl) I: 119. 
intermedia, Fenzl I: 13, 119. IL: 30, 37. 
nivalis, (Lindbl.) Fr. I: 119. Il: 30, 49. 

Salix altaica, Ledeb. I: 130. 
arctica, Pall. I: 6, 40, 130-132, 196. 

Il: 18, 22, 30, 34, 38, 85—87. 
Ill: 5, 7, 8, 9, 19, 20, 21, 24, 95. 
var. Brownii, Anderss. I: 130, 131, 
132. II: 38, 86, 87. 
var. groenlandica, Anderss. I: 131, 
132. II: 38, 86, 87. 
arctica, R. Br. I: 180. II: 85, 86. 
Brownii (Anderss.) Lundstr. I: 181. 
Il: 85, 86. 
Bronnii, Bebb I: 130. IL: 85, 86. 
cordifolia, Pursh I: 130. 
glauca, L. I: 181. IL: 18, 34, 85, 86, 87. 
var. subarctica, Lundstr. I: 181. 
groenlandica, (Anderss.) Lundstr. I: 130. 
2 Il: 18, 86. 
herbacea, L. I: 131. II: 30, 34, 41, 
85, 87-88. 
lanata, L. U: 85. 
Pallasii, Anderss. I: 180. 
polaris, Wahlenb. [: 181. II: 88. ~ 
reticulata, L. I: 180, 131. 
wva ursti, Pursh II: 85. 
Savastana alpina, (Sw.) Seribn. 1: 179. 
Saxifraga aizoides, L. I: 12, 64. II: 29, 
33, 36, 65. 
bronchialis, L. 1: 67. 
caespitosa, L. I: 70, 71, 74, 75. IL: 66. 
cernua, L. I: 75—76. II: 29, 33, 36, 
66—67. III: 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 
19, 20, 24. 
Chamissoi, Sternb. I: 66, 67, 76. 
comosa, Britton I: 69. 
- decipiens, Ehrh. I: 70, 71, 72. 
var. caespitosa, Engl. I: 70, 71. 
exarata, Hook. I: 73. 
exarata, Vill. I: 73, 74, 75. 
flagellaris, Willd. I: 13, 14, 62—64. 
II: 29, 33, 41, 65. IIL: 8, 9, 19, 23. 
var. setigera, Engl. I: 62. 
foliolosa, R. Br. I: 69. Il: 66. 


1898—1902. No. 19.] 


STRAY CONTRIBUT. TO THE BOTANY OF N.DEVON. 35 


Saxifraga groenlandica, L. I: 70—73. 
II: 29, 38, 86, 66. III: 7, 8, 9, 
11, 12, 14, 19, 20, 23, 25. 
f. flavescens, Simm. I: 72, 73. 
{I 12. 
var. uniflora, (R. Br.) Simm. I: 71— 
72, 73, 74. Il: 66. 
*exaratoides, Simm. I: 13, 73— 
75, 196. Il: 29, 41, 
hieraciifolia, Waldst. & Kit. II: 29, 39, 45. 
Hirculus, L. I: 12, 14, 64—66. II: 29, 
49, 44, 45. IIL: 6, 23. 
var. alpina, Engl. I: 64. 
var. alpina, Lange I: 64. 
var. propinqua, (R. Br.) Simm. 1:65. 
var. uniflora, Sternb. I: 64, 65. 
hyperborea, R. Br. I: 76. 
Laurentiana, Ser. I: 76. 
mixta, Lap. I: 78, 74. 
moschata, Wulf. I: 70. 
nivalis, L. [: 67-69, 78. II: 29, 33, 
36, 66. ILL: 6, 7, 8, 19, 20. 
var. tenuior, Wahlenb. I: 67. 
var. tenuis, Wahlenb. I: 67. 
var, ramosa, Engl. 1: 68. 
nivalis, auct. 1: 69. 
oppositifolia, L. I: 6, 60—62, 181. 
Il: 22, 29, 33, 36, 52, 64-65. 
Ill: 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 19, 20, 22, 
94, 25, 26. 
f. pulvinata, Anderss. & Hesselm. 


I: 61, 122. 
f.reptans, Anderss. & Hesselm. 
I: 61. 


pauciflora, Sternb. I: 68. 
petiolaris, R. Br. I: 76. 
propinqua, R. Br. I: 64, 65. 
rivularis, L. I: 76—77. II: 29, 38, 36, 
67, 76. III: 7. 
var. hyperborea, (R. Br.) Lange I: 76. 
var. purpurascens, Lange I: 76. 
II: 67. 
setigera, Pursh I: 62. 
stellaris, L. I: 69. IL: 29, 33, 36, 66. 
var.comosa, Retz. I: 69 —70. II: 66. 
Ill: 7, 19. 
var. prolifera, Sternb. I: 69. 
tricuspidata, Rottb. I: 18, 14, 66— 
67, 76. II: 29, 38, 37, 45, 65. 
III: 22, 23, 25. 
f. integrifolia, Van Hoff. I: 67. 
uniflora, R. Br. I: 71. 
vaginata, Sternb. I: 76. 
virginiensis, Michx. I: 69, 70. 
virginiensis, Hart I: 69. 


Selerochloa Borreri, Bab. I: 158. 
Silene acaulis, L. 1: 127—128. IL: 30, 
34, 36, 82. II]: 22, 93. 

Sisymbrium humifusum, Vahl I: 80. 
pygmaeum, Trauty. I: 77. 

Spergula saginoides, Hook. I: 119. 

var. nivalis, Lindbl. I: 119. 

Statice Armeria, L. [: 34, 35. 
labradorica, (Wallr.) I: 35. 
maritima, Mill. 1: 35, 36. IL: 14, 29, 

32, 36. 
var. Sibirica, (Turcz.) Simm. I: 34 
—36. Il: 55. 
sibirica, Ledeb. I: 34, 35. 

Steenhammera maritima, Reichenb. II: 54. 

Stellaria Edwardsii, R. Br. I: 124. 
humifusa, Rottb. I: 124. Il: 30, 34, 

36, 79, 80. 
laeta, Richards. I: 124. 
longipes, Goldie I: 124—125. II: 30, 
34, 36, 80. III: 7, 8, 9, 19, 20, 
. 21, 28, 24. 
var. Edwardsii, Meehan IL: 79. 
var. humilis, Fenzl I: 124 IL: 80. 
var. peduncularis, (Bunge) Fenzl 
II: 80. 
nitida, Hook. I: 124. 
peduncularis,Bunge IL: 80. 
stricta, Richards. I: 124. IL: 80. 
Stenhammaria maritima, (L.) Hartm. IT: 54. 


Taraxacum arcticum, (Trauty.) Dahlst. 
I: 91. IL: 28, 39, 45. 
arctogenum, Dahlst. II: 28, 32, 40, 
49, 50. 
ceratophorum, (Ledeb.) DC. Il: 50. 
Dens leonis, Hart I: 20, 24, 22. IL: 49. 
hyparcticum, Dablst. I: 13, 14, 20— 
21, 22, 195. Il: 28, 32, 40, 45, 
49, 50. 
officinale, Nath. 1: 21, 49, 50. 
officinale, Web. I: 21, 49. 
var. lividum, auct. II: 49, 50. 
var. pallidum, Greely 1: 20, 21, 99. 
palustre, (Ehrh.) 1: 49, 
phymatocarpum, J. Vahl 1: 13, 20, 
21. II: 28, 32, 39, 47, 49-50. 
phymatocarpum, auct. 1: 20. II: 49, 50. 
pumilum, Dahlst. I: 10, 11, 18, 21— 
22, 195, II: 28, 41. 
Tofieldia borealis, Wahlenb. I: 88. 
palustris, Huds. Il: 14, 30, 34, 41, 
88-89. 
Trisetum airoides, Roem. & Sch. I: 171. 
sesquiflorum, Meehan II: 104. 


36 H. G. SIMMONS. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Trisetum spicatum, (L.) Richt. I: 171— 
172. I: 31, 34, 37, 104. IL: 23. 
subspicatum, (L.) Pal. de Beauy. I: 171, 
172. IT: 104. 
var. molle, Gray I: 171. 
Triticum repens, L. var. nanum, Hook. 
1: 153. 
var. purpurascens. Hook. 1: 1538. 
violaceum, Hornem. I: 153. 
Turritis mollis, Hook. II: 68. 


Vaccinium mucronatum, L. II: 56. 

pubescens, Hornem. I: 37, 

uliginosum, L. I: 87, IL: 56. 
var. microphyllum, (Lange) Nath. I: 37. 

II: 56. 

var, mucronatum, Weth. II: 56. 
var. pubescens, Lange I: 37. 
*microphyllum, Lange I: 37. 
Vitis idaea, L. II: 29, 33, 42, 56. 


Vesicaria arctica, Richards. I: 95. II: 72, 
arenosa, Richards. I: 95. 
Vilfa arundinacea, Trin. I: 177. 


Wahblbergellaaffinis, Fr. I: 125, 126. 11: 80. 
angustiflora, Rupr. I: 125. 
apetala, (L.) Fr. I: 127. 
triflora, Fr. II: 81. 
Vahhi, Rupr. I: 126. 
Woodsia alpina, S. F. Gray I: 183. 
glabella, R. Br. I: 183, 184. I: 31, 
35, 37, 108. 
hyperborea, R. Br. I: 183. 
A arvonica, Milde I: 183. 
var. glabella, Trautv. I: 184. 
ilvensis, (L.) R. Br. I: 183, 184. 
II: 31, 37. 
var. alpina, (Bolt.) Aschers, & Graebn. 
I: 183-184. 
var. glabella, Gelert I: 184 II: 108. 


Printed June 30, 1909. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 20. 


JAMES A. GRIEG: 


BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS 


WITH A 


SUPPLEMENT TO THE ECHINODERMS 


(WITH A TABLE) 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 
(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A.W. BROGGER 
1909 


O: brachiopods brought back by the Second Fram Expedition 
from Jones Sound (Gaasefjord) one species, rhynchonella psittacea. Of 
molluses the collection of the Fram Expedition contained 54 species, viz. : 


Lamellibranchiata . . . 28 
Amphineura. . . . . . 
Gastropoda . . . . . . Q7 
Pteropoda. . . .... 1 
Cephalopoda. . 1 


Part of the mollusc material was collected off the west coast of 
Greenland at Egedesminde, Godhavn and Upernivik as well as the winter 
harbour of the Fram 1898—99 in Smith’s Sound (78° 45.7’ Lat. N. 74° 
56.5’ Long. W. of Greenwich); but the greater part was obtained from 
the north side of Jones Sound and especially from Havnefjord (76° 29.4’ 
Lat. N. 84° 4 Long. W.) where the Fram wintered in 1899—1900, and 
from Gaasefjord (76° 48.9’ Lat. N. 88° 39.5‘ Long. W.) where the Fram 
lay frozen in during the two winters 1900—0O1 and 1901—02. In the 
summer of 1901 a lengthy dredging excursion was undertaken up Hell 
Gate as far as Landsend (76° 50.9’ Lat. N. 89° 32’ Long. W.), and in the 
summer of 1902 the north side of North Devon was investigated between 
St. Helena (76° 15.5’ Lat. N. 89° 16.5’ Long. W.) and the entrance to 
Cardigan Strait and Norfolk Inlet (76° 21’ Lat. N. 90°30‘ Long. W.) which 
was the most westerly point at which zoological dredgings were under- 
taken. For special names of localities in this work I would refer the 
reader to the maps in Ritmester Isacusen’s Astronomical and geodetical 
observations (Rep. II Norweg. Arc. Exp. in the Fram 1898—1902, Vol. 2 
No. 5, 1907). 

The whole of the molluscs are shallow-water forms. Most of them 
are from depths less than 40 meters, and 60 meters is the greatest 
depth from which molluscs have been obtained. None of them are new 


to science. However the following 11 species were not formerly known 
1 


4 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


to occur in the waters North and West of Baffin Bay: crenella faba, 
tellina torelli, tellina moesta, tellina lovent, thracia truncata, thracia 
septentrionalis, pandora glacialis, pilidium radiatum, bela harpu- 
laria, trichotropis conica, dendronotus frondosus. 

It is with sincere pleasure that I here acknowledge the obligation 
I am under to Mr. Herman Frieve for his valuable advice and help 
during the composition of this work. Not least of all am I indebted to 
him for the liberality with which he has placed at my disposal his rich 
collection of arctic molluscs. I am also deeply indebted to Dr. An. S. 
Jensen for his kindness in looking through the material collected by the 
expedition belonging to the genus tellina. 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 5 


Brachiopoda. 


Rhynchonella psittacea, GMELIN. 
Locality: 
Sept. 20. 1900. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
July 17. 1901. _ ro = . 


Very common, but most of the specimens were dead. 
Length up to 27 mm. 


Mollusca. 
Lametllibranchiata. 


Nucula tenuis, Montacu. 
Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. - a _ 
July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord. 
July 31. 1900. Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord, 20—60 m. 


Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. , _ _ - . 30 m. Soft brown clay with alge. 
Aug. 2. 1901. _ _ _ , about 40 m. 

Aug. 2, _ _ _ , 2-4 m. Soft brown clay, with small 
Aug. 16. ,, _ - _ , about 14 m. [stones and sand. 


At the head of the Gaasefjord nucula tenuis was very common, 
but it was scarcer at other localities. 

Most of the specimens belong to the variety eapansa REEVE, 
though many of them can be referred to inflata, Hancock and others 
again are intermediate forms between these varities. I append measure- 
ments of some specimens from Rice Strait and Gaasefjord. 


Rice Strait Long. 17.2 mm. Lat. 14.2 mm. Crass. 9.5 mm. 
oe . 15, 12.2 ,. a. oy 
— 14.5 ,, TAB 80% 

= it oy BS ais TO <4 

Gaasefjord Long. 13 mm. Lat. 11. mm. Crass. 7 mm. 
-~ 12.5 ,. 10.5, Or 
= a ae i & 6 <x 
= 10,3 De 5g 6.5. 
= 10.5, Bd og DD y 


6 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Leda pernula, Miter. 


Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. ,, _ _ : 
July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 18 m. 
Sept. %  , - _ _ , 16 m. 
July 26. 1900. West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, about 20m. Clay. 
Sept. 19, Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Aug. 2 1901. — _ _ , about 40 m. 
Aug. 16. , _ - _ , about 14 m. 


At Rice Strait this species was quite common, whereas in Havne- 
fjord and Gaasefjord it was very scarce. 

The specimens belong to the variety costigera, Buck. In the speci- 
mens subjected to careful examination longitudinal mb on the inner side 
of the shell is well-developed, concentric striation is fine, shell is extre- 
mely thin and fragile. 

The largest specimens have a length of 26—27.5 mm., height 
13—14 mm., and breadth 7.5—8.5 mm. In the 25 specimens the height 
of the shell is 47.27—56.67 °/) of the Jength and the breadth (thickness) 
92.86—36.12 °/) of the length. In leda minuta the height of the 
shell is 56.25—58.33 °/, of the length, and the breadth 32.14—45.45 of 
the length. 


Leda minuta, Mi.u.er. 


Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. Ms - _ 2 
July 29, 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
Sept. 22. ,, _ - , 16 m. 


March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjopolse Ness, 30 40 m. Small stones slightly over- 
grown with laminaria. 

July 2%  , The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 

Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

July 9 1901. Renbugten. 


The species seems to be extremely scarce, since at no locality were 
more than one or two specimens found. The largest specimen measure: 
Long. 18 mm. Lat. 10.5 mm. — Crass. 7.5 mm. 

165, 55, a 


Yoldia, portlandia, arctica, Gray. 
Locality: 


Sept. 19. 1900. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay wih small stones. 
Aug. 2. 1901. = _ - , about 40 m. 
Aug. 2 4 _ — _ , 2-4 m. Soft brown clay with small 
Aug. 16. ‘S _ _ _ , about 14 m. [stones and sand. 


1898—1902. No. 20.] 


BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 7 


Very common; at the last-named dredging station nearly 600 speci- 
mens were obtained. 

The specimens, which have a length of up to 23 mm. belong partly 
to the variety portlandia, Hrrcucock and partly to the variety siliqua, 
Reeve. The majority belong to intermediate forms. I append some 
measurements of specimens which were taken at the same time at the 


head of the Gaasefjord: 
Long. 23. mm. Lat. 13.5 mm. Crass. 10.2 mm. 


995, 18, 95 , 
99.2, 107. 87, 
2 , 13, 10.5, 
5 , 122, ae 
WAS , 12.5, 95 , 
a, 125, Ss . 
90.7. 125, 9 , 
0.5 13, a 
0. ito; Se: | 
19.5. ie 2 73 4 
9. 125, 8.5 

18 « 122, B 4 
7 105, 65 , 


Thus in these specimens the height of the shell is 56.74—67.78 %/, 
of the length and the breadth 35.34—47.73 °/) of the length: in some 
other specimens I have found moreover that the breadth of the shell 
can be as much as 49.11 °/> of the length. 


Yoldia hyperborea, Lovrn. 
Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Sept. 19. 1900. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. , The head of the Gaasefjord, 6-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Aug. 2 1901. a _ _ , about 40 m. 


The species seems to be very scarce, since not more than at most 
3 specimens have been found at any locality. 

The specimens quite accord with specimens from Spitzbergen and 
Novaya Zemlya in the Bergen Museum. The height of the shell varies 
between 49.3 /) and 55.9 °/, of the length, while its breath (thickness) 
is between 25°, and 31 °/o of its length. In a specimen 31 mm. long 
there were anteriorly 25 hinge-teeth and posteriorly 20 hinge-teeth. In 
a specimen 25 mm. long the number of hinge-teeth were 24 and 20 


8 JAMES A. GRIEG. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


respectively. In specimens from Spitzbergen I have found the numbers 
to be 22—26/16--22. Accordmg to Tore. they are 29/23. In speci- 
mens from the Siberian Polar Sea Lecue found 23/14 teeth. Krause 
found 21/13 teeth in a specimen 31 mm. long from the Bering Sea. 
According to PosseLT moreover yoldia hyperborea may have as many 
as 38/32 teeth. 

The largest specimens measure: 


Rice Strait Long. 34.5 mm. Lat. 17 mm. Crass. 9.5 mm. 
— 315 , 16, 85, 

Gaasefjord 99 Oy 15.5, ae 
= % «i, 14.5 ,, ta % 


A right valve from Gaasefjord had a length of 31 mm. Possext 
gives the maximum size of this species as 45 mm. 

Yoldia hyperborea is not mentioned by either Posse.t or HAGe, in 
their treatises on the distribution of this species, as occurring in waters 
north of America. But as has been already remarked by Torext it must 
be this species which under the name of nucula sapotilla Reeve 
mentions as occurring in the Wellington Channel. 


Mytilus edulis, Line. 
Locality: 
July 20. 1898. Egedesminde. 
July 30. , Godhavn, about 6 m. 


The largest specimen has a length of 78 mm. 


Modiolaria laevigata, Gray. 


Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Camp Clay, Cape Sabine, 4—10 m. 
Aug. 2%. ,, Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. ,, - = ; 
July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
Sept. 22. ,, _ — _ , 16 m. 
July 25. 1900. — , about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
July 2. ast: side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, about 20m. Clay. 
July 30. a The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 
July 31. ‘ Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord, 20—60 m. 
Aug. 3. , Fosheim Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord. 4—40 m. 
Sept. 19. , Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
June 28. 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. 
July 8. “ Renbugten, about 20 m. 
July 9% 4 _ ‘ 
July 12. ma Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 
Aug. 2. The head of the Gaasefjord, about 40 m. 


Aug. 


, about 14 m. 


1998-1902. No. 20.] 


BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 


© 


Aug. 30. 1901. Gaasefjord, 8 m. Small stones and clay with fucaceae. 
July 11. 1902. St. Helena, 4-14 m. Large and small stones over grown with 


fucaceae. 

July 15. , Off Havhestfjeld, North Devon. 

July 19% Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14 m. Small stones and 
algae. 


At no locality was modiolaria laevigata abundant. At most places 
the variety substriata Gray (m. laevis Beck) was met with together 
with the typical form, though the latter was more common than the 
variety. I append a few measurements of both forma typica and of 
substriata, showing how the species varies in regard to form. 

Forma typica: 
Rice Strait Long. 84 mm. Lat. 20 mm. Crass 14 mm. 


—_— 96.5 ,, AT 3, 12° 4 
_— 96.5, Te og, 11.5, 
Gaasefjord 31 7 19 2. 14. 7 
— 29 a. 74 12.5: 
_ 9 18, 1 
—_ 97 ; 18, 13) os 
Forma substriata: 
Gaasefjord 33g, 91.) 14~—«CO&««, 
— 99, 19 4 is 4 
— 20 —C«,, 13) 10, 
Havnefjord 19° 5 12° 5, 9 « 


Modiolaria nigra, Gray. 


Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. y _ — : 
Sept. 20. 1900. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Aug. 2 1901. — — _ , about 40 m. 
Aug. 16, — _ _ 


The species seems to be very scarce, since there are not more than 
one or two specimens from any locality. 
Rice Strait Long. 35 mm. Lat. 18 mm. — Crass. 11.5 mm. 


= WC, 16, 10, 
= 19, 1 ug 71 x 
Gaasefjord 45, Qh, 15 4 
= 435, 3  , 12 =~, 
= 38.5, 20.5 » ae 


In specimens from Rice Strait the epidermis is either olive-brown 
or dark-brown, in specimens from Gaasefjord it is olive-brown or black. 


10 JAMES A. GRIEG. [ SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Crenella faba, O. F. Miuer. 


(Fig. 1.) 
Locality: 
July 29. 1898. Egedesminde. 
Aug. 5. y Upernivik, 8—26 m. 
Aug. 18 =, Camp Clay, Cape Sabine, 4—10 m. 


July 30. 1900. The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 

At Upernivik this characteristic West Greenland species was quite 
common, whereas from each of the other localities only one or two 
specimens were obtained. 

According to Cressin crenella faba attains a size of 12 mm., though 
PossELt on the other hand gives its size as 18mm. Three of the Fram 
Expedition’s specimens measured: 


Upernivik Long. 8.5 mm. — Lat. 7) mm. Crass. 4.5 mm. 
Egedesminde 10.2. 85 , 5.0, 
Stordalen 13. x 10.2 , 6 yy 


In quite young specimens the radiating ribs are seen also on the 
inner side of the. shell, whereas in older individuels they only appear as 
a narrow band at the edge. Otherwise the inner side is smooth. 
According to Cressin the inner side of the shell is light-brown, but in 
the specimens which I examined it was of a lustrous bluish-white, and 
only at the edge of the shell was there a brown rim. 

Crenella faba has not previously been met with in the waters 
north and west of Baffin Bay. Formerly it was only known to occur 
on the west coast of Greenland, where it is distributed from Ivigtut to 
Melville Bay, 0O—470 m., and at Cumberland Sound, Baffin Land (Prerrer, 
Daut). It is also said to have been found at Iceland, though accord- 
ing to Possett this is doubtful. 


Pecten gronlandicus, Sowrrsy. 
Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. ‘ - _ : 
July 22. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 16 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjopolse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stown 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


July 18 , The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones and clay. 
July 1. - — = = ; about 60m. Stones and lithothamnia. 
July 22. “i — a _ , about 60 m. Small stones. 

July 2%.  , - _ — , about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
July 26. ,, West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnetjord, 20 m. Clay. 
July 27. és The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 40 m. 

Aug. 1. , Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. Up to 20 m. Sinall stones 


with some clay. 


1898— 1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 11 
Aug. 1. 1900. Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50m. Small stones. 
Au. 4 4 Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Small stones. 

Aug 4  y Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 7 East Cape, Havnefjord, 20—50 m., 

Sept. 9. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 


This species was very common off Stordalen, East Cape, the head 
of the Gaasefjord and in particular off Forvisningsdalen. In the other 
localities it was more scattered and scarcer. 

The largest specimens from Rice Strait measure: Long. 28 mm. 
Lat. 261.5 mm. In specimens from Jones Sund these measurements are: 
32.5 mm. and 30 mm. respectively. According to KnipowirscH the 
species attains the same size at Spitzbergen. On the east coast of 
Greenland according to JENSEN it attains a length of 28.5 mm. Co Lin 
gives 28 mm. as the size it attains in the Kara Sea. 

In most of the specimens the valves were of equal size, though in 
a few instances the edge of the left valve projected very slightly beyond 
that of the right. (Cf. Cotntin and Jensen). 


Astarte borealis, CHEMNITZ. 


Locality: 
Aug. 18. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 2%.  ,, _ - : 
Aug. 96. , _ _ , about 40 m. 
July 26. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
Sept. 92. — _ , 14 m. 


March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 
Aug: ls 4 Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 10—50 m. Small stones. 


Aug. 7. y East Cape, Havnefjord, 20—50 m. 
Sept. 19. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 


” 
July 8. 1901. Renbugten, about 20 m. 
July 12. 5 Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 
Aug. 30. , Gaasefjord, 8 m. Clay with small stones and fucaceae. 
July 19. 1902, Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14 m. Small stones. 


In Rice Strait and at the winter harhour Havnefjord this species 
was very common. In Gaasefjord and off the camping ground North 
Devon it was common, but in the remaining localities it only occurred 
sparsely. 

The specimens may exhibit considerable variations. Thus in 25 
specimens the height of the shell varied between 74.1 °/) and 93 Oy of 
the length, while the breadth (thickness) of the shell varied between 
31.7%) and 50°/, of the length. I append measurements of some of 


these specimens: 


12 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 
Havnefjord Long. 41 mm. Lat. 33> mm. Crass. 14 mm. 
Forvisningsdalen 39 30)—Ci«y, 135) 

= 33g 30.5, 13.5, 
— 38, ; — pss ae 
Gaasefjord 31D. 4 32 - i) ae 
— 36, 30, Tae oo 
Rice Strait 35. 32, 14 —C&, 
= 34—Ci«, 30, 4 =~, 
= a0 lw 98 CO, aes 
—_ 30.—Ct, 5 iy 5 4 
= a 20 —C. 9 , 
— 26: B12 85, 


The 


specimens may be referred to the variety placenta, Morcu 


and the kindred variety withami (Woop) Lecue. This latter however 


is scarce. 


The cyprinoid form (astarte cyprinoides Duva.) which occurs 


on the northern coasts of Norway, and which is also found on the 


west coast of Greenland, was entirely absent from the material of the 


Fram Expedition. 


Locality: 
Aug. 5. 1898. Upernivik, 8—26 m 
Aug. 18, Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 26. ,, _ - 
July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
Sept. 22. ,, _ - , 16 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of ‘Sjopélse Ness, Biagnetari, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 
July 22, The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 40 m. 
July 2. +5 — - , about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
July 2%. , West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, about 20m. Clay 
Aug. 1. , Off the entrance to Stordalen, 10—50 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 3 4 Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havneijord, 
4—40 m. 
Aug. 4 4 Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 4 4 Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—80 m. Small stones. 
Sept. 19. , Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
June 28. 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. 
July 4 4 The sound, Jammerbugten. 
Judy 8 , Renbugten, about 20 m. 
July 9% - . 
July 12. ,, Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 
July 19, Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14m. Small stones and algae. 
Aug 2 4 The head of the Gaasefjord, about 40 m. 
Aug. 16. _ _ , about 14 m. 
July 15. 1902. Off Haviiesitjela, North Devon. Stones and large fucaceae. 
Aug. 4 4 North of the peninsula, Gaasefjord, 20—30 m. 


Astarte banksi, Leacu. 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. : 13 


Common, though the species occurs nowhere in such abundance as 
astarte borealis. 

The majority of the specimens can be referred to the variety 
warhami, Hancock. However the variety striata Lracu is by no 
means scarce, though globosa MéxLEeR on the other hand is very rarely 
met with. I append some measurements showing the variations which 
this species also undergoes: 


Forvisningsdalen Long. 25.5 mm. Lat. 21. mm. Crass. 11. mm. 


Havhestfjeld 95 . 99 13.2, 
Forvisningsdalen 94.5, 20 11 7 
The winter harbour 923.5, 19.5 12.5, 
Forvisningsdalen DOTS ex 18 9 y 
= 20- s 18 10 =, 
— OI) 4 17 95, 
— 20.5. 15.5 8, 
— is, 14.5 9.3. 
_ 17.5, 14.5 92 ., 


The largest specimens have a length of 25~26 mm. On the west 
coast of Greenland this species attains a length of 22 mm. (PosseEt7). 
On the east coast of Greenland it attains a length of 24 mm. (Jensen). 
The maximal size of the species is 27.4 mm. (Kn1powrtscu). 


Tellina, macoma, calcaria, CHEMNITZ. 
Fig. 2 and 3. 
Locality: 
July 30. 1898. Godhavn, about 6 m. 
Sept. 22. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 16 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


July 18  , The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Clay with small stones. 

July 22. , = - _ , about 40 m. 

July 26. The west side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, about 20 m. 

July 3l. 0, Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord, 20—60 m. (Clay. 

Aug. 1. y Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 3, Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 
4—40 m. 

Aug. 4°), Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 8&  , The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 30 m. 

Sept. 19%, Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 

Sept. 20. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

Aug. 30. , Gaasefjord, 8 m. Clay with small stones and fucaceae. 


In the Havnefjord, especially off Stordalen and at Bleksprutgrunden 
tellina calcaria was very common. It seemed to be less common in 
Gaasefjord, though even there it could not be said to be scarce. 


14 JAMES A. GRIEG. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


The largest specimens found by the Fram Expedition are up to 
41 mm. long. By way of comparison it may be stated that on the west 
coast of Greenland this species attains a size of 36 mm. (PosseEL7), on 
the east coast it can be 36.25 mm. (JENSEN) at Spitzbergen 45.5 mm. 
(KnrpowitscH) and in the Bering Sea 51 mm. (Krause). Some of the 
largest specimens measure: 


Gaaselord Long. 41. mm. Lat. 27> mm. Crass. 14.5 mm. 
— 38.5, 26.7 ,. 125 , 
Forvisningsdalen 31. 5 9 CO, 13, 
Gaasefjord ID 94.5, 138 —CO««, 
— 33.5, a 10.5 ,, 
_ 32.5 9  «, 10.5, 
Stordalen 31 3 D1 5 11.5, 
— 272 ,, 200—C«, 112 , 


Some of the specimens are characterised by their narrow and elon- 
gated form. The posterior end of the shell tapers comparatively sharply. 
This form is most frequently met with in specimens from the head of 
the Gaasefjord. On the other hand there are several specimens which 
have a remarkably high shell. The most characteristic feature in their 
case, however, is that the posterior end of the shell is more obtusely 
rounded, so that the shell’s form reminds one of ¢ellina torelli. In the 
illustrations [ have shown the two most pronounced instances of these 
forms; the 41 mm. specimen from the head of the Gaasefjord (Fig. 2), 
and the 37.5 mm. specimen from Forvisningsdalen (Fig. 3). Between 
these extreme forms there are scarcely distinguishable intermediate forms. 


Tellina, macoma, torelli, lap. STEENSTRUP. 


Locality: 
Sept. 22. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 16 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


The two largest specimens measure: 

Long. 14 mm. Lat. 10.5 mm. Crass. 5.7 mm. 
13.7, 10.5, 5.5, 

These specimens are thus slightly larger than the biggest living 
specimens which Jensen has investigated (13.5 mm.). Their form is 
almost exactly similar to the fossil shells from Vendsyssel which he 
has depicted (tab. 1, fig. 3 f—). 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 15 


Tellina torelli has not previously been found in the waters west 
and north of Baffin Bay. According to Jensen the species was pre- 
viously only known to occur on the west and east coasts of Greenland, 
at Spitzbergen, and in the Kara Sea. 


Tellina, macoma, moesta, DesHayEs. 


Locality: 
July 26. 1900. West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, about 20m. Clay. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Aug. 2 1901. — _ — » about 40 m. 
Aug. 16. Pa _ _ = , about 14 m. 


The species seems to be very scarce, as with the exception of a 
pair of loose shells only 6 whole specimens were obtained, three of 
which were alive. These latter and the largest of the dead specimens 
measure : 

Long 21.5 mm Lat. 15.5 mm Crass. 6.5 mm. (dead) 


0 145, 6 
192, 145, 62 , 
19, 4, 55 y 


The specimens are rather over middle size, since tellina moesta 
according to Jensen has a maximum size of 34.5 mm. They are almost 
exactly similar to the specimen from the east coast of Greenland which 
he has depicted (tab. 1, fig. 4, a, d). 

Tellina moesta was also previously unknown in the waters west 
and north of Baffin Bay. JeNseN states that the species was previously 
known to occur at Baffin Land, on the west and east coasts of Green- 
land, at Spitzbergen and at Novaya Zemlya as well as in the Kara Sea, 
Siberian Polar Sea, Bering Sea and at Alaska. Tellina moesta is 
thus a high-arctic circumpolar species. 

Among a number of molluscs taken by the Michael Sars in 1901 
at Green Harbour, Spitzbergen, 150 m., in addition to several tellina 
calcaria 4 specimens of this species were found 12.5—15 mm. long. 


Tellina, macoma, Joveni, lar. STEENSTRUP. 


Locality: 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 830—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


5 specimens 7—14 mm. long, the largest of which measure: 
Long. 14. mm. Lat. 9 mm. Crass. 5.5 mm. 
122 4 8.5, 7 
10.5. LD 4 4.7, 


16 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


JENSEN gives the maximal length of this species as 15.5 mm. The 
specimens are almost exactly similar to what Jensen describes and 
depicts in the case of tellina loveni. 

Like the two previously mentioned species tellina lovent had not 
been hitherto found in waters west and north of Baffin Bay. It had 
only been definitely known to occur near Baffin Land, the west and 
east coasts of Greenland and at Spitzbergen and in the Kara Sea (JENSEN). 


Cardium, serripes, grénlandicum, CHEMNITZ. 
Locality: 
July 30. 1898. Godhavn, about 6 m. 


Aug. 9%. Bay near Rice Strait. 

July 26. 1900. West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, about 20 m. Clay. 

July 30. . The entrance to Stordalen. 

July 3f. , Round Vestre Sound, Havnefjord. 20—60 m. 

Aug. 3. 4 Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 
4—40 m. 

Aug. 4 4 Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 80-50 m. Small stones, 

Sept. 19, Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

July 8. 190!. Renbugten, about 20 m. 

July 12  , Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 

Aug 2% The head of the Gaasefjord, about 40 m. 

Aug. 16. _ — = , about 14 m. 


Scarce. The largest specimens from Jones Sound measure: Long. 
€5 mm., Lat. 58 mm., Crass. 35 mm. Possext gives the size of this 
species as 112 mm. On the east coast of Greenland (Mébius) and at 
Novaya Zemlya (Lecue) it attains a size of 70 mm. At Spitzbergen it 
can be 88 mm. long (Krause) and at Bering Strait 100 mm. (Krauss). 
In the larger specimens a faint radial striation was only observable on 
the uppermost part of the shell, and even in the younger individuals 
the striation is but sligtly developed. In the smallest specimens the 
epidermis is yellowish-white with narrow reddish-brown zigzag bands. 
With age the colour becomes darker and in the largest specimens it is 
of a uniform dark greenish-brown. 


Mya truncata, Linn. 


Locality: 
July 29. 1898. Egedesminde. 
July 30. , Godhavn, about 6 m. 
September , Rice Strait. 
July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
July 22. 1900. _ — _ , about 40 m. 
July 2. 4 a = - , about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 


July 30. The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 


1898 -1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 17 


Aug. 3. 1900. Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 


4—40 m. 
Aug 4 y Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Small stones. 
Sept. 20. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 


0, ” 
July 8 1901. Renbugten, about 20 m. 
July 9% 4» - : 
July 19.» The entrance to Gaasefjord. 
Aug. (80. y Gaasefjord, 8 m. Clay with small stones and fucaceae. 
July 19. 1902. Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6-14 m. Small stones and 
fucaceae. 


The specimens have a length of up to 50 mm. Most of the older 
individuals belong to the typical West Greenland form, with the posterior 
truncata portion of the shell distinctly short (Cf. Jensen: Studier over 
nordiske Mollusker. 1. Mya fig. 86). Only a few shells are similar to 
the variety uddevallensis, Hancock. They have, however, not so thick 
valves as at any rate the fossil shells of this variety, nor is their trun- 
cate end so short. In younger individuals the shell is ovate, and this 
is especially the case when they are quite young. 


Saxicava arctica. LInnE. 


Locality: 
July 30. 1898. Godhavn, about 6 m. 
Aug. 24. Rice Strait. 


n 
July 27. 1899. Pims Island. 
The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 16 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 
July 2%.  , The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
July 2% , The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 20 m. Clay. 
July 30. — — — : 
July 3t., Round Vestre Sound, Havnefjord, 20—60 m. 


Aug 1. y Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50m. Small stones. 

Aug. 3 4 Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 
4—40 m. Small stones. 

Au. 4  , Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 4 , Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Smal] stones. 

Sept. 20. , The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 


Sept. 20. ,, - _ _ , 30 m. Soft brown clay. 
July 12. 1901. Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 

July 17. ,, The entrance to Gaasefjord. 

Aug. 16. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, about 14 m. 

Common. However the species is not found anywhere in any large 
quantity. The specimens belong partly to the form arctica Linné and 
partly to the more elongated smooth form pholadis LINNE s. rugosa 
Livné. Most of the specimens of both forms arctica and pholadis have 
very thick valves and closely resemble in this respect the valves of this 
species that are found in our late-glacial deposits. In the same locality 

2 


18 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


both specimens with thick and thin valves may occur. Typical speci- 
mens of the form arctica have a length of 25—26 mm., and a height 
of 12.5—14 mm. Some specimens which may be referred to this form 
have moreover, a length of up to 38 mm., and a height of 16.5 mm. 
The form pholadis s. rugosa has a length of 46—47 mm., and a height 
of 24—25 mm. 


Lyonsia arenosa, Méuirr. 


Locality: 
July 25. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 20 m. Rocks and stones, 
July 26.  , West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 16—20 m. Clay. 
Sept. 19. ,, Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. , The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Aug. 2. 1901. _ _ _ , about 40 m. 
Aug. 16. ,, — _ _ , about 14 m. 


In Havnefjord only a quite young specimen was obtained 7.5 mm. 
long. In Gaasefjord 10 specimens in all were collected, which were 
15-26 mm. long. The height of their shells varied from 54°/, to 
64.25 °/) of their length, while the breadth (thickness) varied between 
37.14°/, and 42°/, of their length. For purposes of comparison we 
may state that Jensen found in the case of some specimens from the 
east coast of Greenland, that the height of the shell was 51.6—62.7 °/, 
of the length and the breadth 36.9—44.7°o of the length. Some of 
the specimens from Gaasefjord measure: 

Long. 26 mm. Lat. 16.7 mm. Crass. 10.5 mm. 


% , 155 , 10 , 
8 15.5, 105 , 
% 185 , 95, 
35 , 145, 5 , 
ic . 10.5, ae 
145, 10, 65, 
15h, 95, e = 


The specimens closely resemble the description and illustration which 
Hancock gives of lyonsia gibbosa (lyonsia arenosa var. sibirica Lrcue) 
from Davis Strait. 


Thracia truncata, Turton. 

; Locality: 

July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12m. A somewhat deformed 
specimen (Long. 18.5 mm., Lat. 14.5 mm., Crass 9 mm.). 

July 25. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
One specimen (Long. 13 mm., Lat. 10 mm., Crass 7 mm.) belongs 
to the typical form, the other on the contrary more closely 
resembles the variety devexa G. O. Sans. 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 19 


Thracia truncata has not been previously found in waters north 
and west of Baffin Bay; though it should be stated that thracia obliqua 
JerFREYS, of which there is but one fossil valve from Grinnell Land, is 
possibly merely a deformed form of this species, as indeed I am in- 
clined to believe. 


Thracia septentrionalis, JEFFREYS. 


Locality: 


March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjipélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


Two specimens measuring: 

Long. 20.5 mm. Lat. 14.5 mm. Crass. 7.5 mm. 
185 , 13.5, 6.5, 

The specimens are not so thick-valved and short as those taken 
by “Véringen” near Jan Mayen. They more closely resemble in these 
respects specimens from Norskéerne, Spitzbergen. 

Like the last-mentioned, thracia seplentrionalis has not been pre- 
viously found in the archipelago north af America. 


Pandora, kennerleyia, glacialis Leacu. 


Locality: 


Sept. 19. 1900. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Aug. 2 1901. = _ _ , about 40 m. 

Aug. 16. , — = = , about 14 m. 


Of this species there are only six specimens, so that it seems to 
be scarce. 

The largest specimen measures: Long. 25.7 mm., Lat. 15.2 mm., 
Crass. 4.7 mm. In the smallest specimens these measurements are 
respectively 17.5 mm., 10.5 mm., and 2.5 mm. The epidermis of the 
right valve is marked with radiating lines, as may also be seen in the 
drawing of Lecue; though in the specimens collected by the Fram 
these are stronger and more distinct than they are in the drawing. 
When the shell is closed the margin of the left valve bends downwards 
over the right valve, while the margin of the latter bends upwards. 
The same will be found to be the case with several other molluscs such 
as pecten grénlandicus. When various authors assert that the margin 
of the left valve of this species projects slightly over that of the right 
valve, this is due in most cases to a strong contraction of the animal, 
resulting in the margin of the valve becoming bente. 


0) JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Leacu found this species in Baffin Bay. On the other hand pan- 
dora glacilis has not been previouly mentioned as living in waters 
lying west and north of Baffin Bay. 


Amphineura. 


Tonicella marmorea, F aBRICcIUs. 


Locality: 


Aug. 4. 1898. Upernivik. 20 m. 
April 29. 1900. N.E. of Frokostpynten, Havnefjord. 


June 22. ,, The skerry, Havnefjord, about 10 m. Stones and lithothamnia. 
July 22, The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 40 m. 

July 22 , a _ - , about 60 m. Small stones. 
July 29. ,, S.E. of Frokostpynten, Havnefjord, 30 m. Stones. 

July 30. Fe The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 

July 31. , Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord, 20—60 m. 

Au. & 4, Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Small stones, 
Aug. 4& 4 Sjopélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 8 4 The winter harbour. Havnefjord, 30 m. 

July 5. 1901. The sound, Jammerbugten. 

July 9% 4 Renbugten. 

July 17. The entrance to Gaasefjord. 


July 19. 1902. Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 4 4 North of the peninsula, Gaasefjord, 20—30 m. 

There is besides one specimen in the collection whose locality is 
not given. At Sjépélse Ness 7 specimens were taken, from other locali- 
ties we have 1—3 specimens, though most frequently only one. 

Several of the specimens are of pretty considerable dimensions. 
Thus one specimen from the winter harbour measures: Long. 31 mm., 
Lath. 18 mm., Breadth of margin-zone 4 mm. In a specimen from 
the entrance to Stordalen these measurements are respectively 39.5 mm., 
29.5 mm., and 6.5 mm.; and in one from Vestre Sund they are 41 mm., 
17.5 mm., and 5 mm. On the west coast of Greenland according to 
Possett the species can attain a size of 40 mm. HAce mentions a 
specimen from the east coast 24 mm. long, and Knirowirscu one from 
Spitzbergen that was 28 mm. long. On the coasts of the White Sea 
according to Mippenporrr it attains a size of 27 mm. On the northern- 
most coasts of Norway Sparre Scunemer has found that tonicella 
marmorea is most developed out off the coast; thus at Tromsoe it is 
27 mm. long and at Vardoe about 30 mm. However on the Bergen 
coast, where the species attains the same development as on our arctic 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. of 


coasts, we find the largest and best developed individuals within the 
fords. Dr. AppeLLir for instance has found a specimen in the Oster- 
fjord measuring: Long, 28 mm., and Lat. {6 mm., while I have taken 
a specimen at Vik in Sogn measuring respectively 32 mm. and 15 mm. 
whereas among the skerries and islands outside Bergen I have not 
found a single specimen with a length over 18 mm. 

The sculpture, margin-zone and radula correspond almost exactly 
with what one finds in specimens from the Norwegian coast. The 
colour varies even in specimens from the same locality between dark- 
red with a few light dots and lines and light-red with numerous light 
dots and lines. 


Trachydermon albus, Linnet. 


Locality: 


March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


July 22 =, The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones. 
Au 4 4 Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—40 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 4. Sjépélse Ness, 30—50 m. Small stones. 


June 29. 1901. Off the camping ground, Jammerbugten. 
July 19. 1902. Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14 m. Small stones. 


At Sjépélse Ness 5 specimens were obtained; at each of the other 
localities only one. 

The largest specimen measures: Long. 15 mm., Lat. 8 mm. The 
breadth of the margin-zone is 0.75 mm. This species attains a size of 
16.5 mm. (Hiae) at Spitzbergen and of up to 17 mm. (SpaRRE SCHNEIDER) 
on the Norwegian coast. So far as I have been able to discover alter 
carefully examining two specimens the sculpture, margin-zone and radula 
agree in every way with what we find in Norwegian specimens. 


Gastropoda. 


Acmaea testudinalis, O. F. MtLuer. 


Locality: 
July 29. 1898. Egedesminde. Common. 
July 30. , Godhavn, 6 m. 4 specimens. 
Aug. 5. y Upernivik, 8—26 m. 3 specimens. 


The largest specimen has a basal diameter of 25 mm. 


99 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Tectura rubella, Fasricivs. 


Locality: 
June 22. 1900. The skerry, Havnefjord, about 10 m. Stones and lithothamnia. 
July 22. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones. 
July 28. as = = = , about 40 m. Small stones. 


At none of the localities was tectura rubella numerous. The largest 
specimen has a basal diameter of 7.5 mm. This species attains a size 
of 7 mm. (PosseLt) on the west coast of Greenland, of 6.3 mm. at Spitz- 
bergen (Knrpowrtscu) and of 6 mm. on the Norwegian coast. 


Lepeta coeca, O. F. Mtuier. 


Locality: 
July 18. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Clay with small stones. 
July i. 7 — , about 60 m. Small stones with 
lithothamnia. 
July 2 =, -- - - , about 60 m. Small stones. 
July 23. , — - _ , about 40 m. Small stones. 
July 2.  ,, _ _ _ , about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
July 30.) , The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 
Aug. 1. y Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 3. , Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 
4—40 m. Small stones. 
Aug 4, Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 8. 4 The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 30 m. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
July 17. 1901. The entrance to Gaasefjord. 
Aug. 30. The head of the Gaasefjord, 8m. Clay with small stones and 
fucaceae. 
July 19. 1902. Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14 m. Small stones and 
algae. 


In Havnefjord, especially in the winter harbour and off the entrance 
to Stordalen this species was very common. The specimens have a 
basal diameter of up to 16 mm. The species attains the same size 
at Spitzbergen (Krause), and can be 14.3 mm. on the east coast of 
Greenland (HAG); whereas on the west coast it is only 12 mm. (PosseEt7). 
On the Norwegian coast it can be 14 mm. 


Puncturella noachina, Linnt. 
Locality: 
July 22. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones. 

One specimen whose basal diameter is 7 mm., height 4 mm. 

The species attains the same size on the west coast of Greenland 
(PossELT), whereas on the east coast it can be as much as 11 mm. 
Hiae). On the Norwegian coast it attains a size of 9.5 mm. (SPARRE 
SCHNEIDER). 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 23 


Margarita helicina, Puters. 


Locality: : 
Aug. 5, 1898. Upernivik, 8-26 m. 
Aug. 18, Camp Clay, Cape Sabine, 4—10 m. 
Aug. 24. y Bay near Rice Strait. 
July 27. 1899. Pims Island. : 
Sept. 22. ,, The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 16 m. 
June 28, 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. 
June 29. ,, Off the camping ground, Jammerbugten. 
July 5 y The Sound, Jammerbugten. 
July 8  , Renbugten, about 20 m. 
July 9. = _ . 
July 17. The entrance to Gaasefjord. 


” 
July 11. 1902. St. Helena, 4-14 m. Large and small stones. 


Juy 15 Off Havhestfjeld, North Devon. 
July 17. East of the large glacier, North Devon. 
July 19. , Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6-14 m. Small 


stones and algae. 


On the south side of Jones Sound, along the shore of North Devon 
and at St. Helena margarita helicina was very common; but on the 
north side of the Sound it seems on the contrary to be scarce. At the 
head of the Gaasefjord, where mollusc fauna is otherwise remarkably 
abundant, this species was wanting. 

In a specimen from Renbugten the basal diameter is 9.2 mm. and 
the height 6 mm. In another specimen from the same locality these 
measurements are 8 mm. and 5.2 mm. respectively. Several specimens 
from North Devon also are of the same size. On the west coast of 
Greenland the species has a basal diameter of 6.5 mm. (PosseLT), but 
on the other hand its basal diameter on the east coast is 8.5 mm. (HAge). 
At Spitzbergen too the species can attain the same size as these speci- 
mens from Jones Sound; and in the Bering Sea it can even be as much 
as 12 mm. On the Norwegian coast it attains a size of 8 mm. 


Margarita olivacea, Brown. 


Locality: 

Aug. 1. 1900. Off the entrance to Stordalcn, Havnefjord, 10—50 m. Small stones. 
3 specimens the largest of which has a basal diameter of 6.5 mm. 
and a height of 5.5 mm. 

Sept. 19. , Off Forvisningsdalen Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
A specimen whose basal diameter is 7.5 mm. and height 7 mm. 

July 8. 1901. Renbugten, 20m. A specimen whose basal diameter is 5 mm. and 
height 4.5 mm. 


The spiral lines in all the specimens are faintly developed: they 
could, however, be clearly seen under the magnifing glass. 


24 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


On the west coast of Greenland this species has a basal diameter 
of 4.5 mm., whereas on the east coast it is as much as 6.3 mm. The 
largest known specimens (diam. 11 mm., height 10.5 mm.) are from the 
Kara Sea (Lecue). On the Norwegian coast it can be as much as 
6 mm. 


Margarita umbilicalis, Broperip & Sowersy. 


Locality: 
Aug. 24. 1898. Rice Strait. 
July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
Sept. 22, , - a = , 16 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30-40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


April 29. , North-east of Frokostpynten, Havnefjord. 

July 18 , The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Clay with small stones. 
July 2  ,, — _ _ , about 40 m. 

July 9, _ _ _ , about 60 m. Small stones. 

July 2. - _ _ , about 20 m. Rocks and stones. 
July 30. , The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 

July 31. , Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord, 20—60 m. 

Aug 1. i, Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50m. Small stones. 
Aug. 3, Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 


4—40 m. Small stones. 


Aug. 4 ‘3 Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Small stones. 

Aug 4&  , Sjopélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 7 4 East Cape, Havnefjord, 20—50 m. 

Aug 8&  , The winter harbour. Havnefjord, 30 m. 

Sept. 19. , Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4-40 m. Clay with small stones. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
June 28. 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. 

June 29. Off the camping ground, Jammerbugten. 

Juy 5 y The Sound, Jammerbugten. 

July 8&  , Renbugten, about 20 m. 

July % 4 _ . 

July 12 , Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 

July 17) =, The entrance to Gaasefjord. 

Aug. 30. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, about 8 m. Clay and small stones 


with fucaceae. 
July 11. 1902. St. Helena, 4-14 m. Large and small stones overgrown with 


fucaceae. 
July 15, Off Havhestfjeld, North Devon. Stones and large fucaceae. 
July 17. East of the large glacier, North Devon. 
July 19. " Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14 m. Small stones and 
Aug. 4 4 North of the peninsula, Gaasefjord, 20—30 m. [algae. 


This species is one of the most widely distributed gastropods in 
Jones Sound. At Landsend, Renbugten and Havnefjord it was very 
common. 

A specimen from Landsend measures: basal-diameter 20.5 mm. and 
height 15 mm. In another specimen these measurements are 18 mm. 
and 13.5 mm. respectively. In a specimen from Renbugten they were 


19981902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 25, 


19.5 mm. and 14.2 mm., in one from East Cape 19.2 mm. and 15.5 mm., 
and in one from North Devon they were 20 mm. and 15.5 mm. At 
Cumberland Sound this form attains a basal diameter of 22 m., on the 
east coast of Greenland it can be 21.9 mm. and at Spitzbergen 19.5 mm. 

All the specimens are quite smooth and belong to the typical 
margarita umbilicalis Broperip & SoweErsy. 


Margarita striata, Broperie & Sowersy. 
Locality: 


July 7. 1901. Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. One quite young specimen, and 
two older ones measuring: basal-diameter 15.5 mm. and 12 mm., 
height 15.2 mm. and 11.5 mm. For comparison I append measure- 
ments of two specimens of this form from the west coast of Novaya 
Zemlya, which are in the Bergen Museum: basal diameter 16.5 mm. 
and 15.2 mm., height 17.5 mm. nnd 16.5 mm. 


At Spitzbergen this form attains a basal diameter of up to 22.5 mm. 

The sculpture of shell and form of whorls exactly agrees with what 
has been described by FRieLe in the case of specimens from Magdalena 
Bay (Cf. Krause). 


Pilidium radiatum, M. Sars. 
Locality: 


Aug. 8. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 30 m. One specimen. 

Sept. 20. , The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
2 specimens. : 

June 28. 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. One specimen. 

July & 4, Renbugten, about 20 m. One specimen. 


The largest specimen measures: 

Long. 24.5 mm. = Lat. 22 mm. Alt. 9.5 mm. 

The specimens differ from those depicted by G.O. Sars in that 
the shell is more oblique and the spire more bent over. The specimens 
from the winter harbour and from Renbugten have radiating reddish- 
brown bands, which are however faint. These bands of colour are 
quite absent on the other hand in the specimens from Gaasefjord and 
Hvalrosfjord. 

Pilidiwm radiatum has not been previously found in waters north 
of America. However it has been met with to the east along the west 
coast of Greenland and to the west in the Bering Sea. 


Velutina, morvillia, zonata, GouLD. 


Locality: 
July 27. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 40 m. Small stones. One 
specimen. 


July 15. 1902. Off Havhestfjord, North Devon. Stones and large fucaceae. One 
specimen. 


26 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Both specimens belong to the variety expansa, G.O. Sars. The 
spiral striation in both is but slightly developed. The groove on the 
columella in the specimen from the winter harbour is deeper, narrower 
and shorter than in the other specimen. ‘The largest specimen measures: 

Long. 19 mm., Lat. 15.5 mm. 


A specimen found by the Nares Polar Expedition in the stomach 
of a phoca barbata near Franklin Pierce Bay, Grinnell Land, had a 
length of 21mm. At Spitzbergen the species attains a length of 23 mm. 


Onchidiopsis groenlandica, BERGH. 


Locality: 


July 26. 1900. The west side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 20m. Clay. 
A very contracted specimen. 


Natica, lunatia, groenlandica, BEck. 
Locality: 


July 8. 1901. Renbugten, about 20 m. An empty shell of the typical form. Alt. 
26 mm., Lat. 95.5 mm. 

Aug. 16. , The head of the Gaasefjord, about 14 m. A rather young specimen 
(Alt. 14.5 mm., Lat. 12 mm.) belonging to the form pallida, Broprrie 
& Sowersy. The shell is pale yellowish horn-colour, spiral sculp- 
ture extremely fine, operculum yellowish-brown and without calca- 
reous partition. 


Natica clausa, Broperir & SowERBY. 
Locality: 


July 15. 1902. Off Havhestfjeld, North Devon. One specimen belonging to the 
typical form (natica affinis, Gme.in). 
Alt. 23.5 mm., Lat. 21.5 mm. Spiral sculpture wanting. 


Bela harpularia, Covutuovy. 
Locality: 


July 26. 1900. The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. A rather worn empty shell, 
10.5 mm. 


Both in outward appearance and in sculpture the specimen exactly 
corresponds with the West Greenland and North American form of bela 
harpularia of which I have had two specimens from Georger Bank for 
purposes of comparison. Therefore although the specimen is not in a 
very good state of preservation it must undoubtedly be referred to this 
species. It differs from the Greenland bela woodiana, which it closely 
resembles, in having a more slender form, less prominent carina, fewer 
ribs —- I counted 17 ribs on the last whorl, while according to PosseLt 
bela woodiana has 20—25 ribs — and a finer spiral sculpture. 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 27 


Bela harpwaria has not previously been found in waters north of 
America. On the west coast of Greenland its northernmost limit is 
Riten Bank, Disco Bay (Posset). , 


Trichotropis conica, Miuurr. 


Locality: 


July 22. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones. A 
specimen 13.5 mm. high, which closely resembles the illustration 
of this species given by G. O. Sars. 


Trichotropis conica has not previously been found in waters north 
of America. It was known, however, to occur in the Barents Sea, the 
northern coasts of Norway, Jan Mayen, the east and west coasts of 
Greenland — the northerly limit being Egedesminde — and Cape Sable, 
Nova Scotia. 


Trichotropis borealis, Broprrie & SowErsy. 


Locality: 
Aug. 26. 1898. Bay near Rice Strait. 
Aug. 28. , _ _ ; 
July 22. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 16 m. 
July 22. 1900. — = — , about 60 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 1. , Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50 m. Small stones. 
Aug. 30. 1901. The head of the Gaasefjord, 8m. Clay with small stones and 
fucaceae. 


The specimens, which have a height of 13.5—19 mm. most closely 
resemble in form the specimen from the Kara Sea depicted by Cot.m, 
but have a less slender tip. Moreover they have fewer setiferous spiral 
carinae, some specimens being actually quite without setae. The number 
of spiral carinae on the last whorl varies greatly. The lowest number 
is five, of which three are setiferous. The largest number of setiferous 
spiral carinae is four, whereas in Coxtin’s specimen there were five. 
Those specimens which are without setae have comparatively broader, 
more numereus and less prominent spiral carinae. They may be refer- 
red to the variety inermis, Hinps which was found by Nares at Dis- 
covery Bay and Dumbell Harbour, Grinnell Land (Smits). The speci- 
mens from the Fram Expedition are rather larger than the biggest 
specimens of this species hitherto known. 

To the variety acuminata, Jerrreys must be referred an empty 
shell 10.5 mm. long, which differed from the rest in having a more 
slender form and its last whorl less ventricose. 


98 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Trichotropis bicarinata, Broperie & SoweERBY. 
(Figs. 4—8). 
Locality: . 

July 22. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones. A 
rather damaged specimen measuring: total height 30 mm., largest 
diameter 24 mm., length of aperture 17 mm., breadth of aperture 
13 mm. 

The shell (fig. 4, a—b) is quite thin, translucent, white and covered 
by a skin-like wrinkled dirty yellowish-white epidermis. Sculpture con- 
sists of close, fine, oblique, longitudinal lines. Fine spiral striae are 
also visible under the microscope. Number of whorls 6, of which the 
last is decidedly ventricose. The apical whorls are white, smooth and 
convex. The last whorl is furnished with two sharp spinal carinae, 
which are densely covered with large well-develoved setae. The penul- 
timate whorl has a setiferous spiral carina. The two remaining whorls 
seem also to be furnished with spiral carinae, but it was impossible to 
examine them closely owing to their being covered by a sponge. Aper- 
ture is sub-circular and somewhat more than half the length of the shell. 
Umbilicus deep and partly covered by the columella, which is excurved 
and has a slight indication of a canal at its base. On the outer side 
the umbilicus is bounded by a sharp carinae, which like the spiral 
carinae is thickly covered with setae. Operculum (fig. 4c) is triangular 
(6 X 6.5 mm.) and of the same form and structure as in trichotropis 
hjorti, Friete. Radula also resembles that of this species. 

The specimen belongs apparently to the variety trichotropis tenuis 
from Grinnell Land described by Smiru: though Smitus specimen, which 
was of about the same size (33 mm.), appears to differ from it in having 
a more slender and more tapering spire, and further does not seem to 
have such well-developed setiferous filaments on the spiral carinae or 
on the umbilical carina. This latter carina moreover in the Fram speci- 
men is placed in a position more resembling that of trichotropis bicari- 
nata Brop. & Sow. (Cf. Tryon: Manual of Conchology, vol. 9, tab. 7, 
fig. 42). The whole appearance of the specimen too reminds one not 
only of trichotropis tenuis but also of trichotropis bicarinata, and 
I am accordingly most inclined to accept the view of Jerrreys that 
trichotropis tenuis is a monstrous variety of the last-named. 

We must also include trichotropis hjorti, Frmiz as a variety of 
trichotropis tenuis, a fact I have already alluded to in the report on 
the “Belgica” expedition of 1905. This form was first discovered in 
1900 by the Norse Fishery Steamer “Michael Sars” in the cold area 


1398—1902. No. 20] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 99 


east of Iceland. It has subsequently been described by HAgG under 
the name of trichotropis tenuis trom the east coast of Greenland where 
it also was found by the “Belgica” in 1905. To this form too belongs 
probably the specimen from Baffin Bay which PosseLt mentions, and 
in which, out of three carinae, only the central spiral carina was visible. 
For it is a peculiarity of trichotropis hjorti that the whorls are without 
spiral carinae or else that the carinae are only very slightly developed. 

We have thus the following series of developments: the Fram speci- 
men (fig. 4) forms the intermedian stage between trichotropis bicarinata 
Broverip & Sowersy (fig. 5) and trichotropis tenuis E. A. Situ (fig. 6). 
From this form again Possett’s specimen, the Belgica specimen (fig. 7) 
and Hica’s two specimens lead us over to trichotropis hjorli, FRIELE 
(fig. 8), which is either without spiral carina or has merely a faint indica- 
tion of such?. Of the specimens mentioned here I have been able 
personally to compare those found by the ‘Fram’, “Belgica”, and 
“Michael Sars’. 

Both trichotropis tenuis and trichotropis hjorti are associated with 
the cold area; but whereas the former is only found in quite shallow 
water — Kane Bassin, 46 m. (SmiTH) and Jones Sound, 60 m. — the 
latter is meth with at considerable depths — Baffin Bay, 476 m. (PossEtt), 
the east coast of Greenland 150—300 m. (Hage), 275 m. (Grige) and 
east of Iceland, 600 m. (Fritz). The typical form trichotropis bicari- 
nata is known from Ice Cape (Sowzrsy), Bering Sea (Krause) and the 
Sea of Okhotsk (MmppENDORFF). 


Neptunea, siphonorbis, turrita, M. Sars. 


Locality: 
July 29, 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. One specimen. 
Sept. 19. 1900. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
3 specimens. 


The specimeus have the following measurements: 


Height . . . . ... . . . 245mm, 35mm. 35 mm. 41.5 mm. 
Largest Diameter. . . . . .- 11 , 15, 155, 18 , 
Length of Aperture and Basal Canal 15, 19, 19 , 2 , 


Apex is smooth and depressed as in neptuna (siphonorbis) turrita 
M. Sars s. tortuosa G. O. Sars. The three larger specimens which have 
a twisted basal must be referred to forma typica (G. O. Sars, tab. 15, 


1 It has been impossible for me to ascertain in what relation the variety alta, Dat 
stands to these forms, as I have not had access to the work in which this 
variety is described. 


30 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


fig. 4). They differ from this, however, in having more tumid whorls 
and a coarser sculpture. In this respect they more closely resemble 
fusus tortuosus from the Wellington Channel, which has been described 
and depicted by Reeve. However in Reeve’s species the aperture and 
basal canal is only half as long as the shell, while the Fram specimens 
are rather larger, 54.3 and 60.2 °/ of the shell’s height. In the smallest 
of the Fram specimens the aperture and basal canal is comparatively 
rather large, being 61.2°/o of the shell’s height. This specimen differs 
from the rest in having a straighter canal, and accordingly it should be 
referred to forma turrita (G. O. Sars, tab. 25, fig. 10). However it 
differs also from this form, if I may judge from the one I have seen 
in Mr. Frrete’s collection, in having more tumid whorls and a coarser 
sculpture. The spiral ribs in particular are coarser and more prominent. 

The specimens mentioned here are from Jones Sound, near the 
Wellington Channel, where ReEeve’s specimen was found, and they re- 
semble his specimen’ moreover in form and sculpture. There is there- 
fore every reason for believing that they belong to the same species. 
There being some doubt however, as has been more fully shown by 
FrietE in the General Report of the Norse Norwegian Sea Expedition 
(Mollusca I Buccinidae, 1882, p. 20), regarding the classification of 
Reeve’s species, I have preferred to follow the nomenclature proposed 
by FRIELE. . 


Buccinum undulatum, MOouer. 
Locality: 
July 30. 1898. Godhavn, about 6 m. One 40.5 mm. high typical specimen. 
Among the material of the next species there were several which 
are intermediate to buccinum undulatum. Perhaps therefore this species 
should more properly be described as a variety of buccinum grénlan- 


dicum. 
Buccinum grénlandicum, CHEMNITZ. 
Locality: 
July 29. 1898. Egedesminde. 
Aug 5& 4 Upernivik, 8—26 m. 
Aug. 2%  ,, Rice Strait. 


July 29. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—40 m. Small stones 
slightly overgrown with laminaria. 


April 2. , North-east of Frokostpynten, Havnefjord. 

July 18 The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. 
July 92 =, ~ _ _ , about 40 m. 
July 2 4 _ _ _ , about 16 m. 


July 2.  , — _ _ , about 20 m. Rocks and stone 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 31 


July 30. 1900. The entrance to Stordalen. 


July 31. y Round Vestre Sund, Stordalen, 20—60 m. 

Aug. 1. Off the entrance to Stordalen, 10—50 m. Small stones. 

Aug. 1. 4 _ _ _ , up to 20 m. Small stones and some 

clay. 
Aug 3. y Fosheim’s Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord. 
4—40 m. Small stones. 

Aug 4 4 Sjépilse Ness, Havnefjord, 30—50 m. Small stones. 

Au. 7 y East Cape, Havnefjord, 20—50 m. 

Ang. 8  ,» The winter harbour, Havnefjord. 

Sept. 20. , The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

June 28. 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. 

June 29. Off the camping ground, Jammerbugten. 

July 5 4 The Sound, Jammerbugten. 

July & 4, Renbugten, about 20 m. 

July % 4 - : 

July 12 =, Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 

July 17. ,, The entrance to Gaasefjord. 

July 18 4 - _ : 

Aug. 16. The head of the Gaasefjord, about 14 m. 

Aug. 30. _ _ _ , 8m. Clay with small stones and 
fucaceae. 

July 11. 1902. St. Helena, 4—14 m. Large and small stones and fucaceue. 

Juy 13. =, Off Havhestfjeld, North Devon. 

Jay 17. , East of the large glacier, North Devou. 

July 19 Off the camping ground, North Devon, 6—14m. Small stones and 

Aug. 4  , North of the peninsula, Gaasefjord, 20—30 m. [algae. 


This species is not merely the most widely distributed of the bucci- 
nidae, but it is also the most abundant. Most specimens can be re- 
ferred to forma normalis, though in some localites the varieties tene- 
brosa, Hancock and sericata, Hancock were also very common. The 
variety patula, G. O. Sars seems on the other hand to be scarce. 

The largest specimen of the typical forms measures: Height 64 mm., 
breadth 26.5 mm., height of aperture 2L mm., and breadth of aperture 
15 mm. Another very thick-shelled specimen measures 60.5 mm., 
34 mm., 30 mm., and 18.5 mm. respectively. The maximal height of 
the varieties tenebrosa and sericata is 31 mm., and of patula is 
25.5 mm. 

From the winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m., we have a specimen 
which much resembles the variety major, Possett, though it seems to 
have finer longitudinal ribs. It measures: Height 53.5 mm., breath 
31 mm., height of aperture 27 mm., and breadth of aperture 17 mm. 

From Havnefjord, Hvalrosfjord and Landsend we have buccinidae 
— one in each case — which very closely resemble the buccinum 
hancocki, Mércu from Cumberland Sound which has been depicted and 
described by Prerrer. Jerrreys considers buccinwm hancocki Moércu 
8. grénlandicum Hancock as a variety of buccinwm glaciale in which 


32 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


view he is supported by Tryon and Posseit. However in “Monographie 
der Gattung Buccinum” Kogpett seems most inclined to consider this 
form as a true species. PFEFFER insists strongly upon this in ‘Mollusken, 
Krebse und Echinodermen von Cumberland Sund”. Still in spite of 
these views I am inclined to consider buccinum hancocki to be a 
variety of buccinum grénlandicum. Amongst the material of the 
Fram Expedition there are forms which imperceptibly lead over from 
the typical buccinum grénlandicum to buccinum hancocki. In 
Frie.e’s fine collection of arctic buccinidae, which I have been privi- 
leged to inspect, there are several intermediate forms. 

I append measurements of some specimens of the form hancocki: 


Hvalros-| Havne- | Lands- | Havne- | Lands- 
fjord fjord end fjord end 


Heigth of shell . . . ©. . . . | 68) «mm,| 585 mm.| 51.5 mm.| 46 mm.| 86.5 mm. 
Breadth of last whorl. . . . . | 845 , | 31 , | 315 , |95 , | 19 , 
Height of aperture. . . . . ./29 , |; 96 , | 245 , ;22 , | 19 , 
Breadth of aperture . . .. ./|18 , (175, | 16 , | 115 , | 105 , 


From the winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 40 m., and from the 
head of the Gaasefjord, 8 m., there are egg-clusters of buccinum grén- 
landicum. 


Baccinum hydrophanum, Hancocs. 


Locality: 
July 29. 1898. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, 12 m. 
July 21. 1900. - — _ , about 60 m. Small stones and 
lithothamnia, 
July 2%. , _ _ _ , about 20 m. Rocks and _ stones. 


Aug. 1. 1900. Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, up to 20 m. Small 
stones with some clay. 


Aug. 1. , - = = —  ,10—50m. Small stones. 

Aug. 3 y Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havnefjord, 
4—40 m. Small stones. 

Sept. 19 , Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

Sept. 20. , The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 

July 8 1901. Renbugten, about 20 m. 

July 12, Bay near Landsend, about 35 m. 

Aug 2 , The head of the Gaasefjord, about 40 m 

Aug. 16, _ _ — ° , about 14 m., 

Aug. 30. _ , about 8 m. 


July 17. 1902. East of the i site North Devon. 


At the head of the Gaasefjord this species seems to have been 
abundant, but at other localities it would appear on the other hand to 
have been scarce. 


1898-1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 33 


Most of the specimens may be referred to the form depicted by 
G.0. Sars in “Mollusca regionis arcticae Norvegiae” (tab. 24, fig. 8). 
Two specimens from the head of the Gaasefjord belong to the variety 
elata FrigLE and one specimen from Renbugten to the variety tumida, 
G.O. Sars. This last is 43.5 mm. high and 25.5 mm. broad and its 
aperture is 26 mm. high and 15 mm. broad. The largest specimen of 
the variety elata is 70.5 mm. high, 85.5 mm. broad, and its aperture 
32 mm. high. Sars’ form has a height of up to 57 mm. The typical 
form described by Hancock and more fully by Prerrer afterwards has 
a height of up to 60 mm. 


Buaccinum ciliatum, Fasricivs. 


Locality: 
Sept. 19. 1900. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 4—40 m. Clay with small 


stones. 


One specimen 18 mm. high belonging to the variety laevior, Morcu. 


Littorina rudis f. grénlandica, Menke. 


Locality: 
July 29. 1898. Egedesminde. Very common. 


Dendronotus frondosus, ASCANIS. 


Locality: 
Aug. 5. 1898. Upernivik, 6 m. 
Aug. 24. Rice Strait. 


” 
July 22. 1900. Winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Small stones. 
July 31. ,, Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord, 20 - 60 m. 
June 29. 1901. Off the camping ground, Jammerbugten. 
July 17. The entrance to Gaasefjord. 
Aug. 30. y The head of the Gaasefjord, 8 m. Clay with small stones. 


There are in all 9 specimens of this species, of which one is from 
Upernivik and two are from Rice Strait. The remainder are from 
Jones Sound. 

The specimens, which have a length of 17—42 mm., are not in a 
good state of preservation. Judging from the material preserved in 
alcohol the colour seems to have varied from pure white to a reddish 
brown. In the largest specimen from Havnefjord the radula consists of 
41 rows with 12—14 lateral teeth on either side. Median tooth is com- 
paratively short and broad, with a fine denticulation along the margin. 
Denticulation does not, however, quite extend to the tip of the tooth. 


In this respect the specimen closely resembles dendronotus purpurens 
3 


34 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


which Bereu has described in his work: “On the nudi-branchiate gaste- 
ropod Mollusca of the North Pacifik Ocean, with special reference to 
those of Alaska” (p. 89, tab. 1, fig. 18—20, tab. 3, fig. 7—12). How- 
ever, as has been already pointed out by Posse.t in ‘“Grénlands Bra- 
chiopoder og Bléddyr”’ the median tooth of dendronotus frondosus 
varies greatly both in form and denticulation. It can be short and 
broad with a slight denticulation as in this specimen, or the cutting 
edge may even be quite smooth (the variety dalli) or again it may be 
high and narrow and have numerous margial teeth. The lateral teeth 
too may vary in form and denticulation. 

Dendronotus frondosus is to be found as far north as Upernivik 
on the west coast of Greenland. On the east coast of America it is 
met with from Cape Cod to Labrador, and it is further known to occur 
in the Bering Sea and Bering Strait. On the other hand it has not 
previously been mentioned as occurring in the archipelago north of 
America. For further particulars regarding the distribution of dendro- 
notas frondosus I would refer to Opuner: “Opistobranchia and Ptero- 
poda”, where a very full account is given of the distribution of this 
species. 


Coryphella salmonacea, CovuTHovy. 


Locality: . 
Aug. 16. 1898. Reindeer Point, Foulke Fiord, 8 m. 
July 9. 1901. Renbugten. 


There are in all six specimens of this species, one being from 
Foulke Fiord. This and the two specimens from Renbugten were care- 
fully examined and were found to be typical coryphella salmonacea. 
The specimens from Renbugten have a length of 15—20 mm. The 
one from Foulke Fiord is about 25 mm. 

Nares found this species at Discovery Bay, Grant Land (Smrrx). 


Pteropoda. 


Limacina helicina, Pures. 
Locality: 
Sept. 5. 1899. The winter harbour, Havnefjord. Pelagic. 3 specimens. 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 35 


Cephalopoda. 


Rossia palpebrosa, Owen. 


(Fig. 9, a—b). 
Locality: 


Aug. 1. 1900. Bank at the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 8 m. Small stones. 
One specimen. 


The specimen, a female, has a total length of 30 mm. from the 
posterior end of the body to the base of the arms. Length of 1st pair 
of arms 26.5 mm. Umbrella is between 1st pair of arms 7 mm. high: 
its proportion to the length of the arms is thus 1:3.8. Between 4th pair 
of arms there is no web. Greatest breadth of body 18 mm. Breadth 
of head over eyes 17 mm. The head is thus only slightly narrower 
than the body. Length of body on the dorsal side 22 mm., on the 
ventral side 19 mm. Maximum length of fins 13 mm., length at base 
10 mm.,. maximum breadth 12 mm. Length of fins is thus 59 °/o of 
the length of body. — 

Body is posteriorly broadly rounded. On the dorsal side the 
mantle-edge forms a very obtuse angle, on the ventral side it is 
slightly incised. The well-developed siphon extends to the base of the 
4th pair of arms. Eyes not very prominent. Dorsal side of head and 
mantle are quite without papillae. Arms may be ranked in the follow- 
ing order according to length: 3, 4, 2, 1. Arm-suckers are arranged 
in two rows, though towards the tip they increase to apparently four 
rows. On the tentacular club the suckers are apparently six-rowed. 
Upper-row suckers of the base of the club are of about the same size 
as in the lower rows. Dorsal surface of mantle sac smooth and without 
papillae. Colour of the specimen preserved in alcohol is light whitish- 
red on the dorsal side with numerous dark chromatophores or spots. 
On the ventral side it is whitish with a few scattered dark spots. 

The specimen belong to the group palpebrosa glaucopts and may 
perhaps most properly be referred to rossia palpebrosa which OWEN 
has described. For on the dorsal side of the mantles sac we do not 
find the small whitish papillae that are so characteristic of the typical 
rossia glaucopis, Lovin. An additional reason for referring the speci- 
men to rossia palpebrosa seems to me to lie in the fact that it practi- 
cally quite agrees with the young female of this species which was 
found west of Spitzbergen by the Norse Norwegian Sea Expedition 
(station 363, 80° 03’ N. Lat. 8° 28’ E. Long. 475 m.). Dr. AppEeLLér states 
no doubt in “Teuthologische Beitrage” that this specimen is furnished 
on the back with small whitish papillae: still the papillae are smaller, 


36 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


less numerous and are more scattered than those we find in similar- 
sized specimens of rossia glaucopis. 

Owen’s specimen was found by Ross in 1832 in Elwin Bay — 
Prince Regent’s Inlet; and rossia palpebrosa has also been found on 
the west coast of Greenland and at Spitzbergen, the Murman Coast and 
in the Kara Sea. 

We have numerous eggs of a rossia from the head of the 
Gaasefjord, 6—40 m., clay with small stones, (Sept. 20, 1900), which 
probably belong to rossia palpebrosa. These eggs are 10—12 mm. in 
diameter. Such eggs as were subjected to careful examination did not 
contain embryons. 


Pape 

Since this work has gone to press, Hans Kiar has issued his trea- 
tise: “On the Bottom Deposits” (Rep. II Norweg. Arct. Exp. in the Fram 
1898—1902 Vol. 3, No. 17, 1909) in which he describes a number of 
molluscs from Jones Sound. Dr. Ki#r has been kind enough to place 
this mollusc-material at my disposal, and on examination it was found 
to contain two species, cylichna alba and utriculus pertenuis, that were 
not represented in the collection of molluscs from the Fram Expedition 
which I had previously examined. There was also a selene moesta 
from the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 

From the Westside of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 6 
20 m. clay, Dr. Krzr mentions modiolaria corrugata and arca gla- 
cialis. These species must however be removed again from the list of 
fauna belonging to Jones Sound: since it was found by closer in- 
vestigations that the specimens did not belong to those species, but to 
modiolaria laevigata var. substriata, Gray, and lyonsia arenosa Mot- 
Ler. Of the last named species only a defective right valve was found. 


Cylichna alba, Brown. 
Locality: 
Sept. 20. 1900. The head of the Gaasefjord, about 30 m. 
A dead specimen, 10.5 mm. long, belonging to the variety 
corticata (Becn) Mé.urr. j 
In the archipelago north of America, cylichna alba was 
previously found at Assistance Bay, Parry Islands and 
Discovery Bay, Grinnell Land. 


Utriculus pertenuis, MIGHELS. 
Locality: 
Aug. 8. 1901. The head of the Gaasefjord, 2—4 m. 
A dead and rather worn specimen, 2.5 m. long, belonging. 
to the typical form. Under the designation of bulla semen, 


Betcuer, mentions this species from Port Refuge, Parry 
Islands. 


1898— 1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 37 
Tabular List of the Brachiopods and Molluscs 
collected by the 2nd Fram Expedition. 

he = 8 : g 
FG\a\/21|5 Ba sleaze 
Brachiopda. 
Rhynchonella psittacea, GMELIN : ee en eee _ a) 
Mollusca. 
Lamellibranchiata. 
Nucula tenuis, Montacv . Pe ea ee nes zane Hh 
Leda pernula, MétLER cep AN ae | ails oes Hwee 
— minuta, MOLLER , oe Pe ed ye = 
Yoldia, portlandia, arctica, Gray . Seed cell aaah eee | hte 
- hyperborea, Loven . es ee os = 
Mytilus edulis, Linné . eo ee = > Fol a2 
Modiolaria levigata, Gray Sr WP ster Peeps | ah + is 
- nigra, Gray. see ae lf wake lS = = 
Crenella faba, O. F. Mi.LER hs | iS Pee cae = a 
Pecten grénlandicus, Sowersy = | ae] se) ee = = 
Astarte borealis, CHEMNITZ . ea) Gea Pee 4 we 
— banksi. Leacs. eae fe ee eo of + 
Tellina, macoma, calcaria, CHEMNITZ . ee | = ge eB — at 
= - , torelli, STEENSTRUP . — +)—- _ - 
- - , moesta, DESHAYES . = ae. [eed at a = 
a - , lovéni, STEENSTRUP . = +] —- _ _ 
Cardium, serripes, grénlandicum, Curmnitz . +}+] ++ + pes 
Mya truncata, Linne . AW sae |e a + fs 
Saxicava arctica, Linnt . 4+f}+]+it+ + = 
Lyonsia arenosa, Mo.LER . ee ee ea - _ 
Thracia truncata, Turton . Seat ie cas co = = 
_ septentrionalis, JEFFREYS —{|—-{ij+{- = - 
Pandora, kennerleyia, glacialis, Leacs . ee eae ee _ — 
Amphineura. 
Tonicella marmorea, Fasricius . +}—|+]+ + + 
Trachydermon albus, Linné goo “| ye) Paces Il ee 
Gastropoda. 
Acmeea testudinalis, O. F. Miter . ae i ae pe _ = 
Tectura rubella, Fasricius . — |-j+]- = _ 
Lepeta coeca, O. F. MiLteR 2 Nh el SE a ee Shee 


38 JAMES A. GRIEG. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


West coast of 
Greenland 


Havnefjord 


Gaasefjord 


West coast of 


Simmons 
peninsula 


North coast of 
North Devon 


Puncturella noachina, Linnt . 
Margarita helicina, Puirrs 
- olivacea, Brown . . ‘ 
— umbilicalis, Broprerip & SowERBY 
— striata, Broperie & Sowerby . 
Pilidium radiatum, M. Sars . 
Velutina, morvillia, zonata, Gouin 
Onchidiopsis grénlandica, Brrcu 
Natica, lunatia, grénlandica, Beck 
—  clausa, Broperip & Sowersy 
Bela harpularia, Cournovy 
Trichotropis conica, Mo.tER 
- borealis, Broperie & Sowersy . 


— bicarinata, Broperie & Sowersy . 


Neptunea, siphonorbis, turrita, M. Sars . 
Buccinum undulatum, Méuier 

_ grénlandicum, Cuemnirz 

- hydrophanum, Hancock . 

- ciliatum, Fasricius 
Iittorina rudis, Maton . . . . 1... 
Cylichna alba, Brown... . 
Utriculus pertenuis, Micuets . 
Dendronotus frondosus, Ascanius 
Coryphella salmonacea, Coutxovy . 


Pteropoda. 
Limacina helicina, Puters . 


Cephalopoda. 
Rossia palpebrosa, Owrn . . . . 


LS Vale bee A) 


tei tir tte ett tp af beet t+ 1 +1 | Smith Sound 


+++ | ttt 


a ee Bode a F 


t+ tt 


+++ 


| 


oe oe 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 39 


Bibliography. 


ApretiéF: Teuthologische Beitraige. Bergens Museums Aarbog 1892, no, 1. 

Avrivittius’ Arktiska hafsmollusker. IL. Placophora och Gastropoda. Vega Exp. 
Vet. Iakttagelser. Bd. 4, 1887. 

Becuer: Mollusken von Jan Mayen. Internat. Polarforschung 1882--83. Die dster- 
reich. Polarstation Jan Mayen. Beob. Ergeb. herausg. v. d. Akad. d. 
Wissensch. Wien. Bd. 3, 1886. 

Beck: Verzeichniss von Konchylien aus Spitzbergen und Grénland. Amt. Ber. 24 
Versaml. deutsch. Naturf. und Aerzte in Kiel 1846 (1847). 

Beecuy: Voyage of discovery towards the North Pole performed in H. M.S. Doro- 
thea and Trent under the command of capt. Buchan 1818. London 1843. 

Bercu: Bidrag til en monographie af marseniaderne. Kgl. danske Vidensk. Selsk. 
Skr. Mat.-nat. Afd. R. 5, vol. 3, 1853. : 

- Anatomiske bidrag til kundskab om aeoliderne. Op. cit. R.5, vol. 7, 1868. 

- On the nudibranchiate gasteropod Mollusca of the North Pacifik Ocean 
with special referenc to those of Alasca. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- 
delphia 1879 (1880). 

- Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Aeoliaden. Part 8 Verhandl. d. k. k. ual bot. 
Gesellschaft in Wien. 1885. 

- Malacologische Untersuchungen. Semper: Reisen im Archipel der Philip- 
pinen, Bd. 4, 1880—87. 

- Die Nudibranchien gesammelt wiahrend der Fahrten des “Willens Barents” 
in das Nordliche Eismeer. Bijdr tot de dierkunde uitgegebene door “Natura 
Artis Magistra” Afl. 18, 1886. , 

Cressin: Mytilide. Martini-Chemnitz: System. Conchylien Cabinat. Bd. 8 Ab- 
theil. 3, 1889. 

Cornu: Brachiopoder, Muslinger og Snegle fra Karahavet. Dijmphna Togtets zoolog. 
bot. Udbytte. 1887. 

Dati: List of shells obtained by Kumlien, naturalist to the Hawgate Exp. 1877—78 
at Points in Cumberland Sound. Bull U.S. Nat. Museum no. 15, 1879. 

- Mollusca. Rep. Internat. Polar Expedition to Point Barrow. 1885. 
— Report on the molluses collected by Turner at Ungava Bay, North Labrador. 
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. vol. 9, 1886 (1887). 
Frrete: Mollusca 1 Buecinide. Norske Nordhavs Exp. 1876—78, vol. 8, 1882. 
- Mollusca 2. Norske Nordhavs Exp. 1876—78, vol. 16, 1886. 
- Mollusken der ersten Nordmeerfahrt des “Michael Sars”. Bergens Museums 
Aarbog 1902, no. 3. 

Goutp: Report on the Invertebrata of secatinwalts, Ed. 2. 1870. 

Greety: Report on the Proc. of the U.S. Ex. to Lady Franklin Bay, Grinnell Land, 
vol. 2, 1888. 

Gries: Invertébrés du fond. Duc d’Orleans: Croisiere oceanographique accomplie 
4 bord de la “Belgica” dans la mer du Grénland 1905 (1909). 

Hancock: List of Shells dredged on the West Coast of Davis’s Strait. Ann. Mag. 
Nat. Hist., vol. 18, 1846. 

Hinps: Mollusca. Zoology of voyage of “Sulphur” under E. Belcher, vol. 2, 1844. 

Hircucock: Sketch of the geology of Portland and its vicinity. Boston Journ. of 
Nat. Hist. vol. 1, 1884—37. : 

Hom: Beretning om de pa Fyllas togt i 1884 foretagne zoologiske Undersogelser 1 
Gronland. Meddel. om Gronland. Hefte 8. 1889. 


40 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Hice: Mollusca und Brachiopoda gesammelt von der schwedischen zoologischen 
Polarexpedition nach Spitzbergen, dem nordéstlichen Grénland und Jan 
Mayen i. J. 1900. 1. Brachiopoda u. Lamellibranchiata. Arkiv fér Zool. 
vol. 2, no. 2. 1904. 

- Mollusea und Brachiopoda ete. 2. Scaphopoda, Gastropoda etc. Op. cit. 
vol. 2, no. 18. 1905. 

Jerrreys: New and peculiar Mollusca of the Patellide and other Families of Gastro- 
poda procured in the Valorous Expedition. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 4, 
vol. 19. 1877. 

_ Post-tertiary Fossils procured in the late Arctic Expedition. Op. cit. ser. 4. 
vol 20, 1877. 

- On some of the Mollusca procured during the arctic Expedition of the 
“Fox” in 1858 and 1859. Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soc. vol. 2 (new ser.), 
part 2, 1879. 

Jensen: Studier over nordiske mollusker. 1. Mya. Vidensk. Meddel. 1900. 

— Studier over nordiske mollusker. 3. Tellina (Macoma). Op. cit. 1905. 

- On the Mollusca of East Greenland. Meddel. om Gronland. Hefte 29. 
1905. 

Kyirowirscu: Zool. Ergeb. d. russ. Exp. nach Spitzbergen. Mollusca und Brachio- 
poda. 1. Uber die in dem J. 1899—1900 im Gebiete von Spitzbergeu ge- 
sammelten receuten Mollusken und Brachiopoden. Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. 
I. Sci. St. Petersbourg, vol. 6, 1901. 

_ Zool. Ergeb etc. 2-3 Uber die im J. 1901 im Gebiete von Spitzbergen, 
gcesammelten recentus Mollusken und Brachiopoden Op. cit. vol. 7, 1902. 
_ Zool. Ergeb. 4. Nachtrag. Op. cit. vol. 8, 1903. 

Kosett: Pyrula und Fusus. Martini Chemnitz: System. Conchylien Cabinet. Bd. 3. 
Abtheil. 3b, 1881. 

— Buceinum. Op. cit. Bd. 3. Abtheil. 1c, 1883. 

Krause: Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Mollusken-Fauna des Beeringsmeeres. Arch. f. 
Naturgesch. vol. 51, 1885. 

= Mollusken von Ostspitzbergen. Zool. Jahrb. Abtheil. Syst. Geogr. u. Biol. 
vol. 6, 1892. , 

a Mollusken. Drygalski: Grénlands Exp. d. Ges f. Erdkunde zu Berlin 
1891—98, vol. 2. 1897. 

Leacu: Descriptions of the new species of animals discovered by “Isabella” in a 
voyage to the arctic regions. Ann. of Philosophy vol. 14, 1819. 

Lecur: Ofversikt éfver de af Svenska Exped. till Novaja Semlja och Jenissej 1875 
och 1876 indsamlede hafsmollusker. K. Sv. Akad. Handl. vol. 16, no. 2. 
1878. 

- Ofversikt dfver de af Vega Exp. indsamlede arktiska hafsmolluskerna. 
1. Lamellibranchiata. Vega Exp. Vetensk. Iakttagelser vol. 3, 1883. 

Lénnsers: Ofversigt dfver Sveriges cephalopoder. Bihang K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. 
Bd. 17, Afd. 4, no. 6 1891. 

— On the Cephalopoda collected during the Swedish Arctic Exp. 1898 under 
the direction of prof. A. G. Nathorst. Ofv. K. Vet. Akad. Férhandl. vol. 55. 
1898. 

MippenvorrF: Beitrige zu einer Malacozoologia Rossia. 1. Chitone. Mem. Sci, 

Natur. Acad. I. Sci. St. Petersbourg vol. 6, 1847. 
= Mollusken. Middendorff: Reise in dem dussersten Norden und Osten 
Sibiriens. Bd. 2, Theil 1. 1851. 

Méstus: Mollusken. Die zweite deutsch. Nordpolarfahrt 1869 u. 1870 unter Kolde- 
wey, vol. 2. Zool. 1874. 

Mo.ter: Index Mollusc. Groenlandie. Naturhist. Tidsskrift Bd. 4. 1842—43. 

Mércn: Fortegnelse over Grinlands bloddyr. Naturhist. Bidrag til en Beskrivelse 
af Grenland af J. Reinhardt m. fl. 1857. 


1898— 1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. At 


Morcu: Catalogue des Mollusques du Spitzbergen recueillis par H. Kréyer. Mem. 
malacolog. de Belgique. Tome 4. 1869. 
Opuner: Northern arctic Invertebrates in the collections of the Swedish State Mu- 
seum. 38. Opisthobranchia and Pteropoda. K. Sv. Vetensk. Akad. Handl. 
Bd. 41, no. 4. 1907. 
Owen: John Ross, Appendix to the Narrative of second voyage in search of a 
North West Passage and of a residence in the Arctic Regions during the 
years 1829—1833. 1835. 
Prerrer: Mollusken, Krebse und Echinodermen von Cumberland Sund. Jabrb. Ham- 
burg. Wiss. Anstalten. Jahr. 3, 1885. 
= Fische, Mollusken und Echinodermen von Spitzbergen gesammelt von 
W. Kikenthal im J. 1886. Zool. Jahrb. Abtheil. System. Geogr. u. Biol. 
Bd. 8, 1895. 
Cephalopoden; Nordisches Plankton. Lief. 9. 1908, 
ee Natural history in voyage towards the Norh Pol 1778 (1774). 
Possett: QOstgronlandske Mollusker. Meddel. om Gronland. Hefte 19. 1895 (1896). 
= Gronlands Brachiopoder og Bloddyr. Op. cit. Hefte 23. Afd. 1. 1898 
(1899). 
Reeve: Account of Shells. Belcher: The last of the arctic voyages vol. 2, 1855. 
Ross: Appendix to the Narrative of a second Voyage in Search of a North-West 
Passage etc. 1835. 
Sars, G.0.: Mollusca Regionis Arctice Norvegia. 1878. 
Smita: On the Mollusca collected during the arctic Exp. of 1875—76. Ann. Mag. 
Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. 20, 1877. 
_ Mollusca. Nares: Narrative of a voyage to the Polar Sea during 1875—6 
in H.M.S. Alert and Discovery, vol. 2, 1878. 
Sparre Scunewer: Undersogelser af dyrelivet i de arktiske fjorde. 1. Kvenangens 
Molluskfauna. Tromsé Museums Aarshefter, vol. 4. 1881. 
- Unders. 3. Tromsésundets molluskfauna. Op. cit. vol. 8 (1885) og vol. 9 
(1886). 
—  Unders. 4. Mollusca og Crustacea indsamlede i Malangenfjord 1887. Op. 
cit. vol. 14, 1891. 
- Fortsatte bidrag til kundskaben om Tromsésundets molluskfauna. Op. cit. 18. 
1895. 
Stimpson: Synopsis of the marine Invertebrata collected by the late arctic expedition 
under Hayes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1863 (1864). 
Surgertanp: Journ of a voyage in Baffins Bay and Barrow Straits 1850—51, vol. 2 
App. Zool. 1852. ; 
Tore: Bidrag till Spitzbergens Molluskfauna. 1859. 
Tryon: Manual of Conchology, vol. 3, 1881 og vol. 9, 1887. 
Verritt: The Cephalopods of the North-eastern Coast of Amerika. Transact. Con- 
necticut Acad. A. Sci. vol. 5. 1882. 
- Catalogue of marine Mollusca added to the Fauna of New England region 
during the past ten years. Op. cit. vol. 5. 1882. 
Wauker: Notes on the Zoology of the last arctic Expedition under capt. M’Clintock, 
Journ. R. Dublin Soc. vol. 3, 1860-61 (1861). , 


42 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Echinodermata. 
(Supplement.) 


When examining the mollusca collected by the 2nd Fram Expedition 1 found 
among them some echinodermata from localities not mentioned in the report on 
echinodermata found during the expedition (Rep. II Norweg. Arctic’Exp. in the 
“Fram” 1898—1902 no. 18, 1907). One species, cucumaria minuta, is not even re- 
corded in the report, and does not seem to have been previously found in the 
waters about Jones Sound and Smith Sound. As a supplement therefore to the 
report on the Echinodermata of the Fram Expedition I append a description of these 
species. From the archipelago west and north of Baffin Bay we are, it would seem, 
now acquainted with: 2 crinoids, 6 asteroids, 6 ophiuroids, 1 echinoid and 4 holo- 
thurians. 


Solaster papposus, Linne. 
Locality: ce 
Sept. 20. 1900. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 
A quite young ten-armed specimen. 


Stichaster albulus, Stimpson. 
Locality: 

Aug. 4-5. 1898. Upernivik, 8-26 m. Three small specimens, one with three arms, 
the two others with six arms. However in the. case of one of 
these latter two of the arms are quite rudimentary. The largest 
specimen measures: disc-radius 1.7 mm., arm-radius 9.5 mm. 

Aug. 4. 1900. Bleksprutgrunden, Havnefjord, 20—30 m. Small stones. One six- 
armed specimen with three of the arms fully developed and of 
the same size,- while three are quite small and rudimentary. The 
specimen measures: disc-radius 4 mm., arm-radius 21.5 mm. 


Asterias miilleri f. grénlandica, STEENsTRUP. 


Locality: 
Sept. 20. 1900. The head of the Gaasefjord, 6-40 m. Clay with small stones. 


One specimen. 


Myriotrochus rinki, STEENSTRUP. 


. Locality: 
March 7. 1900. Bay south of Sjépélse Ness, Havnefjord 30—40 m. Small stones 
with Jaminaria. 3 specimens. 
Sept. 20. ,, The head of the Gaasefjord, 6—40 m. Clay with small stones. 


Two specimens. 


Psolus fabrici, Ditey & Koren. 


Locality: 
July 21. 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 60 m. Stones and fucaceae. 
July 23. , - - — , about 40 m. Small stones. 


July 30. y The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 
Aug. 1. , Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 10—50 m. Small stones. 


From each of these localities we have one or two small specimens. 
The largest has a length of 12 mm. 


1898— 1902. No. 20.) - BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 43 


Cucumaria minuta, Fasricius. 
Locality: 


July 14. 1902. St. Helena: 4—14 m. Lange and eal stones overgrown with fuca- 
ceae. One 7 mm. long contracted specimen. 


Papillae are arranged in single rows, the three ventral rows having 
7—9 papillae. Skin is rough. When looked at under the microscope 
it will be found to be thickly covered with larger and smaller irregular 
nearly round calcareous plates which, as Lirken? says, remind one of 
the calcareous plates of cucumaria assimilis? depicted by Dien and 
Koren. The specimen preserved in alcohol is of a white colour. 

The specimen seems to agree most closely with the West Green- 
land cucumaria (holothuria) minuta, Fasricius® which is said to have 
three rows of papillae more developed than the two others, and its skin 
abundantly furnished with calcareous plates. I have accordingly referred 
it to this species. It must be stated, however, that it has not been 
possible to make a complete examination of the specimen, as I have 
not been able to dissect it 

Cucumaria minuta has not been previously found i in the archi- 
pelago north of America. Besides the west coast of Greenland it is 
known to occur on Grand Manan (North America), at Spitzbergen and 
on the Murman Coast. In the western hemisphere it was previously 
known to be distributed between 44° and 69° N. Lat., whereas its nor- 
therly limit is now 76° 15.5’ N. Lat. In the eastern hemisphere it is 
distributed: between 68° and 80° N. Lat. From east to west it was pre- 
viously known to occur between 44° E. Long. and 67° W. Long., or 
throughout 108 degrees of longitude. (Cf. Lupwie: Arktische und sub- 
arktische Holothurien 4). It is now known to be distributed westwards 
as far as 89° 16.5’ W. Long., or throughout about 130 degrees of 
longitude. 


Cucumaria frondosa, GUNNERUS. 


Locality: 
: Winter harbour, Havnefjord, 30 m. One specimen. 


1 Lirxen: Oversigt over Gronlands Echinodermata. 1857, p. 7. 

2 Désen & Koren: Oversigt af Skandinaviens Echinodermer, Kgl. Vetensk. Akad. 
Hand]. 1844 (1846) p. 296, tab. 4, fig. 2. 

3 Fapricius: Fauna Grénlandica, 1753, p. 346. 

4 Fauna Arctica. Bd. 1, Lief. 1, 1900, p. 144. 


Bergen, March 1909. 


44 JAMES A. GRIEG. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Tabular List of the Echinodermata 
collected by the 2nd Fram Expedition. 


Simmons peninsula 


West coast of 
South coast of 
Simmons peninsula 
West coast of 
North. coast of 
North Devon 


Greenland 
Smith Sound 


Havnefjord 
Gaasefjord 


Crinoidea. 


fe 
4 
| 
| 
| 


Antedon eschrichti, J. Mitten . . . we 


Asteroidea. 


Solaster papposus, Linn’. . . . . 1 we ee i] mJ] 

—  furcifer, Dipen & Koren . . . . . «| 
Pteraster militaris, O. F. Mitner . 1... . |] md] 
Stichaster albulus, Stimpson. . ww we || UE UE 
Asterias miilleri f. grénlandica, Stcensrrurp . . || — | — 


++ +4 ¢ + 


—  panopla, Sruxperc. . . 2... 7] SH] 


Ophiuroidea. 


Ophiura sarsi, Livrnen. © 6 6 6 ee eee ef EO 

— robusta, Avrrs . . ... 2... | RO 
Ophiocten sericeum, Forsrs . . . «© «© © e+ ee |] = 
Ophiacantha bidentata, Retztus . . 2. 1. wy 
Gorgonocephalus eucnemis, Miuter & Troscue, . |) — | — 


+++ 
+++ 


++ ee tt 


= agassizi, Srimpson. ww ww ew |] Sd] 


Echinoidea, 
Strongylocentrotus drébachiensis, O. F. Mitten . || + | +) +] +] + 1/4 4) 4+ 


Holothurioidea. 

Myriotrochus rinki, Sreensrrup . . . . . . wi) — | +] +] +#)/—-]—-|]- 
Psolus fabrici, Diipen & Koren . ee ere aes +}/—|/--};—]— 
Cucumaria minuta, Fasricius. . . . . . . | —}—f}] ae} mf} afl ae] st 
_ frondosa, Gunnerus . . ... ..// —| —]| +] +]/—]—] + 


A 
NN? 


RAIN 


INS 
INE 


1898—1902. No. 20.] BRACHIOPODS AND MOLLUSCS. 45 


Fig. 


Explanation of the Plate. 


Crenella faba, O. F. Mitier from the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord 
a left valve, 6 from above. Mag. 

Tellina, macoma, calcaria, Cuemnirz from the head of Gaasefjord. Left 
valve. Nat. size. 

Tellina, macoma, calcaria, Cuemnitz from Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord 
Left valve. Nat. size. 

Trichotropis bicarinata, Brop. & Sow. var. from Winter harbour, Havnefjord. 
a from the ventral side, 6 from the dorsal side, c operculum. a@ and 6 nat. 
size, C magn. 

Trichotropis bicarinata, Brop.& Sow. Typical specimen. Reproduction 
after Tryon. 

Trichotropis tenuis, E. A. Surra from Grinnell Land. Reproduction after 
Edgar A. Smith. 

Trichotropis tenuis, E. A. Smira var. from the east coast of Greenland. 
Reproduction after Grieg. 

Trichotropis hjorti, Free from the cold area east of Iceland. Reproduc- 
tion after Friele. 

Rossia palpebrosa, Owen from the bank at the entrance to Stordalen, 
Havnefjord. a from the dorsal side, 6 from the ventral side. Some reduce. size. 


Fig. 1—8 Henrich Bucher del. Fig. 9 reproduction after photos. 


Printed 26. October 1909. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 21. 


LICHENS 


COLLECTED DURING THE 2ND NORWEGIAN POLAR EXPEDITION 
IN 1898—1902, AND DETERMINED BY 


OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. 


WITH 2 PLATES 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 
(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


AAA 
tae as et 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W.BROGGER 
1909 


Introduction. 


dim material of Lichens brought back from Ellesmere-land and 
King Oscar-Land and collected mainly by H. G. Simmons is very exten- 
sive. I think I can safely state that it is by far the best collection of this 
kind ever brought back from that part of the world. The collection has 
been separated into 1250 paper bags and a number of loose specimens. 
Some of the bags contain several portions of substratum, and these not 
unfrequently carry quite a lot of specimens and species. Every Licheno- 
logist knows how many plants may be found on a single stone. A 
rough calculation would therefore place the number of lichens in this 
collection at anything between 7,000 and 10,000. We should therefore 
get a very complete- idea of what the lichen-flora of the country visited 
by the Norwegian Expedition is like. I will endeavour to give this be- 
fore I pass on to the enumeration of the species themselves. I must 
however before doing so express my thanks to the Council of the Uni- 
versity of Manchester, which body gave me leave to pay for a substitute 
for me during part of the Session 1906—1907, and to Prof. Weiss who 
took over part of my work during that year. I was however not able 
to make the full use of this period which I had hoped. My thanks are 
also due to Miss N. Snape for kindly rendering assistance in the cutting 
of sections. 

Judging from the material which has been placed at my disposal, 
I can state that the fruticulose lichens play a very important part in the 
vegetation of Ellesmere- and King Oscar-Land. The various species 
of Cetraria evidently occur in great quantities and over large areas. 
It is mentioned by Tu. M. Fries that the larger forms of lichens were 
found in small quantities during the English Expedition 1875—1876. 
He concludes from this that the smaller kinds preponderate. But I do 
not think that this is really the case. 


4 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


I think I am correct in saying that land which is free of ice or 
snow atleast for the greater portion of the year will produce lichens. 
It is necessary ofcourse also that the substratum should not be a mov- 
ing one. Sand or shifting stones or earth would never bear a lichen- 
vegetation. But the exposed nunataks and earth will both ultimately 
be covered by lichens. These are the two most important substrata in 
the district under consideration. Tree-lichens are ofcourse absent. 

I am not able here to say exactly why the bare earth in some cases 
is covered with moss and in some cases with lichens. But it is prob- 
ably a question of water-supply, or rather rapidity of evaporation. At 
any rate it ultimately depends on the power of the particular plant to 
stand drought. From my own observations in this country I know that 
on the open hillside the lichens occupy the drier localities. They form 
in fact the outskirts of vegetation, though they naturally occur mixed 
with mosses in many localtties. Not only are lichens satisfied with less 
water but they can absorb the smallest quantity with the greatest avi- 
dity They can also without apparently taking any harm dry up till they 
become quite brittle. In this condition they are able to withstand the 
greatest cold without being injured. We thus find them in the most 
exposed positions on the bare faces of rocks, where no moss could find 
a firm hold. 

As far as the exposed earth is concerned the lichens we find will 
depend largely on the time which the locality has been undisturbed, for 
lichens grow very slowly. 

Not a few of the bigger species found on the bare earth may also 
be found among moss or even growing over it. To this class belong 
plants like Stereocaulon alpinum, paschale and Cladonia pyxidata. 
In the same way Physcia pulverulenta and muscigena, which is per- 
haps hardly a separate species, grow abundantly in and over moss. 
Dactylina arctica and Thamnolia vermicularis both occur amongst moss 
but the latter very often passes beyond the moss-area. It has even been 
found firmly attached to some droppings of the musk-ox (North Lincoln: 
Framfjord). Dufourea muricata here and there found among moss 
generally occurs in pure formations. In this it is followed by most of 
the species of Cetraria. We thus get quite extensive beds of Cetraria 
cucullata, hiascens, nivalis and to a smaller degree apparently islan- 
dica. Alectoria nigricans and ochroleuca though often found in pure 
formations are more common, so it would appear, in close company 
with mosses. The different species of Peltigera are well represented in 
the area under consideration. They are known to favour moist places 


1898 —1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 5 


as a rule. Therefore we find them near mosses or actually growing 
over them. I would like to state that the fruticulose lichens are not 
represented by many species in arctic regions but that they cover a very 
extensive area and thus form a very important feature in the vegetation. 
I cannot say how important they are to the animals of those parts of 
the world. Fries mentions, on the authority of Capt. Fretpen that the 
musk-ox at any rate never feeds on lichens at all. 


In some places we get the bare earth covered by crustaceous lichens 
and a very common plant-society is represented by the species Lecanora 
epibryon, Rinodina turfacea, Aspicilia verrucosa and one or two 
other kinds. Pertusaria subobducens is frequent on bare earth. 

Placodium splendens, one of the new species, growing over bare 
soil must with its striking orange colour form quite a conspicuous ob- 
ject in the landscape. It shows at any rate that lichens in the arctic 
area are in a healthy condition and that for them the conditions are 
not all adverse. Very noticeable is the absence from the “Fram”-ma- 
terial of the reindeermoss, but its absence is also commented upon by 
Fries in his account of the lichens of the English Polar Expedition. 


When we turn to the lichens growing on stones we again find that 
the cold of the north has no deterrent effect. Almost every stone which 
is exposed for atleast part of the time has its coat of lichens. Species 
of Gyrophora are of frequent occurrence and they are often found 
together with Parmelia lanata, one of the commonest of arctic rock- 
lichens. We very commonly find Rhizocarpon geographicum and ge- 
minatum associated with Sporastatia testudinea. The intervals between 
the larger crustaceous lichens being covered more or less by numerous 
other kinds, amongst which some of the species of Aspicilia are often 
met with. From what I have seen of Placodium elegans I would say 
that this plant is a rapid grower comparatively speaking. I say this 
because it is so often found on stones which are otherwise bare. This 
seems to indicate that this particular plant has established itself more 
quickly than any other lichen. 


Among the larger fruticose lichens the occurrence of apothecia is 
very unusual, whereas these organs of reproduction are of common oc- 
currence with the simpler crustaceous lichens. The soredia do not play 
any part in the distribution of lichens in the arctic region. Vegetative 
reproduction of the very simplest kind seems to be the chief method by 
which the larger lichens increase in number. 


6 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Three habitats deserve special mention, namely the bones of ani- 
mals found in the soil and projecting a little, drift-wood, and droppings 
of the musk-ox. 

The following few plants have been observed on various bones: 
Lecanora varia, Hageni, Rinodina turfacea, and Buellia parasema. 
It is important to notice that these lichens growing on bones as far as 
I can make out only very slowly decompose their organic subtratum. 
There is no sign of decay. 

Driftwood I have found to bear specimens of Caloplaca cerina, 
citrina and jungermanniae, Lecanora epibryon and Buellia myrio- 
carpa. The wood I examined consisted of oak-planks. 

Another substratum with a characteristic flora of lichens was that 
of the droppings of the musk-ox. On these I have found Biatorina 
globulosa, Caloplaca pyracea, Gyalolechia subsimilis, Lecanora epi- 
bryon, Aspicilia verrucosa, Rinodina turfacea and even, firmly atta- 
ched, Thamnolia vermicularis. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 7 


The following books and papers are quoted or have otherwise been made use 
of in this report: 


Aunquist, Ernst, Die Lichenenvegetation der Kuesten des Beringsmeeres. Vega- 
Expeditionens Vetenskapliga Arbeten. 

Amguist, S., Monographia Arthoniarum Scandinaviae. — Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps- 
Akademiens Handlingar. Bandet 17. No.6. Stockholm, 1880, 

Brrrer, Geore, Zur Morphologie und Systematik von Parmelia, Untergattung Hypo- 
gymnia, — Hedwigia, Band 40, 1901. 

Brantu, J. S. Detcumann, og Groentunp Cur., Groenlands Lichen-Flora. — Meddelelser 
om Groenland. Tredie Hefte, p. 449—513, p. 753—762. — 1887— 1899. 

Brantu, J. S. Detcumann, Lichener fra Scoresby Sund og Hold with Hope. — Saer- 
tryck af “Meddelelser om Groenland”. 16.— 1894. 

—,—* Lichenes Islandiae.— Botanisk Tidsskrift 25. Bind. 2. Hefte. — 1903. 

Cummines, Ciara E., The Lichens of Alaska. — 1906. 

Datta Torre, K. W. von, und Sarnruem, Lupwie Grar von, Die Flechten von Tirol, 
Vorarlberg und Liechtenstein. — Innsbruck, 1902. — (Arnold Tirol.). 
Darsisuire, O. V., Die deutschen Pertusariaceen mit besonderer Beruecksichtigung 
ihrer Soredienbildung. — Botanische Jahrbuecher. Band 22. p. 593. 

—y— Flechten aus dem Umanakdistrict.— Bibliotheca Botanica, Heft 42, p.55. — 

1897. 
Forssett, K, B. J., Beitraege zur Kenntniss der Anatomie und Systematik der Gloeo- 
lichenen. — K. Gesellschaft der Wissenshaften zu Upsala. Stockholm 1885. 
—,— Die anatomischen Verhaeltnisse und die phylogenetische Entwicklung der 
Lecanora granatina Sommrf. — Botan. Centralbl. Bd.22. No. 15/16. — 1885. 
Fries, Tu. M., Lichens Arctoi Europae Groenlandiaeque hactenus cogniti. — Upsa- 
liae, 1860. 
—,—  Lichenes Spitshergenses. — Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademiens Hand- 
lingar. Bandet 7. No: 2. — 1867. 
—y—  Lichenographia Scandinavia. — Upsaliae 1871—1874. 
—,— On the Lichens collected during the English Polar Expedition of 1875— 
1876. — Linnean Society’s Journal. — Botany, vol. 17, p. 346.— 1879. 
—y— Polyblastiae Scandinaviae. — Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. 3. Upsa- 
liae, 1877. 
Hug, A., Addenda nova ad Lichenographiam Europaeam. — Revue de Botanique, 
Paris, 1886—1888. 
—,—  Lichenes Extra-Europaei a pluribus collectoribus ad Museum Parisiensem 
missi. — Parisiis, 1901. 
Jarra, A., Sylloge Lichenum italicorum. — Trani, 1900. 
Leicnton, W. A., The British Species of Angiocarpous Lichens. — Printed for the 
Ray-Society. London, 1851. 
—,— Notes on the Lichens collected by Sir. John Richardson in Arctic America. 
Linnean Society’s Journal, Botany, Vol. 9, p. 184. — 1865. 
Linpsay, W. Lauper, .The Lichen-Flora of Greenland, with Remarks on the lichens 
of other Arctic Regions. — Botanical Society of Edinburgh, Vol. 10, p.382—65. 
— 1869. 
—,— Observations on the lichens collected by Dr. Brown in West-Greenland in 
1867. — Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, vol. 27., 1869. 


8 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. ~° [SEC.ARCT.EXP.FRAM 


Macoun, Joun, Catalogue of Canadian Plants. Part 7. — Lichenes and Hepaticae. — 
Ottawa, 1902. 
Nyranper, Wittiam, Lichenes Scandinaviae. Helsingfors, 1861. 
—,— Synopsis Methodica Lichenum.— Parisiis, 1858—60. 
Stizensercer, E., Index Lichenum Hyperboreum. — Sangallensis, 1876. 
—,— Die Alectorienarten und ihre geographische Verbreitung. — Annalen des 
k. K. Naturhistorischen Hofmuseums. Band 7, Heft 3. Wien, 1892. 
Syvow, P., Die Flechten Deutschlands. — Berlin, 1887. 
Tuckermann, Epwarp, A synopsis of the North American Lichens. — Boston, and New 
Bedford, 1882—1888. ; 
Zaucsruckner, A., Specieller Theil der ‘“‘Lichenes (Flechten)” in “Die Natuerlichen 
Pflanzenfamilien” von Engler, A., und Prantl, K., Teil 1. Abteilung 1*. — 
Leipzig, 1907. : 


=) 


1898—1902. No. 21.] 


LICHENS. 


Systematic list. 


The following list includes the lichens sofar recorded from Arctic 
America, Greenland, Spitsbergen and Iceland. It is hoped that thus a 
fairly accurate piclure may be obtained of the lichen-vegetation of the 
district visited by the Second Norwegian Polar Expedition. It has been 
compiled from the material brought back by the Jatter and from the 
papers of Birrer, Brantu, Darsisnire, Fries, Hue, Linpsay, Macovtn, 
NyLANDER, STIZENBERGER and others. The alaskan lichens, an enume- 
ration of which we owe to Ciara E. Cummines, have not been added 
to my list as their inclusion would have made a very unwieldy list with- 
out probably really making it very much more complete. 

The specimens brought back by the Norwegian Expedition vere 
separated into about 1250 paper packets which bear the number of the 
locality on the left of the label above the locality. On the right in the 
topcorner some of the packets have numbers which refer to microscop- 
ical preparations. 

We can say that about 253 lichens have been recorded from the 
area visited by the “Fram” during this last voyage. Of this number 
I have been able to find 161 species. I have no doubt that more spe- 
cies might still be found in the same material, but I would like to say 
that almost every specimen of lichen has to be examined with the 
microscope before identification can be established. There are 8 new 
species. 

Before going on to the description of the new species, I would like to 
correct an error which was kindly pointed out to me by Mr. Brantu. 
In my paper on the lichens from the Umanak-District, I recorded Du- 
fourea madreporiformis as a plant new to Greenland. The specimen 
however turned out to be a species of Sphaerophoron, and I wish there- 
fore to cross out the former species as a Greenland-plant. , 

I will now give the chief features of the new species: 


10 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Lecidea purissima. (Tab. 4, fig. 1). 


Diagnosis: Crusta crassiuscula indistincte areolata, albida vel di- 
lutissime flavescens, partibus albidis discontiguis sed hypothallo nigro 
impositis, hypothallo nigro instructa. Apothecia usque ad 1 mm. lata, 
primum .immersa et thallo subaequantia, marginata, nigra, deinde quasi 
elevata, subsessilia convexa et immarginata; epithecium nigrum; hypo- 
thecium decolor; asci inflato-clavati; paraphyses simplices; sporae octo- 
nae, hyalinae, 12.5 mi.—15 mi. longae, 5—6 mi. latae. Habitat ad saxa. 

Notes: This species is characterised by the smaller or larger 
white portions of the thallus which are not continuous, but which are 
superimposed on an hypothallus of dark colour. Externally it much 
resembles a specimen of “Lecidea alpicola, Wau. Port Kennedy, Dr. 
Watker 20.” in the Herbarium at Kew. But this is really Catocarpon 
chionophilum, Tu. Fr., and its spores are in fact two-celled, black and 
measure 22—36  11—18 mi. Our species differs from Lecidea macro- 
carpa (DC.) Ty. Fr. by its smaller spores. I think that it is a new spe- 
cies. But as I mention later on the Lecideas of the world require re- 
vising monographically. 


Lecidea solitaria. (Tab. 1, fig. 2). 


Diagnosis: Crusta tenuissima, fere obsoleta, albida, hypothallo 
nullo distincto; Apothecia dispersa, ad 1 mm. lata, nigra, margine con- 
colori cincto, demum immarginata, convexa; epithecium nigrum; hypo- 
thecium decolor; paraphyses non-articulatae; sporae octonae, non-unise- 
riatae, subglobosae, 5 >< 6.4 mi. magnae. Habitat ad saxa. 

Notes: From the description this plant appears to be not unlike 
Lecidea ultima, Tu. Fr., but in the latter the hypothecium is darker, 
the paraphyses are articulate and the spores uniseriate. It also in some 
respects resembles the “crusta fere nulla” — forms of Lecidea auricu- 
lata, Tu. Fr. but the persistent margin of the latter is a distinguishing 
feature. 


Catillaria sanguinaria. 


Diagnosis: Crusta tenuis, cinerascens, minute rimoso-areolata, 
margine fusco-nigricanti, hypothallo albido, fere effigurato, centro rimoso- 
diffracta et fere papillosa. Apothecia minuta, ad .3 mm. lata, papillis 
immersa, nigra, margine albido cincta, convexa, lecideina; epithecium, 
parathecium et hypothecium nigrum; sporae octonae, halone nullo, 16 x 6 
mi. magnae, bicellulares, hyalinae. Habitat ad saxa. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 11 


Notes: This new species is characterised by a thin but distinctly 
areolate and greyish thallus and a very clearly marked hypothallus of 
a darkish colour, which ist almost effigurate at the margin. It thus 
differs from Catillaria subalpina, Tu. Fr. (Lich. Scand. p. 583). The 
size of the spores and the structure of the apothecium are also typical 
features. 


Catocarpon depressum. (Tab. 1, fig. 3). 


Diagnosis: Crusta tenuis, vel crassior, continua, partim albo- 
coerulescens et rimoso-areolata, partim albida vel dilutissime rubescens 
et effusa, hypothallo mgro. Apothecia ad 1.5 mm. lata, primum im- 
mersa, margine distincto cincta pallido, demum erumpentia et elevata, 
immarginata, convexa, nigra; epithecium, parathecium et hypothecium 
nigrum; sporae octonae, hyalinae, bicellulares, halone distincto circum- 
datae, 15—16  7—8 mi. magnae (halone non incluso). Habitat ad saxa. 

Notes: This is a very distinct species, and it appears new. It 
resembles Catocarpon chioneuin (Norm.) Tu. Fr., but it differs atleast 
in having a distinct hypothallus, in the apothecia not being flat, and 
not having a thickish margin, and in the spores being bigger than is 
the case with C. chioneum. 


Pertusaria determinanda. (Tab. 2, fig. 1). 


Diagnosis: Crusta .5 ad 1.0 mm. crassa, rimoso-areolata, albella 
vel roseola; verrucae fertiles irregulariter globosae, ad 1.5 mm. latae et 
ad 1.2 mm. altae, apicibus depressae, ostiolis apotheciorum usque ad 10, 
punctiformibus, fuscescentibus instructae; sporae octonae, elongatae, 26— 
30 X 8—10 mi. magnae. Habitat ad saxa. 

Notes: This new Pertusaria differs from Pertusaria rhodoleuca, 
Tu. Fr. (Lich. Scand. p. 306) and P. wanthostoma by its smaller and 
octone spores. It also resembles P. pocillaria, Cummines (Alaskan Lich- 
ens p. 101, pl. 9) but the spores of the latter are much larger. 


Placodium splendens. 


Diagnosis: Crusta adpressa, quasi foliacea, dense squamulosa, et 
adscendens, aurantiaca. K + intense purpurascens, infra rhizinis destituta 
et colore albida, utrinque corticata, strato corticali plectenchymatico di- 
stincto, supra et infra ad 30 mi. crasso. Apothecia ad 2.5 mm. lata, 
concoloria, lecanorina, primum margine cincta distincto, demum sine mar- 
gine distincte viso, plana; sporae octonae, polari-dyblastae, apicibus ro- 


12 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


tundatis, hyalinae, 15—20 x 7—10 mi. magnae. Spermogonia non visa. 
Habitat ad saxa, terram nudam et supra muscos Americae Arcticae, 

Notes: The new plant before us is very striking in appearance, 
and I think there can be no doubt that it is nearly allied to Placodium 
elegans, thus it resembles “Lecanora elegans (Acu.) f. muscicola, in 
H. Losxa, Lichenes Regni Hungarici Exsiccati. Fasciculus 3. (1882). 
n. 120.” But the latter has smaller spores (up to 14 mi. in length only) 
and the margin of the apothecia is more marked. Our new species 
often becomes almost fruticulose. Portions of the thallus stand up like 
the upright podetia of Dactylina arctica. But they are much smaller, 
about 1 cm. in height, and they are always dorsiventral in structure. 
Apothecia seem to be rare, some specimens being quite devoid of such, 
The complete absence of rhizines at once separates this species from 
any kind of Xanthoria. 


Aspicilia lesleyana. (Tab. 2, fig. 2). 


Diagnosis: Crusta tenuis vel crassiuscula, albo-cinerascens aut 
dilute roseola, rimoso-areolata vel rimoso-diffracta, margine quasi effi- 
gurato, frequenter non-contigua, hypothallo nigro vell pallido. Apothecia 
ad 1 mm. lata, primum immersa, urceolata, dein emersa, semper mat- 
gine dislincto cincta, atra, pruinosa; epithecium nigrum; sporae octonae, 
hyalinae, 15 & 7.5 mi. magnae. Habitat ad saxa. 

Notes: The species of Aspicilia are common enough in the 
“Fram” -material, but they have given me a great deal of trouble. I consider 
however this to be a new species, though not unlike Aspicilia calcarea, 
(L.) Smrrr. The latter however has fewer, but larger spores in its asci. 
The thallus of our new species is distinctly areolate and near the mar- 
gin it breaks up almost into long thin laciniae, still distinctly areolate. 
The thallus often consists of only one fertile wart. The hypothallus is 
as often clearly marked as not present. 


Aspicilia nikrapensis. (Tab. 2, fig. 3). 


Diagnosis: Crusta tenuis aut crassiuscula, tartarea, albo-ciner- 
ascens, conligua, centro inter apothecia matura distincte rimoso-areolata, 
margine fenui, quasi effigurato, hypothallo nigro aut nullo distincto. 
Apothecia primum immersa, demum emersa, disco planiusculo, pruinoso, 
margine distincto instructa; sporae octonae, 16—20  7—8 mi. magnae. 
Habitat ad saxa. 


4898—1902. No. 21.| LICHENS. 13 


Notes: The thallus is distinctly black only when our plant comes 
into contact on the subtratum with another lichen of the same species 
or another. I have however noticed it overgrowing completely some of 
the smaller species of Polyblastia. The margin exhibits a peculiar and 
very delicate ribbing which produces an effiguration-effect. This species 
is also closely allied to A. calcarea, (L.) Smrrv., but it differs in having 
a black hypothallus on occasions and in the presence of 8 spores in 
each ascus. 


The following list includes the species recorded up to now from Arctic 
America, Greenland, Spitsbergen and Iceland. Each name is followed by 
one reference only, where the best available description will be found. 
I have also mentioned, relying on the authors allready referred to for the 
statements, as to whether the species is recorded for Arctic America 
(Am.), Greenland (Greenl.), Spitsbergen (Spits.) and Iceland (Icel.). The 
localities of the “Fram’’-Expedition are given after the letters E. P.S. N. 
which stand for Expeditio Polaris Secunda Norvegica. The numbers ir 
brackets after the locality refer to the more detailed list of localities 
which follows the systematic enumeration. It was first my intention to 
add here a key to the genera and species of the Arctic Regions which 
I have compiled for my own use in the form of a card-catalogue. But 
in the end I considered this premature and I have left it for a later 
occasion. 


14 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Coniocarpi. 
Calicium Pers. 


Calicium pusillum Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arel. p.249.— Am. — Over wood. 
Calicium roscidum Frex.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 246.— Am.— On small 
dead pine twigs. 
Coniocybe Acu. 


Coniocybe furfuracea Acu.— Tu. FR. Arct. p. 252.—Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — On roots of dead trees. 


Acolium Acu. 


Acolium tigillare pe Nort. -— Tu. Fr. Arct. p.245 (sub Cyphelium). — 
Am.— On wood. 


Sphaerophoron Pers. 


Sphaerophoron compressum Acu. — Hue Lich. Extra. N. 38. — 
Am. — Over earth. 

Sphaerophoron coralloides Pers. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 244.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.—E. P.S.N.; Ellesmere Land: Cape Viele (10); 
King Oscar Land: Goosefjord (39). — Over earth and between Moss. 

Sphaerophoron fragile Pers. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p.244. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth and between Moss. 


Discocarpi. 
Graphideales. 
Lecanactis Escuw. 


Lecanactis abietina (Acu.) Ker. — Nyt. Lich. Scand. p.241.— Am. 
— On wood. 

Lecanactis Dilleniana (Acu.) Ker.—Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 238, — Greenl. 
— On stone. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 15 


Arthonia Acn. 


Arthonia fusca Mass. — Tu. Fr. Spits. p. 46. —Spitsb.— On stone. 

Arthonia excentrica Tu. Fr.— Atma. Arth. Scand. p. 55. — Spitsb. 
— Over moss. 

Arthonia trabinella Tu. Fr. — Atmo. Arth. Scand. p. 30. —.Greenl. 
— Corticolous. 

Arthonia proximella Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Arct. 205.— Greenl., Icel. — 
Corticolous. 

Arthonia punctiformis Acu.— Atma. Arth. Scand. p. 42. — Icel. — 
Corticolous. 

Xylographa Fr. 

Xylographa parallela Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 242. — Greenl. — 

Old wood. 


Lecideales. 
Rhexophiale Tu. Fr. 


Rhexophiale coronata Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 205. — Greenl., 
Spitsb. — Over earth and moss. 


Gyalecta Acu. 


Gyalecta cupularis Kuru. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 140.— Icel. — Over 
rocks and moss. 


Racodium E. Fr. 


Racodium rupestre Pers. — Zautsr. Flecht. p. 128. — Greenl., Icel. 
— Over rocks. 


Secoliga Norm. 


Secoliga foveolaris (Acu.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 138. — Icel. — 
Over moss and earth. 

Secoliga Peziza (Mont.) Anzt. — Tu. Fr. E. Pol. Exp. p. 367. — Am. 
— Over turfy earth. 


Lecidea Acu. 


Lecidea aglaea Smrrr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 534. — Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — E. P.S.N.: King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (39). — On stone. 

Lecidea albocaerulescens (Wutr.) Scuarr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 508. 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 

Lecidea alpestris Smrvt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 536. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel, — Over earth. 


16 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Lecidea arctica Surrv. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 540. — Green. Spitsb., 
Icel. — Over mosses, on rocks. 

Lecidea armeniaca (DC.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 532. — Greenl. — 
On rocks. 

Lecidea assimilata Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 521. — Greenl., Icel. — 
Over moss. — E. P.S.N.: Ellesmere Land, Bedford Pim Island (19). 

Lecidea atrobrunnea (Ram.) Scuarr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 481. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 

Lecidea auriculata Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 499. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. Greenland, Foulkefjord (2); King 
Oscar Land, Goosefjord (88—41, 48), Vendom Kap (55); Cardigan Straits, 
Devils [sland (67). 

Lecidea brachyspora Tu. Fr.— Tu.FRr. Scand. p.501. — Am. —On 
stone. — KE. P.S.N.: King Oscar Land, South Cape (34); Goosefjord (40); 
North Devon, Burginsel (66); Cardigan Straits, Devils Island (67). 

Lecidea conferenda Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 560. — Greenl. — On 
stone. -- E.P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (42). 

Lecidea confluens (Wes.) Kar. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 484. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S. N.: King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (24), Goosefjord (88—40, 42, 48). 

Lecidea crassipes (Tu. Fr.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 520. — Am. 
Greenl. — Over mosses. 

Lecidea crustulata Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 511. — Greenl. — On 
stone. — E. P.S. N.: King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (38). 

Lecidea cyanea (Acu.) To. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 489. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. 

Lecidea despecta Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p.3862.— Am. 
— On stone. 

Lecidea elaeochroma (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.542.-- Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb,, Icel. — Over earth, moss, wood, and stone. — E. P. S. N. 
King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (26), South Cape (34), Goosefjord (88, 
40, 48), Lands End (58), Coalharbour (62). 

Lecidea elata Scuarr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 5385. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord 
(28), Goosefjord (38, 39, 42, 48). 

Lecidea fuscoatra (L.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 525. — Am., Greenl., 
Icel. — On stone. — E.P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goose- 
fjord (38). 

Lecidea impavida Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 529. — Spitsb. — 
On stone. 


1998 -1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 17 


Lecidea lapicida (Acu.) Arn. — Tu. FR. Scand. p. 493. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On stone. 

Lecidea limosa Aca. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 538. — Am., Greenl., Icel. 
— On dead plants and earth. 

Lecidea lithophila (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Ts. Fr. Scand. p.495.— Greenl., 
Icel. — On stone. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (89). 

Lecidea macrocarpa (D.C.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 505. — 
E. P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Bedford Pim Island (19); King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (89, 42, 48), Vendom Kap (55), Landsend (58); North Kent 
(64). — On stone. 

Lecidea neglecta Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 524. — Icel. — Over moss 
on stone. 

Lecidea pallida Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 539.— Greenl. — Over 
earth and sand, rarely rocks. 

Lecidea pannaeola Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 502. — Greenl., Icel. 
— On stone. 

Lecidea pantherina (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 491.—Am., 
Green., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 

Lecidea parasemella Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 552. — Greenl. 
On dead moss. 

Lecidea paupercula Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 482. — Am., Greenl. 
— On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (39). 

Lecidea purissima Darsisu. — E. P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Bedford 
Pim Island (19); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26), South Cape 
(34), Goosefjord (88—43, 48, 49), Vendom Kap (55), Renbugten (57); 
North Devon, Burginsel (66); Cardigan Straits (67). — On stone. 

Lecidea ramulosa Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 521. — Spitsb. — 
Over damp earth and moss. — KE. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbour- 
fjord (32). 

Lecidea rhaetica Herr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 514. — Spitsb. — On 
stone. 

Lecidea scrobiculata Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p. 362. — 
Am., Spitsb. — On stone. - 

Lecidea sincerula Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 516 (as Feniiioes Dickso- 
nit Acu.). — Am,, Greenl., Icel. — On stone. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar 
Land, Goosefjord (38, 39). 

Lecidea solitaria Darvisn. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, South 
Cape (34). — On stone. 

2 


18 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Lecidea speirea Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand, p. 485.— Greenl., Icel. — 
On stone. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (28), Goose- 
fjord (41). 

Lecidea sulphurella Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Spits. p. 41. -- Arct. p. 220; 
Spitsb. — On stone. 

Lecidea tenebrosa Fw. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.540. — Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — On stone’ — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (89). 

Lecidea tessellata (Acu.) Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 489.— Greenl., 
Icel. — On stone. —E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (89). 

Lecidea ultima Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p. 363. — Am. 
— On stone. 

Lecidea vorticosa (Fix.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 515. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb.—On stone. 


Catillaria Acu. 


Catillaria sanguinea Darpisu. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (24). — On stone. 


Biatorina Mass. 


Biatorina fraudans Hetts. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 85. — Spitsh. — 
On moss. 

Biatorina globulosa(F ix.) Ta. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 575. — Spitsb. 
— On bark and old plants and mosses. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land 
Goosefjord (39), over muskoxdung. 

Biatorina Jemilandica Tu. Fr. et Aumo. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 580. 
— Icel. — On moss. 

Biatorina lenticularis (Acu.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 567. — Icel. 
— On stone. 


Thalloidima Mass. 


Thalloidima candidum (Wes.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 338. — 
Am., Green., Spitsb. — Over earth among rocks, 

Thalloidima conjungens Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsh. p. 34. — Spitsb. 
— On rocks. 

Thalloidima cumulatum Surrr. — Tu. FR. Scand. p. 341. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 19 


Thalloidima vesiculare (Hrrm.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 337. — 
Greenl., Icel. — E. P.S. N. — King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26, 28), 
Muskoxfjord (36), Goosefjord (89, 41, 46). — Over earth. 


Bilimbia ve Nor. 


Bilimbia hypnophila (Acu.) Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 373. — 
Am., Greenl., Icel. — Over mosses. 

Bilimbia lugubris (Smrrt.) Ta. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 387. —Greenl., 
Icel. — Over stone. 

Bilimbia melaena (Nyu.) Arn. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 883. — Green. 
— On wood. 

Bilimbia microcarpa Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 376.— Spitsb. — 
Over mosses (rarely stone). — E. P.S. N. Ellesmereland, Beitstadsfjord (7). 
— Over earth. | 

Bilimbia milliaria (Fr.) Kes. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 381. — Icel. -— 
Over wood, earth and moss (rarely rocks). 

Bilimbia obscurata (Smrrt.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 872. — 
Over moss (rarely rocks). 

Bilimbia sphaeroides (Dicxs.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. p. 369. — Am., 
Greenl., Icel. — Over moss, old bark and wood. . 

Bilimbia verecundula Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 887. — Am. — 
Hypophloeodie. 


Biatora Fr. 


Biatora aenea (Dur.) Anz1.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 457.— Am., Green. 
— On stone. 

Biatora Berengeriana Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 433. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and earth. 

Biatora cinnabarina (Surrt.) Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p.422.— Greenl. 
— Over bark. 

Biatora coarctata (Sm.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 447. — Icel. — 
Over stone, rarely over moss. — E, P. S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord 
(88, 41, 48).— On stone. 

' Biatora collodea Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 36. — Spitsb. — Over 
moss (?). 

Biatora cuprea (Smrrt.) Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 426. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. 

Biatora Diapensiae Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 439. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On Diapensia lapponica. — E. P.S.N. Ellesmereland, Bedford 
Pim Island (19), over moss. é 


20 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Biatora epiphaea Nyz. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 477. — Over moss and 
and dead grass. 

Biatora erythrophaea Fix. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 465. — Greenl., 
Icel.— Over bark. 

Biatora fusca (Scuarr.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 435. — Greenl., 
Icel, — Over moss and old wood. 

Biatora fuscescens Smrrr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 461. — Greenl., Icel. 
— Over bark. 

Biatora fuscorubens Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 440. — Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Biatora granulosa (Euru.) Poerzscu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 442, — 
Am., Greenl., [cel. — Over earth. 

Biatora hilarescens Nyt. — Ny. Flora. 1862 p. 83. — Greenl. — 
Over old wood. 

Biatora immersa (Wes.) Kre. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.478. — E.P.S.N. 
King Oscar Land, Vendom Kap (55). — Endolithiec. 

Biatora leucophaea (Fix.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 459.— Am., 
Green., Spitsb.— On stone. , 

Biatora lucida (Acu.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 432. — Am. — On 
stone or bark. 

Biatora Nylanderi Anzi. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 462. — Icel. — On 
old bark. 

Biatora rivulosa (Acu.) Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 450.— Am. — 
On stone. 

Biatora rufofusca (Anzt) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 476. — Greenl. 
Over moss. 

Biatora rupestris (Scor.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.423.— Am., Spitsb. 
— On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (39), Vendom 
Kap (55). 

Biatora terricola (Anzi) Tu. Fr. — Scand. p. 425. — Greenl. — Over 
earth and moss. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (41). 

Biatora tornoénsis (Nyu.) Tu. Fr. — Scand. p. 464. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb.. Icel.— On bark. 

Biatora turgidula (Fr.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 469. — Greenl. — 
On bark. 

Biatora uliginosa (Scurap.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 455. —Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth and old wood. 

Biatora vernalis (Linn.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 427. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Old moss. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 91 


Bacidia vrE Nor. 


Bacidia abbrevians (Nyu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 362. — 
Icel. — On bark. 

Bacidia arceutina (Acu.) Arn. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 852. — Icel. — 
On bark. 

Bacidia atrosanguinea (Scuarr.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.354. 
— Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On bark. 

Bacidia Beckhausti (Krs.) Ann. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 359. — Icel. — 
On bark. 

Bacidia herbarum (Hepp.) Arn. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 349.—Icel. — 
Over moss. 

Bacidia leucococcoides Nyt. — Hue Add. n. 1088. — Icel. — On 
old plants. 

Bacidia rubella (Pers.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.344.— Am., Icel. 
— On bark. 

Bacidia subfuscula (Nyu.) Ta. Fr.—- Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 35. — Green. 
Spitsb., Icel.-— Over earth and wood. 

Bacidia wmbrina Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.365. — Greenl, Icel. — 
Over stone, old wood and bark. 

Bacidia venusta Here. — Ta. Fr. Spitsb. p. 35. — Spitsb. — Over 
moss, wood and bone. 

Bacidia vermifera (Nyu.) — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 363. — Greenl. — 
Over bark. 


Sporastatia Mass. 


Sporastatia cinerea (Scuaer.) Tu. FR. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 404. — 
Spitsb. — On stone. 

Sporastatia Spitsbergensis Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 43, — 
Spitsb. — On stone. 

Sporastatia tenuirimata Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 42. — Spitsb. 
— On stone. 

Sporastatia testudinea Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 403. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (24, 26, 27), Bjorneborg (35), Goosefjord (88-41, 48—50). 


Sarcogyne Fw. 


Sarcogyne Clavus (D.C.) Ts. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 409. — Greenl. 
—- On stone. 


22 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Sarcogyne pruinosa (Su.) Mupp. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 406. — Grenl. 
— On stone. 

Sarcogyne simplex (Dav.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 407. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord 
(39),. Vendom Kap (55). 


Lopadium Kprr. 


Lopadium fuscoluteum (Dicxs.) Mupp. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 388. — 
Greenl., Icel. — Over moss and earth. — E. P. S. N. Greenland (8); Elles- 
mereland, Frams Harbour (17); King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (89, 47, 50), 
Vendom Kap (55). 

Lopadium pezizoideum Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 389. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over bark. 


Diplotomma Fw. 


Diplotomima alboatrum (Hrrm.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 607. — 
Am., Icel. — On bark and stone. 


Catocarpon Ksr. 


Catocarpon applanatum (FR.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 618. — 
Greenl. — On stone. 

Catocarpon badioatrum (F.x.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 613. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (27). 

Catocarpon chionophilum Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 612.— Am. 
Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. 

Catocarpon Copelandi (Ksr.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 615. — 
Greenl. — On stone. 

Catocarpon depressum Darsisy. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, 
Vendom Kap (55).— On stone. 

Catocarpon effiguratum (Anz) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 613° 
— Greenl. — On stone. 

Catocarpon expallescens Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.620.— Greenl. 
— On stone. 

Catocarpon ignobile Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. — Scand. p. 619. — Green. 
— On stone. 

Catocarpon Rittokense (Hetts.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 615. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (39). 


- 1898 —1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 93 


Rhizocarpon Fam. 


Rhizocarpon calcareum (Ware) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 631. — 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — KE. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosetjord (39). 

Rhizocarpon chioneum (Norm.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 620.— 
E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, South Cape (34).— On stone. 

Rhizocarpon endamyleum Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 627. — On 
stone. 

Rhizocarpon geminatum (Fw.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 625. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— On stone. — E.P.S.N. Greenland (2, 3); 
Ellesmereland, Beitstadsfjord (7), Lastraea Valley (9), Framsharbour (15 
—17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26—28), Goosefjord (88—42 
48—50), Vendom Kap (55); North Devon (66). 

Rhizocarpon geographicum (L.) D.C. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 622. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— On stone. — E. P. S. N. Greenland (2); Elles- 
mereland, Fort Juliana (5), Beitstadsfjord (7), Framsharbour (16); King 
Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26-28), Bjorneborg (35), Goosefjord 
(88—42, 48—50), Vendom Kap (55), Landsend (58); North Devon (66), 
Cardiganstrait (67); Camp no. 30 (68). 

Rhizocarpon grande Fix. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 624. — Am.— On 
stone. 

Rhizocarpon Oederi (Wexs.) Krs. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 626. — Green. 
— On stone. 

Rhizocarpon petraeum Wutr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p, 235. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 


Catolechia Fw. 
Catolechia badia (Fr.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 588. — Icel. — 


On stone. 

Catolechia epigaea (Pers) Tu. Fr. — Tu. FR. Scand. p. 587. — 
Greenl. — Over earth. 

Catolechia pulchella (Scurs.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. FR. Seand. p. 588. — 
Am., Greenl. — On stone. 


Psora HrFrm. 


Psora cinereorufa (Scuazr.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 419, — 
Greenl., Icel. — On stone. 

Psora decipiens (Euru.) Krs.-— Tu. Fr. Scand. p.418.— Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord 
(26, 28), Goosefjord (41). 


94 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. |SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Psora demissa (Rutstr.) Tu. Fr.—Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 420. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth and old wood. 

Psora globifera (Acu.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 411.-— Greenl. — 
Over earth. 

Psora lurida (Sw.) Ker.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 413.—Greenl., Ice]. — 
Over earth. 


Psora rubiformis (Waut.) Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 412. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. 


Umbilicaria Hrrm. 


Umbilicaria Pennsylvanica (Hrrm.) — Hue Lich. Extra. n. 373. — 
Am., Green]. — On stone. 


Gyrophora Acu. 


Gyrophora anthracina (Wotr.) Ker. — Tu. FR. Scand. p. 165, — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, Frams- 
harbour (15), Bedford Pim Island (19, 20), Brevort Island (22); North 
Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (27), Goosefjord (88—40, 
48—50); Camp n. 30 (68). 

Gyrophora arctica Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 161.— Am., Greenl, — 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P. S. N. Ellesmere Land, Framsharbour (17). 

Gyrophora corrugata (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 161.— 
Icel. — On stone. 

Gyrophora cylindrica (L.) Aca. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 157.— Am., 
Grenl., Spitsb., Icel.— On stone. — E.P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Frams- 
harbour (17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (27), Goosefjord (38). 

Gyrophora deusta (L.) Fw. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 164.— Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Gyrophora discolor Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 31.— Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb. — On stone. 

Gyrophora erosa (Wes.) Acu.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 159. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., [cel. — On stone. — E. P. 5. N. Ellesmere Land, Beitstads- 
ford (7), Framsharbour (17). 

Gyrophora hirsuta Acu.—Tu.Fr. Scand. p. 155. — Greenl., Icel. 
— On stone. — E.P.S.N. Greenland (2); Ellesmereland, Bedford Pim 
Island (20); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goosefjord (40, 49). 

Gyrophora hyperborea (Hrru.) Mupp. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 160. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb.. Icel. — On stone. — E. P. S. N. Greenland (2); Elles- 
mereland, Framsharbour (15, 17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (27), 
Goosefjord (38, 48). 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 95 


Gyrophora Muehlenbergii Acu. — Hue Lich. Extr. n.380. — Am. — 
On stone. 

Gyrophora polyphylla (L.) Fw. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 163. — Greenl. 
— Icel. — On stone. 

Gyrophora proboscidea (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 162.— Am, 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (27), Goosefjord (88—40, 48—50). 

Gyrophora rugifera (Nyu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 156. — 
Green]. — On stone. 

Gyrophora sclerophylla Nyt. — Br. Groenl. p. 490. — Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Gyrophora spodochroa (Euru.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 151. — 
Greenl. — On stone. 

Gyrophora vellea (L.) Aca. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 153. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 


Toninia Mass. 


Toninia fusispora (Hepp) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 3384. — Spitsb. 
— Moss, earth and loose rocks. 

Toninia squalida (Scuteica.) Acu.— Tu. FR. Scand. p.331.—Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth. 

Toninia syncomista (Fix.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 335. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and earth. 


Sphyridium Fw. 
Sphyridium byssoides L. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 328. — Icel. — Over 
earth. 
Sphyridium placophyllum (Wnsc.) — Ta. Fr. Scand. p. 327, — 
Icel. — Over earth. 


Stereocaulon SCHREB. 


Stereocaulon alpinum Laur. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.48.— Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over rocks and earth. — E. P.S.N. Greenland (8); Elles- 
mereland, Alexandra Harbour (11), Cape Rutherford (14), Frams Harbour 
(16, 17), Bedford Pim Island (19); North Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (33), Goosefjord (39, 40, 50), Landsend (58); North Kent (64). 

Stereocaulon condensatum Hrrm. — Tx. Fr. Scand. p. 52.— Icel.— 
Over earth. 

Stereocaulon coralloides Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 44. — Am., Greenl. 
— On stone. — E.P.S.N. Ellesmereland, Bedford Pim Island (19). 


26 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Stereocaulon denudatum Fux. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 50. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 

Stereocaulon evolutum Grarwe.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 45. — Am., 
Greenl., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, Lastraea Valley (9). 

Stereocaulon paschale (L.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 46. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— On stone and between moss. — E. P.S. N. Hlles- 
mere Land, Beitstadsfjord (7), Twinglaciervalley (8), Cape Viele (14), 
Alexandra Harbour (13), Cape Rutherford (14), Bedford Pim Island (19); 
King Oscar Land. Harbourfjord (24, 27, 28, 31), Goosefjord (38—40, 48, 
49); North Kent (64). 

Stereocaulon tomentosum (Fr.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 48. — 
Am., Green]. —Over sandy fields. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (39). 


Icmadophila Enru. 


Icmadophila aeruginosa (Scer.) Trev. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 300.—_ 
Am., Greenl. — Among mosses, over dead wood, rarely earth. 


Cladonia H¥rm. 


Cladonia alpicola (Fw.) Wainto. — Wain. II. p. 58. — Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — Over earth. 

Cladonia amaurocraea (FLx.) ScHazR. — Wain. I. p. 243. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over mossy rocks. 

Cladonia bellidiflora (Acu.) ScHazrr. — Warn. I. p. 198. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. 

Cladonia cariosa (Acu.) Sprenc. — Wann. II. p. 43. — Am., Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth. 
Cladonia carneola Fr. — Wau. II. p. 420. — Greenl. — On old 
stems. : 

Cladonia cenotea Acu. — Wain. I. p. 471. — Greenl. — On old trunks 
and over earth. 

Cladonia chlorophaea Fix. — Wain. II. p. 232. — Greenl., Spitsb. 
— Over earth. — E.P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Framsharbour (17); King 
Oscar Land, Goosefjord (50, 51). 

Cladonia coccifera (L.) Witty. — Warn. I. p. 149. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over damp earth and mosses. 

Cladonia cornuta (L.) Scuazr. — Warn. II. p. 127. — Greenl. — 
Over earth. 

Cladonia crispata (Acu.) Fix.— Warn. I. p. 377.— Am., Green]. — 
Over moss and old tree trunks. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 97 


Cladonia cyanipes (Smrrt.) Fr. — Wan. II. p. 431. — Greenl. — 
Between mosses. 


Cladonia deformis (L.) Hrrm. — Wat. TI. p. 186. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb. — Over earth. 

Cladonia degenerans (Fix.) Sprenc. — Wain. IL. p 135.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — Over earth. 


Cladonia digitata (L.) Hrem. — Warm. I. p. 123. -— Green]. — Over 
old trunks. 

Cladonia fimbriata (L.) Fr. — Wain. II. p. 246.— Am., Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (33). 

Cladonia Floerkeana (FR.) Smrrr.— Wain. I. p. 72. — Greenl., Icel. 
— Over earth. 

Cladonia foliacea (Hups.) Scuazr.— Wain. II. p. 384. — Am.,Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth. 

Cladonia furcata Huns. —Waw. I. p. 316. — Greenl., Icel. — Over 
earth and old trunks. 

Cladonia gracilis (L.) Wu1v. — Waw. IL. p. 81. — Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — Over earth. 

Cladonia papillaria (Enru.) Hrrm. — Wain. I. p. 48. — Greenl. — 
Over sandy earth. 

Cladonia pyxidata (L.) Fr. —Wain. IL. p. 209.— Am., Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — Over earth and: tree trunks. — E. P.S. N. Greenland (3); Elles- 
mereland, Beitstadsfjord (7), Cape Viele (10), Framsharbour (16, 17), Cocked 
Hat Island (18), Bedford Pim Island (19, 21); North Lincoln (23); King 
Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24-29, 31), Goosefjord (88—42, 46, 47, 50), 
Vendom Kap (55), Exkrementbugten (56), Renbugten (57), Landsend (58); 
North Kent (64); North Devon (65, 66); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Cladonia rangiferina (L.) Hrrm. — Warn. J. p. 9.— Am., Greenl, 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth, 

Cladonia rangiformis Hrrm. — Wain. I. p. 357.— Am., Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth. 

Cladonia squamosa Hrru. — Warn. I. 411. — Greenl., Spitsb. — 
Over earth and rocks. 

Cladonia subsquamosa Nyt. — Wain. I. p. 445. — Spitsb. 

Cladonia sylvatica (L.) Hrrm. — Wary. I. p. 18.— Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. 

Cladonia turgida (ExRH.) Arr. — Wain. I. p. 494. — Am. — Over 
moss and Lichens. 


28 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Cladonia uncialis (L.) Fr. — Warn. I. 254. — Am., Greenl., Spitsb., 
Icel. — Over earth. : 

Cladonia verticillata (HrrM.) Fix. — Warn. Clad. IL. p. 176. — Green. 
— Over earth. 


Parmeliales. 
Thelotrema Acu. 


Thelotrema lepadinum Acu. — Tuck. N.A.L. I. p. 226.— Am. — 
On bark. 


Urceolaria Acu. 


Urceolaria scruposa (L.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p.141. — Am.,Greenl., 
Icel. —On Rocks. 


Ochrolechia Mass. 


Ochrolechia pallescens (L.) Mass. — Darrisu. Pert. p. 617. — Am., 
Green]. — On wood. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), 
Goosefjord (41). 

Ochrolechia parella (L.) Mass. — Darpisu. Pert. p. 618. — Icel. — 
On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (39, 48). 

 Ochrolechia tartarea (L.) Mass. — Darsisu. Pert. p. 616.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and bark, rarely stone. — E, P.S. N. 
King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (26, 29), Goosefjord (39, 41); North 
Kent (64). 

Ochrolechia upsaliensis (Acu.) Nyt. — Darsisu. Pertus. p. 618. — 
Greenl.— Over moss. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (26). 


Pionospora Tu. FR. 


Pionospora bryontha (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Darsisu. Pert. p. 614. — 
Am., Greenl.— Over moss. 

Pionospora glomerata (Acu.) DarpisH. — Darsisu. Pert. p. 613. — 
Greenl. —- Over moss, wood, and earth, rarely on stone. — E.P.S. N. King 
Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (23, 24), Goosefjord (40, 50), Braskeruds- 
lauen (68). 

Pionospora oculata (Dicxs.) DarsisH. — Darsisu. Pert. p. 612. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and earth, rarely on stone. 


Megalospora Mass. 


Megalospora sanguinaria (Linn.) Mass. — Dareisu. Pert. p. 629. — 
Green]. — Over bark. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 99 


Pertusaria D.C. 


Pertusaria carneopallida (Nyu.) Anzi. — Daresisn. Pert. p. 607. — 
- Greenl., Icel. — On bark. 

Pertusaria communis (L.) D.C.— Darsisu. Pert. p. 598. — Icel. — 
On bark and wood, rarely on stone. 

Pertusaria coriacea Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.318. — Am., Spitsb., 
Tcel. — Over moss and earth. 

Pertusaria dactylina (Acu.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 310.—Greenl., 
Ice]. — Over moss and dead plants. — E. P.S.N. Greenland (3); King 
Oscar Land, Goosefjord (39, 41, 46). 

Pertusaria determinanda Darsisu. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (48). — On stone. 


Pertusaria panyrga (Acn.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 308. — 
Greenl. — Over dead plants and earth. — E.P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, 
Framsharbour (17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goosefjord (41). 


Pertusaria rhodoleuca Tu. Fr. -- Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 306. — Icel. — 
On stone. 


Pertusaria Sommerfeltti (Fix.) Nyt. —- Darsisu. Pert. p. 607. — 
Greenl. — Over bark. 


Pertusaria subobducens Nyt. — Brantu Groenl. p. 756. — Greenl. 
— Over moss, earth and dead plants. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, Cape 
Viele (10), Framsharbour (17), Bedford Pim Island (20); North Lincoln 
(23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (25, 28), Goosefjord (88—41, 46, 50, 
52, 53), Landsend (58), Hyperitodden (60), Braskerudslauen (63); North 
Kent (64); North Devon (65). 


Pertusaria wanthostoma Surer. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 306. — Icel. — 
Over bark and moss. 


Varicellaria Nyt. 


Varicellaria rhodocarpa (Krs.) Ta. Fr. — Darsisu. Pert. p. 631.— 
Am. — Over earth and moss, rarely rocks. 


Candelaria Mass. 


Candelaria concolor (Dicxs.) Ta. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 147. — 
Am. — Over bark, earth and stone. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, Frams- 
harbour (17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goosefjord (39). 


30 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Xanthoria FR. 


Xanthoria lychnea (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu, Fr. Scand. p. 146.—Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over rock and wood.—E. P.S. N. Greenland (2); 
Ellesmere Land, Fort Juliana (5); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24). 

Xanthoria parietina (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 145.— Am, 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Everywhere. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (24), Goosefjord (38). 


Placodium D.C. 


Placodium elegans (Linx) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 168.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone and moss. — E. P.S. N. Greenland (2); 
Ellesmereland, Fort Juliana (5), Beitstadsfjord (7), Twinglacier Valley (8); 
North Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 27, 28), South 
Cape (34), Bjorneborg (35), Goosefjord (88—42, 44, 48, 49), Vendom Kap 
(55), Graham Island (59), Coalbay (62); North Kent (64); North Devon 
(66); Cardigan Straits (67); Camp n. 33 (69). 

Placodium miniatum Hrru. — Tu. Fr. Scand. 170. — Icel. — Over 
rocks and wood. 

Placodium murorum (Hrrm.) D.C. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 170.—Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., [cel. — Over moss and stones. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar 
Land, Harbourfjord (28), Goosefjord (38). 

Flacodium splendens Darsisu. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmereland, Cape 
Rutherford (14), Gocked Hat Island (18); North Lincoln (23); King Oscar 
Land, Braskerudsliuen (63). — Over earth and rarely on stones. 


Blastenia Man. 


Blastenia atrocyanescens Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 395. — Am. 
— Over stone. 

Blastenia diphyes (Nyu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.395.— Greenl., 
Icel. — Over stone. 

Blastenia leucoroea (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 392. — 
Greenl., Icel. — Over moss and old wood. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (47). 

Blastenia pleiophora (Ny.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 394. — 
Greenl. — Over bark. 

Blastenia tetraspora (Nyu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 392. — 


Greeni., Spitsb., Icel. — Over mosses. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (39). 


@ 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 31 


Caloplaca Tu. Fr. 


Caloplaca aurantiaca(Licutrt.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 177. — 
Am., Greenl., Icel. — Over bark, stone and wood. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar 
Land, Goosefjord (40). 

Caloplaca celata Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exped. p. 356. — 
Am. — Over old bones and moss. 


Caloplaca cerina (Euur.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 173.— Am., 
~ Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Almost everywhere. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar 
Land, Goosefjord (54). 

Caloplaca citrina (Hrrm.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 176.— Am., 
Icel. — Over stone and earth. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbour- 
fjord (24), Goosefjord (39, 42, 54), 

Caloplaca ferruginea (Hups.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 182. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Ice]. — Almost everywhere. 


Caloplaca jungermanniae (V ant) Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p.179.— 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— Over earth, and moss. — E. P.S.N. King 
Oscar Land, Goosefjord (45, 54). 

Caloplaca obscurella (Laum) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 182. — 
Icel. — On old tres. 


Caloplaca pyracea (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 178. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over bark and Muskox dung. — E. P.S. N. North | 
Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (80), Goosefjord (89, 41), 
Vendom Kap (55). 


Gyalolechia Mass. 


Gyalolechia crenulata (Wnec.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 187.— | 
Greenl., Spitsb. — Rocks. 

Gyalolechia nivalis (Ksr.) Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 191.—Greenl., 
Icel. — Over moss, on rocks. . 

Gyalolechia subsimilis Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 189. —- Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — Over rocks and mosses. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, 
Framsharbour (16), Bedford Pim Island (19); King Oscar Land, South 
Cape (84), Goosefjord (39, 41, 44, 51), Exkrementbugten (66); Cardigan 
Straits (67). 

Gyalolechia vitellina (Euru.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 188. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Almost everywhere. — E. P.S. N. King Os- 
car Land, Goosefjord (38, 41). 


32 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Squamaria D.C. 


Squamaria albescens (Hrrm.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 252. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— On stones and walls. 

Squamaria cartilaginea (WestR.) Kpr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 225, — 
TIcel. — On rocks. 

Squamaria chrysoleuca (Acu.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 224. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (24). 

Squamaria circinata (Pers.) Anzi. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 231. — 
E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Coalbay (62). — On rocks. 

Squamaria fulgens (Sw.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 222.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — Over moss and earth. — E.P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, 
Beitstadsfjord (7), Cape Viele (10), Framsharbour (16); North Lincoln (23); 
North Devon (65). 

Squamaria gelida (L.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 228. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over rocks. 

Squamaria geophila Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p.85. — Greenl. — 
Over moss and earth. 

Squamaria melanaspis (Vaut) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 229. — 
Greenl., Icel. — Over rocks. 

Squamaria saxicola (Pout.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 226. — Greenl., 
‘ Icel. — Over rocks, rarely mosses. 

Squamaria straminea (Wnec.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 224. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. 


Haematomma Mass. 


Haematomma ventosum (L.) Acu.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 296.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Teel. — On rocks. 


Lecania Mass. 


Lecania aipospila (Wnea.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 293. — 
Spitsb. — On rocks. 

Lecania cyrtella (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 294. — Icel. — 
On bark. 

Lecania erysibe Acu. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 21.—Spitsb. — On rocks. 

Lecania syringea (Acu.) Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand p. 290. — Icel. — 
On hark. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 33 


Lecanora Acn, 


Lecanora albella (Pers.) Acn. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 243. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over bark. 

Lecanora atra (Hups.) Ach. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 237.— Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On trees and rocks. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (38, 41). 

Lecanora atriseda (Fr.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 267. — Icel. — 
On rocks. 

Lecanora atrosulphurea (Wnsc.) Ach. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 257.— 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. 

Lecanora badia (Pers.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 266. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. 

Lecanora castanea (Herp) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 272. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— Over moss and earth. 

Lecanora dispersa (Prrs.) Fix. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 254. — Am. — 
On rocks. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (38). 

Lecanora epanora Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 256. — Greenl. — On 
rocks. 

Lecanora epibryon (Wutr.) Scuarr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 239. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmereland, Beitstadsfjord (7), Cape 
Rutherford (14), Framsharbour (17), Cocked Hat Island (18), Bedford Pim 
Island (19, 21); North Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24 
—26, 28, 29, 33), South Cape (34), Goosefjord (89—41, 44, 45, 54), Ven- 
dom Kap (55), Exkrementbugten (56), Landsend (58); North Devon (65, 
66); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Lecanora frustulosa (Dtcxs.) Mass.—Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 255.— Greenl., 
Icel. — On rocks. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Graham Island (59). 

Lecanora granatina (Smert.) Nyt. — Tucx. N.A.L. I. p. 118.— 
Spitsb., Ice]. — Over rocks. 

Lecanora Hagenit Acu.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 250.— Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Ice]. — Bark, wood, moss and old plants. 

Lecanora helicopis Wyec. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 249. — Greenl. — On 
rocks. 

Lecanora poliophaea (Wnec.) Scuagr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 248.— 
Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (40). 

Lecanora polytropa (Eurn.) Ach. —Tx. Fr. Scand. p. 259.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. — E. P. S. N. Greenland (2); Ellesmere- 
land, Framsharbour (15,17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goose- 
fjord (38, 39, 48—50). 

3 


34 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Lecanora rhypariza (Nyu.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 271.—Greenl. 
— Over earth and moss. 

Lecanora sordida (Pers.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 246.— Am., 
Greenl., Icel. — On rocks. 

Lecanora subfusca (L.) Aca. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 238.—- Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Almost everwhere. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (88, 42). 

Lecanora symimicta Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 262. — Greenl. — 
On bark. 

Lecanora varia (Enru.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 259. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over wood and walls. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord 
(88, 40, 41). 


Aspicilia Mass. 


Aspicilia alpina Smerr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 283. — Spitsb. — On 
rocks. 

Aspicilia calcarea (L.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 274. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb.— On rocks. —E P.S.N. Greenland (2); King Oscar Land, Harbour- 
fjord (24), Goosefjord (38, 49), Landsend (58); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Aspicilia candida Anz. — Jatta Syll. n. 445. — E. P.S. N. King 
Oscar Land, Vendom Kap (55). — On stone. 

Aspicilia cinerea (L.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 280. -- Am., Greenl., 
Icel. — On rocks. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (38, 39, 41, 48). 

Aspicilia cinereorufescens (Acu.) Kar. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 284. — 
Greenl., Icel. — On rocks. 

Aspicilia flavida (Hepp) Arn. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 286.— Am., 
Spitsb. — On rocks. 

Aspicilia gibbosa Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 276. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over rocks and old wood. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (24, 27), Goosefjord (39, 41, 42, 48, 50); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Aspicilia lacustris (Witu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 287.— 
Greenl., Spitsb., Ice]. — On rocks. 

Aspicilia laevata (Acu.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 276.—E. P.S.N. 
King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (42). — On rocks. 

Aspicilia lesleyana Darsisu. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (38, 41, 48, 50). — On rocks. 

Aspicilia mastrucata Wnec. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 282. — Greenl., 
Spitsb. — On rocks. — E. P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Bedford Pim Island (19). 

Aspicilia nikrapensis Darsisu. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (38, 39, 49). — On rocks. 


1898--1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 35 


Aspicilia Prevostii (FR.) TH. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 288. —Spitsb. 
— On rocks. 

Aspicilia rhodopis Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 136. — Spitsh. — 
On rocks. 

Aspicilia verrucosa Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 273. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and earth. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (26, 33), South Cape (34), Goosefjord (39, 41, 45, 49, 50), 
Vendom Kap (55), Exkrementbugten (56), Landsend (88); North Devon 
(65, 66). 


Parmelia Acu. 


Parmelia alpicola Tu. Fr. — Birrer Hypogymn. p. 261. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. — E. P. S. N. Greenland (2); King Oscar 
Land, Goosefjord (38). 

Parmelia Kamtschadalis (Acu.) Escaw. — Hue Extra. n. 222. — 
Am. — On trees. 

Parmelia caperata (L.) Aca. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 127. — Am. — 
On rocks. 

Parmelia centrifuga (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 128.— Am. — 
Greenl., Spitsb. — On rocks. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (48). 

Parmelia conspersa (Euru.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 127.— Am., 
Greenl. — On rocks. 

Parmelia encausta (Smitn) Nyt. — Brrrer Hypogymn. p. 256. — 
Am., Greenl, Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. 

Parmelia farinacea Birrer. — Bitter Hypogymn. p. 199.—E.P.S.N. 
Ellesmereland, Bedford Pim Island (21). — On bark. 

Parmelia incurva (Pers.) Fr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 129 — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over wood and stones. 

Parmelia lanata Wattr.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 126.— Am., Greenl, 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over stone, rarely hard wood.—E. P. S. N. Ellesmereland, 
Framsharbour (15—17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 27), Goose- 
fjord (88—40, 48—50). 

Parmelia obscurata (Acu.) Brrter. — Bitter Hypogymn. p. 214.— 
Am. — On rocks. 

Parmelia olivacea (L.) Acu.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 121.—Am., Green. 
Ice]. — On bark. 

Parmelia omphalodes (L.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 114.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel—On stone and over earth.— E. P. S. N. Ellesmereland, 
Cape Viele (10), Cape Rutherford (14); King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (88— 
41, 48). 


36 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Parmelia piysodes (L.) Fr. — Birrer Hypogymn. p. 218. — Am., 
Greenl., Icel. — Almost everywhere. — E. P. S. N. Ellesmereland, Beitstads- 
fjord (7), Bedford Pim Island (21); North Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (26, 32), Goosefjord (50). 

Parmelia saxatilis (L.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 114.—Am,.Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On wood, stones and moss.— E.P.S.N. Greenland (2, 3); 
Ellesmereland, Twinglacier Valley (8), Cape Viele (10); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (33), Goosefjord (48). 

Parmelia separata Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p. 393. — Am. 
— Over mosses. 

Parmelia sorediata Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 123.—Greenl. — Over 
stone. 

Parmelia stygia Aca.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 124. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord 
(27), Goosefjord (39, 48). 


Parmeliopsis Nyt. 


Parmeliopsis diffusa (Wes.) Nyt.— Tu Fr. Scand. p. 131.— Am., 
Greenl., Icel. — Over dead wood. 
Parmeliopsis hyperopta (Acu.) Nyi. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 120.— 


Greenl., Icel. — Over dead wood. 


Cetraria Acu. 


Cetraria aculeata (Scures.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 101. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth and moss. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar 
Land, South Cape (34), Goosefjord (40, 44, 45), Vendom Cape (55), Bra- 
skerudslauen (63): North Devon (65, 66); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Cetraria commiata (Ny..) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 109. —Greenl., 
Icel. — Over rocks. 

Cetraria cucullata (Bett) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 101.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb , Icel.— Over earth and moss. — E. P.S.N. Greenland (1); 
Ellesmereland, Twinglacier Valley (8), Cape Rutherford (14); North Lin- 
coln (23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26, 27, 32), Goosefjord (39); 
North Kent (64); North Devon (65); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Cetraria fahlunensis (L.) Scoarr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 108.— Am,, 
Greenl.. Spitsb., Icel. — On rocks, rarely earth. 

Cetraria glauca (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 105.—On trees and 
rocks. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 37 


Cetraria hiascens (FR.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. FR. Scand. p. 98.—Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel.—Over earth.— E. P. S. N. Ellesmereland, Cape Rutherford (14), 
Framsharbour (17). Bedford Pim Island (21); King Oscar Land, Harbour- 
fjord (26, 27, 31, 33), Goosefjord (88—40), Vendom Kap (55); North Kent 
(64); North Devon (66); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Cetraria islandica (L.) Ach. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 98. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord 
(33), Goosefjord (40, 50), Landsend (58). — The narrow form of this spe- 
cies, crispa Acu., was met with in Greenland (1); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (27), Goosefjord (38, 40). 

Cetraria juniperina (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 104.— Greenl — 
Over branches, moss and rocks. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Exkrement- 
bugten (56). 

Cetraria nigricans Nyu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 100. — Greenl. — Over 
earth and rocks. 

Cetraria nivalis (L.) Aca. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 102. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb,, Icel. — Over earth, and moss. — E. P.S. N. Greenland (1), Beit- 
stadsfjord (7), Twinglacier Valley (8), Cape Viele (10), Cape Rutherford 
(14), Bedford Pim Island (20); North Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (24, 26, 32), South Cape (84), Goosefjord (44, 45, 51), Bra- 
skerudslauen (63); North Devon (65); Cardigan ‘Straits (67). 

Cetraria odontella Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 99. — Am., Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Cetraria pinastri (Scor.) AcH. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 104. — Am., Greenl. 
— Over wood and stone. 

Cetraria Richardsonii (Hoox.) Tuck. —- Nyt. Syn. I. p. 306.— Am. 
— Over earth. 

Cetraria saepincola (Euru.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 106.—Greenl., 
Icel. — Over branches. 

Dactylina Nyt. 


Dactylina arctica (Hoox.) Nyu.— Nyt. Syn. I. p. 286. —Am., Greenl., 
Icel. —Over earth. — E. P.S. N. Greenland (3); Ellesmereland, Cape Viele 
(10), Cape Rutherford (14), Bedford Pim Island (19); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (27, 33), Goosefjord (39). 


Dufourea Acu. 

Dufourea muricata Laur. — Tuck. N. A. L. I. p. 30 (as Cetraria ra- 
mulosa Hoox.).— Am., Spitsb. — Over earth — E. P. S. N. Ellesmereland, 
Cape Viele (10), Framsharbour(15, 17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord 
(26, 33), Goosefjord (88—40), Renbugten (57); North Devon (65). 


38 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Evernia Acu. 


Evernia furfuracea (L.) Ach. — Nyx. Syn. L. p. 284. — Icel. — 
Over branches. 

Evernia prunastri (L.) Ach. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 30. — Am. — 
Over bark. 


Neuropogon Nees et Fw. 


Neuropogon melawanthum Nyu.— Ny.Syn. I. p.272.—Am., Greenl.. 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P.S. N. Greenland (3); King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (50); North Kent (64). 


Alectoria Acu. 


Alectoria nigricans (Acu.) Nyt. — Stizp. Alect. p. 121. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over fields and between moss. — E. P. S. N. Elles- 
mereland, Twinglacier Valley (8), Cape Viele (10), Framsharbour (16), 
Cocked Hat Island (18), Bedford Pim Island (21); King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (32), Goosefjord (39, 40, 44, 45, 48, 50); North Kent (64); North 
Devon (66); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Alectoria ochroleuca (Acu.) Nyt. — Srizs. Alect. p. 122. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over fields and between moss. — E. P.S.N Elles- 
mere Land, Beitstadfjord (7), Cape Viele (10), Cape Rutherford (14), 
Framsharbour (15—17), Bedford Pim Island (20, 21); North Lincoln (28); 
King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 25, 32, 33), South Cape (84), Goose- 
fjord (89, 44, 45, 4951), Braskerudslaiuen (63); North Kent (64); North 
Devon (65). 

Alectoria sarmentosa (Acu.) Ny. — Srize. Alect. p. 123. — Greenl., 
Tcel. — On branches. 


Cornicularia ScHREB. 


Cornicularia tristis (Wes.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 28.— Am., 
Greenl. — Over stones. 


Bryopogon Linx. 
Bryopogon bicolor (Kuru.) Ker. — Stizs. Alect. p. 126. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over mosses. 


Bryopogon chabybeiforme L.—- Stizp. Alect. p. 129. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb. — Over trees and branches. 


418981902. No. 21] LICHENS. 39 


Bryopogon divergens Acu. — Stizp. Alect. 126. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Ice]. — Over earth. 

Bryopogon Fremontit Tuck. — Srizp. Alect. p. 180. — Am. — 
Over trees. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, Framsharbour (17); North Lin- 
coln (23); King Oscar Land, Braskerudslauen (63). 

Bryopogon implecum (Hrr.) Mass.— Srizs. Alect. p. 130.— Am., 
Greenl. — On trees and branches. 

Bryopogon nitidulun Tu. Fr. — Srizp. Alect. p. 127. — On tres 
and branches. 

Bryopogon prolixum (Acu.) Mass. — Srizs. Alect. p. 127. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On trees and branches. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmere Land, Alexandra- 
harbour (13); King Oscar Land, Renbugten (57); North Devon (65, 66); 
Cardigan Straits (67). - 


Ramalina AcuH. 


Ramalina farinacea (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p.35. — Greenl. 
— On trees. 

Ramalina frasxinea (L.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Seand. p. 34. — Greenl. 
— On trees. 

Ramalina minuscula Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 35. — Am. — 
On trees. 

Ramalina polymorpha Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 40. — Icel. — 
On Rocks. 

Ramalina scopulorum (Rerz.) Aca. — Th. Fr. Scand. p. 39. — 
Icel. — On Rocks. 


Anaptychia Kre. 


Anaptychia aquila Acu. — Ta. Fr. Scand. p. 134. — E. P.S.N. 
King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (38). — On rocks and over earth. 

Anaptychia ciliaris (L.) Krs. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 132. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On trees. 


Physcia Scures. 

Physcia caesia (Hrrm.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 140. — Am.. 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. —On wood, bones and stone. — E. P.S. N. Green- 
land (2), King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goosefjord (44), Vendom 
Kap (55); North Devon (66). 

Physcia hispida (Scures.) Nyi.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 140.— Am. 
— On trees and wood. 


40 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Physcia muscigena (Acu.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 36.— Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Between moss. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (24, 26), Muskoxfjord (37), Goosefjord (38, 39, 41, 45, 48, 51), 
Vendom Kap (55); North Devon (65); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Physcia obscura (Enru.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 141. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On trees, rarely on stone. — E. P.S. N. King 
Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goosefjord (42, 48). 


Physcia pulverulenta (Scures.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 136. — 
Am., Greenl. — Over earth and trees, rarely on rocks. — E. P.S.N, Elles- 
mere Land, North Fjord (4), Fort Juliana (6), Twinglacier Valley (8), 
Lastraea Valley (9), Cape Viele (10), Alexandraharbour (11), Framshar- 
bour (45, 17), Cocked Hat Island (18), Brevort Island (22); North Lincoln 
(23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26—29, 31), South Cape (34), 
Muskoxfjord (86), Goosefjord (88—42, 44—48,50), Vendom Kap (55), 
Exkrementbugten (56), Landsend (58); North Kent (64); North Devon 
65, 66); Cardigan Straits (67). 

Physcia stellaris (L.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 138. — Am., 
Greenl., Icel. — Over bark. 


Rinodina Mass. 


Rinodina Bischoffii (Herr) Krs. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 204. —, 
E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (44). — On stone. . 

Rinodina Conradi Krs. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 198. — Greenl., Icel. . 
— Over moss and dead plants. 

Rinodina exigua Acu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 201. — Am., Green. 
Icel. — Over bark, rarely on stone. 

Rinodina milvina (Wnec.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 199. — 
Greenl. — On stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (42). 

Rinodina mniaroea Nyu. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 194. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and bark. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (39). 

Rinodina sophodes (Acu.) Nyi. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 199. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On bark. 

Rinodina turfacea (Wnac.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 195. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. — E.P.S.N. Ellesmereland, 
Cape Rutherford (14), Gocked Hat Island (18), Bedford Pim Island (21); 
North Kent (23); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (25—27, 29), South 
Cape (34), Goosefjord (39, 41, 44, 45, 50,51), Vendom Kap (55), Landsend 
(68); North Devon (65, 66); Cardigan Straits (67). 


18981902. No. 21] LICHENS. 41 


Dimelaena Norm. 


Dimelaena nimbosa (FR.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 193. — 
Greenl., Spitsb. — Over earth. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (48). 

Dimelaena oreina (Acu.) Kar. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 192. — Green. 
— Over stone. — E.P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24). 


Buellia ve Not. 


Buellia concinna Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 600. — Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Buellia coniops Wnec. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 605. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (38). | 

Buellia leptoclinis (Fr.) Ker. — Ta. Fr. Scand. p. 598. — Icel. 
— On stone. 

Buellia moriopsis (Mass.) Tu. F. Scand. p. 606. -- Am.. Greenl., 
Spitsb. — On stone. 

Buellia myriocarpa (D.C.) Mupp. — Ta. Fr. Scand. p. 595. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On bark, and wood, rarely stone. — E. P. S.N. 
King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (54). 

Buellia parasema (Acu.) Ker. — Tu. Fr. Seand. p. 589. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — Over bark, moss and earth. — E. P.S.N. Ellesmere 
Land, Framsharbour (17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24, 26, 31), 
Goosefjord (38, 40); North Devon (65). 

Buellia Payeri Kee. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p. 364. — Green. 
— On stone. 

Buellia Schaereri (De Not.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 597. — 
Spitsb. — On bark. 

Buellia spuria (Scuagr.) Aca. — Tx. Fr. Seand. p. 605. — Spitsb. 
— On stone. 

Buellia stellulata (Tat) Br. er Rosre. — Tx. Fr. Scand. p. 603. — 
Greenl., Icel. — On stone. 

Buellia triphragmoides Anz. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 594 — Greenl. 
— On bark. 

Buellia vilis Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 599. — Am., Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. 
— On stone. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (38). 


42 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Thelocarpon NYt. 


Thelocarpon epibolum Nyt. — Hue Add. no. 1635. — Greenl. — 
On Solorina crocea. 


Acarospora Mass. 


Acarospora badiofusca Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 211. Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Acarospora chlorophana (Wnsc.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 208. 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. -- On stone. — E.P.S.N. Ellemereland, Frams- 
harbour (16). 

Acarospora fuscata (Scurap.) Ta. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 215. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb.— On stone. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (39). . 

Acarospora glaucocarpa (Wnsc.) Kar. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 211. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. 

Acarospora molybdina (Wnec.) Mass. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 209. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. 

Acarospora Schleichert Acu. — Tucx. N. A. L. I. p. 202. — 
Greenl. — Over earth. 


Cyanophiliales. 


Lichina AG. 


Lichina confinis (Sw.) Ac. — Tuck. N. A. L. I. p. 183. — Icel. 
— On stone. 


Ephebe Fr. 


Ephebe pubescens Fr. — Tuck. N. A. L. I. p. 182. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over rocks. 


Polychidium Acx. 


Polychidium muscicolum (Sw.) Mass. — Ta. Fr. Arct. p. 284. — 
Greenl., Icel, — Over moss. 


Placynthium Acu. 


Placynthium asperellum Wnec. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 286. — Am, 
Spitsb. — On stone. 

Placynthium nigrum Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 285. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On rocks, very rarely over earth. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, 


1898 —1902. No. 21| LICHENS. 43 


Harbourfjord (24, 26—28), Goosefjord (88, 40—42, 51), Vendom Kap (55); 
North Devon (66). 


Pannaria Deu. 


Pannaria arctophila Ta. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 17. — Spitsb. 


Pannaria brunnea (Sw.) Mass — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 77. — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. -- Over moss and roots of trees. 

Pannaria elaeina Wnsc.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 73. — Icel. — Over 
stone. 

Pannaria Hookeri (Sw.) Tx. Fr. — Ta. Fr. Arct. p. 73. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over dead moss, on stones. 

Pannaria lanuginosa Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 79. — Greenl. — 
On rocks. . 


Pannaria lepidiota Tu. Fr. — Tx. Fr. Arct. p. 74. —- Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over mosses. 

Pannaria microphylla (Sw.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 75 — Greenl., 
Spitsb, — On rocks and walls. -— E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (33). 

Pannaria rubiginosad (Tuuns.) D.C. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 72. — 
E.P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Framsharbour (17); King Oscar Land, Har- 
bourfjord (27), Goosefjord (40). — Over rocks and trunks. 

Pannaria triptophylla (Acu.) Mass. — Tx. Fr. Arect. p. 76. — 
Greenl., Icel. -~ Over bark. 


Massalongia Krs. 


Massalongia carnosa (Dicxs.) Krs. — Tuc. K. ALL. I. p. 122. — 
Am. — Over rocks among mosses. 


Psoroma Nyt. 
Psoroma hypnorum (Vaut.) Fr. — Ta. Fr. Scand. p. 932 — Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over moss and earth. — E. P.S.N. King Os- 
car Land, Goosefjord (39, 41, 49). 


Sticta Acu. 
Sticta linita Acu. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 12. — Spitsb. — Be- 


tween moss. 
Sticta pulmonaria (Dorst.) Scaarr. — Stizp. Stict. p. 112. — 
Greenl., Icel. — Over trees and rocks. 


44 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Stictina Nyu. 


Stictina scrobiculata (Scop.) Nyu.— Stizs. Stict. p. 126.—Greenl., 
Tcel. — Over trees and rocks. 


Ricasolia ve Nor. 


Ricasolia glomulifera (Licutrt.) Nyt. — Srizp. p. 110. — Am. 
— Trunks and rocks. 


Peltidea Acu. 


Peltidea aphthosa (L.) Hrem. — Ta. Fr. Arct. p. 43. — Am, 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over damp earth. — E.P.S.N. Greenland (8); 
Ellesmere Land, Beitstadfjord (7), Alexandraharbour (11, 13), Cape Ruth- 
erford (14), Framsharbour (17); North Lincoln (23); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (82), Goosefjord (88—41, 49, 50), Renbugten (57). Hyperit- 
odden (60). 

Peltidea venosa (L.) Hrrm. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 47. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. —- Over earth, — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (38). 


Peltigera Hrrm. 


Peltigera canina (L.) Scuazr. — Tw. Fr. Arct. p. 44. — Am, 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. — E.P.S.N. Greenland (8); Elles- 
mere Land, Framsharbour (17); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), 
Goosefjord (389), Landsend (58); North Devon (65). 

Peltigera horizontalis (L.) Herm. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 47. — Green. 
— On mossy stone. 

Peltigera malacea (Acu.) Fr. — Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 44. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Iceland. — Over damp earth. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (24). 

Peltigera polydactyla (Necx.) Herm. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 46. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Between moss. — E. P. S. N. Ellesmere Land, Alex- 
andraharbour (12); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24). 

Peltigera rufescens (Necx.) Horrm. — Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 45. — 
Am., Greenl., Spitsb. — Between moss, on earth. — E. P. S. N. King 
Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (24), Goosefjord (39, 40, 51), Vendom Kap (55); 
North Kent (64). 

Peltigera scabrosa Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 45. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb. — Over earth and moss. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (41). 


1898-1902. No. 21| LICHENS. 45 


Solorina Acu. 


Solorina bispora Nyu. — Nyu. Syn. I. p. 331. — Greenl., Icel. — 
Over earth. . 

Solorina crocea (L.) Acu. — Nyx. Syn. I. p. 329. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Hyperit- 
odden (60). 

Solorina saccata (L.) Acu. — Ny. Syn. I. p. 330. — Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Teel. — Over earth. — E. P.S.N. Ellesmere Land, Fort Juliana 
(6), Cape Rutherford (14); King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord (26, 31), 
Muskoxfjord (86), Goosefjord (38, 40, 41), Exkrementbugten (56); North 
Devon (69). 


Nephroma HFrm. . 
Nephroma arcticum (L.) Fr. — Nyx. Syn. I. p. 316. — Am., Greenl., 


Icel. — Over moss, lichens and trunks. 
Nephroma expallidum Nyt.—Nyt. Syn. I. p. 318.— Am., Greenl., 
Icel. — Over earth and dead wood. 


Nephromium Nyt. 


Nephromium helveticwm Acu. — Nyt. Syn. I. p. 319. — Am. — 
On branches. 
Nephromium laevigatum Acu. — Nyt. Syn. I. p. 320. — Icel. — 


Nephromium papyraceum Hrem. — Nyt. Syn. I. p. 320.— Greenl. 
— On branches. 


Nephromium tomentosum Kar. — Nyt. Syn. I. p. 319. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over branches. 


Arctomia Tu. FR. 


Arctomia delicatula Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 287. — Spitsb., 
Icel. — Over moss. 


Leciophysma Tu. Fr. 


Leciophysma finmarckicum Tu. Fr. — Ts. Fr. Spitsb. p. 52. 
_— Spitsb. — Between moss. 


Collema Herr. 


Collema aggregatum (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 280. — 
E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (40). — Over trees and moss. 


46 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Collema ceranoides (Borr.) Mupp.— Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p.52.— Spitsb. 
— Over moss and earth. 

Collema crispun L.— Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 276. — Icel. — Over earth, 
and moss. 

Collema flaccidum (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 281.—Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — Over stone. 

Collema melaenum Acu.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p 277. — Greenl., Spitsb. 
— Over rocks. 

Collema nigrescens (Hups.) Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 280. — Greenl., 
Icel. — On trees. 

Collema plicatile Acu. — Nyt. Syn. I. p. 109.— Greenl.— On rocks. 

Collena pulposum (Bernu.) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 277.— Am. 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. 

Collema verrucaeforme Acu. — Tu. Fr. Are. p. 279.—Greenl., Icel. 


— Over moss. 


Leptogium Kpr. 


Leptogium lacerum (Sw.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 282. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Between moss on rocks. — E. P. S. N. King Oscar Land, Harbour- 
fjord (24), Goosefjord (84, 39), Vendom Kap (55); North Devon (66). 

Leptogium saturninum (Dicss.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 282. — 
Am., Greenl. — Over bark and rocks. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (31), Goosefjord (88, 39). 

Leptogium Schraderi (Bernu.) Nyt. — Ny. Syn. I. p. 183. — Am. 
— On rocks. 

Leptogium scotinum Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 283.-— Spitsb., Icel. — 
Over moss and stone. 

Leptogium tenuissimum Acu. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 285. — Spitsb. 
— Over moss. 

Leptogium tetrasporum Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p. 367.— 
Am. — Over earth. 


Pyrenopsis Nyt. 


Pyrenopsis haematops (Smrrt.) Tu. Fr. — Forss. Ghoeol. p. 51.— 
Greenl. — Over rocks. 


1898-1902. No. 21.| LICHENS. 47 


Pyrenocarpi. 
Verrucaria Prrs. 


Verrucaria aethiobola Wnsc. — Nyw. Scand. p. 272. — Greenl. — 
Over rocks. 

Verrucaria ceuthocarpa Wwesc. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 269. — Greenl., 
Spitsb. — On rocks. 

Verrucaria epigaea Aca. — Leight. Ang. p. 64. — Green]. — Over 
earth. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (45). 

Verrucaria extrema Tx. Fr. — Ta. Fr. Spitsb. 50. — Spitsb. — 
On stone. 

Verrucaria margacea Wnec. — Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 269. — Spitsb. 
Icel. — On stone. 

Verrucaria maura (Vant) Nyt. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 268. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 

Verrucaria mucosa Wnec. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 269. — Greenl., Icel. 
— On rocks. 

Verrucaria nigrescens Pers. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 267. — Icel. — On 
rocks. — E. P.S. N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (42). 

Verrucaria phaeothelena Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Ex. p.366.— 
Am.— On stone. 

Verrucaria rejecta Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 50. — Spitsb. — 
On stone. 

Verrucaria rupestris Scarapv. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 271. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 

Verrucaria striatula Wnec.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 267. — Spitsb. — 
On stone. 

Verrucaria umbrina Acu. — Letcut. Ang. p. 52.— Greenl.— On 
stone. 


Polyblastia Mass. 


Polyblastia bryophila Lonnr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 18.— Am., Spitsb. 
—Over moss and earth. 

Polyblastia gelatinosa (Aca.) Ta. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Poly, p. 17. — 
Spitsb. — Over dead moss. 

Polyblastia gothica Ts. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 25.—Spitsb. — Over 
dead moss. 

Polyblastia helvetica Ta. Fr.— Tx. Fr. Spitsb. p. 48. — Spitsb. — 
Over moss. 


48 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Polyblastia Hentscheliana (Krs.) Lonnr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 11. — 
Icel. — On stone. 

Polyblastia intercedens (Ny.) Lonnr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 20.—Am., 
Greenl., Spitsb. — On stone. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord 
(39, 40). 

Polyblastia intermedia Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 24. — Greenl. — 
Over stone. — E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (88, 40). 

Polyblastia pseudomyces Norm. — Tx. Fr. Poly. p. 26. — Greenl, — 
Over stone and tree trunks. 

Polyblastia Sendtneri Kreupr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 19. —Greenl. — 
Over moss. 

Polyblastia sepulta Mass. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 21. — Spitsb. — Over 
stone. 

Polyblastia theleodes (Surrt.) Tu. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 10.—Greenl., 
Spitsb. — Over stone. — E. P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (88). 


-Thelidium Mass. 


Thelidium pyrenophorum Acu. — Tu. Fr. Spitsb. p. 49.—Spitsb.— 
On stone.— E.P.S.N. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (39). 

Thelidiwm papulare (FR.) Nyt. — Zahlbr. in E. & P. p. 56. — Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel. —On stone. — E.P.S.N. King Osear Land, Goosefjord (42). 


Staurothele Norm. 


Staurothele clopima (Wwneac.) Ta. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Aret. p- 263. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — On stone. 


Microglaena Lonnr. 


Microglanea sordidula Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Engl. Pol. Exp. p. 366.— 
Am. — On stone. 

Microglaena sphinctrinoides (Nyu.) Ta. Fr.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p.261. — 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel.— On moss over rocks. 


Microthelia Kre. 


Microthelia melanostigma Tu. Fr.— Tu. FR. Engl. Pol. Ex. p.368. — 
Am. — On stone. 

Microthelia micula Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 274. — Icel. — On birch 
bark. 


1898— 1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 49 


Arthopyrenia Mass. 


Arthopyrenia analepta (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 272. — 
Greenl., Icel. — On bark. 

Arthopyrenia grisea (Scuteicu.) Tu. Fr. — Ta. Fr. Aret. p. 272. — 
Greenl., Icel. — On bark. 


Arthopyrenia kentrospora Brantu. — Br. Groenl. p.511. — Greenl., 
Tcel. — On bark. 


Leptorhaphis Kre. 


Leptorhaphis epidermidis (Aca.) Tu. Fr. —Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 273. — 
Greenl. — On bark. 


Segestria Fr. 


Segestria mammillosa Tu. Fr. — Ta. Fr. Arct. p. 262. — Green]. — 
On stone. 


Normandina Nyt. 


Normandina viridis (Acu.) Nyt. — Ta. Fr. Arct. p. 256. — Green. 
— Over earth. 


Dermatocarpon Escuw. 


Dermatocarpon botularium Nyu. — Br. Groenl. p. 509. — Greenl. — 
On stone. 

Dermatocarpon cinereum (Pzrs.) To. Fr.— Ta. Fr. Arct. p. 256.— 
Greenl., Spitsb., Icel. — Over earth. 

Dermatocarpon daedaleum Krrutur. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 255. — 
Green]. — Over moss. 

Dermatocarpon hepaticum Acu.—Tu. Fr. Aret. p. 255. — Greenl., 
Icel.— Over earth and moss. 

Dermatocarpon miniatum (L.) Scuarr.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 953. — 
Am., Greenl., Icel., — Over rocks. 2 

Dermatocarpon rufescens AcH. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 254. — Greenl., 
Icel. — Over moss between rocks. 


Endocarpon Hepw. 


Endocarpon pulvinatum Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 257. — Greenl., 
Spitsb. — On rocks. 


50 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Thamnolia Acu. 


Thamunolia vermicularis Acu.— Tu. Fr. Arct. p. 161.—Am., Greenl., 
Spitsb., Icel.— Over earth and between moss. — E. P.S. N. Ellesmereland, 
North Fjord (4, Beitstadsfjord (7); North Lincoln (28); King Oscar Land, 
Harbourfjord (24-27, 32, 33), South Cape (34), Goosefjord (88—41, 44— 
47, 49—51), Vendom Kap (55), Exkrementbugten (56), Renbugten (57), 
Landsend (58), Braskerudsliuen (63); North Kent (64); North Devon (65, 
66); Cardigan Straits (67). 


Appendix to systematic list: Parasites. 


The following parasitic Fungi have been found among the lichens 
of the Norwegian Expedition and I may add that I have not in this 
case included any parasites or so-called Pseudo-Lichens recorded for the 
regions under consideration by otber authors. 

Sphinctrina turbinata Prers., on Pertusaria subobducens Nyt. — 
King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (50). 

Tichothecium pygmaeum Ker., on Lecidea sp., King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (38); on Lecidea purissima Darsisu., King Oscar Land, Goose- 
fjord (42), Vendom Kap (55); on Lecanora polytropa, King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (89). 

Tichothecium gemmifer Tayu., on Aspicilia sp., King Oscar Land, 
Goosefjord (40); on Placodium elegans, King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (48). 

Discothecium stigma (Krer.) Zorr, on Lecidea purissima Darsisu., 
King Oscar Land, Goosefjord (89). 


1898—1902. No. 21. LICHENS. 51 


Notes on the systematic list. 


The foregoing list shows that the district, which includes Arctic 
America, Greenland, Spitsbergen and Iceland, has about 500 lichens re- 
corded for it. I have no doubt that more will still be found. My in- 
clusion of the lichens of Greenland, Spitsbergen and Iceland in a list 
of those brought back by the Second Norwegian Expedition to Arctic 
America is, I consider justified. The enumeration of lichens given above 
will thus give us a fairly complete picture of the lichen-vegetation of 
Ellesmere Land and King Oscar Land. 

To show in what relation the lichen-floras of these four districts 
stand to one another I have compiled a few statistical notes, comparing 
the lichens found in Arctic America, Greenland, Spitsbergen and Iceland. 

This list enumerates a total of 495 arctic lichens. Of these there 
have been recorded for 


Arctic America . 2. 1... . «258 or 51.1% 
Greenland . . .. . . . . . 3888 or 682 - 
Spitsbergen . . . . . . . . 206 or 41.6 - 
Tedland, . 2 2 + « « » « » » BSL or Ls + 


It must be mentioned also that of this total of 495 lichens we have 
recorded as occurring in 


Arctic America only. . . . 57 or 11.5% species 
Greenland only . . . . . 77 or 15.5 - 
Spitsbergen only . . . . . 33o0r 6.6 - 

* Tedland only. a wa « 4. Shor Fa- 


Only 84 or 16.9 °%/o of the total of 495 lichens are found to be com- 
mon to Arctic America, Greenland, Spitsbergen and Iceland. 204 or 
41.2°/, of the total are confined to one only of the four districts. It 
would have been possible and very interesting to compare with this the 
lichens of Alaska or the temperate parts of America, but I have rather, 


52 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


lower down, taken Germany and the Tirol as objects for comparison. 
To this matter I will refer directly. 

On a former occasion, in discussing the lichen-flora of Greenland, 
I pointed out the remarkable likeness of the flora of Greenland to that 
of Germany. Of 286 lichens recorded for Greenland up to that date, 
namely 1897, 213 occured in Germany. Of these 

105 or 49.4 %o were purely alpine, 
11 or 5.1 - preferred alpine situations, 
97 or 45 - were common to the hill and the plain. 

That is to say of the Greenland species found in Germany 54.5 °/, 
were found to be mainly alpine, but all practically had been recorded 
from the hills. Another point of interest was referred to in the paper 
on Greenland lichens. Of the 171 crustaceous lichens recorded from 
Greenland 110 or 64.3 °/, were recorded from Germany, of the foliace- 
ous lichens 60 or 85.7 °/o, and of the fruticulose lichens 34 or 94.4 °/, 

These figures were explained by reference to the advance and the 
final retreat of the ice after the last ice-age. During the greatest ex- 
tension of the ice in the ice-age the lichens would be pushed well to the 
south and into the plains. When the ice retreated however they would 
pass up to the north and into the hills, into the colder zones and 
regions. The warmer strips of land intervening would then separate 
the alpine and the northern lichen-floras. 

The oldest forms, the fruticulose lichens, would go back to the times 
when the alpine and northern floras were still united. We find there- 
fore that 94.4 °/) of the Greenland fruticulose lichens are found in Ger- 
many, of which however not a few are found in the plains. Of the less 
highly differentiated crustaceous lichens which must be considered to be 
of more recent development only 64.3 °/) are common to Germany and 
Greenland. I would like to say that I consider it not unlikely that a 
number of these crustaceous species are really species alike in their ex- 
ternal morphology only and that they are not really related to one 
another otherwise. We may call a Greenland plant by the same name 
as the German one, and as far as we are able to judge we may be 
Justified in so doing. At the some time the two plants may have heen 
separately derived though from some common ancestor. Some of the 
higher fruticulose species seem never to vary, whereas the variations 
among the simpler crustaceous species are at the best most puzzling and 
of frequent occurrence. 

The following tables are based on the list of 495 lichens enumerated 
above. They confirm the views already expressed: 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 53 


Fruticulose Foliaceous Crustaceous Total 
species species species 
Arctic Area... 61 91 343 495 
Germany & Tirol 54 or 88.5%) 76 or 83.5 fo 254 or 74%) 384 or 77.6 9/5 
Germany .... 51 67 213 331 or 66.8 - 
Title wa a es 52 or 85.2°/) 71 or 78%) 235 or 68.4°/) 358 or 72.3 - 
(of which not in 
Germany... 3 9 Al 53) 


We see therefore that the fruticulose lichens to the amount of 88.5 °/o 
of those recorded for the arctic area occur in Germany and the Tirol, 
83.5 °/) of the foliaceous and 74°/) of the crustaceous lichens. But most 
remarkable to my mind is the figure 72.3 which represents the percent- 
age of Arctic lichens found in the Tirol. With infinite care this area 
has recently been worked through by ARNotp more completely prob- 
ably than any other area in the world as far as lichens are concerned. It 
is interesting therefore and of no little importance to find that nearly 
3/:ths of the arctic lichens are recorded from the Tirol. Of the fruticu- 
lose species 85.2 °/o, of the foliaceous species 78 °/) and of the crustaceous 
species 68.4 °/) of the arctic lichens are found in the Tirol. ARnotp re- 
cords 1137 species for the Tirol. 

There is not as ‘a rule very much doubt as to the naming of the 
fruliculose or foliose lichens, but before the distribution of the crusta- 
ceous lichens can be considered a more settled matter, it will be neces- 
sary to work through some of the genera, like Lecidea, Lecanora, 
Verrucaria, Aspicilia and Polyblastia monographically. A carefull 
monograph — developemental, anatomical and even histological — of a 
genus like Lecidea would be of the greatest interest botanically and 
geographically. But it would be essential that specimens from all over 
the world were examined. 


54 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP, FRAM 


List of Localities of the Swedish Expedition. 


1. Greenland: Egedisminde (116, 117): 


On earth in fairly pure formations: Cetraria cucullata, islandica 
(passing into f. crispa), nivalis. 


2. Greenland (Foulkefjord): Reindeerpoint (122, 123, 124): 

On stones: Lecidea auriculata; Rhizocarpon geminatum, geo- 
graphicum: Gyrophora hirsuta, hyperborea; Xanthoria lychnea; Pla- 
codium elegans; Lecanora polytropa; Aspicilia calcarea; -Parmelia 
alpicola, saxatilis; Physcia caesia. 


3. Greenland: Foulkefjord (435—4387; 1407; 1559—1561): 


Over earth: Lopadium fuscoluteum; Stereocaulon alpinum; 
Cladonia pyxidata; Pertusaria dactylina; Parmelia sacatilis ; Pelti- 
dea aphthosa. 

Between moss: Dactylina arctica; Peltigera canina. 

Overstone: Rhizocarpon geminatum : Neuropogonmelaxanthum. 


4. Ellesmere Land: Mouth of Nordfjerd (527): 
Over moss and earth: Physcia pulverulenta; Thamnolia ver- 
micularis. 
5. Ellesmere Land: Fort Juliana (509—514): 


On stone: Rhizocarpon geographicum: Placodium elegans. 
On Salix arctica: Xanthoria lychnea. 


6. Ellesmere Land: Between Fort Juliana and Mt. Kéla Paalsen 
(565—567) : 


Over moss: Physcia pulverulenta; Solorina saccata. 


7. Ellesmere Land: Beitstadsfjord (573; 574; 588—594; 642; 643): 


Over earth: Bilimbia microcarpa; Cladonia pyxidata; Squa- 
maria fulgens: Parmelia physodes; Thamnolia vermicularis. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 55 


Over earth and between moss: Stereocaulon paschale; Ce- 
traria nivalis: Alectoria ochroleuca. 

Over moss: Lecanora epibryon. ; 

Between Cassiope tetragona: Peltidea aphthosa. 

On stone: Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographicum; Gyrophora 
erosa; Placodium elegans. 


8. Ellesmere Land: Twin Glacier Valley (955—957): 
Over earth: Stereocaulon paschale; Placodium elegans; Par- 
melia saxatilis; Alectoria nigricans: Physcia pulverulenta. 
Over earth and between moss: Cetraria cucullata, nivalis. 


9. Ellesmere Land: Lastraea Thal (938—940; 983). 


Over and between moss: Physcia pulverulenta. 
On stone: Stereocaulon evolutum; Rhizocarpon geminatum. 


10. Ellesmere Land: Cape Viele (904—907; 910; 911; 1430; 
1431; 1838): 

Over earth: Sphaerophoron coralloides; Cladonia pyxidata; 
Squamaria fulgens; Parmelia omphalodes, saxatilis. 

Over earth and moss: Pertusaria subobducens; Physcia pul- 
verulenta. 

Over earth and between moss: Dufourea muricata. 

Between moss: Cetraria nivalis: Dactylina arctica: Alectoria 
nigricans, ochroleuca. 


11. Ellesmere Land: Eskimopolis, between Eskimo Ruins 
(1046—1049) : 
Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum, paschale; Physcia pul- 
verulenta; Peltidea aphthosa. 


12. Ellesmere Land: Alexandra Harbour (1010): 
Between moss, near a brook: Peltigera polydactyla. 
13. Ellesmere Land: Alexandra Harbour, Eskimo Island 
(1452—1455): 
Between moss: Stereocaulon paschale; Bryopogon prolixum; 


Peltidea aphthosa. 


14. Ellesmere Land: Cape Rutherford (296; 460—463; 661—663; 
784; 785; 809; 810; 1145): 
Over earth: Placodium splendens; Cetraria cucullata, hiascens, 
nivalis. 


56 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Over moss: Lecanora epibryon; Rinodina turfacea; Solorina 
saccata. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum; Parmelia omphalodes; 
Dactylina arctica: Alectoria ochroleuca; Peltidea aphthosa. 

On stone: Stereocaulon paschale: Placodium splendens. 


15. Ellesmere Land: Framshavn (166; 350; 354; 1837): 


Over earth: Alectoria ochroleuca. 

Between moss: Dufourea muricata; Physcia pulverulenta. 

On stone: Rhizocarpon geminatum: Gyrophora anthracina, 
hyperborea; Lecanora polytropa; Parmelia lanata. 


16. Ellesmere Land, Framshavn, South Side (637; 639; 1230—1233): 


Over earth: Squamaria fulgens; Alectoria nigricans, ochro- 
leuca. 

Over earth, between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum, Cladonia 
pyxidata. 

On stone: Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographicum; Gyalolechia 
subsimilis ; Parmelia lanata; Acarospora chlorophana. 


17. Ellesmere Land, Framshavn, North Side (458; 459; 595; 596; 
757—763; 1111-1113; 1143; 1144): 


Over earth: Cladonia chlorophaea: Pertusaria panyrga; Can- 
delaria concolor; Alectoria ochroleuca; Physcia pulverulenta; Pelti- 
dea aphthosa. 

Over moss: Lopadium fuscoluteum; Cladonia pyxidata; Pertu- 
saria subobducens; Lecanora epibryon; Buellia parasema. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum; Cetraria hiascens; 
Dufourea muricata; Bryopogon Fremontii; Peltigera canina. 

On stone: Rhizocarpon geminatum; Gyrophora arctica, cylin- 


drica, erosa, hyperborea; Lecanora polytropa; Parmelia lanata: 
Pannaria rubiginosa. 


18. Ellesmere Land, Cocked Hat Island (1288—1293): 


Over earth: Cladonia pyxidata: Placodiwm splendens; Leca- 
nora epibryon; Alectoria nigricans; Rinodina turfacea. 

Between moss: Physcia pulverulenta. 

Over moss: Placodiwm splendens. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS. 57 


19. Ellesmere Land, Bedford Pim Island, Coast on Rice Straits 
(467; 474; 1244; 1245; 1284; 1335—1340; 1360); 


Over earth: Cladonia pywxidata. 

Over moss: Lecidea assimilata; Biatora Diapensiae; Lecanora 
epibryon. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum: Dactylina arctica. 

On stone: Lecidea macrocarpa, purissima; Gyrophora anthra- 
cina: Stereocaulon coralloides, paschale: Gyalolechia subsimilis : 
Aspicilia mastrucata. 


20. Ellesmere Land, Bedford Pim Island, near Cape Sabine 
(163; 365—369): : 
Over earth: Cetraria nivalis; Alectoria ochroleuca. 
Over moss: Pertusaria subobducens. 
On stone: Gyrophora anthracina, hirsuta. 


21. Ellesmere Land, Bedford Pim Island, South Side 
(1166; 1167; 1178): 
Over earth: Cladonia pyxidata; Parmelia farinacea, physo- 
des; Cetraria hiascens; Alectoria nigricans, ochroleuca; Rinodina 


turfacea. 
Over earth and moss: Lecanora epibryon. 


92. Ellesmere Land, Brevort Island (484—486; 1295): 


Over earth: Physcia pulverulenta. 
On stone: Gyrophora anthracina. 


23. North Lincoln, Framfjord (1673; 1715—1724; 1763): 


Over earth: Cladonia pyxidata; Pionospora glomerata; Pla- 
codium splendens; Squamaria fulgens; Parmelia physodes; Rino- 
dina turfacea; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Pertusaria subobducens; Lecanora epibryon; Phys- 
cia pulverulenta. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum; Cetraria cucullata, ni- 
valis: Alectoria ochroleuca: Bryopogon Fremontii: Peltidea aphthosa. 

On musk ox dung: Caloplaca pyracea: Rinodina turfacea: 
Thamnolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Gyrophora anthracina; Placodium elegans. 


58 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


24. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, “griiner Fleck“ (1831—1855; 
1870—1878; 1948; 1949; 1957—1974; 1977: 1986—1988; 1993—2005; 
2022—2026; 2113; 2129): 


Over dead plants: Pionospora glomerata; Pertusaria panyrga. 

Over earth: Thalloidima vesiculare; Candelaria concolor: Ce- 
traria cucullata, nivalis (between Dryas octopetala); Alectoria ochro- 
leuca: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Stereocaulon paschale; Cladonia pyxidata; Ochro- 
lechia pallescens; Lecanora epibryon: Physcia pulverulenta; Buellia 
parasema. 

Between moss: Physcia muscigena: Peltigera canina, malacea, 
polydactyla, rufescens; Leptogium lacerum. 

On stone: Lecidea confluens, fuscoatra, purissima; Catillaria 
sanguinea; Sporastatia testudinea; Rhizocarpon geminatum, geo- 
graphicum; Gyrophora hirsuta: Xanthoria lychnea, parietina; Pla- 
codium elegans; Caloplaca citrina; Squamaria chrysoleuca (v. me- 
lanophthalma); Lecanora polytropa; Aspicilia calcarea, gibbosa; 
Parmelia lanata; Physcia caesia, obscura; Dimelaena oreina; Pla- 
cynthium nigrum. 


2%. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, Stordalen (2364; 2057 
(subfossil shells with sterile lichen); 2088): 


Over earth: Rinodina turfacea; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over earth and dead plants: Pertusaria subobducens. 

Over earth and moss: Cladonia pyxidata; Lecanora epibryon; 
Alectoria ochroleuca. 


26. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, to east of harbour 2006— 
2013; 2031—2033; 2076; 2214; 2215): 


Over dead plants: Buellia parasema. 

Over earth: Thalloidima vesiculare; Psora decipiens: Ochro- 
lechia tartarea: Parmelia physodes: Cetraria cucullata, hiascens; 
Dufourea muricata: Solorina saccata: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Cladonia pyxidata: Ochrolechia upsaliensis: Le- 
canora epibryon: Aspicilia verrucosa: Physcia muscigena, pulveru- 
lenta; Rinodina turfacea: Buellia parasema. 

Between moss: Cetraria nivalis. 

On stone: Lecidea elaeochroma, purissima: Sporastatia testu- 
dinea: Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographiam: Placynthium nigrum. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] - LICHENS. 59 


97. King Osear Land, Harbourfjord, slope on western sound 
(2346—2350; 2485—2487; 2489; 2504—2507): 


Over moss: Cladonia pyxidata: Rinodina turfacea. 

Between moss: Cetraria cucullata, hiascens, islandica (f. ori- 
spa): Dactylina arctica: Physcia pulverulenta: Thamnolia vermi- 
cularis. 

Over stone: Sporastatia testudinea: Catocarpon badioatrum: 
Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographicum; Gyrophora anthracina, 
cylindrica, hyperborea, proboscidea; Stereocaulon paschale: Placo- 
dium elegans: Aspicilia gibbosa: Parmelia lanata, stygia: Placyn- 
thium nigrum: Pannaria rubiginosa. 


98. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, Spadepoint (2420—2423; 
2571; 2602—6206): 


Over earth: Thalloidima vesiculare: Psora decipiens; Gloeo- 
lichen sp. — but with no apothecia. 

Over moss: Stlereocaulon paschale; Cladonia pyxidata: Per- 
tusaria subobducens; Lecanora epibryon: Physcia pulverulenta. 

On stone: Lecidea elata, speirea: Rhizocarpon geminatum, geo- 
graphicum: Placodium elegans, murorum: Placynthium nigrum. 


99. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, between Spadepoint and 
Masberg (2612, 2613): 
Over dead plants: Rinodina turfacea. 
Over earth: Cladonia pyxidata: Physcia pulverulenta. 
Over moss: Cladonia pyxidata: Ochrolechia tartarea: Leca- 
nora epibryon. 


30. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, south of Spade point 
(2479): 


Over Silene acaulis: Caloplaca pyracea. 


31. King Oscar Land. Harbourfjord, South side of Harbour 
(1792—1797): . 
Over dead plants: Buellia parasema. 
Over earth: Solorina saccata. 
Over moss: Stereocaulon paschale; Cladonia pyxidata: Phys- 
cia pulverulenta. 
Between moss: Cetraria hiascens: Leptogium saturninum. 


60 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


32. King Osear Land, Harbourfjord, Oededalerne (2471): 


Over earth: Parmelia physodes: Cetraria cucullata, nivalis: 
Alectoria nigricans, ochroleuca: Peltidea aphthosa: Thamnolia vermi- 
cularis. 

Over moss and earth: Lecidea ramulosa. 


33. King Oscar Land, Harbourfjord, Valley on Sir Inglis Peak 
(2181; 2182; 2808; 2814, 2315, 2324): 


Over earth: Cladonia fimbriata: Parmelia sawatilis. 

Over earth, between moss and lichens: Stereocaulon alpi- 
num: Lecanora epibryon; Aspicilia verrucosa: Cetraria hiascens, 
islandica: Dactylina arctica: Dufourea muricata; Alectoria ochro- 
leuca: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Pannaria microphylla. 


34. King Oscar Land, South Cape (1923; 1925; 1926; 1928; 1929; 
2099—2104; 2042—9047): 

Over earth: Cetraria aculeata, nivalis; Alectoria ochroleuca. 

Over moss: Gyalolechiasubsimilis ; Lecanora epibryon: Aspicilia 
verrucosa; Cetraria nivalis: Physcia pulverulenta: Rinodina tur- 
facea ; Leptogium lacerum; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Lecidea brachyspora, elaeochroma, purissima, soli- 
taria; Rhizocarpon chioneum: Placodium elegans. 


35. King Osear Land, Bjeneborg (1903, 1906): 


On stone: Sporastatia testudinea; Rhizocarpon geographicum: 
Placodium elegans. 


36. King Oscar Land, Muskoxfjord, Inner part (2294, 2268): 


Over earth: Thalloidima vesiculare; Solorina saccata. 
Over moss: Physcia pulverulenta. 


37. King Osear Land, Muskoxfjord, Peninsula on eastern side 
(2216): 
Over earth: Physcia muscigena. 


38. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord, Western Side (2664 - 2682; 
3294—3298 ; 3415--3428 ; 2701—2715): 
Over earth: Stereocaulon paschale; Parmelia omphalodes: 
Cetraria crispa, hiascens: Anaptychia aquila: Placynthium nigrum: 
Solorina saccata: Leptogium saturnimum: Thamnolia vermicularis. 


1898—1902. No. 21.] LICHENS, 61 


Over moss: Cladonia pyxidala: Pertusaria subobducens: 
Physcia muscigena, pulverulenta: Buellia parasema: Peltidea aph- 
thosa, veiosa. 

Between moss: Dufourea muricata, Solorina saccata; Tham- 
nolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Lecidea auriculata (tf. diducens and evoluta), con- 
fluens, crustulata, elaeochroma (f.pungens), elata, fuscoatra, purissima, 
sincerula: Biatora coarctata; Sporastatia testudinea; Rhizocarpon 
geminatum, geographicum: Gyrophora anthracina, cylindrica, hyper- 
borea, proboscidea; Nanthoria parietina: Placodium elegans, muro- 
rum. Gyalolechia vitellina; Lecanora atra, dispersa, polytropa, sub- 
fusca, varia: Aspicilia calearea, cinerea, lesleyana, nikrapensis ; 
Parmelia alpicola, lanata: Buellia coniops, vilis; Polyblastia inter- 
media, theleodes. 

On a species of Lecidea was found Tichothecium pygmaewn. 


39. King Oscar Land, Inner Goosefjord, Eastern Side (2694— 
2699; 2725—2741; 2745—2749; 2802—2805; 2982; 2983; 3240—3248; 
3289 — 3293; 3321—3324; 3351—3353; 2360—3360—3363; 

3450 —3454; 3546—3555): 

Over earth: Thalloidima vesiculare; Lopadium fuscoluteum; 
Cladonia pyxidata; Ochrolechia tartarea; Pertusaria dactylina, sub- 
obducens: Candelaria concolor; Caloplaca citrina: Aspicilia verru- 
cosa; Cetraria cucullaia, hiascens; Dactylina arctica: Physcia pul- 
verulenta; Rinodina turfacea: Leptogium lacerum, saturninum ; 
Thamnolia vermicularis. . 

Over moss: Candelaria concolor: Blastenia tetraspora; Calo- 
placa pyracea: Lecanora epibryon: Parmelia omphalodes; Physcia 
muscigena; Rinodina mniaroea, turfacea; Psoroma hypnorum. 

Between moss: Sphaerophoron coralloides: Stereocaulon alpt- 
num, tomentosum; Cladonia pyxidata; Dufourea muricata: Alectoria 
nigricans, ochroleuca: Peltideaaphthosa: Peltigera canina, rufescens. 

Over dead plants: Alectoria nigricans, ochroleuca. 

On muskoxdung: Biatorinaglobulosa; Caloplacapyracea: Gya- 
lolechia subsimilis: Lecanora epibryon: Aspicilia verrucosa: Rino- 
dina turfacea. 

On stone: Lecidea aglaea, auriculata, confluens, elaeochroma, 
elata, lithophila, macrocarpa, paupercula, purissima, sincerula, 
tenebrosa, tessellata; Biatora rupestris: Sporastatia testudinea: 
Sarcogyne simplex; Catocarpon Rittokense: Rhizocarpon calcareum, 


62 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


geminatun, geographicum: Gyrophora anthracina, proboscidea: 
Stereocaulon paschale; Ochrolechia parella: Placodium elegans : Calo- 
placa pyracea: Gyalolechia subsimilis; Lecanora polytropa; Aspicilia 
cinerea, gibbosa, nikrapensis; Parmelia lanata, stygia; Acarospora 
fuscata: Polyblastia intercedens: Thelidium pyrenophorum. 

On Lecidea purissima.: Discothecium stigma. 

On Lecanora polytropa: Tichothecium pygmaeum. 


40, King Oscar Land, Middle Goosefjord, south of Yellowhill 
(3907—3512; 3562—3571; 3660—3664; 3720—3723; 3748—3769 ; 
3875—3879; 3926—3929): 

Over earth: Pionospora glomerata: Pertusaria subobducens; 
Parmelia omphalodes ; Buellia parasema; Pannaria rubiginosa; Pel- 
tidea aphthosa; Peltigera rufescens:; Solorina saccata. 

Over moss: Lecanora epibryon: Collema aggregatum. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum, paschale: Cladonia 
pyxidata; Cetraria aculeata, hiascens, islandica (and f. crispa): Du- 
fourea muricata: Alectoria nigricans: Physcia pulverulenta; Tham- 
nolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Lecidea auriculata, brachyspora, confluens, elaeo- 
ehrona (f. pilularis), purissima; Sporastatia testudinea: Rhizocarpon 
geminatum, geographicum; Gyrophora anthracina, hirsuta, probos- 
cidea: Placodium elegans: Caloplaca aurantiaca; Lecanora polio- 
phaea, varia; Parmelia lanata: Placynthium nigrum; Polyblastia 
intercedens, intermedia. 

Ona species of Aspicilia: Tichothecium gemmifer. 


41. King Oscar Land, Middle Goosefjord, Fourth Winterquarters 
(8791—8807 ; 3862—3871; 3913; 3936; 3937): 

Over earth: Thalloidima vesiculare: Psora decipiens: Cladonia 
pyxidata; Ochrolechia pallescens: Pertusaria dactylina, panyrga; 
Gyalolechia subsimilis, vitellina; Psoroma hypnornm: Peltigera sca- 
brosa: Solorina saccata; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Biatora terricola; Pertusaria subobducens; Calo- 
placa pyracea; Lecanora epibryon: Aspicilia verrucosa; Physcia 
muscigena, pulverulenta; Rinodina turfacea. 

Between moss: Peltidea aphthosa. 

On stone: Lecidea auriculata. purissima, speirea; Biatora 
coarctata; Sporastatia testudinea: Rhizocarpon geminatum, geogra- 
phicum; Ochrolechia tartarea: Placodium elegans; Lecanora atra, 
varia; Aspicilia cinerea, gibbosa, lesleyana; Parmelia omphualodes : 
Placynthium nigrum. 


1808— 1902. No. 21,] LICHENS. 63 


42. King Osear Land, Middle Goosefjord, Borgdalen (3772 —3786 ; 
3813; 38872—3874; 3917; 3932-3934): 


Over earth: Cladonia pyxidata; Physcia pulverulenta. 

On stone: Lecidea conferenda, confluens, elata, macrocarpa, 
purissima: Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographicum: Placodium ele- 
gans; Caloplaca citrina: Lecanora subfusca; Aspicilia gibbosa, lae- 
vata; Physcia obscura: Rinodina milvina: Placynthium nigrum : 
Verrucaria nigrescens: Thelidium papulare. 

On Lecidea purissima: Tichothecium pygmaeum. 


43. King Oscar Land, Outer Goosefjord (2819): 
On stone: Lecidea purissima. 


44, King Oscar Land, Outer Goosefjord, Gullcove (2820; 3018 — 3025): 


Over earth: Placodium elegans: Gyalolechia subsimilis. 

Over moss: Lecanora epibryon: Physcia pulverulenta: Rino- 
dina turfacea. 

Between moss: Cetraria aculeata, nivalis; Alectoria nigri- 
cans, ochroleuca; Thamnolia vermicularis. 


On stone: Placodiwm elegans: Physcia caesia: Rinodina 
Bischof fii. 


45, King Oscar Land, Outer Goosefjord, Breedingplace on 
Gulleove (2976—2980) : 

Over earth: Aspicilia verrucosa: Physcia pulverulenta; Rino- 
dina turfacea; Verrucaria epigaea:; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Caloplaca jungermanniae;: Lecanora epibryon ; 
Physcia muscigena; Rinodina turfacea. 

Between moss: Cefraria aculeata, nivalis; Alectoria nigri- 
‘cans, ochroleuca: Thamnolia vermicularis. 


46 King Oscar Land, Valley in Goosefjord (3257—3259): 


Over damp earth: Thalloidima vesiculare: Cladonia pyxt- 
data: Pertusaria dactylina, subobducens: Physcia pulverulenta ; 
Thamnolia vermicularis. 


47. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord, Innereidet (2107; 2960): 
Overearth: Cladonia pywidata: Thamnolia vermicularis. 
Over moss: Lopadium fuscoluteum ; Blastenia leucoroea. 
Between moss: Physcia pulverulenta. 


64 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


48. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord, Gallowspoint (2683—2693 ; 
9716—2724; 2750; 2775; 2776; 3255): 


Over earth: Stereocaulon paschale: Alectoria nigricans. 

Over moss: Physcia muscigena, pulverulenta. 

On stone: Lecidea auriculata, confluens, elaeochroma, elata, 
macrocarpa, purissima: Biatora coarctata: Sporastatia testudinea: 
Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographicum: Gyrophora anthracina, 
hyperborea, proboscidea: Ochrolechia parella: Pertusaria determi- 
nanda; Placodium elegans: Lecanora polytropa: Aspicilia cinerea, 
gibbosa, lesleyana: Parmelia centrifuga, lanata, omphalodes, saxa- 
tilis, stygia: Physcia obscura: Dimelaena nimbosa. 

On Placodium elegans: Tichothecium gemmifer. 


49. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord, Ripsdalerne (3249; 3345—3349; 
3355—3359 ; 3384—3386) : 


Over earth: Stereocaulon paschale: Alectoria ochroleuca: Pelti- 
dea aphthosa: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Between moss: Aspicilia verrucosa: Psoroma hypnorum. 

On stone: Lecidea purissima: Sporastatia testudinea: Rhizo- 
carpon geminatum, geographicum: Gyrophora anthracina, hirsuta, 
proboscidea: Placodium elegans: Lecanora polytropa: Aspicilia cal- 
carea, nikrapensis: Parmelia lanata. 


50. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord, Midday Knoll (3456 —3462; 
3097—3607 ; 3649): 


Overearth: Lopadium fuscoluteum: Cladonia chlorophaea, 
pyxidata: Pionospora glomerata: Pertusaria subobducens : Aspicilia 
verrucosa: Parmelia physodes: Rinodina turfaceu; Peltidea aphthosa. 

Over moss: Pertusaria subobducens: Physcia pulverulenta. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum: Pionospora glomerata; 
Cetraria islandica: Alectoria nigricans, ochroleuca: Thamnolia 
vermicularis 

On stone: Sporastatia testudinea; Rhizocarpon geninatum, 
geographicum : Gyrophora anthracina, proboscidea: Lecanora poly- 
tropa: Aspicilia gibbosa, lesleyana; Parmelia lanata: Neuwropogon 
melaxanthum. 

On Pertusaria subobducens: Sphinctrina turbinata. 


1898— 1902. No. 21] LICHENS. 65 


51. King Oscar Land, Goosefjord, Faleoneliff (8137—3143): 


Over earth: Cladonia chlorophaea; Gyalolechia subsimilis; 
Alectoria ochroleuca: Rinodina turfacea; Peltigera rufescens. 

Over moss: Physcia muscigena. 

Between moss: Cetraria nivalis: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Placynthium nigrum. 


52. King Oscar Land, Goosefjordseidet (2806): 
Over earth: Pertusaria subobducens. 


53. King Oscar Land, western side of Goosefjordseidet (2110): 
Over earth: Pertusaria subobducens. 


54. King Oscar Land, Inner Goosefjord (2700): 


On Driftwood: Caloplaca cerina, citrina, jungermanniae ; 
Lecanora epibryon; Buellia myriocarpa. 


55. King Oscar Land, Vendom Kap (2822—2830; 3165—3179): 


On moss: Lopadium fuscoluteum: Cladonia pyxidata;: Calo- 
placa pyracea; Lecanora epibryon: Aspicilia verrucosa; Physcia 
muscigena, pulverulenta; Rinodina turfacea: Peltigera rufescens. 

Between moss: Cetraria aculeata, hidscens: Leptogium la- 
cerum;: Thamnolia vermiculuris. 

On stone (epilithic): Lecideu auriculata macrocurpa, puris- 
sima: Biutora rupestris; Sarcogyne simplex : Catocarpon depressum ; 
Rhizocarpon geminatum, geographicum; Placodiwm elegans: Aspi- 
cilia candida: Physcia caesia: Plucynthium nigrum. 

On stone (endolithic): Biatora immersa. 

On Lecidea purissima: Tichothectum pygmaeum. 


56. King Oscar Land, Exkrementbugten (3208—3211): 
Over earth: Gyalolechia subsimilis: Solorina saccata; Tham- 
nolia vermicularis. 
Over moss: Cladonia pyxiduta; Lecunora epibryon; Aspiciliu 
verrucosa: Physcia pulverulenta. 
Between moss: Cetraria juniperina. 


57. King Oscar Land, Renbugten (2821; 3236—3238) : 
Between moss: Cladonia pyxidata: Dufourea muricata: 
Bryopogon prolixum: Peltideaa phthosa: Thamnolia vermicularis. 


On stone: Lecidea purissima. 
5 


66 OTTO V. DARBISHIRE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


58. King Osear Land, Bay near Landsend (2845—2848 ; 3094 —3098): 


Over moss: Cladonia pyxidata; Pertusaria subobducens: Le- 
canora epibryon; Aspicilia verrucosa; Cetraria islandica; Physcia 
pulverulenta; Rinodina turfacea; Pelligera canina; Thamnolia 
vermicularis. ’ 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum. 

On stone: Lecidea elaeochroma, macrocarpa: Rhizocarpon 
geographicum ; Aspicilia calcarea. 


59. King Oscar Land, Graham Island (1914—1915): 


On stone: Plucodium elegans; Lecanora frustulosa. 


60. King Osear Land, Axel Heiberg Land, Hyperitodden 
(1921; 9762): 
Over moss: Pertusaria subobducens: Peltidea aphthosa; Solo- 
rina croced. 


61. King Oscar Land, North of Coalharbour (8859—3861) : 


Imitation-lichens only; i. e. stones resembling lichens. 


62. King Oscar Land, Coalharbour (8854—3855) : 


On stone: Lecidea elueochroma; Placodium elegans; Squamaria 
circinata. 


63. King QOsear Land, Isachsenfjord, Braskerudsliuen 
(711; 712; 714717): 
Over earth: Cetraria aculeata, nivalis; Alectoria ochroleuca ; 
Bryopogon Fremontii: Thamnolia vermicularis. 
Over moss: Pionospora glomerata: Pertusaria subobducens. 
Between moss: Placodium splendens. 


64. North Kent, Northern Part (3044; 3062—3075): 


Over earth: Stereocaulon paschale: Pertusaria subobducens. 

Over moss: Ochrolechia tartarea. 

Between moss: Stereocaulon alpinum: Cladonia pyxidata ; 
Cetraria cucullata, hiascens: Alectoria nigricans, ochroleuca; Phys- 
cia pulvernlenta; Peltigera rufescens; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

On stone: Lecidea macrocarpa; Placodium elegans; Neuwropo- 
gon melacanthum. 


1898— 1902. No. 21] LICHENS. 67 


65. North Devon, including Havhestberget (2637—2641; 2647; 
4053—4064) : 


Over earth: Squamaria fulgens: Cetraria aculeata, cucullata, 
nivalis; Dufowrea muricata: Alectoria ochroleuca: Bryopogon pro- 
licum: Buellia parasema: Solorina saccata: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Cladonia pyxidata; Pertusaria subobducens: Le- 
canora epibryon; Aspicilia verrucosa; Physcia muscigena, pulveru- 
lenta: Rinodina turfacea: Peltigera canina. 


66. North Devon, Burginsel (3987-3992; 4165—4178): 


Over earth: Aspicilia verrucosa; Cetraria aculeata, hiascens ; 
Alectoria nigricans: Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Over moss: Cladonia pywxidata: Placodiwim elegans: Lecanora 
epibryon: Bryopogon prolixrum; Physcia pulverulenta: Rinodina 
turfaceca; Leptogium lacerum. 

On stone: Lecidea brachyspora, purissima: Rhizocarpon gemi- 
natum, geographicum: Placodium elegans: Physcia caesia: Placyn- 
thium nigrum. 


67. Cardigan Straits, Devils Island (3982—3985; 4070—4080) : 


Over earth: Gyalolechia subsimilis: Rinodina turfacea. 

Over moss: Cladonia pyxidata: Lecanora epibryon; Physcia 
muscigena, pulverulenta; Thamnolia vermicularis. 

Between moss: Cetraria aculeata, cucullata, hiascens, nivalis : 
Alectoria nigricans: Bryopogon prolicum. 

On stone: Lecidea auriculata, brachyspora, purissima ; Rhizo- 
carpon geographicum: Placodiwm elegans ; Aspicilia calcarea, gibbosa. 


68. Lager 30 (4124--4126): 


On stone: Rhizocarpon geographicum: Gyrophora anthracina. 


69. Lager 33 (4122): 


Over earth: Placodium elegans. 


68 OTTO. V. DARBISHIRE. LICHENS. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Addition. 


Since writing the above report I have succeeded in obtaining a copy 
of “Lichenes expeditionis G. Amprup (1898—1902). Enumeravit Epv. A. 
Wainto”, printed in the Meddelelser om Gronland in 1905, p. 125—141. 
As a result the following species must be added to our list, which is 
thus brought up to 505: 


Lecidea subcongrua Nyt. — Hue Add. n. 1159. 

Cladonia cerasphora Wain. — Wat. Clad. II. p. 167. 
Placodium verruculiferum Wain. — Amprvup p. 131. 
Caloplaca vitellinula (Ny). Darsisu.— Hur Add. n. 510. 
Squamaria alphoplaca (Wyec.) Acu.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 230. 
Squamaria bracteata (Hrrm.) Nyt.— Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 228. 
Buellia groenlandica Wain. — Amprup p. 133. 

Acarospora discreta (Acu.) Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Scand. p. 217. 
Solorina octospora Arn.— Amprup p. 134. 

Polyblastia terrestris Tu. Fr. — Tu. Fr. Poly. p. 15. 


Explanation of Plates. 


Tab. I. fig. 1. Lecidea purissima. 
2. Lecidea solitaria. 
3. Catocarpon depressum. 
Tab. II. fig. 1. Pertusaria determinanda. 
2. Aspicilia lesleyana. 
3. Aspicilia nikrapensis. 


Printed 19 October 1909. 


Rep. of the 2nd Norweg. Arct. Exp. in the Fram 1898—1902. No. 21 


TAB. 


Lecidea purissima. 
Lecidea solitaria. 
3. Catocarpon depressum. 


a 


Rep. of the 2nd Norweg. Arct, Exp. in the Fram 1898—1902. No, 21. Tap. II 


1. Pertusaria determinanda. 
2. Aspicilia lesleyana. 
3. — hikrapensis 


THOS Yad 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 22. 


CARL BUGGE: 


PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE 
DER 2" FRAM-EXPEDITION 


(MIT TAFELN UND KARTEN) 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 
(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISIIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1910 


Ix Herbst 1898 fithrte Kapitén Sverprue die Fram durch den 
Smiths-Sund und erreichte, nachdem er Foulke-Fjord in Prudhoes-Land, 
Gronland, besucht hatte, in der Ricestrait sein erstes Winterquartier. 

Dadurch bot sich dem Geologen P. Scuer Gelegenheit, die Umgegend 
von Buchanan-Bay zu studieren. Mit mustergiltiger Energi sammelte 
Schei von den Gebieten bei Ricestrait, Alexandra-Fjord, Hayes-Fjord, 
Flaglers-Fjord und Bache pens., sowie auch noch von einem Teile der 
Gegend von Princess Mary-Bay und von dem innersten Zipfel des Bays- 
fjord ein reichhaltiges Material. Von einer Tour nach Foulke-Fjord 
brachte er auch ein bedeutendes Material mit. 

Im Frithling 1899 steuerte die Fram siidwirts in den Jones-Sund, 
wo sie im Havne-Fjord im Winterquartier blieb. i 

Von der siidlichen Kiiste von Ellesmere-Land nahm Schei auch ein 
gutes Material mit sich. 

Im darauf folgenden Frihling 1900 drang Fram weiter nach Westen 
vor. Die grossartigen Einsammlungen von Fossilien, die im Gaase- 
Fjord und Eureka-Sund vorgenommen wurden, berihren jedoch vorlaufig 
diese Augabe nicht, wo es sich darum handelt, zunachst Gesteine eines 
von Schei als pricambrisch angenommenen Eruptivgebietes, und darauf 
verschiedene eruptive Gesteine, die jiinger als dieses Priicambrium sind, 
zu beschreiben. 

Man muss die Energie, mit der Schei seine Arbeit anfasste, und 
die Vollkommenheit, mit der er seine Aufgabe léste, im hohem Grade 
bewundern. Es ist schwierig zu verstehen, wie er unter so eigenartig 
ungiinstigen, klimatischen Verhiltnissen ein so grosses Material herbei- 
schaffen konnte, das, selbst wenn es unter milderen Breitengraden ge- 
sammelt worden wire, als recht bedeutend angesehen werden miisste. 

Nur mit Hilfe seiner Hunde musste ja Schei seine schweren Stein- 
Jadungen meilenweit bis auf die Fram bringen. 

Um so mehr beklagenswert ist es, dass nicht Scuer selbst sein 
eigenes Material bearbeiten konnte. Ein friher Tod raffte ihm in ein 


4 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Alter von 31 Jahren kurz nach seiner Heimkehr dahin — ein Verlust 
fiir arclische, und ein Verlust fir norwegische Geologie. ScHri’s viele 
Freunde gedenken seiner mit Wehmut. 

Selbstverstindlich vermag ich die Resultate von Scuei’s Studien 
und Sammlungen von dem Eruptions-Gebiete des Ellesmere-Landes nur 
in den Hauptziigen vorzulegen. Das, was ich mitteilen kann, besteht 
nur aus einer kurzgefassten petrographischen Beschreibung der Gesteine, 
wobei mir verschiedene von Scuer ausgefiihrte Analysen zur Seite 
standen. . 

Gleichzeitig erlaube ich mir hier, Herrn Professor Broccer fir das 
mir zur Untersuchung tiberlassene Material und noch besonders fir sein 
so liebenswirdiges Entgegenkommen wihrend der Ausarbeitung meinen 
ergebenen Dank auszusprechen. 


Das pracambrische' Eruptionsgebiet im Ellesmere- 
Land und Prudhoes-Land. 


Scuer hat eine vorliufige Mittellung tber seine Beobachtungen ge- 
hefert, woraus hervorzugehen scheint, dass das Ellesmere-Land ein Ur- 
gebirgsschollengebiet bildet, das nach Osten Teile von Prudhoes-Land in 
Nord-Grénland umfasst und sich nach Siiden tber North Devon gegen 
die grossen canadischen Urgebirgsschollen erstreckt. 

Die nérdliche Grenze des Gebietes zieht sich vom innersten Zipfel 
des Bays-Fjords lings der Nordseite des Hayes-Fjords und tber Cape 
Camperdown in Bache pens. bis nach Reindeer pt. im Prudhoes-Land. 
Die Westgrenze lauft vom Zipfel des Bays-Fjords lings der Ostseite des 
Havnefjords tiber Jones-Sund nach North Devon. 

Dieses Gebiet besteht aus eruptiven Gesteinen, die, wie man sehen 
kann, aus einem kalkreichen Magma stammen, indem die von dort mit- 
gebrachten Proben unter dem Mikroskop erweisen, dass sie bedeutende 
Mengen Plagioklas enthalten. Dass diese jedoch nicht ganz gewohnliche 
Gabbrogesteine sind, bekommt man des im Allgemeinen ziemlich hohen 
Quarzgehaltes wegen auch makroskopisch den Eindruck. Das, was in 
diesem Gebiete makroskopisch am meisten in die Augen fallt, ist, dass 
es zusammen mit einer Reihe verschiedener dunkler Ge- 
steine auch helle giebt, die so auftreten, dass sie als von 
demselben Magma stammend betrachtet werden miissen. 


1 Cfr. Pag. 28. 


Isle. 


im 


thaugen, P 


jo 


K 


t von Granitadern durchsetzt). 


orl 


t (Quarzd 


tdiori 


i 


Gran 


1898—1902. No. 22.) PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 5) 


Unter dem Mikroskop treten die Verhaltnisse deutlicher hervor, in- 
dem es sich zeigt, dass die Gesteine eine Serie von basischen Gesteinen 
mit basischem Plagioklas samt mit monoklinem und im Allgemeinen auch 
mit rhombischem Pyroxen bis etwas sauereren Gesteinen mit sauererem 
_ Plagioklas, Quarz, rhombischem Pyroxen, Hornblende und weiter bis zu 
verhaltnismassig alkalireicheren Gesteinen reprasentieren, die eine Uber- 
gangstufe zwischen den Kalkgesteinen und Alkalikalkgesteinen, namlich 
Banatite und Adamellite bilden; und als jiingste Bildung treten endlich 
kalkarme Granite auf. Diese Gesteine enthalten im Allgemeinen rhom- 
bischen Pyroxen (Bronzit oder Hypersthen), doch giebt es auch wirkliche 
Gabbroe mit nur monoklinem Pyroxen und basischem Plagioklas. In _ 
den meisten basischen Gesteinen sind die dunklen Minerale nur mono- 
kliner Pyroxen, waihrend zu den sauereren rhombischer Pyroxen, Horn- 
blende, uud Biotit hinzutreten. 

Der Feldspat ist in den am meisten basischen Gesteine Labrador, 
teilweise ein basischer, in den sauereren Andesin und Oligoklas, bisweilen 
zusammen mit Labrador. Ausserdem treten in den alkalireicheren Ge- 
steinen Orthoklas und Mikrolin auf; diese sind beinahe immer als Mikro- 
perthit entwickelt, der ab und zu als in Kryptoperthit ibergehend beob- 
achtet werden kann. 

Quarz tritt als zuletzt ausgeschiedenes die Zwischenraume ausfiillen- 
des Mineral auf; in den quarzreichesten Gesteinen kann aber Quarz in 
Feldspat eingeschlossen beobachtet werden. Ab und zu werden in dem- 
selben Feldspatindivid mehrere runde Quarzeinschliisse mit gememein- 
samer Auslischung beobachtet ,quartz vermiculé“, siehe Taf. I, Fig. 2. 

Als accessorische Minerale tritt sehr verbreitet Erz auf, das sich 
seiner Umwandlungsproducte wegen manchesmal als titanhaltiges Eisen- 
erz verrat. Ausserdem wird auch Apatit samt kleinen Zirkonkrystallen 
beobachtet. 

Betreffs der Krystallisationsfolge kann bemerkt werden, dass 
Zirkon als Einschluss in Apatit und beide als Einschluss in Feldspat 
beobachtet worden sind. 

Rhombischer Pyroxen tritt gewodhnlich in unregelmissig begrenz- 
ten Individen auf. Derselbe gehdrt wahrscheinlich zu den am friihesten 
auskrystallisierten Mineralen. Plagioklas tritt in Mikroperthit einge- 
schlossen auf, und Mikroperthit ist als mit Plagioklas perthitisch ver- 
wachsen beohachtet worden. Wie erwahnt, ist gewohnlich Quarz das 
zuletzt ausgeschiedene Mineral, es kommt aber auch in einem friheren 
Stadium ausgeschiedener Quarz vor, namlich als Einschluss im Feldspat. 
Die Krystallisationsfolge ist dann wahrscheinlich: Zirkon, Erz, Apatit, 


6 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


rhombischer Pyroxen und andere Magnesia- und Kalkmagnesia-Minerale, 
Plagioklas und Mikroperthit; diese beiden letzteren teilweise gleichzeitig 
und zuletzt der wesentlichste Teil des Quarzes. 

Zu dem Urgebirge gehérende krystallinische Schiefer hat Scuet in 
dem von ihm bereisten Gebiete nicht vorgefunden. Es scheint jedoch, 
als ob Gneise auftreten, die alter als die angefiihrten Eruptivgesteine 
sind; denn sowohl von Foulke-Fjord als auch von Twin Glacier Valley 
werden Gneisbruchstiicke in den Eruptivgesteinen besprochen. Gneis wird 
auch von Frams-Fjord im Jones-Sund besprochen, der jedoch wahr- 
scheinlich als gedriickter Granit aufzufassen ist. 

Das Eruptionsgebiet scheint also nicht das Alteste ar- 
chaische Urgebirge zu bilden. 

Dass das Gebiet pracambrisch sein sollte, scheint, wie erwahnt von 
ScHEI angenommen gewesen zu sein. (Siehe seine vorliufige Mitteilung.) 
Dasselbe ist gleichfalls von Captain H. W. Fretpen und von pve Rance! 
von der Nares-Expedition angenommen worden. Diese nahmen die 
Moglichkeit an, dass die Gesteine des Ellesmere-Landes dem Laurentian 
angehérten. Sie meinten, dass diese Gesteine von silurischen Forma- 
tionen tiberlagert werden (nach Scuers Beobachtungen sicherlich auch 
von kambrischen), und dass es nérdlich davon langs des Kennedy-Kanals 
und Robeson-Kanals eine Formation giebt, welche sie mit Cape Rawson- 
Beds bezeichneten, die méglicherweise dem Huronian angehéren sollten. 
Es ist nicht ganz denkbar, dass sich Scuei irgend eine begriindete An- 
schauung von dieser zuletzt erwihnten Formation gebildet hatte, denn 
er kam sicherlich mit derselben nicht in Beriithrung. 


I. Das Foulke-Fjord: Gebiet. 


1. Reindeer Point ist die vorspringende Landzunge auf der 
Nordseite des Foulke-Fjords. Das Gestein hier ist Hypersthenquarzdiorit 
und enthalt: 

Plagioklas 

etwas Mikroperthit 
Quarz 

Bronzit und Hypersthen 
dunkelgriine Hornblende 
wenig Biotit 

wenig Apatit und Erz. 


1 Quarterly Jour. of the Geol. Soc. No. 185 1878 pag. 556. 


SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898—1902. No. 22. 


77 


ca % ~ Ba 
hy Consisle § i x ov eel 
3 ound 
cS) cd Cape Washington 
[ee 


North Devon 


Buchanan Bay 
Frar1 1898-99 pod 
m~PimIsle = 


Granitdiorit und zwar haupt- 
sdchlich Quarzdiorit durchgesetzt 
von Granitadern. Im Havnefjord 
Adamellit. 


3 —T 
Se eae Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit. 


Unbekannt, wahrscheinlich Gra- 
nitdiorit 


Cane Clarence 


joaennons 


CajreNorthon Shaw 


Lb 
dy Ans 


1898-1902. No. 22.] | PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. i) 


Neugebildeter Mikropegmatit deutet metamorphische Umwandlung 
an. Das Gestein ist dunkel gefarbt, ziemlich grobkérnig und zeigt 
schwache Kennzeichen von Druck. Die Structur ist eugranitisch kérnig. 

Der Plagioklas ist Oligoklas, gewohnlich mit Zwillingsstreifung 
nach dem Albit-Gesetz, jedoch auch nach dem Periklin-Gesetz; es ist ab 
und zu schwierig, die Zwillingsstreifung zu sehen. Der Plagioklas ist 
wenig umgewandelt, nur teilweise von Epidot und Klorit von gelbgriin- 
licher bis gelbbraéunlicher Farbung durchsetzt. Der Plagioklas ist von 
unregelmassiger Begrenzung. Er greift haufig in die tbrigen Minerale 
mit langen Zungen ein; Leistenform giebt es nicht. 

Mikroperthit scheint auskrystallisiert zu sein, nachdem die Krystal- 
lisation des Plagioklases begonnen hatte. In jedem Falle haben sie teil- 
weise gleichzeitig krystallisiert. Er tritt in ziemlich grossen unregelmis- 
sigen Koérnern auf, steht jedoch dem Plagioklas gegeniber an Menge 
sehr zuriick. Es ist mdglich, dass es auch Orthoklas ohne Perthit- 
structur giebt. 

Quarz tritt in unregelmassigen, teilweise riindlichen, frischen, die 
Zwischenriume in dem Feldspat ausfiillenden Kérnern auf. Ausserdem 
sieht man auch die friher erwahnten, runden Quarzkérner im Feldspat. 

Rhombischer Pyroxen wird in kleinen Kérnern und Partien von 
unregelmissiger Form vorgefunden. Dieser ist sicherlich jiinger als 
Plagioklas, da man denselben bisweilen wie einen Kranz um diesen liegen 
sieht. Es ist meistens Bronzit mit schwachem Pleochroismus: _ ,Hell- 
grinlich—schwach braunrotlich‘, kann aber auch Hypersthen mit kraf- 
tigerem Pleochroismus sein. 

In gewissem Grade ist er umgewandelt. Die Umwandlung hat an 
der Peripherie begonnen und sich in Rissen, die den Bronzit wie ein 
Netz durchfurchen, nach innen verpflanzt. 

Das Umwandlungsprodukt ist mitunter griinblau, sicherlich Klorit, 
besteht aber auch oft aus gelbgriinlichen Faden, die oft mit der Spalt- 
harkeit des Pyroxens parallel laufen und manchmal auch quer tuber die- 
selbe liegen oder auch den Pyroxen wie ein Kranz umgeben. Die 
Faden zeigen bisweilen Pleochroismus, némlich parallel mit der Lings- 
richtung hellgelbgriinlich und senkrecht darauf dunkler gelbgrinlich. 
Diese pleochroitischen, fadenformigen Umwandlungsprodukte nehmen 
ein Zwischenstadium in einer Umwandlung von Pyroxen zu Horn- 
blende ein. 

Die Hornblende ist sicherlich aus Pyroxen entstanden; dieselbe ist 
stark pleochroitisch: ,Hellgelbgriinlich—dunkelgelbgriinlich bis blaulich.“ 
Sie ist oft von Erz, sicherlich titanhaltiges Hisenerz, stark durchsetzt, 


8 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP, FRAM 


was daraus hervorzugehen scheint, dass in derselben kleine Korner vor- 
kommen kénnen, die wahrscheinlich Rutil sind. 

Biotit scheint im Wesentlichen gleichzeitig mit Pyroxen gebildet zu 
sein. Beide diese Minerale werden haufig in kleinen Ansammlungen 
zwischen den hellen Mineralen angetroffen. Der Biotit zeigt kraftigen 
Pleochroismus. Dieser ist gern von kleinen Erzkérnern stark durch- 
setzt, die den Rand des Biotits entlang liegen, andeutend, dass der 
Biotit vielleicht durch Umvandlung des Bronzites gebildet ist. Dieses 
scheint auch mitunter daraus hervorzugehen, dass Biotit der Spaltbarkeit 
des Pyroxens in schmalen Streifen folgt. 

Es giebt tberhaupt nur kleine Mengen dunkler Minerale; Feldspat 
und Quarz sind vollstaindig im Ubergewicht. 

2. Bei Reindeer Point tritt auch ein Gestein auf, das zwischen 
Quarzdiorit und Banatit steht. Wahrscheinlich steht dasselbe dem Banatit 
sehr nahe, indem dasselbe Plagioklas, Mikroperthit, beide in ganz grosser 
Menge, Quarz, Biotit und diopsidartigen Pyroxen enthalt. Dasselbe ist 
etwas heller als der Quarzdiorit. 

3. Als jiingstes Gestein treten hellrétliche aplitische Ginge aul, 
die teilweise aus mikroperthitischem Mikroklin, etwas mikroperthitischem 
Orthoklas, Oligoklas, Quarz und ganz wenig Biotit bestehen. Die Mine- 
rale sind etwas gedriickt. Diese Gange durchsetzen die oben angegebenen 
Gesteine bei Reindeer Point. Sie haben ein ‘ihnliches Aussehen wie die 
entsprechenden Giange von Buchanan-Bay. 

Es scheint also, als ob die Eruptionen dieser Gegenden nach stei- 
gender Aciditat vor sich gegangen sind, ein Umstand, woftir wir auch 
von Buchanan-Bay und Jones-Sund ein Beispiel sehen werden. 

4. Uber die Terrasse, Etah. 

Das Gestein hier ist Gabbro, der aus einer eugranitisch kérnigen 
Mischung von Labrador, farblosem bis schwach grinlichem, diopsidarti- 
gem Pyroxen, Biotit und etwas Kies besteht. Dieser ist feinkérnig, 
dunkel, schwer und etwas gedriickt, sonst aber wenig umgewandelt. 
Die Minerale scheinen einer Lingsrichtung nach geordnet zu sein. Leisten- 
formiges Auftreten von Labrador ist teilweise hervortretend. 

In seinem Tagebiichern hat Schei notiert, dass bei der Terrasse am 
Etah gestreifter Gneis ansteht. 

Es ist nicht ausgeschlossen, dass dieser Gneis alter als die beschrie- 
benen Eruptivgesteine ist, weil ein ahnlicher Altersunterschied am Twin 
Glacier Valley im Alexandra Fjord nachgewiesen ist, wortiber auf Seite 
13 mehr gesagt werden wird. 


1898— 1902, No.22.] | PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 9 


If. Das Buchanan-Bay-Gebiet. 


In diesem Gebiet sind die Verhiltnisse mit denen von Foulke-Fjord- 
Gebiet analog. 
Fram lag im Winter 1898—99 im Framshavn, namlich die Bucht 
am Framglacier in der Ricestrait im Quartier, wodurch Scuer die Ge- 
genden auf beiden Seiten der Ricestrait untersuchen konnte, und Pim 
Isle mit den verhaltnismassig niedrigen Héhen bis zu 500 Meter scheint 
zu Studienzwecken besonders gut geeignet gewesen zu sein. Diese Insel 
war sicherlich fiir geologische Studien ganz aufklarend und ihr Bau wird 


Bue i F 
Saateglacie2 qd y 
Saata 
Teezdal 
glacier 
= lps 
Framgltacwcd 
= 
3 
va) 
an 
S 
2 
e 
lef fectgtacie: ef 


daher so genau, wie es das Material und die aufbewahrten Noticen zu- 
lassen, beschrieben werden. 

Pim Isle ist ca. 13 km. lang und 7 km. breit und liegt unterhalb 
der Schneegrenze. 

Kjéthaugen am Nordostpoint, Pim Isle. 

Auf Kjéthaugen tritt Hypersthenquarzdiorit auf, der aus Plagioklas, 
Spuren von ungestreiftem Feldspat, wahrscheinlich Orthoklas, Quarz, 
Bronzit und Hypersthen, Biotit und accessorischem Apatit, Erz und Zir- 
kon besteht. Derselbe ist grau gefirbt, nicht ganz so dunkel als Hyper- 
sthenquarzdiorit von Reindeer Point, jedoch ist die Structur in beiden 
Gesteinen ganz dieselbe und die auftretenden Minerale haben denselben 
Character. Eine der mitgebrachten Proben ist etwas porphyrisch und 


10 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


giebt den Eindruck, etwas mehr basisch als das Haupgestein selbst 
zu sein. 

Zusammen mit diesem Quarzdiorit tritt gangformiger und schlieren- 
formiger Granit auf, der aus einer eugranitisch kérnigen Mischung von 
mikroperthitischem Orthoklas, etwas mikroperthitischem Mikroklin, etwas 
Plagioklas, Quarz, etwas Biotit und accessorischem Zirkon besteht. Die 
Perthitstructur ist bisweilen so fein, dass man sie kaum sehen kann. 
Der Plasioklas ist sauer, Zwillingsstreifung ist nicht immer leicht zu 
sehen. Eigentiimlich ist ein Umstand, der sich ab und zu zeigt, namlich 
Einschliisse im Plagioklas von bruchstickartigen, kurzen Streifen von 
Mikro- oder Krypto-Perthit. Es kann in einem Plagioklasindivid eine 
ganz grosse Anzahl solcher Einschliisse auftreten, welche meistens mit 
ihrer langsten Ausstreckung parallel mit der Zwillingsstreifung und den 
perthitischen Streifen senkrecht auf derselben liegen. Die Auslischung 
ist im Allgemeinen fir alle Einschlisse innerhalb desselben Plagioklas- 
individs gemeinsam. Man bekommt den Eindruck, dass diese Ein- 
schliisse als Ausscheidungen im Plagioklas aufgefasst werden miissen, 
nachdem derselbe krystallisiert war, und dass die Perthitstreifen in 
einem noch spateren Stadium ausgeschieden sind. 

Die Mineralkérner liegen mit einer héchst unregelmassigen Begrenz- 
ung an einander. Biotit giebt ‘es in kleinen Blattern in sparsamer 
Menge und bildet zusammen mit etwas Klorit und Erz die einzigen 
dunklen Minerale. Der Granit ist ziemlich grobkérnig und von rétlicher 
Farbe. Ausserdem treten in den sauren Gingen Schlieren von Plagioklas- 
gesteinen mit etwas Alkalifeldspat auf, welche sich also den Banatiten 
nahern. 

Diese Gesteine zeigen einige Zeichen von Druck, und zwar ist undu- 
lése Ausléschung haufig und beim Granit tritt neugebildeter Mikro- 
pegmatit rund um die Feldspatindivide auf. Makroskopisch sind die 
beiden Gesteine, der helle Granit und der dunkle Quarzdiorit, am meisten 
in die Augen fallend. Diese sind wahrscheinlich von beinahe demselben 
Alter. Dieses scheint aus verschiedenen Griinden hervorzugehen. 

Ahnliche Gesteine, von Suet als ,,das helle“ und respective ,,das 
dunkle Gestein“ genannt, findet man namlich, wie wir spater sehen 
werden, tber grosse Strecken zusammen auftretend und vollstandig mit 
einander verflochten, wieder, dass es oft schwer abzumachen ist, ob 
das Helle oder das Dunkle im Ubergewicht ist. An einzelnen Stellen 
kann beobachtet werden, wie das Helle, das Dunkle durchsetzt, an anderen 
Stellen ist jedoch das entgegengesetzte der Fall. Das eine Gestein 
durchsetzt das andere entweder in feinen Adern oder in grésseren Par- 


‘Ss a 


‘a[sp Wig ‘uasueyjoly “puezjesyoinp qorpytuRig Usp “sure ques.oy 


1898—1902. No. 22.] PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE, 11 


tien. Auf Kjéthaugen scheint hervorzugehen, dass der helle Granit 
elwas jinger als der dunkle Quarzdiorit ist. Zuerst bekommt man 
von den Photographien von dort, Seite 4 und 10, den Eindruck, dass der 
Granit den Quarzdiorit durchsetzt. Ein an derselben Stelle auftretender Ker- 
santitgang scheint das Altersverhaltnis abzumachen. Scuet hat namlich in 
seinem Tagebuch notiert, dass dieser Kersantitgang sowohl den Quarz- 
diorit als auch einen Teil der eingeflochtenen Granitadern durchsetzt; 
ihnliche Granitadern durchflechten aber auch den Kersantitgang so, dass 
die Adern parallel mit der Langsrichtung desselben laufen, wodurch der 
Kersantit an einzelnen Stellen ein schlierenformiges, gneisartiges Aus- 
sehen erhalt. Es scheint natiirlich zu sein anzunehmen, dass die Erup- 
tion des Granites stattfand, bevor noch der Quarzdiorit ganz ersteift war, 
und dass der Kersantitgang das ersteifende noch warme Gestein unter 
der letzten Entwickelungsstufe der Eruption des Granites durchsetzte. 


Das Gestein des Kersantitganges enthilt: 
Basischen Plagioklas 
etwas Mikroklin und Orthoklas 
— Kvarts 
viel Biotit 
Klorit 
Evz 
Apatit. 


Das Gestein ist sehr feinkérnig mit dunkler, etwas braunlicher Farbe. 
Die Structur ist keine ordinare Kersantitstructur, nicht Rosenbusches 
panidiomorphe, indem weder Glimmer noch Feldspat gréssere Andeutung 
von idiomorpher Begrenzung zeigt, eher aber die allotriomorphkérnige, 
die characteristisch fiir krystallinische Schiefer ist; und das Gestein ist 
fir soweit von typischen Kersantiten wesentlich abweichend, stimmt aber 
in der Mineralzusammensetzung und in chemischer Zusammensetzung 
mit diesen uberein. 


Cape Sabina, Pim Isle. 
Die von dort mitgebrachten Proben von 
1. Bronzitquarzdiorit bestehen aus: 


basischem Plagioklas 
etwas Quarz 

Bronzit 

monoklinem Pyroxen 
dunkelgriner Hornblende 
etwas Biolit. 


12 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


accessorischem Zirkon 
Erz und Apatit 
Dieses Gestein ist mehr basisch als die friiher beschriebenen Quarz- 

diorite. Der Plagioklas ist Labrador. Dessen Zwillingsstreifung ist aus- 
gepragter und die Begrenzung mehr idiomorph. Quarz ist zuriickgetreten, 
und es tritt monokliner Pyroxen in kleinen, ziemlich frischen Kornern 
auf. Die Hornblende ist stark pleochroitisch (dunkelgriin und hellgelb- 
griinlich). Dieses ist ein ziemlich schweres, dunkles, etwas griinliches 
Gestein. Die vorliegenden Proben von 


2. Quarzdiorit bestehen aus: 
Plagioklas 
Quarz 
etwas Biotit 
ausserdem etwas Erz, Apatit und Zirkon. 
Der Feldspat giebt dem Gestein eine hellrétliche Farbe. 
Ahnliche Gesteine wie auf Pim Isle treten auf der Westseite von 
Ricestrait auf und auch dort einander durchflechtend. 


Cape Rutherford. 

Dieses ist das Kap noérdlich von Rutherford-Bay. Auf der ausser- 
sten Landzunge kommt ein ahnliches, dunkles Gestein wie auf Pim Isle 
vor. Unter dem Mikroskop zeigt sich dasselbe als ein Norit, der quarz- 
frei ist und basischen Plagioklas enthalt. . 

Dasselbe besteht aus: 

Labrador 

Bronzit 

monoklinem Pyroxen 
Biotit 

dunkler Hornblende 
Erz 

Apatit 

Zirkon. 

Dieses Gestein gleicht dem Bronzitquarzdiorit No. 1 vom Cape Sabina. 
Dasselbe ist jedoch mehr basisch und enthalt dunklere Minerale. Das- 
selbe ist von schlierigen Adern durchsetzt, die aus porphyrischem Plagio- 
klas und Quarz in einer feinkérnigen Masse von Plagioklas, Quarz, 
Biotit und accessorischem Erz und Zirkon bestehen. 

Auf Cape Rutherford war nach Scuer der Norit oft von Granit- 


gingen durchsetzt, die teilweise als Pegmatit und als Schriftgranit 
auftraten. 


1898-1902. No. 22.) PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE, 13 


Langer westeinwiirtz gegen den Alexandra-Fjord traten auch ahn- 
liche, dunkle Gesteine von Granit durchsetzt, der hier das Haupt- 
gestein war, auf. 
Twin Glacier Valley zwischen Cape Rutherford und Alexandra- 
Fjord. 
Auf dieser Strecke landeinwarts scheint mit Bestimmtheit angenom- 
men werden zu kénnen, dass die genannten Eruplivgesteine Gneis- 
gesteine durchbrochen haben; denn dieselben schliesen teilweise machtige 
Gneisschollen ein, die haufig parallel mit dem Schiefrigkeit von Adern 
vollstandig durchsetzt sind, die teils aus dem dunklen Norit und teils 
aus dem hellen Granit bestehen. 
Aus den mitgebrachten Proben scheint hervorzugehen, dass dort in 
der Nahe dieser Gneisschollen interessante Grenzfaciesbildungen auftreten. 
Das Hauptgestein in Twin Glacier Valley ist hornblendehaltiger 
Bronzitquarediorit. Von den erwahnten Faciesbildungen in der Nahe 
der Gneisschollen kann bemerkt werden: 
1. Ein etwas schiefriger, feinkérniger Quarznorit, bestehend aus: 
Basischem Plagioklas 
Quarz 
Bronzit und teilweise Hypersthen 
Biotit 
Erz. 

2. Ein feinkérniger Gabbro, bestehend aus: 
Plagioklas 
einem umgewandelten Pyroxenmineral 
Biotit, der voll von Rutilinterpositionen ist 
Erz und Apatit. 

In diesen Faciesbildungen treten teilweise sehr dunkle Minerale wie 
Biotit, Hornblende, rhombischer Pyroxen, samt Erz und Zirkon auf. 
Rutil tritt als Interposition in Form von Nadeln auf, die einander mit 
einem Winkel von 60° schneiden. 

Auf Inderoen, Ricestrait, giebt es Hypersthenquarzdiorit. Von 
dem Innern des Hayes-Fjord hat Scuer notiert, dass dort ein dunkles 
Gestein auftritt. Noch weiter fjordeinwarts hat er notiert, dass wieder 
schlierige, helle und dunkle Gesteine mit Gneisbruchstiicken, vollstandig 
den Gesteinen von Pim Isle ahnlich, vorgefunden werden. 

An der Nordseite von Hayes-Fjord stehen die massiven Gesteine 
lief unten, in den Hohen (Ekeberg) dagegen jiingere sedimentere For- 
mationen. 


14 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Kjéd-Fjord (Beitstad-Fjord). 

Auf der Nordseite tritt dunkler Bronzitquarzdiorit auf, der innen 
entlang von jiingeren Formationen tberlagert ist. Die Eruptive hier 
schliessen Schollen von Gneisgesteinen ein. 

Cape Camperdown. 

Hier zeigen sich wieder Eruptivgesteine. Diese bestehen aus eigen- 
tiimlichem, grobkérnigen, dunkelgefarbten Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit. 
Feldspat, Quarz, Hornblende und Hypersthen kann man makroskopisch 
beobachten. Unter dem Mikroskop zeigt sich derselbe bestehend aus: 

. mikroperthitischem Orthoklas 
etvas mikropertitischem Mikrolin 
Plagioklas 
Quarz 
dunkelgrauer Hornblende 
Hypersthen 
Biotit 
accessorisch in grosser Menge Apatit, Zirkon und Erz 
sekundarem Kalkspat in Rissen 
etwas Mikropegmatit. 

Der Mikroperthit ist sehr htbsch und gut entwickelt. Derselbe 
kann sich an einzelnen Schnitten dem Kryptoperthit nahernd beobachtet 
werden. Der vesentlichste Teil des Feldspates ist mikroperthitischer 
Orthoklas; Mikroklin ist viel seltener. Der Plagioklas hat tiberhaupt 
kleine Ausléschungswinkel und ist also ziemlich sauer. Derselbe findet 
sich in teilweise grossen Kornern mit vorziglich entwickelter Zwillings- 
streifung nach dem Albitgesetz vor, seltener nach dem Periklingesetz. 
Teilweise kann der Plagioklas in Mikroperthit eingeschlossen angetroffen 
werden. 

Quarz muss in einem verhaltnismiissig zeitigem Stadium ausgeschie- 
den sein, denn man findet denselben sehr haufig in Mikroperthit ein- 
geschlossen, dagegen aber nicht in Plagioklas; kleine runde Quarzkérner 
liegen wie blinkende Wassertropfen im Feldspat. Ringsum diese Kér- 
ner hat der Feldspat oft undulése Ausléschung. Oft haben mehrere 
Quarzkérner gemeinschaftliche Auslischung. Siehe Taf. I fig. 2. 

Der Hypersthen liegt meistens in langen unregelmassigen Streifen 
ringsum die Feldspat- und Quarz-Koérner. Dieser ist verhaltnismassig 
stark pleochroitisch, doch ist derselbe besonders zu einem rotbraunen 
Produkte sehr umgewandelt. Es ist wahrscheinlich, dass die Hornblende 
aus dem Pyroxen erstanden ist, da diese in Ahnlichen, langen, gebuch- 
teten Streifen liegt, und oft Reste von Pyroxen umschliesst. Der Pyr- 


1898-1902. No. 22] © PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE, 15 


oxen ist von einem griinblauen Rand von Hornblende oft umgeben. 
Ferner scheint es, als ob die genannten rotbraunlichen Umwandlungs- 
produkte von Pyroxen teilweise den Character der Hornblende haben. 
Sehr haufig umschliesst die Hornblende Erz. Dieselbe tritt in grésseren 
Mengen als Pyroxen auf. Sie ist stark pleochroitisch (dunkelgriin, 
schwach braunlich — heller griingelb, schwach bréunlich) und hat ca. 
7° Ausléschungsschiefe. Die Structur, die eugranitisch kérnig ist, geht 
aus Taf. I fig. 2, hervor.. Uber die chemische Zusammensetzung siehe 
Seite 18. 

Die Gesteine am Buchanan-Bay und Foulke-Fjord sind verhaltnis- 
massig wenig gedriickt. In den Dinnschliffen ist jedoch zu sehen, dass 
undulése Ausléschung allgemein ist, irgend welche besonders starke mit 
Mortelstructurbildung ist aber selten. 


If. Das Jones-Sund-Gebiet. 


Fram passierte die ganze Ostktiste des Ellesmere-Landes ohne an- 
zulaufen, dass also Scuer zwischen Bairds-Fjord und Glacier-Sund keine 
Beobachtungen angestellt hat. Doch scheint er die Anschauung genahrt 
zu haben, dass diese ganze genannte Strecke von ungefahr derselben 
geologischen Beschaffenheit wie die oben beschriebenen Gegenden von 
Smiths-Sund ist. Die Wahrscheinlichkeit hierfir scheint auch durch 
Untersuchung der mitgebrachten Proben von den Gegenden zwischen 
Frams-Fjord und Havne-Fjord bekraftigt zu werden, indem sie sich als 
teilweise helle, etwas rétliche Granite, teilweise als mehr basische Ge- 
steine zeigen. Die Granite haben dieselbe Zusammensetzung wie die 
von dem nordlicheren Gebiet bei Smiths-Sund, namlich teilweise ver- 
haltnismassig grobkérnige Gesteine mit iberwiegend mikroperthitischem 
Orthoklas (Kjéthaugen), teilweise Aplite mit tberwiegendem Mikroklin 
(Reindeer Pt.), wahrend die mehr basischen Gesteine nicht so basisch 
wie die entsprechenden bei Smiths-Sund sind, indem sie mehr Alka- 
lien und Kieselsiure und weniger Kalk, Magnesia und EKisenoxyde ent- 
halten. 

Unter dem Mikroskop zeigen die erwahnten mehr basischen Ge- 
steine, dass sie bedeutende Mengen Alkalifeldspat, namlich mikroperthi- 
tischen Orthoklas und Mikroklin samt viel Quarz und ziemlich viel 
Plagioklas, etwas Bronzit, ab und 2u etwas Hornblende und Biotit und 
accessorisches Erz und Zirkon enthalten. Die Structur ist wie bei den 
Quarzdioriten am Reindeer Pt. Analyse No. V, Seite 18, Hayne-Fjord 
verglichen mit No. II vom Reindeer Pt. zeigt diese Verhiltnisse. 


16 CARL BUGGE. ' [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Dieser Bronzit hat schwacheren Pleochroismus als der Bronzit in 
den Quarzdioriten am Smiths-Sund; Hypersthen ist selten. Der Bronzit 
ist stark timgewandelt und von &hnlichen Fasern wie bei den Quarz- 
dioriten (Seite 7) durchsetzt, doch sind die Fasern gelblicher und zeigen 
Pleochroismus: ,,Hellgelb — dunkler gelbbraunlich.“ Es scheint, als ob 
der Bronzit wesentlich in Biotit und teilweise in Klorit umgewandelt ist. 
Diese Umwandlung ist das Resultat einer Wechselwirkung zwischen 
Erz, Bronzit und Feldspat. Es ist ganz gewoéhnlich, einen Kranz eines 
dem Biotit ahnlichen Minerales ringsum das Erz, bisweilen zusammen 
mit Titanomorphit zu sehen. Hornblende scheint in diesen alkalireiche- 
ren Gesteinen seltener zu sein. 

Der Plagioklas in diesen mehr basischen Gesteinen am Jones-Sund 
ist Oligoklas mit Zwillingsstreifung nach dem Albitgesetz, seltener auch 
nach dem Periklingesetz. 

Die Perthitstruktur des Alkalifeldspates ist meistens sehr deutlich, 
doch sind die Albitstreifen ab und zu sehr diinn, jedoch ohne dass die 
Structur kryptoperthitisch genannt werden kann. Die Gitterstructur des 
Mikrolins ist oft so fein, dass eine starke Vergrésserung notwendig ist, 
um dieselbe deutlich zu sehen. 

Der Quarz tritt in so grossen Mengen auf, dass andere Verfasser 
dieses Gestein wahrscheinlich als einen Granit bezeichnen wirden, woftr 
auch der hohe Kieselsiuregehalt spricht, der in dem analysierten Gestein 
71,85 °/, betrug. Es scheint jedoch, als ob dies nicht so ganz berechtigt 
sei, da der Alkaligehalt bei Graniten selten so gering ist und der Kalk- 
gehalt im Allgemeinen nicht so hoch. Es scheint mir mehr berechtigt 
zu sein, dieses Gestein Adamellit zu nennen. Gewiss ist der Kalkgehalt 
etwas niedriger als dies der Fall bei den Gesteinen ist, die Professor 
Broccer ,,Adamellit* genannt hat, und das analysierte Gestein liegt in 
Wirklichkeit zwischen Adamellit und Granit. Rosenpuscy wiirde diese 
Gesteine wahrscheinlich zu der Charnockitreihe zéhlen. Da die mikro- 
skopische Untersuchung indessen das Vorhandensein von verhiltnis- 
missig vielem Plagioklas erweist, und da die chemische Zusammensetz- 
ung als den Adamelliten naher legend erachtet werden muss als den 
Graniten, will ich dieses Gestein Adamellit nennen, und des character- 
istischen Bronzitgehaltes wegen Bronzitadamellit. Einzelne dieser mit- 
gebrachten Proben enthielten mehr Plagioklas und miissen als mehr 
typische Adamellite bezeichnet werden. Der Gehalt von dunklen Mine- 
ralen war in diesen etwas grosser. 

Es fanden sich auch Proben mit etwas weniger Quarzgehalt vor, 
welche den Adamelliten nahe stehen. Dagegen fanden sich zwischen 


oe * 


1898—1902. No, 22.| PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 17 


den mitgebrachten Proben von dem Gelainde bei Jones Sund beinahe 
keine Gesteine, die als Quarzdiorite oder Diorite bezeichnet werden kén- 
nen; dazu war die Alkalifeldspatmenge zu gross. Nur eine Probe, nam- 
lich die von Cone Island, muss als Quarzdiorit bezeichnet werden. 

Doch darf ich dies hiermit nicht fiir abgemacht ansehen, dass am: 
Jones-Sund nicht sogar noch verhaltnismassig viel Quarzdiorit und 
Diorit wiirde gefunden werden kénnen, indem sich in Scuei’s Tage- 
bichern keine vollstandigen Auskiinfte dies beziiglich vorfinden. Es sieht 
nur aus ziemlich sicher zu sein, dass der Alkaligehalt durchschnittlich 
hoher in der siidlicheren als in der nérdlicheren Gegend ist. Tektonisch 
scheint auch einiger Unterschied vorzuliegen, indem die Gesteine von 
Jones-Sund ziemlich stark gedriickt sind. Einige haben ein gneisahnliches 
Aussehen wie ein Augengranit auf Cone-Island und bei Frams-Fjord. 
Die Feldspat- und Quarzkérner sind stark zerquetscht. Mortelstructur 
ist sehr haufig, indem einzelne Mineralkérner in einer durch Zermalm- 
ung von Feldspat und Quarz gebildeten feinkérnigen Masse liegen. Sehr 
haufig wird auch neugebildeter Mikropegmatit gesehen, besonders in der 
zerquetschten Masse um gréssere Feldspat- und Quarzkorner herum. 
Undulése Ausléschung ist auch ein sehr allgemeines Phanomen. In 
dieser Verbindung ist es auch von Interesse darauf aufzupassen, dass 
Diabasginge am Jones-Sund in bedeutender Anzahl auftreten. Die Auf- 
schliisse, die von Scuer’s Tagebiichern tiber gegenseitiges Auftreten und 
Verhiltnis dieser Gesteine eingeholt werden kénnen, sind wenige. Soviel 
scheint jedoch daraus hervorzugehen, dass der helle bis rétliche Granit 
das mehr basische Gestein, den Bronzitadamellit, durchsetzt. 

An der Smidje-Bugt, Havnen, Havnefjord, sollen nimlich laut 
Notizen ,aplitische Granitginge das Urgebirge durchsetzen“. 

Die Stellen, von wo Proben von Bronzitadamellit mitgebracht sind, 
sind: Havnen (Hafen), Havne-Fjord, wo Fram im zweiten Winter- 
quartier lag; Skreia, Vestre-Sund, Havne-Fjord; Cone Island, von wo 
auch Hypersthenquarzdiorit. 


Chemische Zusammensetzung. 


Scuer hat von den oben besprochenen Gesteinen teils von den 
Gegenden auf beiden Seiten des Smith’s-Sundes teils von der Gegend 
am Jones-Sund folgende Analysen ausgefiihrt: 


iss) 


18 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


I I Il IV Vv VI 

SiO, .... 52,75 63,22 65,13 57,92 71,85 70,44 
THOS. 6. ei 0,74 1,12 9,13 0,58 0,32 
AlsO3 | 98 63 17,46 15.50 16,71 15,25 14,69 
Fe.03 | ; 1,35 177 4,08 1,04 1,45 
FeO..... 3,40 4,17 4,26 2,56 1,17 
MnO.... 0,18 Spur 0,13 Spur 

MgO .... 4,80 9,05 0,54 1,70 0,63 0,74 
CaO ncoa ce a 7,86 4,91 3,98 3,86 9,46 1,43 
Na,O.... 4,93 5,12 2,70 3,68 3,18 3,66 
KsO) 2 aw es 1,80 1,31 4,53 3,50 3,04 4,61 
H,0..... 0,41 0,60 0,26 1,19 0,17 1,14 
P20;..... 0,09 0,07 0,06 0,16 Spur 

FeS. .... (1,50) 0,44. 0,62 0,64 


| | 100,67! 10038! 99,96 | 100,76 | 99,65 


'L ist Norit, Cape Rutherford Buchanan Bay. 
II ist Hypersthenquarzdiont, Reindeer Point, Foulke Fj. 
III ist Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit, Cape Camperdown Bache Pens. 
IV ist ein Kersantitgang, Kjothaugen, Pim Isle, Rice Strait. 
V ist Hypersthenadamellit, Havnen, Havnefjord Jones-Sund. 
VI ist Granitaplit, Nordostpoint, Pim Isle Rice Strait. 


Die Analysen J, II, IIT und V von den Tiefgesteinen in der Tabelle 
zeigen, dass diese eine Serie von verhaltnismassig basi- 
schen Gesteinen, Norite, durch intermediadre Gesteine, hier 
als Bronzit- (oder Hypersthen-)Quarzdiorite und Banatite 
bezeichnet, samt Hypersthenquarzsyenite. bis zu saueren 
granitischen Gesteinen, hier als Bronzit- (oder Hyper- 
sthen-)Adamellite bezeichnet, bilden. Characteristisch fir 
diese ist ein mehr oder minder hervortretender Gehalt von rhomb- 
ischem Pyroxen (Bronzit oder Hypersthen) und bei den mittelsauren 
und sauren Gliedern ein geringerer oder grisserer Gehalt eines eigen- 
artigen Mikroperthites. In chemischer Hinsicht ist es characteristisch, 
dass der Tonerdegehalt innerhalb der ganzen Serie wenig  variiert 
und dementsprechend auch die Summe der Alkalien und des Kalkes 
bei den basischen Gliedern nicht viel grésser ist als bei den sauren; 
der Natrongehalt ist noch hdher oder ebenso hoch hei den_basi- 
schen Gliedern wie bei den sauren, der Kaligehalt stark abnehmend 
bei den basischen Gliedern, wiahrend umgekehrt der Kalkgehalt bei 
diesen hdher ist, jedoch aber auch verhaltnismassig hoch bei den sauren. 


1898-1902. No. 22.] PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE, 19 


Gliedern. Der Gehalt an Eisenoxyden ist auch meistens bei den sauren 
ungefahr ebenso hoch wie bei den basischen Gliedern. 

Diese eigentiimliche Serie ist schon lange von Norwegen bekannt, 
von wo dieselbe némlich von J. H. L. Voer! und spiiter ausfihrlich 
von C. F. KotpErup? von dessen grossem, stidwestlichen Gebiete dem 
Ekersund-Soggendals-Feld, siidésthch von Jideren, beschrieben 
ist. Ein anderes, grosses Gebiet ist von Tu. H. Hottanp von der 
Prasidentschaft Madras und von T. L. Waker von Katananprt in Ost 
Indien® beschrieben. Ausserdem sind hierher gehérende Gesteine von 
Loon Lake in Adirondacks (von H. P. Cusine) und von Diana, New 
York, von C. H. SMytx jr, sowie von Canada beschrieben. Ganz kirz- 
lich ist dieselbe Serie noch weiter von der Elfenbeinktste in Afrika 
von A. Lacrorx? beschrieben. Im Ekersund—Soggendals-Felde sowohl 
wie in Indien und Canada ist diese Gesteinserie, die von RosENBUSCH 
als die ,Charnockitserie* bezeichnet ist, an das Vorkommen von 
Feldern von Labradorstein (Anortosit) geknipft. Rosenpuscu hat daher 
kirzlich® angedeutet, dass diese Gesteinreihe mit Anortosit-Hypersthen- 
granit (Charnockit) als Endglieder als eine dritte Hauptreihe der Tief- 
gesteine (Magmen), beigeordnet mit seiner Alkalireihe und seiner Kalk- 
alkalireihe, anzusehen sein sollten. 

Von Ellesmere-Land sind bisher Felder von Anortosit ebenso wenig 
bekannt wie von dem von Lacrorx beschriebenen Gebiete an der 
Elfenbeinkiiste in Afrika. Die Endglieder der Tiefgesteine dieser Serie 
sind hier Norit und Charnockit (Hypersthengranit). 


I I Ill IV 
Si0g.....| 5275 | 5850 | 71,85 | 71,80 
TOG» pcan A 9,95 0,58 0,26 
AlsOe e490 aggg | 1220) 1525 | 14,90 
Besa cores ; 5,40 1,04 1,10 
a ee 6,98 2,56 1,08 
MnO..... 0,18 - = ne 


1 Geol. Féren. i Stockholm, Férhandl. B. XLII, 1891, S. 489-505. 

2 Die Labradorfelsen d. westlich. Norwegens, Bergens Museum, Jahrbuch 1896. 

3 Journ. of the Asiatic Soc. of Bengal LXII, part II, No. 3, 1893, und spiiter 
ausfiihrlicher im Mem. of the Geol. Surv. of India XXVII, 2; (1900) samt 
XXXIU, 3; (1902). 

4 Compt. rend. t. 150, p. 18. (1910). 

Elemente d. Gesteinslehre 3te Ausg. (1910) p. 230. 


on 


20 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 
I Il ll IV 
Transport 

MgO..... 4,80 4,95 0,63 0,39 
CHO ya gins 7,86 5,60 2,46 2,20 
NasO..... 4,93 4,35 3,18 4,17 
TO «we %s 1,80 0,95 3,04 4,11 
BO 4 asa’ 0.41 0,50 = 0,60 
FiOe Geass 0,09 0,09 = = 
(FeSs) (1,50) 

| 99,72 | 100,59 , 100,61 


In obiger Tabelle sind des Vergleiches wegen von den Endglie- 
dern der Charnockitserie auf Ellesmere-Land (nach Scuer) und von der 
Elfenbeinktiste (nach Lacrorx) Analysen aufgefiihrt. I ist Norit von 
Buchanan-Bay, Ellesmere-Land; II Norit von der Grotte auf Mont Momy, 
Elfenbeinktste; III ist Hypersthenadamellit (Charnockit) von Havne- 
Fjord, Ellesmere-Land; 1V Hypersthengranit (Charnockit) von Mont Zan 
nahe Zagoné, Elfenbeinkiiste. 
ist, wie man sieht, sehr gross. 


Die Ahnlichkeit in der Zusammensetzung 


Was die dazwischenliegenden Typen betrifft, so giebt es 
Analogien zu deren chemischer Zusammensetzung sowohl zwischen den 
Gesteinen, die innerhalb der Felder der Norit-Charnockitserie auftreten, 
wie zwischen Gesteinen, die als ,Syenite“ oder Granite, (Banatite) u. s. w. 
angefuhrt werden, wie aus folgender Tabelle ersichtlich ist: 


I Ul I IV v VI 
Sid. ....| 65,13 | 6435 | 65.65 | 6587 | 64,34 | 64,62 
Ti0r ....| 4,12 = - 043 0,53 | 0,84 
A103 1550 | 1546 | 1684 | 1488) 15.72 | 16,46 
Fe.03 1,77 1,77 1,62 1,82 
FeO <p ans 4,17 \ ca | ie 3,11 294 | 14 
MnO = 2 = = 0,12 0,12 
MgO 0,54 | 0,50 0,13 9,93 2,17 1,10 
Geis cisses 3,98 358 | 947 461 494 | 9,39 
NaxO 2,70 3,28 5,27 212 | 976 | 4,57 
Oe uae, 453 | 354 5,04 4,29 404 | 5,21 
ee ere 0,26 io 0,30 | 0,88 1,01 0,52 
P205 - 014 | O21 
FeS: ....| 0,62 | (1,68) EZ 0,19 
100,32 | 9984 | 99,71 | 100,77 | 99,63 | 100,19 


1 TiO: + ZrO2 + H20. 


1898—1902. No. 22.] PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE, 24 


T ist Scuer’s ,,Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit* von C. Camperdown, FElles- 
mere-Land. . 

II ist Korperur’s , Hornblendebanatit“ yon Dypvik bei Farsund. 

III ist sogenannter ,,Hypersthengranit® von Diana, New-York, von 
C. H. Smytu jr. beschrieben. 

IV ist ,Syenit* von Wachberg, Droschkan, Schlesien, von H. Frank 
beschrieben, (Neu. Jahrb. 1890, J, p. 218). 

V ist sogenannter ,Buttegranit“, ein Hornblendebanatit von Atlantia 
Mine, Butte, Montana, analysiert von H. N. Sroxes, (Bull. No. 168. 
U.S, G. S. p. 117; 1900), 

VI ist sogenannter_,, Windsorit*, ein hypidiomorphkirniges Ganggestein 
in basischem _,,Biotit-Augit-Hornblende-Diorit* in Ascutney Moun- 
tain, Vermont, von R. A. Daty beschrieben (Bull. of the U. S. G. 
Surv. No. 209 p. 45 (1903) 1. 

Von diesen Gesteinen sind No. I und No. HI Hypersthengesteine, 
wihrend No. II, der in geologischer Verbindung mit Hypersthengesteinen 
auftritt, selbst ein ,,Hornblendebanatit* ist; chemisch stehen jedoch No. II 
und No. III entfernter von dem Hypersthengestein von C. Camperdown, 
als dies der Fall mit No. IV und V ist, wovon No. IV zu den schlesi- 
schen Syeniten gehdért, die z. B. von Rosensuscu zu den typischen Horn- 
blendesyeniten der Plauen-Type (Alkalikalksyenite) gerechnet werden, 
welche, soweit bekannt ist, geologisch zusammen mit Hypersthen- 
Gesteinen von der Norit-Charnockitreihe auftreten. No. VJ, der ,,Wind- 
sorit“ ist, wie zu ersehen ist, in seiner Zusammensetzung dem Hyper- 
sthengranit von Diana, N. Y. ausserordentlich nahestehend, enthalt aber 
doch keinen Hypersthen, aber hauptsachlich nur Biotit und Spuren von 
Pyroxen und Hornblende neben Feldspate und Quarz. Das basische 
Gestein, das den Hauptbestand in Ascutney-Mountain bildet und womit 
der Windsorit genetisch zusammengehérend ist, wird von RosENBUscH 
(Mikr. Physiogr. d. mass. Gesteine, 4te Aufl., 1907, II, 1, p. 399) als zu 
der ,,Essexitfamilie* gehérend bezeichnet, wenn auch irgend welche un- 
gewohnlichen Glieder derselben reprasentierend. Wie man sieht, ist die 
chemische Zusammensetzung des Windsorites indessen so gut als mit 
der Zusammensetzung des von Rosensuscu als ,Hypersthengranit* an- 
gefihrten und als ein mittleres Glied der Charnockitserie aufgefassten 
Gesteines von Diana, New York, identisch (ibid. p. 70). Der Windsorit 
enthalt indessen keinen Hypersthen, besteht aber aus Plagioklas mit 
Orthoklas und Mikroperthit samt Quarz, und als herrschendes, dunkles 


1 Siehe auch F. Liéwrnson-Lessine, Petr. Unters. im Centr. Kaukasus, Verh. d. k. 
Russ. Min. Ges. B. XLII p. 248 (1905). 


99 CARL BUGGE. SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Mineral aus Biolit mit ganz untergeordnetem Diopsid und Hornblende. 
Diese Verhiltnisse scheinen zu zeigen, dass die Gesteine der Charnockit- 
reihe teils mit den Gabbrogesteinen (und in saueren Gliedern mit Alkali- 
kalksyeniten und Alkalikalkgraniten) und andrerseits auch mit den 
Gesteinen der Essexitreihe nahe verwandt sein miissen und daher auch 
als Differentiationsprodukte von Magmen beider Reihen auftreten kénnen 
mitissen. Dieses scheint auch aus den Erfahrungen in den nordnorwegi- 
schen Gebieten hervorzugehen. 


Hypabyssische Gesteine und Deckengesteine. 


In dem von Scuet bereisten Gebiete giebt es solche teils als Ginge, 
teils als lakkolithgeformte Intrusive und teils als echte Laven auftretend. 
Unten wird das mitgeteilt, was ich tiber diese Gesteine in Scuet’s Tage- 
biichern gefunden habe und von Interesse sein kann. Diese Notizen 
werden von besonderer Bedeutung fiir zukiinftige Geologen sein, die 
dazu kommen kénnen, dieselben Gegenden zu befahren. Diese Notizen 
werden in chronologischer Ordnung wiedergegeben, wodurch Aufschliisse 
uber eine betreffende Lokalitat nicht immer in unmittelbarer Reihenfolge 
zu stehen kommen. 


Auszug aus Schei’s Tagebiichern. 


Basalt (eigentlich Diabas) tritt bei Cape Camperdown auf, wo der- 
selbe nach Scuer eine gesammte Miachtigkeit von ca. 100 Metern haben 
soll. Hier ist die Machtigkeit am gréssten; bei Fort Juliane im Hayes- 
Sund ist diese viel geringer und im Beitstad-Fjord und im Innersten des 
Flaglers-Fjords wird kein Diabas vorgefunden. Beim Cape Camperdown 
tritt der Diabas tiber der untersten Sandsteinkonglomeratetage auf, 
deren Machtigkeit kaum 100 Meter iibersteigt. 

Uber seine Excursion im Foulke-Fjord sagt Scart: ,,Ca. 100 Meter 
tiber dem Meere war die Grenze von dem Urgebirge zu sehen, die von 
dem granitdioritischen Urgebirgseruptiv, unmittelbar an der Grenze 
stark griin gefirbt, epidotisiert, kloritisiert, gebildet wurde. Auf diesem 
Eruptive liegt ein teilweise schwach konglomeratischer Sandstein, worin 
griingefiirbte Schlieren wie auch diinne Banke eines dichten, hellroten, 
kalksteinahnlichen Gesteines vorkommen. Héher oben ist der Sandstein 
teils rotbraun, teils hell rétlichweiss. Uber diesem steht auf den Kam- 
men Diabas“. Die Machtigkeit des Sandsteines wird auf 120—130 Meter 
geschitzt. Im Foulke Fjord kommt mehr Diabas als bei Cape Camper- 


1898 - 1902. No. 22.] | PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 23 


down vor. Scuet hat silurische und wahrscheinlich auch kambrische 
Fossilien von den Lagen, wo dieser Diabas auftritt, mitgebracht. 

Uber seine Reise lings der Sidseite des Ellesmere-Landes sagt 
Scuer unter anderem: 

»Die Excursion langs der Westseite des Fjords innerhalb Cone Island. 

Urgebirge, wesentlich Augengneis und Augengranitschiefer ist vor- 
herrschendes Gestein, in den Hohen aber steht die sedimentaére Formation 
durch zahlreiche, tiefe, stark ausgepriagte Dislokationen aufbewahrt. Das 
Profil ist heller Sandstein mit kleinknolligem Kalk und hierin wahr- 
scheinlich auch dunkle, rotbraune Sandsteine samt Diabas. 

Uber dem Sandstein folgt ein gelbgrauer, dolomitischer Kalkstein 
mit hellem, feinkérnigem Sandstein; héher habe ich hier nicht kommen 
konnen. Basalt fand ich nicht anstehend, in losen Blocken auf einem 
bestimmten Niveau aber, das ihr Ausgehendes unter dem Talus, in 
geringer Machligkeit tbrigens, zu bezeichnen schien. 

Bei Frams-Fjord verandert das Land seinen Charakter. 

Die Ostseite des Frams-Fjords wird von einer steil abfallenden 
hohen Wand gebildet, worauf Kalksteine und Sandsteine wie eine Speck- 
lage auf der steilen Urgebirgsmauer lagern. Dieser schmale Frams-Fjord 
— er kénnte ebenso gut ein norwegischer Westlandsfjord mit steilen 
Ufern und engen Télern, die von demselben aufsteigen, sein —, bildet, 
wie gesagt, eine ausgepragte Grenze zwischen zwei grundverschiedenen 
Teilen des Landes. Das Land éstlich davon ist namlich vollstandig mit 
Inlandseis tiberdeckt, so dass nur die aussersten, steilen Felsenwande, 
mit denen das hohe Inlandsplateau gegen die See abfiillt, aus dem Eis- 
mantel hervorstecken. 

Westlich davon haben wir Fjord auf Fjord und Tal auf Tal. Nur 
an einzelnen Stellen sieht man Gletscher sich nach der See ergiessen. 
Das Land ist auf der Seite des Fjords eisfrei und vor dem Kiistenrande 
ist meistens ein flacher Strand. Dieses Land spricht dem Aussehen nach 
viel mehr zu und dies ist auch so der Fall nach unserer gegenwartigen 
Bekanntschaft mit demselben, indem es sich vor dem unfruchtbaren Eis- 
land durch eine reiche Vegetation und einen tiberraschenden Wildbestand 
an Hasen, Auerochsen und Schneehihnern auszeichnet*. 

Exkursion nach @en (der Insel). Das Tal zwischen den 
Landzungen}. 

Hier tritt auf der inneren Landzunge ein ca. 20 Meter machtiger 
Gang im Urgebirge auf. Von hier ist Ganggrenze (0.75 m. von der 
Grenze) und Gangmitte mitgebracht. Im Tale befinden sich 2 grossere 


1 Hiermit ist sicherlich das Talauf dem Festland nordwestlich von Skreia gemeint. 


24 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Dislokationen mit Sprunghéhe von mehreren hundert Metern und mit 
Streichen WSW.—ONO. senkrecht auf das Fallen im Gesteine, das auch 
hier NNW. ist. Das Gestein ist tibrigens Kalkstein mit Mergelschiefer. 

Excursion in den Einschnitt beim Havnefjord. 

Die Gesteine sind von Spiegel- und Gleitflachen nahe den grossen 
Verwerfungen, die den Silur gegen das Urgebirge abgrenzen, durchsetzt. 
In dem sandigen, schlierigen Sandstein giebt es seltene und kleine Spuren 
von Fossilien, Schild- und Backenstiicke von Trilobiten. 

Im Urgebirge kommen ausser kleinen, an der Grenze sehr dichten, 
dunklen Gangen auch noch andere einer etwas alteren Type vor und 
auch diese mit Grenzstructur. Diese sind in der Regel ca. 10—20 m. 
miachtig und streichen in allen Richtungen !. 

In der Richtung tber ,den gronne Flek“? hinaus kommt ein 
grosser, dunkler Gang im Urgebirge vor, Fallen senkrecht. Bei ,Smedje- 
bugten*2 wurden dunkle, kleinkérnige Génge oder vielleicht nur 
Schlieren angetroffen, worin wieder feinkérnige und dichte Schlieren auf- 
treten — ausserdem pegmatische und aplitische Gange. 

Auf der Westseite von ,Vestre-Sund** kommt grauer Gneis mit 
grésseren und kleineren Diabasgingen mit verschiedenem, doch meistens . 
nord-siidlichem Streichen vor. Von einem 20m. machtigem Gange wurden 
Proben mitgénommen. Der Gneis fiihrt Schlieren von hellroten, klein- 
kérnigen Gangen. 

In Stordalen* kommen auch Diabasgange vor, sowohl wie im 
Sund und tberall der Gneisgranit. 

»Den 20. Marz 1901. Kap Sydvest ist von einer Serie heller, 
reiner Sandsteine in 2 Stufen aufgebaut, die mit einem Fallen von ca. 
25° gegen nordwest liegen. Zwischendrin in den Sandsteinschichten sind 
zahlreiche Intrusive von Diabas eingekeilt. Im Kap Sydvest kommen 
3 soleche von einer respektiven Machtigkeit von ca. 30, 25 und 30 m. 
vor. Der Sandstein ist kontaktmetamorphosiert. 

Den 23. April 1901. Am éstlichen Kap des Trold-Fjords lagert 
ein heller Sandstein mit stidlichem Fallen, von Kalkstein oder Sandstein 
mit einem etwas anderem Fallen discordant tberlagert. Die Richtung 
kann nicht genau angegeben werden. Ob die Discordanz urspringlich 
oder dynamisch ist, kann auch nicht abgemacht werden. Etwas ausser- 
halb des Kaps streicht ein senkrecht stehender 20—30 m. miachtiger 
Gang von Hyperitoddens Gestein (Diabas). 

1 Einen solchen Unterschied habe ich in dem Material nicht aufweisen kénnen. 
2 Nahe dem Winterquartier im Havne-Fjord. 


3 Der Sund westlich von Skreia. 
4 Das Tal nordlich von Havnefjord. 


1898-1902. No. 22.) PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE, 25 


Den 4. April 1901. An der westlichen Seite des Fjords lagern 
dunkle Kalksteine mit einem nordwestlichen Fallen von ca. 30—40°. 
Es ist eine Falte zu sehen.“ 

Scuer spricht auch von Discordanz vom Innern des Fjords. Das 
Fallen im Tale ist isoklin, das Profil zeigt aber, dass sich lings der 
Ostseite eine nérdlich verlaufende Faltungsverwerfung mit 30—50 m. 
machtiger Brecciebildung zieht. Das Fallen éstlich von diesem Kalkstein, 
Kalksandstein und weissem und rotem Quarzsandstein scheint nicht 
gerade entgegengesetzt aber etwas dstlicher zu sein. Der rote Sandstein 
fuhrt Fossilreste. Vom grauen Kalkstein eine Becherkoralle und vom 
weissen Kalksandstein ein Gasteropod mitgebracht. 

Das Tal nach der Wasserscheide hinauf (Troldfjordeidet) bot 
zuerst den roten Sandstein dar, hoher kam wieder Kalkstein, wovon 
sich der dunkle von hellem Kalkstein und Sandstein tiberlagert wieder 
in dem Cajion zeigte, der von der Wasserscheide nach NO. oder NNO. 
hinunterfihrte. Das Fallen auf der ganzen Strecke siidéstlich. Tiefer 
im Tale nehmen helle, leicht zerbréckelnde Sandsteine die flachen, 
runden Oberflachenformen ein und einige wenige Kilometer vom Fjord 
standen die grauen Quarzsandsteine mit schwarzen, weichen Schiefer- 
linsen voll von Pflanzenfossilien. Troldfjordeidet liegt 259 m. tiber dem 
Meere. 

Den 2. Mai 1901. Am westlichen Lande (zwischen Maiodden 
und Depotodden) stehen helle Sandsteine mit Intrusiven von Cha- 
racter und Auftreten wie am Kap Sydvest an. Das dstliche Land ist 
Sandstein mit Diabas-Intrusiven. (Mit dem éstlichen Lande ist sicherlich 
Blaamanden gemeint.) 

Den 12. Mai 1901. Auf einem Kap (sicherlich Smorgrautber get) 
treten miachtige Intrusive auf, die alle anderen Gesteine verdrangen. 
Es scheinen Gange von einer anderen Zusammensetzung und die Intru- 
sive durchsetzend aufzutreten. Aus den Notizen scheint bervorzugehen, 
dass an der Westseite von Mokka-Fjord Diabas auftreten soll. 

Den 25. Mai 1901. Zwischen den 2 westlichen Landzungen auf 
Storgen stehen Kalksteine und schwarze Mergelschiefer in haufiger 
Wechsellagerung mit siidéstlichem Fallen an. In diesem Profil giebt es 
haufig lentikulare und deckenformige Intrusive von verschiedenen Diabas- 
varietiten. An der siidwestlichen Landzunge auf Storgen ist wesentlich 
Diabas, nur oben tritt die Lagenfolge von grauem mergeligem Schiefer 
und sandigem Kalk in haufiger Wechsellagerung hervor. Hier waren 
erratische Urgebirgsgerélle und Muschelfragmente in einer Hohe von 
ca. 25 m. tiber dem Meere. : 


26 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Den 26. Mai 1901. Whitsunday-Bay. Im Tale davor sind 
Diabasintrusive haufig. Ejigentiimlich fir die Landschaft ringsum den 
Fjord sind senkrechte Gange von einer Machtigkeit von 20, 30, 50 m., 
ungefahr Nord—Sid streichend, wabrscheinlich ungefahr dem Streichen 
der Schiefer nach.“ 

Scuer bespricht Gebirge mit Kammen von Diabasgaingen. Keine 
Fossilien, aber ein Stiick echter Lignit von ca. 11/)’” Méachtigkeit. 

»Den 30. Mai 1901. Auf der Halbinsel Raanes, sicherlich etwas 
nordlich von Harenesset, lagern michtige Intrusive mit Schollen von 
stark kontaktmetamorphosiertem Sandstein. Sicherlich mehrere tber- 
einander liegende Injektionen und keine gewaltige Serie. 

Den 3. Juni 1901. Im Innern des Skaare-Fjords schienen die . 
Profile wesentlich von Sandslein und Schiefer und ganz wenige Diabas- 
intrusiven zusammengesetzt zu sein. Diese werden am 1sten Gletscher 
haufiger und machen bei ,,Fjordbugten* (wahrscheinlich , Aaklungen‘) 
das ganze Profil in einer Michtigkeit von 2—3000 Fuss aus. Hier haben 
sie absolut ihr starkstes Auftreten. 

Den 4. Juni 1901. An der sitdwestlichen Landzunge auf der siid- 
lichen Ulva schiesst eine linsenférmige Diabasmasse schrag durch den 
Sandstein und die Schieferreihe, Bruchstiicke umgebender Gesteine um- 
schliessend, auf. Das Fallen dieser Diabasmasse ist hier ungefahr NNW. 
Nordlich davon findet sich der Diabas massenweise. 

Im Gletscher-Fjord sind die Gesteine wesentlich Sandstein und 
das Fallen ist iberall ungestért flach NW. Intrusive sind selten und klein. 

Den 24. Juni 1902. Auf der Nordseite in der Bergwand, die im 
éstlichen Fjord (sicherlich Slidrefjord) zu sehen ist, scheinen Intrusive 
wieder etwas mehr hervorzutreten. Auf der Strecke von Maiodden 
bis Depot Kap sowie auf der Ostseite vom Kap Separation! ist 
das Fallen éstlich. Beim Kap Separation ist der Sandstein ziemlich 
rein mit verhaltnismassig weniger Intrusiven als nach Stiden. Am west- 
lichen und sidlichen Teil von Isfjeldodden ist das Fallen im Sand- 
stein nordwestlich, am éstlichen und nérdlichen Teil aber dstlich. Intru- 
sive sind untergeordnet. 

Den 27. April 1902. Blaafjeld wird von einer Serie von zu 
unterst hegenden miichtigen Bianken von blaugrauen, dichten, gelbgrau 
verwitternden Kalkstein samt grauem Tonschiefer aufgebaut; dartiber 
liegen feine Tonschiefer, worin derselbe Lamellibranchiat wie auf dem 
Ammonitberge massenweise vorkam. 


1 Das Kap bei Blaamanden. 


1898-1902. No. 22.] PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 27 


Hierin giebt es Diabasintrusive, einige davon ca. 100 Fuss miichtig, 
mehrere kleiner. Die obersten von diesen kamen im Kalkstein vor. 

Bei der westlichen Landzunge des Hare-Fjords steht Diabas- 
intrusiv im dunklen Schiefer an. Weiter westlich wiederholt sich das- 
selbe Profil mit Kalkstein, sandigem Schiefer und mit Diabasintrusiven 
und mit lotrechten NW. oder WNW. streichenden Gangen. 

Gegen Ottas-Fjord wiederholl sich Blaamandens Profil mit starken 
Faltungen. Diabasintrusive giebt es hier westlich ebenfalls in der 
Schieferpartie. . 

Den 9. Mai 1902. An Land auf eine der Inseln bei Lands-Lokk. 
Die dunklen Eruptive sind absolut tiberwiegend. 

Das westliche Land ,@en* (Sorte Veg4) bietet gegen NO. eine 
lange, dunkle, beinahe unversehrte Wand dar, nur Einschnitte fahren 
nach der Senkung im Plateau hinauf. Der siidliche, kleinere Teil ist 
von sedimentairen Gesteinen in gegen S.—SO. flach fallenden Schichten 
mit ungestérter Schichtung aufgebaut, der gréssere, nordliche besteht aber 
deutlich aus massiven Eruptiven; hier ist aber das Land héher und teilweise 
mehr kupiert. Da, wo wir das Land erreichten etwas siidlich vor der 
Schwarzen Wand und ndrdlich von der Siidostspitze, stehen miachtige 
Schichten von Flint an. Die unterste Lage des Flintes ist braun, wahrschein- 
lich weniger rein, schlierig, dartiber liegt eine ganz rein weisse und wieder 
eine weniger reine Lage. Im Flint waren Fossilien der Bjornekaptype. 
Dariiber liegt in conformer Lage eine mindestens 50 Fuss miachtige 
Decke von Labradorporphyritmandelstein. Das Einfallen war flach SO. 


Dieses von den obenerwahnten Profilen von Scuer’s eingesammeltem 
Material zeigt, dass folgende Typen gesondert werden kénnen: Diorit- 
porphyritische Ganggesteine; Diabase, die wesentlich als In- 
trusive aber auch als gewdhnliche Diabasginge aultreten; Laven, 
nimlich Porphyrite und Melaphyre. 


Dioritporphyritgange. 

Diese Giinge treten am Havne-Fjord, die Seite 17 beschriebenen 
Eruptive durchsetzend, auf, die man unter dem gemeinsamen Namen 
Granitdiorite bezeichnen kann. Aus den Beschreibungen geht nicht mit 
Sicherheit hervor, wie weit solche Gange auch jiingere Formationen 
durchsetzen. Das Einzige, was ich hiertiber habe finden kénnen, ist, 
dass ScHer von mezozoischen Formationen auf dem Smorgrautberg im 


1 Schwarze Wand. 


28 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Heureka-Sund und 17ten Mai Berg auf Ringnes Island samt von Lands 
Lokk Proben von Gangen mitgebracht hat, die etwas ahnlichen Charakter 
haben. Am Smorgrautberg durchsetzen diese Gange Diabasintrusive, 
bei Lands Lokk durchsetzen sie die dort vorkommenden Laven. 

Es ist moglich, dass die Dioritporphyritginge den Granildioriten 
genetisch angehodren, also die Ganggesteine derselben reprasentieren. 
Wenn dem auch so ist und wenn sie ferner als von demselben Alter 
wie die oben genannten Giinge, die die mezozoischen Formationen durch- 
setzen, angenommen werden missen, so kénnen die Granitdiorite mcht 
prikambrisch, sondern miissen jiinger sein. Irgend welchen Beweis 
dafiir oder dagegen haben wir nicht. Das Einzige, was wir wissen, ist, 
dass sie nicht dem altesten Urgebirge angehéren, da sie Schollen von 
Gneis einschliessen. Irgend eine Diskordanz gegen die dariiberliegenden 
kambrisch-silurischen Formationen hat Scuet nicht nachgewiesen. Ber 
C. Camperdown liegt, wie gesagt, uber Granitdiorit, der dort als Syenit 
entwickelt ist, eine Konglomeratsandsteinetage. Im Foulke-Fjord soll 
der Sandstein, der auch dort tiber dem Granitdiorit hegt, griingefairbte 
Schlieren enthalten und der Granitdiorit ist selbst unmittelbar an der 
Grenze stark griin gefarbt, was méglicherweise als ein Grenzfacies- 
phinomen aufgefasst werden kann. 

Am Frams-Fjord sollen jingere Formationen, namlich Sandstein- 
und Kalksteinlagen in dinnen Schollen und durch zahlreiche Verwer- 
fungen aufbewahrt, auf dem Granitdiorit ruhen. Vom Havne-Fjord werden 
auch Dislokationen langs der Grenze gegen jiingere Formationen he- 
sprochen. Gleichzeitig werden Dislokationen auf der Westseite des 
granitdioritischen Eruptivgebietes, namlich im Trold-Fjord, besprochen. 
Die gréssten Dislokationen sollen jedoch in den Umgebungen des 
Heureka-Sundes stattgefunden haben. In Scuet’s vorliufiger Milteilung, 
worauf ich ausserdem hinweise, werden die meisten tektonischen Ver- 
anderungen als posttriassische aber pramiocine angenommen. Ks scheint 
also nicht unméglich sich zu denken, dass diese Dislokationen in Ver- 
bindung mit einer Eruption in mezozoischer Zeit von Granitdiorit mit 
hegleitenden Ganggesteinen, naimlich Dioritporphyrite und Diabase, er- 
standen sein kénnen. 

Kine solche Annahme, die ich hier als méglich anbringe, scheint 
sich Scuer nicht gedacht zu haben. Er schreibt immer sehr. bestimmt 
uber die Granitdiorite als ,Urgebirge.“ Unter meiner Untersuchung des 
Granitdiorites sah ich denselben daher auch als wahrscheinlich prikam- 
brisch an. Grissere Zweifel kamen mir erst bei der Untersuchung der 
Ganggesteine auf. 


1898—1902. No. 22.| _PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 29 


Diese Frage muss bis auf weiteres hinausgeschoben werden. Es 
muss den zukiinftigen Forschern tiberlassen werden, diese Sache in das 


Reine zu bringen. Hier missen wir uns mit einer Beschreibung der 
mitgebrachten Proben begniigen: 


Die Dioritporphyrite 

ireten als teilweise machtige Gange auf, die in der Mitte verhiiltnis- 
missig grobkérmg, an der Grenze feinkérniger, und an der unmittel- 
baren Grenze porphyritisch sind (Taf. II, II). Das Gestein ist nahe der 
Grenze beinahe schwarz. Wenig miichtige Ginge von einigen Decimetern 
Machtigkeit sind dicht und porphyritisch und sehr dunkel. Dinnschliffe 
von der Mitte miachtiger Gange zeigen Plagioklasleisten mit deutlicher 
Albit-zwillingsstreifung, ab und zu auch mit Periklinzwillingsstreifung. Die 
Leisten kénnen sowohl Jang und schmal als auch kurz und breit und 
sogar beinahe quadratisch sein. Die Form ist nicht immer ganz regel- 
massig, indem der Plagioklas nicht immer idiomorph gegen Pyroxen ist. 
Doch hat der Plagioklas die Krystallisation vor dem Pyroxen deutlich 
begonnen; denn dieser fullt bisweilen Zwischenraume zwischen den 
Plagioklasleisten aus. Dass die Krystallisation dieser 2 Minerale indessen 
teilweise auch zur selben Zeit vor sich gegangen sein muss, wird gleich- 
zeitig dadurch angedeutet, dass haufig krystallographisch gut begrenzte 
Pyroxenindivide gesehen werden. Der Plagioklas ist oft zonar aufgebaut, 
indem die mittelsten Teile die kalkreichesten sind, was dadurch sehr 
deutlich hervortreten kann, dass sich die mittleren Teile oft der Um- 
wandlung wegen als matt zeigen, wahrend der Rand frisch und klar ist. 
Am gewohnlichsten tritt sicherlich Labradorfeldspat auf, daneben ver- 
schiedene sauerere Grade, Andesin ‘und Oligoklas. Alkalifeldspat habe 
ich nicht beobachtet. Die Plagioklasleisten liegen in allen méglichen 
Richtungen, wodurch Zwischenraiume entstehen, die oft einen triangu- 
laren oder viereckigen Durchschnitt haben. Diese Zwischenriume sind 
meistens mit Mikropegmatit, seltener ausschlesslich mit Quarzkérnern 
oder auch mit Pyroxen oder mit einem Umwandlungsprodukt desselben 
ausgefiillt. , 

Quarz giebt es in reinen Koérnern und fast immer in Zwischen- 
réumen; meistens aber kommt derselbe in mikropegmatitischer Ver- 
wachsung mit Plagioklas vor. Bisweilen findet ein gleichmassiger Uber- 
gang, also keine scharfe Grenze zwischen den Plagioklasindividen und 
dem Mikropegmatit statt, so dass der Plagioklas in dem Mikropegmatit 
gleichzeitig als anstossende Plagioklasindivide ausléscht. Quarz ist das 
zuletzt ausgeschiedene Mineral. 


30 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Pyroxen tritt in ziemlich bedeutender Menge auf. Derselbe ist im 
Diinnschnitt farblos bis braunlich mit graugelben, seltener rétlichen 
Interferenzfarben. Das Vorkommen von Zwillingen nach 100 ist nicht 
selten. Prismatische Spaltbarkeit ist sehr hervortretend. Oft sind meh- 
rere Pyroxene zu grdsseren Partien gesammelt. Die Begrenzung ist 
ziemlich unregelmissig, doch ist dies verschieden; gute krystallogra- 
phische Begrenzung ist nicht ganz selten, und selbst wenn solche nicht 
vorhanden ist, steckt der Pyroxen doch oft in dem Plagioklas und muss 
also, wie gesagt, gleichzeitig mit demselben teilweise krystallisiert sein, 
wenn derselbe auch im Wesentlichen jiinger ist. Der Pyroxen ist teils 
zu Hornblende, teils zu Klorit stark umgewandelt. Die Umwandlung 
hat im Allgemeinen am Rande begonnen und schreitet nach innen, kann 
aber auch mitten im Pyroxen begonnen haben und scheint besonders 
dessen Spaltbarkeit zu folgen. Es sieht aus, als ob die Hornblende 
teilweise aus Pyroxen gebildet ist. Dieselbe ist pleochroitisch: Parallel 
der c-Achse hellgelb, teilweise braunlich; senkrecht darauf dunkler gelb- 
griinlich, teilweise braunlich. Einzelne Dannschliffe zeigten ziemlich viel 
Hornblende. 

Der Klorit ist griinlich bis blaulich oder bréunlich und scheint das 
letzte Stadium in der Umwandlung zu sein. Er tritt oft an Spalten im 
Plagioklas auf. Brauner, stark pleochroitischer Biotit  tritt sparsam aul. 

Erez tritt in grossen Massen auf, teils in kleinen Kornern, teils in 
grésseren Partien, ab und zu mit Manteln von Biotit und Hornblende. 

Accessorisch tritt Apatit in grossen Massen auf, in kleinen sowie 
in grossen Nadeln alle die tbrigen Minerale durchsetzend. 

Die Structur dieses Gesteines ist nicht ofitisch wie bei gewohn- 
lichen Diabasen; denn die Ofitstruktur verlangt bekanntlich, dass Plagi- 
oklas ausgepragt idiomorph gegen Pyroxen ist, was, wie gesagt, hier 
nicht der Fall ist. Eher kann die Structur diabasisch kérnig genannt 
werden, aber auch dies ist nicht ganz treffend, da der Pyroxen mitunter 
"in bemerkenswertem Grade idiomorph sein kann. Dies scheint jedoch 
etwas verschieden zu sein. Einige dieser Gesteine miissten diabasisch 
kérnig genannt werden; andere nahern sich dagegen mehr der normal 
hypidiomorphkérnigen Structur dadurch, dass die Plagioklasleisten so 
breit werden, dass sich die kreuzweise Anordnung verliert. 

Die Farbe ist meistens dunkel wie bei den Gabbroen, doch giebt es 
auch hellere Typen. Eine Probe von Vestre-‘Sund, Havne-Fjord war rétlich. 

Die Gange, die die Laven bei Lands-Lokk durchsetzen, waren 
teilweise sehr hell und enthielten wenig dunkle Minerale, dagegen aber 
viel Feldspat und Mikropegmatit. 


1898—1902. No. 22.] | PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 3L 


Naher der Grenze wird, wie erwahnt, das Gestein mehr feinkérnig 
und die unmittelbare Grenze ist so dicht, dass es schwierig ist, die ein- 
zelnen Korner unter dem Mikroskop deutlich zu sehen. Die Structur ist 
porphyritisch, indem in einer Grundmasse schartf hegrenzte Plagioklas- 
leisten und Pyroxenkrystalle, teilweise auch kleine Quarzkrystalle liegen. 
Die Grundmasse besteht aus einer Mischung kreuzweise angeordneter, 
kleiner Plagioklasleisten und Pyroxenkérner zusammen mit einer Menge 
Erz, der gern in Stibchen, die senkrecht aufeinanderstehen, auftritt. 
Beide, Pyroxen und Erz sind gegen die Grenze zunehmend, Plagioklas 
und Apatit dagegen sind abnehmend. Das Gestein ist zum Teil kloriti- 
siert und epidotisiert, scheint aber sonst nicht stark umgewandelt zu 
sein. Von der Umwandlung zu Hornblende ist wenig zu sehen. 

Die Quarzeinsprenglinge sieht man unter parallelen Nicols als 
scharf begrenzt, unter gekreuzten Nicols sieht man sie zerteilt, mog- 
licherweise in kleine Korner zerquetscht, die jedes fiir sich und zu ver- 
schiedenen Zeiten auslischen, so dass das ganze Individ niemals ganz 
dunkel ist. Der Einsprenglings-Character des Quarzes verliert sich auch 
unter gekreuzten Nicols dadurch, dass derselbe meistens von Pyroxen 
und Klorit stark durchsetzt ist. Quarz scheint auch, wenn auch nur 
sehr sparsam in der Grundmasse, besonders in der Nahe der Quarz- 
einsprenglinge, vorzukommen, im Ganzen scheint aber die Quarzmenge 
nahe der Grenze geringer als in der Mitte des Ganges zu sein. 

Die von Scuet besprochenen dioritporphyritischen Ginge liegen bei: 


Innere Landzunge, Skreia, Havne-Fjord. 


Hafen, griiner Fleck, do. 
Die Kluft, Hafen, do. 
Nordseite von Stordalen, do. 
Westseite von Vestre Sund, do. 
Smorgrautberget. 


e 17te Mai Fjeld, Ringnes-Land. 
Die Lands-Lokk-Inseln. 


Diabase. 
Die Diabase am Cape Camperdown und Foulke-Fjord. 
Die Diabase von Cape Camperdown und Foulke-Fjord sind 
im Allgemeinen grobkrystallinisch, dunkel und schwer. Derselbe besteht 
aus Plagioklas, Pyroxen, samt einer Zwischenklemmungsmasse oder 
Mesostasis, Erz und etwas Apatit. 


32 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Die Structur ist ofitisch. Der Plagioklas hat Leistenform und liegt 
kreuz und quer. 

Der Pyroxen ist teilweise prismatisch entwickelt, teilweise tritt der- 
selbe mit unregelmassiger Begrenzung den Zwischenraumen zwischen den 
Plagioklasleisten ausfillend auf. Diese Leisten sind hauptsachlich vor 
dem Pyroxen krystallisiert. Letzterer hat haufig eine der darin stecken- 
den Plagioklasleisten wegen gebuchtete und eingesclinittene Begrenzung. 
Man kann oft einen Zwillingsbildung andeutenden Saum der Langs- 
richtung nach sehen. Der Pyroxen ist im Dinnschliff gesehen in frischem 
Zustand farblos, vielleicht mit einem schwach griinen Schimmer. Man 
sieht hisweilen kleine, braune Interpositionen, sicherlich Rutil. Die 
Interferenzfarben sind lebhaft rot, gelb, blau, violett, seltener graulich. 
Die prismatische Spaltbarkeit ist deutlich. Mitunter sieht man eine Spalt- 
barkeit nach 100. 

Der Pyroxen ist mehr oder weniger stark umgewandelt. Das erste 
Stadium ist eine Durchsetzung von Fasern, die haufig mit der c-Achse 
des Pyroxens parallel liegen oder auch einen Winkel mit derselben 
bildend, der meistens zwischen 77° und 83° variiert. 

Die erste Faserbildung hat einen gelbgrauen Ton. Bei weiterer Um- 
wandlung tritt Pleochroismus hinzu, namlich parallel mit der Léngs- 
richtung der Fasern gelbgrau bis gelbbraun, senkrecht darauf gelbbraun. 
Je mehr die Umwandlung entwickelt ist, desto stiarker ist die gelb- 
braune Farbe. 

Das letzte Stadium der Umwandlung ist Serpentin und Klorit. Der 
Serpentin ist meistens dicht und von gelblicher bis griinlicher Farbe. 
Der Klorit ist im Allgemeinen parallelfasrig und oft pleochroitisch, 
namlich parallel mit der Spaltbarkeit hellgelbbraunlich, senkrecht darauf 
dunkel grinblaulich. Dieser ist ab und zu mit Erz, der den Klorit bei 
der Verwitterung braun farbt, stark durchsetzt. 

Der Serpentin und Klorit tritt haufig radialstrahlig auf und zeigt 
dann in konvergentem Lichte hibsche Interferenzkreuze. 

Der Plagioklas ist Labrador in Leistenform. Die Leisten sind ent- 
weder lang und schmal oder kurz und dick. Ausser Zwillingsstreifung 
nach dem Albitgesetz sind Karlsbader Zwillinge haufig. Periklinzwil- 
lingsstreifung ist nicht selten. Zwillingsbildung nach dem Bavenogesetz 
kann man da auch bisweilen und dann als Vierling sehen. Der Plagioklas 
ist frisch. An Spalten ist Kloritmasse eingedrungen, der Plagioklas selbst 
ist aber wenig umgewandelt. 

Quarz tritt in nicht geringen Mengen auf. Denselben findet man 
in freien Quarzkérnern. Hauptsichlich aber tritt derselbe in mikropeg- 


1898—1902. No. 22.] | PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 33 


matitischer Verwachsung mit Plagioklas auf. Er tritt immer zwischen 
den Plagioklasleisten in Mesostasis auf und ist also nach dem Plagioklas 
auskrystallisiert. 

Mesostasis. 

Die Zwischenriume zwischen den Plagioklasleisten sind von einer 
Zwischenklemmungsmasse, einem Mesostasis, ausgefiillt. Da die Plagi- 
oklasleisten kreuz und quer liegen, sind diese Zwichenriume oft von 
3eckigem Querschnitt. Mesostasis besteht aus Quarz und Feldspat. Die 
mikropegmatitische Structur ist sehr in die Augen fallend. Lange, dinne 
Nadeln liegen oft kreuz und quer in einer Masse, die wahrscheinlich 
aus Quarz besteht. Diese Nadeln scheinen unvollstindig entwickelte 
Plagioklasleisten zu sein. Sie sind oft zackig und schlecht begrenzt. 
Bei einzelnen kann man Andeutung zur Albitzwillingsstreifung verspiiren. 
Sie erléschen oft gleichzeitig als naheliegende Plagioklasindivide. Die 
Begrenzung des Mesostasis ist meistens scharf; dieselbe kann aber auch 
als in Plagioklasindivide iibergehend gesehen werden. Mesostasis ist 
mit Kérnern und grésseren Individen von dunklen Mineralien, die immer 
in Klorit und Serpentin tibergegangen sind, vermischt. 

Wie erwahnt, ist Mesostasis zuletzt auskrystallisiert, als eine Selten- 
heit sieht man aber kleine Einschliisse von demselben Character wie 
diesen Mesostasis im Plagioklas. 

Mesostasis ist voll von kleinen Hohlraumen. Ferner treten lange, 
ganz diinne Nadeln eines durchsichtigen, farblosen bis schwach grin- 
lichen Minerales mit ca. 22° Ausléschungswinkel auf, in dessen Mitte 
bisweilen ein heller Kern liegt, der entweder ganz hell oder auch von 
einem Pigment braun gefarbt ist. 

Erz tritt in ganz grosser Menge auf, vielleicht am meisten in Meso- 
stasis, aber auch in den tibrigen Mineralien, besonders in Pyroxen. 


Die Diabase am Heureka-Sund. 


Diese kénnen in 2 Typen geteilt werden, namlich Diabase mit etwas 
Quarz und Mikropegmatit als Zwischenklemmungsmasse, und Diabase 
ohne solche. Zwischen den letzteren treten bei einzelnen, so z. B. bei 
Hareleiren Olivin hinzu. Ausserdem scheint Olivin nicht besonders ver- 
breitet zu sein, doch ist dies der Umwandlung wegen schwierig abzu- 
machen. Die Structur ist im Allgemeinen ausgepragt ofitisch, nur wo 
verhiltnismassig viel Quarz und Mikropegmatit hinzutritt, wird diese 
Structur etwas weniger hervortretend, indem die Plagioklasleisten 
breiter werden, teilweise quadratisch, zonar aufgebaut und nicht immer 


idiomorph gegen Pyroxen. Gleichzeitig hiermit scheint sich auch Periklin- 
3 


34 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


zwillingsstreifung, wenn auch nur in geringem Grade zu zeigen, wie 
auch der Plagioklas etwas saurer zu sein scheint. Der Plagioklas ist 
besonders in den am meisten basischen Diabasen ziemlich stark umge- 
wandelt, indem er von Epidotkérnern, Klorit und anderem durchsetzt 
‘ist, weshalb die Zwillingsstreifung nicht immer besonders deutlich ist. 
Der Pyroxen ist meistens von schwach braunlicher Farbe mit graugelben 
und rétlichen Interferenzfarben. Derselbe tritt in den am meisten basi- 
schen Diabasen immer als jiinger wie Plagioklas auf, in den saureren 
ragt derselbe dagegen in den Plagioklas hinein, ohne dass derselbe 
eigentlich als idiomorph gegen den Plagioklas bezeichnet werden kann. 
Der Pyroxen ist teilweise stark umgewandelt, aber niemals wie in den 
dioritporphyritischen Gangen zu Hornblende, dagegen zu Biolit und _be- 
sonders zu Klorit und Serpentit. Der Biotit ist stark pleochroitisch. 
Wahrscheinlich ist Biotit sekundar; ausserdem tritt er ziemlich sparsam 
auf. Der Klorié ist meistens strahlig, teilweise radial angeordnet, der- 
selbe ist etwas pleochroitisch, indem die Farben zwischen gelb, braun, 
griin und blau wechseln. Derselbe ist mit gelbem bis braunem Serpentin 
stark gemischt. 

Der Quarz, der, wie angegeben, immer in der Zwischenklemmungs- 
masse auftritt, ist klar und frisch mit verhaltnismassig wenigen Inter- 
positionen und Hohlraumen. Er ist oft von kloritgefiillten Spalten durch- 
schnitten. 

Die Structur des Mikropegmatites ist nicht immer leicht zu sehen, 
teils der Umwandlung wegen, teils weil dieselbe meistens so fein ist, 
dass starke Vergrésserung dazu erforderlich ist. 

Olivin tritt gewiss sparsam auf, kann aber, wie gesagt, in einzelnen 
Diabasen in bedeutenden Mengen beobachtet werden. Die Korner sind 
oft gross, doch sind sie oft stark umgesetzt, so dass von der Olivin- 
substanz wenig iibrig ist. Ringsum die umgewandelten Korner liegt ein 
Kranz von Erz, solches liegt oft auch in dem Olivin in kleinen Krystallen, 
die in geraden Linien oder Halbkreisen angeordnet sind. Olivin ist immer 
gegen die tbrigen Minerale idiomorph, derselbe ist oft stark korrodiert. 

Das in ganz grossen Mengen vorkommende Erg, sicherlig titanhaltig, 
gehért zu den Altesten Ausscheidungen. Apatit in gut entwickelten 
Nadeln tritt ziemlich sparsam auf. 

Diese Diabase sind meistens ziemlich grobkérnig und von dunkler, 
bisweilen griulicher Farbe. Naher der Grenze werden sie dunkler, 
beinahe schwarz und feinkérnig und werden in unmittelbarer Nahe der 
Grenze sehr dicht und porphyritisch, indem gut entwickelte Plagioklas- 
tafeln in einer feinkérnigen Grundmasse von Plagioklas, Erz, Pyroxen, 


1898 — 1902. No. 22.]  PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 35 


Biotit und Klorit legen. Das Erz ist oft in senkrecht aufeinander- 
stehenden Staben angeordnet. Der Pyroxen ist ‘teilweise schwach briun- 
lich pleochroitisch, was méglicherweise durch titanhaltige Interpositionen 
verursacht ist. Der Biotit ist gewiss sekundar. 

Die dunklen Minerale, besonders Erz, sind nahe der Grenze stark 
vermehrt. Einzelne umgewandelte Pyroxenkrystalle kann man auch als 
Einsprengling sehen, sicherlich auch etwas Olivin. 

Diabase sind von folgenden Orten! mitgebracht: 

Cape Camperdown. 

Kap Sydvest. 

Hyperitodden. 

Der Ammonitberg, Bjornekaplandet. 

Ostseite von Trold-Fjord. 

Nérdlich von Harenesset, Raanes Halbinsel, mit Olivin. 
Depotpoint. 

Blaafjeld. 

Westlich im Blaafjeld. 

Westliche Landzunge von Hare-Fjord. 

Hvidtenberg, Heiberg-Island. 

Kap Separation bei Blaamanden. 

Ulve (Ulvingen). 

Gletscher-Fjord. 

Nordseite von Slidre-Fjord. 

Skaare-Fjord, besonders vom ausseren Teil. 
Whitsunday-Bay. 

Zwischen den beiden westlichen Landzungen, auf Storgen. 
Smergrautberg. 


Die Laven bei Lands-Lokk. 


Von Lands Lokk hat Scuer Proben von ziemlich hellen, griinlichen 
bis graulichen, seltener schwarzen, teilweise porphyritischen Gest inen 
mit Einsprenglingen von Feldspat, Olivin und Augit in einer dichten 
Grundmasse aus kleinen Plagioklasleisten bestehend, die kreuz und quer 
mit stark kloritisierten Augitkérnern zusammenliegen, die oft die Form 
der Zwischenriume zwischen den Plagioklasleisten haben, mitgebracht. 
Ausserdem tritt Erz in grossen Mengen in ganz kleinen Kornern auf. 
Der Klorit ist griin und schwach pleochroitisch. Spuren von Biotit. 


1 Conf, die Karte von Kapitin Gunnar Isacusen in Sverdrups Buch ,Nyt Land“. 
H. Aschehoug & Co. Kristiania. 


36 CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Die Einsprenglinge sind krystallographisch gut begrenzte La bra- 
dortafeln, die im Allgemeinen frisch sind, sich aber in  einzelnen 
Proben stark von Klorit, Kalkspat und Epidotkérnern durchsetzt zeigen 
und ausserdem Avzgit, der teilweise stark kloritisiert ist. Olivin, der 
immer vollstandig umgewandelt ist, tritt in krystallographisch gut ent- 
wickelten Einsprenglingen auf. Denselben kann man miglicherweise 
auch in der Grundmasse sehen, das kann aber schwerlich abgemacht 
werden, da die Umwandlung so weit vorgeschritten ist. 

Diese Melaphyre und Porphyrite enthalten mit Kalkspat und teil- 
weise auch mit Klorit gefiillte Mandeln. Solche Porphyritmandelsteine 
und Melaphyrmandelsteine fand Scuer bei ,Svarte Veg“ auf Axel 
Heibergs-Land zusammen mit Tuffen. Scuer sagt hiertiber in seiner 
vorlaufigen Mitteilung: 

»Hier (Svarte Vag) findet man tber Feuersteinschichten, die wahr- 
scheinlich carbonische Versteinerungen enthalten, Schichten von Labra- 
dorporphyritmandelstein und Melaphyrmandelstein und Tuffen, die fur 
carbonisch gehalten werden miissen, denn tber ihnen lagern Feuerstein- 
schichten, die den unter ihnen liegenden gleichen und von denen man 
daher auch annehmen darf, dass sie dasselbe Alter haben. Diese letzten 
Lavaarten scheinen daher einer friiheren Eruptionsperiode anzugehéren 
als wenigstens einige der oben erwihnten Einlagerungsmassen“. 

Die mitgebrachten Proben von Mandelsteinen zeigten eine etwas 
ahnliche Grundmasse wie die Porphyrite bei Lands-Lokk. In der Grund- 
masse liegt eine Menge gut entwickelter Kalkspatmandeln ab und zu 
radial aufgebaut samt Einsprenglingen von Labradortafeln, Augit und 
serpentinisierten Olivinkrystallen. Diese Grundmasse enthalt eine Menge 
Erz wie unzihlige, kleine Korner zwischen den kleinen Plagioklasleisten. 
Diese Zwischenriume sind mit Klorit gefillt, die grosse Menge Erz 
giebt aber dem Ganzen eine so stark schwarze bis braunliche Farbe, 
dass die griingelbe Kloritfarbe beinahe verschwindet. Bei mittlerer Ver- 
grésserung ist der Diinnschliff beinahe schwarz. Nur bei starker Ver- 
grésserung kann der Klorit gesehen werden. Die Fluidalstruktur ist 
sehr hervortretend, indem die kleinen Plagioklasleisten in Strémen ge- 
sammelt legen. 

Die Porphyrite und Melaphyre bei Lands-Lokk durchsetzend treten 
Gange von demselben Typus wie die vorher beschriebenen Quarzdiabase 
auf. Scuer hat sie als ,Gang-Gestein der dioritporphyritischen Type“ 
bezeichnet. Abnliche Gesteine wurden auf Ringnes-Isl. (17te Mai Fjeld) 
gefunden 1, 


1 Conf. p. 28. 


1898—1902. No. 22.] PETROGRAPHISCHE RESULTATE. 37 


Leider vorliegen nicht so viele Analysen von diesen hypabyssischen 
Gesteinen und von den Deckengesteinen, dass ihre chemische Verhilt- 
nisse ausfithrlich diskutiert werden kénnen. Scuer hat die folgenden 2 
Analysen ausgefihrt: 

IT ist Dioritporphyritgang siidéstlich auf Skreia, Havnefjord, Jones 
Sund. Er ist mehr basisch als die meisten Dioritporphyriten und 
enthalt viel dunkle, aber wenig helle Minerale. 

II ist Diabasgang, Bjérneodde, Bjérnesund, Heibergs Isl. Eureka Sund. 


I Il 
bene et en 44,97 46,09 
Ti0g-... 2.00. ! 4,87 (3,45) 
ANOd ey oteex | 15,76 (17,89) 
Weill une gods ccs 4,44 35,56 
BOS ads 6 ote 12,13 | } 
MoO: jean cad 0,17 0,28 
Wg pics cree 4,15 5,04 
Citi cha haas 8,67 10,30 
et 4,02 3,92 
TC seh ets eacaca 0,32 1,10 
i, eee 0,39 0,26 
PS ete ids 0,35 0,05 
Siac aa reat 0,47 
100,24 y 


Man sieht, dass die 2 Gesteine chemisch einander nahe stehen. 
Indessen ist es ziemlich sicher, dass eine Analysenserie von den Diorit- 
porphyriten mehrere sauereren Typen zeigen wurde. Wie Pag. 30 
erwahnt ist, kommen nahmlich unter den Dioritporphyriten teils Typen 
vor, die diabasisch kérnige Structur haben, und die wahrscheinlich die 
Diabasen nahe stehen, teils Typen mit mehr hypidiomorph kérniger 
Structur, die Dioriten naher stehen. Die obige Analyse von Dio- 
ritporphyrit reprdasentiert also nicht eigentlich einen typischen Dio- 
ritporphyrit, sondern ein basisches Gleid derselben und deutet eine 
Verwandtschaft zwischen den Dioritporphyriten und den Diabasen an. 

Diese Verhaltnisse sowie eine mégliche Verwandtschaft von diesen 
hypabyssischen Gesteinen und Deckengesteinen mit den frither beschrie- 
benen Tieferuptiven sind interessente Aufgaben, die noch ihre Lésung 


erwarten. 


38 


CARL BUGGE. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898—1902, No. 22] 


Fig. 
Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 
Fig. 


ee 


9. 


Erklarung der Tafeln. 


Taf. I. 
Quarediorit. Reindeer Point. + Nic. 


Hypersthenquarzkalisyenit. Cape Camperdown. Das Helle ist Quarz, 
Mikroperthit und Plagioklas, das Dunkle Hornblende. + Nic. 


Taf. Il. 


Bronzitadamellit. Havnen, Havnefjord. Oben rechts Mikroperthit, 
links Plagioklas, in der Mitte Bronzit, Quarz in grosser Menge. + Nic: 
Dioritporphyritgang. 17te Mai Fjeld. Ringnes Land. Zonarer Plagi- 
oklas. Weisse Quarzkérner und heller Mikropegmatit, schwarzes Erz. 
Hist Hornblende, A Apatit. + Nic. 


Taf. III. 
Dioritporphyritgang. Skreia. Dreieckiger Zwischenraum mit Klorit, 
Pyroxen, Quarz und Apatit gefiillt. Kleine, helle Quarzkérner. Das 
Dunkle oben rechts ist teilweise umgesetzter Pyroxen. + Nic. 
Dioritporphyritgang, 0,2 m. machtig. Havnen, Havnefjord. Einspreng- 
lingen von Plagioklas und Pyroxen. + Nic. 


Taf. IV. 


Diabas. Cape Camperdown. Weisse Leisten von Plagioklas. Die 
graue Masse zwischen diesen ist wesentlich Mikropegmatit. Das 
ganz Schwarze ist Erz und das Dunkle Pyroxen. + Nic. 
Olivinkrystal in Melaphyr. Lands-Lokk. + Nic. 


Taf. V. 
Labradorporphyrit. Lands-Lokk. + Nic. 


10. Derselbe. + Nic. 


Gedruckt am 18, October 1910. 


SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898— 1902. No, 22, Tal. I. 


Fig. 2. 


SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898 — 1902. No, 22. Tal. IL. 


SEC. 


ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898—1902. No. 22. 


Tal. 


IL. 


SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898—1902. No, 22. Taf. IV. 


E 


C. 


ARCT. EXP, FRAM 1898—1902. No. 22. 


Fig .10. 


Tal. V. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 23. 


SPONGES FROM THE COAST 
OF ELLESMERE LAND 


BY 
CONRAD FRISTEDT 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 
(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W.BROGGER 
1909 


I was with much pleasure that I received from Prof. N. Witte, 
Christiania, a request that I would undertake the description of the 
sponges that had been obtained during the Second Norwegian Arctic 
Expedition in the “Fram”, 1898—1902, the more so as I had already 
described the collection of arctic sponges in the State Museum in 
Stockholm. 

There were only two specimens obtained during the above-mentio- 
ned Norwegian arctic expedition, one belonging to the Calcispongiz, the 
other to the Silicispongie. 


Sycandra H. 


Sycandra ciliata H. 

Grantia ciliata Firmmine (Brit. Animals, p. 525, No. 14). 
Grantia ciliata Gray (Proc., Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 554). 
Sycandra ciliata Hacxen (Die Kalkschwimme, p. 296, pl. 51, 

figs. 1 a—1 t; pl. 58, fig. 9). 

This species is represented in the collection by only one specimen, 
its length being about 10 mm., and its diameter about 3 mm. The 
specimen forms a cylindrical tube, and is furnished with a_ short 
ciliary tube of long acerate spicules. The outer surface is slightly 
roughened, and the central cloaca is nearly as long as the sponge. 

The colour is creamy white in the dried state. The skeleton consists 
of triradiate and quadriradiate spicules with large acerate spicules 
projecting from the dermis and peristome. 

The triradiate spicules are the most numerous, and most variable 
in size and form. The rays are of different lengths, and in some spi- 
cules are curved, while in others they are straight. 

The quadriradiate spicules are very few in number, and the propor- 
tion of the apical rays to the others is about as 2: 1. 


4 CONRAD FRISTEDT. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


The acerate spicules are very long, and generally straight, though 
occasionally slightly curved. 

According to Bowerbank (Brit. Spongiade, Vol. IV) the geographical 
distribution of this sponge is Greenland, Spitsbergen, Norway, the Faroe 
Islands, Newfoundland, the Great Belt and Heligoland. (There is no 
calcispongia from the west coast of Greenland in the state zoological 
museum in Stockholm.) I was at first inclined to believe that this 
sponge might be a new species, on account of the very small number 
of quadriradiate spicules, or possibly a variable form of Ascandra 
mirabilis Fristept (Sponges from the Atlantic and Arctic Oceans and 
the Behring Sea, p. 406, pl. 22, figs. 3—13, pl. 26, figs. 1&2), but the 
absence of the smaller acerate spicules (loc. cit. figs. 5 & 6), and the 
great resemblance to Sycandra ciliata, H. induced me to identify this 
species with the above-mentioned S. ciliata. 


Chalina Grant. 


Chalina limbata Bow. 
Spongia limbata Monracu (Vern. Mem. IJ, 111, pl. 15, 

figs. 2 & 3). 

Chalina limbata Bowerbank (Monograph Brit. Spongiade I, 

p. 378). 

There are two specimens of this species in the collection from Elles- 
mere Land, probably two fragments of one specimen. The larger of the 
two pieces is about 40 mm. in length, and 22 mm. in breadth, the thick- 
ness being 20 mm. It is furnished with only one osculum, the diameter 
of which is 3 mm. The smaller of the specimens has two oscula, both 
of which measure 2 mm. in diameter. The consistency of the sponge 
is exceedingly soft. The surface is slightly hispid, owing to the pro- 
jection of the dermal spicules. The dermal membrane is very thin and 
pellucid. The sarcode is rather abundant, and of a brown colour. The 
pores are scattered all over the surface. 

The colour of the sponge, both when preserved in spirit and when 
dry, is light brown. 

The skeleton consists of spiculous fibres. The spicules of the softer 
membranes and the fibres are similar; namely, acerate, slightly curved 
and short-pointed. There are very few acuate spicules. 

The above-described specimens agree fairly well with Bowerbank’s 
description of Chalina limbata Bow., but the fibres of the specimens 


1898— 1902. No. 23] SPONGES. | 5 


from Ellesmere Land have often only one or two spicules, while the 
fibres described by Bowerbank are furnished with numerous spicules. 
There is also a little difference in the form of the spicules, those in the 
present specimens not being so acutely pointed as those in Bowerbank’s 
specimens from Great Britain, and in specimens from the west coast of 
Sweden; but I suppose that the difference is only owing to the locality. 


It is self-evident that from the specimens described above, no con- 
clusions can be drawn with regard to the sponge-fauna of the coast of 
Ellesmere Land. A few more dredgings would no doubt give very inte- 
resting results. In “Sponges from the Atlantic and Arctic Oceans and 
the Behring Sea”, I have described not less than 15 species from the 
west coast of Greenland, belonging to the genera Hyalonema Gray, 
Amorphina 0. S., Isodictya Bow., Suberites Nardo, Tethya Lmk., 
Desmacella O. S., Cornulum Carter, Esperia Nardo, Cladorhiza, 
Wyv. Tuoms., Clathria O. S., and Aginella O. S. 

I am sure that many of these are to be found off the coast of 
Ellesmere Land; and if it could be more perfectly explored, we should 
learn the northern limit of some at least of the above-mentioned genera. 

In the collection sent to me, I found a few very large acerate spi- 
cules of some sponge attached to an ascidia. They may possibly have 
belonged to a member of the genus Hyalonema. 


Printed Oct. 9, 1909. 


RE Pe 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 


IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 24. 


FREDRIK INGVARSON: 


DIE TREIBHOLZER 


AUF DEM 


ELLESMERE-LAND 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISITANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1910 


Einleitung. 


“WV ahrend der Sverprup’schen Polarexpedition 1898—1902 wurden 
an verschiedenen Orten auf dem Ellesmere-Land etwa vierzig Proben 
von Treibhélzern eingesammelt, die der Verfasser im Auftrage des Herrn 
Professor N. Witte untersucht und hinsichtlich ihrer Art und ihres 
Ursprungs zu bestimmen versucht hat. Vorliegender Aufsatz enthiilt 
einen Bericht tiber diese Untersuchungen. 

Dem Botaniker der Sverprup’schen Expedition, Herrn Docenten 
H. G. Smmons aus Lund, will ich hiermit fir freundliche Hilfeleistung 
in der Litteratur und auch fiir wertvolle Auskiinfte hinsichtlich der 
Strémungsverhaltnisse am Ellesmere-Land meinen aufrichtigen Dank 
sagen. 

Den hocharktischen Lindern fehlt es bekanntlich vollstindig an 
Waldern und Baumen; ihre Kiisten werden aber oft genug von gris- 
seren oder kleineren Holzfléssen blockiert, die aus einer bunten Mischung 
von Baumstammen, Wurzeln, Asten und Rindenstiicken zusammengesetzt 
sind. Bisweilen liegen diese Flisse von Treibhélzern oberhalb des Ufer- 
randes verankert, wahrscheinlich den Hochwasserstand angebend oder die 
Hohe, bis zu welcher sie das Treibeis hinaufgeschoben hat. Sogar auf 
einer Héhe von mehreren Metern tiber dem jetzigen Ufer kann man 
Treibhélzer antreffen, welche also von einer Zeit stammen miissen, da 
das Meer hdher als jetzt stand. Naruorsr erzéhlt in seiner Arbeit: 
»Tva somrar i Norra Ishafvet“, man hatte sogar in einer Héhe von 
39 Metern iiber dem Meere einen erossen Stamm gesehen, der mehrere 
tausend Jahre dort gelegen haben muss, ohne vermodert zu sein, ein 
eigentiimlicher Beweis der Langsamkeit, mit welcher Holz in den ark- 
tischen Gegenden vermodert. Auf einer Kiesterrasse in der Hihe von 
200—300 Fuss iiber dem Meere an der Westkiiste des Ellesmere- 
Landes wurde von der Sverprup’schen Polarexpedition Treibholz ange- 
troffen. — Nicht immer kommen doch die Treibhélzer in so grossen 


4 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Massen vor, dass man von denselben sagen kann, sie hilden Holz- 
flisse. Oft genug ist es nur eine geringe Anzahl Stamme oder Wurzeln, 
die an der Kite gestrandet sind oder im Wasser umherschwimmen. 
Heutzutage sind diese Holzflisse, die an den Kiisten des Eismeeres 
hier und da gestrandet, ihrer Zusammensetzung und ihrem Ursprunge 
nach sehr wohl gekannt. Man weiss also, dass sie aus fernen, waldigen 
Landern stammen und mit den Meeresstrémen, speciell mit dem Polar- 
strom, als Transportmittel den fernen Verankerungsort in einem der Busen 
und Sunde des Eismeeres erreicht haben. Die Walder Nordsibiriens 
Jangs einem der treibholzfithrenden Fliisse Jenissei oder Lena haben 
das Material zu den meisten derselben geliefert. Keiner hat phantasie- 
reicher als NatHorst die abenteuerliche Fahrt eines solchen Holzflosses 
zwischen der Mutterkiste und dem Havarieplatz geschildert: ,In der 
Alten Welt, im Urwalde Sibiriens, auf dem hohen Ufer eines der grossen 
Flisse ist der Baum aufgewachsen. Eines Tages aber, als der Sturm 
durch den Wald brauste, ward er mit seinen Wurzeln aufgerissen und 
stiirzte den Abhang hinab. Vielleicht gingen die Holzhauer spater vorbei 
und priften mit ihren Axten, ob der Baum frisch sei. Als aber die 
Flut stieg, wurde der Baum mit ihr gegen das Eismeer gefiihrt, und da 
fing eine neue wunderbare Fahrt an. Vielleicht trieb der Stamm, dessen 
Aste und Rinde nach und nach verloren gegangen, vom Kis umschlossen, 
tber den Pol selbst hin, das Ziel der fruchtlosen Anstrengungen so vieler 
Menschen. Dann folgte er mit dem Polarstrome siidwarts langs der 
Ostkiiste Gronlands und blieb vielleicht endlich in der Neuen Welt, an 
der baumlosen Kiiste des siidwestlichen Grénlands liegen, wo der Eskimo 
ihn beim Verfertigen von Booten, Schlitten oder Jagdgeraten benutzte“. 
Durch die anatomischen Untersuchungen arktischen Treibholzes von 
Acarpu !, Wiesner 2, Norpiincer °, Kraus *, ORTENBLAD ®, SCHNEIDER °, 


1 J. G. Acarvu, Om den Spetsbergska drifvedens ursprung. (Ofversikt av Kongl. 
Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. 1870, No, 2.) 

2 J. Wiesner, Untersuchung einiger Treibhélzer aus dem niérdlichen Eismeere. 
(Sitzungsber. der Mathem.-Naturw. Classe der Kaiserl. Akad. der Wizsensele in 
Wien. Band LXV, Abt. I, 1872.) 

8 H. Nérpuwerr, Th. von Heuglins Treibholz-SSammlung von Novaja Semlja. (Geo- 
graph. Mitteil. A. Petermann, 1873, Band 19.) 

4 G, Kraus, Untersuchung von Treibhélzern aus Novaja Semlja. (Botan. Zeitung 1873) 

a Treibhélzer. (Die zweite deutsche Nordpolarfahrt 1869 und 1870, Band II.) 
_ Uber die Abstammung der auf der IL. deutschen Nordpolarexp. gesam- 
melten Treibhélzer. (Botan. Zeitung 1872.) 

5 V. Tu. Orrensrav, Om Sydgrénlands drifved. (Bihang till Kgl. Sv. Vet. Akad. 
Handl., Band 6, No. 10). 

6 J. Scunewer, Untersuchungen einiger Treibhélzer von der Insel Jan Mayen 
(Die internationale Polarforschung 1882—1883. Die Osterreichische Polarstation 
Jan Mayen. Bd. III. Wien 1886.) 


1898 — 1902. No. 24.) DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 5 


LinpMaNn ' und dem Verfasser? sind die Bahnen der arktischen Treib- 
holastréme ziemlich wohl bekannt und fixiert. Es giebt aber zwei Haupt- 
stréme, von welchen der eine viel michtiger als der andere ist. Jener 
fallt mit dem Polarstrom, dieser aber mit der Verbreitung des Golf- 
stromes in arktischem Wasser zusammen. 


Der polare Treibhélzerstrom oder, wie er auch genannt wird, 
der sibirische Treibhélzerstrom, entrinnt in einem der Flisse Nord- 
sibiriens, dem Jenissei oder der Lena, tangiert in seiner Fortsetzung 
Novaja Semlja, das Franz-Josephs-Land, Spitzbergen, 
Beeren Eiland, die Ostkiste Grinlands. Nordwestlich von Island 
verzweigt sich der Strom in zwei Strémungen: die grénlandische 
Strémung, welche den Danmarks-Sund passiert und stidwarts lings 
der Ostktiste Grénlands bis an dessen siidlichste Landspitze, Cape 
Farewell, fortsetzt, wo sie gegen Norden abbiegt, und der siidwest- 
lichen Kiiste Grénlands folgt bis an einen noérdlichen Breitengrad von 
62°25’, den nérdlichsten Punkt, an welchem Treibhélzer eingesammelt 
worden sind; und die islindische Strémung, welche zwischen Jan 
Mayen und Island gegen SO. bis zu den Farinseln dringt. 

Die andere Hauptstrémung aber, die, wie oben gesagt, mit 
dem Golfstrom teilweise zusammenfallt, hat nach den Untersuchungen 
Linpmans seinen Ursprung in der Miindung des St. Lawrence-Flusses 
und seine Hauptniederlage an der westlichen Kiiste Norwegens. Darauf 
setzt sie nordwarts in das Eismeer fort und tangiert Spitzbergen und 
Novaja Semlja. Im KEismeere giebt es zahlreiche Kontaktpunkte 
zwischen den beiden Hauptstrémungen. Von ihrer Lage bekommt man 
eine deutliche Vorstellung bei einem Blick auf die Strimungskarte, die 
in der Abhandlung Perrersson’s? ,,Om drifisen i norra Ishafvet“ aufge- 
nommen ist. In diesen Kontaktpunkten kénnen Treibprodukte vom einen 
zum anderen Strome iwberfiihrt werden. Dadurch kénnen also  sibi- 
rische Treibprodukte auf Kisten, die vom Golfstrom tangiert sind, 
abgesetzt werden, und Produkte des Golfstromes kénnen nach Ufern 
gefiihrt werden, die nur mit dem Polarstrom in Kontakt stehen. 


1C. Linpmay, Om drifved och andra af hafsstrémmar uppkastade naturféremal 
vid Norges kuster. (Géteborgs Kongl. Vetenskaps- och Vitterhets-Samhiilles Handl., 
18de hiiftet, Goteborg . 1883.) 

2 F. Incvarson, Om drifveden i Norra Ishafvet. (Kongl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. 
Band 37, No. 1.) 

3 OQ. Perrersson, Om drifisen i norra Ishafvet. (Ymer, tidskrift utgifven af Svenska 
Sallskapet fér Antropologi och Geografi, 20de Argangen, 2dra hiiftet, 1900, S. 177, 
fig. 8.) 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


FREDRIK INGVARSON. 


Nach diesem orientierenden Uberblick der 
Nordlichen Eismeere und im Atlantischen Ocean wird hier unten ein 


im 


Treibhélzerbahnen 


Tableau! tber die Zusammensetzung des in denselben enthaltenen Treib- 


holzmateriales geliefert. 


‘DrLvdnIny sng..og 
snsoolntf sajsvury 
‘ynuasy snndog 
Ing 

‘sUpUIUIA “Sy 


“papunjuad 
Jepo nasdno xyvg 


‘paquiaa ‘q 


‘SLusaans snutg 


‘D.ugS Sag 


14JDA0GO HANIT 


“DIULQys LLM 


‘DUDIUOUL SHU 
‘prspdnony sng.og 
‘DuUnoUL SHUT 
DSOINLLad “| 
‘DID.LOpO DINIE_ 
‘pynuay snindog 
“DQIY “S! 

‘sypbn.wf “g 


‘Dipunjuad x1nG 


‘SL.usanyis snutT 


‘psja0va DAI 


‘ponuoiidng 


‘yoor 
-wy9 wojhixojynmayH 


‘Dyn.LOpO 01a1paD 


sisuardississyy ‘9 


‘syoquapio00 81499 


‘sIsualLnUnd snug 
‘sngo.ys snurg 


¢ DGD DBT 


DUDIVNOUD LLIO'T 


“TaZpoyqueyT 


“192104 [PEN 


“IezjoyqneT 


"192[9Y]9PEN 


‘razjQyquey 


“1IZ[QUIpeN 


‘STOSSIUGL Sep sunpuny, Jep sny 


‘sSunidsip) uayostsami1onNy 


‘sSunidsig) uayosiueyiewy 


‘ayynpordiazpoyqtery, 
ee eres 


‘ayynpordswoazsyjoy 


1 Dieses Tableau hat der Verf. auf der Grundlage vorher angefiihrter Arbeiten 


tiber die Treibhélzer aufgestellt. 


1898-1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 7 


Diese sind die Gattungen und Arten, welche unter den Treibhélzern 
angetroffen worden sind. Ausserdem sind Friichte und Samen, Fanggerit- 
schaften, Werkzeuge, Wrackreste u. a. unter denselben gefunden worden. — 
Ein besonderes Interesse kniipft sich an diesem so zu sagen kombinierten 
Samen- und Treibhélzertransport an, welcher in diesen Regionen bis- 
weilen stattzufinden scheint. In den Spalten der Treibholzerstiicke sind 
also Friichte und Samen verschiedener Pflanzen vorgefunden worden. 
(Ksettman}, der Verf. 2). 

Charakteristisch fiir die meisten Nadelhilzer, sei es, dass sie ameri- 
kanischen oder sibirischen Ursprungs sind, ist der geringe Mittelwert von 
der Breite der Jahrringe. 

Linpman ® hat demmach gefunden, dass der Mittelwert von 14 Mes- 
sungen des Stammholzes der Larix americana 0,9 mm. ist. 

OrTENBLAD + — 31 Messungen — Larix sibirica, Picea obovata 
— Stamm- und Wurzelholz — 0,9 mm. 

Der Verf.®> — 31 Messungen — Larix sibirica, Picea obovata 
(wahrscheinlich auch Picea eaxcelsa, norwegischen Ursprungs) — Stamm- 
holz — 1,17 mm. 

In allen bisher untersuchten Treibhélzersammlungen hat es sich er- 
wiesen, dass die Nadelhélzerproben der Anzahl nach den Laubhdlzer- 
proben weit tiberlegen gewesen sind. Dieser Umstand diirfte wohl ausserst 
davon abhangen, dass die Treibhélzer aus waldigen Gegenden mit einer 
tberwiegenden Anzahl von Nadelhélzern stammen, aber es dirfte auch 
— und zwar nicht zum geringsten Teile — durch die ungleiche Trans- 
portdienlichkeit der beiden Holzarten in Wasser erklart werden kénnen. 
Das Nadelholz durfte dank seiner Harte, Starke und seinem grossen 
Reichtum an Harz, welches alle befindlichen Porositaéten impragniert und 
zustopft, weit mehr zu einem langwierigen Wassertransport geeignet 
sein, als zahlreiche Laubhiélzer, wie die Sahlweide, die Pappel u. a., deren 
Holz bedeutend mehr pords und harzarm ist, und denen es darum so 
zu sagen an Harzpropfen fir alle die zahlreichen und grossen Kanile 
mangelt. die das Innere des Holzes durchziehen. Infolgedessen dirfte 
dieses Holz leichter als Nadelholz von Wasser durchtrinkt werden und 
sinken. 


1F, R. Kserumay, Fanerogamfloran pa Novaja Semlja, och Wateatscu, Vega- 
expeditionens vetenskapliga iakttagelser, I bd., sid. 351, Stockholm 1882. 
2 F. Inevarson |. c. p. 82. 

3 Linpman, I. ¢. p. 27. 

4 Orrensiap, |. ¢. p. 7. 

5 Inevarson, |. c. p. ‘60. 


8 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Einige Ziffern, welche die Proportion zwischen Nadelhélzern und 
Laubhdlzern in verschiedenen Treibhélzersammlungen beleuchten, werden 
im nachstehenden Schema angefihrt. , 


Gréss 
der ° Nadel- Laub- Fundort. 
Saminlunies hélzer. | hélzer. 
933 175 58 Nordéstliches Grénland. (Vom Verf. untersucht.) 
172 150 22 Spitzbergen mit umliegenden Inseln. (Verf.) 
429 96 95 Siidliches Gronland. (Orrensxap.) 
39 31 8 Jan Mayen. (Verf.) 
%5 22 3 Ostliches Gronland. (Kravs.) 
18 18 0 Spitzbergen. (Acarpu.) 


Die Treibhélzer auf dem Ellesmere-Land. 
Fundorte. 


Diese sind in aller Kirze die bisher gekannten Sachverhialtnisse 
betreffend die Transportbahnen, den Ursprung, die Zusammensetzung 
der arktischen Treibhélzer. Ein weiterer Beitrag zu diesen Fragen wird 
von den Treibhélzern geliefert, welche von der SveRpRup’schen Polar- 
expedition am Ellesmere-Land 1898—1902 eingesammelt worden sind. 
Die Einsammlung dieser Proben ist zum aller gréssten Teile von Smmmons - 
gemacht. An 8 verschiedenen Orten wurden Treibhélzerproben ange- 
troffen. Hier unten wird ein Bericht der Namen und der Lage dieser 
Fundorte geliefert, nebst den’ Nummern der Treibhélzerproben, welche 
da eingesammelt worden sind. 


No. 2986. Die Gansebucht. (,Gaasefjorden“.) 


» 2840. do. 

» 2985. do. 

» 3239. do. 

» 3802. do. 

» 2987, do. 

» 2763. do. oberhalb der Flutlinie. 
~ 2661. do. 

» 2984. do. 

» 2014. do. 

» 2015. do. oberhalb der Flutlinie. 


» 2417. Ostlich von der Miindung der Bootsbucht (,Baads- 
fjorden“) auf einer Kiesterrasse ein paar Meter oberhalb 
der Flutlinie. 

» 2115. do. do. 


1898—1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 9 


No. 1247. Die Alexandrabucht. 
» 2041. Die Siidkapsbucht ca. 5 Meter oberhalb der Flutlinie. 
» 2839. Die dussere Walrossbucht (,Hvalrosfjorden“) ober- 
halb der Flutlinie. 
» 2116. Die Moskusbucht. 
» 3966. N. Devon, der Belcherberg am Cardigan-Sund. 
» 689. Siidlich von der Bays Bucht, an der Westkiiste vom 
Ellesmere-Land, auf einer Kiesterrasse in einer Héhe - 


von 200—300 Fuss tiber dem Meere. 


Nur 1 Probe ist von der Westkiiste des Ellesmere-Lands mit- 
genommen worden, naimlich die Probe No. 689, vom Rittmeister IsacHseN 
stidich von der Bays-Bucht gefunden, Sie lag, wie oben erwahnt, 
auf einer Kiesterrasse, deren Hihe tiber dem Meere man von 200 bis 
300 Fuss schatzt, und zwar nicht isoliert, sondern einer grésseren Treib- 
hélzersammlung angehérend. Leider hatte IsacHsen keine Gelegenheit 
mehr als diese einzige Probe mitzunehmen. Von der Ostkiste des 
Ellesmere-Landes hat man auch nur 1 Probe erhalten. Sie wurde 
von Simmons in der Alexandrabucht gefunden. Eine Probe hat man 
von N. Devon, vom Belcher-Berge am Cardigan-Sund erhalten. 
Alle ubrigen Proben sind in Buchten im westlichen Teile des Jones- 
Sundes genommen. 

Die zusammengebrachte Treibhélzersammlung besteht aus etwa 
zwanzig Nummern mit ca. 40 verschiedenen Proben. Wenn eine Num- 
mer mehrere verschiedene Proben umfasst, sind diese vom Verf. mit 
Buchstaben bezeichinet. 

Ausser drei unter der Nummer 2116 in der Moskus-Bucht einge- 
sammelten Proben, die an der Aussenseite Spuren von menschlicher Be- 
arbeitung zeigten, und somit aus der Treibhdlzersammlung forteliminiert 
werden mussten, erwiesen sich alle als typische Treibhélzerproben. 
Sie bestanden teils aus kirzeren Stammsticken, welche an beiden Enden 
unebene Bruchflachen zeigten und deren Aste nahe am Stamme abgenutzt 
waren, teils aus grésseren oder kleineren, aus einem grésseren Stocke 
tangentiell abgesprengten Holzsplittern, teils aus Stamm- und Wurzel- 
asten. Das Aussere des Holzes war glatt, bisweilen glinzend und von 
graulichem Farbentone, welcher bei einigen Proben in reines Silberweiss 
hintitberging, ein Kennzeichen, welches darauf deutet, dass die Treib- 
hélzer lange im Wasser gelegen haben. Samtliche Proben, mit 
Ausnahme von zwei, erwiesen sich als Nadelhdlzer. Die 
Laubhélzerproben wurden beide in der Gansebucht (,, Gaasefjorden“) 
angetroffen. 


10 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Die Treibhélzersammlung von Ellesmere-Land scheint also hin- 
sichtlich der Proportion zwischen Nadelhélzern und Laubhdélzern den- 
selben Gesetzen wie die ibrigen. Treibhélzersammlungen zu folgen. 


(Siehe p. 8.) 
Breite der Jahrringe. 


Auch in anderen Beziehungen als in den oben erwihnten herrscht 
Ahnlichkeit zwischen dieser und anderen Treibhélzersammlungen. Der 
Mittelwert der Jahrringe im Stammholz der Nadelbiume ist also ausser- 
ordentlich gering und deutet darauf, dass die Mutterbaiume in einem 
arktischen Klima gewachsen sind. Im beigefiigten Schema wird eine 
Totaliibersicht iber die Mittelbreite der Jahrringe in Wurzel und 
Stamm der Nadelhélzer geliefert. Alle Masse sind in mm. angegeben. 


Tabelle iiber die Mittelbreite der Jahrringe: Stamm- u. Wurzelholz. 


é| 55 lg sslS| 
fe | oe eee ale 
Ga | Se | es leas Ey ¢ Anmerkungen. 
z SE Pe SSE Els 
ah ae Lee ie 23) 2 lS 
ze | 43 |Sc s5\n|5 
mm. mm. 7 
2640 B 45 15 | 0383) 1) - | Stammfragment, centrale Jahrringe fehlen. 
1949 ea.s0| 29 | 030/11 - ee mit centralen Jahrringen 
(Alexandra Bucht). 
2640C |) 35 15 | 042; 1 - | Stammfragment, centrale Jahrringe fehlen. 
2640E | 26 12 | 046 1) - +3 7 
| Radius der 50 centralen Jahrringe = 20 mm. 
9640A |.115 | 55 047) 1) - | {Radius der 50 folgenden Jahrringe = 25 mm. 
Radius der 15 dussersten Jahrringe = 10 mm. 
2640 D 83 42 | 0,51 1) - | Stammfragment, centrale Jahrringe fehlen. 
2840B | 26 20 | 0,76) 1! - 4 5 
2115 47 | 8 | 0,74] 1 | - 7 " 
2763 36 29 | 0,81 | 1 é am 
9640 F 50 40 08 | 1) - | Stammfragment mit centralen Jahrringen. 
689B |e:a.25 | 35 | 14 | 4) - " » Bays: Bach 
Holz sehr vermodert. 
2117 19 40 | 210) 1) - | Stammfragm. mit wahrsch, intermediaren Jahrringen. 
2984 17 40 | 235 1) -  Stammstock noch im Besitze des Marks; Holz weiss. 
2985B | 28 56 | 2438 1 | - ‘ * ‘ 
2839 =} era. 75 | 40 | 0,53 | - | 1) Der langste Radius 40mm.; der kiirzeste Radius 17 mm. 
9840 4 31 | og2|- 1/4 4 »  984mm.; - P 10 mm. 
\Holz intensiv rotgefiirbt. 
Q0I5A (ea. 86} 46 | 1,27) -/1 Holz rétlich. 
2987A 380 | 60 | 2 - | 1] Holz intensiv rotgefirbt. 
Bose & es |120 | 2.08 1 . _ ; der langste Radius 130 mm. 
: Der kiirzeste Radius 20 mm. 


1898—1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 11 


Wie die Tabelle zeigt, ist die Mittelbreite der Jahrringe fur die resp. 
Stammholzproben im allgemeinen sehr gering. Die Grenzwerte sind 
0,33 mm. und 2,43 mm. Die meisten Proben sind indessen nur Frag- 
mente, entweder von den dusseren periferen oder den inneren centralen 
Teilen des Stammes, und enthalten nur eine geringe Anzahl von den 
Jahrringen des Mutterbaumes. Eine solehe Probe kann also kaum den 
korrekten Wert fiir die Mittelbreite samtlicher Jahrringe des betreffenden 
Mutterbaumes geben. Werden namlich nur die periferen und somit die 
schmilsten Jahrringe eines Baumes der Berechnung vom Mittelwert 
der simtlichen Jahrringe des Mutterbaumes zu Grunde gelegt, so wird 
dieser Wert wahrscheinlich zu gering, wie anderseits ein Wert zu hoch 
wird, der nur auf der Berechnung von den breiteren, also den inter- 
mediiren Jahrringen eines Baumes basiert wird. Man dirfte daher 
einem wirklichen Normalmittelwert am néchsten kommen, indem man 
das aritmetische Medium von den respektiven Mittelwerten siémtlicher 
Proben berechnet. Der Normalmittelwert zeigte sich dann 0,99 mm. zu 
sein. (Nach 14 Proben berechnet.) 

Denselben Mittelwert erhielt OrTensLap bei seinen Messungen an 
Treibhélzern aus dem siidwestlichen Grénland. Fir das Stammholz be- 
rechnet dirfte doch dieser Wert zu hoch sein, weil ORTENBLAD zwischen 
Stamm- und Wurzelholz keinen Unterschied gemacht hat, was aller 
Wahrscheinlichkeit nach fiir das Stammholz ein noch geringeres Resultat 
gegeben hitte. 

Nach der Tabelle des Verf.1, welche sich auf die Treibhélzer aus 
Spitzbergen, Jan Mayen und dem nordéstlichen Grénland (die Nar- 
Horst’ sche Treibhélzersammlung) bezieht, waren die Grenzwerte fir Stamm- 
holz 0,45 mm. und 2,6 mm., der Mittelwert 1,17 mm. (nach 31 Proben 
berechnet). Auch dieser Wert dirfte als Normalmittelwert betrachtet 
zu hoch sein, weil die Messungen nur an solchen Proben gemacht 
worden sind, welche den stirksten Zuwachs anzeigten. Zablreiche Proben 
miissen ausser Berechnung gelassen werden, weil die Jahrringe so schmal 
waren, dass ihre Anzahl nicht mit Loupe geschatzt werden konnte. 

Fur die Jahrringe des Wurzelholzes waren die Grenzwerte 0,53 mm., 
203 mm.; der Mittelwert 1,33 mm. (nach 5 Proben berechnet). In der 
Tabelle des Verf. tber Wurzelholz in der Treibhélzersammlung Nat- 
Horst?’s waren die Grenzwerte 0,31 mm., 5,2 mm.; der Mittelwert 1,38 mm. 
(nach 17 Proben berechnet). 

In beiden diesen Treibhilzersammlungen (in der Sverprur’schen 


und der NarHorst’schen) sowohl als in den tbrigen, wo man zwischen 


1 Inevarson 1. e. p. 60. 


12 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Wurzelholz und Stammbholz einen Unterschied gemacht hat (LinpMan, 
Kraus), hat es sich erwiesen, dass der Wert fir die Mittelbreite der 
Jahrringe grésser im Wurzelholz als im Stammbholz ist. Diese Berech- 
nungen beziehen sich besonders auf die Lirchen. 


Systematische Bestimmung der Treibhélzerproben. 


I. Nadelh6lzer. 


Mit Ausnahme von zwei Proben waren, wie oben erwihnt, simtliche 
Treibhélzerproben Nadelhélzer. Bei der mikroskopischen Untersuchung 
hat es sich erwiesen, dass alle diese Nadelhélzer zu demselben anato- 
mischen Typus, namlich zum Laria-Picea-Typus, gerechnet werden 
konnten. Dieser Typus wird bekanntlich von folgenden histologischen 
Charakteren gekennzeichnet: Harzkanile von zwei Arten, teils vertikal 
zwischen den Holzzellen, teils horizontal innerhalb der spulférmigen Mark- 
strahlen. Markstrahlen tangentiell, teils einreihig, teils mehrreihig (spul- 
formig). Markstrahl teils aus: tracheidalen, teils aus parenchymatischen 
Elementen bestehend. Die parenchymatischen Elemente mit kleinen 
elliptischen oder runden Tipfeln versehen, gewohnlich 4—6 auf der vier- 
eckigen Wandfliche, welche entsteht, wo ein Markstrahl einen Tracheid 
kreuzt. 

Der Larix-Picea-Typus enthalt bekanntlich zwei Gattungen: Larix, 
Picea. Das Holz dieser beiden Gattungen durch eine vollig zuverlassige 
histologische Diagnose zu unterscheiden ist in Betracht des grossen 
Unterschieds, welcher zwischen diesen in morphologischer Hinsicht 
herrscht, seit langer Zeit ein ersehntes Ziel gewesen, auf dessen Ver- 
wirklichung eine grosse Arbeit verwendet worden ist. In meiner friiher 
citierten Arbeit liegt ein ausfihrlicher Bericht tiber diese Untersuchungen 
vor. Die eigenen Untersuchungen des Verfassers in dieser Sache be- 
ziehen sich auf die Struktur der Hoftiipfel in den Wassermarkstrahl- 
zellen des Stammholzes. Nur Stammholz — weder Ast- noch Wurzel- 
holz — wurde untersucht. Untersuchte Arten waren Larix europea 
DC., L. americana Micux., L. sibirica Lepes., Picea excelsa Linx. 
Ich unterschied zwei Tiipfelformen, namlich den Lariav-Tipfel und 
den Picea-Tiipfel, von welchem der erstere die Lirche, der letztere die 
Fichte charakterisiert. Die Struktur dieser Tipfelformen habe ich an 
Radialschnitten des Holzes, aber nur an typischem Frihholz, wahrge- 


1898—1902. No. 24.) DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 13 


nommen, und an solchen Durchschnittsbildern, welche den Tiipfel in 
seiner Mittelachse, d. h. diametral, durchgeschnitten zeigten!. War der 
Schnitt nicht diametral, sondern neben dem Durchmesser des Tiipfels 
angebracht, erschien die Tiipfelmiindung kleiner und enger. 

Da ich in meiner friher citierten Arbeit? die Tupfelformen be- 
schrieben habe, will ich hier unten ihre Struktur nur in aller Kirze 
rekapitulieren : 

Im Larix-Tipfel ist die Tipfel-Miindung weit mit relativ dinner 
und feiner Tipfelnaht; der Picea-Tiipfel aber besitzt enge Tupfelmiin- 
_dung mit relativ dicker und grober Tiipfelnaht. In dem Lariax-Tiipfel 
habe ich gefunden, dass die Mittelproportion zwischen den Durchmessern 
der Schliesshaut und der Tiipfelmiindung oder, mit andern Worten, dass 
die Mittelproportion zwischen den Durchmessern des ausseren und des 
inneren Tipfelkreises 2,65: 1 ist, fiir den Picea-Tiipfel aber 8,62 : 1, 
wobei der Durchmesser des inneren Tupfelkreises, das heisst der Tiipfel- 
miindung, als Einer gesetzt worden ist. — Mit diesen Messungen habe 
ich meine Auffassung angeben wollen, dass im Lariv-Tipfel der Durch- 
messer des dusseren Tupfelkreises im Verhiltnis zu dem des inneren 
kleiner als im Picea-Tiipfel ist. 

Gegen die Aufstellung von diesen Tiipfelformen sind von 0. G. 
Perersen? Einwendungen gemacht worden. Er hat zwar die eine so- 
wohl als die andere Tupfelform wahrnehmen kinnen, aber er hat sie 
nicht konstant gefunden, sondern in einander tbergehend. An den Text- 
figuren, die seiner Arbeit (p. 67) beigefiigt sind, hat er also den Laria- 
Tiipfel des Verfassers an den Bildern [a., Ib. konstatiert (,,Tager vi 
f. Eks. Lariwv-Billederne a. och b., vil den angivne karakter treede ret 
tydeligt frem ved Sammenligning med flere av Picea-Billederne“) und 
den Picea-Tiipfel an den Bildern ILb., If f. (,Av Picea-Billederne er 
vel b. og £. de mest karakteristiske; de ovrige forekommer mig egentlig 
ikke videre egnede til at anskueliggjore den nevnte Forskel*.) 

Gegen diese Ausserung Perersen’s will ich betonen, dass ich diesen 
Formen selbst absolute Konstanz nicht guerkannt habe, was aus fol- 
gendem Citat aus meiner Arbeit p. 26 hervorgehen dirfte: ,Dessa por- 
former aro tamligen‘ konstanta, atminstone betraffande Pécea-poren; 


1 In einem diametralen Durchschnittsbild tritt der Torus deutlich hervor, in einem 
Umfang grosser als der Durchmesser der Tipfelmiindung. In Fig. 1, p. 9 in 
meiner frither citierten Arbeit ist der Torus durch Ubersehen nicht gezeichnet. 

2 Inevarson |. c. pp. 25, 26. 27. 

3 Perersen, Den diagnostiske adskillelse av rodgranens og lerkens ved. (Forst- 
botaniske Undersogelser 1906, S. 64.) 

4 Das Wort ist erst in vorliegender Arbeit gesperrt. 


14 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Larix-porens struktur ater synes 1 viss man betingas av cellvaiggarnas 
tjocklek“. Zwar habe ich mit diesen Worten zuerst hervorheben wollen, 
dass der Charakter des Larix-Tipfels, als Typus betrachtet, in den 
Wassermarkstrahlzellen des Spatholzes, welche gribere Zellwande als 
die des Frihholzes haben, ausgewischt wird, aber anderseits ist es 
ziemlich gewiss, dass der Typus in der intermediaéren Zone, welche in 
wohl entwickeltem Stammholz zwischen dem eigentlichen Frih- und 
Spatholz oft vorhanden ist, wenn nicht direkt ausgewischt, so doch 
wenigstens geschwacht wird. Unzweifelhaft giebt es, wie es aus 
einigen der Bilder Perersen’s hervorgeht, auch im typischen Frithholz 
Ubergangsformen zwischen den Twpfeltypen. Mit anderen Worten, inter- 
mediare, fiir die Gattungsdiagnose vollstindig indifferente Tupfelformen 
giebt es bei sowohl Fichten als Larchen. Diese intermediaren Tiipfel- 
formen werden dadurch gekennzeichnet, dass die EKigenschaften, welche 
die Weite der Tiipfelmiindung, die Dicke der Tiipfelnaht und die Pro- 
portion zwischen den beiden Durchmessern der Tiipfelkreise bestimmen, 
nicht in derselben Weise wie bei den Extrem-Tupfeln kombiniert sind. 

Ein extremer Picea-Tiipfel hat also eine enge Tiipfelmiindung, eine 
dicke, grobe Tiipfelnaht und die Proportion zwischen den Durchmes- 
sern der Tiipfelkreise (5—13,9) : 14. 

Kin Ewtrem-Larixv-Tipfel hat eine weite Tiipfelmtindung, eine etwas 
zugespitzte Tiipfelnaht und die Proportion zwischen den Durchmessern 
der Tiipfelkreise (1,7—4) : 1. 

Intermediaére Formen aber haben entweder 1) enge Tiipfel- 
miindung (Picea-Charakter) und etwas zugespitzte Tiipfelnaht (Laria- 
Charakter) oder 2) weite Tiipfelmiindung (Lariw-Charakter) und dicke, 
grobe Tiipfelnaht (Picea-Charakter). 

Ich will gern einréumen, dass es wiinschenswert gewesen ware, wenn 
diese intermediaren Ttpfelformen in meiner friheren Arbeit ausdriick- 
licher hervorgehoben und genauer angegeben worden waren. Dass dies 
nicht geschehen ist, beruht darauf, dass der Verf. diese Tiipfelformen 
bei der Gattungsdiagnose nicht mit in Betracht genommen, sondern diese 
ausschliesslich auf den Extrem-Tiipfeln basiert hat. 

Unter den Figuren Perersen’s gibt es nur eine, welche nach der 
Ansicht des Verf. die Struktur des Laria-Tiipfels deutlich angiebt, namlich 
Fig. 1b (besonders der mittlere Tiipfel), und unter den Picea-Twipfeln 
ebenfalls nur einen Typus, namlich der mittlere Tupfel in Fig. II f£. — 
Fig. Il b méchte wohl zunachst einem Picea-Tiipfel entsprechen, ob- 
gleich sie uns das Bild eines typischen Picea-Tiipfels nicht giebt. Vor 


1 Vgl. die Angaben in meiner friiher angef. Arbeit, pp. 26, 27! 


1898— 1902. No, 24.) DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 15 


allen Dingen ist die Tupfelmiindung an der linken Seite der Figur etwas 
zu weit, ausserdem ist die betreffende Figur assymetrisch, insofern dass 
die rechte Tupfelhalfte der anderen nicht ganz ahnlich ist. 

Von allen den Figuren, die uns p. 67 in der Arbeit Perersen’s 
gegeben werden, hatte der Verf. also nur auf zwei die Gattungsdiagnose 
zu basieren gewagt, namlich auf Fig. Ib (Larix-Tipfel) und auf dem 
mittleren Tiipfel in Fig. II £. (Picea-Tipfel). Vergleichen wir diese beiden 
Figuren, von welchen ja nach der Ansicht des Verf. jede ihr Extrem 
reprisentiert, so sehen wir sogleich, dass sie einander sehr unadholich 
sind, dass eine Verwechselung zwischen ihnen kaum méglich ist. Aus 
dem Gesichtspunkte der Ahnlichkeit giebt es also wohl schwerlich ein 
Hindernis fir die Verwendung der resp. Extreme als ,,Gattungstipfel*. — 
Kine andere und zwar sehr bedenkliche Sache ware es, wenn von den 
beiden Tipfelformen nicht jede fi ihre Baumart typisch wire, sondern 
wenn sie vollstindig unregelmassig durcheinandergemischt vorkéimen. 
Nach der Ansicht des Verf. verhalt es sich doch nicht so. Wenigstens 
ist der Laria-Tupfel Fig. Ib fir Larix ganz besonders charakteristisch. 
Wie ich es von der Figurenkarte p. 67 verstanden habe, ist PETERSEN 
derselben Ansicht. Wenn wir namlich diese Karte etwas genauer unter- 
suchen, so finden wir bald, dass unter den Figuren der Gruppe II (Picea- 
Tupfel) keine vorkommt, welche mit Fig. Ib (= extremer Lari«-Tupfel) 
verwechselt werden kénnte. — Etwas bedenklicher stellt sich vielleicht 
die Sache hinsichtlich dem Picea-Tiipfel. Dieser diirfte vielleicht in 
seinem extremen Typus oder wenigstens in einer intermediaren Form, 
welche demselben sehr ahnelt, auch bei Larix vorkommen. Unzweifel- 
haft ist doch der Picea-Tiipfel fiir Picea charakteristisch, auch wenn 
er bei Larix sporadisch angetroffen werden kénnte. Diese Tiipfelform 
diirfte uns indessen keine so vollstindig sichere Diagnose der Picea 
wie der Laria-Tipfel der Larix geben kinnen. Der Verf. hat sich 
bei der Gattungsbestimmung dieser Methode bedient: Wenn Laria- 
Tupfel in grésserer Menge angetroffen wurden, dann wurde die Gattung 
als Laria festgestellt; wenn Larix-Tipfel vollstandig fehlten, Picea- 
Tupfel aber in reichlicher Menge vorkamen, wurde die Diagnose auf 
Picea festgestellt. 

Durch meine Messungen habe ich, wie oben erwahnt, beweisen 
wollen, dass im Laria-Tipfel der Durchmesser des ausseren Tupfel- 
kreises im Verhaltnis zu dem des inneren Tiipfelkreises kleiner als im 
Picea-Tiipfel ist. (Laria-Tipfel 2,65:1; Picea-Tiipfel 8,62: 1, wobet 
der Durchmesser des inneren Tuipfelkreises, das heisst der Tiipfelmindung, 
als Einer gesetzt worden ist). Durch seine Messungen hat PETERSEN 


16 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


diese meine Auffassung gewissermassen bestitigt. So hat er fir den 
Laria-Tipfel den Wert 7,68: 1, fir den Picea-Tipfel aber 8,61: 1 er- 
halten. Obwohl Persrsen also fiir den Lariax-Tipfel einen weit hoheren 
Wert als der Verf., und also einen weit geringeren Unterschied zwischen 
den beiden Galtungen in diesem Falle erhalten hat, so stimmen doch 
unsere resp. Messungen in der Hinsicht tberein, welche hier als das 
wesentliche betrachtet werden muss, nimlich darin, dass wir beide fir den 
Durchmesser des dusseren Tipfelkreises geringeren Wert bei Laria als 
bei Picea erhalten haben. 

Wie man sieht, existiert hinsichtlich des Larix-Tipfels ein bedeu- 
tender Unterschied in unseren Angaben. Médglicherweise beruht dies 
darauf, dass die Messungen PETERSEN’s, wie er selbst vermutet, nicht so 
zahlreich wie die des Verf. gewesen sind: ,[NGvarsons Maalinger er 
ganske vist paa dette specielle Punkt betydeligt talrigere end mine, men 
det har dog forekommet mig at vere nogen Grund til at navne disse“ © 
(p. 68), oder auch darauf, dass Perersen wahrscheinlich seine Messungen 
hauptséchlich auf die Mittelformen, der Verf. aber auf die Extreme 
basiert hat. Ware diese letztere Annahme die richtige, so miisste 
natirlich der Picea-Tiipfel in oben erwahnter Hinsicht viel weniger als 
der Lariax-Tipfel variieren. Wir hatten namlich fiir den Picea-Tipfel 
beinahe denselben Wert, fir den Larix-Tupfel aber verschiedene Werte 
erhalten. 

Vorausgesetzt, dass wir unsere Zellenmessungen auf verschiedene 
Tiipfelformen basiert haben: PrTersen auf die intermediiren, der Verf. 
auf die extremen — was meiner Ansicht nach héchst wahrscheinlich 
ist —, so dirfte wohl eine vergleichende Untersuchung ‘von unseren 
resp. Messungsresultaten eher zum Bestairken als zum Widerlegen 
meiner Auffassung hinsichtlich der Konstanz der Tipfelformen geeignet 
sein, wie diese in meiner friher citrerten Arbeit (p. 26) formuliert worden 
ist: ,Dessa porformer fro timligen konstanta, Atminstone hetraffande 
Picea-poren, Larix-porens struktur ater synes mig i viss man betingas 
av cellvaggarnas tjocklek“. 

Es sind keine neuen Untersuchungen, welche der Antwort auf die 
Kritik Perersen’s zu Grunde liegen, auch ist es keineswegs ein Versuch 
den Wert derselben zu vermindern. Der Verf. hat mit diesen Zeilen 
nur die Punkte seiner friheren Darstellung, die undeutlich waren oder 
missverstanden werden konnten, verdeutlichen und erkliren wollen, zum 
Beispiel die Fragen von der Konstanz der Tiipfelformen, von den Tipfel- 
formen, auf welche der Verf. die Gattungsdiagnose basiert hat. 


1898—1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE.-LAND. 17 


Der Verf. hat die Frage zu erneuerter Untersuchung nicht aufnehmen 

wollen, weil ihm Zeit und Gelegenheit dazu fehlten und vor allem, weil 
die erwahnten Tipfelformen, nach dem was schon in meiner friiheren 
Arbeit betont wurde, sich nur auf Stammholz, méglicherweise auch auf 
Wurzelholz, aber nicht auf Astholz beziehen. Die Tupfelformen werden 
also immer nur einen relativen Wert haben, auch wenn ihre Giiltigkeit 
hinsichtlich des Stammholzes noch so bestimmt festgestellt wurde. 
_ Whe die Sache jetzt steht, dirfte die Diagnose zwischen Larche und 
Fichte nicht nur auf einem Charakter basiert werden kénnen, der fir 
sowohl Stammholz und Wurzelholz als Astholz gilt. Es ist méglich, 
dass ein solcher nie aufgewiesen werden kann. Es scheint mir eher, 
als waren alle holzanatomischen Differenzen zwischen den in morpho- 
logischer Hinsicht so verschiedenen Holzarten nur graduell, zahlreiche 
Zwischenformen vermittelnd. Hiermit ist aber nicht gesagt, dass man 
in keinem Falle das Larchenholz vom Fichtenholz unterscheiden kénnte. 
Abgesehen von den obenerwahnten extremen Tiipfelformen giebt es in den 
Dimensions- und Formenverhaltnissen der Zellen gewisse Méglichkeiten, 
die beiden Baumarten zu unterscheiden. Das Holz von einem kréaftigen 
und tppigen Larchenstamme kann in der Regel unter dem Mikroskop 
vom Fichtenholz ohne Schwierigkeit unterschieden werden, Dank den 
kihnen und kraftigen Dimensionen, die seine histologischen Elemente 
auszeichnen. 

Von BurcersTeIn ! liegt eine monographische Arbeit in dieser Frage 
vor, in welcher er auf der Grundlage von Zellenmessungen Larchen von 
Fichten zu unterscheiden versucht. Er ist bei seinen Untersuchungen 
zu dem Resullat gekommen, dass eine histologische Diagnose nicht nur 
auf ein einzelnes Kennzeichen, wohl aber auf eine Kombination von 
mehreren Kennzeichen basiert werden kann. Diese Kennzeichen be- 
ziehen sich auf den radialen Querdurchmesser des Lumens der Frih- 
tracheiden auf die Verteilung der Hoftipfel an den Radialwanden der 
Frihtracheiden, auf die Mittelhéhe der parenchymatischen Markstrahl- 
zellen, auf die Mittelhohe der Markstrahlen (parenchymatische Elemente 
incl. Quertracheiden). Seine Beobachtungen hat er in eine analytische 
Bestimmungstabelle fir Fichten und Larchen zusammengefasst. Diese 
Tabelle wird hier unten zum Vergleiche mit den Messungen, die der 
Verf. auf arktischem Material angestellt hat, in extenso wiedergegeben. 

Mit Riicksicht auf meine Aufgabe, den Wachsort dieser Treibhélzer 
festzustellen, war es fir mich von grésster Bedeutung, wie ich spiter 

1 Burcersrein, Vergleichende anatomische Untersuchungen des. Fichten- und 


Larchenholzes (Denkschriften der Wiener Akademie, 60 Bd., 1893). 
9 


18 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


zeigen werde, diese beiden Baumarten unterscheiden zu kénnen. Oben- 
erwihnte Tiipfelformen (extreme Lari«-, resp. Picea-Tiipfel) hat der Verf. 
der Gattungsdiagnose nicht zu Grunde legen wollen, weil sie, wie schon 
gesagt, nur fiir Stammbholz gelten und ein nicht geringes Prozent dieser 
Treibhélzerproben aus Wurzelholz und Astholz bestehen, und auch weil 
der Wert der Tipfelformen als histologische Diagnose bestritten ist. 
Statt dessen hat der Verf. auf Grundlage von Zellenmessungen nach der 
analytischen Tabelle Burcerstein’s diese Baumarten von einander zu 
unterscheiden versucht. Da indessen diese Tabelle nur auf Material aus 
stidlicheren Breitengraden (Kroatien, Slavonien u. a. Orten)! Beziehung 
hat, so musste natiirlich ihre Giiltigkeit zuerst an arktischem Material 
geprobt werden, bevor sie dem Unterscheiden zwischen arktischen Fichten 
und Larchen zu Grunde gelegt werden konnte. Eine solche Priifung 
ist dadurch erméglicht, dass eine Sammlung Praparate von arktischen 
Treibhélzern, die in der Miindung des Jenissei’s eingesammelt sind, 
sich im Besitze des Verf. befindet. Unter diesen wurden solche zum 
Lari«-Picea-Typus gehérenden Praparate gewahlt, die nebst Holz auch 
Rinde enthielten. Da es bekanntlich in der Rinde von Larchen und 
Fichten sichere Kennzeichen giebt, konnte man also durch die Struktur 
der Rinde entscheiden, welche Proben zur einen oder anderen Baumart 
gehérten. An diesen so festgestellten Larchen- und Fichtenholzproben 
habe ich nach dem Burcerstemn’schen Schema Zellenmessungen bewerk- 
stelligt. Dabei hat es sich erwiesen, dass simtliche Proben, welche der 
Rinde nach als Fichten und Liarchen bestimmt wurden, auch nach dem 
Schema Fichten, resp. Lairchen waren. 

Dem Resultat dieser Prifung gemiss glaubte der Verf. diese Tabelle 
auch fiir die Bestimmung von den zum Lariaw-Picea-Typus hoérenden 
Treibhélzern vom Ellesmere-Land gebrauchen zu kénnen. Messungen 
sind daher vom Verf. an diesen Treibhélzern nach demselben Prinzip 
wie die obenerwahnten Kontrollmessungen an den sibirischen Treibhélzern 
angestellt worden. Hier unten giebt der Verf. eine Serie von Tabellen. 


Tabelle A. Die Tabelle BurcGerstein’s? in extenso. 


B. Kontrollmessungen an sibirischen Treibhélzern mit Rinde und 
Einrangierung der Proben in die Tabelle BurGEersTEtn’s. 

C. Messungen an den Treibhélzern von Ellesmere-Land 
und Einrangierung der Proben in die Tabelle Burcerstew’s. 


” 


1 Ich will erwihnen, dass ich keine Gelegenheit hatte, die Messungen Burcer- 
srmin’s an Fichten und Larchen aus siidlichen Breitengraden zu kontrollieren, 
da ich aber seine Angaben nicht bestritten gesehen, habe ich mich im vor- 
liegenden Falle derselben bedient. 

2 Burcerstew, |. c, p. 482. 


1898— 1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE.LAND. 19 


A. Analytische Bestimmungstabelle des Fichten- 
und Larchenholzes. 


I Zwillingstipfel nicht vorhanden. 
A. Frihtracheiden 0,020—0,040 mm. Mittlere Markstrahlh6he 7—11 

Zellen. 

a) Markstrahlzellhohe 0,017—0,020 mm.; einrethige, mehr als 10 
Zellen hohe Markstrahlen bilden circa 20 Prozent aller Mark- 
strahlen. Markstrahlen selten verharzt. 

Stammholz Fichte. 

b) Markstrahlzellhdhe 0,020—0,024 mm. 

a) Querdurchmesser des ausseren Tupfelhofes meist 0,021— 
0,026 mm.; maximale Markstrahlhéhe 30 Zellen; Markstrahlen 
meist nicht verharzt. 

Wurzelholz Fichte. 

8) Querdurchmesser des dusseren Twpfelhofes meist 0,014— 

0,022 mm. (Markstrahlen meist verharzt.) 
Stammholz Lirche (innerste Jahrringe). 


B. Frihtracheiden 0,015—0,030 mm. Mittlere Markstrahlhéhe. 45—7 

Zellen; maximale Markstrahlhéhe 20 Zellen. 

a) Frihtracheiden 0,015—0,020 mm.; Querdurchmesser der Tiupfel 
0,014—0,017 mm., nmiemals tiber 0,018 mm., Spittracheiden ge- 
streift. 

Astholz Fichte. 

b) Frihtracheiden 0,020—0,030 mm.; Querdurchmesser der Tupfel 

0,016—0,024 mm. Spattracheiden gestreift oder nicht gestreift. 
Astholz Larche. 


Il. Zwillingstipfel vorhanden. 
A. Frihtracheiden 0,030—0,040 mm. (Markstrahlen selten verharzt.) 

a) Markstrahlzellhéhe 0,017—0,020 mm. Querdurchmesser der Tipfel 
auch unter 0,019 mm. Zwillingstiipfel meist einzeln zwischen 
einfachen Tupfeln zerstreut, seltener in mehreren tibereinander 
liegenden Reihen. 

Stammholz Fichte. 

b) Markstrahlzellhdhe 0,020—0,026 mm. Die Markstrahl-Leitzellen 
oft Starke fiihrend. Querdurchmesser der Tiipfel nicht unter 
0,019 mm. Doppeltiipfel einzeln oder in mehreren Reihen tiber 
einander oder die Frihtracheiden ganz bedeckend. Spattracheiden 
ausnahmsweise gestreift. 


Wurzelholz Fichte. 


20 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


B. Frihtracheiden 0,040—0,060 mm. Markstrahlen sehr haufig ver- 
harzt. 

a) Markstrahlzellhshe 0,020—0,023 mm. Mittlere Markstrahlhohe 
9—13 Zellen; maximale Héhe 40—50 Zellen. Die einreihigen, 
mehr als 10 Zellen hohen Markstrahlen bilden circa 38 Prozent 
aller Markstrahlen. Querdurchmesser der Tipfel auch unter 
0,020 mm. 

Stammholz Lirche. 

b) Markstrahlzellhohe 0,024—0,030 mm. Mittlere Markstrahlhéhe 7—9 
Zellen; maximale Héhe 30 Zellen. Spattracheiden ausnahms- 
weise gestreift. Querdurchmesser der Tiipfel nicht unter 0,020 mm. 

Wurzelholz Larche. ! 


Tabelle B. 


a| bl « | ad | e. f. | g. h | i je | ko 
= i : ia] . = . a 
Sie jseg#) 3 | 2 elec I alee! Se || ee 
Sf Se8bs 2 | Bas eng (ESS .88eS8) SEe | Cas 
Go |tg)e85| 3 oF esti | SO ES stacks) g24 nee 
<-eran-e| = £ BS o ro hiae Spiaes |S wo as & oa & OBS 
Eeisaltxe| + 225 Sod | 2a (2s sac 8 ae 8 Fie phen 
mtrecit nal sg aS es HoK tO ee oy | oe pe ies ae 
ESE E/E RS) 2 aes Ci 83 (Se gi. 5.25 ee 25 8 
NEN FATE & aon ane Ss 2sblaccm Am Ass 
mm. | mm. | yom | 
— | + | 0,020 0,038; 6,9 Zellen| 18 Zellen' 0,024; — ITAb | Wurzelholz| Fichte. 
| Fichte 
— | + | 0,025. 0,065| 7,8, 30.)—C, 0,027; + IIBb | Wurzelholz| Larche. 
Larche 
— | + | 0,024) 0,059) 82  ,, 98 Y 0,025) + IEBb | Wurzelholz| Lirche. 
| Larche 
—|+ 0,025 | 0,063 | 7,5 ,, 20 = 0,025; + IIBb | Weiecliale Larche. 
| | Larche 
— | + eel 0,063| 7,4 , 380°C, | 0,025; + IIBb ee Wurzelholz  Lirche. 
Larche 


In dieser Tabelle sowohl als in der folgenden Tabelle C. sind die- 
selben diagnostischen Charaktere wie in der Tabelle Burcerstetn’s auf- 
genommen worden, obgleich sie auf eine andere Weise gruppiert sind. 
Der Ubersichtlicheit wegen sind namlich die resp. Charaktere in Gruppen 
geordnet und solche Gruppen, die mit einander verwandt sind, zusammen- 
gefiihrt worden. Also stehen alle Kennzeichen, die sich auf die Tupfel 
beziehen, in einer Reihenfolge, namlich in den Gruppen a, 0, ¢; alle 


1 In der vorstehenden Bestimmungstabelle ist unter dem Ausdruck ,,Friihtracheiden“ 
der radiale Durchmesser der Friihlingsholzzellen verstanden. Die Angaben be- 
treffs der Tiipfel beziehen sich auf die an den Radialwinden der Frithtracheiden 
ausgebildeten Tipfel. Die Markstrahlzellhdhe bezieht sich auf die leitenden 
(mit einfachen Tiipfeln versehenen) Zellen des Markstrahles. Die Markstrahlhéhe 
umfasst Leitzellen und Quertracheiden. 


1898—1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 91 


die Kennzeichen, die sich auf die Markstrahlen beziehen, in einer Folge: 
e, f, g, h. Gruppe 7 giebt an, welchen Platz die Proben auf Grundlage 
der Angaben in den friiheren Gruppen in der Tabelle Burcerstemn’s 
einnehmen; Gruppe j giebt die Diagnose nach der Tabelle Burcerstetn’s 
an; Gruppe k die Diagnose nach der Untersuchung des Verf. von der 
Struktur der Rinde. — 

Jeder Zifferwert ist eine Durchschnittszahl von 20 Messungen, mit Aus- 
nahme von denen, die in den Gruppen e und f enthalten sind. Die Werte 
in Gruppe e (mittlere Héhe des Markstrahles) sind Durchschnittszahlen 
von circa 80 Messungen. Die Hihe der Markstrahlen scheint weit mehr 
als die tbrigen in der Tabelle angegebenen Charaktere zu variieren, 
weshalb die mittlere Héhe durch eine gréssere Anzahl von Messungen 
berechnet werden muss. Die maximale Héhe des Markstrahles ist nach 
80 Markstrahlen berechnet. — Dieselben Prinzipien hinsichtlich der Auf- 
stellung und Berechnung der resp. Durchschnittswerte, die der Tabelle B 
zu Grunde gelegt worden, gelten auch fir die nachstehende Tabelle C. 

Was nun die Tabelle B betrifft, so enthalt sie, wie oben erwahnt, 
Kontrollmessungen an sibirischen, mit Rinde versehenen Treibhélzern. 
Nur 5 Praparate sind auf diese Weise untersucht worden, weil sie die 
einzigen waren, welche Rinde enthielten. Aus Gruppe & (Struktur der 
Rinde) geht hervor, dass ein Praparat Fichtenholz, die tibrigen Liarchen- 
holz waren. Nach Gruppe j erweist es sich, dass, wenn man die Ziffer- 
werte der resp. Gruppen fiir jede einzelne Probe nach den Prinzipien der 
analytischen Methode Burcerstein’s zusammenstellt, auch eine Probe 
Fichtenholz, die 4 tbrigen Larchenholz sind. Und wenn man schliess- 
lich die Resultate fur die resp. Proben in den Gruppen j und k ver- 
gleicht, erweist es sich, dass sie einander entsprechen. 

Leider sind nur Wurzelholzproben in der Tabelle aufgenommen 
worden, und dies zwar aus dem Grunde, dass nur vorliegende Wurzel- 
holzpraparate Rinde enthielten. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


FREDRIK INGVARSSON. 


“qorpagds 


poydnyssary[IaZ, “Syleyy sop aZyIsaq WI 9IO}SWLUILYS ataR'y - \ 
‘uapunjad 9j1Q Waapue ue [Yomgo “~GEse eqoig PUY —- LAST. | Mors eq + | BOO “ 9 “HO sHO'O TOO + — 
“ZpoyyNay | 
pun -yeds UdYISIMZ VZUAIN) ajlVyos ‘qye3 ZIBET ‘ques ayiey | 
“yous epupmual[ezZ “pueyoteaqe y eddnin cya | zoymmeg |egy : + | 00; “ og) “ 9BF | Le0'0/ 920'0 | + | — 
ayoINTyT 
‘pusqoraaqe yeddnig  gege zpouenm | dan | + | eso) “ 08) “ L | es0'0 e200) + | 
“yotjands Jaydmssuyyn7, “yasouL Iyas aye] 
OH “qpeSjor “aeP_ UIEAY-G[aSqons epupanayez| ese | oquuMg | grea, + 100) “ st “ G9 | LOO ec'0 + — 
“yyleayso3 yreys usplayvely, ‘pusypolamqe J : 
addniy *yorjayUuNnp apupMUs|[e7 ‘yorpayunp ZLB AL | ayoIeyT 
‘(o-[ AVANT) “,uRISpoy* opsiddy ‘zjoyuaqaryy se}oy | V eges 7OUPZMM | dal + soo, “ 9 “LB | G90 GeO'O + — 
yon] \ 
pusyoromqe yaddnin) g 078s = Zpoywueys | bq IT | + | goo) “ so) “ BF Sg0'0, t0';0, + 
“yoljayanp OPURMUIT[OT ‘youpayunp zie ‘Z[0OH ayolny ; P 
mayqiyjaSjor atsueynr yrur Braazjezin yy soypstddy,) V OFSS |Z1OUPZIMM Ta + een,“ 08  * SB | F900 GOOF 
‘pueyotamge y oddnixy ayoiR'y] . “ ; . | 
ylonsed yes vaproysenyory sje Teds [yomos FT ones ouwMMIS | CATT | + | O00 66 IT | 9400 9600 | + | — 
ayoINy] 
‘pueyoromqe yadduin) q On9s | oquaMs eal ' + lgsroo) “ us| “ at | oso'o|ezoo | + | — 
‘puasyoremqe yaddnixy (‘usdsunssay 
OT youu [yezs}yruyosyoing) ‘wu ¢Zo‘Q = juueT] 
uea[[PZ uapuedall Japueuls ueqou snipey sap Buny i 
“any Ul WeMzZ ayo[am ‘pueAA ayeddop vq ‘expC 
Jayot[JUapsOJassne uOA zjoyyeds ur opuRMUa [eZ ayoIe’y | 
‘zjoyyniy pun -yedg ueyostmz alurpzueryy eteyoS | J OPIS Gans Pall | + | 0800 FN°Z 08 | nouez rat \se80'0 £200 | + | = 
{ asegeed “tau “wut 
cael) we. aoe Ss 5 a m |aedieN ry 
Bere | EOS [Berserk 2a) eos | FEE | F [SESE S|? S 
fons | BES |ReSR\Ses|S5 | Fee | PRS | B lrg elon) ow 
ete Be Bee [Bees FE) Bee | Fa | F EBB Ss) 
“Gee | gee [ge .die el =| g = | & /88s) s| 3 
we f ow Pag = : * | 3 " = f 
ne | f mn ee ae ee See Se ee 


‘OD PTP4deL 


23 


1898—1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 


“UdpIOAL Jlaisuviuta vy f dajun Vv 0496 aqord ata 


epuniny Ueqjaswep sne Jeqe jst ‘uapiam yaaiBuer | ayyory 
“ula ‘ompIRT zZjoyjsy = q gq] JejUN yone ajuuey, g e966 «| ZjoywuRyS 0G 920'0 | 610'0 
o1ld 
: : A 0G — Zjoyuruteys aI 180'0 610° 
: ayy : 
"V OFS UOA ojuoMSeIT YorulayosaqeAA “YW OF9S =| D OF9G ZpoymWMeyS or 620'0 | 610'0 
‘pusyotamqe y pun ‘a ueddnig 
‘UapiaM JesuRiMIe ‘ayaIeyT zjoyysy = q gq] aezuN 
Yone PywWeRU ajuUgy eqolg sq, }Satpj10a zpoyysy yoru 
pun zjoymuyys ssep yneiep uajnap aSunaiyep rep | aqyorg | 
SunpyIMJUy eyasiqjuas pun eqoig Jap uauoisuauq, VY OF9S zZjoywueys ral 1£0‘0 | 610'0 
‘pusyqoteamqe yoddniry yyonspesuamures ayoiey] 
“NZ INU “FAIpI9A ZY UsploypesysqiayyT Jap apuRM | C GE8S | Z[oypezin A, 0G +400 | 130'0 
‘pusyotamqe y addnig ‘yorayunp z1ey “-yypnap 
-asuaMUIesNZ INU YYVIpPIas yyotu usprayovsyysqiepy ayrIey 
‘(OT NvWaNry) *,UBIS poy" ayosidAy ‘zjoyuaypayy sojoy | -y IOS | Z1049z.1N AW 91 620'0 B60'0 
“q[ad epupaualez ‘qies ziepy 
‘pplipeszuewmumesnz ina ‘yyIpiea yYyU Gapreyovsy 
-\SqiaH{ ‘ue STIVHTAZyA AA 4qIS eqo1g 1ap alassny seq! 1) 6E83 é LG 040°0 | 0z0'0 
‘pusyotamqe yoaddniy ‘uayessyrepy eStwigy 
-juds yone os ‘yoripds ayes ojpueyziepy ‘uneiq 
‘]eyUNp epuymualez ‘uneiqjayunp zip] ‘Wyleajsed 
-[eatds uapleyoery, ‘uunp Ueprayoesyysqiay Jap spur Ad aypIR'y 
‘(2 "[ ‘NvWaNrT) *,UeISpoy" oyostdAy ‘zjoyuoqoryy so}0yy 1996 | Zfoyjazin AA or S¢0°0 | ¢60'0 
‘puseyotiamqge 
y eddnixyy “yoiqjes epugmuarjez ‘yorqiod zp] 
‘yleajsesyesids ‘uunp uapleyseiqysqiay] Jap spur AA aypie'y] : 
‘(O°[‘NVWGNIT) *,,UeISpoy “ oyosid4y ‘zjoyuatporeT sojoy THOS | ZpOyTazan AA + U2T[°Z, 8S 8c0'0 | ezo‘o | + 
“wut TOUT 
| 
D Ew Qaomss N yo AW iyop< NIPN 
PEE GSE gepeeeh BF) FE | Eee = bed PEPE 
SG =-0 ZES 2eon|S#s, 59 | Pap neo B ros eel & 
‘uaSunqouuy eeen| geo |Besaiess| FE) SRe | “e. | & gees) 2 
aoe Bos ise oust Se Si = & S: '@ sei S| 
“tt a ce a 5 oa =} on a g |? la > > 
<b S | 7 se ee Oe Be 


(s1104) 9) DTTP Quy 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


FREDRIK INGVARSON. 


24 


ayyory | | 
dooce zymes | eV | — | 6100; “ se) “ BL | BOO BOO) — | + 
ba Gane 
‘uapiaM jlaISuesule (q “Gq J JoyuN yone oyuuey]| Vy 996g | ZJoywUIE}S |ge VI — | 6F00 aes)! “  ¥'9 | 6600/6100 | — | + 
eHPly 
pueyoremqe yeddnin) g pos | zoymurs evr | — (6100 “ HH) “ LiL 9800) s0'0, — + 
‘puayoroe 
-qe ‘yj addnis) ‘uapiom  4][2}S9d}sef a}YITY sje 
yoru epuly Jep aip ‘aqoadiezjbyqiery, ueqostuiqis 
Joura pur ZSunurunjsuteseaq¢, esipupysjoA = “uTpeAy 
Jaqe apupAA aiqt “astuseidwmt zaiepzy ylu uelyerjs 
“Ye, ‘}PNApesuouiuresnz [jayuesuyy anu ‘yyxotps8a 
jyatu aztuyssian() We UsprlayoeRtj|sqiepyy Jap epuy Ay 
‘yPOYPUAjua Yosujussx9 Yes eSulssyer ‘y[Yea} Yrepy aor] 
‘ue BramzjazinAy Waule }qa13 eqoig Jep ssessny seq] VY 68S | Z1°4TezNM | IVI + | 3300 a 2 # L}) 0F0'0 | 1600 | — | + 
bas bare 
‘pusqoramqe yaddniy = 4gg5 | tloqmmeIS ~oeyT | — | 0800 “ 08 “ 8 | LEO'O TeO'0 | — | + 
ayy 
‘pusyoramqe y pun ‘a ueddnin S9Le | ZfoymMRIS | eV — | 6100 “ €I “ 3'9 | e200! 6100 | — | + 
ayo 
‘pueyoremqe yoaddnig| yyye | zyoymmeg | eyt | — | 60 “ Bi) “ SL) e800) 000 | — | + 
‘puamiMNsulazeqn =. ayoiRe'y 
Stpunjs[[oa “VY L6G WwW yoru neg usyssIMoyvue Wad A L86G zousV i 6T aI + | 8t0'0 “OT “99 | 8200 6100 | — | + 
‘yayeidasqe uumay 
a3 SumrgjueSoq eqorg ‘yes ziepZ woyoiqias 
jul UaTyesjsyepL SrepnSuezyat Sunjyyory saperper ayorey 
UL UET[azssul[YyNIY Jap WOT ‘q[esyosjs opuymus[[?Z | V LEGS zouisy |é6d aI + | 610'0| Y1l9Z GE |49II°Z 19 | $80'0 | 060°0 | — | + 
gu we Waat 5 x wo = |se2oeNieNn 
beye| PSS PFSHELE £F| SEE GFe | 2 eer eses 
BEo8 S 38 ayogieme| Se) red. Set = |pPa Glib Ss = 
ESO 5 Be Bows goa] Ba as Tes F |feFissirs 
Sane Boa avronm|sSa| ag | Pop aka B eB ou) 
‘uadunyiaWUy eee e 32e 22S eS eS 8. Te Lao Amen = 2.8 & Se | a 
“ao Sos Se .ele eyo ei, me ee 2 jee sy S| © 
Seer 2a a _ 4 ‘f | + | 4 ‘6 / | 2 | Ppl? |)” 
(sHog) *D STlPaeL 


1898—1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 95 


Wie sich aus Gruppe j erweist, sind sowohl Fichte als Larche in 
dieser Tabelle identifiziert, und unter den betreffenden Baumarten Stamm- 
holz und Wurzelholz, méglicherweise auch Astholz, unterschieden movers 
Wir werden damit beginnen, die Zifferwerte der resp. Gruppe fir 
Stammholz Larche zu untersuchen. Auf Grund des Vorhandenseins von 
Zwillingstiipfeln bezieht sich dieses Stammholz auf Gruppe II Ba in der 
Tabelle BuRGERSTEIN’s. 


Stammholz Larche. 
(= Gruppe II Ba in der Tabelle Burcersrtemn’s). 


Betreffs des Inhaltes dieser Gruppe siehe p. 20 dieser Abhandlung. 
Die Gruppen c, d, e, g in der Tabelle des Verf. enthalten Werte, welche 
mit denen, die Burcerstein als Stammholz Larche angiebt, identisch 
sind. Gruppe f dagegen (maximale Hohe des Markstrahles) ist ab- 
weichend. Nach Burcerstern wird diese Hohe auf 40—50 Zellen, nach 
der Tab. des Verf. aber nur auf 30 Zellen geschatzt. Diese Zellenanzahl 
(30 Zellen) hat der Verf. doch nur an 2 Proben (No. 2640 B, 2115) vor- 
gefunden; alle die ubrigen zeigen geringere maximale Hoéhe). 

ScHNeEIpER }, der an Fichten und Larchen bei arktischem Treibholz- 
materiale auch vergleichende Zellenmessungen angestellt hat, fand die 
maximale Hohe ftir Liarche 24 Zellen, fir Fichte 16 Zellen. BurGerstein 1 
betrachtet diese Werte als falsch und sagt: ,Obwohl Scunewer nur ein 
kleines Untersuchungsmaterial benutzte, so sind dessen Angaben trotz- 
dem nicht recht begreiflich, denn man braucht gerade von keinem be- 
sonderen Glicke begiinstigt zu sein um bei der Larche hohere als 24- 
zellige und bei der Fichte hohere als 16-zellige Markstrahlen zu finden“. 

Der Verf. hat bei seinem Untersuchungsmateriale nur zwei Stamm- 
proben gefunden, deren maximale Hohe sich auf 30 Zellen belief. Diese 
Zellenanzahl, welche allerdings etwas hdher ist als die, welche SCHNEIDER 
angiebt, scheint dessen ungeachtet die Angabe ScHNEIDERS gegen die in 
oben erwaihntem Citate enthaltene Kritik Burcerstetn’s zu rechtfertigen. 
Burcerstein hat zweifellos tbersehen, dass sie mit ungleichem Mate- 
riale gearbeitet haben und dass folglich die Angaben beider richtig 
sein kénnen. Scunewer hat namlich arktische Larche (wahrscheinlich 
Larix sibirica), Burcerstein aber Laria europea ‘als Untersuchungs- 
material gehabt. 

Betreffs der Proben 3239 und 1247 muss betont werden, dass 
auch Gruppe e darin abweicht, dass sie fir die mittlere Hohe des Mark- 


1 Burcerstein, |. c. p. 415. 


26 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


strahls geringere Werte aufweist, als die, welche BurcErsTEINn angiebt. 
Die betreffenden Proben sind dessen ungeachtet zu Gruppe II B a, also 
zum Stammbholz Lirche gerechnet worden; zufolge der rektangularen 
Form und der radialen Weite der Frihzellen, der strohgelben Farbe der 
Zellenwainde, der reichlichen Harzmenge der Markstrahlen sind die Proben 
als Lirchen betrachtet worden, wihrend dagegen das Aussere der Proben, 
die centrische Entwicklung der Jahrringe, die bedeutende Dicke der Zellen- 
wande im Spatholz, die Markstrahlzellenhéhe Charaktere sind, welche 
angeben, dass Stammholz vorliegt. 

Wenn wir also voraussetzen, dass oben erwihnte Proben Stamm- 
holzproben sind, so wird der geringere Grenzwert fir die mittlere Hohe 
der Markstrahlen 6,5 Zellen (Probe No. 3239). Aus unserer Tabelle geht 
auch hervor, dass der obere Grenzwert 12,6 Zellen ist (Probe No. 2115). 
Die Grenzwerte fir die mittlere Hihe des Markstrahles werden also nach 
unserer Tabelle 12,6—6,5. Nach der Tabelle Burcerstein’s dagegen 
(II Ba) sind sie 183—9 Zellen. 

Nach dem was betreffs der Werte in den Gruppen e, f in unserer 
Tabelle oben angefihrt wurde, scheint es, als ob sowohl die mittlere 
als die maximale Héhe des Markstrahles in Stammholz fir arktische 
Larche (Larix sibirica?) geringere Werte als fir Larix europea 
reprasentierte. 


Wurzelholz Larche. 
(= Gruppe II B b in der Tabelle Burcerstetn’s). 


Die Angaben Burcersrein’s fir Larix europea passen, wie es 
scheint, sehr gut auf arktische Lirche. Doch weicht Gruppe f in der 
Tabelle C insofern ab, dass sie bei allen Proben ausser einer (Probe 
2840 A) fiir die maximale Hohe des Markstrahles geringere Werte fest- 
stellt, als den, welchen Burcersrein aufgiebt, nimlich 30 Zellen. Von 
ca. 560 untersuchten Markstrahlen hat nur einer die von BurGERSTEIN 
angegebene maximale Hihe = 30 Zellen, aufgewiesen. Doch muss 
betont werden, dass man in Tabelle B, p. 20 (sibirische Treibhélzer) 
Larchenproben findet, bei welchen die maximale Héhe des Markstrahles 
auch 30 Zellen ist. — Da die tbrigen Werte in den resp. Gruppen der 
Tabelle mit entsprechenden, von Burcerstemn angegebenen Normalmittel- 
werten tbereinstimmen, kénnte man also ohne Ungelegenheit arktisches 
Wurzelholz (Larche) nach der Tabelle Burcerstetn’s bestimmen. 


1898—1902. No.24. DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 27 


Stammholz Fichte. 
(= Gruppe I Aa in der Tabelle Burcersretn’s). 


Fir einen Teil der zu dieser Gruppe gerechneten Proben zeigen 
die Gruppen e und f abweichende Werte, zunachst denen entsprechend, 
die in der Tabelle Burcerstet’s in Gruppe [ B b aufgenommen sind, 
also Astholz Larche. Trotz dieser Abweichung sind doch jene Proben 
als Stammholz Fichte, nicht Astholz Larche, bestimmt worden. Die 
kraftigen Dimensionen und das ganze Aussere der Proben, die centrische 
Entwicklung der Jahrringe, der Mangel an Harz in den Markstrahlen 
rechtfertigen das Bestimmen der Proben als Stammbholz Fichte. 

Wenn wir also annehmen, dass simtliche erwahnten Proben zur 
Gruppe I A a gehéren, werden also die Gruppen c, d, g Werte enthalten, 
die mit denen analog sind, welche Burcersrem fiir Stammholz Fichte 
angiebt; die Gruppen e und f dagegen sind abweichend. Betreffend 
Gruppe e (mittlere Hohe des Markstrahles) ist in unserer Tabelle der obere 
Grenzwert 8,3 Zellen (Probe No. 2984), der untere Grenzwert 6 Zellen 
(Probe No. 2640 A). Die Grenzwerte fir die mittlere Hihe des Markstrahles 
betragen also danach 6—8,3 Zellen; nach der Tabelle Burcersrem’s (I A a) 
7—11 Zellen. 

In Gruppe f ist die maximale Hohe nach unserer Tabelle 32 Zellen 
(Probe No. 3966 B); nach der Angabe Burcerstetn’s (p. 416) 43 Zellen. 

Nach Scunerper ist der maximale Wert 16 Zellen. 

Die mittlere und die maximale Hoéhe des Markstrahles‘scheinen uns 
also nach dem oben erwahnten bei arktischer Fichte (Picea obovata’?) 
geringer als bei Picea eaxcelsa zu sein. 


Wurzelholz Fichte. 
(= Gruppe I A ba nach der Tabelle Burcerstem’s). 


In Tabelle C giebt es nur eine Fichtenholzprobe. Abgesehen von 
Gruppe f (maximale Hihe des Markstrahles) zeigt diese Probe in den 
resp. Gruppen Werte, die mit den von BuRGERSTEIN erwahnten analog 
sind. BurGersTein giebt also die maximale Hohe des Markstrahles als 
30 Zellen an; nach Tabelle C ist sie aber nur 14 Zellen. In Anbetracht 
dessen, dass nur eine Probe untersucht worden ist, dirfte man nicht 
mit Gewissheit entscheiden kénnen, ob die in diesem speciellen Falle 
bewiesene maximale Hohe bei arktischer Fichte allgemein oder nicht sei. 
Betreffs Wurzelholz Fichte habe ich also zwischen arktischer Fichte: 
(Picea obovata?) und Picea excelsa keinen bestimmten Unterschied 
herausfinden kénnen. 


98 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Astholz Larche. 
(= Gruppe IB b in der Tabelle Burcerstein’s). 


Zwei Proben, namlich No. 2987 A, 2987 B, sind, obwohl keineswegs 
mit Bestimmtheit, zu dieser Gruppe gerechnet worden. Sie zeigen namlich 
in den resp. Gruppen Werte, welche mit denen der Proben analog sind, 
die wir friher als Stammholz Fichte festgestellt und zu Gruppe I Aa 
gerechnet haben. Dass sie dessen ungeachtet im Systeme einen anderen 
Platz bekommen haben und damit zu Astholz Larche (Gruppe I B b) ge- 
rechnet worden sind, hat seinen Grund teils in der Form und dem Ausseren 
der Proben, welche auf Astholz deuten, teils auch in folgenden anato- 
mischen Charakteren: Zellenwande strohgelb, Form der Frihzellen am 
Querschnitt in radialer Richtung rektangular, Markstrahlen mit rotem 
Harz gefillt. Von den Normalwerten, die Burcersrein fir Astholz an- 
giebt, weicht nur Gruppe f, d. h. maximale Héhe der Markstrahlen ab. 
Wahrend Burcerstein sie auf 20 Zellen geschatzt, hat der Verf. nur 
12—14 Zellen finden kénnen, ein Umstand, der wohl auf einem Zufalle 
beruhen kénnte, da die Werte fiir die mittlere Héhe der Markstrahlen 
ubereinstimmen. Betreffs des Astholzes habe ich also keine bestimmte 
Abweichung zwischen arktischer Larche und Larix europea konsta- 
tieren kénnen. 


Die Hauptresultate, zu welchen der Verf. durch angestellte Zellen- 
messungen und damit verknipfte histologische Untersuchungen an ark- 
tischem Treibhélzermateriale, mit BurcERSTEIN’s entsprechenden Zellen- 
messungen an Picea excelsa und Larix europea verglichen, gekommen 
ist, konnen in folgenden Punkten pracisiert werden: 


1. Die Zellenmessungen Burcerstetn’s kénnten hauptsachlich und in 
Kombination mit oben erwahnten makro- und mikroskopischen 
Charakteren einer Gattungsdiagnose auch von arktischem Material 
(Larix sibirica, Picea obovata) zu Grunde gelegt werden. 

2. Die vom Verf. gefundenen Werte fir die mittlere, resp. die maxi- 
male Hodhe des Markstrahles sind in Stammbholz bei arktischen 
Fichten und Liarchen geringer als die entsprechenden, welche 
Burcerstein fir Picea excelsa und Larix europea angegeben hat. 

3. Mit Leitung der analytischen Tabelle BurcErstein’s sind sowohl 
Fichten als Larchen unter den Treibhélzern von Ellesmere- 
Land unterschieden worden. 


1898—1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 29 


II. Laubhdlzer. 


Unter den echten Treibhélzern sind nur zwei Laubhdlzerproben 
angetroffen worden. Sie bestanden aus cylindrischen Stammsticken mit 
sehr leichtem und pordsem Holz. Schon a priori konnte man also davon 
iiberzeugt sein, dass keine schwereren Baumarten, wie Sorbus, Quercus 
u.a., unter diesen Treibhélzern waren. Die miskroskopische Untersuchung 
bestitigte diese Annahme. Ich unterschied zwei Gattungen, namlich 
Salix und Populus. Sie wurden an folgenden anatomischen Charak- 
teren identifiziert: Gefaisse durch den ganzen Jahrring gleichmassig ver- 
teilt, Gefasswande entbehren fibrise Ring- und Spiralverdickungen und 
sind mit grossen, kreisrunden oder polygonalen, gewoéhnlich 6-seitigen 
Hoftiipfeln versehen. Gefassbéden kreisrund perforiert. Markstrahlen 
1-reihig. 

Die genannten Gattungen kénnen unter andern Dingen durch den 
Bau der Markstrahlen unterschieden werden. 

I. Markstrahlzellen unter einander gleich hoch: Populus }. 

II. Markstrahlzellen nicht gleich hoch: die oberen und unteren Zellen- 
reihen des Markstrahles bestehen aus Zellen, welche hodher als 
die zwischenliegenden sind: Salix. 

In Folge oben angegebener anatomischen Charaktere ist die Probe 

No. 2986 als Populus, die Probe No. 2015 B als Salia festgestellt 
worden. 


Bestimmung des Mutterlands der Treibhdlzer. 


Die erste Richtlinie um das Mutterland der Treibhélzer zu bestim- 
men erhalt man durch den Mittelwert der Jahrringe. Nach der Tabelle 
p. 10 war dieser fir unsere Treibhélzer 0,99 mm. 

Martin und Bravais haben versucht die Aufmerksamkeit darauf 
zu lenken, dass bei der Kiefer die mittlere Breite der Jahrringe succes- 
sive abnimmt, je mehr sie sich der Vegetationsgrenze nahert oder je 
hdher der Breitengrad ist, auf welchem sie wachst. Diesen Umstand 
haben sie dadurch veranschaulicht, dass sie bei der Kiefer die mittlere 
Breite der Jahrringe unter verschiedenen Latituden fur mehrere Alters- 
perioden nach folgendem Schema? berechnet haben. 


1 Petersen, 1. c. p. 26. Populus nigra macht hiervon eine Ausnahme und stimmt 
im Bau des Markstrahles mit Salix iiberein. 
2 Kraus, Treibhélzer, 1. c. p. 112. 


30 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


a) Kaafjord . . . . unter 69°57’ noérdl. Br. 
Pelee se oc aoe » 66 48 , “4 
ce) Gefle. . .. .. , 60 40 , ‘s 
a) EVAL be SG. ag go 
e) Hagenau .... , 48 4B , - 


Mittlere resp. Breite der Jahrringe war an Baiumen unter diesen 
verschiedenen Breitengraden: 


1—50 50—100 100—150 150—200 
Jahrringe Jahrringe Jahrringe Jahrringe 
a) 1 mm. 0,8 mm. 0,68 mm. 0,5 mm. 
bi nae dee 08 , OB og 05 , 
i oe 28 = 15. io, ve 
d) 24, 12 , or = 
e) B23 32s — — 


MippenporF! hat die Richtigkeit dieser Untersuchungen bestitigt 
und gefunden, dass auch die Jahrringe der Lirche nach demselben 
Gesetze variieren. Vorausgesetzt, dass die Fichte in dieser Hinsicht 
denselben Gesetzen wie die Kiefer und die Larche folgt, wiren also die 
Mutterbiume unserer Treibhélzerproben, bei welchen ja, wie oben er- 
wihnt, der Mittelwert der Jahrringe 0,99 mm. war, unter einem Breiten- 
grade gewachsen, welcher etwa dem des Kaafjords, ca. 70° n. Br, 
entspricht. In diesem Zusammenhange miissen wir doch darauf hin- 
weisen, dass es nicht nur klimatische Verhaltnisse sind, welche die Ent- 
wicklung der Jahrringe beeinflussen. Wir citieren die Worte MippEn- 
porFF’s:? ,Mehr als auf die Temperatur kommt es darauf an, in welche 
nihrende Bodenschichten die Wurzeln im gegebenen Jahre eingedrungen 
sind und wie sich die tbrigen Nahrungsverhaltnisse, wie z. B. Unter- 
driickung durch nahestehende Baume u. d., sich gestalteten‘. 

Man kann sich also leicht vorstellen, dass nicht nur klimatische 
Verhaltnisse die schwache jihrliche Holzbildung unserer Treibhélzer- 
proben bedingt sondern dass auch andere Faktoren, wie die Beschaffenheit 
des Erdbodens u. d., mitgewirkt haben und dass also das Verbreitungs- 
gebiet der Mutterbiume sidlicher gewesen, als was es wird, wenn man 
nur klimatische Verhdltnisse als entscheidende Gesichtspunkte betrachtet. 

Wenn man aber auch aus diesen Griinden die Polarhéhe fir den 
Wachsort der Mutterbiume senken muss, so dirfte doch diese Senkung 


1 A, Tu. v. Mippenporrr, Reise in dem aussersten Norden und Osten Sibiriens, 
IV, 1, p. 683. Anm. 1. : 
2 Mippenporrr, |. c. p. 686. 


1898—1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE.-LAND. 3k 


nicht recht bedeutend werden. Denn wenn auch etliche der Mutterbaume 
schlecht genihrt gewesen oder auf ungiinstigem Boden gewachsen sind, so 
ist es wohl doch nicht sehr wahrscheinlich, dass nur der terrestrische Faktor 
die Entwicklung simtlicher Baume gehemmt hatte. Wahrscheinlicher ist 
es dann, vorausgesetzt, dass die Mutterbaume denselben Wachsort haben, 
dass ein hartes Klima, allerdings hier und dort mit ungiinstigen terres- 
trischen Verhaltnissen kombiniert, die Ursache der durchgiingigen Ent- 
kraftung gewesen, die mit einigen Modifikationen die jahrliche Holz- 
bildung bei saémtlichen Mutterbaumen der Treibhdlzer zu bezeichnen 
scheint. Wir nehmen also an, dass die Mutterbiume in einem nérd- 
lichen Klima aufgewachsen sind und dass also das Mutterland der Treib- 
hélzer in Brittisch-Nordamerika oder in Sibirien gesucht werden muss. 
Im folgenden werden wir die Plausibilitat der erstgenannten Alternative 
in Erwagung ziehen. 


Brittisch-Nordamerika. 


Unter den zu Brittisch-Nordamerika gehérenden grésseren 
Flussgebieten, die zufolge ihrer Strémungsstarke und Lange als Quellen 
emes konstanten Treibhélzerstroms betrachtet werden kénnen, sind fol- 
gende Fliisse, ihrer Linge in Kilometer nach! geordnet, zu nennen: 


Der Mackenzie River ... . 44296 km. 
» ot Lawrence River .. . 3500 , 
» Churchill River. .... 1700 , 
» Nelson River ..... .. 1450 , 


Great Fish River ¢.g 4-2 “9805 
Coppermine River. ... 600 , 


Im folgenden werden wir die Griinde untersuchen, welche fiir oder 
gegen die Aktivitat dieser Fliisse am Treibhdlzertransport zum Elles- 
mere-Land sprechen kénnen. 


Der St. Lawrence-Fluss. Die Grinde, welche fiir die Aktivitat 
dieses Flusses am betreffenden Treibhdlzertransport sprechen, sind folgende: 
dieselben Gattungen, welche unter unseren Treibhélzern identifiziert 
wurden, namlich Laria, Picea, wachsen im Uberschwemmungsgebiete 
des St. Lawrence-Flusses und miissen also unter den Treibhélzern 
dieses Flusses sein. Durch die Untersuchungen Linpman’s wissen wir, 
dass diese Treibhélzer grisstenteils an der Westkiste Norwegens 


1 Die Lange der Fliisse ist nach Andrée’s grossem Handatlas, 3. Auflage, an- 
gegeben. ; 


32 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


landen. Ein anderer Teil derselben treibt aber nordwiirts mit dem 
Golfstrom weiter und landet bei Spitzbergen, Novaja Semlja; 
ein dritter und wahrscheinlich sehr kleiner Teil wird in einem der Kon- 
taktpunkte zwischen dem Golfstrom und dem Polarstrom aus 
seinem normalen Kurse getrieben und gerat durch Treiben in die Bahn 
des Polarstromes. In dieser stossen diese von siidlicheren Breiten- 
graden verirrten Treibhélzer mit ihren nordsibirischen Stammverwandten 
zusammen und schliessen sich deren grossem Treibhdlzertransport an. 
Dieser geht mit dem Polarstrom als Transportmittel in siidlicher 
Richtung an der Ostkiiste Grénlands entlang. Am Cape Farewell 
an der Siidspitze Grénlands weicht eine Verzweigung des Stromes 
nordwiirts ab und fliesst dann lings der Westkiiste Sidgrénlands. 
Man kénnte sich also vorstellen, dass diese verirrten, von der West- 
kiiste Norwegens, von dem Uberschwemmungsgebiete des St. Law- 
rence-Flusses oder von noch siidlicheren Breitengraden kommenden 
Treibhélzer durch das Wechseln der Strombahnen ihren Weg weit hinauf 
nach der Westkiiste Grénlands finden. Oder wie sollte man wohl sonst 
das Antreffen grosser Balken von Mahagony erklaren kénnen, die an 
der Discoinsel im Davis Sund angetroffen worden sind und die nach 
Gumprecut! von an der Westkiiste Norwegens gescheiterten Handels- 
schiffen stammen, oder das Antreffen amerikanischer Taxus- und Juni- 
perus-Treibhilzer, welche von der Polarexpedition Nare’s nordlich vom 
Baffins Bay im Smith’s Sund gefunden worden sind? Die Még- 
lichkeit dafiir, dass diese amerikanischen Treibhélzerproben aus einem 
der Eismeeresfliissen Nordamerikas stammen sollten und also mit 
einem von Westen kommenden Strome nordlich von Grant’s Land 
in den Smith’s Sund eingetrieben worden waren, ist wenigstens be- 
treffs der Gattung Taxus, zufolge der Verbreitungsgebiete dieser Gat- 
tung, welche das betreffende Flussgebiet gar nicht tangieren, ganz aus- 
geschlossen. — Wenn wir uns aber auch vorstellen kénnen, dass Aus- 
laufer von amerikanischen Treibhélzern aus dem Uberschwemmungs- 
gebiet des St. Lawrence-Flusses an die Westkiiste Grénlands im 
Baffins Bay oder im Smith’s Sund scheitern, so ware doch, infolge 
der in diesen Gegenden herrschenden Strémungsverhialtnisse, ein Trans- 
port zwischen diesen und den Hifen im Jones Sund, wo unsere 
Treibhélzer gefunden worden sind, ganz unmdglich. Nach einer Angabe 
vom Docenten H. G. Simmons herrscht in diesem Sunde eine Strémung, 
die jedem treibenden Gegenstande aus dem Baffins Bay den Zutritt 


1 Gumerecut, Treibprodukte der Strémungen im nordatlantischen Ocean (Zeit- 
schrift fiir allgem. Erdkunde, 1854, p. 430). 


1898 — 1902. No. 94. DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 33 


zum Sunde verwehren muss. Und in der Tat sind in dem dstlichen 
Teil desselben, d. h. in dem Teil, welcher mit dem Baffins Bay in 
unmittelbarerem Kontakt steht, keine Treibhélzer gefunden worden, ob- 
gleich die seichten Ufer oder die Busen der Kiiste zum Verankerungs- 
ort der Treibhélzer sehr wohl dienen kénnen. Nur im westlichsten Teil 
des Sundes, also in einem Gebiete, das durch die beiden Sunde, den 
Cardigan Sund und den Helvedesporten, mit der Norwegischen 
Bucht (Norske Bugt) und dem Meere westlich vom Ellesmere- 
Land in Verbindung steht, sind Treibhélzer gefunden worden. Dieser 
Umstand beweist zweifellos, dass die im Jones Sund befindlichen Treib- 
hélzer mittels eines siidwirts gehenden Stromes und durch einen der 
erwihnten Sunde aus den Meeren westlich vom Ellesmere-Land ge- 
kommen sind und nicht vom Osten her tber den Baffins Bay. Diese 
Annahme ist um so wahrscheinlicher, als nach der Angabe des Docenten 
Snimons eine ausserordentlich starke, siidwiarts gehende Strémung in 
diesen beiden Sunden herrscht, welche die Passage in nérdlicher Rich- 
tung in hohem Grade erschwert. Aus dem oben erwahnten kénnen 
wir schliessen dass der St. Lawrence-Fluss nicht zu den Flissen, 
welche Treibhélzer nach dem Ellesmere-Land fihren, gerechnet 
werden darf. 

Dieselbe Annahme dirfte auch den beiden Flissen, dem Churchill 
River und dem Nelson River, gelten, welche an der westlichen Kiiste 
vom Hudson Bay miinden. Auch wenn man annehmen sollte, dass 
eine Treibhélzerstromung von einem oder von beiden dieser zwei Fliisse 
in den Baffins Bay mindete, so ist doch das Fortsetzen derselben in 
den Jones Sund zufolge bereits angedeuteter Strémungsverhiltnisse 
undenkbar. 

Oben erwihnte Fliisse: der St. Lawrence-Fluss, der Churchill 
River, der Nelson River, gehdren bekanntlich zu dem _ dstlichen 
Kustengebiet Nordamerikas. Hier unten werden wir unsere Auf- 
merksamkeit auf die Eismeeresfliisse Nordamerikas richten. Die 
bedeutenderen unter diesen sind der Great Fish River, der Copper- 
mine River, der Mackenzie River. 

Dass die beiden erstgenannten in einem eventuellen Treibhélzer- 
transport: Nordamerika—Ellesmere-Land keine grissere Rolle 
spielen kénnen, geht schon aus einem ganz flichtigen Landkarten- 
studium hervor. Ein Bick auf die Landkarte zeigt sofort, dass diese 
beiden Fliisse nicht in offenes Wasser, sondern in ein von grosseren 
und kleineren Inseln zersplittertes Meeresgebiet miinden. Am wahrschein- 


: ee mo: o 
lichsten ware es daher, dass von diesen Fliissen kommende Treibhélzer 
3 


34 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


bald genug an die seichten Kiisten der Inseln scheitern wiirden und 
dass nur ein héchst unbedeutender Teil der Treibhélzer das offene Meer 
erreichen wiirde. 

Diese Annahme a priori, die den beiden Fliissen infolge rein topo- 
graphischer Verbiltnisse eine gréssere Aktivitét am oben erwahnten 
Treibhélzertransport abspricht, wird weiter durch Angaben in floristischer 
und anderen Hinsichten bestarkt, welche von wissenschaftlichen Expedi- 
tionen geliefert worden sind, die bei ihren Forschungsreisen Gelegenheit 
gehabt, die resp. Flussgebiete zu untersuchen. Wir werden dann unsere 
Aufmerksamkeit zuerst auf den Great Fish River oder Thleew- 
ee-choch, wie er auch genannt wird, richten. In den Jahren 1833, 1834, 
1835 wurde dieser Fluss von einer arktischen Expedition unter der 
Leitung von Kapitién Back! untersucht. Die Baumarten, welche von 
der Expedition angetroffen wurden, bestanden aus mehr oder weniger 
verkimmerten Individuen der Gattungen Salia und Betula. Nach dem 
botanischen Appendix, welches dem Bericht von dieser Expedition bei- 
gefiigt ist, waren die Arten folgende: Salix arctica, S. cordifolia? 
S. herbacea, Betula glandulosa. Coniferen sind gar nicht erwihnt 
worden. 

Vor dem Ausmiinden des Flusses ins Meer wurde allerdings ein 
Stick Treibholz von Pinus gefunden, aber dieses soll, nach der be- 
stimmten Ansicht Back’s, nicht durch letztgenannten Fluss dahingefithrt 
worden sein, sondern ware aus der Ferne, und zwar aus der Miin- 
dung des Mackenzie-Flusses gekommen. Uber dieses Treibholzstiick 
hat er p. 914 folgendes geiiussert: ,— and we found that they had 
really picked up a piece of drift-wood nine foot long and nine inches 
in diameter, together with a few sticks of smaller drift-wood and a part 
of a kieyack. When the large trunk was saved, I was rather sur- 
prised to see it very little sodden with water. — From the peculiar 
character of the wood, which was pine, of that kind which is remar- 
kable for its freedom from knots, I had no doubt that it had originally 
grown somewhere in the upper part of the country, about the M’Kenzie; 
and of this | was the more competent to judge from my recollection of 
the drift-wood west of that large river, which it exactly resembled*. 

Infolge des oben angefiihrten kénnen wir also annehmen, dass der 
Great Fish River fir den Treibhélzertransport ohne Bedeutung ist. 


1 Narrative of the arctic Land Expedition to the Mouth of the Great Fish River 
and along the shores of the arctic Ocean in the Years 1833, 1834, 1835, by 
Captain Back. Paris 1836. 


1898 — 1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 30 


Was in dieser Hinsicht vom Great Fish River gilt, dirfte auch 
dem Coppermine River gelten. Der Verf. stiitzt diese seine Ansicht 
auf die Erfahrungen, welche von der arktischen Expedition Frank.in’s ! 
gemacht worden sind. Die Expedition folgte dem Fluss in nordlicher 
Richtung und drang bis an die Miindung desselben hinauf. Insofern 
ich den Reisebericht richtig verstanden, war die Baumvegetation an 
den Flussufern sehr spirlich. Keine anderen Gattungen als Zwerg- 
birke, Salix, Pinus sind erwaihnt. An der Flussmiindung angelangt, 
begab sich die Expedition in dstlicher Richtung langs der Eismeeres- 
ktiste bis ans Gape Turnagain. Wahrend dieser Fahrt wurden an 
verschiedenen Orten Treibhélzer angetroffen. P. 357 des Reiseberichts 
liest man also folgendes: ,,The shore is strewed with a considerable 
quantity of dvift-timber, principally of the Populus balsamifera, but 
none of it of great size“. — Da diese Pappel nicht zu der Strandvege- 
tation des Coppermine-Flusses gerechnet worden ist, steht man 
etwas befremdet vor der Angabe ihrer Befindlichkeit unter den Treib- 
hélzern dieser Gegenden. Die Erklarung wird aber spater in der Arbeit 
gegeben, im Zusammenhange mit Angaben von anderen Trelbhdlzer- 
funden ahnlicher Beschaffenheit. P. 364 werden somit diese Worte an- 
gefihrt: ,,We were rejoiced to find the beach strewed with abundance 
of small driftwood, none of it recent. It may be remarked that 
the Coppermine River does not bring down any drift-wood; 
nor does any other known stream except Mackenzie's 
River?; hence, from its appearance on this part of the coast, an 
easterly current may be inferred“. — Indem wir annehmen, dass die 
Treibhélzer an dieser Uferstrecke aus dem Mackenzie-Flusse stam- 
men, haben wir auch die Erklarung der Tatsache erhalten, dass Populus 
balsamifera in eben erwahnter Treibhélzeransammlung so reichlich vor- 
kommt. Diese Pappel ist namlich, wie wir hier unten sehen werden, 
fur die Laubhdlzervegetation des Mackenzie-Flusses der typische 
Baum. 

Am Detention Harbour, einer Bucht weit dstlich von der Fluss- 
miindung, an einer Latitude 67°53’ 45”, wurden auch Treibhélzer ange- 
troffen. Nachstehendes Citat mag die Art und den Ursprung dieser 
Treibhélzer beleuchten (p. 370). ,,The drift timber on this part of the 
coast consists of pine and taccamahac (Populus balsamifera), most 


1 Narrative of a journey to the shores of the Polar Sea 1819, 4820, 1821, 1892 by 
Joun Franxurn, London 1823. 
2 Vom Verf. gesperrt. 


36 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


probably from Mackenzie’s or some other river to the westward of 
the Coppermine. It all appears to have lain long in the water, the 
bark being completely worn off, and the ends of the pieces rubbed per- 
fectly smooth*. 

Aus dem oben erwahnten geht es hervor, dass auch diese Treib- 
hélzer wahrscheinlich aus dem Mackenzie-Flusse stammen, und der 
Kern des oben angefiihrten Citates ist zweifellos dieser, dass man den 
Coppermine-Fluss nicht als einen treibhélzerfiihrenden Fluss von 
Bedeutung betrachten darf. 

Dass also weder der Great Fish River noch der Coppermine 
River am Treibhdlzertransport einen aktiven Anteil nimmt, haben wir 
im bereits gesagten zu beweisen versucht. Es bleibt uns also tibrig zu 
erforschen, inwiefern der Mackenzie-Fluss fir denselben von Bedeu- 
tung ist. Der Mackenzie-Fluss besitzt alle Voraussetzungen dafiir, 
ein treibholzfiihrender Fluss von Rang zu sein. An den Ufern des- 
selben wiichst eine tppige Baumvegetation. Er ist, wie oben erwahnt, 
von bedeutender Grosse und besitzt grosse Stromstirke. Er miindet in 
offenes Wasser, keine Inseln oder Inselgruppen um die Miindung herum 
oder an der Nahe derselben bieten den Treibhélzern versteckte Havarie- 
platze. Man kann sich daher sehr wohl vorstellen, dass diese durch die 
eigene Stromstirke des Flusses so weit ins Meer gefiihrt worden sind, 
dass sie in eine Verzweigung des Polarstroms geraten und durch diese 
in nordéstlicher Richtung gegen die Meere westlich vom Ellesmere- 
Land gefthrt werden. Es liesse sich auch denken, dass die 'Treibhdélzer, 
in diesen Fahrwassern angelangt, endlich mittels der oben erwabnten, 
dort herrschenden, ausserordentlich starken Strémung durch den Car- 
digan-Sund oder den Helvedesporten in den westlichen Teil des 
Jones-Sunds hineingezogen werden. 

A priori scheint diese Theorie die geeignetste zu sein, um das Vor- 
kommen der Treibhélzer im westlichen Teile des Jones-Sunds zu 
erklaren. Im folgenden werden wir die Haltbarkeit dieser Theorie etwas 
genauer priifen. 

Um entscheiden zu konnen, ob die Mutterbiume der Treibhélzer 
vom Ellesmere-Land an den Ufern des Mackenzie-Flusses ge- 
wachsen sind, miissen wir natiirlich vor allen Dingen die Baumvegetation 
des betreffenden Flusses kennen lernen. Es ist dem Verf. miglich ge- 
wesen diese Vegetation genauer zu specificieren, dadurch dass er floris- 
tische Angaben zusammengestellt hat, welche teils in RicHarpsson’s ! 


1 Arctic Searching Expedition: A journal of a Boat-Voyage through Ruperts Land 
and the arctic Sea, by Sir Jon Ricuarpsson. Vol. I. London 1851. 


1898— 1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE. LAND. 37 


Schilderung einer Reise durch das Ruperts-Land, teils in der friher 
citierten Arbeit FRANKLIN’s vorliegen. 

Unter seinem Laufe hat der Mackenzie-Fluss bekanntlich meh- 
rere verschiedene Namen: so wird die Strecke zwischen den Fluss- 
quellen in den Klippigen Bergen bis an den Athabasca-See der 
Athabasca-Fluss genannt; die Strecke zwischen dem Athabasca- 
See und dem Grossen Sklaven-See wird der Grosse Sklaven- 
Fluss genannt; die Strecke zwischen dem Grossen Sklaven-See und 
der Eismeereskiiste betrachtet man gewohnlich als mit dem Mackenzie- 
Flusse identisch. Fir die folgenden Teile der Flussstrecke werden hier 
unten floristische Angaben geliefert: 


1. Das Gebiet um den Athabasca-See und den Peace-Fluss 1. 

2. Das Gebiet am Ausflusse des Mackenzie-Flusses aus dem 
Grossen Sklaven-See. 

3. Das Gebiet um den Great Bear Lake an der Baumgrenze. 

4. Point Separation an der Deltamiindung. 


Im folgenden werden wir Citate anfihren, welche die Zusammen- 
setzung der Baumvegetation an den angegebenen Orten beleuchten: 


Das Gebiet um den ReiahascaSee wad den Peace-Fluss2. 


»Lhe oaks, the elms, the ashes, the Weymouth pine, and pitch pine, 
which reach the Saskatchevan basin, are wanting here, and the bal- 
samfir is rare; but as these trees form no prominent feature of the 
landscape in the former quarter, no marked change in the woodland scenery 
takes place in any part of the Mackenzie River district, until we 
approach the shores of the Arctic Sea* The white spruce 
continues to be the predominating tree in dry soils, whether rich or poor; 
the Banksian pine occupies a few sandy spots; the black spruce skirts 
the marshes; and the balsam-poplar and aspen fringe the streams; the 
latter also springs up in places where the white spruce has been de- 
stroyed by fire. The canoe-birch becomes less abundant, is formed 
chiefly in rocky districts, and is very scarce north of the arctic circle.“ 

Aus den gesperrten Worten geht hervor, dass diese eben geschil- 
derte Baumvegetation die ganze Flussstrecke zwischen dem Atha- 
basca-See und der Eismeereskiiste charakterisiert. 


1 Der Peace-Fluss ist ein Nebenfluss des Mackenzie-Flusses in der Nihe 
vom Athabasca-See. 

2 Ricwarpsson, |. c. p. 136. 

3 Vom Verf. gesperrt. 


38 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Das Gebiet am Ausflusse des Mackenzie-Flusses aus dem Grossen 
Sklaven-See 1. 


»This spot may be considered as the commencement of Mackenzie- 
River. The ground is very swampy, and nourishes willows only; but 
inland, at a short distance from the beach, grow plenty of the spruce- 


fir, poplar, aspen, and birch-trees. —“ 


Das Gebiet um den Great Bear Lake”. 


yAs has been already said, the general aspect of the 
forest does not alter in the descent of the Mackenzie* The 
white spruce continues to be the chief tree. In this quarter it attains 
a girth of four or five feet, and a height of about sixty in a growth 
of from two to three hundred years, as shown by the annual layers of 
wood. One tree, cut down in a sheltered valley near Clark’s Hill, 
measured the unusual length of one hundred and twenty-two feet, but 
was comparatively slender. Most of the timber is twisted, particularly 
where the trees grow in exposed situations. The Banksian pine was 
not traced to the north of Great Bear Lake River; but the black spruce, 
in a stunted form, is found on the borders of svamps as far as the 
woods extend. The dog-wood, silvery oleaster (Hle@agnus argentea), 
Shepherdia, and Amelanchier grow on banks that in Europe would 
be covered with gorse and broom, and the southern Salix candida is 
replaced by the more luxuriant and much handsomer Salix speciosa, 


which is the prince of the willow family. —“ 


Point Separation an der Deltamiindung +. 


»The banks of the River here, and the numerous islands, are well 
wooded. The balsam poplars rise to the height of twenty feet, and the 
white spruce to forty or fifty.“ 


An der Baumgrenze zwischen Harrison Island und Reindeer-Hills °. 


ylhe valleys and borders of the river are well wooded, but the 
summits of the eminences present only scattered spruce firs, with stunted 
tops and widely spreading, depressed lower branches. The Canoe-birch 


1 Franxuin, Narrative of a Second Expedition to the shores of the Polar Sea in 
the years 1825, 1826, 1829, p. 12. 
~ 2 Ricuarpsson, |. c. p. 199, Vol. I. 
3 Vom Verf. gesperrt. 
4 Ricnarpsson, |. c. p. 227, Vol. L. 
5 lc. p. 281, Vol. 1 


" 


1898 —1902. No. 24.] _ DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. — 39 


(Betula papyracea) is frequent, and the trees we measured were about 
five inches in diameter. The Populus balsamifera and Alnus viridis 
grow to the height of twenty feet, and the Salia speciosa to upwards 
of twelve.“ 

Endlich muss in diesem Zusammenhange erwahnt werden, dass 
Departement of agriculture Washington auf Anfrage fol- 
gende Angabe betreffs der Art der Nadelbaumtreibhilzer, welche im 
Mackenzie-Flusse angehauft sind, liefert: 


Picea sitchensis. 

Picea mariana (= P. nigra Liyx.). 
Abies nobilis. 

Thuja plicata (= Thuja gigantea Nutt.). 


Im untenstehenden Schema werden wir die oben angegebenen Arten 
zusammenfthren um dadurch eine Ubersicht tiber die Zusammensetzung 
der Baumvegetation an den Ufern des Mackenzie-Flusses zu er- 
halten. Um die Ubereinstimmung zwischen der englischen und der latei- 
nischen Nomenklatur zu finden, hat der Verf. die oben citierte Arbeit 
Ricwarpsson’s Vol. II (Appendix: List of Trees and Shrubs) benutzt. 


Nadelhélzer. Laubhédlzer. 
Abies (Picea) alba = white spruce. Populus balsamea = balsampoplar. 
Abies (Picea) nigra = black spruce. Populus tremuloides = Aspen. 
Picea sitchensis. Betula (B. papyracea) = Canoe-birch. 
Abies balsamea = balsam fir. Salix = willow (S. candida, S. speciosa), 
Abies nobilis. Alnus viridis, A. incana. 
Pinus Banksiana = banksian pine. Eleagnus argentec. 
Thuja plicata (= Th. gigantea Nurt.). Shepherdia. 
Spruce-fir? Amelanchier. 


Im folgenden wird sich das Interesse hauptsichlich an diese Frage 
kniipfen: ist es wahrscheinlich, dass die Baumvegetation des Mack enzie- 
Flusses, mit der Zusammensetzung, die vorstehendes Schema aufweist, 
zu den Treibhélzern auf dem Ellesmere-Land das Material geliefert 
hat? Wir erinnern uns, dass unsere Treibhélzer folgende Zusammen- 
setzung hatten: Larix, Picea, Populus, Salix. Aus einer Vergleichung 
zwischen dem Verzeichnis der Arten unserer Treibhélzer und voran- 
gehendem Schema geht sofort hervor, dass die Gattungen Picea, Populus, 
Salix fir beide gemeinsam sind, die Gattung Lariw im Schema fehlt, 
im Verzeichnis der Treibhélzer aber vorhanden ist. Letztgenannte Gat- 
tung muss uns also die erste Richtlinie zur Lésung der Frage geben. 


40 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Unter unseren Treibhélzern sind, wie oben erwikhnt, zahlreiche 
Lirchenproben identificiert worden. Sie kommen in Relation zu der 
Anzahl tbriger Treibhdlzerproben in so grosser Menge vor, dass man 
annehmen muss, sie stammen aus einem waldbildenden Gebiete. Nach 
dem Schema sollte Larix an den Ufern des Mackenzie-Flusses 
vollstindig fehlen. So verhalt es sich doch nicht. In dem oben citierten 
Reisebericht Franxuin’s hat der Verf. einzelne Angaben dariiber ge- 
sehen, dass die Expedition wahrend ihrer Fahrt lings dem Flusse hier 
und dort Larchen vorgefunden, die unter ,white Spruce“ = Picea alba 
eingesprengt waren. Diese Angaben beziehen sich doch hauptsichlich 
auf die Gebiete um den Athabasca-See und den Grossen Sklaven- 
Fluss herum, dagegen nicht auf den eigentlichen Mackenzie-Fluss 
oder mit anderen Worten die Flussstrecke nérdlich vom Grossen 
Sklaven-See. Soviel der Verf. verstanden hat, deuten die betref- 
fenden Angaben nur auf sporadisch vorkommende Larchenindividuen. 
Der typische Baum unter den Nadelhélzern ist némlich nach RicHarpsson 
Picea alba = white spruce. Er sagt (p. 199): ,The white spruce con- 
tinues to be the chief tree —“1! und an einer anderen Stelle: ,Of this 
species we have had frequent occasion to speak in the preceding pages, 
as it is especially the forest tree in Ruperts land“ °. 

Dass Larix auf den Ufern des Mackenzie-Flusses keine bedeu- 
tende Rolle spielt und auch nicht auf den Gebieten der iibrigen Kis- 
meeresfliisse, geht aus allen dem Verf. bekannten floristischen Angaben 
deutlich hervor, welche betreffs dieses Sachverhaltnisses vollstandig tiber-. 
einstimmen. Hier unten werden einige Angaben geliefert der Ausbreitung 
der amerikanischen Larche in Nordamerika betreffs: 

» The species °, with the black spruce, occupies nearly all the swampy 
ground from Newfoundland, Labrador, and the eastern provinces to 
the eastern base of the Rocky Mountains in the Peace River region 
and on the Athabasca; on the Rocky Mountain portage above Hudson’s 
Hope, Peace River, Lat. 56° (Macoun). From York Factory, Hudson 
Bay to Point Lake, Lat. 65°, where it only attains a height of from 6 to 
8 feet (RicHarpsson) 4. 

Nach Ricuarpsson® hat die Art folgende Verbreitung: ,, Larix 
americana—ranges northwards to the arctic circle, and from Newfound- 
land and Labrador across the continent to the Pacific. — It is a tree 


1 Ricuarpsson, |. ce. p. 199. Vol. I. 

2 ‘s , loc. p. 186. Vol. IL 

3 Larix americana, Micuavx. 

4 Catalogue of Canadian Plants, Part I] — Apetalm 1886, p. 475. 
5 Ricnarpsson, |. ¢. p. 318, vol. IL. 


1898— 1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 41 


of no great importance, and is generally thinly scattered through the 
forest, and if it is anywhere grouped in numbers, it is on the borders 
of swamps, where it never attains much height.“ 

Ricwarpsson! hat in derselben Arbeit, aus welcher dieses Citat 
stammt, eine pflanzengeographische Tabelle, auf der Flora Boreali- 
americana Hooker’s basiert. Eine Partie dieser Tabelle zeigt uns die 
geographische Verbreitung der Coniferen in Nordamerika. Er hat 
Nordamerika aus geographischem Gesichtspunkte in 3 Zonen ein- 
geteilt, deren Umfassung aus der Tabelle hervorgeht. 


e First Zone between Second Zone. Third or Polar 
@ Lat. 45° to 55° on E. || From Arctic Circle Zone. 
Ss side, and Lat. 492 northwards to Lying N. of 
2 to 58° W. side. 729 N. ! 73° Lat. 
2 iu eee 
a a wn Pot o 5 
Bc ee | we ce bee 2 3 : 
Conifer. | .& || NS 2 | ‘a | 2 § ae les) og | s 
al #2) si/e | ele B/S | 1» |3 e| 3 
oO aie es 3 = = 
ele | ere. [wig |B “ ia@| 8) 
Siele@lsieie !2'is l4aje |g! 2] & 
Ale! 8] @/}/s2ieg | Bj ,e| ie | @ Oo | 8 
sis | & | & B-25| 3 |Be| sites| $ | 8 | 2 
S| 2) 2 | 2] eieele ie. eles) 2 |.2 1) 
Sav |6 |S | Sas) 2 es] es jas) a) 2 | a 
| | ae 
Conifere .| 20 20 6 | 14 7 1 | 4 6 Z : S 4 
\ 
Pinus ... S| eh | GA | 2 | Pa i eee (ee ee ee 
Abies....| 6) 6 3 2 4 3 1 | Q 2 - - . a 
Larix ...j| 1 | 1 - - 1 1 - - 1 - “ 
Cupressus. | 2 | 2 1 : 1 7 z 2 < é 2 : 
Thuja ... 2. 2 1 1 1 - - ‘ - . = Z . 
Juniperus .| 3 | e 1 Oo) #1) @) @ bee Bley = | wpe] 
Taxus ...| 1 | 1 ‘ : 1i - & : Pe |e : 7 


Aus der Tabelle erweist es sich also, dass Laria innerhalb der 
dritten Zone oder der Polarzone vollstandig fehlt und dass die Verbrei- 
tung derselben als waldbildender Baum innerhalb sowohl der ersten als 
der zweiten Zone auf den ostlichen Distrikt, also auf den 6stlichen Teil 
Nordamerikas beschrinkt ist. Diese Angaben Ricwarpsson’s tiber 
das Verbreitungsgebiet der Art stimmen mit denen von LinpMaN itiberein. 

Letztgenannter Verf. schreibt hiertiber: Larix americana tillhér 
jstra Nordamerika fran Hudsons Bay séderut til Pennsylvanien 


1 Ricuarpssoy, 1. c. p. 337, vol. II. 
2 Linpman, lc. p. 22. 


42 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


och New Jersey; den dr allmiin i de stater, som ga upp til St. Law- 
rencefloden, men bildar skogar blott norr om niaimnda flod, salunda 
i Canada, Labrador, N. Braunswig, New-Foundland och 
N. Skottland. — Enligt Sargent viixer denna art till ett trad av 80— 
100 fots hdjd endast pad Labrador och New-Foundland. Enligt 
PaRLATORE ar dess nordgrins 50° n. br., hvilket Sarcent utstracker 
til 65°.“ 

Aus oben gelieferten Angaben tber das Verbreitungsgebiet der Art 
ergiebt es sich also deutlich, dass Larix americana nur in‘dem ést- 
lichen Teil Nordamerikas ein waldbildender Baum ist, dass man 
die Befindlichkeit derselben in den Vegetationsgebieten des Mack enzie- 
Flusses oder der tbrigen Eismeeresfliisse als nur zufilliger Natur 
betrachten darf. 

Nun kénnte man sich allerdings die Moglichkeit denken, die Mutter- 
baume des Lirchenholzes unter unseren Treibhélzern waren eben diese in 
obenerwahntem Flussgebiet sporadisch vorkommenden Lirchenindivi- 
duen. Dieser Annahme widersprechen folgende Tatsachen: 

1. Die Larchenproben im Treibhdlzermaterial sind im Verhaltnis zu 
der Anzahl der tbrigen Treibhélzerproben so zahlreich, dass man an- 
nehmen muss, sie stammen aus einem von der Art gebildeten Wald- 
gebiet. 

2. Unsere Treibhdlzerproben hatten, wie sich aus der Tabelle p. 10 
ergiebt, fir die Breite der Jahrringe einen sehr geringen Mittelwert. Als 
gemeinschafthchen Mittelwert, d.h. als Mittelproportionale fir die resp. 
Mittelwerte simtlicher Proben erhielt man die Zahl 0,99 mm. Wenn wir 
nun mit Hilfe der an p. 30 angefiihrten, von Martins und Bravais 
aufgestellten Tabelle die Polarhéhe fir den Wachsort der Mutterbiume 
bestimmen wollen, so kénnen wir daraus schliessen, dass sich der Wachs- 
ort unter einem Breitengrade befinden muss, welcher dem Kaafjord, 
d. h. 69° 57’ n. Br. entspricht. — Die Larchen, welche in Nordamerika 
an 65° n. Br. vorkommen, treten nach RicHarpsson nicht in Baumform 
auf, sondern bleiben niedrige, verkiimmerte, 6—8 Fuss hohe Straucher 1. 
Die Larchenproben unserer Treibhélzer sind indessen von so kraftigen 
Dimensionen, dass man sie nicht als Fragmente der nérdlichsten Vor- 
posten dieser Arten betrachten kann. 

Wenn nun diese beiden Sachverhiltnisse, die Anzahl und Dimen- 
sionen der Proben, mit obenerwahnten floristischen Angaben fir das 
Verbreitungsgebiet der Art kombiniert werden, diirfte man wohl daraus 


1 P. 40 dieser Abhandlung, siehe das Citat von Ricuarpssox! 


1898 — 1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 43 


schliessen kdnnen, dass die Mutterbiume unserer Lirchenproben weder 
an den Ufern des Mackenzie-Flusses noch an denen der tbrigen 
Eismeeresfliisse gewachsen sind. 

Dieser Auffassung widerspricht keineswegs das Sachverhaltnis, dass 
Abies balsamea, Pinus Banksiana, Abies nobilis, Thuja plicata, von 
welchen Arten die beiden letztgenannten nach Angabe der Landwirt- 
schaftskammer in Washington in der Strandvegetation des Mackenzie- 
Flusses vorkamen, unter unsern Treibhélzern nicht angetroffen worden 
sind. Dieser Umstand kénnte selbstverstandlich sehr wohl auf einem 
Zufall beruhen, aber eigentiimlich scheint es jedenfalls, wenn die Treib- 
holzer des Mackenzie-Flusses eine andere Art von Zusammen- 
setzung als die Strandvegetation desselben aufweisen sollten. 

In der Art und Beschaffenheit eines der beiden Laubhilzer, die unter 
unseren Treibhélzern gefunden worden sind, haben wir vielleicht eine 
andere Bestitigung unserer Auffassung von der Inaktivitét des Macken- 
zie-Flusses an dem Treibhdlzertransport nach dem Ellesmere- 
Land. Wie bereits erwiahnt, ist eine Populws-Art identifiziert worden. Die 
am hiaufigsten vorkommende Pappelart auf den Ufern des Mackenzie- 
Flusses, der typische Baum in der Laubhdlzervegetation ist Populas 
balsaimifera. Das Vorkommen dieser Art hierselbst und die Rolle, 
welche sie unter den Treibhélzern des Mackenzie-Flusses spielt 
mag vom folgenden Citat beleuchtet werden!: ,— On the Peace River and 
all streams which unile to form the Mackenzie, it occupies all the is- 
lands and low alluvial banks. During the period of flood many trees 
fall into the rivers by the wearing away of the banks, and a great 
number of them in the course of time reach the Arctic Ocean. These 
are eventually cast on the islands and shores, and become the chief 
source from which is derived the fuel supply of arctic tra- 
vellers, —* 

. Eine andere Angabe, welche das Vorkommen der Art an den Ufern 
des Mackenzie-Flusses und ihre Bedeutung als treibhélzerbildender 
Baum beleuchtet, ist diese (Ricaarpsson)?: ,Populus balsamifera, 
balsam poplar or tacamahac, was found growing on the banks ot the 
Mackenzie up to lat. 59°, where it makes a very slender tree. In the 
southern part of the delta of that river, it forms groups of healthy young 
trees, — I measured some drift logs of this tree which were floating 


1 Catalogue of Canadian Plants, p. 456. 
2 Vom Verf. gesperrt. 
8 Ricuarpsson, |. c. p. 314. Vol. fL. 


44 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


. down the Mackenzie, and found them to be about 15 feet in circum- 
ference, with a very moderate tapering upwards.“ . 

Endlich will ich aus dem Reisebericht Franxkuin’s! folgendes Citat 
beifiigen, welches dazu dient, den Inhalt der beiden vorhergehenden zu 
bekraftigen: ,,The trunk. of this tree attains a greater circumference than 
that of any other in the northern parts of America. — We traced it as 
far to the north as Great Slave Lake, and the south branch of Macken- 
zie’s River has been named Riviére and Liards from its abundance in 
that quarter. It constituted the greatest part of the drift tim- 
ber that we observed on the shores of the Arctic Sea“. ? 

Diese Angaben betreffs der Bedeutung der Balsampappel als treib- 
hélzerbildender Baum an den Ufern des Mackenzie-Flusses veran- 
lasste den Verf., zwischen dem Holz der betreffenden Treibhélzerprobe 
und dem einer amerikanischen Balsampappel einen anatomischen Ver- 
gleich anzustellen. Dabei hat der Verf. als Vergleichungsmaterial ein 
Stammstiick von Populus balsamifera Linn. aus Canada? gehabt. 
Aus der anatomischen Untersuchung stellte es sich heraus, dass die 
beiden Holzstiicke nicht derselben Art waren, sondern dass zwischen 
ihnen bedeutende und unverkennbare Ungleichheiten vorhanden waren, 
welche auf diese Weise zusammengestellt werden kénnen: 


Populus balsamifera Linn., Canada. 


Markstrahlzellen reichlich mit Harz imprigniert. 

Gefasse am Querschnitte in regelmassigen Reihen geordnet. 
Radiale Weite der Gefiisse (am Querschnitte) 0,22 mm. (Mittelzahl 
von 20 Messungen). 


wiper 


Populus-Treibholz (sehr kraftiger, centrisch gewachsener 
Stammteil). 


1. Harz in Markstrahlzellen vollstandig fehlend. 

2. Gefaisse am Querschnitte unregelmissig geordnet. 

8. Radiale Weite der Gefisse (am Querschnitte) 0,12 mm. (Mittelzahl 
von 20 Messungen). 


Aus der anatomischen Vergleichung geht also deutlich hervor, dass 
die beiden Holzarten nicht identisch sind, dass unsere Treibholzprobe 
also von Populus balsamifera Linn. nicht stammt. Dagegen stimmt 


1 Frankuwy, Narrative of a journey etc. 1918, 1820, 1821, 1822, Appendix, p. 766. 

2 Vom Verf. gesperrt. 

3 Das betreffende Holzstiick befindet sich in einer Sammlung amerikanischer 
Holzarten, welche zur Bot. Instit. Lund’s gehért. 


1898—1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 45 


die Treibholzprobe durch ihre anatomische Struktur mit den Treibhilzer- 
proben iberein, welche in dem von Naruorsr eingesammelten Treib- 
hdlzermaterial als Populus tremula L. festgestellt worden sind. Diese 
Art kommt bekanntlich in Nordamerika vor und gehirt, wie angegeben 
worden ist, zum Vegetationsgebiet des Mackenzie-Flusses. Nach fol- 
gender Angabe soll die betreffende Art an trocknen Orten wachsen, also 


nicht gern im Uberschwemmungsgebiet eines Flusses: — ,[t is found 
on all dry slopes from Newfoundland and Labrador throughout the 
northern forest region to Alaska. — Although it is always found on 


the dry slopes in the north, in Ontario it more frequently grows on wet 
than on dry soil.“ 1 

Dass eben angefihrte zeigt deutlich, dass die Espe, Populus tremula, 
im Vegetationsgebiet der Eismeeresfliisse Nordamerikas keine treib- 
hélzerbildende Baumart von Bedeutung ist, und diese Annahme wird 
nochmals, wenigstens betreffs der Strandvegetation des Mackenzie- 
Flusses, durch folgende, in einem anderen Zusammenhange (p. 44) 
citierte Worte bekraftigt: —,.It (P. balsamifera) constituted the greatest 
part of the drift-timber that we observed on the shores of the Arctic 
Sea.“ 2 

Wenn man von den Voraussetzungen ausgeht, dass die Treibhilzer 
der Tochterkiiste ihrer Zusammensetzung nach dieselben typischen Baume 
wie die der Mutterktiste aufweisen, darf man wohl annehmen, dass die 
Balsampappel (Populus balsamifera) das Material zu den Pappeltreib- 
hélzern auf dem Ellesmere-Land geliefert hat, vorausgesetzt naim- 
lich, dass sie aus der Mindung des Mackenzie-Flusses stammt. 
Zwar kénnte man gegen diese Annahme einwenden, dass die Artzusam- 
mensetzung der Treibhélzer waihrend des Transportes zwischen der Mutter- 
und der Tochterktiste ihren Charakter verandert, was wohl oft der Fall 
ist, indem wohl nur das wasserdichte Holz den Destinationsort erreicht 
habe, alles andere dagegen unterwegs durchgetrinkt und gesunken sei. 
Diese Einwendung diirfte doch unsere Uberzeugung betreffs der Art 
und Natur des Pappeltreibholzes im erwahnten Treibhélzermaterial keines- 
wegs stéren, weil das Holz der Balsampappel nach eben erwahnotem 
Erfahrungssatz, welcher sagt, dass harzreiches Holz nicht so leicht 
als harzarmes durchtrankt wird und sinkt, héchst wahrscheinlich weit 
seefester als das der Espe ist. Dass das Holz der Balsampappel einen 
langwierigen Wassertransport vertragen kann, erweist sich auch daraus, 


1 Catalogue of Canadian Plants |. c. p. 456. Die Art steht in der citierten Arbeit 
unter dem Namen von P. tremuloides Michx. = Aspen. 
2 Siehe Frankin’s Reisebericht p. 766. 


46 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


dass die obenerwéhnten arktischen Expeditionen an Orten, die weit von 
der Treibhélzerquelle entfernt waren, Treibhélzer dieser Art angetroffen 
haben. Das Pappelholz, welches also éstlich von den Miindungen des 
Coppermine-Flusses und des Great Fish-Flusses gefunden wurde 
und welches nach einstimmigen Angaben aus dem Mackenzie-Flusse 
stammte, trug oft Spuren davon, im Wasser schon lange gelegen zu 
haben. — Nichts von dem oben angefiihrten scheint daher diese unsere Auf- 
fassung zu widerlegen, dass die Pappeltreibhélzer auf dem Ellesmere- 
Land aus dem Holz der Balsampappel und nicht aus dem einer anderen 
Pappelart bestehen miissen, vorausgesetzt namlich, dass die Treibhélzer- 
strémung vom Mackenzie-Fluss gekommen ist. 

Endlich mag noch ein anderer Gesichtspunkt hervorgehoben werden, 
der fir die Bedeutung der Zusammengehdrigkeit zwischen den Treib- 
hélzern des Ellesmere-Landes und den des Mackenzie-Flusses 
vielleicht nicht unwesentlich ist. Nach Angaben der Frankuin’schen 
und der Bacx’schen Expeditionen ist die nordamerikanische Eismeeres- 
kiiste mit Treibhélzern reichlich versehen. An der Kistenstrecke zwischen 
dem Delta des Mackenzie-Flusses und der Muindung des Great 
Fish-Flusses und 6stlich von derselben wurden hier und dort gréssere 
oder kleinere Holzansammlungen gefunden. Besonders kompakte Treib- 
hélzeranhaufungen wurden an der Kistenstrecke zwischen obenerwihntem 
Flussdelta und dem Cape Bathurst gesehen. Betreffs der Menge 
der hier gefundenen Treibhélzer schreibt Franxuin !: ,,There is such an 
abundance of drift-timber on almost every part of the coast, that a 
sufficient supply of fuel for a ship might easily be collected, and wher- 
ever we landed on the main shore, we found streams or small lakes of 
fresh water. Should the course of events ever introduce a steam-vessel 
into those seas, it may be important to know that in coasting the shores 
between Cape Bathurst and the Mackenzie, fire-wood sufficient for her 
daily consumption may be gathered“ etc. 

Aus dem oben angefiihrten kénnen wir schliessen, dass Massen von 
Treibhélzern an der Eismeereskiiste Nordamerikas vorhanden sein 
miissen. Da aber alle diese Treibhélzeranhaufungen nach einstimmigen 
Angaben als Bruchstiicke von dem grossen Treibhélzervorrat des 
Mackenzie-Flusses zu _ betrachten sind, ist es ja selbstverstindlich, 
dass es eine dstliche, von der Flussmindung ausgehende Treibhélzer- 
strémung sein muss, welche diese Treibhélzer vom Treibhélzerbassin im 
Delta des Mackenzie-Flusses in ihre jetzige Lage getrieben hat. In 


1 Franxuin: Second Expedition 1825, 1826, 1827, I. c. p. 268. 


1898—1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 47 


Betracht der Anzahl, der Grésse und bisweilen auch des hohen Alters 
dieser Treibhélzeransammlungen geht letzteres aus ihrer oft hohen Lage 
oberhalb der jetzigen Strandlinie deutlich genug hervor, ist es wahr- 
scheinlich, dass wir hier in diesen Fahrwassern eine miachtige Treib- 
hélzerstr6mung von alten Ahnen haben, welche, in déstlicher Richtung 
langs der Kiiste fahrend, fir das grosse Treibhélzerbassin des Mackenzie- 
Flusses den Hauptablauf bildet. Mit diesen Zeilen will der Vert. 
nur die Méghichkeit dafiir angedeutet haben, dass die Treibhélzerstro- 
mung des Mackenzie-Flusses infolge ihrer stark dstlichen Richtung 
mit den Kiistengebieten des Ellesmere-Landes nie in Kontakt kom- 
men kann. 

Infolge aller dieser oben erwahnten Sachverhaltnisse scheint es 
uns, dass die Treibhélzer auf dem Ellesmere-Land nicht aus dem 
Mackenzie-Fluss stammen. Hier unten giebt der Verf. eine Uber- 
sicht der Gesichtspunkte, auf welche er die obenerwihnte Ansicht 
griindet : 

1. Die Larchenproben unter unseren Treibhélzern miissen aus einem von 
der Art gebildeten Waldgebiet stammen. Die Larche ist im Vege- 
tationsgebiet des Mackenzie-Flusses nicht waldbildend (p. 40—48). 

2. Unter unseren Treibhélzern fehlen Reprasentanten fir die Mehrzahl 
der Baume, welche nach dem Pflanzenschema p. 39 zur Baumvege- 
tation des Mackenzie-Flusses gehdren (p. 43). 

3. Das Fehlen von Populus balsamifera, das Vorkommen aber von 
anderer Pappelart im Treibhélzermateriale (p. 43—46). 

4. Die Treibhélzerstrémung des Mackenzie-Flusses scheint eine 
éstliche Richtung langs der nordamerikanischen Eismeereskiiste zu 
nehmen (p. 46—47). 

Im Vorhergehenden haben wir dies zu beweisen versucht, dass die 
iibrigen treibhdlzerfihrenden Flisse Nordamerikas am Treibhélzer- 
transport nach dem Ellesmere-Land_ wahrscheinlich nicht teil- 
nehmen. Wenn nun auch der Mackenzie-Fluss, der grésste und 
bedeutendste von den siimtlichen aufgezahlten Flissen, als aktiver Faktor 
im Treibhélzertransport forteliminiert wird, so ist damit auch gesagt, 
dass Nordamerika das Mutterland der Treibhélzer auf dem Elles- 
mere-Land nicht sein kann. Es bleibt uns also nur tibrig dasselbe in 
Sibirien zu suchen. 

In den nordsibirischen Flissen, dem Jenissei und der Lena, ent- 
stehen michtige Treibhdlzerstrémungen, deren Strombahnen wir friher 
beschrieben. Aus einer dieser Strémungen muss das Ellesmere-Land 
seine Treibhélzer bekommen haben. Wie der Verf. in der Einleitung 


48 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


erwihnt, hat er eine an der Miindung des Jenissei’s zusammenge- 
brachte Treibhélzersammlung untersucht. Bei einer Vergleichung zwischen 
diesem Material und unseren Treibhélzern wurden keine Erfahrungen 
gemacht, die darauf deuteten, dass die beiden Sammlungen der Art und 
dem Ursprunge nach verschieden waren; im Gegenteil deuteten alle Be- 
obachtungen darauf, dass sie von demselben Material gebildet waren. 
So war die Artzusammensetzung ungefahr dieselbe. Die Treibhdlzer 
des Jenissei’s bestanden aus folgenden Gattungen: Larix, Picea, Salix, 
Populus, Alnus; die Treibhélzer vom Ellesmere-Land aus Lari«a, 
Picea, Populus, Salix, also von denselben Gattungen wie die Treib- 
hiélzer des Jenissei’s, Alnus ausgenommen. 

Auch soleche Charaktere, von denen wir annehmen miissen, dass sie 
auf klimatischen und anderen Vegetationsbedingungen beruhen, waren den 
Bestandteilen der beiden Sammlungen gemeinsam. So kann ich Eigen- 
schaften nennen, die sich auf die Entwicklung der Jahrringe, auf die 
Proportion zwischen Spat- und Frihholz in einem und demselben Jahr- 
ringe, mdglicherweise auch auf die Zellweite beziehen. Meine Zellen- 
messungen an den Treibhélzern des Jenissei’s gaben dieselben Werte 
wie die an den Treibhélzern auf dem Ellesmere-Land_ bewerk- 
stelligten. 

In der Artzusammensetzung oder der Beschaffenheit unserer Treib- 
hdlzer giebt es also nichts, was gegen die Wahrscheinlichkeit spricht, 
die wir durch Untersuchungen von der eventuellen Aktivitat der nord- 
amerikanischen Flisse am Treibhélzertransport nach dem Ellesmere- 
Land gewannen, die Wahrscheinlichkeit nimlich, dass unsere Treib- 
hélzer sibirischen Ursprungs sind. 

Also bleibt es uns endlich tbrig festzustellen, welcher Strémungs- 
bahn die sibirischen Treibhélzer folgen miissen, um die westliche Hafen 
im Jones Sund zu erreichen. Aus dem Landkartenstudium ergiebt es 
sich, dass drei solche Linien vorhanden sein kénnten: 

1) eine von Siiden durch den Davis Sund—den Baffins Bay; 
2) eine von Norden durch den Robesons Kanal—den Baffins Bay; 
und endlich 3) eine von Norden durch den Cardigan Sund oder 
Helvedesporten. 

A priori kénnte man sich wohl denken, dass die Treibhélzerstrémung 
von Siiden gekommen wire, den Davis Sund und.den Baffins Bay 
passiert hatte und hiervon gegen Westen in den Jones Sund abgebogen 
wire. An der siidwestlichen Kiste Grénlands giebt es namlich eine 
gréssere Anhiufung von Treibhélzern, welche nach den Untersuchungen 
Ortensian’s sibirischen Ursprungs sind und wahrscheinlich aus dem 


1898 — 1209, No. 24] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 49 


Flusstal des Jenissei’s stammen. Diese Treibhdlzeranhiufung besteht 
aus derselben Art von Material, wie die Treibhidlzeranhaiufung im Jones 
Sund. Man kénnte sich denken, dass gewisse von der grénlandischen 
Holzmiederlage losgerissene Treibhélzermengen mit dem Golfstrom ge- 
trieben, der ja eine Verzweigung in den Baffins Bay aufsendet, und 
von dort durch déstliche Winde in den Jones Sund hineingepresst 
wiiren. 

Gegen die Wahrscheinlichkeit dieser Hypothese sprechen dieselben 
Umstande, welche frither in einem anderen Zusammenhange  betont 
worden sind: 

1. Die bestimmten Angaben Stumons’ betreffend die Stroémungsverhalt- 
misse in diesen Gegenden, nach welchen ein Austausch von Treib- 
produkten zwischen dem Baffins Bay und dem Jones Sund 
vollstandig ausgeschlossen wiire. 


2. Treibhélzer sind nur in den westlichsten Halen vom Jones Sund 


vorhanden. 
Die zweite Eventualitat: der Robesons Kanal — der Baffins 
Bay — der Jones Sund muss nach dem was gesagt worden ist 


selbtverstandlich auch ausgeschlossen sein, weil das Vorhandensein einer 
Verbindungslinie der Baffins Bay — der Jones Sund _ infolge der 
Strémungsverhiltuisse undenkbar ist. Dagegen scheint es dem Verf. 
wahrscheinlich, dass die Treibhélzerprobe, (Larix), welche Stumons in der 
Alexandra-Bucht an der Ostkiiste des Ellesmere-Lands gefunden, 
von Norden durch den Robesons Kanal gekommen ist. 

Es bleibt uns dann tbrig unsere Aufmerksamkeit auf die dritte 
Eventualitat zu richten oder auf die, welche sich auf einen Eismeeres- 
strom noérdlich von Groénland und Grants Land mit Fortsetzung 
siidwiarts durch den Cardigansund oder Helvedesporten bezog. 
Dass eine noérdliche Strémung wirklich existiert, beweisen die Treibholzer- 
anhaufungen, welche an den nordéstlichen und nordwestlichen Kiisten 
vom Grants Land, resp. von Grénland, angetroffen worden sind, . 
teils in der Verbindungslinie selbst zwischem dem Polarmeere und dem 
Robesons Kanal, teils an den Kiistenstrecken langs dem oben- 
erwihnten Kanal. 

So hat die Expedition Greety’s! in verschiedenen Buchten auf 
Grants Land, an der Kistenstrecke langs dem Robesons Kanal, 
nimlich im St. Patrick’s Bay, im Discovery Harbour, im 


1 GneeELy, A, W. Report on the Proceedings of the United States Expedition to 
Lady Franklin Bay, Grinnel Land. (lnternational Polarexpedition 1888, Vol. I, 
p. 318). 

4 


50) FREDRIK INGVARSON, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Archer Fjord, im Ella Bay und an anderen Orten Treibhélzeran- 
haufungen angetroffen. Auch an der grénlandischen Seite, némlich in 
der Nahe vom Repulse Harbour, wurden Treibhélzer gefunden. 
Diese Treibhélzer sind nicht mikroskopisch untersucht worden. Nach 
einem botanischen Appendix ', welcher dem wissenschaftlichen Bericht 
tiber die Arbeiten der Expedition beigefiigt ist, sind allerdings diese 
drei Gattungen: ,Cedar“, ,Poplar*, ,Pine“ identificiert worden, aber 
die Angaben dariiber schwanken, indem ein ? hinter den betreffenden 
Gattungsnamen oft genug angebracht worden ist. Dies wire wohl aber 
kaum geschehen, wenn die Gattungsdiagnose auf eine mikroskopische 
Untersuchung gegriindet worden wire, weil arktisches Holz in der Regel 
sehr gut erhalten ist und diese drei Baumarten auf mikroskopischem 
Wege leicht identificiert werden kénnen. Ein anderer Grund, welcher 
gegen die Zuverlissigkeit dieser Gattungsbestimmung spricht, ist dieser, 
dass Pinus nach obenerwaihntem botanischen Appendix und der Treib- 
hélzertabelle p. 313 im oben citierten Werk die im Treibhélzermaterial 
am haufigsten vorkommende Gattung ware. Aber in keiner auf mikro- 
skopischem Wege untersuchten Treibhélzersammlung sind Holzproben 
dieser Gattung in grésserer Menge identificiert worden, und zwar in voll- 
stindiger Ubereinstimmung mit der Artzusammensetzung, welche in der 
Vegetation auf den Ufern der treibhélzerfihrenden Fliisse in Sibirien 
sowohl als in Nordamerika vorhanden ist. Im Verhaltnis zu der 
Larche und der Fichte ist namlich die Kiefer nur ein kleiner Teil von 
der Vegetation der Nadelhélzer. 

Auch an der grénlandischen Kiistenseite sind Treibhélzer angetroffen 
worden. In den Buchten Polaris Bay und Newman Bay hat die 
Hati'sche Polarexpedition grosse Mengen von Treibhdlzern gefunden. 
Man glaubte unter diesen den Walnussbaum, die Esche und die Rot- 
tanne zu erkennen. Auf diese vermeintliche Entdeckung von Walnuss- 
baumen unter den Treibhélzern in diesen Gegenden wurde die Hypo- 
these von einem offenen Polarmeere zwischen dem Stillen Oceane und 
dem Atlantischen Oceane basiert. Nach der geographischen Verbreitung 
der Walnussbiume zu urteilen, kénnen nimlich die Hauu’schen Exemplare 
entweder von den Kiisten des Atlantischen Oceanes oder auch von denen 
des Stillen Oceanes, nicht aber von den Ufern der Nordsibirischen Fliisse 
stammen. Von den beiden Alternativen, unter welchen man hier zu wihlen 
hat, ist nach Grisepacn® die erste ausgeschlossen, weil Treibprodukte 


1 Greezy, 1. c. 534 (Appendix No. 126). 
2 Perermann, A., Geograph. Mittheil., 1874, p. 162. 


1898— 1902, No. 2%.) DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 51 


dieser Art in den treibhélzerfihrenden Gebieten im Smith’s Sund und 
im Baffins Bay  siidlich von obenerwihnten Buchten fehlen sollten. 
Die Befindlichkeit des Walnussbaumes unter den Treibhélzern im New- 
man Bay und Polaris Bay erklart er (Grisepacu) daher durch die 
Annahme, dass eine Polarverzweigung des japanischen Meeresstromes 
exishert, welche wenigstens periodenweise Treibhélzer durch den Beh- 
rings Sund ins Eismeer transportiert. Auf diese Weise sucht er die 
Theorie von einer offenen Eismeeresverbindung zwischen den beiden 
anderen grossen Weltmeeren zu stiitzen. 

So lange keine mikroskopische Untersuchung der betreffenden Treib- 
hélzerproben gemacht worden ist, muss man doch die Angabe eines 
,Japanischen“ Treibmaterials auf diesen Kiisten mit grosser Vorsicht 
aufnehmen. 

Wie schon oben erwahnt, hat man Treibhélzerprodukte in der Ein- 
fahrt selbst in den Robesons Kanal, also an der nordéstlichen Eis- 
meereskiiste des Grants Lands angetroffen. An der Kiislenstrecke 
zwischen dem Cape Sheridan und dem Cape Joseph Henry war 
es also, dass die Expedition Nare’s ihre Treibhélzerfunde machte. Unter 
den Buchten, in welchen Treibhélzer angetroffen wurden, muss besonders 
Hilgard Bay genannt werden. Uber die Treibhélzer dort schreibt man 
folgendes: ,On the eastern shore of the inner part of this bay there 
were great quantities of drift-wood, pieces of all sizes, varying from 
fifteen feet in length to a foot, but apparently all of the same description. 
Most of the pieces were lying on the surface, but some were slightly 
covered with soil. I found pieces forty feet above the level of the 
water. One tree, lying close above the water’s edge, was about fifteen 
feet long and twelve inches in diameter at its thickest part —“ 1. 

So viel der Verf. weiss, sind die Treibhdlzerfunde dieser Expedition 
auch nicht mikroskopisch untersucht worden. Da die Artzusammen- 
setzung der Treibhélzer unbekannt ist, kann man folglich nicht mit 
Sicherheit auf den Mutterort derselben schliessen. Auf eins kénnen wir 
doch durch obenerwahnte Funde schliessen, darauf namlich, dass es 
im Eismeere nordlich von Grénland und vom Grants Land eine 
Treibhélzerstromung geben muss. Méglicherweise kiénnen wir auch 
betreffend die Hauptrichtung dieser Strémung einen Schluss ziehen. 
Der Verf. méchte sie als nord-stidlich, dagegen weder als ost- 
westlich noch als west-dstlich ansehen. Als Grund dieser Annahme 
dirfte hervorgehoben werden, dass keine Treibhélzer an der eigentlichen 


1 Nanes, G.S. Narrative of a voyage to the Polar Sea 1875—1876 in H. M. Ships 
wAlert* and ,Discovery“. London 1878. Vol. H, p. 70, 74. 


52 FREDRIK INGVARSON,. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Nordseite vom Grants Land, also an der Strecke zwischen dem 
Cape Joseph Henry und Point Alert (= Fartherst of Lieut. 
Avpricn’s sledge party 18th May 1876), und auch nicht an der eigentlichen 
Nordkiiste von Grinland, d. h. an der Strecke zwischen dem Repulse 
Harbour und dem Cape Washington, angetroffen worden sind. — 
Wenigstens sind keine Treibhélzerfunde aus diesen Kiustenstrecken er- 
wahnt worden weder in der frither citierlen Arbeit Nare’s: ,,Voyage to 
the Polar Sea“, noch in Greety’s ,,Report ete. to Lady Franklin Bay‘, 
eben Arbeiten, welche tiber die Expeditionen in diesen Gegenden ge- 
schrieben sind. — Nur an den Strecken vom Grants Land und Gron- 
land, welche am Robesons Kanal grenzen, giebt es Treibhélzer. 
Wenn wir nun annehmen wollten, dass die genannten Treibhélzer von 
einer starken, ost- oder westwarts gehenden Strémung abgelagert worden 
waren, so hiitten sich wohl auch Treibhélzer im ersteren Falle an der 
Nordseite vom Grants Land, im letzteren Falle an der Nordkiste von 
Grénland ablagern miissen, vorausgesetzt namlich, dass die Terrain- 
verhiltnisse dieser Kiisten die Verankerung der Treibhélzer nicht voll- 
stindig verhindern, eine Annahme. welche wohl doch kaum_ wahr- 
scheinlich ware. Wenn es sich nun wirklich so verhalt, dass Treib- 
hélzer nur an den Kistenstrecken vorgefunden worden sind, welche die 
Einfahrt zum Robesons Kanal hegrenzen, dagegen nicht an Gebieten, 
welche dstlich oder westlich von demselben lings dem Polarmeere 
gelegen sind, so deutet wohl dieses Sachverhaltnis darauf, dass die 
_ Treibhélzerstrémung eine nordsiidliche Hauptrichtung hat. Die Annahme, 
dass die Hauptrichtung der Strémung nord-siidlich ware, enthalt drei 
Alternativen: 1) streng nordsiidlich, 2) nordwestlich—siidéstlich, 3) nord- 
dstlich—stidwestlich. — Einige Angaben in Nare’s Reisebericht betref- 
fend die Lage der Fundorte an der Strecke Cape Sheridan—Cape 
Joseph Henry (an der Nordostkiiste vom Grants Land, an der 
Einfahrt in den Robesons Kanal) fihrt uns zuerst zu der An- 
nahme von der Alternative 2, also Stromrichtung nordwestlich — 
stidéstlich. Nachstehendes Citat mag das eben gesagte beleuchten: 
yA considerable quantity of drift-wood has been met with on the beaches 
of each bay open towards the north-west, as we expected would 
be the case“ *. 


Anderswo (p. 74) hat er diese Ausserung: ,Many pieces of drift- 


' Hier muss man doch beachten, dass die Exkursionen in diesen Gegenden im 
Winter gemacht worden sind, in einer Jahreszeit, die woll ftir Treibhélzer- 
funde kaum geeignet ist. 


* Nanes, Voyage to the Polur Sea. Vol. II, p,70; vom Verf. gesperrt. 


1898-1902. No.24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND, 53 


wood have been met with, particularly in the bays open towards 
the north-west*. 

Endlich wird (p. 74) erwihnt, dass Massen von Treibhélzern im 
Hilgard Bay, ,open to the north-west, gefunden worden. 

Aus allen diesen iibereinstimmenden Angaben kénnen wir verstehen, 
dass Treibhilzer nur in den gegen Nordwesten offenen Buchten ge- 
funden worden sind. Daraus folgt selbstverstandlich, dass die Treibhiélzer 
an diesen Orten mit einer von Nordwesten gekommenen Strémung 
abgelagert sein miissen. Ob nun diese von Nordwesten kommende Treib- 
hélzerstr6mung ihre Entstehung in einem der treibhélzerftihrenden Fliisse 
Sibiriens gehabt oder ihren Ursprung von dem grossen Treibhdlzer- 
bassin des Mackenzie-Flusses leitet, davon wissen wir selbstverstiind- 
lich nichts bestimmtes, so lange die Artzusammensetzung des Materials 
uns unbekannt ist. Der Verf. méchte doch hier unten einige Thatsachen 
hervorheben, welche uns miglicherweise eine Andeutung auf die Tretb- 
hélzerquelle geben kénnten. 

Nach dem was frither in dieser Abhandlung betont worden ist, 
scheint es, als ob die Treibhélzerstrémung des Mackenzie-Flusses 
gleich im Anfange ihrer Bahn eine stark déstliche Ablenkung erhielte, 
und dass die Fortsetzung derselben lings der Eismeereskiiste N ord- 
amerikas und den in unmittelbarer Nahe davon nérdlich legenden 
Inseln und Inselgruppen zu finden wire. Wir erinnern uns ja der zahl- 
reichen Treibhélzeranhiufungen, welche langs diesen Kiisten gefunden 
worden sind und welche nach einstimmigen Angaben Derivate von den 
Treibhélzervorraten des Mackenzie-Flusses waren. Infolgedessen ist 
anderswo in dieser Arbeit die Auffassung dargelegt worden, dass die 
Treibhélzerstromung des Mackenzie-Flusses mit den Kiisten des 
Ellesmere-Landes oder mit naheliegenden Gebieten mie in Kontakt 
kommen kénnte. 

Gegen diese Ansicht kénnte man allerdings die Einwendung machen, 
dass die Treibhélzerstrémung des Mackenzie-Flusses nicht  not- 
wendigerweise einheitlich sein muss, sondern dass sie sich gleich 
im Anfange ihrer Bahn in zwei Verzweigungen teilt, von welchen die 
eine den eben geschilderlen Verlauf, die andere eine nordéstliche Rich- 
tung nehmen wiirde. Vorausgesetzt, dass es eine nordéstliche Verzwei- 
gung von dieser Treibhélzerstromung gabe, kénnten wir uns zwei Alter- 
nativen fir die Strombahn im Eismeere denken: 

1. Grants Land liegt unmittelbar in der Strombahn. 
9. Grants Land liegt ausserhalb der Strombahn oder wenigstens 
nicht unmitlelbar innerhalb derselben. 


o4 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Ein Landkartenstudium zeigt, dass, nach Alternative 1, die nordwest- 
liche und die nérdliche Kiste von Grants Land friiher als dessen 
nordéstliche, an Robesons Kanal grenzende Gebiet mit der Treibhélzer- 
strémung in Berithrung kommen wirde, und dass sich also Treib- 
produkte in erster Hand an diese Kistenstrecken hilten ablagern 
miissen. Aber hier sind, wie frither betont, Treibhélzer nicht ange- 
troffen worden 1. 

Nach Alternative 2 muss man sich die Richtung der Strémung 
bedeutend nérdlicher als nach Alternative 1 denken. Stellen wir uns 
nun vor, dass die Treibprodukte im Robesons Kanal mit dieser gegen 
Nord-nord-osten (von der Miindung des Mackenzie-Flusses gerechnet) 
gehenden Strémung abgelagert worden sind, uns aber gleichzeitig erinnern, 
dass dieselben nur in den Hafen auf dem Grants Land gefunden 
wurden, welche ,open towards northwest“ waren, und dass sie also nur 
mittels einer von Nordwesten kommenden Strémung eingefrachtet werden 
konnten, so folgt wohl daraus, dass diese Treibhélzerstrémung des 
Mackenzie-Flusses nérdlich vom Grants Land eine so machtige 
Biegung stidwarts machen muss, dass die nach Siiden gehende Verzwei- 
gung mit der nordwirts gehenden einen beinahe rechten Winkel: bilden 
wiirde, eine Annahme, die wohl kaum wahrscheinlich ist. 

Schliesslich muss als Beweis ftir die Theorie von der Inaktivitat des 
Mackenzie-Flusses an diesem Treibhélzertransport betont werden, 
dass wenn die Treibhélzerstrémung dieses Flusses wirklich mit dem 
Grants Land in Kontakt kame, so wirde sie wohl auch auf solchen 
Gebieten als die Westkiiste vom Ellesmere-Land oder die westlichen 
Hafen vom Jones Sund Treibhélzer abgelagert haben, was jedoch 
nach dieser Untersuchung nicht der Fall gewesen ist. 

Mit dem oben gesagten hat der Verf. hervorheben wollen, dass die 
von Nordwesten kommende Strémung, welche ihre Treibprodukte auf die 
Kiisten um den Robesons Kana! ablagert, eine Strémung ist, die mit 
dem Mackenzie-Fluss in keiner Kontinuitat steht. — Allerdings liesse 
es sich ja denken, dass die Treibhélzer des Mackenzie-Flusses 
irgendwo im Polarmeere mit dieser Strémung in Kontakt kamen, dass 
ihre Produkte in dieselbe eingezogen und durch dieselbe in den Robe- 
sons Kanal gefihrt wiirden. Dann dirfte man aber eher annehmen, 
dass die obenerwithnte Strémung eigene Produkte ablagert, als dass sie 
dieselben von einer anderen leihen sollte. 


1 Siehe doch p. 52, Anm 1, 


1898-1902. No. 24] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND, — 59 


Wenn nun die Treibhilzer in den Gebieten um den Robesons 
Kanal nicht aus dem Mackenzie-Flusse stammen, ist es wohl 
héchst wahrscheinlich, dass sie sibirischen Ursprungs sind. Densel- 
ben Ursprung hat auch das Sverprur’sche Treibholzer- 
material, nach dem was wir friher zu beweisen versucht 
haben. Man darf wohl auch annehmen, dass die oben- 
erwaihnten Treibhélzeranhaufungen (die Treibhdlzer im Robe- 
sons Kanal und im Jones Sund) durch dieselbe Strémung 
zusammengebracht sind, die in einem von den treib- 
hélzerfihrenden Flissen Sibiriens entstanden ist. Hier 
miissen wir die Aufmerksamkeit auf untenstehende Fliisse lenken. von 
welchen man wegen ihrer Stromstirke und ihrer Grésse annehmen kann, 
dass sie an diesem Treibhélzertransport eine aktive Rolle gespielt haben, 
nimlich der Ob, der Jenissei, die Lena, die Yana, die Indigirka, 
die Columa. Welcher von diesen eben genannten Fliissen die exakte 
Treibhélzerquelle gewesen ist, wagt der Verf. nicht mit Sicherheit zu 
entscheiden; da man aber die im sibirischen Meere herrschenden Stro- 
mungsverhialtnisse ziemlich wohl kennt, kénnen wir ja doch wemgstens 
die wahrscheinliche Treibhélzerquelle angeben. 

Wahrscheinlhich hat das Ob-Jenissei-System das betreffende 
Treibhélzermaterial nicht geliefert. Die Treibhélzerstrémung desselben 
fhesst ja bekanntlich in das Meer zwischen der Ostkiiste Grénlands 
und Spitzbergen aus und kommt wohl daher mit der Nordktisle 
Grénlands oder mit dem nordamerikanischen Archipel nicht in Kontakt. 

A priori ist es wahrscheinlicher, dass der Lena-Fluss die Treib- 
hélzerquelle gewesen ist. Die Artzusammensetzung der Urwaldsvegetation 
an diesem Flusse entspricht naémlich sehr wohl der Artzusammensetzung 
des betreffenden Treibhélzermaterials: dieselben Gattungen, die unter 
den Treibhélzern identificiert worden, sind auch in der Baumvegetation 
des Lena-Flusses vorhanden. Ferner muss man beachten, dass die- 
selben Gattungen, namlich Lariw und Picea, welche den Treibhélzern 
ihren floristischen Charakter geben, auch am Lena-Flusse die typischen 
Baume sind. 

Nach A. K. Casanper! besteht die Baumvegetation aus folgenden 
Gattungen und Arten, die der Verf. im untenstehenden Schema zusam- 
mengestellt hat: 


1 A. K. Casanper: Studien iiber die Vegetation des Urwaldes am Lena-Fluss, 
Helsingfors 1904. (Acta Societatis Scientiarum Fennice. Tom. XXXII. No. 3). 


56 FREDRIK INGVARSON. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Nadelhélzer. | Laubholzer. 
Larix dahurica. | Populus tremula. 
Larix sibirica. Salix caprea. 
Picea obovata. Betula verrucosa. 
Pinus silvestris. Betula odorata. 
Pinus cembra. Alnus incana. 


Sorbus aucuparia. 


Fin anderer Umstand, der dafiir spricht, dass der Lena-Fluss die 
Quelle unserer Treibhélzer sein kénnte, ist dieser, dass die Wasser- 
mengen des Lena- und Yana-Flusses zusammen eine nordwirts 
gehende Flichenstromung bilden, die westlich von den Neusibirischen 
Inseln ins Nord-Polar-Bassin ausfallt. Hier knipft sie sich an eine 
nordwestlich gehende Polarstrémung an, und a priori ist es zu ver- 
muten, dass die Treibhélzer an die Nordkiiste Grénlands und an die 
nordamerikanischen Inselgruppen durch die letztgenannte Strémung trans- 
portiert werden. 

Es scheint doch, als ob eine Treibhélzerstrémung mit dieser Route 
dem Pol nicht so nahe kommen wiirde, oder, mit anderen Worten, dass 
sie eine so starke nérdliche Richtung nicht bekommen kénnte, dass der 
Endpunkt ihrer Bahn die genannten Kistengebiete treffen wirde. FRam’s 
Treiben in Eise wihrend der Polarexpedition Nansen’s | 1893—1896, 
und das Treiben im Eise der zu der 1881 verungliickten Jeanette- 
Expedition gehérenden Gegenstiinde beweisen nimlich eben, dass treibende 
Gegenstiinde an obenerwaihnter Route éstlich von Grénland, also wie 
die Treibhilzer der Ob-Jenissei-Fliisse ins Meer zwischen Gron- 
land und Spitzbergen geftihrt werden mussten. 

Anderseits zeigt die von Nansen abgesteckte Routelinie fiir das 
Treiben im Eise der zu der Jeanette-Expedition gehérenden Gegen- 
stiinde, dass je éstlicher — von der sibirischen Seile gerechnet — d. h. 
je naher am Behrings-Sund man sich den Ausgangspunkt des Treibens 
vorstellt, desto naiher am Pol vollzieht sich auch das Treiben. Die 
Jeanette-Expedition verungliickte namlich an einem Ort, der dstlich 
von dem Punkte gelegen ist, wo das Treiben Fram’s anfing. Nansen 
glaubt auch, dass die Treibungsbahn der genannten Gegenstinde n6rd- 
lich von Fram’s Bahn und parallel mit derselben liegen kinnte. 


1 Nansen, F. The Norwegian North Polar Expedition 1898— 1896. Vol. III, p. 301, 


1898—1902. No. 24.] DIE TREIBHOLZER AUF DEM ELLESMERE-LAND. 57 


Aus einem Vergleiche zwischen der respektiven Lage der oben er- 
wihnten Bahnen am Pol und den Ausgangspunkten derselben ergiebt 
es sich, dass je dstlicher eine Treibhélzerstrémung an der sibirischen 
Kistenstrecke entsteht, desto naher am Pol wird die Fortsetzung ihrer 
Bahn verlaufen, und desto grésser wird die Wahrscheinlichkeit dafir, 
dass die Nordkiste Grénlands und der arktische Archipel Nord- 
amerikas die Endverankerungsorte der Treibhélzer werden. 

Ostlich von der Lena liegen die grossen Flisse Yana, Indigirka 
und Columa. Die Aktivitat des Yana-Flusses kénnte im Zusam- 
menhange mit der des Lena-Flusses forteliminiert werden, weil, wie 
es scheint, diese beiden Fliisse ihre Wassermengen zu einem gemein- 
schaftlichen}, in der Oberflache des Wassers gehenden Strom mit 
nordlicher Richtung vereinen. Von weit grésserer Bedeutung in dieser 
Hinsicht dirften dagegen die Flisse Indigirka und Columa sein. 

Kiner von diesen Fliissen hat wahrscheinlich das Material zu den 
Treibhélzern  geliefert, welche auf dem Grants Land (im Robesons 
Kanal) und auf dem Ellesmere-Land (im Jones Sund) angetroffen 
worden sind. Unter den bedeutenderen Fliissen Sibiriens haben namlich 
die eben genannten die éstlichste Lage; ausserdem haben beide michtige 
Wassermengen und fliessen durch eine weite Waldgegend. Eine Treib- 
hélzerstrémung, die in einem von diesen Fliissen entsteht, dirfte auf ihrem 
Wege im Polarmeere gerade uber dem Pol oder méglicherweise éstlich 
von demselben passieren. Nach der amerikanischen Seite zu teilt sie 
sich wahrscheinlich in zwei Verzweigungen, von welchen die eine Treib- 
hélzer in den Robesons Kanal hineinpresst, wahrend die andere Treib- 
hélzer in die Buchten und Sunde westlich vom Ellesmere-Land fihrt. 
Es muss die letztgenannte Verzweigung sein, die in vorgeschicht- 
licher Zeit alle die zahlreichen Treibhélzer abgesetzt, welche, wie oben 
erwahnt, die siidlich vom Bays Fjord, an einer Hohe von mehreren 
hundert Fuss tber dem Meere gelegenen Kiesterrassen bekleiden. In 
neuerer Zeit muss diese Verzweigung auch das Treibhélzermaterial zusam- 
mengebracht haben, welches von der Sverprup’schen Expedition in den 
westlichen Hafen vom Jones Sund angetroffen worden ist. 


1 Nansen, I. c. p. 301. 


Gedruckt am 8. Juni 1910. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 25. 


AD. S. JENSEN: 


FISHES 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


AI 


eS 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1910 


ig collection of fishes is very poor, containing only 11 species, 
allmost all of which are among the most ordinary of the arctic species. 
They were taken in shallow water, most of them in the neighbourhood 
of Jones Sound, a few in Smith Sound. With regard to the special po- 
sition of the localities, the reader is referred to the maps in Gunnar 
Isacusen’s “Astronomical and Geodetic Observations” (Rep. of the Sec. 
Norw. Arct. Exped. in the “Fram”, 1898—1902, No. 5, 1907). 

The species are as follows: 


Gymnacanthus tricuspis Renu. 
Cotius scorpius L. 

Icelus bicornis Reinu. 
Triglops pingelit Reinu. 
Cyclopterus spinosus Mit. 
Liparis liparis L. 

Liparis fabricii Kr. 
Lycodes mucosus Rica. 
Gymnelis viridis Far. 
Gadus saida Lep. 

Salmo sp. 


Besides, in an appendix is given a list of a few and common fishes 
brought home by the Expedition from Danish West Greenland. 


4 AD. S. JENSEN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Gymnacanthus tricuspis Reinwarvt. 
August 1, 1900. Off the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 10 fathoms. 
1 specimen, o. 


Regarding this specimen the following particulars may be noted: 


Total length 98 mm. 
Length of head 27 mm., or 27.6 per cent of total length 
* - pectoral fin 27.5mm., - 281 - , - y 


5 - ventral fin 21 mm. - 214 - , - , ‘ 
Pores in lateral line 48 
Number of rays in D1. 11 


” 0, as D®, 15 
‘ es ee SF 
- P. 19 


” a 

The specimen has no scabrous bony protuberances on the head; 

on the part of the body covered by the pectoral fins there are a few 
spiny scales. 


Cottus scorpius L. 


August 16, 1898. Reindeer Point, Foulke Fjord. 10 fathoms. 1 spe- 
cimen, young (total length 33.5 mm.). 
July 27, 1900. The winter harbour, Fosheim. 6 specimens. 


Total length Dt D% A. P 


a Q. 971mm. 11 16 12 18 
bi Ors, 235, 10 16 13 18 
(Cre (ane 999 , 10 16 13 17 
dO et ee ee BDAD 4% 10 16 12 18 
Cy Olog 2S Bie Boy 11 16 13 17 
fe) Oe, 205, 10 17 13 18 


August 38, 1900. Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of 
Havneljord. 2—20 fathoms. Small stones. 1 spe- 
cimen. 


Total length 105 mm. Dt. 9, D®?. 15, A. 12, P. 17. 


1898—1902. No. 25.] FISHES. 5 


By the large number of rays in the fins, these specimens show 
that they belong to the arctic form, var. grenlandica LirKen, as 
might be expected. 

With regard to the Greenland sea-scorpion (“Cottus groenlandicus 
C. V.”, or “C. porosus C. V.”) C. F. Lirxen, in his little treatise on 
northern sea-scorpions+, has declared himself of the same opinion as 
Matmcren* when he says that it cannot be kept specifically distinct 
from C. scorpius, but that on the other hand there are certain features 
which characterise the Greenland sea-scorpion, and justify its being set 
up as peculiar variety, var. greenlandica, although this must not lead 
to the belief that the variety differs from the typical C. scorpius in 
clearly defined or constant characteristics. In another place in the same 
treatise (p. 374), however, Liitken makes a remark which indicates that 
the term var. greenlandica ought rather to be expanded to include all 
the high arctic sea-scorpions; for he says: “C. scorpius (s. lat.) must 
be regarded in its features as a high northern animal form, which attains 
its greatest size and most characteristic development on the high northern 
and American shores; on the shores of temperate Europe it is a dwarf 
form in comparison, and has undergone some reduction in the average 
number of rays and vertebre”. To show the correctness of this view — 
which indeed Matmcren has already to some extent maintained — I 
will here give, in a tabular form, the result of some countings, by 
Maumeren, Lirken and the present author: 


| Dt | D2. A. P. | Vertebree 
East Greenland | (9) 10 | 16—17 13-14 (16) 17—18 | 37-38 
West Greenland |(9) 10 (41)) ({4—15) 16-17 | (11-12) 183-14] (15-16) 17] (86) 88—39 
(18—19) (15) (18 — 19) 
Spitzbergen. . . |9—10 (11), 15-17 (11) 12-14 16-17 


Faroe Isles. . | 9-10 | 1415 | 11-19 | 16 (17) 32-33 


It will thus be seen that the number of rays averages a little 
greater in the arctic (Greenland and Spitzbergen) sea-scorpion than in 
that of the temperate (Faroe Islands); but the difference is more distinct 
with regard to the number of vertebre. 


1 Cur. Lirxen: Korte Bidrag til nordisk Ichthyographi. I. Vidensk. Meddel. Na- 
turhist. Foren. Kjobenhavn, 1876, p. 370. 

2 A. J. Matmeren: Om Spetsbergens Fiskfauna. Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. Forhandl., 
1864, No. 10, p. 495. 


6 . AD. S. JENSEN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Subsequently Dresex returned to this matter’. After having exa- 
mined five sea-scorpions from Godhavn in Greenland, and compared 
them with Cottus scorpius, he finds that the “subspecies” grcenlan- 
dicus differs from the former, besides in its superior size, in the greater 
interobital width, and in the greater height of the spine-rayed dorsal fin. 
We will now look more closely at these statements. 

According to Dresel, the interorbital width in the subspecies groen- 
landicus, is contained 1, 14/5, or 11/. times in the longitudinal diameter 
of the eye, whereas the width in Cottus scorpius seldom exceeds °/s of 
the longitudinal diameter of the eye. I have investigated this circumstance 
and found the following proportions: 


Cottus scorpius from Greenland. 


Proportion of interorbital 


Total Jength Sex width to longitudinal 
diameter of the eye 

956 mm. o 1:1 

2 , Q 1:4 

40 , 9 4:5 

232, 3 3:4 

230, 9 ea 

15 , J 1-1 

193, Q 3:4 

180 - ist 4:5 


Cottus scorpius from Europe. 


Proportion of interorbital 


Total length Loeality Sex width to longitudinal 
diameter of the eye 

930 mm. The Sound Q 4: 5 

930, Upper Baltic 9 5: 6 

996, Faroe Isles Q | 

213 —C«,, The Sound fos 72412 

212 ~~, North Sea Q 9:10 

190, Upper Baltic of 3: 4 

155, Faroe Isles of 2: 38 

155, North Sea of 9: 3 


It will thus be seen that on an average the Greenland sea-scor- 
pion has a comparatively little greater width of cranium between the eyes 


1H. G. Dreset: Notes on some Greenland Fishes. Proceed. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
Vol. 7, 1884, p. 250. 


1898 —1902. No. 25.] FISHES. 7 


than the European sea-scorpion, this width in the former being fre- 
quently equal to length of the eye, or at any rate’ not less than 3/, of 
it, whereas the width in the latter is always — that is to say, in the 
specimens examined — less than the length of the eye, at the most - 
%/io of it, and may be as little as 7/12, or not much more than_ half. 
There is not, however, any distinct boundary that separates the two 
forms. 

In speaking of the dorsal fin, Dresel says that in C. grenlandicus 
the spine-rayed dorsal fin was comparatively higher, the longest ray 
being +/, or /, of the total length (measured to the base of the caudal 
fin), while in C. scorpius it is no more than 1/; or %, of the same 
length. An error must have found its way in here; for if we look at 
Dresel’s measurements of the Greenland specimens, we find that the 
longest “dorsal spine” goes respectively 6, 8, 61/2, 7, and 5/, times into 
the total length (to the base of the caudal fin). In order to judge of 
this myself, I have measured the same specimens as before, and will 
here give the result. The “total length” is to the base of the caudal fin. 


C. scorpius, from Greenland. 
Total length Sex The longest ray The longest ray 
in D! in D2 
is contained in the | is contained in the 
“total length” “total length” 
256 mm. fot 5.6 4.9 
952 Q 6.6 5.7 
240 ie) 7.6 5.8 
932, oe 5.7 Bl 
230 4 Q 7.2 5.7 
15 Oo 5 5.8 
193, 2 6.8 5.8 
180, on 6.1 5A 
C. scorpius, from Europe. Locality: 

230 mm Q 6.5 6.1 The Sound 
930, Q 7 6.4 Upper Baltic 
296 4 Q 7 5.8 Faroe Isles 
213 e 13 6.1 The Sound 
2 , Q 72 52 North Sea 
190, of 6.2 5.1 Upper Baltic 
155, fot 7 6.4 Faroe Isles 
155, ou 6.3 5.6 North Sea 


8 AD. S. JENSEN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Thus we see that in the Greenland form, the longest ray in the first 
dorsal fin goes from’ 5 to 7.6 times into the total length (to the base of 
the caudal fin), and in the European form from 6.2 to 7.3 times; conse- 
quently no variety, and still less a species, can be based upon this pro- 
portion. Nor does the height of the second dorsal fin constitute a 
character for separation, although it seems on an average to be a little 
lower in the European than in the Greenland form, the longest ray in 
the second dorsal fin in the latter being of a length that is contained 
from 4.9 to 5.8 times in the total length (to the base of the caudal fin), 
while in the European form it is from 5.1 to 6.4 times. 

Taking everything into consideration, I think the idea of separating 
the arctic sea-scorpion from that of the temperate regions as a definite 
subspecies, must be abandoned. 


Icelus bicornis Retnuarvt. 


Syn. Icelus hamatus Kroyer. 


July 22, 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord, about 20 fathoms. 
1 specimen, 07, 61.5 mm. 
» 26, 1900. West side of the entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord, 
about 10 fath. 1 specimen, o%, 77 mm. 
Fin rays: D1. 9, D?. 20, A. 16, P. 18. 
» 931, 1900. Round Vestre Sund, Havnetjord, 10—30 fath. 1 speci- 
men, co, 64 mm. 
Fin rays: D1. 9, D2. 20, A. 16, P. 18. 
Aug. 3, 1900. Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of 
Havnefjord, from 2 to 20 fath. Small stones. 1 speci- 
men, 0, 58 mm. 
Sept. 19, 1900. Off Forvisningsdalen, Gaasefjord, 2—20 fath. Clay with 
small stones. 2 specimens: 
a. 9 91 mm. D!. 9, D®. 21, A. 16, P. 18, 
a wee ES a5 igs Me a SBRy 4 IG) 2 Te: 
» 20, 1900. The interior of Gaasefjord, 3—20 fath. 2 specimens: 
a. Y 83 mm. D1. 9, D2. 21, A. 14, P. 18, 
bg a? 4 
July 12, 1901. Bay at Landsend. 1 specimen, 44 mm. 
Aug. 16, 1901. The head of the Gaasefjord. About 7 fath. 3 specimens: 
a. 75.5 mm. D1.9, D?. 19, A. 16, P. 18. 
aes a 
c0' 48.5 , 


1898— 1902. No. 25.] FISHES. 9 


Aug. 30, 1901. The head of the Gaasefjord. 8 metres, small stones and 
clay with brown algae. 1 specimen, o’, 62 mm. 

Aug. 4, 1902. Gaasefjord, north of the peninsula, 10—15 fath. 1 spe- 
cimen, 29 mm. 


Thus the collection contains 14 specimens in all, the largest male 
among them being 77mm., while the largest female as usual measures rather 
more, namely 91 mm. In 6 of them, the number of fin-rays was D1. 9, 
D2. (19) 20—21, A. (14) 16, P. 18. 

The development and distribution of the dermal plates is, as usual, 
subject to great variation. The bony shields of the lateral line, for in- 
stance, generally extend almost to the base of the caudal fin, but some- 
times only to the end of the second dorsal fin or even less. The parie- 
tal protuberance always has a more or Jess distinct ledge in front. 

In a male, 61.5 mm. in length, the genital papilla is of the fol- 
lowing particulars: the base is 5 mm. long, clavate, expanding distally, 
directed a little obliquely backwards; its point is 4.5 mm. long, awl- 
shaped, and forming an angle with the base, so that its direction is 
backwards, almost parallel with the belly. 


Triglops pingelit Reiwuarpr. 


July 30, 1900. The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 1 specimen, 81mm. 
This specimen has the following number of rays: 
_D. 87 (D110, D?. 27), A. 26, P. 20. 
In specimens from West Greenland, the following number of rays 
occur in the unpaired fins: 
D. 34—36 (D1. 11418, D®. 23 —25), A.23—25. 
In specimens from East Greenland the numbers are as follows: 
D.34—37 (D1. 11—12, D®. 2326), A. 23—27. 
In two specimens from Iceland, I have found the following numbers: 
D. 31 (D1. 10, D?. 21), A. 21; 
and in three specimens from the Faroe Islands: 
D. 31—32 (D1. 10—11, D?.21), A. 20—21. 
In a fourth specimen from the Faroe Islands there were even only 
27 rays in the dorsal fins, D1.11 and D*. 16. 
Thus the number of rays in the unpaired fins becomes smaller in 
southern regions}. 


1 Triglops murrayi, described by Ginrner (Proce. Roy. Soc. Edinb. XV, 1888, 
p. 209) from the north-west of Scotland, of which the small number of rays (19) - 
in the second dorsal fin was said to be characteristic, is therefore scarcely more 
than a southern form of T. pingelii. 


10 AD. S. JENSEN, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Cyclopterus spinosus 0. F. Mixer. 


Sept. 20, 1900. The interior of the Gaasefjord. 3—20 fath. 1 specimen. 
Although this specimen is not very small (total length 38 mm.), the 
bony protuberances are very poorly developed; the head and tail are 
altogether without them, and there are only about 8 to be seen on each 
side of the body. 
July 8, 1901. Renbugten. 1 young specimen, 25 mm. 
Many spines have already appeared on the head, body and tail, 
the larger among them being already much branched. 


July 19, 1902. North Devon. 3—7 fath. 1 young specimen, 24.5 mm. , 
Although almost as long as the preceding specimen, it has compara- 


tively few and less developed spines. 


Liparis liparis Linne. 


Aug. 16, 1898. Reindeer Point, Foulke Fjord. 10 fath. 1 specimen. 

May 25, 1899. Rice Strait. 1 specimen. 

Sept.4-7, 1899. Bay in 2nd fjord. 3 specimens. 

July 25, 1900. The winter harbour, Havnefjord. 10 fath. 2 specimens. 

July 380, 1900. The entrance to Stordalen, Havnefjord. 1 specimen. 

July 31, 1900. Round Vestre Sund, Havnefjord. 10—30 fath. 1 spe- 
cimen. 

Aug. 3, 1900. Fosheims Peak and the valley on the west side of Havne- 
fjord. 2—20 fath. Small stones. 4 specimens. 

June 28, 1901. The entrance to Hvalrosfjord. 1 specimen. 

June 29, 1901. Off the camping-ground, Jammerbugten. 1 specimen. 

July 9, 1901. Renbugten. 2 specimens. 

July 11, 1901. Bay at Landsend. About 25 m. 2 specimens. 

July 11, 1901. Landsend. 2 specimens. 

Aug. 30, 1901. Gaasefjord, 8 m. Clay and small stones with brown 
algae. 1 specimen. 

July 11, 1902. St. Helena. 4 specimens. 

July 15, 1902. Off Havhestefjeld, North Devon. 1 specimen. 

July 17, 1902. North Devon. 2 specimens. 

July 17, 1902. East of the great glacier, North Devon. About 3 fath. 
1 specimen. 

July 19, 1902. North Devon. 1 specimen. 

July 19, 1902. North Devon. 3—7 fath. 1 specimen. 


1898 — 1902. No. 25.] FISHES. 11 


There are altogether 32 specimens, and thus this species is by far 
the most abundantly represented in the collection, presumably because 
this fish attaches itself firmly by suction to objects on the bottom, and 
comes up with them in the dredge. 

The following are the dimensions of seven selected specimens, and 
the number of rays: 


The 
. Rice | Bay in |Fosheims| Stor- : St. He- 
Danny Strait |Qnd ae Peak dalen Ker Landeend lena 
mm. mm. mm. | mm. mm. | mm. mm. 
Total length...... 175 139 128 128 128 101 95 
Length of head ....) 47 36 33 31.5 32 m4 23 
Height of body above 
middle of suctorial 
CISC: ak eosiyayiaceois 35.5 30 28 26 26 20 18 
Length of eye..... 6.25 5 4.5 4 4.5 3 3 
Length of longest rays : 
in pectoral fin. ...} 35 26 25 27 4 18 19 
Rays in dorsal fin ..| 39 43 41 43 40 AL 39 
Rays in anal fin ...| 38 34 34 35 35 34 33 
Rays in caudal fin. .| 11 13 114 13 13 13 13 


The above measurements, expressed as percentages of the total 
length, are as follows: the length of the head from 93.8 to 26.9 per 
cent, the height of the body above the middle of the suctorial disc 
from 19 to 21.9 per cent, the length of the eye from 3 to 3.6 per cent, 
and the length of the longest rays in the pectoral fin from 17.8 to 2c. 
per cent. 

These figures exceed to no inconsiderable extent the limits that I 
have given on a previous occasion for L. liparis', but are within the 
values that have since been found by N. Kyipowirscu’. 

The number of rays in the dorsal fin (39—43), in the anal fin (83 -—- 
35), and in the caudal fin (11—13), keep within the limits of the numbers 
found for L. liparis. 


1 Ap. S. Jensen: The Fishes of East Greenland, p. 254. Medd. om Gronland, vol. 


XXIX, 1904. ; 
2 N. Kniwowrrsca: Zur Ichthyologie des Eismeeres, p. 44. Mémoires de |’ Acadé- 
mie Imp. des Sciences St. Pétersbourg, Sér. VIIL, Cl. Phys.-Math., vol. XVII, 


No. 5, 1907. 


12 AD. S. JENSEN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP, FRAM 


Liparis fabricit Kroyer. 


Aug. 4, 1902. North of the peninsula, Gaasefjord. 10—15 fath. 1 spe- | 


cimen. 


This specimen is of the following proportions, given in percentages 
of the total length (111 mm.): the length of the head 25.2 per cent, 
the height of the body above the middle of the suctorial dise 26.1 per 
cent, the length of the eye 5 per cent., and the length of the longest 
rays in the pectoral fin 18.9 per cent. The dorsal fin contains 48 rays, 
the anal fin 40, and the caudal fin 11. 

To this species I moreover refer a few small specimens, although 
in much doubt, on account of their bad state of preservation: 


Aug. 30, 1901. Gaasefjord, 8m. Clay and small stones with brown 
algae. 2 specimens. 
Aug. 38—4, 1902. Gaasefjord. 1 specimen. 


Regarding the relation between Liparis liparis and L. fabricit, see, 
in addition to the previously mentioned works of Knipowitsch and myself, 
R. Cottett’s treatise on the fishes collected during the cruises of the 
“Michael Sars” in the North Atlantic! ( 


Lycodes mucosus Ricwarpson. 


July 7, 1899. Cape Rutherford. 


Of this specimen there is only the head and the right pectoral 
fin; but I nevertheless considered that it could be referred to the above 
species. 

I has been quite a large specimen, probably about 300 mm. total 
length, as the length of the head is 73 mm., reckoned from the point 
of the snout to the end of the opercular flap. The greatest breadth of 
the head, across the cheeks, is 46 mm., the length of the snout 24 mm., 
the length of the eye (iris and pupilla) 8.5 mm. and its height 5.5 mm., 
the smallest breadth of the frontal bone between the eyes 5 mm. 

The teeth are as described by Ricuarpson, there being yet only a 
single row of teeth in front in the upper jaw. 

The length of the pectoral fin is 34 mm., and the number of its 
rays 18. 


1 R. Cotterr: Report on Norwegian Fishery & Marine Investigations. Vol. I, 
1905, No. 8, pp. 94—96. 


1898—1902. No. 25.] FISHES. 18 


vo 


The under side of the head and the lips are a yellowish white. 
Above, on the gill-cover, there is a light patch, and a narrow, light 
band runs right across the occiput, edged on both sides with a dark 
stripe. The lower margin of the pectoral fin is hight, and there are 
some light patches on the same fin. 

The species was first described by Sir Joun Ricarpson, from 
two specimens taken on the Belcher Expedition in Northumberland 
Sound'. Another specimen was subsequently taken by the Howgate 


Polar Expedition in 1877—78 in Cumberland Sound, and described by 
TarLeton H. Bean. 


Gymnelis viridis Fasricws. 


July 12, 1901. Bay at Landsend. 1 specimen, 142 mm. 
Aug. 30, 1901. Gaasefjord, 8 m. Clay and small stones with bown algae. 
1 specimen, 114 mm. 


The first of these specimens, although faded in colour, still shows 
9 hght transverse bands across the body and tail, and a light patch by 
the opercular flap. The other specimen has no markings, either patches 
or bands. 

The most important measurements in these specimens are as 
follows: 


mm. mm 
Total length. . . 1... 2. eee 142 114 
Length of head. . . . ..... 24 19.5 
Distance between point of snout and 

dorsal fin . . . . ee ee 97 20.5 


Length of snout ee ee 5 
Length of iris . . - 2. 6. ee 4 3.5 


Distance between point of snout and 


anus. ee ee ee ee 52 43.5 
Greatest height of body .... . 13.5 10.5 


Length of pectoral fin . . . . , 11.5 9.5 


1 The Last of the Arctic Voyages. Vol. II. London, 1855. P. 362, Pl. XXVI. 
2 Bull. Unit. States National Museum. No. 15, p. 112. Washington, 1879. 


AD. S. JENSEN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


July 


25, 


1902. 


Gadus saida Lerrcuin. 


. Bay in 2nd fjord. 1 specimen, 224 mm. 


Dit2, De 17, DF. 22, At, 17, A219, P. 18, V..6. 


. The winter harbour, Havnefjord. 1 specimen, 74 mm. 
. The winter harbour, Havnefjord. 1 specimen, 285 mm. 


D112, D218, D?.18, AL 20, A%. 19, P. 21, V.6. 


. The winter harbour, Havnefjord. 1 specimen, 90 mm. 


Salmo sp. 


North Devon. In a brook. 
A young specimen, half dried, about 33 mm. in length. 


1898—1902. No. 25.] FISHES. 15 


Appendix. 


In addition to the already mentioned fishes, the Expedition brought 
back a few species from Danish West Greenland, namely : 


Gymnacanthus tricuspis Rewu. 
July 29, 1898. Egedesminde. 1 specimen. 


This specimen, which is 84mm. in length, has the following num- 


ber of rays: D'.9, D®. 16, A. 16, P. 18. 


Cottus scorpius L. 


Aug. 4—5, 1898. Upernivik. 4—13 fath. 4 specimens. 
The size of these specimens is 48—105 mm. The largest has the 
following number of rays: D1. 10, D®?. 16, A. 13, P. 17. 


Gasterosteus aculeatus L. 


July 30, 1898. Godhavn. 1 specimen. 

This specimen, which is 74 mm. in length, belongs to the very 
mailed form in which the scale-plates extend without interruption from 
the head to the base of the caudal fin (G. loricatus REINHARDT = 
G. trachurus Cuv.). 


Cyclopterus spinosus Mit. 


Aug. 4—5, 1898. Upernivik. 4—13 fath. 5 specimens. 
These are young ones, 12—15 mm. in length. By the aid of a 
magnifying-glass, incipient spines may be seen. 


Sticheus punctatus Fasricivs. 


Aug. 4, 1898. Upernivik. 13 fath. 1 specimen. 
D.50, A. 37, P.16, V.4. 57—64 pores in the lateral line. 


Mallotus villosus Miu 
July 30, 1898. Godhavn. 1 specimen, co. 


"Printed 6. December 1910. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 26. 


A. APPELLOF: 


PYCNOGONIDEN 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


QOO ————- 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1910 


Das Material von Pycnogoniden der zweiten »Fram-Expedition | 
enthalt nur folgende drei Formen, von denen fast siimmtliche Exemplare 
an der Siidkiiste von Kénig Oscars Land eingesammelt sind. 


Nymphon grossipes Far. 

Renbugten (°/; 1901), Sundet (°/2 1901), Rice strait, ,der Zeltplatz“ 
297, 1901. 

{ch bin mit Mertnerr, Moésius und anderen einverstanden, wenn sie 
N. miatum og grossipes zu einer Art vereinigen. Ebenso stelle ich mit 
Mésius WN. glaciale Liu. hieher.. Denn wenn auch diese Form in ihrer 
vollig ausgepragten Gestalt einen charakteristischen Habitus autfweist, 
so ist sie doch, was ich nach einem reichlichen Materiale aus dem Nord- 
meere konstatieren kann und wie auch Mésrus gefunden hat, durch 
deutliche Ubergangsformen mit grossipes-miaxtum verbunden. 

Mésius zieht in den Variationskreis der genannten drei Formen 
auch NV. gracile (Leacu) hinein. Mit diesem Namen sind indessen nach 
Norman wenigstens drei verschiedene Arten belegt, namlich N. rubrum 
Hopee, N. brevirostre Hopce und die wirkliche NW. gracile (Lracw), (mit 
welcher JV. gallicum Hoek synomyn ist). N. brevirostre Hones ist die- 
selbe Art, welche Sars als WV. gracile (Leacu) bezeichnet und die an der 
Siid- und Westkiiste Norwegens ziemlich haufig in der Littoralregion 
zwischen Hydroiden etc. vorkommt. Wenigstens soweit es diese an der 
_ norwegischen Kiste vorkommende ,gracile“ betrifft, die aber jetzt brevi- 
rostre heissen muss, sprechen mehrere Umstande gegen die Annahme, 
dass sie mit grossipes etc. zusammengeschlagen wird. Erstens die ganz 
anderen Gréssenverhiltnisse zwischen dem letzten und nichstletzten 
(zweiten und ersten) Tarsalglied. N. brevirostre ist die einzige Nymphon- 
Art, welche ein so kurzes, erstes Tarsalglied besitzt, das zweiten ist 
iibrigens mehr gekriimmt als bei den ibrigen Nymphoniden. Dies hangt 
wiederum mit der Lebensweise der Art zusammen, indem diese die 
einzige Nymphon-Art ist, die in dem dichten Gewirr von Hydroiden ete., 
welche die Laminarien-Stiele bedecken, herumklettert. Der Bau der 


4 A. APPELLOF. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. FRAM 


Tarsalglieder macht sie gerade fiir das Umgreifen der Hydroidenzweige 
sehr geeignet und einen aholichen, aber noch mehr ausgeprigten Bau 
finden wir auch in den Tarsalgliedern der Phoxichilus, Phoxichilidium 
u. a., die auch eine ahnliche Lebensweise —oft mit WV. brevirostre zusammen 
— fithren.— Bei einem Individuum von brevirostre habe ich eine an dem 
einen Eitriger befestigte Masse gefunden, welche aus den leeren, noch 
zusammenhingenden Eihiillen besteht. Dies zeigt widerum. dass die 
Form geschlechtsreif ist und also kein Jugendstadium sein kann. Gegen 
die Annahme, dass N. brevirostre nur eine Jugendform von miatum oder 
grossipes wire, spricht auch der Umstand, dass die letztgenannten Formen 
niemals mit brevirostre zusammen gefunden werden. 

Die von Hansen (1, s. 649, 2, s. 127) erwaihnte WN. gracile von dani- 
schen Kiisten ist nach Norman WN. rubrum Hopee und also nicht mit 
der norwegischen brevirostre identisch. 


Nymphon brevitarse Kr. 
Renbugten (*/; 1901), 1 Ind. 


Ebenso wenig wie Merinert kann ich mit Witson einverstanden 
sein, wenn er diese Art mit grossipes-miatum vereinigt und in ibr nur 
ein Jugendstadium der letztgenannten sieht. Wenn auch sonstige Charak- 
tere (wie Laingenverhaltnisse der: Tarsalglieder, Liinge des Halses etc.) 
mit dem Wachstum Veranderungen unterliegen, so kennt man doch, 
soviel ich weiss, kein Beispiel einer Verinderung der Form des Augen- 
hiigels. Und diese ist bei den zwei Formen véllig verschieden, bei grossipes- 
miatum spitz, bei brevitarse deutlich abgerundet mit schwach hervor- 
tretenden Seitenteilen. 


Nymphon (Chetonymphon) spinosum Sars (nicht Gesnuin) 
f hirtipes Beu. 


Die Art hegt in mehreren Exemplaren vor. Gaasefjord 2°/, 1900, 
3—20 Faden, Lehm und kleine Steine, *°/; 1900, Winterhafen 24/, 1900, 
ca. 45 Faden, Forvisningsdalen 1/, 1900, 2—20 Faden, Lehm und 
kleine Steine, Renbugten */, 1901. 

Mit Meinerr und Moéstus sehe ich in den beiden Formen spinosum 
und hirtipes nur Varietiten einer Art, wo die eine, spinosum, nur eine 
boreale, die andere, hirtipes, nur eine arktische Verbreitung hat. Die 
Art muss — weil sie ihre Siidgrenze an den britischen Inseln hat— von 
urspriinglich arktischer Abstamnung sein. Unter dieser Voraussetzung 


1898 — 1902. No, 26.| PYCNOGONIDEN, 5 


miissen wir auch annehmen, dass sie wahrend der Glacialzeit in dem ganzen 
Nordmeere verbreitet war und sich nach Aufhoren dieser Periode den 
veriinderten Verhaltnissen in dem borealen Nordmeergebiete anpasste. 
Diese Anpassung ging doch nur unter gleichzeitig eintretenden kleinen 
Veranderungen im Kérperbau vor sich, wodurch die Form spinosum 
ansgebildet wurde. Ahnliche Beispiele einer Zweiteilung urspriinglich 
arktischer Formen liefert eine ganze Reihe von Formen anderer Tier- 
gruppen des Nordmeeres. 

Ein Merkmal unter anderen, das von Sars als ein Unterschied 
zwischen hirtipes und spinoswm angefihrt, ist die Anzahl der warzen- 
formigen Erhebungen auf dem inneren (unteren) Rand des vierten Gliedes 
der Gangbeine bei den Mannchen?. Sars giebt an, dass hirtipes etwa 
14, spinosum etwa 4—5 soleche Erhebungen hat. Nach dem ziemlich 
reichhaltigen Materiale aus dem Nordmeere (besonders von der Form 
hirtipes), die ich untersucht habe, habe ich feststellen kénnen, dass fast 
jede Anzahl zwischen 14 und 5 vertreten ist und dass der Unterschied 
also nicht konstant ist. Was man behaupten kann, ist, dass die Form 
in arktischen Gegenden eine bestimmte Tendenz hat, eine gréssere An- 
zahl von Miindungsfelder der mannlichen Kittdriisen auszubilden als im 
borealen, dass aber, wie die vielen Zwischenformen zeigen, dies Merk- 
mal noch keine konstante geworden ist. Dasselbe gilt den wbrigen 
von Sars hervorgehobenen Unterscheidungs-Merkmale (Haarbekleidung, 
Bau der Gangbeine und Scheerenkiefer, Form des Augenhigels): es 
zeigt sich eine Neigung der Individuen in den arktischen Gegenden nach 
einer bestimmten Richtung hin zu variiren, in den borealen nach einer 
anderen hin, ohne dass doch die Divergenzen so weit ausgebildet sind, 
dass sie zur Aulstellung zweier Arten berechtigten. 


1 An der Spitze dieser Erhebungen miinden die Kittdriisen, die bekanntlich nur 
den Mannchen zukommen. Das Miindungsfeld ist kreisrund, diinner als die 
tibrige Chitinbedeckung und von einer in dem Hoblraum der Beine vorspringenden 
Chitinleiste umsaéumt; das Feld hebt sich hierdurch scharf von der Umgebung 
ab. Diese kreisrunde Chitinplatte ist mit zahlreichen, dusserst ‘feinen Poren, 
welche von den Ausfihrungsgingen der Driise durchsetzt werden, versehen; eine 
gemeinsame, dussere Miindung giebt es also nicht. — Ich finde es zweckmissig 
diese Bemerkungen hinzuzufiigen, weil, soweit ich finden kann, das Vorhandensein 
dieser Miindungen bei diesen und nahestehenden Arten nicht erwiihnt ist. Bei 
einer Anzahl von Nymphon-Arten findet man sie nicht wieder. 


6 A. APPELLOF. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Die Angaben iiber Pycnogoniden aus den hocharktischen Gegenden 
westlich von Gronland (d. h. von der neoarktischen Region!) sind spirlich, 
und tber die Circumpolaritat lasst sich far die grosse Mehrzahl der 
Arten nichts sicheres sagen. Aus dem éstlichen Teil des neoarktischen 
Gebietes kennt man eine bedeutend gréssere Anzahl als aus dem west- 


lichen, némlich : 


Nymphon grossipes (Fasr.) (Meinert, RopGer, ORTMANN). 

brevitarse Kr. (Kréyer, Metnert, RoncGer). 

longitarse Kr. (Meinert, Kroyer, Ortmann, Ropcer). 

elegans Hansen (MEINERT, RopGer). 

strémi Kr. forma gracilipes Herter (Mewert, Misrs).” 

hirtipes Bert (Meinert, Miers). 

robustum Bei (Meinert, RopGer). 

macronyx (G. O. Sars) (RovGER). 

sluitert Hoex (Ropcer). 

microrhynchum G. O. Sars (RopGER). 

serratum G. O. Sars (ORTMANN). 

Cordylochele malleolata G. O. Sars (MEINERT). 

Pseudopallene circularis (Goovsir) (Meinert, Ropcer, ORTMANN). 
. spinipes (Kr.) (KROyER). 

Phowichilidium femoratum (RatHKe) (Kréyer).? 

Eurycide hispida (Kr.) (RopGer). 

Colossendeis proboscidea (Sas.) (MEINERT). 


” 


Ropcer erwihnt ausser dem in der Ausbeute seiner Reise noch andere 
Arten, die er als neu bezeichnet, sie sind aber meines Wissens spiter 
nicht beschrieben. Ausser Acht habe ich auch einige von der Davis-— 
strasse erwahnten Formen gelassen, welche als atlantische zu betrachten 
sind und die mit dem auch bis zu diesen nérdlichen Gegenden vordringenden 
atlantischen Wasser nach Norden gewandert sind; das sind Arten also, 
die atlantischen und nicht arktischen Ursprunges sind. 


1 Ich brauche wohl kaum darauf aufmerksam zu machen, dass ich dem Begriff 
yneoarktisch* betreffs des Meeres nicht denselben Umfang gebe, wie es in der 
Litteratur tber die zoogeographischen Regionen der Festlande der Fall ist. 
Unter neoarktisch verstehe ich nur das Meeresgebiet nérdlich vom N. Amerika. 

2 Miers sagt nichts dariiber, ob die von ihm erwihnten Exemplare von Grant’s 
Land der Form gracilipes zugehirig ist. 

3 Es scheint mir doch unsicher, ob man aus dem Vorkommen dieser Art an der 
westgrénlindischen Kiiste auf ihre arktische Abstamnung schliessen darf. 


1898— 1902. No, 26.] PY CNOGONIDEN. 9 


Der westliche Teil des neoarktischen Gebietes zwischen Baffins Bucht 
und Behringsstrasse ist in zoologischer Hinsicht bekanntlich so wenig 
untersucht, dass man kein Urteil tiber die Fauna iiberhaupt aussprechen 
kann. Von Murpocu sind nur zwei Arten aus dem westlichen Teil er- 
wihnt, nimlich Nymphon grossipes und N. longitarse. Dass die Pye- 
nogoniden-Fauna damit erledigt ware, ist kein Grund anzunehmen. 


Verzeichnis der citierten Litteratur. 


Hansen, H. J. Fortegnelse over de hidtili de danske have fundne pycnogonider eller 

sospindler. — Naturhist. Tidsskrift. 3 R. 14. 1884. 
_ Sospindler. — Zoologia danica, Bd. 3. 1890. 

Kroyer, H. Bidrag til kundskab om Pyenogoniderne eller sespindlerne. — Natur- 
hist. Tidsskrift 2. R. 1. Bd. 1844—45. 

Meinert, Fr. Pycnogonida. — Den danske Ingolf-Expedition. 3 Bd. 1898, 

Miers, E. J. Report on the crustacea, collected by naturelists of the arctic expedi- 
tion in 1875 -1876. — Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 4 Ser. 20. 1877. 

Murpnocu, J. Marine Invertebrates. — Rep. internat. Polar Exp. Point Barrow, Alaska 
p. 151. Washington 1885. 

Mosws. K. Arktische und subarktische Pantopoden. — Fauna arctica Bd. 2. 1902. 
Norman, A. M. The Podosomata (Pyenogonida) of the temperate atlantic and arctic 
oceans. — Journ. Linn. Soc. Vol. 30. Zool. No. 198. 1908. 

Orrmann, A. E. Crustacea and pyenogonida, collected during the Princeton Expedi- 
tion to North Greenland. — Proc. acad. nat. sc. Philadelphia. Vol. 53. 1901. 

Ropcer, A. Preliminary account of natural history collections, made on a voyage to 
the Gulf of St. Lawrence and Davis strait. Communicated by Prof. 
D’ArcyW. Tuompson — Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vol. 20. 1892—1895. 

Sans, G. O. Pyenogonidea. — Den norske Nordhavsexpedition 1876—78. Christiania 
1891. 

Wison, E. B. Synopsis of the pycnogonida of New England. — Transact. Conn. 
Acad. Vol. 5. New Haven 1878-82. 


Museum, Bergen Okt. 1910. 


Gedruckt am 23 November 1910. 


REPORT OF THE SECOND NORWEGIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION 
IN THE “FRAM” 1898—1902. No. 27. 


H. H. GRAN: 


PHYTOPLANKTON 


AT THE EXPENSE OF THE FRIDTJOF NANSEN FUND 
FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE 


PUBLISHED BY 


VIDENSKABS-SELSKABET I KRISTIANIA 


(THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES OF KRISTIANIA) 


KRISTIANIA 
PRINTED BY A. W. BROGGER 
1911 


Di. zweite norwegische arktische Expedition hat nur eine ganz 
geringe Zahl von Planktonfangen gemacht. 16 kleine Proben wurden 
mir zur Bearbeitung wberliefert, die zuerst vom Herrn Professor Dr 
G. O. Sars fir die Untersuchung der Copepoden verwendet worden 
waren. 

Alle Proben wurden mit Netzen aus Millergaze No. 20 geschéptt, 
und da einige ein dichtes Diatomeenplankton enthalten, sind ausserdem 
teilweise Arten zuriickgehalten worden, die sonst durch die Maschen der 
Netze durchschlipfen. 

Leider stammen alle diese Proben von der Ueberreise her, und nur 
eine einzige von einer Stelle innerhalb der arktischen Zone, namlich von 
77°31’ N. Br., 73°8’ W.L. Sie wurde am 15, August 1898 geschépft, 
4 Uhr vormittags, wihrend die Temperatur des Wassers an der Meeres- 
oberfliche 2°.3 C. war. 

Die Fange wahrend der Ueberfahrt kénnen kein grésseres Interesse 
beanspruchen, da wir das Phytoplankton dieses Meeresgebietes, des 
Atlantischen Ozeans siidlich von Island, namentlich aus den Unter- 
suchungen OstenFELps (1898, 1899, 1900) ganz gut kennen; die Ergeb- 
nisse der vorliegenden Untersuchung geben jedoch eine erweiterte Kenntnis 
der Verbreitung der verschienenen Arten, die meistens mit denjenigen 
identisch sind, die OsTENFELD aus diesem Gebiete schon angegeben hat. 

Darum gebe ich hier vollstandige Listen der in jeder Probe gefun- 
denen Arten; um die relative Haufigkeit anzugeben, werde ich die von 
Curve eingeftihrten Bezeichnungen benutzen (cc sehr zahlreich, ¢ haufig, 
+ nicht selten, r selten). 


H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


1. 57°31’ N. Br, 1929’ 0. L. 29. Juni 1898. 


Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. MiLL.) ¢ 
— macroceros (EuR.) ¢ 
— longipes Batt. + 
— furca (Exre.) + 
— fusus (Eur.) ¢ 
Peridiniuim depressum Batu. ¢ 
parallelum Brocu. r 
— divergens Eur. ¢ 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. r 
Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus concinnus W. Sm. + 
Rhizosolenia hebetata Baw. f. semispina (HENSEN). r 


Silicoflagellata: 
Dictyocha fibula Eur. r 
Allgemeiner Charakter: Nordseeplankton, nicht besonders ausge- 


pragt. 


1. Juli 1898, westlich von Fair Hill, 


2. 59°45’ N. Br., 2°42’ W. Lg. 
Oberflachentemperatur 11°.1. 


2 Uhr nachmittags. 
Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mixx.) ¢ 
— longipes Bat. + 
— furca (Exr.) + 
—_ fusus (Ear.) ¢ 
Peridinium depressum Bat. r 
parallelum Brocu. c 
divergens Exar. + 
ovatum Poucu. + 
pallidum Ostenr. r 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. + 


Ehizosolenia styliformis Bricgutw. r 


Chaetoceras decipiens Cu. v 
= debile Ci. r 


1898—1902. No. 27.] PHYTOPLANKTON. Ht) 


Allgemeiner Charakter: Boreal ozeanisch mit schwacher Beimischung 
von Kiistenformen (Ch. debile). Die Hauptmasse des Fanges bestand 
aus Cyttarocylis denticulata (Eur.). 


3. 69°17’ N. Br., 3°46’ W. Lg. 2. Juli 1898, 1 Uhr vormittags. 
Temperatur 10°.6. 


Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mu.t.) cc 
— macroceros (Eur. + 
—_ intermedium (JORG.) cc 
— longipes Batu. r 
= furca (ExuR.) cc 
— fusus (Eur.) cc 
Peridinium depressum Bait. + 
= parallelum Brocu. ¢ 
— divergens Eur. cc 
— pentagonum GRAN r 
— ovatum Poucu. + 
_ pallidum OstTenr. ¢ 
Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu r 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. + 
Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus concinnus W. Sm. r 
—_ centralis Eur. r 
Coscinosira Oestrupi OsTENr. r 
Euodia cuneiformis (Wa..ics) r 
Asteromphalus heptactis Raurs rv 
Dactyliosolen antarcticus CastR. + 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. + 
Chaetoceras atlanticum Cu. r 
_ boreale Bai. r 
= convolutum CastR. v 
— decipiens Ci. + 
Thalassiothrix longissima Cu. & Gron. + 
Silicoflagellata: 
Distephanus speculum (Eur.). 97 Arten. 
Allgemeiner Charakter: Fast rein atlantisch, Plankton des Golf- 
stromes mit schwacher Beimischung aus dem nordeuropiischen Kisten- 


meere (C. macroceros). 


6 H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


4. 60°52’ N. Br, 5°13’ W. Lg. 2. Juli 1898, 12 Uhr mittags. 
Temperalur 10°.6. 
Peridiniales: ; 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. MULL.) cc 
— intermedium Jore. + 
-—- longipes Batu. ce 
— arcticum (ExR.) + 
— lineatum (Enr.) r 
— furca (EuR.) ¢ 
— fusus (Eur.) ¢ 
Peridiniwm depressum Bat. ¢ 
ome parallelum Brocw cc 
— divergens Enr. c 
_ pentagonum Gran + 
— ovatum Poucu. ¢ 
— pallidum OsTENF. ¢ 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. + 
Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. + 
_ subbulliens Jére. ¢ 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. r 
Chaetoceras boreale Batu. r 
— densum Cu. + 
Thalassiothrix longissima Cy. & Grun. r 20 Arten. 
Allgemeiner Charakter. Trotzdem die Temperatur nicht gesunken 
ist, zeigt dieser Fang einen ausgesprochen mebr nérdlichen Charakter 
(C. arcticum, Dominieren von C. longipes und P. parallelum). 
Keine Ktistenformen mehr. 


5. 60°32’ N. Br, 8°45’ W. Lg. 3. Juli 1898, 121/, Uhr Morgens. 
Temperatur 9°.7. 
Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mix.) ¢ 

— intermedium Jone. + 

— longipes Batt. c 

_ arcticum Eur. + 

— platycorne v. Dav. f. compressa (Gran) r 

_ furca (Enr.) ¢ 

— fusus (EnR.) ¢ 


1898—1902. No. 27.] 


PHYTOPLANKTON. 7 


Peridinium depressum Bat. ¢ 
— parallelum Brocu ¢ 
— divergens Eur. ¢ 
— pentagonum Gran + 
— ovatum Poucu. r 
— pallidum OstTenr. + 
Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu r 
Dinophysis acuta Emr. r 
Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. + 
— subbulliens Jorc. + 
Thalassiosira subtilis Osrenr. r 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. r 
— hebetata Bai. f. semispina Hensen r 
Cheetoceras atlanticum Cu. r 
— criophilum Casrr. + 
— convolutum Caster. r 
— boreale Bat. f. solitaria CL. + 
Chaetoceras decipiens Cu. r 
— debile Cu. + 
Thalassiothria longissima Ci. & GRUN. 27 Arten. 
Allgemeiner Charakter fortwahrend nordlich (C. longipes, arcticum, 
Coscinodiscus- und Chaetoceras-Arten), doch mit deutlicher Beimischung 
von rein atlantischen Arten siidlichen Ursprungs (C. platycorne com- 
pressum, Thalassiosira subtilis). Kistenformen sparlich (Ch. debile). 


7. 60°20’ N. Br., 12°15’ W. Lg. 4. Juli 1898. 


Peridiniales: 

Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mtu.) + 
—_ intermedium Jore. + 
— longipes Bath. r 
— lineatum Eur. c 
— furca (Exr.) ¢ 
= fusus (EuR.) cc 

Peridinium oceanicum VANHOFF. 
= depressuim Bat. ¢ 
_— divergens Eur. + 
_ conicum (GRaN) + 
= ovatum Poucn. c 


H. H. GRAN, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Peridinium pallidum Ostenr. ¢ 

= pellucidum (BercH) c 

= Steinii Jorg. + 

— Granii OSTENF. r 
Diplopsalis lenticula (BerGcu) + 
Pyrophacus horologiwm r 
Gonyaulax polygramma r 

—_ spinifera (Cuap. & Lacum.) r 
Podolampas paliipes STEIN r 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. c. 

—_— rotundata Ciap. & Lacum. + 

— acuminata Crap. & Lacum. + 
Prorocentrum dentatum STEIN r 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. + 
' Coscinosira Oestrupi OsTENF. c 
Thalassiosira subtilis (OstENF.) c 
Asteromphalus heptactis Ratrs + 
Kuodia cuneiformis (WatuicH) r 
Dactyliosolen antarcticus Castr. + 
— tenuis Cu. + 
Corethron criophilum Castr. r 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricurw. c 
— Shrubsolet Ci. + 
Bacteriastrum varians LAuDER r 
Chaetoceras boreale Bat. ¢ 
ae atlanticum Cu. ¢c 
— criophilum Castr. + 
== convolutwi Castr. + 
— peruvianuin Bricutw. r 
= polygonum Scattr + 
_ decipiens Cu. ¢ 
— Schiittit Cu. ec 
a laciniosum Scatrr r 
Nitzschia seriata Ci. + 
= delicatissima CL. + 
Silicoflagellata: 
Distephanus speculum (Eur.) + 
Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (WatuicH) + 48 Arten. 


1898—1902. No. 27.] PHYTOPLANKTON. 9 


Allgemeiner Charakter: Rein atlantisches Plankton mit einer 
charakteristischen massenhaften Anhaufung von kleinen, zart gebauten 
Diatomeen, die ich als degenerierte Kiistenformen auffasse, hier beson- 
ders Ch. Schiittii (vgl. p. 19). Der Reichtum an kleinen Peridineen ist 
wahrscheinlich durch die Zustopfung des Netzes zu erkléren. 


9. 61°49’ N. Br., 17912’ W. Lg. 7. Juli 1898, mittags. 
Temperatur 10°7. 
Peridiniales: 
Ceratiwm tripos (O. F. Mit.) ¢ 
— intermedium Jira. + 
— lineatum Eur. r 
— furca (Eur.) c 
— fusus (EHR.) cc 
Peridiniwn oceanicum VaNHOFF. Yr 
— depressum Bait. + 
— parallelum Brocw + 
— divergens Eur. + 
— ovatuim Poucu. r 
— pallidum OsTENF. ¢ 
— Cerasus PauLs. r 
aa ' Steinii Jore. r 
Diplopsalis lenticula’ Bercu + 
Gonyaulax polygramma STEIN r 
_— spinifera (Crap. & Lacum.) r 
Dinophysis acuta Enr. ¢ 
— homunculus Exe. r 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. r 
Coscinosira Oestrupi Ostenr. + 
Thalassiosira subtilis (OsTENF.) + 
_— decipiens (GRUN.) r 
Asteromphalus heptactis Ratrs. + 
Dactyliosolen antarcticus Castr. + 
= tenuis Ci. r 
Corethron criophilum Castr. ¥ 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Brieutw. + 
—_ Shrubsolei Ci. ¢ 
— alata BricuTw. ¥ 


10 H. H. GRAN. 


[SEC. ARCT. EXP. ERAM 


Bacteriastrum delicatulum Cu. r 
Cerataulina Bergoniit H. Pera. r 
Chaetoceras atlanticum Cu. r 
— boreale Batu. r 
= criophilum Castr. + 
_ polygonum Scuoutr r 
— decipiens Ci. r 
= Schiittii Ci. cc 
Thalassiothrix longissima Ci. & Grun. + 
Niteschia seriata Cu. + 
— delicatissima Cu. ce 
Silicoflagellata: 
Dictyocha fibula Enr. r 
Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (Wa.uicH) r 42 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie die vorige Probe. 


10. 61°28’ N. Br., 19°55’ W. Lg. 8. Juli 1898, 1 Uhr nachmittags. 
Temperatur 11°.2. 
Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Miu.) + 
— intermedium Jore. + 
= longipes Batt. + 
— lineatum (Eur.) + 
— furca (Eur.) c 
— fusus (ExR.) ce 
Peridinium oceanicum VANHOFF. r 
— depressum BatL. ¢ 
_— parallelum Brocu. + 
— divergens Eur. + 
— conicum (GRAN) + 
— Thorianum Pauts. r 
— ovatuim Poucn. r 
_— pallidum OstENF. c 
— pellucidum (BERGH) + 
— Steinit Jona. + 
— Cerasus Pauts. + 
— Granii OsTENF, r 
Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu ¢ 


1898— 1902. No. 27.] 


PHYTOPLANKTON, 


Gonyaulax polygramma Stein + 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. + 


homunculus Eur. r 


11 


rotundata Crap. & Lacum. r 
Prorocentrum dentatum Stein yr 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. r 


marginatus Eur. + 


Coscinosira Oestrupi Ostenr. + 
Thalassiosira subtilis (Ostenr.) + 


decipiens (GRUN.) r 


Asteromphalus heptactis Ratrs ¢ 
Dactyliosolen antarcticus Castr. ¢ 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricut. c 


Shrubsolei Cieve + 
alata Bricutw. r 


Cerataulina Bergonii H. Perac. r 
Chaetoceras criophilum Castr. + 


polygonum ScHiTT r 
Schiittii Ci. 


Thalassiothria longissima Ci. & Grun. + 
Nitzschia delicatissima Cu. cc 


Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (Wa.uicH) 
Pontosphaera Hualeyi Lou. 


42 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie die Proben 7 und 9. 


11. 61°39’ N. Br., 22941’ W. Lg. 9. Juhi 1898. 


Temperatur 10°.9. 


Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mitt.) + 


bucephalum Cu. r. 
intermedium Jérc. + 
longipes Bat. + 
furca (Exr.) + 
fusus (Eur.) + 


Peridinium oceanicum VANHOFF. 


depressum Bat. + 
parallelum Brocu ¢ 


1 Uhr nachmittags. 


12 H. H. GRAN, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Peridinium ovatum Pouca. + 

_— pallidum Ostenr. + 

— pellucidum (BeRGH) + 
Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu + 
Gonyaulax spinifera (Cuap. & Lacum.) r 
Dinophysis acuta Ene. ¢ 

Bacillariaceae: 

Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. cc 

= Shrubsolet Cr. + 
Chaetoceras criophilum Castr. r 

— decipiens Cu. r 

— Schiittit Ci. r 
Thalassiothrix longissima Cri. & Grun. + 21 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter: Rein atlantisch, nicht so reich an siidlichen 
Formen wie die vorhergehenden Proben. 


12. 61°47’ N. Br., 25°39’ W. Lg. 10. Juli 1898, 121/. Uhr nachmittags. 
Temperatur 10°1. 


Peridiniales: 

Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mir.) + 
— bucephaluwin CLEVE r 
— intermedium Jorg. + 
— furca (Enr.) c 
— fusus (Eur.) ¢ 

Peridinium parallelum Brecu c 
= divergens Eur. + 
— pallidum OsTEenr. r 
— Steinit Jone. + 

Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu + 

Gonyaulax spinifera (Cuap. & Lacum.) r 

Dinophysis acuta Eur. + 


Bacillariacea: 
Ehizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. cc 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. + 14 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie voriger Fang. 


1898—1902. No. 27.] 


PHYTOPLANKTON. 


13. 62°98 N. Br., 28943’ W. Lg. 11. Juli 1898, 12 Uhr mittags. 


Teimperatur 9°%7, 


Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mitt.) + 


intermedium Jorg. + 
lineatum (Eur) + 
furca (Eur.) + 
fusus (Enr.) ¢ 


Peridinium oceanicum Vanuirr. + 


depressum Bat, + 
parallelum Brocu c 
divergens Eur. r 
conicum (GRAN) r 
ovatum Poucn. + 
roseum PauLs. r 
pallidum Osvenr. ¢ 
pellucidum Bercu + 
Steinii JOrG. r 
Granii OsTENF. r 


Diplopsalis lenticula Berecu + 
Gonyaulax spinifera (Cuar. & Lacum.) r 


polygramma STEIN r 


Dinophysis acuta Eur. ¢ 


acuminata Crap. & Lacum. + 
rotundata Crap. & Lacum. r 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus marginatus Ear. + 
Coscinosira Oestrupi OsTenF. r 
Corethron criophilum Casrr. r 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. + 


hebetata Bat. f. semispina HEnsen r 


Chaetoceras boreale Ba. c 


criophilum Castr. + 
decipiens CL. r 
laciniosum ScwHotTr r 
Schiittit Ci. cc 


Thalassiothrix longissima Cui. & Grun. + 
Niteschia seriata Ci. + 


delicatissima CL. ¢ 


14 H. H. GRAN, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (W atuicu). 36 Arten, 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie die Proben 7, 9 und 10. 


14. 61°37’ N. Br., 28930’ W. Lg. 12. Juli 1898. 121/, Uhr nachmittags. 
Temperatur 9°.8. 


Peridiniales: 

Ceratium tripos (O. F. Miu.) + 

— intermedium Jira, + 

— lineatum (Eur.) + 

— furca (Exr.) + 

— fusus (EuR.) ¢ 
Peridinium oceanicum Vanuirr, + 

— depressum Bait. + 

— parallelum Brocu ¢ 

— divergens Eur. r 

— conicum (GRAN) + 

— ovatum Poucu. + 

— roseum PauLs. r 

— pallidum OsteEnr. ¢ 

— pellucidum Bere r 

— Steinii Jone. r . 

— Granii Ostenr. + 
Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu + 
Gonyauluc spinifera (Ciap. & Lacum.) + 
Podolampas palmipes Stein r 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. c 

— acuminata Curae. & Lacum. + 

— rotundata Crap. & Lacy. r 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus marginatus Eur. r 
Coscinosira Oestrupi Ostenr. r 
Thalassiosira subtilis Ostenr. r 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. c 
— Shrubsolet Cu. r 
Chaetoceras boreale Bat. ¢ 
— criophilum Castr. cc 
— polygonum Scuirr r 


1898— 1902. No. 27.| PHYTOPLANKTON. 15 


Chaetoceras Schiittii CLEvE ce 
Thalassiothrix longissima Ci. & Grun. + 


Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (Watuicn) r 33 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie die Fange 7, 9, 10 und 13. 


16. 62°36 N. Br., 81°18’ W. Lg. 15. Juli 1898, 2 Uhr vormittags. 
Temperatur 9°.1. 


Peridiniales: 
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Miu.) r 
— intermedium Jore. + 
— longipes Balu. r 
= furca (Eur.) r 
— fusus (EuR.) ¢ 
Peridinium oceanicum Vannorr. + 
— depressum Bait. r 
— parallelum Brocu c 
— conicum (GRAN) r 
— ovatum (Poucn.) r 
— pallidum OstTEeNr. + 
— pellucidum Bercu + 
— Granii OSTENF. r 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. ¢ 
— rotundata Crap. & Lacu. r 


Bacillariaceae: 

Coscinodiscus marginatus Eur. + 
Coscinosira Oestrwpi OSTENF. r 
Thalassiosira subtilis OsTENF. r 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. c 

= hebetata Bat. f. semispina Hensen + 
Chaetoceras atlanticum Cu. r 

— boreale Bat. c. 

— criophilum Castr. ¢ 

— decipiens CL. r 

-- Schiittii Ci. ce 
Thalassiothriax longissima Cx. & Gru. ¢ 
Niteschia seriata CL. + 


H.W. GRAN, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


16 7 
Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica Watuicn. 98 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie die Fange 7, 9, 10, 13 und 14. 


17. 62°8' N. Br, 32°33’ W. Lg. 15. Juli 1898, 2 Uhr nachmittags. 
Temperatur 9°.6. 


Peridiniales: 

Ceratiwm tripos (O. F. Mit.) + 

— intermedium Jira. + 

— longipes BaiL. r 

— lineatum (Eur.) r 

— furca (Exr.) + 

— fusus (ER.) cc 
Peridinium oceanicum VaNHOFF. + 

— depressum Bain. + 

— parallelum Brocu + 

~— divergens Eur. r 

— ovatum Pouca. + 

= pallidum OstTenr. + 

— pellucidum Bere r 

— Granii Ostenr. + 
Diplopsalis lenticula Bercu r 
Gonyaulax spinifera (Crap. & Lacan.) r 
Dinophysis acuta Eur. + 

— acuminata Crap. & LacuM. 


Bacillariaceae: 

Coscinodiscus marginatus Eur. + 
Coscinosira Oestrupi Osrenr. + 
Rhizosolenia styliformis Bricutw. ¢ 

— hebetata Batu. f. semispina Hensen + 
Chaetoceras atlanticum Cu. r 

— boreale Batt. ¢ 

— criophilum Castr. ¢ 

— decipiens Ci. r 

_ laciniosum Scutrr r 

— Schiittii Ci. ce 
Thalassiothrix longissima Cr. & Grun. ¢ 
Niteschia seriata Ci. + 


"1898-1902. No. 97.] PHYTOPLANKTON. 17 


Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (W attic). 31 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter wie 7, 9, 10, 18, 14 und 16. 


18. 59°27’ N. Br., 42°15’ W. Lg. 18. Juli 1898. 21/, Uhr nachmittags. 
Temperatur 2.5, 
Peridiniales: 

Ceratium longipes Baw. r+ 
_— arcticum (Enr.) r 

Peridinium parallelum Brocu + 
= ovatum Poucu. ¢ 
— breve Pauns. + 
_ curvipes OsTENF. + 
— pallidum OstEnr. ¢ 
— pellucidum Bereu c 

Dinophysis acuta Enr. 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. 10 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter ganz verandert, ozeanisch, fast rein arktisch. 


19. 77°31’ N. Br, 73°98’ W. Lg. 15. August 1898, 4 Uhr vormittags. 
Temperatur 2°.3. 
Peridiniales: 

Ceratium arcticum (EuR.) ¢ 
Peridinium depressum Batu. cc 

a subinerme Pauts. + 

— pallidum OsTENF. cc 

— pellucidum Bereu c 

— rosewm PauLs. + 
Gonyaulax triacantha Jore. r 
Dinophysis arctica Merescu. 

— rotundata Cuar. & Lacan. 


Bacillariaceae: 
Coscinodiscus centralis Eur. ¢ 
— curvatulus GRUN. r 
Coscinosira -polychorda Gran + 
Thalassiosira Nordenskiéldit Ci. + 
— gravida CL. + 


18 H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Asteromphalus Hookeri Eur. r 
Rhizosolenia hebetata Baw. f. semispina HENSEN cc 
Chaetoceras atlanticum Ci. ¢ 
— boreale Balu. ¢ 
— criophilum Castr. + 
_— convolutum CastR. + 
—_ decipiens Cu. ¢ 
— contortum ScutTr c 
— diadema (Eur.) r 
— teres CL. r 
—_ sociale LAUDER 
Fragilaria oceanica Cr. + mit Dauersporen. 
Thalassiothria longissima Cu. & GRUN. + 
Niteschia seriata Cu. + 
Silicoflagellata : 
Dictyocha speculum Eur. 99 Arten. 


Allgemeiner Charakter: Arktisch, aus neritischen und ozeanischen 


Arten gemischt. 


Biologische Bemerkungen. 


Nachdem in den letzten Jahren die von der ,Fram* durchfahrene 
Meeresstrasse namentlich von OstenreLp (1898, 1899, 1900) und PauLsen 
(1904, 1909, OstenreLD u. Pautsen 1904) ziemlich eingehend auf Phyto- 
plankton untersucht worden ist, kénnen wir nicht erwarten, dass eine 
kleine Reihe Stichproben, wie die vorliegende, etwas wesentlich Neues 
bieten wird. Der Inhalt der Proben stimmt auch bis auf Einzelheiten 
mit denjenigen, tiber die Osrenretp frither berichtet hat, tiberein; gerade 
aus dem Jahre 1898 ist sein Material sehr reichhaltig und lehrreich (1899). 

Der grésste Teil unserer Proben enthalt als Charakterformen die 
beiden sehr kleinen Diatomeen Chaetoceras Schiittii und Niteschia 
delicatissima und als untergeordnete Bestandteile des Planktons eine 
ganze Reihe von rein ozeanischen Arten: Coscinosira Oestrupi, Thalas- 
siosira subtilis, Asteromphalus heptactis, Dactyliosolen antarcticus, 
Rhizosolenia Shrubsolei, Corethron criophilum, Bacteriastrum delica- 
tulum, Chaetocerus polygonuin und mehrere andere. Alle diese Arten 
haben ihr Verbreitungszentrum weiter siidlich, nur Niteschia delicatissima 


1898—1902. No. 27.] PHYTOPLANKTON, 19 


kann auch im hohen Norden massenhaft gefunden werden. Der Charakter 
dieser Planktonproben muss darum als rein atlantisch bezeichnet 
werden. 

Es ist mir aber schon lange sehr auffallend erschienen, wie eine 
Art, wie Chaetoceras Schiittii, die an den Kiisten Europas rein neritisch 
auftritt, hier als eine Leitform in rein ozeanischen Strémungen vorkom- 
men kann, und diese Frage ist noch nicht endgiiltig gelést. Zwei Még- 
lichkeiten sind vorhanden: Entweder kommt die Art jeden Frihling mit 
Oberflachenstrémungen von irgend einer Kiuste her, oder sie ist in diesem 
Gebiete einheimisch geworden, hat ihre Fahigkeit Dauersporen zu bilden 
verloren und ist rein ozeanisch geworden. Mit beiden diesen méglichen 
Erklarungen stimmt es tiberein, dass die Zellen durchgehends viel kleiner 
und zarter sind als bei der neritischen Ch. Schiittii. Nun kennen wir 
viele Beispiele dafiir, dass neritische Diatomeen scheinbar degenerieren, 
wenn sie in die monotonen Verhiiltnisse des offenen Ozeans hinaus- 
getrieben werden, und die Abweichungen von einem normalen Ch. Schiittii, 
die wir bei den ozeanischen Individuen finden, sind nicht grésser, als 
dass sie in dieser Weise wahrscheinlich entstehen kénnten. 

Sicher ist es, dass diese Diatomeen sich an Ort und Stelle jedes 
Jahr im Mai sehr stark vermehren, dass ihr Maximum sich langsam 
gegen Norden und Westen verschiebt, wie OsTENFELD es beschrieben hat, 
und dass sie im Oktober verschwinden nach einem letzten Aufblithen 
einerseits in der Déinemarkstrasse, andererseits in der Faroer-Shetland- 
Rinne. Auf den beigefiigten Karten habe ich nach Ostenretp und 
Pautsen die Beobachtungsstationen zusammengestellt, wo Chaetoceras 
Schiittii {. oceanica, wie ich sie nennen michte, in den Jahren 1897, 
1898, 1899 und 1903 in bedeutender Menge gefunden worden ist in den 
Monaten Mai-Juni (Fig. 1), Juli-August (Fig. 2) und September-Oktober 
(Fig. 3). 

Persénlich bin ich davon tiberzeugt, dass die Zellen, von denen die 
dichten Chaetoceras-Wolken stammen, die im Meere S. von Island 
gefunden werden, jedes Jahr von einer Kiiste heraustreiben. Von Island 
kénnen sie nicht kommen; ihr Verbreitungsgebiet ist durch eine Zone 
mit neritischem Asterionella-Plankton von Island getrennt (vgl. Pause, 
1909); wahrscheinlich kommen sie mit dem nordatlantischen Strom von 
der amerikanischen Kiiste. Ich gebe zu, dass diese Hypothese noch 
nicht bewiesen werden kann; wenn wir das Plankton des mittleren Teil 
des nordatlantischen Ozeans (zwischen 40 und 55° nérdl. Breite), das bis 
jetzt fast ganz unbekannt ist, kennen lernen, wird auch diese Frage 
gelést werden konnen. 


rn) H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT, EXP. PRAM 


| ep 


= 


Fig. 1. Beobachtungen von Chaetoceras Schiittii f. oceanica in den Monaten 
Mai und Juni. 


Z 


Fig. 2. Chaetoceras Schiittii f. oceantca in Juli— August. 
Dic Zahlen bezeichnen die Planktonstationen dev Fram‘; diejenigen wo Ch. Schiittii 
nicht gefunden wurden, sind mit einem Kreuz (+) bezeichnet. 


ee : Ly elie, 
Fig. 3. Chaetoceras Schiittii {. oceanica in September—Oktober., 


1898 — 1902. No. 27. PHYTOPLANKTON. 21 


Systematische Liste der gefundenen Arten. 


Da wir in dem Werke ,,Nordisches Plankton® ein Handbuch haben, 
in welchem die altere Literatar beriicksichtigt ist, war es tberfliissig, hier 
die Synonyme der gefundenen Arten beizufiigen. Die Reihenfolge der 
Arten ist dieselbe wie in diesem Werke. 

1. Prorocentrum dentatwm Stein. 
Nur vereinzelt gefunden, wahrcheinlich doch haufig vorhanden; 
mit Millergaze nicht regelmissig gefangen. Fang 7 und 10. 
2. Dinophysis acuta Enr. 
An allen atlantischen Stationen, meistens haufig. 
3. D. acuminata Crap. & Lacy. 
Mit dem dichten Diatomeenplankton zusammen nicht selten, sonst 
’ wahrscheinlich durch die Maschen durchgeschlipft. Hat wahrschein- 
lich eine weite Verbreitung. Fang 7, 18, 14, 17. 
4. D. arctica Merescuk. 

Mit der vorigen Art sehr nahe verwandt, vielleicht mit Recht 
von Jércensen (1900) nur als eine Varietat derselben anzusehen. 
Fang 19 haufig. 

5. D. rotundata Crap. & Lacun. 
In mehreren Fangen, meistens spiirlich. Geht durch die Maschen 
der Netze. 

6. D. homunculus Stein. 

Selten. Fang 9, 10. 
7. Gonyaulax triacantha Jor. 

Fang 19, sparlich. 
8. G. polygramma STEIN. | 

Sparlich gefangen, Fang 7, 9, 10, 13. 
9. G. spinifera (Crap. & Lacu.) Dies. 

Wie vorige Art, etwas haufiger. 7, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17. 
10. Diplopsalis lenticula Brreu. 

Ziemlich haufig an den atlantischen Stationen. 

11. Peridinium Cerasus Pauts. Nach Brocu (1910) mit P. quarne- 

rense (Scurip.) identisch. Selten. 9, 10. 

12. P. rosewm Pauts. 
Selten. 13, 14, 19. 
13. P. ovatum Poucu. 
In fast allen Proben, teilweise haufig. 


99 


H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


14. P. curvipes OsTEnr. 


Fang 18, nicht selten. 


15. P. Steinti Jore. 


16. 


17. 


18. 


19. 


21. 


22. 


In den ozeanischen Fangen spérlich gefunden, wahrscheinlich nur 
gelegentlich in den Netzen gefangen. 
P. pellucidum (Brreu) Scuvrr. 

Wie vorige Art, aber weit haufiger gefangen. 
P. pallidwm OsTEnr. 

In allen Fangen, dem ersten ausgenommen, ‘meistens haufig. 
P. Granii Ostenr. 

In den ozeanischen Fangen zusammen mit den kleinen Diatomeen, 
nicht sehr haufig. 7, 9, 13, 14, 16, 17. 
P. depressum Bat. 

[In fast allen Fangen gefunden, meistens haufig. 


. P. parallelum Brocu. 


Wie die vorige Art, aber noch haufiger. Fehlt in der Probe aus 
der Davisstrasse (19), wo P. depressum massenhatt auftritt. 
P. oceanicum Vanuoer. 

In den rein atlantischen Fangen (7—17), nicht sehr haufig. 
P. crassipes Kororp. 

Bis mit Fang 12 ziemlich haufig oder sehr hiufig, weiter westlich 
sparlich vorhanden. Ich bin nicht davon iiberzeugt, dass diese Form 
von dem typischen P. divergens spezifisch verschieden sei, fihre 
sie aber unter dem jetzt geltenden Namen auf, bis weitere Unter- 
suchungen vorliegen kénnen. 


. P. conicum (Gran) Osrenr. u. Scumipt. 


In den atlantischen Fangen (7—16) nicht selten. 
P. pentagonum Gran. 
In den éstlichsten Fangen (8, 4, 5) nicht selten. 


. P. subinerme Pauts. 


Fang 19 nicht selten. 


. P. Thorianum Pauts. 


Fang 10, selten. 


. Pyrophacus horologium Str. 


Fang 7, selten. 
Ceratium platycorne v. Dav. f. compressa (Grav). 


Syn.: C. (macroceros subsp.) compressum Gran 1902, p. 54, 193, 
196, f£. 16.; C. compressum Pauts. 1908, p- 81, f. 108. 

Diese Form, die im vorliegenden Material nur sehr sparlich vor- 
handen (Fang 5), ist als ein Minusvariant von C. platycorne auf- 


1898— 1902. No. 27.] 


7 PHYTOPLANKTON. 98 


zufassen, der an der Nordgrenze der Art auftritt, wie ich aus dem 
Material der Michael Sars-Expedition 1910 beweisen kann. 
29. CO. bucephalum Curve. 
Nur sehr sparlich gefunden. 11, 12. 
30. C. tripos (0. F. Mixi.) Nrrzscu. 

Tn allen Fangen mit Ausnahme der beiden letzten, namentlich an 
den dstlichsten Stationen (bis Fang 9) haufig. Die auftretende Form 
ist f. atlantica Ostenr. 

31. C. macroceros (Eur.) CLEve. 
Fang 1 haufig (Nordsee), 3 nicht selten, weiter westlich nicht 
gefunden. 
32. C. intermedium Jone. 
Fang 3 massenhaft, 4—17 regelmissig und ziemlich haufig. 
33. C. longipes (Bat.) Gran. 
Fang 4 massenhaft, 5 haufig, sonst weniger haufig und ziemlich 
liickenhaft verbreitet (1—7, 10, 11, 16—18). 
34. OC. arcticum (Eur.) CLEVE. 
Fang 4, 5 nicht selten, 18 sparlich, 19 haufig. 
35. C. lineatum (Enr.) CLEve. 

Loumanw (1908) und Korom (1909) wie auch neulich Apsretn (1910) 
haben gezeigt, dass die unter diesem Namen gehende Form in dem 
Entwickelungszyklus von C. tripos auftritt. Korom zeigt aber auch, 
dass eine sehr dhnliche Form, C. californicum aus C. Ostenfeldii 
entstehen kann. Die Médglichkeit ist vorhanden, dass lineatwm- 
Formen, die kaum von einander zu unterscheiden sein wiirden, als 
Zwischengenerationen bei mehreren verschiedenen Ceratium-Arten 
vorkommen kénnen. Darum ist es nach meiner Ansicht praktisch, 
vorlaufig den alten Namen beizubehalten; wenn wir nach Loumann 
und Pautsen ,,Ceratium tripos v. subsalsa {. lineata“ schreiben 
wollten, wiirden wir von der geographischen Verbreitung der Ostsee- 
form C. tripos v. subsalsa eine ganz falsche Vorstellung verbreiten. 

Fang 4, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14, 17. 

36. C. furca (Enr.) Crap. & Lace, . 

In allen Fangen mit Ausnahme der beiden letzten, durchgehends 
haufig. 

37. C. fusus (Eur.) Cuap. & Laci. 

Fang 1 bis 17 haufig bis massenhaft; die haufigste Ceratium-Art 
des Materials. 

38. Podolampas palmipes Sten. 
Selten (9, 14), nur gelegentlich durch die Netze gefangen. 


57. 


H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Bacillariaceae: 


. Thalassiosira Nordenskibldii CLEvE. 


Fang 19 nicht selten. 


. T. decipiens (Grun) Jére. 


9, 10 selten. 
T. gravida Creve. 19 nicht selten. 
T. subtilis (Ostenr.) GRAN. 
5—10 haufig, 14, 16 sparlich. 
Coscinosira polychorda Gran. 
19 nicht selten. 
C. Oestrupi OSsTENF. 
In den atlantischen Fangen (8—17) teilweise nicht selten. 


Fang 7 hiaufig. 


. Dactyliosolen antarcticus CastrR. 


Fang 3, 7, 9, 10 ziemlich haufig. 


. D. tenuis (Cieve) Gran. 


7, 9 nicht sehr hiaufig. 


. Coscinodiscus subbulliens Jore. 


4, 5 ziemlich haufig. 


. C. marginatus Enr. 


10 sparlich, 183—17 ziemlich haufig. 


. C. centralis Eur. 


9—12 nicht sehr haufig; 18 spirlich, 19 haufig. 
C. concinnus W. Sm. 

1, 3, nicht weiter westlich. 
C. curvatulus GRun. 

19 sparlich. 


. Asteromphalus heptactis Raters. 


3 spiarlich, 7, 9 nicht selten, 10 haufig. 


. A. Hookeri Eur. 


Ein Exemplar mit 5+ 1 Strahlen gefunden im Fang 19. 
Euodia cuneiformis (Wa.iicH) GRAN. 
3, 7 spirlich. 3 


. Rhizosolenia Shrubsolet Curve. 


7—10 ziemlich hiufig, 14 sparlich. 
R. styliformis Bricurw. 


In fast allen Fangen (2—17) mehr oder weniger haufig, 11—12 


massenhaft. 
Rh. hebetata Bai. f. semispina (HENsEN). 
Spirlich (1, 13, 16, 17), nur im Fang 19 massenhaft. 


1898 — 1902. No. 97.] PHYTOPLANKTON. 25 


58. 


59. 


60. 


61. 


62. 


63. 


64. 


65. 


66. 


67. 


68. 


69. 


70. 


oh 


72. 


73. 


R. alata Bricutw. 
9, 10 spiirlich. 
Corethron criophilum Castr. 
7, 9, 13 sparlich, 
Bacteriastrum varians Laup. 
7 selten. 
B. delicatulum CuEve. 
9, selten. 
Chaetoceras atlanticum CLEVE. 

Fang 7 und 19 haufig, sonst sparlich (3, 5, 9, 16, 17). 
Ch. polygonum Scuisrr. 

Sparlich in den atlantischen Fangen (7, 9, 10, 14). 
Ch. densum CLEvE. 

Nur im Fang 4. 

Ch. convolutum Castr. 
3, 5, 7, 19 nicht haufig. 
Ch. peruvianum Bricatw. 
Fang 7 vereinzelt. 
Ch. criophilum Cattr. 

Fang 5—17 regelmissig und ziemlich haufig, 14 massenhaft, 

19 nicht selten. 
Ch. boreale Bat. 

3—9 ziemlich sparlich, 183—17 und 19 hiufig. 
Ch. decipiens CLEVE. 

In fast allen Fangen, meistens aber sparlich. 
Ch. teres CLEVE. 

19 spéarlich. 

Ch. contortum Scuirr. 

19 haufig. 

Ch. Schiittiti Cu. {. oceanica n. nom.; Ch. Schiittii aff. Osrenr. 
1898, 1900; Ch. Willei Ostenr. 1899. 7, 9, 10, 18—17 sehr haufig, 
vgl. S. 19-—20. 

Ch. laciniosum Scuitr f. pelagica (CLEve). 

Syn.: Ch. laciniosum aff. Osrenr. 1899; Ch. Ostenfeldii Curve 
1900; Ch. pelagicum Creve 1873. 

Da diese Form nach meiner Ansicht eine Degenerationsform von 
Ch. laciniosum ist, wie die oben besprochene Form von Ch. Schiittii, 
muss ich sie entsprechend bezeichnen. Ich habe den Namen pela- 
gica beibehalten, trotzdem es nach meiner Ansicht auch fir Cieve 
selbst unméglich war, zu entscheiden, ob die héchst ungenigende 


74. 
75. 
76. 
a7. 
78. 
1. 
80. 


81. 


82. 


83. 


84. 


8). 


H. H. GRAN. [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 


Beschreibung von 1873 wirklich diese Form bezeichnen sollte. Da 
aber keine Verwechslung méglich ist, und wohl kaum jemand den 
Versuch wagen wird zu entscheiden, welche Art mit Ch. pelagicum 
eigentlich gemeint war, kénnen wir gern auf die Autoritét CLEVES 
hin den Namen beibehalten. 

Diese Art war in den vorliegenden Fiangen nur sparlich vor- 
handen (7, 13, 17). 
Ch. diadema (Eur.) Gran. 

19 sparlich. 
Ch. debile CLEVE. 

2 sparlich, 5 nicht selten. 
Ch. sociale Lauper. 

19 sparlich. 
Cerataulina Bergonti H. Prrae.. 

9, 10 sparlich. 
Fragilaria oceanica CLEvE. 

19, mit Dauersporen, nicht selten. 
Thalassiothrix longissima Cu. & Grun. 

In den meisten Fangen mehr oder weniger haufig. 
Niteschia seriata CLEVE. 

In den meisten der atlantischen Fange. 
N. delicatissima CLEve. 

In atlantischen Fangen z. T. massenhaft (9, 10). 


Silicoflagellata: 
Dictyocha fibula Enr. 
Nur vereinzelt gefunden (1, 9). 
D. speculum Eur. 
Nur zufallig gefangen (3, 7, 19). 


Coccolithophorida: 
Coccolithophora pelagica (Watucn) Loum. 

Trotz ihrer Kleinheit ist diese Alge so regelmissig in den atlan- 
tischen Fangen aufgefischt worden, dass sie wahrscheinlich massen- 
haft vorkommt. 

Pontosphaera Hualeyi Loum. 

Nur in Schleim und Exkrementen gefunden, wahrscheinlich mas- 

senhaft vorhanden. 


1898 1902. No. 27.] PHYTOPLANKTON. 27 


Literatur 4. 


Aprstrein, C. Ueber Knospung bei Ceratiwm. Kiel 1910. (Schriften Naturw. 
Verein f. Schleswig-Holstein, Bd. 14, p. 419). 

- Knospung bei Ceratium. Leipzig 1910. (Internationale Revue der 
gesamten Hydrobiologie u. Hydrographie, Bd. III, Heft I, p. 34). 

- Biologische Studie tiber Ceratium tripos var. subsalsa Ostr. Kiel 
1910. (Wissensch. Meeresunters. Abt. Kiel, Neue Folge, Bd. 12). 

Brocu, Hsatmar. Das Plankton. Stockholm 1910. (Zool. Ergebn. d. schwed. 
Exped. nach Spitzbergen 1908. Kgl. Svenska Vet.-Ak. Handl. Bd. 45, 
No. 9). 

— Die Peridinium-Arten des Nordhafens (Val di Bora) bei Rovigno 
im Jahre 1910. Jena 1910. (Archiv fiir Protistenkunde, Bd. 20, 
p. 176). 

Creve, P. T. On Diatoms from the Arctic Sea. Stockholm 1873. (Bihang 
till K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handlingar, Bd. 1, No. 18). 

- Notes on some Atlantic Plankton-Organisms. Stockholm 1900. (Kongl. 
Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademiens Handlinger, Bd. 34, No. 1). 

Gran, H. H. Das Plankton des Norwegischen Nordmeeres. Bergen 1902. 
(Report on Norw. Fishery- and Marine Investigations, Vol. II, 1902, 
No. 5). 

- Diatomeen.. Kiel 1905. (Nordisches Plankton, XIX). 
Hier die systematische Literatur iiber Diatomeen. 

Jorcensen, E, Protistenplankton aus dem Nordmeere in den Jahren 1897— 
1900. Bergen 1900. (Bergens Museums Aarbog 1900, Nr. 6). 

Kororp, Cx. A. Mutations in Ceratinm. 1909. (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology at 
Harvard College, Bd. 52). - 

= On Peridinium Steinii Jorncrnsen, with a note on the nomenclatures 
of the skeleton of the Peridinidae. Jena 1909. (Archiv fiir Protisten- 
kunde, Bd. 16). 

Loumann, H. Die Coccolithophoridae, eine Monographie. Jena 1902. (Archiv 
f. Protistenkunde, Bd. 1, p. 89). 

- Untersuchungen zur Feststellung des vollstindigen Gehaltes des 
Meeres an Plankton. Kiel 1908. (Wiss. Meeresunt., Abt. Kiel, N. F., 
Bd. 10). 

Osrenretp, C. Nord-Atlantisk Plankton i 1897. Kobenhavn 1898. (lagttagelser 
over Overfladevandets Temperalur, Saltholdighed og Plankton paa 
islandske og gronlandske Skibsrouter i 1897, av C. F. WanpeL og 
C. Osrenretp). 

— Plankton i 1898. Kobenhavn. 1899. (Dieselbe Publikation fiir das 
Jahr 1898). 

= Plankton i 1899. Kobenhavn 1900. (Dieselbe Publikation fiir das 
Jahr 1899). , 


’ 


1 Nur die neueste Literatur und diejenigen ilteren Werke, die im Text speziell 
zitiert wurden, sind hier aufgefiihrt. Sonst wird auf ,,Nordisches Plankton“ 
hingewiesen. 


28 H.H.GRAN. PHYTOPLANKTON, [SEC. ARCT. EXP. FRAM 1898—1902. No. 27.] 


1902, Osrenretp og Pautsen, O. Planktonprover. fra Nord-Atlanterhavet (ca. 58—60° 
n. Br.) samlede i 1899 af dr. kh... V. Steenstrur. Keobenhavn 1902. 
(Meddelelser om Grénland, XXVI). 

1904. Paursen, Ove. Plankton Investigations in th waters round Iceland in 1903. 
Kjobenhavn 1904. (Meddelelser fra Kommissionen for Havunder- 
segelser, Ser. Plankton I, 1). 


1908. —  Peridiniales. Kiel u. Leipzig 1908. (N: cdisches Plankton XVIII). 
Hier die Literatur tiber Peridineen. : 
1909. — Plankton Investigations in the waters round Iceland and in the North 


Atlantic in 1904. Kobenhavn 1909. (Meddelelser fra Kommissionen 
for Havundersogelser. Ser. Plankton, I, 8). 


Gedruckt 24. Februar 1911.